z/OS

Version 2 Release 3

ISPF User's Guide Volume II

IBM

SC19-3628-30
 Note
Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in “Notices” on page
529.

This edition applies to Version 2 Release 3 of z/OS (5650-ZOS) and to all subsequent releases and modifications until
otherwise indicated in new editions.
Last updated: 2019-06-21
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1980, 2019.
US Government Users Restricted Rights – Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with
IBM Corp.
Contents

Figures................................................................................................................. xi

Tables................................................................................................................xxv

Preface............................................................................................................ xxvii
About this document.............................................................................................................................. xxvii
Who should use this document.............................................................................................................. xxvii
What is in this document........................................................................................................................ xxvii
How to read the syntax diagrams.......................................................................................................... xxviii

z/OS information............................................................................................. xxxiii

How to send your comments to IBM.................................................................. xxxv

If you have a technical problem............................................................................................................. xxxv

Summary of changes...................................................................................... xxxvii

Summary of changes for z/OS Version 2 Release 3 (V2R3).................................................................xxxvii
Summary of changes for z/OS Version 2 Release 2 (V2R2).................................................................xxxvii
Summary of changes for z/OS Version 2 Release 1 (V2R1)................................................................xxxviii

What's in the z/OS V2R3 ISPF library?............................................................. xxxix

Chapter 1. Primary Option Menu (POM).................................................................. 1

The Primary Option Menu panel.................................................................................................................. 1
ISPF primary options..............................................................................................................................1
Primary Option Menu action bar choices............................................................................................... 3
Status area on the Primary Option Menu.................................................................................................... 5
Status pull-down.................................................................................................................................... 6
Defining the status area....................................................................................................................... 13

Chapter 2. Settings (option 0)...............................................................................21

ISPF Settings panel fields..........................................................................................................................22
Select options.......................................................................................................................................22
Terminal characteristics.......................................................................................................................24
Print graphics parms............................................................................................................................ 25
General................................................................................................................................................. 27
ISPF Settings panel action bar.................................................................................................................. 28
Specifying log and list defaults and characteristics (the Log/List action bar choice)........................ 30
Working with function keys and keylists (the Function Keys action bar choice)................................ 34
The Function keys pull-down............................................................................................................... 45
Changing default colors (the Colors action bar choice)...................................................................... 46
Specifying ISPF ENVIRON settings (the Environ action bar choice)...................................................52
Specifying shared profile settings (the Environ action bar choice).....................................................53
Specifying workstation parameters (the Workstation action bar choice).......................................... 53
Displaying message, system, user, panel, and screen IDs..................................................................63

Chapter 3. View (option 1)....................................................................................69

View Entry Panel action bar.......................................................................................................................70

iii
 View Entry Panel fields.............................................................................................................................. 70
Browsing a data set................................................................................................................................... 71
Ending browse...................................................................................................................................... 72
Browse primary commands................................................................................................................. 73

Chapter 4. Edit (option 2)..................................................................................... 85

Editing a data set....................................................................................................................................... 85
Edit Entry Panel action bar...................................................................................................................86
Edit Entry Panel fields.......................................................................................................................... 86
Distributed editing..................................................................................................................................... 88
Double-byte character set support........................................................................................................... 89

Chapter 5. Utilities (option 3)............................................................................... 91

Utility Selection Panel action bar.............................................................................................................. 91
Library utility (option 3.1).......................................................................................................................... 91
Library Utility panel action bar............................................................................................................. 92
Library Utility panel fields.................................................................................................................... 92
Library utility options for data sets...................................................................................................... 92
Library utility options for members and library utility member list line commands........................ 101
Data set utility (option 3.2)......................................................................................................................104
Data Set Utility panel action bar........................................................................................................ 104
Data Set Utility panel fields................................................................................................................105
Data set utility options....................................................................................................................... 105
Move/Copy utility (option 3.3).................................................................................................................122
Move/Copy Utility panel action bar....................................................................................................123
Move/Copy Utility panel fields........................................................................................................... 123
Move/Copy utility options.................................................................................................................. 124
Data set list utility (option 3.4)................................................................................................................129
Data Set List Utility panel action bar................................................................................................. 130
Data Set List Utility panel fields.........................................................................................................130
Data set list utility options................................................................................................................. 136
Data set list utility line commands.................................................................................................... 150
Data set list utility primary commands..............................................................................................158
Reset ISPF statistics utility (option 3.5)................................................................................................. 166
Reset ISPF statistics panel action bar...............................................................................................167
Reset ISPF statistics panel fields...................................................................................................... 168
Reset ISPF statistics utility options...................................................................................................168
Hardcopy utility (option 3.6)................................................................................................................... 170
Hardcopy utility panel action bar.......................................................................................................170
Hardcopy utility panel fields.............................................................................................................. 171
Generating and submitting JCL......................................................................................................... 172
Additional batch printing information............................................................................................... 173
Using the TSO/E information center facility...................................................................................... 173
Download data set to workstation utility (option 3.7)............................................................................ 174
Download ISPF C/S component.........................................................................................................175
Download/upload data set.................................................................................................................178
Outlist utility (option 3.8)........................................................................................................................ 179
Outlist Utility panel action bar........................................................................................................... 179
Outlist Utility panel fields...................................................................................................................180
Outlist utility options..........................................................................................................................180
Command table utility (option 3.9)......................................................................................................... 181
Command Table Utility panel fields...................................................................................................182
Scrolling a command table................................................................................................................ 184
Saving a command table....................................................................................................................184
Canceling a command table...............................................................................................................184
Using command table line commands.............................................................................................. 184
Format specifications utility (option 3.11)..............................................................................................185

iv
 Format Specifications panel action bar............................................................................................. 186
Format Specifications panel fields.................................................................................................... 186
Format Specifications panel options................................................................................................. 187
Format selection list commands....................................................................................................... 189
SuperC utility (option 3.12)..................................................................................................................... 190
SuperC Compare Utility panel action bar.......................................................................................... 191
SuperC Compare Utility panel fields..................................................................................................192
SuperC member lists..........................................................................................................................195
Submitting a SuperC job in batch mode............................................................................................ 196
Using the NOLIST listing type in batch mode....................................................................................199
SuperCE utility (option 3.13)................................................................................................................... 199
SuperCE Utility panel action bar........................................................................................................ 200
SuperCE Utility panel fields............................................................................................................... 200
SuperCE Utility primary commands...................................................................................................205
SuperCE utility options.......................................................................................................................206
Search-For utility (option 3.14)...............................................................................................................210
Search-For Utility panel action bar....................................................................................................211
Search-For Utility panel fields........................................................................................................... 211
Specifying additional search strings..................................................................................................213
Search-For strings and keywords...................................................................................................... 213
Search-For member lists................................................................................................................... 214
Submitting a Search-For job in batch mode...................................................................................... 215
Search-ForE utility (option 3.15).............................................................................................................216
Search-ForE Utility panel action bar..................................................................................................217
Search-ForE Utility panel fields......................................................................................................... 217
Search-ForE Utility primary commands............................................................................................ 221
Search-ForE Utility options................................................................................................................ 222
ISPF table utility (option 3.16)................................................................................................................ 223
Table Utility panel action bar............................................................................................................. 224
Table Utility panel fields.....................................................................................................................224
Table utility entry panel options........................................................................................................ 225
Table data set selection list............................................................................................................... 225
Table DD selection list........................................................................................................................227
Edit/browse table panel.....................................................................................................................228
Table output data set selection......................................................................................................... 238
Table utility options............................................................................................................................239
Table export report options............................................................................................................... 240
Export data set attributes.................................................................................................................. 241
Importing data into a table................................................................................................................ 242
Exporting data from a table............................................................................................................... 243
Processing tables that are currently open.........................................................................................243
Line command table support............................................................................................................. 246
z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17).......................................................................................... 247
z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility panel action bar.............................................................................. 248
z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility panel fields..................................................................................... 249
z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility panel options.................................................................................. 250
z/OS UNIX directory list utility line commands................................................................................. 259
z/OS UNIX directory list utility primary commands.......................................................................... 286
z/OS UNIX directory list options panels............................................................................................ 290
z/OS UNIX Mounted File Systems........................................................................................................... 294
z/OS UNIX Mounted File Systems panel action bar.......................................................................... 296
z/OS UNIX Mounted File Systems panel fields................................................................................. 299
z/OS UNIX mounted file systems line commands............................................................................ 299
z/OS UNIX mounted file systems primary commands......................................................................306
Creating a new zFS............................................................................................................................. 309
zFS aggregates................................................................................................................................... 311
Switching to super-user (UID 0) mode and back....................................................................................315
Switching UIDs with the Options pull-down menu........................................................................... 316

v
 Switching UIDs with the SU primary command................................................................................ 316

Chapter 6. Foreground (option 4)........................................................................317

Foreground selection panel action bar................................................................................................... 317
Foreground processing sequence........................................................................................................... 318
Expanding packed data........................................................................................................................... 320
Member expansion (ISRLEMX)................................................................................................................321
Restrictions on member expansion and member parts lists............................................................ 322
Member expansion ISRSCAN and ISRLEMX return codes................................................................323
Trigger statement errors.................................................................................................................... 324
Input data sets.........................................................................................................................................324
List data sets............................................................................................................................................325
Password protection................................................................................................................................326
Object data sets.......................................................................................................................................326
Foreground—TSO/E information center facility...................................................................................... 326
Assembler (option 4.1)............................................................................................................................327
COBOL (option 4.2)..................................................................................................................................328
VS FORTRAN compile (option 4.3).......................................................................................................... 328
PL/I (option 4.5)...................................................................................................................................... 329
VS Pascal compile (option 4.6)............................................................................................................... 330
Binder/linkage editor (option 4.7)...........................................................................................................331
Linkage editor concatenation sequence............................................................................................332
SCRIPT/VS processor (option 4.9).......................................................................................................... 333
SCRIPT/VS processing sequence...................................................................................................... 333
Selecting a formatting style............................................................................................................... 336
Changing style options.......................................................................................................................337
Using SCRIPT/VS with the TSO/E information center facility........................................................... 337
VS COBOL II interactive debug (option 4.10)......................................................................................... 338
OS/VS COBOL debug (option 4.10A).......................................................................................................338
COBOL debug processing sequence..................................................................................................339
Symbolic debug data sets..................................................................................................................340
Print output data sets........................................................................................................................ 340
FORTRAN debug (option 4.11)................................................................................................................341
Member parts list (option 4.12).............................................................................................................. 341
Member not found..............................................................................................................................344
C/370 compile (option 4.13)................................................................................................................... 345
REXX/370 compile (option 4.14)............................................................................................................ 345
Ada/370 compile (option 4.15)...............................................................................................................345
AD/Cycle C/370 compile (option 4.16)................................................................................................... 345
ISPDTLC (option 4.18)............................................................................................................................. 345
OS/390 C/C++ compile (option 4.19)..................................................................................................... 346

Chapter 7. Batch (option 5)................................................................................ 347

Batch selection panel action bar.............................................................................................................347
Batch processing sequence.................................................................................................................... 348
JCL generation—compilers......................................................................................................................350
JCL generation—assemblers and linkage editor.....................................................................................351
Assembler (option 5.1)............................................................................................................................351
COBOL compile (option 5.2)....................................................................................................................352
VS FORTRAN compile (option 5.3).......................................................................................................... 353
PL/I compile (option 5.5)........................................................................................................................ 354
VS Pascal compile (option 5.6)............................................................................................................... 355
Binder/linkage editor (option 5.7)...........................................................................................................356
VS COBOL II interactive debug (option 5.10)......................................................................................... 357
Member parts list (option 5.12).............................................................................................................. 357
C/370 compile (option 5.13)................................................................................................................... 358
REXX/370 compile (option 5.14)............................................................................................................ 358

vi
 Ada/370 compile (option 5.15)...............................................................................................................358
AD/Cycle C/370 compile (option 5.16)................................................................................................... 358
ISPDTLC compile (option 5.18)............................................................................................................... 358
OS/390 C/C++ compile (option 5.19)..................................................................................................... 359

Chapter 8. Command (option 6)..........................................................................361

ISPF command shell panel action bar.................................................................................................... 361
The saved command area....................................................................................................................... 362
Entering TSO commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs.............................................................................. 363
Rules for entering TSO commands.................................................................................................... 363
Rules for entering CLISTs and REXX EXECs...................................................................................... 363
Using the session manager..................................................................................................................... 364

Chapter 9. Dialog test (option 7)......................................................................... 365

The dialog test environment....................................................................................................................365
Dialog test primary option panel action bar...................................................................................... 367
Using variables.........................................................................................................................................367
Severe error handling.............................................................................................................................. 368
Commands............................................................................................................................................... 368
Ending the current option without saving changes........................................................................... 370
Saving changes...................................................................................................................................370
Finding a character string.................................................................................................................. 370
Displaying breakpoint qualification data........................................................................................... 370
Restoring the format of the Breakpoints panel................................................................................. 370
Dialog test line commands.................................................................................................................370
Setting a keylist for dialog test...........................................................................................................371
Functions (option 7.1)............................................................................................................................. 372
Invoke dialog function/selection panel action bar............................................................................372
Invoke dialog panel fields.................................................................................................................. 373
Panels (option 7.2).................................................................................................................................. 375
Display panel action bar.....................................................................................................................375
Display panel fields............................................................................................................................ 376
Variables (Option 7.3)..............................................................................................................................377
Variables panel action bar................................................................................................................. 378
Variables panel fields......................................................................................................................... 379
Variables commands..........................................................................................................................379
Manipulating variables....................................................................................................................... 380
Variables usage notes........................................................................................................................ 380
Tables (option 7.4)...................................................................................................................................381
Tables panel action bar...................................................................................................................... 382
Tables panel fields............................................................................................................................. 383
Tables panel options.......................................................................................................................... 384
Log (option 7.5)........................................................................................................................................393
ISPF transaction log not available..................................................................................................... 394
Trace output in ispf log.......................................................................................................................394
Dialog services (option 7.6).....................................................................................................................395
Invoke dialog service panel action bar.............................................................................................. 396
Special display panel......................................................................................................................... 397
Traces (option 7.7)...................................................................................................................................398
1—function traces.............................................................................................................................. 399
2—variable traces...............................................................................................................................400
Breakpoints (option 7.8)..........................................................................................................................401
Specifying breakpoints.......................................................................................................................402
Breakpoints panel action bar.............................................................................................................402
Breakpoints panel fields.................................................................................................................... 403
Qualification parameter values..........................................................................................................404
Finding a breakpoint.......................................................................................................................... 405

vii
 Tutorial (option 7.T)................................................................................................................................. 407
Exit (option 7.X)....................................................................................................................................... 408

Chapter 10. IBM products (option 9)................................................................... 409

Chapter 11. SCLM (option 10)............................................................................. 411

SCLM Main Menu action bar.................................................................................................................... 411
SCLM overview.........................................................................................................................................412

Chapter 12. ISPF object/action workplace (option 11)........................................ 413

Selecting objects..................................................................................................................................... 413
Workplace entry panel....................................................................................................................... 413
Specifying actions....................................................................................................................................415
Choices on the Workplace action bar................................................................................................ 416
Actions that require prompt windows for more information............................................................ 426
Commands......................................................................................................................................... 432
Default CUA function key settings..................................................................................................... 434
Changing workplace settings............................................................................................................. 435
Workplace example scenario.............................................................................................................439

Appendix A. SuperC reference........................................................................... 443

Utility differences.....................................................................................................................................443
Standard utilities................................................................................................................................ 443
Extended utilities............................................................................................................................... 443
Program description................................................................................................................................ 444
SuperC features for the year 2000 transition................................................................................... 445
Applications............................................................................................................................................. 445
Process options....................................................................................................................................... 446
Process statements................................................................................................................................. 457
Change listing value........................................................................................................................... 459
Change text........................................................................................................................................ 459
Comment lines................................................................................................................................... 460
Compare byte offsets.........................................................................................................................461
Compare (search) columns................................................................................................................462
Compare lines.................................................................................................................................... 463
Compare sections.............................................................................................................................. 464
Define column headings.................................................................................................................... 466
Do not process lines...........................................................................................................................467
Exclude data.......................................................................................................................................469
Focus on data..................................................................................................................................... 469
Line count........................................................................................................................................... 470
List columns....................................................................................................................................... 470
List previous-search-following value.................................................................................................471
Revision code reference.....................................................................................................................471
Search strings in the input file........................................................................................................... 471
Select PDS members..........................................................................................................................473
Statements file listing control............................................................................................................474
Title alternative listing....................................................................................................................... 474
Work size............................................................................................................................................ 475
Year aging........................................................................................................................................... 475
Date definitions.................................................................................................................................. 476
Global date......................................................................................................................................... 478
Reasons for differing comparison results............................................................................................... 479
Return codes............................................................................................................................................480
SuperC and search-for technical overview............................................................................................. 481
How SuperC and search-for filter input file lines.............................................................................. 481
How SuperC matches input files........................................................................................................482

viii
 How SuperC partitions and processes large files..............................................................................483
Comparing and searching alias members......................................................................................... 484
Comparing load modules................................................................................................................... 484
Comparing CSECTs.............................................................................................................................485
How to directly invoke SuperC and search-for..................................................................................485

Appendix B. Understanding the listings.............................................................. 489

General listing format.............................................................................................................................. 489
How to view the listing output.................................................................................................................489
The comparison listing............................................................................................................................ 489
Page headings.................................................................................................................................... 490
Listing output section.........................................................................................................................490
Member summary section................................................................................................................. 492
Overall summary section................................................................................................................... 494
Examples of comparison listings....................................................................................................... 496
The search listing.....................................................................................................................................501
Page heading...................................................................................................................................... 501
Source lines section........................................................................................................................... 502
Summary section............................................................................................................................... 505
Examples of search listings............................................................................................................... 506

Appendix C. Update files....................................................................................511

Revision file..............................................................................................................................................511
Revision file (2)........................................................................................................................................ 512
Update CMS sequenced 8 file................................................................................................................. 513
Update control files................................................................................................................................. 514
Update control file (LINE Compare Type)..........................................................................................514
Update control file (WORD compare type)........................................................................................ 515
Update control file (BYTE compare type).......................................................................................... 516
Update long control................................................................................................................................. 517
Update MVS sequenced 8 file................................................................................................................. 518
Update prefixed delta lines..................................................................................................................... 519
Update sequenced 0 file..........................................................................................................................520
Update summary only files......................................................................................................................520
Update summary only file (LINE compare type)............................................................................... 521
Update summary only file (WORD compare type)............................................................................ 522
Update summary only file (BYTE compare type).............................................................................. 523

Appendix D. Accessibility...................................................................................525
Accessibility features.............................................................................................................................. 525
Consult assistive technologies................................................................................................................ 525
Keyboard navigation of the user interface.............................................................................................. 525
Dotted decimal syntax diagrams.............................................................................................................525

Notices..............................................................................................................529
Terms and conditions for product documentation................................................................................. 530
IBM Online Privacy Statement................................................................................................................ 531
Policy for unsupported hardware............................................................................................................531
Minimum supported hardware................................................................................................................ 532
Programming Interface Information.......................................................................................................532
Trademarks.............................................................................................................................................. 532

Index................................................................................................................ 533

ix
x
Figures

1. Sample syntax diagram.............................................................................................................................xxix

2. ISPF Primary Option Menu (ISR@PRIM)...................................................................................................... 1

3. Status pull-down on the ISPF Primary Option Menu (ISR@PRIM).............................................................. 6

4. ISPF Primary Option Menu status area – session view................................................................................ 7

5. System information pop-up.......................................................................................................................... 8

6. Environment pop-up (release information).................................................................................................. 9

7. ISPF Primary Option Menu status area – function keys view.................................................................... 10

8. ISPF Primary Option Menu status area – calendar view............................................................................10

9. Julian date pop-up...................................................................................................................................... 11

10. Standard date pop-up...............................................................................................................................12

11. ISPF Primary Option Menu status area – user status view......................................................................12

12. ISPF Primary Option Menu status area – user point-and-shoot view..................................................... 13

13. ISPF status pop-up (ISPSAMMN)............................................................................................................. 13

14. Status pull-down in ISPF status pop-up.................................................................................................. 14

15. Options pull-down in ISPF status pop-up................................................................................................ 15

16. Calendar month pop-up window.............................................................................................................. 15

17. Calendar year pop-up window..................................................................................................................16

18. Calendar start pop-up window................................................................................................................. 16

19. Calendar time format pop-up window..................................................................................................... 17

20. Calendar colors panel (ISPCALGC)........................................................................................................... 17

21. User view customization panel (ISPSAMUS)............................................................................................18

22. User point-and-shoot panel (ISPSAMUP)................................................................................................ 18

23. ISPF Settings panel (ISPISMMN)............................................................................................................. 21

xi
 24. Screen containing graphics to be printed using PRINTG......................................................................... 26

25. Example of using aspect ratio parameter 0............................................................................................. 27

26. Example of using aspect ratio parameter 1............................................................................................. 27

27. Log Data Set Defaults panel (ISPISML1).................................................................................................. 30

28. List Data Set Defaults panel (ISPISML2)..................................................................................................31

29. List Data Set Characteristics panel (ISPISML3)....................................................................................... 32

30. Log and List JCL panel (ISPISMLJ)........................................................................................................... 34

31. Function keys pull-down on the ISPF settings panel action bar (ISPISMMN)........................................ 36

32. PF Key Definitions and Labels panel (ISPOPT3D)....................................................................................37

33. Using the PF Key Definitions and Labels panel (ISPOPT3E)....................................................................38

34. Example screen with function key definition lines...................................................................................38

35. Keylist Utility panel (ISPKLUP)................................................................................................................. 39

36. Keylist Create panel (ISPKLUCR)..............................................................................................................40

37. Keylist Change panel (ISPKLUCH)............................................................................................................ 41

38. Keylist utility view panel (ISPKLUB)......................................................................................................... 43

39. Keylist utility with delete keylist confirmation pop-up (ISPKLUP).......................................................... 43

40. Tailor Function Key Definition Display panel (ISPOPFA)..........................................................................44

41. Global Color Change Utility panel (ISPOPT10)........................................................................................ 47

42. Global GUI color change utility panel (ISPOPTG1).................................................................................. 48

43. Color change panel with drop-down list.................................................................................................. 49

44. CUA Attribute Change Utility panel (ISPOPT11)...................................................................................... 50

45. CUA Attribute Change Utility panel positioned on the point-and-shoot panel element (ISPOPT1X).... 51

46. ISPF ENVIRON Settings panel (ISPENVA)................................................................................................52

47. Multi-Logon Profile Sharing Settings (ISPISSA)....................................................................................... 53

48. Workstation pull-down on the ISPF settings panel action bar (ISPISMMN)...........................................53

xii
49. The Workstation Agent window................................................................................................................54

50. Initiate Workstation Connection panel (ISPISMGI)................................................................................. 55

51. WSA connection panel.............................................................................................................................. 57

52. Client/Server Component Update panel (ISPDTVD1)..............................................................................58

53. Client/Server Component Install Program panel (ISPWSD0A)............................................................... 59

54. GUI settings pop-up window (ISPISMGS)................................................................................................59

55. ISPF Workstation Tool Integration panel................................................................................................. 61

56. Modify Tool Configuration window........................................................................................................... 62

57. Extension Mapping Dialog window........................................................................................................... 63

58. Identifier pull-down on the ispf settings panel action bar (ISPISMMN)................................................. 64

59. Panel displayed with the message identifier set to on............................................................................ 64

60. Panel displayed with the system name set to on.....................................................................................65

61. Panel displayed with the user ID set to on...............................................................................................65

62. Panel displayed with the panel identifier set to on..................................................................................66

63. Panel displayed with the screen identifier set to on................................................................................ 67

64. View Entry panel (ISRBRO01).................................................................................................................. 69

65. Browse data display panelBrowse - data display (ISRBROBA)...............................................................72

66. Browse - column-identification line (ISRBROBA)....................................................................................74

69. Browse hexadecimal display - vertical (ISRBROBA)............................................................................... 82

70. Browse hexadecimal display - data (ISRBROBA).................................................................................... 83

71. Edit Entry panel (ISREDM01)Edit Entry Panel......................................................................................... 85

72. Utility Selection Panel (ISRUTIL)..............................................................................................................91

73. Library Utility panel (ISRUDA1)Library Utility panel................................................................................ 92

74. Member list commands pop-up window (ISRCMLEP)............................................................................. 93

75. Data Set Information panel (ISRUAIP)Data Set Information panellong format..................................... 95

xiii
 76. Volume Information for a Multivolume Data Set (ISRUAMVI).................................................................95

77. Data Set Information for PDSE Managed Data Sets (ISRUAISE).............................................................96

78. Data Set Information for Managed Data Sets (ISRUAISE)Data Set Information panellong format
for managed data sets............................................................................................................................... 97

79. Volume Information for a Managed Multivolume Data Set (ISRUAMVI)................................................. 98

80. Short data set information (ISRUAIP)...................................................................................................... 99

81. Data Set Information (Short) for Managed Data Sets (ISRUAISE)........................................................ 100

82. Data Set Information (Short) for a PDSE (ISRUAISE)............................................................................ 101

83. Data Set Utility panel (ISRUDA2S)......................................................................................................... 104

84. Allocate New Data Set panel (ISRUAAP2)............................................................................................. 106

85. Allocate New Data Set —managed data set support panel (ISRUAASE).............................................. 107

86. Multivolume allocation panel (ISRUAMV).............................................................................................. 111

87. Allocation Error Panel (ISRUADCS)........................................................................................................ 112

88. Confirm Delete panel (ISRUADC1)......................................................................................................... 115

89. Confirm purge panel (ISRUADC3).......................................................................................................... 115

90. VSAM Utilities panel (ISRUVSAM).......................................................................................................... 118

91. Define Cluster panel (ISRUVPC3)...........................................................................................................119

92. Editing the IDCAMS command (ISRUVEDT)...........................................................................................120

93. Browsing IDCAMS Errors (ISRUVBRO)...................................................................................................121

94. Using a VSAM profile data set (ISRVMLGT)............................................................................................122

95. Panel for changing the name of the VSAM profile data set (ISRUVGET)...............................................122

96. Move/Copy Utility panel (ISRUMC1).......................................................................................................123

97. Move/Copy Utility - "To" panel for copying (ISRUMC2B).......................................................................125

98. Move/Copy Utility - "To" panel for moving (ISRUMC2B)........................................................................127

99. Data Set List Utility panel (ISRUDLP)..................................................................................................... 130

100. Sequence of data set list display views............................................................................................... 133

xiv
101. Data set list - volume view (ISRUDSL0)............................................................................................... 137

102. Data set list - space view (ISRUDSL0)................................................................................................. 138

103. Data set list - attributes view (ISRUDSL0)........................................................................................... 139

104. Data set list - total view (ISRUDSL0)....................................................................................................139

105. Data set list - total view with catalog name (ISRUDSL0).................................................................... 139

106. VTOC summary information panel (ISRUDSLV)...................................................................................149

107. Data set list commands pop-up (ISRUDABC)...................................................................................... 152

108. Member list display - expanded line command field (ISRUDSM)....................................................... 154

109. Load module library display - expanded line command field (ISRUDSM).......................................... 154

110. Data Set List Color Change Utility panel (ISRDLCP)............................................................................ 160

111. Data Set List Utility - SHOWCMD panel (ISRUDSLS)........................................................................... 163

112. Reset ISPF Statistics panel (ISRURSP)................................................................................................ 167

113. Hardcopy Utility panel - before JCL generation (ISRUHCP)................................................................ 170

114. Hardcopy Utility panel - after JCL generation (ISRUHCJP)................................................................. 172

115. Hardcopy Utility panel - with the TSO/E information center facility installed (ISRUHCPI)................174

116. ISPF Client/Server Component Download panel (ISPWSD01)........................................................... 175

117. ISPF Client/Server Installation Notice (ISPWSD03)........................................................................... 177

118. ISPF Client/Server Component Install Program panel (ISPWSD06).................................................. 177

119. ISPF data set panel (ISPUDLDS).......................................................................................................... 178

120. Outlist Utility panel (ISRUOLP1).......................................................................................................... 179

121. Command Table Utility panel (ISPUCMA)............................................................................................ 182

122. Command table editing panel (ISPUCMD)...........................................................................................182

123. Format Specifications panel (ISRFM01).............................................................................................. 186

124. Format Definition panel (ISRFM02)..................................................................................................... 187

125. Copy Format Selection List panel (ISRFM04)...................................................................................... 188

xv
 126. Format Selection List panel (ISRFM03)............................................................................................... 189

127. SuperC Utility panel (ISRSSNEW)........................................................................................................ 191

128. SuperC Utility - Old Data Set panel (ISRSSOLD)..................................................................................193

129. SuperC member list panel (ISRSSML)..................................................................................................196

130. SuperC Utility - Submit Batch Jobs panel (ISRSCSUB)....................................................................... 197

131. SuperC Utility - submit batch jobs panel using NOLIST (ISRSCSB1)..................................................199

132. SuperCE Utility panel (ISRSEPRI)........................................................................................................ 200

133. SuperCE - concatenation interactive entry panel (ISRSECAT)............................................................204

134. SuperCE - Concatenation Batch Entry panel (ISRSECAT)................................................................... 205

135. SuperC process statements panel (ISRSEPRS)................................................................................... 207

136. Browse a SuperCE profile..................................................................................................................... 208

137. SuperCE - Profile Manager panel (ISRSEPMG).................................................................................... 209

138. SuperC - Defaults panel (ISRSDFLT)....................................................................................................210

139. Search-For Utility panel (ISRSFSPR)....................................................................................................211

140. Additional Search Strings panel (ISRSFSST)....................................................................................... 213

141. Search member list panel (ISRSSML).................................................................................................. 215

142. Search-For Utility - Submit Batch Jobs panel (ISRSFSUB)................................................................. 216

143. Extended Search-For Utility panel (ISRSFPRI)....................................................................................217

144. Extended Search-For - concatenation data set entry panel (ISRSFCON)...........................................220

145. Extended Search-For - concatenation batch entry panel (ISRSFCON)...............................................221

146. Search-For process statements panel (ISRSFPRS).............................................................................223

147. ISPF Table Utility panel (ISRUTBP0)....................................................................................................224

148. Table data set selection list panel (ISRUTBP1)................................................................................... 226

149. Table DD selection list panel (ISRUTBP2)........................................................................................... 227

150. Table display panel, edit mode (ISRUTBP3)........................................................................................228

xvi
151. Extension Variables Panel (ISRUTBP4)............................................................................................... 230

152. Table Export Layout panel (ISRUTBP7)............................................................................................... 232

153. Table Sort Specification panel (ISRUTBP8)......................................................................................... 235

154. Table statistics panel (ISRUTBP6)....................................................................................................... 236

155. Table structure panel (ISRUTBP5)....................................................................................................... 237

156. Table Output Data Set Selection panel (ISRUTBP9)........................................................................... 239

157. Table Export Report Options panel (ISRUTBO2)................................................................................. 240

158. Table Export Data Set Attributes panel (ISRUTBO3)...........................................................................241

159. Export report example..........................................................................................................................243

160. Panel displayed when the selected table is currently open but not in SHARE mode.........................244

161. Panel displayed when the selected table is currently open in SHARE mode for NOWRITE.............. 244

162. Panel displayed when the selected table is currently open in SHARE mode for WRITE....................245

163. ISPF EDIT Line Command Table (LINECMD)....................................................................................... 246

164. z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility panel (ISRUULP)................................................................................248

165. z/OS UNIX Directory List panel (ISRUUDL0)........................................................................................251

166. z/OS UNIX Directory List—scrolling right............................................................................................. 251

167. Example: specifying a z/OS UNIX command to run on a selected file................................................257

168. Example: running the selected file directly......................................................................................... 258

169. Example: specifying a REXX exec to run on a selected file................................................................. 258

170. z/OS UNIX Directory List Actions pop-up window...............................................................................260

171. Modify z/OS UNIX File Auditor Audit Options panel (ISRUULAA)....................................................... 260

172. Copy From z/OS UNIX File panel (ISRUULCF)..................................................................................... 261

173. Copy From z/OS UNIX Directory panel (ISRUULCD)............................................................................263

174. Replace z/OS UNIX File panel (ISRUULRF)..........................................................................................265

175. Copy Into z/OS UNIX Directory panel (ISRUULRD)............................................................................. 267

xvii
 176. z/OS UNIX File System Attributes panel (ISRUULFS)..........................................................................270

177. z/OS UNIX File Information panel (ISRUULIN)....................................................................................272

178. z/OS UNIX Symbolic Link Information panel (ISRUULIS)................................................................... 275

179. Modify z/OS UNIX ACL list panel (ISRUULMA).....................................................................................277

180. Modify z/OS UNIX File Format panel (ISRUULMF).............................................................................. 278

181. Modify z/OS UNIX File Owning Group panel (ISRUULMG).................................................................. 279

182. Modify z/OS UNIX File Owning User panel (ISRUULMO).....................................................................281

183. Create New z/OS UNIX File panel (ISRUULNW).................................................................................. 282

184. Personal Data Set List Add pop-up panel............................................................................................ 284

185. Modify z/OS UNIX File User Audit Options panel (ISRUULUA)............................................................284

186. z/OS UNIX Mounted File Systems panel (ISRUUMT0), ordered by file system name........................295

187. z/OS UNIX Mounted File Systems panel (ISRUUMT0), ordered by mount point name......................296

188. z/OS UNIX Mount Table List Options panel (ISRUMNO1)................................................................... 297

189. Mount Table Column Arrangement panel (ISRUMNO2)...................................................................... 298

190. Mounted File Systems List Actions pop-up window............................................................................300

191. z/OS UNIX Directory List panel (ISRUUDL0)........................................................................................302

192. Select the Attribute to Change panel (ISRUMATR)..............................................................................302

193. Mode Change Confirmation panel (ISRUCHGM)..................................................................................303

194. Set Automove Attribute panel (ISRUSAMA)........................................................................................ 304

195. Release From Quiesce Status panel (ISRURFQS)................................................................................305

196. Unmount a z/OS UNIX File System panel (ISRUMNUM)..................................................................... 306

197. Mount z/OS UNIX File System panel (ISRUMNMT)............................................................................. 308

198. Create a zFS Aggregate and File System panel (ISRUUFS4)...............................................................310

199. Attached zFS Aggregates panel (ISRUUZ01).......................................................................................311

200. Aggregate Attributes panel (ISRUUZ11)..............................................................................................312

xviii
201. Extend Aggregate panel (ISRUUZ07)...................................................................................................313

202. File System List panel (ISRUUZ03)...................................................................................................... 314

203. File System Attributes panel (ISRUUZ10)........................................................................................... 315

204. Foreground Selection Panel (ISRFPA)..................................................................................................317

205. Foreground Print Options panel (ISRFPPRT)....................................................................................... 320

206. Foreground Print Options panel with TSO/E information center facility (ISRFPPRI)......................... 327

207. Foreground Assembler panel (ISRFP01)............................................................................................. 327

208. Foreground COBOL Compile panel (ISRFP02).....................................................................................328

209. Foreground VS FORTRAN Compile panel (ISRFP03)...........................................................................329

210. Foreground PL/I Optimizing Compile panel (ISRFP05).......................................................................330

211. Foreground VS Pascal Compile panel (ISRFP06)................................................................................ 331

212. Foreground Binder/Linkage Editor panel (ISRFP07B).........................................................................331

213. SCRIPT/VS Processor panel (ISRFP09)............................................................................................... 333

214. Foreground Print Options for Style panel (ISRFP09P)........................................................................ 335

215. Select SCRIPT/VS Formatting Style panel (ISRFP09T)....................................................................... 336

216. SCRIPT/VS Options for Style: DRAFT panel (ISRFP09O).................................................................... 337

217. Foreground Print Options for Style panel with the TSO/E information center facility (ISRFP09I).... 338

218. COBOL Debug panel (ISRFP10A)......................................................................................................... 339

219. FORTRAN Debug panel (ISRFP11).......................................................................................................341

220. Foreground Member Parts List panel (ISRFP12).................................................................................342

221. Member parts list display (ISRFP12B).................................................................................................343

222. Foreground ISPDTLC compile panel (ISPCP01) Screen 1................................................................... 346

223. Batch Selection panel (ISRJPA)........................................................................................................... 347

224. Batch Selection Panel with JCL generated (ISRJPB).......................................................................... 349

225. Batch Assembler panel (ISRJP01).......................................................................................................352

xix
 226. Batch COBOL Compile panel (ISRJP02).............................................................................................. 353

227. Batch VS FORTRAN Compile panel (ISRJP03).................................................................................... 354

228. Batch PL/I Compile panel (ISRJP05)................................................................................................... 355

229. Batch VS Pascal Compile panel (ISRJP06).......................................................................................... 355

230. Batch Binder Linkage/Editor panel (ISRJP07B).................................................................................. 356

231. VS COBOL II Interactive Debug panel (ISRJP10)................................................................................357

232. Batch Member Parts List panel (ISRJP12)...........................................................................................358

233. ISPF Command Shell panel (ISRTSO)..................................................................................................361

234. ISPF Command Shell panel with saved commands (ISRTSO)............................................................ 363

235. Dialog test primary option panel (ISPYXD1)........................................................................................366

236. Keylist change panel (ISPKLUCH)........................................................................................................ 371

237. Invoke Dialog Function/Selection panel (ISPYFP)...............................................................................372

238. Display panel (ISPYP1).........................................................................................................................375

239. Message display panel (ISPYP2)..........................................................................................................377

240. Variables panel (ISPYVPN)................................................................................................................... 378

241. Tables panel (ISPYTPI).........................................................................................................................382

242. Display row panel (ISPYTPD)............................................................................................................... 385

243. Confirm table row delete panel (ISPYTPCD)....................................................................................... 386

244. Modify row panel (ISPYTPM)................................................................................................................387

245. Add row panel (ISPYTPA)..................................................................................................................... 389

246. Structure of table panel (ISPYTPSR)....................................................................................................390

247. Status of table panel with table not open (ISPYTPS1)........................................................................ 391

248. Status of table panel with table open (ISPYTPS1).............................................................................. 392

249. ISPF transaction log (ISPYLP1)............................................................................................................394

250. Invoke dialog service panel (ISPYS1).................................................................................................. 396

xx
251. Special display panel (ISPYS2)............................................................................................................ 398

252. Traces panel (ISPYRI1)........................................................................................................................ 398

253. Function traces panel (ISPYRFP)......................................................................................................... 399

254. Variable traces panel (ISPYRVP).......................................................................................................... 400

255. Breakpoints panel (ISPYBP1).............................................................................................................. 402

256. Breakpoints panel with qualification parameter values (ISPYBP2)....................................................404

257. Breakpoint Primary Option panel (ISPYXM1)...................................................................................... 406

258. Dialog Test Tutorial - first panel (ISP70000)....................................................................................... 408

259. Additional IBM Program Development Products Panel (ISRDIIS)......................................................409

260. SCLM Main Menu (FLMDMN)SCLM Primary Option Menu................................................................... 411

261. Workplace entry panel - library view (ISRWORK1)............................................................................. 414

262. Workplace entry panel - data set view (ISRWORK).............................................................................415

263. Reset statistics panel (ISRURSET)....................................................................................................... 427

264. TSO command panel (ISRUTCES)........................................................................................................ 428

265. WS command panel (ISRUWCES)........................................................................................................ 428

266. ISPF Command Shell panel (ISRTSO)..................................................................................................429

267. Move panel (ISRUMVC).........................................................................................................................430

268. Rename prompt panel (ISRURNAM).................................................................................................... 431

269. Rename data set panel (ISRUARP1).................................................................................................... 432

270. Rename member panel (ISRUREN)..................................................................................................... 432

271. Workplace Settings panel (ISRUSETM)................................................................................................436

272. Priority for filtering input lines..............................................................................................................482

273. Find match example............................................................................................................................. 483

274. Example of page heading lines for the comparison listing..................................................................490

275. Example of the listing output section of the comparison listing......................................................... 490

xxi
 276. Example of the member summary section of the comparison listing.................................................493

277. Example of the overall summary section of the comparison listing................................................... 494

278. Example of comparison listing with dates being compared................................................................496

279. Example of comparison listing with column headings (Using COLHEAD)...........................................497

280. Example of a NARROW side-by-side listing.........................................................................................497

281. Example of a NARROW side-by-side listing (with DLMDUP)............................................................... 498

282. Example of a WIDE side-by-side listing............................................................................................... 498

283. Example of a FILE comparison of a file group..................................................................................... 499

284. Example of a FILE comparison of a file group (with LOCS)................................................................. 500

285. Example of a WORD comparison..........................................................................................................501

286. Example of the page heading line for the search listing......................................................................501

287. Example of the source lines section of a search listing.......................................................................502

288. Example of the IDPFX source lines section of a search listing........................................................... 503

289. Example of the LMTO source lines section of a search listing............................................................ 503

290. Example of the XREF source lines section (with ANYC)...................................................................... 504

291. Example of the summary section of a search listing........................................................................... 505

292. Example of the XREF summary section of a search listing................................................................. 505

293. Example of the search listing (single file)............................................................................................ 506

294. Example of IDPFX search on file group................................................................................................507

295. Example of XREF search on file group for two strings.........................................................................507

296. Example of LMTO search on file group.................................................................................................508

297. Example of XREF/LMTO search of file group....................................................................................... 508

298. Example of LTO search on file group....................................................................................................509

299. Example of LPSF search on file group..................................................................................................509

300. The “Old” input file used in most of the update examples................................................................. 511

xxii
301. The “New” input file used in most of the update examples................................................................511

302. Example of a UPDREV update file for SCRIPT/VS documents............................................................ 512

303. Example of a UPDREV update file for bookmaster documents...........................................................512

304. Example of a UPDCMS8 update file..................................................................................................... 513

305. Example of a UPDCNTL update file using line compare type.............................................................. 514

306. Example of a UPDCNTL update file using WORD compare type......................................................... 515

307. Example of a UPDCNTL update file using BYTE compare type........................................................... 516

308. Example of a UPDLDEL update file.......................................................................................................518

309. Example of a UPDMVS8 update file..................................................................................................... 518

310. Example of a UPDPDEL update file...................................................................................................... 519

311. Example of a UPDSEQ0 update file......................................................................................................520

312. Example of a UPDSUMO file using LINE compare type....................................................................... 521

313. Example of a UPDSUMO file using WORD compare type.................................................................... 522

314. Example of a UPDSUMO file using BYTE compare type...................................................................... 523

xxiii
xxiv
Tables

1. CUA mode effect on panel display..............................................................................................................23

2. CUA mode effect on top-row-displayed indicator......................................................................................23

3. ISPKYLST key settings................................................................................................................................ 34

4. ISPHELP key settings.................................................................................................................................. 35

5. Default key settings.....................................................................................................................................40

6. Displaying forms of the function keys.........................................................................................................46

7. Valid CUA attribute change values..............................................................................................................50

8. Valid point-and-shoot change values......................................................................................................... 52

9. TSO command/CLIST/REXX exec variables (output)............................................................................... 146

10. TSO command/CLIST/REXX exec additional variables (output)........................................................... 148

11. TSO command/CLIST/REXX exec variables (input)............................................................................... 148

12. Sort fields for source libraries................................................................................................................ 164

13. SRCHFOR command search string examples........................................................................................ 165

14. Reset mod level and reset sequence numbers combinations...............................................................169

15. Search-For process options....................................................................................................................222

16. ISPF EDIT Line Command Table Description.........................................................................................246

17. Octal permission values..........................................................................................................................255

18. Sort field names and associated sort sequence.................................................................................... 290

19. Expansion triggers and syntax................................................................................................................321

20. ISRSCAN return codes............................................................................................................................323

21. ISRLEMX return codes............................................................................................................................ 323

22. Foreground member parts list record formats.......................................................................................344

23. ISRSCAN return codes............................................................................................................................350

xxv
 24. ISRLEMX return codes............................................................................................................................ 351

25. Primary commands.................................................................................................................................368

26. Line commands.......................................................................................................................................369

27. Workplace commands............................................................................................................................ 433

28. Workplace function key settings............................................................................................................ 434

29. Summary of process options.................................................................................................................. 446

30. Summary of process statements............................................................................................................457

31. SuperC return codes............................................................................................................................... 480

32. UPDCNTL update file format using LINE compare type........................................................................ 515

33. UPDCNTL update file format using WORD compare type......................................................................516

34. UPDCNTL update file format using BYTE compare type........................................................................517

35. UPDSUMO format using LINE compare type......................................................................................... 521

36. UPDSUMO format using WORD compare type.......................................................................................522

37. UPDSUMO format using BYTE compare type.........................................................................................523

xxvi
Preface
This document provides reference and usage information for programmers who develop applications with
ISPF. It also provides conceptual and functional descriptions of ISPF.

About this document

This document contains two parts.
The first part provides information about using ISPF options 0-11.
The second part contains the appendixes and provides:
• Descriptions of the SuperC and Search-For programs
• Descriptions and examples of the SuperC output listing formats.

Who should use this document

This document is for application programmers using ISPF. Users should be familiar with coding CLISTs,
REXX EXECs, or programs in the MVS™ environment.

What is in this document

Chapter 1, “Primary Option Menu (POM),” on page 1 describes the ISPF Primary Option menu,
including the main menu options and the status area.
Chapter 2, “Settings (option 0),” on page 21 describes the ISPF Settings panel and related pop-up
windows.
Chapter 3, “View (option 1),” on page 69 describes how Browse (Option 1) allows you to display source
data and listings stored in ISPF libraries or other partitioned or sequential data sets.
Chapter 4, “Edit (option 2),” on page 85 describes how Edit (Option 2) allows you to create, display, and
change data stored in ISPF libraries or other partitioned or sequential data sets.
Chapter 5, “Utilities (option 3),” on page 91 describes the different functions for library, data set, and
catalog maintenance.
Chapter 6, “Foreground (option 4),” on page 317 describes how Foreground (Option 4) allows ISPF to run
the foreground processors.
Chapter 7, “Batch (option 5),” on page 347 describes how Batch (Option 5) allows ISPF to run the batch
processors.
Chapter 8, “Command (option 6),” on page 361 describes Command (Option 6), and how ISPF allows you
to enter TSO commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs on the Command line of any panel and in the Line
Command field on data set list displays.
Chapter 9, “Dialog test (option 7),” on page 365 describes how to use Dialog Test (Option 7) for testing
both complete ISPF applications and ISPF dialog parts, including functions, panels, variables, messages,
tables, and skeletons.
Chapter 10, “IBM products (option 9),” on page 409 describes the other IBM® products that are supported
as ISPF dialogs.
Chapter 11, “SCLM (option 10),” on page 411 provides an overview of the SCLM product.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2019 xxvii

 Chapter 12, “ISPF object/action workplace (option 11),” on page 413 describes the Workplace option
(Option 11).
“Return codes” on page 480 provides information about the SuperC return codes, process options,
update data set control options, and process statements.
Appendix B, “Understanding the listings,” on page 489 describes and explains the kinds of listings you
can produce using SuperC.

How to read the syntax diagrams

The syntactical structure of commands described in this document is shown by means of syntax
diagrams.
Figure 1 on page xxix shows a sample syntax diagram that includes the various notations used to indicate
such things as whether:
• An item is a keyword or a variable.
• An item is required or optional.
• A choice is available.
• A default applies if you do not specify a value.
• You can repeat an item.

xxviii z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 COMMAND_NAME required_variable
OPTIONAL_KEYWORD=  variable

KEYWORD=  default_choice
repeatable_item1
KEYWORD= choice2 fragment_name

choice3

required_choice1 repeatable_item2
optional_choice1 required_choice2
optional_choice2 required_choice3

DEFAULT_KEYWORD

KEYword

fragment_name
DEFAULT_KEYWORD

KEYWORD1

KEYWORD2

KEYWORD3 KEYWORD4
( variable1 )
variable2 variable3
,

( variable4-variable5 )
OPTIONAL_KEYWORD1

OPTIONAL_KEYWORD2

OPTIONAL_KEYWORD3

Figure 1. Sample syntax diagram

Here are some tips for reading and understanding syntax diagrams:
Order of reading
Read the syntax diagrams from left to right, from top to bottom, following the path of the line.
The ►►─── symbol indicates the beginning of a statement.
The ───► symbol indicates that a statement is continued on the next line.
The ►─── symbol indicates that a statement is continued from the previous line.
The ───►◄ symbol indicates the end of a statement.
Keywords
Keywords appear in uppercase letters.
COMMAND_NAME

Preface xxix
 Sometimes you only need to type the first few letters of a keyword, The required part of the keyword
appears in uppercase letters.

DEFAULT_KEYWORD

KEYword

In this example, you could type "KEY", "KEYW", "KEYWO", "KEYWOR" or "KEYWORD".
The abbreviated or whole keyword you enter must be spelled exactly as shown.
Variables
Variables appear in lowercase letters. They represent user-supplied names or values.
required_variable

Required items
Required items appear on the horizontal line (the main path).
COMMAND_NAME required_variable

Optional items
Optional items appear below the main path.

OPTIONAL_KEYWORD=  variable

Choice of items
If you can choose from two or more items, they appear vertically, in a stack.
If you must choose one of the items, one item of the stack appears on the main path.

required_choice1

required_choice2

required_choice3

If choosing one of the items is optional, the entire stack appears below the main path.

optional_choice1

optional_choice2

If a default value applies when you do not choose any of the items, the default value appears above
the main path.

DEFAULT_KEYWORD

KEYWORD1

KEYWORD2

Repeatable items
An arrow returning to the left above the main line indicates an item that can be repeated.

repeatable_item1

xxx z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 If you need to specify a separator character (such as a comma) between repeatable items, the line
with the arrow returning to the left shows the separator character you must specify.
,

repeatable_item2

Fragments
Where it makes the syntax diagram easier to read, a section or fragment of the syntax is sometimes
shown separately.

fragment_name

⋮
fragment_name
DEFAULT_KEYWORD
…
KEYWORD1

KEYWORD2

Preface xxxi
xxxii z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II
z/OS information
This information explains how z/OS references information in other documents and on the web.
When possible, this information uses cross document links that go directly to the topic in reference using
shortened versions of the document title. For complete titles and order numbers of the documents for all
products that are part of z/OS, see z/OS Information Roadmap.
To find the complete z/OS® library, go to IBM Knowledge Center (www.ibm.com/support/
knowledgecenter/SSLTBW/welcome).

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2019 xxxiii

xxxiv z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II
How to send your comments to IBM
We invite you to submit comments about the z/OS product documentation. Your valuable feedback helps
to ensure accurate and high-quality information.
Important: If your comment regards a technical question or problem, see instead “If you have a technical
problem” on page xxxv.
Submit your feedback by using the appropriate method for your type of comment or question:
Feedback on z/OS function
If your comment or question is about z/OS itself, submit a request through the IBM RFE Community
(www.ibm.com/developerworks/rfe/).
Feedback on IBM Knowledge Center function
If your comment or question is about the IBM Knowledge Center functionality, for example search
capabilities or how to arrange the browser view, send a detailed email to IBM Knowledge Center
Support at [email protected].
Feedback on the z/OS product documentation and content
If your comment is about the information that is provided in the z/OS product documentation library,
send a detailed email to [email protected]. We welcome any feedback that you have, including
comments on the clarity, accuracy, or completeness of the information.
To help us better process your submission, include the following information:
• Your name, company/university/institution name, and email address
• The following deliverable title and order number: z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol II, SC19-3628-30
• The section title of the specific information to which your comment relates
• The text of your comment.
When you send comments to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute the comments
in any way appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.
IBM or any other organizations use the personal information that you supply to contact you only about the
issues that you submit.

If you have a technical problem

If you have a technical problem or question, do not use the feedback methods that are provided for
sending documentation comments. Instead, take one or more of the following actions:
• Go to the IBM Support Portal (support.ibm.com).
• Contact your IBM service representative.
• Call IBM technical support.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2019 xxxv

xxxvi z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II
Summary of changes
This information includes terminology, maintenance, and editorial changes. Technical changes or
additions to the text and illustrations for the current edition are indicated by a vertical line to the left of
the change.

Summary of changes for z/OS Version 2 Release 3 (V2R3)

The following changes are made for z/OS Version 2 Release 3 (V2R3).

June 2019
Maintenance and terminology changes are made for z/OS Version 2 Release 3 in June 2019.
Changed information
• “Initiate the workstation connection” on page 54
• “Process options” on page 446
• “Switching UIDs with the SU primary command” on page 316

May 2018
Maintenance and terminology changes are made for z/OS Version 2 Release 3 in May 2018.

September 2017
Changed information
• TSO 8-character ID, see the following topics:
– “M — display member list” on page 153
– “Reset ISPF statistics utility (option 3.5)” on page 166
– “Generating and submitting JCL” on page 172
– “Batch processing sequence” on page 348
– “Resetting member statistics” on page 427
• Extended statistics usability, see the following topics:
– “Reset ISPF statistics utility (option 3.5)” on page 166
– “Reset ISPF statistics panel fields” on page 168
– “Resetting member statistics” on page 427

Summary of changes for z/OS Version 2 Release 2 (V2R2)

The following changes are made for z/OS Version 2 Release 2 (V2R2).

New information
• The File_Systems pull-down is added to ISPF option 3.17 in “z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option
3.17)” on page 247. This pull-down provides options for working with the z/OS UNIX mounted file
systems, for creating a new zSeries File System (zFS) data set, and for working with zFS aggregates. For
more information, see “z/OS UNIX Mounted File Systems” on page 294.
• The RDW and NORDW operands are added to the DISPLAY command under “DISPLAY—control the
display” on page 74.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2019 xxxvii

 Deleted information
• DFSORT and BookManager® Build are deleted from the list of z/OS elements available on the z/OS
Applications panel under “ISPF primary options” on page 1.

Summary of changes for z/OS Version 2 Release 1 (V2R1)

The following changes are made for z/OS Version 2 Release 1 (V2R1).
DSLIST Allocate
A DSLIST command is now available to allocate a data set. Also, DSLIST options that are not valid (for
example, only NOT EXCLUDE commands are available against excluded data sets) are now disabled.
For changes to this document relating to this modification, see:
• Figure 105 on page 152
• “AL — Allocate” on page 157
Manage ACL
An MA (Modify ACL) line command has been added to the list of available commands on the 3.17
menu.
For changes to this document relating to this modification, see:
• “MA—modify ACL” on page 276
Support UNIX file format of RECORD
The file format RECORD has been added to ISPF UNIX file support.

xxxviii z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

What's in the z/OS V2R3 ISPF library?
You can order the ISPF books using the numbers provided below.
Title
Order Number
z/OS ISPF Dialog Developer's Guide and Reference
SC19-3619–30
z/OS ISPF Dialog Tag Language Guide and Reference
SC19-3620–30
z/OS ISPF Edit and Edit Macros
SC19-3621–30
z/OS ISPF Messages and Codes
SC19-3622–30
z/OS ISPF Planning and Customizing
GC19-3623–30
z/OS ISPF Reference Summary
SC19-3624–30
z/OS ISPF Software Configuration and Library Manager Guide and Reference
SC19-3625–30
z/OS ISPF Services Guide
SC19-3626–30
z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I
SC19-3627–30
z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol II
SC19-3628–30

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2019 xxxix

xl z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II
 The Primary Option Menu panel

Chapter 1. Primary Option Menu (POM)

See:
• “The Primary Option Menu panel” on page 1
• “Status area on the Primary Option Menu” on page 5

The Primary Option Menu panel

The Primary Option Menu panel, shown in Figure 2 on page 1, is the first panel that displays when you
start ISPF.

2 Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
ISPF Primary Option Menu
1 3
0 Settings Terminal and user parameters User ID . : USERID
1 View Display source data or listings Time. . . : 13:54
2 Edit Create or change source data Terminal. : 3278
3 Utilities Perform utility functions Screen. . : 1
4 Foreground Interactive language processing Language. : ENGLISH
5 Batch Submit job for language processing Appl ID . : ISR
6 Command Enter TSO or Workstation commands TSO logon : ISPF
7 Dialog Test Perform dialog testing TSO prefix: USERID
9 IBM Products IBM program development products System ID : ISD1
10 SCLM SW Configuration Library Manager MVS acct. : IBMGSA
11 Workplace ISPF Object/Action Workplace Release . : ISPF 7.3
12 z/OS System z/OS system programmer applications
13 z/OS User z/OS user applications

Enter X to Terminate using Log/List defaults

Option ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

1
Primary Options.
2
Action bar choices.
3
Dynamic status area.
Figure 2. ISPF Primary Option Menu (ISR@PRIM)

ISPF primary options

When you select one of these options, ISPF displays the selected panel. These options are described in
detail in other chapters within this book. Brief descriptions follow:
Option
Description
0
Settings displays and changes selected ISPF parameters, such as terminal characteristics and
function keys. See Chapter 2, “Settings (option 0),” on page 21 for more information.
1
View displays data (you cannot change it) using the View or Browse function. Use View or Browse to
look at large data sets, such as compiler listings. You can scroll the data up, down, left, or right. If you

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2019 1

The Primary Option Menu panel

are using Browse, a FIND command, entered on the command line, allows you to search the data and
find a character string. If you are using View, you can use all the commands and macros available to
you in the Edit function. See Chapter 3, “View (option 1),” on page 69 for more information.
2
You can use Edit to create or change source data, such as program code and documentation, using
the ISPF full-screen editor. You can scroll the data up, down, left, or right. You can change the data by
using Edit line commands, which are entered directly on a line number, and primary commands, which
are entered on the command line. See Chapter 3, “View (option 1),” on page 69 and refer to z/OS
ISPF Edit and Edit Macros for more information.
3
Utilities perform library and data set maintenance tasks, such as moving or copying library or data set
members, displaying or printing data set names and volume table of contents (VTOC) information,
comparing data sets, and searching for strings of data. See Chapter 5, “Utilities (option 3),” on page
91 for more information.
4
Foreground calls IBM language processing programs in the foreground. See Chapter 6, “Foreground
(option 4),” on page 317 for more information.
5
Batch calls IBM language processing programs as batch jobs. ISPF generates Job Control Language
(JCL) based on information you enter and submits the job for processing. See Chapter 7, “Batch
(option 5),” on page 347 for more information.
6
Command calls TSO commands, CLISTs, or REXX EXECs under ISPF. See Chapter 8, “Command
(option 6),” on page 361 for more information.
7
Dialog Test tests individual ISPF dialog components, such as panels, messages, and dialog functions
(programs, commands, menus). See Chapter 9, “Dialog test (option 7),” on page 365 for more
information.
9
You can use the IBM Products option to select other installed IBM program development products on
your system. Products supported are:
• Tivoli® Information Management (INFOMAN)
• COBOL Structuring Facility (COBOL/SF)
• Screen Definition Facility II (SDF II and SDF II-P)
See Chapter 10, “IBM products (option 9),” on page 409 for more information.
10
SCLM controls, maintains, and tracks all of the software components of an application. See Chapter
11, “SCLM (option 10),” on page 411 and refer to z/OS ISPF Software Configuration and Library
Manager Guide and Reference for more information.
11
Workplace gives you access to the ISPF Workplace, which combines many of the ISPF functions onto
one object-action panel. See Chapter 12, “ISPF object/action workplace (option 11),” on page 413 for
more information.
12
z/OS System gives you access to the z/OS System Programmer Primary Option Menu. It contains
options for z/OS elements that are used by system programmers and administrators. It includes
options for:
• GDDM Print Queue Manager
• HCD I/O configuration
• APPC Administration
• WLM Work Load Manager

2 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 The Primary Option Menu panel

• FFST dump formatting

• Infoprint Server
• RMF
• SMP/E
• TCP/IP NPF
13
z/OS User gives you access to the z/OS Applications panel. It contains options for z/OS elements that
are used by most ISPF users. It includes options for:
• BookManager Read
• BookManager Index Creation
• DFSMSrmm/ISMF
• DFSMSdfp/ISMF
• BDT File-to-File
• IPCS
• z/OS UNIX Browse
• z/OS UNIX Edit
• z/OS UNIX Shell
• Security Server
• TSO/E Information Center Facility
• SDSF
X
EXIT leaves ISPF using the log and list defaults. You can change these defaults from the Log/List pull-
down on the ISPF Settings panel action bar.

Primary Option Menu action bar choices

The Primary Option Menu action bar offers a quick way of accessing many of the panels within ISPF.
Menu
This choice is available from most panels within ISPF and displays many of the options listed on the
Primary Option Menu panel. These choices are available from the Menu pull-down:
Settings
Displays the ISPF Settings panel.
View
Displays the View Entry panel.
Edit
Displays the Edit Entry panel.
ISPF Command Shell
Displays the ISPF Command Shell panel.
Dialog Test
Displays the Dialog Test Primary Option panel.
Other IBM Products
Displays the Additional IBM Program Development Products panel.
SCLM
Displays the SCLM Main Menu.
ISPF Workplace
Displays the Workplace entry panel.
Status Area
Displays the ISPF Status panel.

Primary Option Menu (POM) 3

The Primary Option Menu panel

Exit
Exits ISPF.
Utilities
This choice is available from many panels within ISPF and displays the options listed on the Utility
Selection panel. These choices are available from the Utilities pull-down:
Library
Displays the Library Utility panel.
Data Set
Displays the Data Set Utility panel.
Move/Copy
Displays the Move/Copy Utility panel.
Data Set List
Displays the Data Set List Options panel.
Reset Statistics
Displays the Reset ISPF Statistics panel.
Hardcopy
Displays the Hardcopy Utility panel.
Download
Displays the panel that enables you to download workstation clients and other files from the host.
Outlist
Displays the Outlist Utility panel.
Commands
Displays the Command Table Utility panel.
Reserved
Reserved for future use by ISPF; an unavailable choice.
Format
Displays the Format Specification panel.
SuperC
Displays the SuperC Utility panel.
SuperCE
Displays the SuperCE Utility panel.
Search-for
Displays the Search-For Utility panel.
Search-forE
Displays the Search-ForE Utility panel.
Table Utility
Displays the ISPF Table Utility panel.
Compilers
The Compilers pull-down offers these choices:
1
Foreground Compilers Displays the Foreground Selection Panel.
2
Background Compilers Displays the Batch Selection Panel.
3
ISPPREP Panel Utility Displays the Preprocessed Panel Utility panel.
4
DTL Compiler Displays the ISPF Dialog Tag Language Conversion Utility panel.
Options
The Options pull-down offers these choices:

4 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Status area on the Primary Option Menu

1
General Settings Displays the ISPF Settings panel.
2
CUA Attributes Displays the CUA Attribute Change Utility panel.
3
Keylists Displays the Keylist Utility panel.
4
Point-and-Shoot Displays the CUA Attribute Change Utility panel, positioned on the Point-and-
Shoot panel element.
5
Colors Displays the Global Color Change Utility panel.
6
Dialog Test appl ID Displays the Dialog Test Application ID pop-up to allow you to change the
application ID for Dialog test so that you can look at variables in the application profile for an
application that runs under a different application ID than the one under which ISPF was started
(by default, ISR).
Status
The Status pull-down offers these choices:
1
Session
2
Function keys
3
Calendar
4
User status
5
User point and shoot
6
None
See “Status area on the Primary Option Menu” on page 5 for more information about using these
choices to tailor the status area.
Help
The Help pull-down provides general information about ISPF topics and the changes in the current
release, as well as information about each of the options and areas on the Primary Option Menu.

Status area on the Primary Option Menu

The status area on the ISPF Primary Option Menu is a 21-column dynamic area that is composed of a 12-
character description field, one attribute byte, and an 8-character field to display the value of the selected
variable. The status area is limited to eleven description fields and their values. It can be manipulated
from two places:
• The Status choice on the ISPF Primary Option Menu action bar. Use this pull-down to specify what you
want to display in the status area. See “Status pull-down” on page 6 for additional information and
examples.
• The ISPF Status panel, which displays when you select Status Area from the Menu pull-down available
on most action bars throughout ISPF. Use this facility to define the contents of the status area. See
“Defining the status area” on page 13 for additional information and examples.

Primary Option Menu (POM) 5

Status area on the Primary Option Menu

Note: The ISPF Status panel also contains an action bar choice called "Status". This does not affect
which Status option displays on the Primary Option Menu panel. It determines which Status option
displays within the ISPF Status panel.
The first five logical screens, created by a SPLIT or related command, each have their own status view. For
each screen after that, the view defaults to the setting of the first screen.

Status pull-down
When you select one of the choices in the Status pull-down on the ISPF Primary Option Menu action bar
(shown in Figure 3 on page 6), you specify what you want to display in the status area on the Primary
Option Menu panel.

Figure 3. Status pull-down on the ISPF Primary Option Menu (ISR@PRIM)

Note: The current setting is shown as an unavailable choice; that is, displays in blue (the default) with an
asterisk as the first digit of the selection number. If you are running in GUI mode the choice is grayed.

Session
The Session view, shown in Figure 4 on page 7, displays this information in the status area:
• User ID
• Time
• Terminal
• Screen
• Language
• Application ID
• TSO logon

6 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Status area on the Primary Option Menu

• TSO prefix
• System ID
• MVS account
• Release.

Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
ISPF Primary Option Menu

0 Settings Terminal and user parameters User ID . : USERID

1 View Display source data or listings Time. . . : 16:23
2 Edit Create or change source data Terminal. : 3278
3 Utilities Perform utility functions Screen. . : 1
4 Foreground Interactive language processing Language. : ENGLISH
5 Batch Submit job for language processing Appl ID . : ISR
6 Command Enter TSO or Workstation commands TSO logon : ISPF
7 Dialog Test Perform dialog testing TSO prefix: USERID
9 IBM Products IBM program development products System ID : ISD1
10 SCLM SW Configuration Library Manager MVS acct. : IBMGSA
11 Workplace ISPF Object/Action Workplace Release . : ISPF 7.3
12 z/OS System z/OS system programmer applications
13 z/OS User z/OS user applications

Enter X to Terminate using Log/List defaults

Option ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 4. ISPF Primary Option Menu status area – session view

System ID is a point-and-shoot field. MVS Acct and Release are point-and-shoot fields if over 8
characters long. Select these fields to display pop-up windows that contain additional information about
the MVS account number and the ISPF environment.
MVS Acct
The account number identifying this MVS user.
System ID
Shows the SYSPLEX and SYSNODE.
SYSPLEX
The MVS sysplex name as found in the COUPLExx or LOADxx member of SYS1.PARMLIB.
SYSNODE
The network node name of your installation's JES.

Primary Option Menu (POM) 7

Status area on the Primary Option Menu

Figure 5. System information pop-up

Release
Displays these variables:
• ZOS390RL— The z/OS Release running on your system.
• ZISPFOS— The level of ISPF code that is running as part of z/OS on your system. This might or might
not match ZOS390RL.
• ZENVIR— The ISPF Environment description. See the table of system variables in the z/OS ISPF
Dialog Developer's Guide and Reference for a complete explanation.

8 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Status area on the Primary Option Menu

Figure 6. Environment pop-up (release information)

Function keys
The Function Keys view, shown in Figure 7 on page 10, displays this information in the status area:
• Number of keys
• Keys displayed per line
• Primary range (lower or upper)
• Display set (primary or alternate)
• List name (name of the currently active keylist)
• List applid (application ID for the currently active keylist)
• List type (private or shared)
• Keylists (on or off).
Note: See “Working with function keys and keylists (the Function Keys action bar choice)” on page 34 for
information about changing these settings.

Primary Option Menu (POM) 9

Status area on the Primary Option Menu

Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
ISPF Primary Option Menu

0 Settings Terminal and user parameters No. of keys: 24

1 View Display source data or listings Keys / line: SIX
2 Edit Create or change source data Primary set: LOW
3 Utilities Perform utility functions Display set: PRI
4 Foreground Interactive language processing List name. : ISRSAB
5 Batch Submit job for language processing List applid: ISR
6 Command Enter TSO or Workstation commands List type. : SHARED
7 Dialog Test Perform dialog testing Keylists . : PRIVATE
9 IBM Products IBM program development products
10 SCLM SW Configuration Library Manager
11 Workplace ISPF Object/Action Workplace
12 z/OS System z/OS system programmer applications
13 z/OS User z/OS user applications

Enter X to Terminate using Log/List defaults

Option ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 7. ISPF Primary Option Menu status area – function keys view

Calendar
The Calendar view, shown in Figure 8 on page 10, displays the calendar for the current month in the
status area.

Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
ISPF Primary Option Menu

0 Settings Terminal and user parameters < Calendar >

1 View Display source data or listings January 2003
2 Edit Create or change source data Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa
3 Utilities Perform utility functions 1 2 3 4
4 Foreground Interactive language processing 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
5 Batch Submit job for language processing 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
6 Command Enter TSO or Workstation commands 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
7 Dialog Test Perform dialog testing 26 27 28 29 30 31
9 IBM Products IBM program development products
10 SCLM SW Configuration Library Manager Time . . . . : 05:00
11 Workplace ISPF Object/Action Workplace Day of year. : 135
12 z/OS System z/OS system programmer applications
13 z/OS User z/OS user applications

Enter X to Terminate using Log/List defaults

Option ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 8. ISPF Primary Option Menu status area – calendar view

All of the fields on the calendar are point-and-shoot fields that function as follows:
If you select
ISPF displays
<
the previous month.
calendar
the current month.
>
the next month.

10 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Status area on the Primary Option Menu

Month, e.g. July

the Calendar Month pop-up. Allows you to specify the month. See “Customizing the calendar” on page
15 for details.
Year, e.g. 2003
the Calendar Year pop-up. Allows you to specify the year. See “Customizing the calendar” on page
15 for details.
Day
the Calendar Start Day pop-up. Allows you to specify Saturday, Sunday, or Monday as the start day for
the calendar. See “Customizing the calendar” on page 15 for details.
Date
the Julian Date pop-up. Provides the Julian date for the date selected.

Figure 9. Julian date pop-up

Time
the Calendar Time Format pop-up. Allows you to specify a 12-hour or 24-hour time format for the
calendar. See “Customizing the calendar” on page 15 for details.
Day of year
the Standard Date pop-up. Provides the standard date for the day specified in the popup (defaults to
the date selected in the calendar).

Primary Option Menu (POM) 11

Status area on the Primary Option Menu

Figure 10. Standard date pop-up

User status
The User Status view, shown in Figure 11 on page 12, displays the status information that you have
defined in the Status Area panel.

Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
ISPF Primary Option Menu

0 Settings Terminal and user parameters User ID: USERID

1 View Display source data or listings Date: 24/01/03
2 Edit Create or change source data Time: 14:57
3 Utilities Perform utility functions
4 Foreground Interactive language processing
5 Batch Submit job for language processing
6 Command Enter TSO or Workstation commands
7 Dialog Test Perform dialog testing
9 IBM Products IBM program development products
10 SCLM SW Configuration Library Manager
11 Workplace ISPF Object/Action Workplace
12 z/OS System z/OS system programmer applications
13 z/OS User z/OS user applications

Enter X to Terminate using Log/List defaults

Option ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 11. ISPF Primary Option Menu status area – user status view

User point and shoot

The User Point-and-Shoot view, shown in Figure 12 on page 13, displays the point-and-shoot function
you have defined in the Status Area panel.
Note: If you are running in GUI mode, this function will be displayed as a push button.

12 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Status area on the Primary Option Menu

Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
ISPF Primary Option Menu

0 Settings Terminal and user parameters Dialog Test

1 View Display source data or listings Edit
2 Edit Create or change source data Edit Recovery Table
3 Utilities Perform utility functions
4 Foreground Interactive language processing
5 Batch Submit job for language processing
6 Command Enter TSO or Workstation commands
7 Dialog Test Perform dialog testing
9 IBM Products IBM program development products
10 SCLM SW Configuration Library Manager
11 Workplace ISPF Object/Action Workplace
12 z/OS System z/OS system programmer applications
13 z/OS User z/OS user applications

Enter X to Terminate using Log/List defaults

Option ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 12. ISPF Primary Option Menu status area – user point-and-shoot view

None
If you select None from the Status pull-down, nothing will be displayed in the status area.

Defining the status area

When you select Status Area from the Menu pull-down, ISPF displays the ISPF Status pop-up window
(shown in Figure 13 on page 13), with an independent view of the status area. This panel is used to
define the contents of the status area choices. You can change the choice displayed in this window by
using the Status pull-down on the action bar.
Note: Changing the status area viewed in this panel will not affect the choice selected on the ISPF Primary
Option Menu panel.

Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help

─ ┌─────────────────────────┐ ────────────────────────────────────────────────
│ Status Options │ F Primary Option Menu
│ ────────────────────── │
0 │ ISPF Status │ user parameters User ID . : USERID
1 │ │ e data or listings Time. . . : 11:10
2 │ │ nge source data Terminal. : 3278
3 │ < Calendar > │ ty functions Screen. . : 1
4 │ January 2003 │ anguage processing Language. : ENGLISH
5 │ Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa │ r language processing Appl ID . : ISR
6 │ 1 2 3 4 │ Workstation commands TSO logon : ISPF
7 │ 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 │ g testing TSO prefix: USERID
9 │ 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 │ evelopment products System ID : ISD1
1 │ 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 │ ion Library Manager MVS acct. : IBMGSA
1 │ 26 27 28 29 30 31 │ ction Workplace Release . : ISPF 7.3
│ │
│ Time . . . . : 11:10 │ g Log/List defaults
│ Day of year. : 024 │
│ │
│ Command ===> │
│ F1=Help F2=Split │
O │ F3=Exit │
⋘─────────────────────────┘ Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 13. ISPF status pop-up (ISPSAMMN)

Status
The Status pull-down, shown in Figure 14 on page 14, offers these choices:
1
Session

Primary Option Menu (POM) 13

Status area on the Primary Option Menu

2
Function keys
3
Calendar
4
User status
5
User point and shoot
6
None

Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help

─ ┌─────────────────────────┐ ────────────────────────────────────────────────
I │ Status Options │ F Primary Option Menu
│ ┌────────────────────────────┐
0 │ │ 1. Session │ parameters < Calendar >
1 │ │ 2. Function keys │ a or listings January 2003
2 │ │ *. Calendar │ ource data Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa
3 │ │ 4. User status │ nctions 1 2 3 4
4 │ │ 5. User point and shoot │ ge processing 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
5 │ │ 6. None │ guage processing 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
6 │ │ 7. Exit │ tation commands 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
7 │ ⋘────────────────────────────┘ ting 26 27 28 29 30 31
9 │ 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 │ evelopment products
1 │ 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 │ ion Library Manager Time . . . . : 11:38
1 │ 26 27 28 29 30 31 │ ction Workplace Day of year. : 024
│ │
│ Time . . . . : 11:38 │ g Log/List defaults
│ Day of year. : 024 │
│ │
│ Command ===> │
│ F1=Help F2=Split │
O │ F3=Exit │
⋘─────────────────────────┘ Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 14. Status pull-down in ISPF status pop-up

Options
The Options pull-down, shown in Figure 15 on page 15, offers these choices:
1
Calendar start day Displays the Calendar Start Day pop-up, where you can specify Saturday,
Sunday, or Monday as the start day for the calendar.
2
Calendar colors Displays the Calendar Colors pop-up, where you can change the colors on the
calendar.
3
User status customization Displays the User View Customization pop-up, where you can define
what you want displayed in the status area.
4
User point and shoot customization Displays the User Point and Shoot Customization pop-up,
where you can define point-and-shoot fields to be displayed in the status area.

14 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Status area on the Primary Option Menu

Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help

─ ┌─────────────────────────┐ ────────────────────────────────────────────────
I │ Status Options │ F Primary Option Menu
│ ─────── ┌─────────────────────────────────────────────┐
0 │ IS │ 1. Calendar Start day... │ Calendar >
1 │ │ 2. Calendar Colors... │ January 2003
2 │ │ 3. User status customization... │ Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa
3 │ < │ 4. User point and shoot customization... │ 1 2 3 4
4 │ Jan ⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────┘ 6 7 8 9 10 11
5 │ Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa │ r language processing 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
6 │ 1 2 3 4 │ Workstation commands 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
7 │ 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 │ g testing 26 27 28 29 30 31
9 │ 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 │ evelopment products
1 │ 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 │ ion Library Manager Time . . . . : 11:38
1 │ 26 27 28 29 30 31 │ ction Workplace Day of year. : 024
│ │
│ Time . . . . : 11:38 │ g Log/List defaults
│ Day of year. : 024 │
│ │
│ Command ===> │
│ F1=Help F2=Split │
O │ F3=Exit │
⋘─────────────────────────┘ Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 15. Options pull-down in ISPF status pop-up

Customizing the calendar

You can customize the calendar to show a different month, year or starting day. You can set the time
display to a 12 or 24 hour clock. You can also customize the colors used to display the calendar.
Note:
1. Changes to the month or year display will last for the current session only. Changes to the starting day
and time format will be saved between sessions.
2. You can use the point-and-shoot fields on the calendar displayed on the Primary Option Menu panel or
in the Status Area pop-up. Changes made in either location will affect the display in both locations.

Changing the month display

You can change the month that displays in the calendar in a number of ways:
• Click the < or > symbols to display the previous or next month.
• Click the Calendar point-and-shoot field to display the current month.
• Set the month display to a particular month by selecting the month name point-and-shoot field and
entering a number in the Calendar Month pop-up window:

Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help

─ ┌────────── Calendar Month ──────────┐ ─────────────────────────────────────
│ │ ption Menu
│ │
0 │ Month . . . 01 1. January │ ters < Calendar >
1 │ 2. February │ istings January 2003
2 │ 3. March │ data Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa
3 │ 4. April │ s 1 2 3 4
4 │ 5. May │ cessing 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
5 │ 6. June │ processing 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
6 │ 7. July │ commands 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
7 │ 8. August │ 26 27 28 29 30 31
9 │ 9. September │ products
1 │ 10. October │ Manager Time . . . . : 10:13
1 │ 11. November │ lace Day of year. : 024
│ 12. December │
│ │ g Log/List defaults
│ Select a choice and press ENTER │
│ F1=Help F2=Split │
│ F3=Exit F7=Backward │
└────────────────────────────────────┘
Option ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 16. Calendar month pop-up window

Primary Option Menu (POM) 15

Status area on the Primary Option Menu

Changing the year display

You can change the year that displays in the calendar by selecting the year point-and-shoot field and
entering the required year (between 1801 and 2099) in the Calendar Year pop-up window.

Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help

─ ┌────────────────── Calendar Year ──────────────────┐ ──────────────────────
│ │
│ │
0 │ Year . . . │ < Calendar >
1 │ │ January 2003
2 │ Enter the year to display between 1801 and 2099 │ Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su
3 │ │ 1 2 3 4 5
4 │ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit │ 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
5 │ F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap │ 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
6 ⋘───────────────────────────────────────────────────┘ 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
7 Dialog Test Perform dialog testing 27 28 29 30 31
9 IBM Products IBM program development products
10 SCLM SW Configuration Library Manager Time . . . . : 13:57
11 Workplace ISPF Object/Action Workplace Day of year. : 024
12 z/OS System z/OS system programmer applications
13 z/OS User z/OS user applications

Enter X to Terminate using Log/List defaults

Option ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 17. Calendar year pop-up window

Changing the starting day

You can change the calendar display so that the weeks begin on a Saturday, Sunday, or Monday.
1. To display the Calendar Start Day pop-up window, use either of these methods:
• Select any day name point-and-shoot field (e.g. Mo or Tu).
• From the Menu action bar, select Status Area. Then, from the Options action bar, choose 1. Calendar
Start day.
2. Enter option 1. Sunday, 2. Monday or 3. Saturday.

Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help

─ ┌────────── Calendar Start Day ───────────┐ ────────────────────────────────
│ │ Menu
│ │
0 │ Current start date : 2 │ < Calendar >
1 │ │ gs January 2003
2 │ New start date . . . 2 1. Sunday │ Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su
3 │ 2. Monday │ 1 2 3 4 5
4 │ 3. Saturday │ ng 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
5 │ │ ssing 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
6 │ Select a choice and press ENTER │ ands 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
7 │ │ 27 28 29 30 31
9 │ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit │ cts
1 │ F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap │ ger Time . . . . : 14:02
1 ⋘─────────────────────────────────────────┘ Day of year. : 024

Enter X to Terminate using Log/List defaults

Option ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 18. Calendar start pop-up window

Changing the time format

You can change the time format to a 12-hour or 24-hour clock. To do this, select the Time point-and-
shoot field and enter option 1 or 2 in the Calendar Time Format pop-up window.

16 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Status area on the Primary Option Menu

Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help

─ ┌─────────── Calendar Time Format ──────────────┐ ──────────────────────────
│ │
│ │
0 │ Current time format : 2 │ < Calendar >
1 │ │ January 2003
2 │ New time format . . . 2 1. 12 hour format │ Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su
3 │ 2. 24 hour format │ 1 2 3 4 5
4 │ │ 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
5 │ Select a choice and press ENTER to continue. │ 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
6 │ │ 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
7 │ │ 27 28 29 30 31
9 │ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit │
1 │ F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap │ Time . . . . : 14:18
1 ⋘───────────────────────────────────────────────┘ Day of year. : 024

Enter X to Terminate using Log/List defaults

Option ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 19. Calendar time format pop-up window

Changing the calendar colors

To change the colors on the calendar:
1. From the ISPF Status action bar, select Options and then 2. Calendar colors. The Calendar Colors pop-
up, Figure 20 on page 17, is displayed.
2. Type a valid color number in the field next to each calendar element to be changed and press Enter.
The color will change immediately in the Sample area.
To restore a default color, clear the element field and press Enter.
3. Press EXIT (F3) or END to exit and save the changes. Press CANCEL (F12) to exit without saving the
changes.

Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help

─ ┌─────────────────────────┐ ────────────────────────────────────────────────
│ ┌───────────────────────── Calendar Colors ──────────────────────────┐
│ ─ │ Defaults │
0 │ │ │
1 │ │ Change one or more of the Calendar colors and press enter to │
2 │ │ immediately see the effect. Clearing a field restores defaults. │
3 │ N │ │
4 │ K │ Field: Color: Valid Colors: Sample: │
5 │ P │ Scroll Button . . . 8 1. White < Calendar > │
6 │ D │ Heading Date . . . 8 2. Red July 1995 │
7 │ L │ Heading Text . . . 8 3. Blue Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa │
9 │ L │ Weekday . . . . . . 8 4. Green 1 │
1 │ L │ Saturday/Sunday . . 8 5. Pink 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 │
1 │ K │ Current Day . . . . 8 6. Yellow 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 │
│ │ 7. Turq 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 │
│ │ 8. CUA default 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 │
│ │ 30 31 │
│ │ Time . . . . : 10:10 │
│ C │ Day of year. : 202 │
│ │ │
O │ │ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward │
⋘── │ F9=Swap F12=Cancel │
F10=A ⋘────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 20. Calendar colors panel (ISPCALGC)

Customizing the user status area

To define the contents of this area:

Primary Option Menu (POM) 17

Status area on the Primary Option Menu

1. From the ISPF Status action bar, select Options and then 3. User status customization. The User View
Customization panel, Figure 21 on page 18, is displayed.

Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help

─ ┌── ┌───────────── User View Customization ─────────────┐ ──────────────────
│ │ │
│ ─ │ │
0 │ │ Enter a description and variable name below: │ Calendar >
1 │ │ │ January 2003
2 │ │ Description: Variable name: │ Tu We Th Fr Sa Su
3 │ │ │ 1 2 3 4 5
4 │ │ │ 7 8 9 10 11 12
5 │ │ │ 14 15 16 17 18 19
6 │ │ │ 21 22 23 24 25 26
7 │ │ │ 28 29 30 31
9 │ │ │
1 │ │ │ e . . . . : 14:33
1 │ │ │ of year. : 024
│ │ │
│ │ │
│ │ │
│ │ │
│ C │ Press EXIT or END to exit and save the changes. │
│ │ Press CANCEL to exit without saving the changes. │
O │ │ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit │
⋘── │ F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap │ ard F9=Swap
F10=A ⋘───────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 21. User view customization panel (ISPSAMUS)

2. Enter a heading in the Description field and the name of a System variable or site-defined variable in
the Variable name field. See the z/OS ISPF Dialog Developer's Guide and Reference for a list of System
Variable names.
3. Press EXIT (F3) or END to exit and save the changes. Press CANCEL (F12) to exit without saving the
changes.
For example, entering:

Description: Variable name:

User ID: ZUSER
Date: ZDATE
Time: ZTIME

would result in the display shown in Figure 11 on page 12.

Customizing the user point-and-shoot status area

You can define up to nine point-and-shoot fields, which you can set to any SELECT service parameter. To
do this:
1. From the ISPF Status action bar, select Options and then 4. User point and shoot customization. The
User Point-and-Shoot panel, Figure 22 on page 18, is displayed.

Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help

─ ┌ ┌───────────────────────── User Point-and-Shoot ──────────────────────────┐
│ │ │
│ │ │
0 │ │ Press EXIT or END to exit and save the changes. │
1 │ │ Press CANCEL to exit without saving the changes. │
2 │ │ │
3 │ │ Enter Point-and-shoot text and SELECT keywords. │
4 │ │ │
5 │ │ Point-and-shoot text: SELECT service parameters: │
6 │ │ More: + │
7 │ │ ___________________ ________________________________________________ │
9 │ │ ________________________________________________ │
1 │ │ ________________________________________________ │
1 │ │ ________________________________________________ │
│ │ ________________________________________________ │
│ │ ___________________ ________________________________________________ │
│ │ ________________________________________________ │
│ │ ________________________________________________ │
│ │ ________________________________________________ │
│ │ ________________________________________________ │
O │ │ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward │
⋘ e F9=Swap F12=Cancel │
F10 ⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 22. User point-and-shoot panel (ISPSAMUP)

18 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Status area on the Primary Option Menu

2. Enter the text to appear in the status area, in the field on the left of the panel.
3. Enter the Service parameters to be invoked in the lines on the right of the panel. See z/OS ISPF
Services Guide for information about these parameters.
4. Press EXIT (F3) or END to exit and save the changes. Press CANCEL (F12) to exit without saving the
changes.

Primary Option Menu (POM) 19

Status area on the Primary Option Menu

20 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Settings (option 0)

Chapter 2. Settings (option 0)

The Settings option allows you to display and change a variety of ISPF parameters at any time during the
ISPF session. Changes remain in effect until you change the parameter again, and ISPF saves them from
session to session. This topic explains how to use the fields on the ISPF Settings panel and the action bar
choices.
If you select option 0 on the ISPF Primary Option Menu, this panel is displayed.

Log/List Function keys Colors Environ Workstation Identifier Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
ISPF Settings

Options Print Graphics

Enter "/" to select option Family printer type 2
/ Command line at bottom Device name . . . . ________
/ Panel display CUA mode Aspect ratio . . . 0
Long message in pop-up
Tab to action bar choices
Tab to point-and-shoot fields General
/ Restore TEST/TRACE options Input field pad . . B
Session Manager mode Command delimiter . ;
/ Jump from leader dots
Edit PRINTDS Command
/ Always show split line
Enable EURO sign
/ Scroll member list
Allow empty member list
Allow empty member list (nomatch)
/ Empty member list for edit only

Terminal Characteristics
Screen format 2 1. Data 2. Std 3. Max 4. Part

Terminal Type 3 1. 3277 2. 3277A 3. 3278 4. 3278A

5. 3290A 6. 3278T 7. 3278CF 8. 3277KN
9. 3278KN 10. 3278AR 11. 3278CY 12. 3278HN
13. 3278HO 14. 3278IS 15. 3278L2 16. BE163
17. BE190 18. 3278TH 19. 3278CU 20. DEU78
21. DEU78A 22. DEU78T 23. DEU90A 24. SW116
25. SW131 26. SW500 27. 3278GR 28. 3278L1
29. OTHER
Command ===> ________________________________________________________________
F1=HELP F2=SPLIT F3=END F4=RETURN F5=RFIND F6=RCHANGE
F7=UP F8=DOWN F9=SWAP F10=LEFT F11=RIGHT F12=RETRIEVE

Figure 23. ISPF Settings panel (ISPISMMN)

This facility can also be started from any command line with the SETTINGS command, or from the
Settings choice on the Menu pull-down on any action bar where it is available. Typically, the Settings
facility should be included as an option on an application's primary option menu or as a choice on a pull-
down on an application's primary option menu.
Some of the things you can specify are:
• Terminal characteristics
• Default options for processing the ISPF list and log data sets
• Function key assignments
• Placement of command lines
• List data set characteristics
• GDDM graphic print parameters
• Keylist modifications
• Dialog Test option

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2019 21

Settings (option 0)

• Default colors
• Values of CUA panel elements
• Point-and-shoot color and highlight changes
• ENVIRON command options.

ISPF Settings panel fields

Figure 23 on page 21 shows the initial default ISPF Settings. The display or the field-level help indicates
the allowable alternatives for these defaults. The values shown in Figure 23 on page 21 are for an ISPF
session in the English language. The corresponding panel displayed for a non-English session is similar,
but the accepted terminal types can be different.

Select options
Each option is described in this topic. Use a slash to select an option. Blank out the slash to deselect the
option.
Command line at bottom
Specifies that the command line is to appear at the bottom of each logical screen. If you have
specified that the panel should be displayed in CUA mode, the command line placement defaults to
the bottom.
Note:
1. The default is to have the command line placement at the bottom. However, if your current
application profile table specifies ASIS, the default does not override it.
2. If you deselect this field, the command line appears as specified in the panel definition
statements. Unless indicated in the panel definition, it appears at the top of the panel.
When you select the Command line at bottom option, these changes take place:
• The command line moves to the last line of the logical screen or the line above the function keys
depending on the CUA mode setting (see Table 1 on page 23).
• Each line that follows the command line shifts up one line.
• The long message overlays the line above the new command line location.
If the command line for a table display panel has been moved to the bottom and if no alternate
placement has been specified for the long message line, the line directly above the repositioned
command line is reserved (left blank) for the display of long messages. Otherwise, if you enter
erroneous data on that line, a long message could overlay that data.
• In general, the display location of the function key definitions depends on several variables.
– If the panel display mode CUA option is not selected, and the KEYLIST option is set to OFF, the
function key definitions display on the lines immediately above the long message line.
– If the panel display mode CUA option is on, and the KEYLIST option is set to OFF, the function key
definitions display below the long message line.
– If the KEYLIST option is set to ON, and the panel definition does not contain a )PANEL statement,
the positioning of the function keys depends on the CUA mode setting.
– If the KEYLIST option is set to ON, and the panel definition contains a )PANEL statement, the
positioning of the function keys is below the long message line.
If the Panel display CUA mode option is not selected, an exception to this situation occurs when an
alternate placement for the long message line has been specified using the LMSG keyword on
the )BODY header statement. Under these circumstances, the function key definitions display
immediately above the command line.
If a conflict occurs between the placement of the function key definition lines and those that are to
display long messages, short messages, and commands, the function keys will not overlay the

22 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Settings (option 0)

command line, the line containing the long or short message field, or any line above one of these
fields. Because of this condition, function key definition lines cannot appear at all on some screens.
When using the GDDM interface to display panels, the position of a graphics field does not change if
the command line moves to the bottom of the screen.
In split-screen mode, if the top screen specifies the Command line at bottom option, the command
line is moved to the line directly above the split line, and the long message line overlays the line above
the command line. Because the placement setting is stored in the application profile pool, the setting
for each logical screen is the same unless a user is running different applications in each screen.
Panel display CUA mode
Specifies that panels be displayed in CUA mode. This selection affects how the long message line,
command line, and function keys are displayed, as described in Table 1 on page 23.
The table summarizes how the command, long message, and function key area appear on the panel
depending on whether you select the Panel display in CUA mode option. Note that the table uses the
system default to position the long message field. An alternate long message field is not defined using
the LMSG keyword on the )BODY header statement.

Table 1. CUA mode effect on panel display

Panel Characteristic CUA mode selected CUA mode not selected
Command line at bottom Long message line PF n=name
Command line Long message line
Fn=name Command line

Command line at bottom Title/short message Title/short message

deselected Command line Command line
Long message line Long message line
⋮ ⋮
Fn=name PF n=name

Table 2 on page 23 summarizes the effect of CUA mode on the top-row-displayed indicator.

Table 2. CUA mode effect on top-row-displayed indicator

CUA Mode Rows Top-Row-Displayed Message Message ID
YES ALL Row x to z of y ISPZZ102
YES SCAN Row x From y ISPZZ103
NO ALL Row x of y ISPZZ100
NO SCAN Row x of y ISPZZ100

Long message in pop-up

Specifies that long messages will be displayed in a pop-up window, regardless of the .WINDOW
setting in the message source.
Tab to action bar choices
Specifies that you want to use the Tab key to move the cursor among the action bar choices.
Note: You cannot use the Tab key for this purpose if you are running in GUI mode.
Tab to point-and-shoot fields
Specifies that you want to use the Tab key to move the cursor through the point-and-shoot fields on a
panel.

Settings (option 0) 23
Settings (option 0)

Note: You cannot use the Tab key for this purpose if you are running in GUI mode.
Restore TEST/TRACE options
When you select Dialog Test facility (option 7), certain TEST and TRACE options are established that
can be different than those specified during ISPF start up. If you select Restore TEST/TRACE options,
the TEST or TRACE values are restored to the ISPF call values when you exit dialog test. If you
deselect the field, the TEST or TRACE values are not restored when you exit dialog test.
For more information about dialog test, see Chapter 9, “Dialog test (option 7),” on page 365.
Session Manager mode
Enter a slash to indicate that the Session Manager should handle any line mode output from the
processing program.
Jump from leader dots
Enter a slash to enable the ISPF jump function from field prompts that have leader dots ( . . or ... ).
Field prompts that have the ==> will always have the jump function enabled.
If the application developer defines the NOJUMP(ON) attribute keyword on a specific input field, this
disables the "Jump from leader dots" and takes precedence over the selected Settings "Jump from
leader dots" or the configuration table setting of "YES" for "Jump from leader dots".
Edit PRINTDS Command
Enter a slash to intercept the local print request to allow you to modify the statement before the
PRINTDS command begins. For more information on editing the PRINTDS command, see the Libraries
and Data Sets topic in z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Always show split line
Specifies that the split line in split screen mode, as seen on a 3270 display, should always be shown.
The default for this option is that the option is selected. By deselecting this option, the split line does
not display when the screen is split at the top or the bottom of the screen.
Enable EURO Sign
Enter a slash to enable the EURO sign (currency symbol). Your terminal or emulator must support the
EURO sign for this option to work.
Scroll member list
Enter a slash to specify that ISPF should scroll to the first member selected in the member list after
processing. If the Option field is deselected, automatic member list scrolling is disabled and the
cursor is placed in front of the last member selected.
Allow empty member list
Specifies whether an empty member list will be displayed for a PDS that contains no members.
Allow empty member list (nomatch)
If the 'Allow empty member list' option is set, this field specifies whether an empty list that results
from a nonmatching pattern will be displayed.
Empty member list for edit only
Specifies whether empty member list options apply to non-edit functions such as View and Browse.

Terminal characteristics
The Terminal Characteristics portion of the ISPF Settings panel allows you to specify values for the screen
format and terminal type. Each of these characteristics is described here.
Screen format
Specification of screen format applies only to 327x and 3290 terminals (or a terminal emulator set to
a mode that emulates a 327x or 3290 terminal). ISPF ignores screen format for other types of
terminal.
Data
Format is based on data width.
Std
Format is always the primary screen size.

24 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Settings (option 0)

Max
Format is always the alternate screen size.
Part
Format uses hardware partitions (3279 only)
Note:
1. Primary and alternate screen dimensions are determined by the VTAM® logmode and the
capabilities of the terminal or terminal emulator. These values can be displayed by the ISPF
ENVIRON settings panel and issuing the QUERY request.
2. ISPF supports a minimum screen size of 24 rows and 80 columns. The maximum screen width is
160 columns.
3. If you are in an Edit session or you are using the Edit service, ISPF does not allow you to change
the screen format.
Terminal type
Specify a valid terminal type. If you are using a terminal emulator, select the type of terminal that is
being emulated (usually a 3278 or 3278x).
You can select one of the standard terminal types from the list on the ISPF Settings panel (see Figure
23 on page 21). If the selected terminal type seems to be incompatible with the current ISPF
language setting, a 'Terminal Type Warning' Message will be displayed, but the terminal type will be
accepted nevertheless.
If you want to use a custom terminal translation table that has been created for your site, select
OTHER to specify the name of the translation table. If the load of the new translation tables fails, ISPF
reverts to the previous terminal type setting.
You can also select a terminal type by using the ISPTTDEF program, as described in z/OS ISPF Dialog
Developer's Guide and Reference.
Specification of a terminal type allows ISPF to recognize valid (displayable) characters. Keep in mind
that the terminal type value that you specify to ISPF might not be the actual terminal type. For
example, if your terminal is a 3279, you specify 3278 because a 3279 terminal has the same
character set as a 3278. The keyboard character sets for the specified terminal and the actual
terminal are always compatible.
The terminal type designations in the text of this document are often the value to be specified to ISPF
rather than the actual terminal type.
This panel can also include one or more installation-dependent options for terminal type, for example:
3277KN
3277 Katakana terminals
3278CF
3278 Canadian French terminals
3278KN
3278 Katakana terminals
A 5550-3270 Kanji emulation Version 3 terminal has the same character set as a 3278 Katakana
terminal, so you should specify 3278KN as the terminal type. Also, because the 5550 running with the
Japanese 3270PC/G Version 3 or 3270 PC Version 5 has the same character set as a 3278 Katakana
terminal, in either case you should specify 3278KN as the terminal type.
The 5550 is run with the Japanese 3270PC V5 or 3270PC/G V3 emulation program. The terminal
type, set by the ISPF Settings panel, is set to 3278KN.

Print graphics parms

The Print Graphics Parms portion of the ISPF Settings panel allows you to specify to GDDM the family
printer type, device name, and aspect ratio. These parameters are described here:

Settings (option 0) 25
Settings (option 0)

Family printer type

This parameter has a default value of 2, which cannot be changed.
Device name
VTAM node name of the physical printer to which graphic display output is to be routed. This name is
supplied by your system programmer.
Aspect ratio
How the graphics aspect ratio (relationship to displayed screen image) is to appear on the printed
output. Aspect ratio can be either of these:
0
Preserves the aspect ratio of the graphic area as displayed (Figure 24 on page 26). In other
words, the ratio of the graphic area width to its height is the same on the printed document (Figure
25 on page 27) as in the displayed view. Zero is the default value. Figure 25 on page 27 shows
how the graphic in Figure 24 on page 26 would appear if the PRINTG command were issued with
an aspect ratio of 0.
1
Preserves the positional relationship between the graphic and the alphanumeric characters
outside the graphics area. In other words, the printed graphic (Figure 26 on page 27) aligns
horizontally with characters outside the graphics area the same as it (the printed graphic) aligns in
the displayed image.

Figure 24. Screen containing graphics to be printed using PRINTG

26 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Settings (option 0)

Figure 25. Example of using aspect ratio parameter 0

Figure 26 on page 27 shows how the graphic in Figure 24 on page 26 would appear if the PRINTG
command were issued with an aspect ratio of 1.

Figure 26. Example of using aspect ratio parameter 1

General
The General portion of the ISPF Settings panel allows you to specify values for the input field pad and
command delimiter.

Settings (option 0) 27
Settings (option 0)

Input field pad

Specifies a pad character that controls the initial padding of blank (unfilled) panel input fields,
including the selection panels, but not the data portion, of an Edit display. Within Edit, you control null
or blank padding with Edit commands.
The pad character specified can be a B (blank), N (nulls), or any special (non-alphanumeric) character.
Note: When you are running in GUI mode, blank pad characters will be displayed as nulls in order to
avoid the need to delete blank characters when replace mode is not available.
Command delimiter
You can stack commands on the command line by separating them with a delimiter. The default
delimiter, the semicolon, can be changed using this option. Alphanumeric characters, the period (.),
and the equal sign (=) are not valid command delimiters. Stacking allows you to enter, for example:

===> FIND DEPT;HEX ON

which finds the characters DEPT and then displays the file at that point in hexadecimal mode.
The system variable for the delimiter is ZDEL. For more information about ZDEL, refer to the z/OS ISPF
Dialog Developer's Guide and Reference.

ISPF Settings panel action bar

The ISPF Settings panel action bar choices function as follows:
Log/List
The Log/List pull-down offers these choices:
1
Log Data set defaults. See “Log data set defaults” on page 30.
2
List Data set defaults. See “List data set defaults” on page 31.
3
List Data set characteristics. See “List data set characteristics” on page 32.
4
JCL. See “JCL” on page 33.
Function keys
The Function keys pull-down offers you these choices (see “Working with function keys and keylists
(the Function Keys action bar choice)” on page 34 for more information):
1
Non-Keylist PF Key settings. Displays the PF Key Definitions and Labels panel.
2
Keylist settings Displays the Keylist Utility for ISP pop-up.
3
Tailor function key display. Displays the Tailor Function Key Definition Display panel.
4
Show all function keys. Changes the function key display. This will be an unavailable choice if you
are currently showing all function keys.
5
Show partial function keys. Changes the function key display. This will be an unavailable choice if
you are currently showing a partial list of function keys.
6
Remove function key display. Removes function keys from your screen. This will be an
unavailable choice if you are currently not showing function keys.

28 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Settings (option 0)

7
Use private and shared. Equivalent to using the KEYLIST PRIVATE command.
8
Use only shared. Equivalent to using the KEYLIST SHARED command.
9
Disable keylists. Disables keylists. This choice is not available if you are currently running with
keylists disabled.
10
Enable keylists. Enables keylists. This choice is not available if you are currently running with
keylists enabled.
Colors
The Colors pull-down offers you these choices (see “Changing default colors (the Colors action bar
choice)” on page 46 for more information):
1
Global colors Displays the Global Color Change Utility panel.
2
CUA Attributes Displays the CUA Attribute Change Utility panel.
3
Point-and-Shoot Displays the CUA Attribute Change Utility panel, positioned on the Point-and-
Shoot panel element.
Environ
The Environ pull-down offers you these choices (see “Specifying ISPF ENVIRON settings (the Environ
action bar choice)” on page 52 for more information):
1
Environ settings Displays the ISPF ENVIRON Command Settings panel.
Workstation
The Workstation pull-down offers you these choices (see “Specifying workstation parameters (the
Workstation action bar choice)” on page 53 for more information):
1
Workstation connection Displays the Initiate GUI Session panel.
2
GUI panel settings Displays the GUI Settings panel.
3
Workstation Tool Integration Displays the tool integration panel.
4
Download ISPF C/S Component Displays the download panel.
5
Disconnect from the Workstation Disconnects from the workstation.
Identifier
The Identifier pull-down offers you these choices (see “Displaying message, system, user, panel, and
screen IDs” on page 63 for more information):
1
Message identifier Displays the Message Identifier pop-up.
2
Panel identifier Displays the Panel Identifier pop-up.
3
Screen Name Displays the Screen Name pop-up.
Help
The Help pull-down provides general information about the options available in the Settings panel and
action bar.

Settings (option 0) 29
Settings (option 0)

Specifying log and list defaults and characteristics (the Log/List action bar choice)
The Log/List pull-down on the ISPF Settings panel action bar allows you to specify the log and list data set
defaults that are used when you terminate ISPF by issuing the RETURN or END command or by entering
an X on the ISPF Primary Option Menu.
The defaults can also be used when you issue the LOG or LIST command. You may specify the
characteristics of the records to be contained in the list data set when it is defined.

Log data set defaults

When you select "Log Data set defaults" from the Log/List pull-down on the ISPF Settings panel action
bar, the panel shown in Figure 27 on page 30 is displayed.

Log/List Function keys Colors Environ Workstation Identifier Help

─ ┌──────────────────────────── ISPF Settings ────────────────────────────┐ ──
│ Log Data Set Defaults │
│ More: + │ +
O │ Process option . . . . 1. Print data set and delete │
│ 2. Delete data set (without printing) │
│ 3. Keep data set (append subsequent │
│ information to same data set) │
│ 4. Keep data set and allocate new data set │
│ Batch SYSOUT class . . │
│ Local printer ID or │
│ writer-name . . . . . │
│ Local SYSOUT class . . │
│ Lines per page . . . . 60 │
│ Primary pages . . . . 10 │
│ Secondary pages . . . 10 │
│ Log Message ID . . . . (/ = Yes) │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward │
T │ F9=Swap F12=Cancel │
⋘───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Command ===> LOGDSD

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 27. Log Data Set Defaults panel (ISPISML1)

Local printer ID or writer name

Enter the name that your installation has assigned to an IBM 328x type of printer or the name of the
external writer program. The default is blank. If you enter a name in this field, be sure to leave the
Batch SYSOUT class field empty.
Lines per page
ISPF uses this value to determine when to cause a page eject if the eject control is not provided by the
dialog; for example, when the dialog issues a LIST service request without the CC keyword specified.
Lines per page can range from 1 to 999. The initial default is 60. Normal values for lines per page are:
60
When printing 6 lines per inch
80
When printing 8 lines per inch.
Primary/Secondary pages
Primary/secondary allocation parameters are specified in terms of the anticipated number of pages of
printout. These values are automatically converted by ISPF to the appropriate number of blocks
before allocating space for the log data set. The initial default setting is 100 for both Primary pages
and Secondary pages.
Specify a primary allocation of zero to prevent allocation and generation of the log.
If you modify the primary/secondary allocation parameters after the data set has been allocated, the
new values take effect the next time you start ISPF. The log data set is allocated the first time you

30 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Settings (option 0)

perform some action that results in a log message, such as saving edited data or submitting a batch
job.
Log Message ID
If you select the Log Message ID option, the message ID is automatically added to the long message
text written in the LOG data set.
If you request default processing options for the log data set, these rules apply:
• If you specify Print data set and delete (1), you must also specify a Batch SYSOUT class and job
statement information. If you specify Print data set and delete for both log and list, you can specify
different Batch SYSOUT classes, but only one job is submitted for printing both data sets.
• If you specify routing to a local printer, you must specify a Local printer ID or writer name, and Batch
SYSOUT must be blank. You can also enter a Local SYSOUT class if one is defined.
If you do not follow these rules or do not specify default processing options, primary option X or the
RETURN command causes the final termination panel to be displayed.

List data set defaults

When you select "List Data set defaults" from the Log/List pull-down on the ISPF Settings panel action
bar, the pop-up shown in Figure 28 on page 31 is displayed.

Log/List Function keys Colors Environ Workstation Identifier Help

─ ┌──────────────────────────── ISPF Settings ────────────────────────────┐ ──
│ List Data Set Defaults │
│ │ +
O │ Process option . . . . 1. Print data set and delete │
│ 2. Delete data set (without printing) │
│ 3. Keep data set (append subsequent │
│ information to same data set) │
│ 4. Keep data set and allocate new data set │
│ Batch SYSOUT class . . │
│ Local printer ID or │
│ writer-name . . . . . │
│ Local SYSOUT class . . │
│ Lines per page . . . . 60 │
│ Primary pages . . . . 100 │
│ Secondary pages . . . 200 │
│ │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward │
T │ F9=Swap F12=Cancel │
⋘───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Command ===> LISTDSD

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 28. List Data Set Defaults panel (ISPISML2)

Local printer ID
Enter the name that your installation has assigned to an IBM 328x type of printer or the name of the
external writer program. The default is blank. If you enter a name in this field, be sure to leave the
Batch SYSOUT class field empty.
Lines per page
ISPF uses this value to determine when to cause a page eject if the eject control is not provided by the
dialog; for example, when the dialog issues a LIST service request without the CC keyword specified.
Lines per page can range from 1 to 999. The initial default is 60. Normal values for lines per page are:
60
When printing 6 lines per inch
80
When printing 8 lines per inch.

Settings (option 0) 31
Settings (option 0)

Primary/Secondary pages
Primary/secondary allocation parameters are specified in terms of the anticipated number of pages of
printout. These values are automatically converted by ISPF to the appropriate number of blocks
before allocating space for the list data set. The initial default settings are 100 for Primary pages and
200 for Secondary pages.
If you modify the primary/secondary allocation parameters after the data set has been allocated, the
new values take effect the next time you enter ISPF. The list data set is allocated the first time you
request a print function or a dialog issues a LIST service request.
If you request default processing options for the list data set, these rules apply:
• If you specify Print data set and delete (1), you must also specify a Batch SYSOUT class and job
statement information. If you specify Print data set and delete for both log and list, you can specify
different Batch SYSOUT classes, but only one job is submitted for printing both data sets.
• If you specify routing to a local printer, you must specify a Local printer ID or writer name, and Batch
SYSOUT must be blank.
If you do not follow these rules or do not specify default processing options, primary option X or the
RETURN command causes the final termination panel to be displayed.
After reviewing or changing the parameters on this panel, enter the END command to return to the
previous menu.

List data set characteristics

When you select "List Data set characteristics" from the Log/List pull-down on the ISPF Settings panel
action bar, the panel shown in Figure 29 on page 32 is displayed to allow you to specify the
characteristics of the records to be contained in the list data set when it is defined. You can specify the
record format, the logical record length, and the line length to be printed. When the characteristics are
reset, their new values take effect at once unless the list data set has already been allocated. In that case,
the new values are used for the next list data set allocation. These values are saved in your user profile,
which ISPF automatically builds and maintains across sessions.
Specifications for logical record length and line length values can affect truncation of lines written to the
list data set by a LIST service request. See the description of the LIST service in z/OS ISPF Services Guide
for more information.

Log/List Function keys Colors Environ Workstation Identifier Help

─ ┌───────────── ISPF Settings ─────────────┐ ────────────────────────────────
│ List Data Set Characteristics │
│ │ More: +
O │ Record Format . . . . . . 1 1. FBA │ t Graphics
│ 2. VBA │ mily printer type 2
│ Logical record length . . 121 │ vice name . . . .
│ Line length . . . . . . . 120 │ pect ratio . . . 0
│ │
│ │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit │ ral
│ F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap │ put field pad . . B
⋘─────────────────────────────────────────┘ mmand delimiter . ;
/ Jump from leader dots
Edit PRINTDS Command
/ Always show split line
Enable EURO sign
/ Scroll member list

Terminal Characteristics
Screen format 2 1. Data 2. Std 3. Max 4. Part
Command ===> LISTDSC
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 29. List Data Set Characteristics panel (ISPISML3)

The fields on this panel are described here:

32 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Settings (option 0)

Record Format
The record format specifies the format and characteristics of the records in the list data set. The
allowable record formats are:
FBA
Fixed-length records that contain ANSI-defined printer control characters
VBA
Variable-length records that contain ANSI-defined printer control characters.
The default setting is FBA.
Logical Record Length
The logical record length specifies the length, in bytes, of fixed-length records or the maximum length
allowed for variable-length records. The default value is 121. This value represents one ANSI-defined
control character and 120 bytes of data to be printed.
Line Length
The line length specifies the length of the logical line to be printed. If the specified line length is
greater than the logical record length of the list data set, data is truncated. The range of allowable
lengths is from 80 bytes to 160 bytes. The default value is 120.
The information supplied by the parameters allows for the printing of panels whose line lengths would
not otherwise be supported by the available printing facilities.
For example:
• If a panel to be printed is 160 bytes wide but printing capabilities allow only 132 bytes, you should
specify:
RECFM
FBA or VBA
Line Length
130
LRECL
132 (allows for two ANSI-defined control characters).
The first page of output would contain the first 130 bytes of the panel. The second page would
contain the last 30 bytes. This technique is referred to as the cut and paste method of printing.
• If a panel to be printed is 132 bytes wide and the printer supports this line length, you should
specify:
RECFM
FBA or VBA
Line Length
132
LRECL
133 (allows for one ANSI-defined control character).
The entire panel would be printed on one page of output.
• If a panel to be printed is 80 bytes wide, ISPF uses the default values for the LIST parameters. The
entire panel would be printed on one page of output.

JCL
When you select JCL from the Log/List pull-down on the ISPF Settings panel action bar, the pop-up shown
in Figure 30 on page 34 is displayed. You can specify up to four default job statements to be used when
printing a log or list data set.

Settings (option 0) 33
Settings (option 0)

Log/List Function keys Colors Environ Workstation Identifier Help

┌─────────────────────────────── ISPF Settings ───────────────────────────────┐
│ Log and List JCL │
│ │
│ Job statement information: (Required for system printer) │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F9=Swap F12=Cancel │
⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Session Manager mode Command delimiter . ;

Figure 30. Log and List JCL panel (ISPISMLJ)

Working with function keys and keylists (the Function Keys action bar choice)
The Function keys pull-down on the ISPF Settings panel action bar (see Figure 31 on page 36) allows
you to define function keys and to create, edit, delete, and view keylists.
Nearly all panels in ISPF have associated keylists, although specific keylists typically serve numerous
panels. There are several keylists used in the ISPF product panels. These keylists all start with the
characters ISR. In addition, ISPF contains some keylists that start with the characters ISP. They are not
used in any ISPF product panels, but can be used by an application if needed. Keylists are used when an
application panel contains a )PANEL statement.
To accommodate both users who require CUA-compliant keylists and those who prefer to use the
traditional ISPF function key assignments, F1-F12 are assigned CUA-compliant values, and F13-F24 are
assigned traditional ISPF values. Therefore, the user who runs in default mode (ZPRIKEYS set to UPP;
also see “Tailor function key definition display” on page 44) can retain the traditional key settings.
Note: Function keys in Edit are documented in z/OS ISPF Edit and Edit Macros. They are not CUA-
compliant.
The KEYS and KEYLIST commands have been modified to benefit the user as well. When KEYS is issued
from a panel that is not using a keylist, the PF Key Definitions and Labels panel is displayed, which allows
you to change the ZPF variable settings, as in previous versions of ISPF. However, if the keys command is
issued from a panel with an active keylist, the associated Keylist Utility panel Change panel is displayed.
The user can also control the use of keylists associated with panels using the KEYLIST command.
Specifying KEYLIST OFF causes ISPF to ignore the keylist in all logical screens running under the
application ID from which the KEYLIST OFF command was issued, and to use the ZPF variables for
controlling function keys. The KEYLIST ON command (the default) causes ISPF to recognize the
preeminence of keylists again. KEYLIST ON and OFF are equivalent to the Enable and Disable keylist
choices on the Function keys pull-downs discussed in “Keylist settings” on page 39.

ISPF default keylist

ISPKYLST is the ISPF default keylist. If you do not specify a keylist to be associated with a panel using the
KEYLIST attribute on the PANEL tag (DTL) or using the )PANEL statement, ISPF uses the keys defined for
ISPKYLST to display in the function area of the panel when it is displayed. The key settings and forms for
ISPKYLST are as shown in Table 3 on page 34.

Table 3. ISPKYLST key settings

Key Command Form
F1 HELP Short
F2 SPLIT Long
F3 EXIT Short
F9 SWAP Long

34 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Settings (option 0)

Table 3. ISPKYLST key settings (continued)

Key Command Form
F12 CANCEL Short
F13 HELP Short
F14 SPLIT Long
F15 EXIT Short
F21 SWAP Long
F24 CANCEL Short

ISPF default keylist for help panels

You can specify a keylist to be associated with a help panel by using the keylist attribute on the HELP tag
(DTL) or by using a )PANEL statement in your panel definition. If you do not specify a keylist, ISPF uses the
keys defined for ISPHELP to display in the function area of the help panel when it is displayed. The key
settings and forms for ISPHELP are shown in Table 4 on page 35.

Table 4. ISPHELP key settings

Key Command Form
F1 HELP Short
F2 SPLIT Long
F3 EXIT Short
F5 EXHELP Short
F6 KEYSHELP Short
F7 UP Long
F8 DOWN Long
F9 SWAP Long
F10 LEFT Long
F11 RIGHT Long
F12 CANCEL Short

Figure 31 on page 36 shows the Function keys pull-down on the ISPF Settings panel action bar. Each
pull-down choice is described following the panel.

Settings (option 0) 35
Settings (option 0)

Log/List Function keys Colors Environ Workstation Identifier Help

───────── ┌───────────────────────────────────┐ ──────────────────────────────
│ 1. Non-Keylist PF Key settings │
│ 2. Keylist settings... │ More: +
Options │ 3. Tailor function key display │ Graphics
Enter " │ *. Show all function keys │ ly printer type 2
/ Comm │ 5. Show partial function keys │ ce name . . . .
/ Pane │ 6. Remove function key display │ ct ratio . . . 0
/ Long │ *. Use private and shared │
/ Tab │ 8. Use only shared │
Tab │ 9. Disable keylists │ l
/ Rest │ *0. Enable keylists │ t field pad . . B
Sess ⋘───────────────────────────────────┘ and delimiter . ;
/ Jump from leader dots
Edit PRINTDS Command
/ Always show split line
Enable EURO sign
/ Scroll member list

Terminal Characteristics
Screen format 2 1. Data 2. Std 3. Max 4. Part
Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 31. Function keys pull-down on the ISPF settings panel action bar (ISPISMMN)

Non-keylist PF key settings

When you select Non-Keylist PF key settings from the Function keys pull-down on the ISPF Settings panel
action bar, the PF Key Definitions and Labels panel shown in Figure 32 on page 37 is displayed. If you
enter the KEYS command on the command line of any panel, the system displays one of two panels:
• If you are not using keylists (that is, keylists are disabled) or if there is no keylist associated with the
panel from which you enter the KEYS command, the PF Key Definitions and Labels panel shown in
Figure 32 on page 37 is displayed.
• If you are using keylists (that is, keylists are enabled) and there is a keylist associated with the panel
from which you enter the KEYS command, the Keylist Change panel shown in Figure 37 on page 41 is
displayed.
If you define your application panels using panel definition statements, use the PF Key Definitions and
Labels - Primary Keys panel to assign function keys and associated labels to ISPF commands.
Note: See “Keylist settings” on page 39 to find out how to assign function keys that are associated with a
keylist.

36 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Settings (option 0)

PF Key Definitions and Labels

More: +
Number of PF Keys . . . 12 Terminal type . : 3278

PF1 . . . HELP
PF2 . . . SPLIT
PF3 . . . END
PF4 . . . RETURN
PF5 . . . RFIND
PF6 . . . RCHANGE
PF7 . . . UP
PF8 . . . DOWN
PF9 . . . SWAP
PF10 . . LEFT
PF11 . . RIGHT
PF12 . . RETRIEVE

PF1 label . . PF2 label . . PF3 label . .

PF4 label . . PF5 label . . PF6 label . .
PF7 label . . PF8 label . . PF9 label . .
PF10 label . . PF11 label . . PF12 label . .

Press ENTER key to display alternate keys. Enter END command to exit.
Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F12=Cancel

Figure 32. PF Key Definitions and Labels panel (ISPOPT3D)

Note: The panel in Figure 32 on page 37 is displayed for terminals with 12 function keys. For terminals
with 24 function keys, the first panel displayed shows the primary keys (F1-F12). When you press the
Enter key, ISPF displays a panel showing the alternate keys (F13-F24). To alternate between the two
panels, press the Enter key.
You can assign function keys to system commands, such as HELP or END, to commands that are
meaningful within a particular function or environment, such as the Edit FIND and CHANGE commands,
and to line commands, such as the Edit or dialog test I or D commands.
Before changing function key assignments, verify the terminal type selected on the ISPF Settings panel
and the number of function keys (12 or 24). For a list of valid terminal types refer to Figure 23 on page 21.
You can define or change a function key function simply by equating the key to a command. For example:

PF9 . . . CHANGE ALL ABC XYZ

PF12 . . PRINT

In the example, F9 has been equated to an Edit command, and F12 has been equated to the system-
defined PRINT command.
If you enter a blank for any function key definition, the key is restored to its ISPF default.
A function key definition beginning with a colon ( : ) is treated as a special case. The colon is stripped off,
and the command to which the key is equated is inserted in the first input field on the line at which the
cursor is currently positioned.
A function key definition beginning with a greater-than sign ( > ) is another special case. It causes the
command to be passed to the dialog, regardless of whether the command appears in the command
tables. When an ISPF function is executing, do not press the RESET key and then attempt to enter
information or use a function key, because the results are unpredictable.
The label fields shown in Figure 32 on page 37 allow you to specify user-defined labels for the displayed
representations of function key definitions. This provides for displaying meaningful words of eight
characters or fewer, rather than the first eight, possibly meaningless, characters of a lengthy function key
definition.
If a label is not assigned, the definitions displayed for that function key consist of the first eight characters
of the function key definition.

Settings (option 0) 37
Settings (option 0)

If the label value is BLANK, the function key number and the equal sign display, but the value portion of
that function key definition displays as actual blanks. This label might be used if, for example, a function
key is not defined or if it is meaningless to the user, but the dialog developer wants each function key
number to appear sequentially in the function key definition lines.
No function key information, not even the number, appears if the label value for that key is NOSHOW.
Figure 33 on page 38 shows how the function key panel can be used to assign definitions and labels. In
this example, F4 has been equated to a TSO data management command, while F12 has been equated to
a command that requests job submission. Labels for several function keys are defined as well.

PF Key Definitions and Labels

More: +
Number of PF Keys . . . 24 Terminal type . : 3278

PF1 . . . HELP
PF2 . . . SPLIT
PF3 . . . END
PF4 . . . TSO LISTALC ST
PF5 . . . RFIND
PF6 . . . RCHANGE
PF7 . . . UP
PF8 . . . DOWN
PF9 . . . SWAP
PF10 . . LEFT
PF11 . . RIGHT
PF12 . . TSO SUBMIT NOTIFY

PF1 label . . PF2 label . . BLANK PF3 label . .

PF4 label . . DATASETS PF5 label . . FIND PF6 label . . CHANGE
PF7 label . . NOSHOW PF8 label . . NOSHOW PF9 label . .
PF10 label . . PF11 label . . PF12 label . . SUBMIT

Press ENTER key to display alternate keys. Enter END command to exit.
Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F12=Cancel

Figure 33. Using the PF Key Definitions and Labels panel (ISPOPT3E)

This figure shows the function key settings that are displayed on a panel when defined using the key
definitions and labels in Figure 33 on page 38.

------------------------ EMPLOYEE SERIAL -------------- DUPLICATE NUMBER

COMMAND ===>

ENTER EMPLOYEE SERIAL BELOW:

EMPLOYEE SERIAL ==> 598304 (MUST BE 6 NUMERIC DIGITS)

PRESS ENTER TO DISPLAY NEXT SCREEN FOR ENTRY OF EMPLOYEE DATA.

PRESS END KEY (PF3) TO END THIS SESSION.

F1=HELP F2= F3=END F4=DATASETS F5=FIND F6=CHANGE

F9=SWAP F10=LEFT F11=RIGHT F12=SUBMIT

Figure 34. Example screen with function key definition lines

38 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Settings (option 0)

Keylist settings
To create or change a keylist associated with your panels, or to refer to or delete a keylist help panel from
your keylist, select the " Keylist settings" choice from the Function keys pull-down on the ISPF Settings
panel action bar, or enter the KEYLIST command. The first panel displayed is similar to Figure 35 on page
39. If you Enter the KEYS command from a panel that uses a keylist, the keylist change panel for the
keylist active on the original panel is displayed.

┌─────────────────────────── Keylist Utility ───────────────────────────┐

─ │ File View │ ──
│ ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│ Keylist Utility for ISR Row 1 to 11 of 16 │ +
O │ │
│ Actions: N=New E=Edit V=View D=Delete /=None │
│ │
│ Keylist Type │
│ ISRHELP SHARED │
│ ISRHLP2 SHARED │
│ ISRNAB SHARED │
│ ISRNSAB SHARED │
│ ISRREFL SHARED │
│ ISRREFO SHARED │
│ ISRSAB SHARED *** Currently active keylist *** │
│ ISRSCRVT SHARED │
│ ISRSLAPP SHARED │
│ ISRSNAB SHARED │
T │ ISRSPBC SHARED │
│ │
│ Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE │
C │ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward │
│ F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel │
F ⋘───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 35. Keylist Utility panel (ISPKLUP)

In Figure 35 on page 39, ISPHELP, ISPHLP2, ISPNAB, ISPSAB, ISPSNAB, ISPTEST, ISRHELP, ISRNAB, and
ISRNSAB have already been created for application ISR. ISPSAB, the currently active keylist, and
ISPSNAB are keylists for the keylist utility panels. ISPKYLST is the ISPF default keylist for any DTL
application panel or any panel defined with a )PANEL section that does not have a keylist defined.
ISPHELP is the ISPF keylist for help panels created using DTL or using a )PANEL section.
The application ID is shown on the title line of the panel (ISR in Figure 35 on page 39) and defaults to the
application ID of the keys table in which the keylist was found when the KEYLIST command was entered.
You can specify the keylist application ID on the )PANEL statement, or, if using DTL, it can be specified
when you call the ISPF conversion utility using the KEYLAPPL option on the ISPDTLC command. If the
panel does not specify an application ID, ISPF searches the currently executing application's keys table
for a keylist that has the same name as the name specified on the PANEL tag. If the keylist is not found,
and the current application ID is not ISP, ISPF searches the ISP application.
The column marked Type indicates whether a keylist is shared or is a private copy. For information about
the KEYLIST SHARED and KEYLIST PRIVATE system commands, see the topic about Using Commands,
Function Keys, and Cursor Selection in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I. Shared keylists are created by the
ISPF DTL Conversion Utility. They cannot be deleted by the keylist utility. If a shared keylist is modified by
the keylist utility, it is saved as a private keylist copy in a table named xxxxPROF, where xxxx is the
application ID. The keylist utility now shows the keylist as a private copy. If you have issued the KEYLIST
SHARED command, you can still modify a keylist, but you cannot see the changes reflected in the function
keys until the KEYLIST PRIVATE command is issued.
Note: The keylist utility is meant for users to modify function keys for their own use. To define function
keys for all users of an application or for site-wide use, the definitions in the Dialog Tag Language should
be modified and a new xxxxKEYS table should be generated.
The Keylist Utility panel action bar choices function as follows:
File
Allows you to create a new keylist, to edit, view, or delete existing keylists, or to exit the keylist utility.

Settings (option 0) 39
Settings (option 0)

View
Enables you to display another set of keylists. These options are described in “View pull-down” on
page 43.

File pull-down
To create, edit, view, or delete a keylist, use either of these methods:
• Use a slash in the Select column to select a keylist from those displayed, then select the appropriate
choice from the File pull-down.
• Select a keylist from those displayed using one of these actions: N(New), E(Edit), V(View), or D(Delete).
If you use N(New), you are prompted for the name of the keylist you are about to create.
The choices on the File pull-down function as follows:
New
To create a keylist, enter the keylist name when prompted. You are prompted after selecting New from
the File pull-down, or after typing N next to any displayed keylist and pressing Enter. The screen
shown in Figure 36 on page 40 is displayed.

┌────────────────────────────── Keylist Utility ──────────────────────────────┐

│ File Defaults │
│ ────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│ ISR Keylist SAMPLE1 Create Row 1 to 9 of 24 │
│ │
│ Make changes and then select File action bar choice. │
│ │
│ Keylist Help Panel Name . . . │
│ │
│ Key Definition Format Label │
│ F1 . . . │
│ F2 . . . │
│ F3 . . . │
│ F4 . . . │
│ F5 . . . │
│ F6 . . . │
│ F7 . . . │
│ F8 . . . │
│ F9 . . . │
│ │
│ Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward │
│ F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel │
⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 36. Keylist Create panel (ISPKLUCR)

The Keylist Create panel action bar choices function as follows:

File
The File pull-down offers these choices:
1
Cancel. Cancels the creation of this keylist and returns to the Keylist Utility panel.
2
Save and Exit. Saves the keylist and returns to the Keylist Utility panel.
Defaults
The Defaults pull-down offers you the choice of the five default function key settings described in
Table 5 on page 40.

Table 5. Default key settings

Condition Function key settings
No defaults No values are filled in.

40 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Settings (option 0)

Table 5. Default key settings (continued)

Condition Function key settings
Non-scrollable, no action bar
F1 HELP
F2 SPLIT
F3 EXIT
F9 SWAP
F12 CANCEL

Scrollable, no action bar

F1 HELP
F2 SPLIT
F3 EXIT
F7 BACKWARD
F8 FORWARD
F9 SWAP
F12 CANCEL

Non-scrollable, with action bar

F1 HELP
F2 SPLIT
F3 EXIT
F9 SWAP
F10 ACTIONS
F12 CANCEL

Scrollable, with action bar

F1 HELP
F2 SPLIT
F3 EXIT
F7 BACKWARD
F8 FORWARD
F9 SWAP
F10 ACTIONS
F12 CANCEL

If you are creating a keylist on a terminal defined to have 24 keys, the 13-24 keys are set the same
as the 1-12 keys. For example, F13 is automatically set the same as F1. HELP, EXIT, ACTIONS, and
CANCEL all have display format SHORT. SPLIT, UP, DOWN, and SWAP have display format LONG.
Edit
To edit the key definitions, display formats, and labels for a keylist, enter the keylist name when
prompted. Select a keylist with a slash and select Edit from the File pull-down, or type E next to a
keylist name and press Enter. The screen shown in Figure 37 on page 41 is displayed, showing the
existing values.

┌────────────────────────────── Keylist Utility ──────────────────────────────┐

│ File │
│ ────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│ SHARED ISR Keylist SAMPLE1 Change Row 1 to 9 of 24 │
│ │
│ Make changes and then select File action bar. │
│ │
│ Keylist Help Panel Name . . . │
│ │
│ Key Definition Format Label │
│ F1 . . . HELP SHORT Help │
│ F2 . . . SPLIT LONG Split │
│ F3 . . . EXIT SHORT Exit │
│ F4 . . . │
│ F5 . . . │
│ F6 . . . │
│ F7 . . . UP LONG Backward │
│ F8 . . . DOWN LONG Forward │
│ F9 . . . SWAP LONG Swap │
│ │
│ Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward │
│ F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel │
⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 37. Keylist Change panel (ISPKLUCH)

Settings (option 0) 41
Settings (option 0)

The Keylist Change panel action bar choice functions as follows:

File
The File pull-down offers these choices:
1
Cancel. Cancels the changes to this keylist and returns to the Keylist Utility panel.
2
Save and Exit. Saves the changes to this keylist and returns to the Keylist Utility panel or the
panel from which you issued the KEYS command.
These fields appear on the Keylist Utility Change panel:
Row x to x of xx
Indicates that you must scroll the panel to access the remaining label definitions.
Keylist Help Panel Name
To refer to a help panel from this keylist, enter the help panel name in this field in this format:
• Must be 1-8 characters
• First, or only, character must be A-Z or a-z
• Remaining characters, if any, must be A-Z, a-z, 0-9
To remove a help panel name from a keylist, replace the help panel name with blanks.
Definition
If a display format or a label is specified, a definition must also be specified. Any definition is valid.
Format
The only valid display formats are:
LONG
The default. Indicates that the key label should be displayed in the function key area when the
FKA command is toggled to the first cycle after OFF.
SHORT
Indicates that the key label should be displayed in the function key area when the FKA
command is toggled to the first or second cycle after OFF. A key will display more often in the
function key area if it is given the SHORT display format.
NO
Indicates that the key label should never be displayed in the function key area, regardless of
the FKA command toggle cycle.
Label
Any label is valid. If the Label field is left blank, it will default to the definition. This will happen
only if the field is blank. If the Label field is not blank and the definition is changed, the Label field
will not change automatically.
View
To view a keylist, but not modify it, enter the keylist name when prompted. Select the keylist with a
slash, then select View from the File pull-down, or type V next to the keylist name displayed and press
Enter. The screen shown in Figure 38 on page 43 is displayed.

42 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Settings (option 0)

┌────────────────────────────── Keylist Utility ──────────────────────────────┐

│ SHARED ISR Keylist SAMPLE1 View Row 1 to 11 of 24 │
│ │
│ The definition of the SAMPLE1 keylist is below. │
│ │
│ Keylist Help Panel Name . . : ISPSAB │
│ │
│ Key Definition Format Label │
│ F1 . . . HELP SHORT Help │
│ F2 . . . SPLIT LONG Split │
│ F3 . . . EXIT SHORT Exit │
│ F4 . . . │
│ F5 . . . │
│ F6 . . . │
│ F7 . . . UP LONG Backward │
│ F8 . . . DOWN LONG Forward │
│ F9 . . . SWAP LONG Swap │
│ F10 . . │
│ F11 . . │
│ │
│ Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward │
│ F9=Swap F12=Cancel │
⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 38. Keylist utility view panel (ISPKLUB)

If you select View, the help panel name, key definitions, display formats, and labels are displayed but
cannot be changed.
Delete
To delete a private copy of a keylist, enter the keylist name when prompted. Select the keylist with a
slash, then select Delete from the File pull-down, or type D next to the keylist name displayed and
press Enter. The Delete Keylist Confirmation pop-up shown in Figure 39 on page 43 is displayed.
Note: Shared keylists can only be deleted using the Dialog Tag Language.

┌─────────────────────────── Keylist Utility ───────────────────────────┐

─ │ File View │ ──
│ ─ ┌───────── Keylist Utility ──────────┐ ─────────────────────────── │
│ │ Delete Keylist Confirmation │ SR Row 2 to 12 of 17 │ +
O │ │ │ │
│ A │ Enter "/" to select option │ e /=View │
│ │ Confirm Delete of SAMPLE1 │ │
│ │ │ │
│ │ │ │
│ │ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit │ │
│ │ F9=Swap F12=Cancel │ │
│ ⋘────────────────────────────────────┘ │
│ ┌────────────────┐ │
│ │ Delete Warning │ │
│ ⋘────────────────┘ *** Currently active keylist *** │
│ ISRSCRVT SHARED │
│ ISRSLAPP SHARED │
│ ISRSNAB SHARED │
T │ ISRSPBC SHARED │
│ │
│ Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE │
C │ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward │
│ F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel │
F ⋘───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 39. Keylist utility with delete keylist confirmation pop-up (ISPKLUP)

Use caution when deleting a keylist from an application that is currently running. If you delete a
keylist that is required by a panel in the application, an error message appears and the panel does not
display.
Exit
Select Exit from the File pull-down to exit the keylist utility.

View pull-down
To display another set of keys on the Keylist Utility panel, select View on the action bar.
The View pull-down choices function as follows:

Settings (option 0) 43
Settings (option 0)

By current panel keylist

Displays the list of keys related to the current panel.
By current dialog keylist
Displays the list of keys related to the dialog that is currently running.
Specify a keylist application ID
Displays the list of keys for another application.

Tailor function key definition display

The Tailor Function Key Definition Display panel (shown in Figure 40 on page 44) allows you to change
the format of the function key definition lines that are displayed at the bottom of the screen. To display
this panel, perform one of these actions:
• Select the "Tailor function key display" choice from the Function keys pull-down.
• Issue the PFSHOW TAILOR command from any command line.

┌───────────────────────────── ISPF Settings ─────────────────────────────┐

─ │ Tailor Function Key Definition Display │
│ │
│ For all terminals: │
O │ Number of keys . . 2 1. 12 │
│ 2. 24 │
│ │
│ Keys per line . . . 1 1. Six │
│ 2. Maximum possible │
│ │
│ Primary range . . . 1 1. Lower - 1 to 12 │
│ 2. Upper - 13 to 24 │
│ │
│ For terminals with 24 PF keys: │
│ Display set . . . . 1 1. Primary - display keys 1 to 12 │
│ 2. Alternate - display keys 13 to 24 │
│ 3. All - display all keys │
│ │
T │ Press ENTER key to save changes. Enter END to save changes and exit. │
│ │
│ Command ===> │
C │ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward │
│ F9=Swap F12=Cancel │
F ⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 40. Tailor Function Key Definition Display panel (ISPOPFA)

From the Tailor Function Key Definition Display panel you can set these function key parameters:
Number of keys
The number of function keys you specify controls the particular set of function key definitions
currently in use.
ISPF automatically determines the terminal type, screen size, and number of function keys:
• If the screen size is greater than 24 lines, but the terminal type specified implies a maximum of 24
screen lines, ISPF sets the terminal type to 3278.
• If you press a function key higher than 12, but the value specified for the number of function keys on
your terminal is 12, ISPF sets the terminal type to 3278 and the number of function keys to 24.
ISPF cannot determine the terminal type or number of function keys in these cases:
• If you switched between a 3277 and 3278 Model 2, both of which are 24-line terminals
• If you switched from a terminal with 24 function keys to a terminal with 12 function keys.
In these cases, you must inform ISPF of the terminal type and number of function keys you are using.
Otherwise, ISPF uses an incorrect character set and invalid function key definitions.
ISPF automatically sets, or changes, the number of function keys in these cases:

44 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Settings (option 0)

• If you specify 3277, ISPF initializes the number of keys to 12.

• If you specify 3278, ISPF initializes the number of keys to whatever was stored from the user's last
ISPF session. If no number is stored from a prior session, the number of keys is initialized to 12.
• If you press a function key higher than 12, ISPF sets the number of keys to 24. ISPF cannot set the
number of keys to 24 for the 3278T terminal.
Keys per line
You can specify the number of keys per line to be displayed on the function key definition lines. Six or
Maximum possible can be specified, indicating either six keys or the maximum possible keys. Six
ensures consistency across all panels. Maximum possible can save space on crowded panels. The
Maximum possible option is forced when you select the Panel display CUA mode option on the ISPF
Settings panel.
Primary range
You can specify that the primary key range be:
Lower
Primary keys are F1-F12.
Upper
Primary Keys are F13-F24.
The default value is lower.
Display set
For terminals with 24 function keys, you can choose to display only the primary set of function keys
(F1-F12, the default range), the alternate set of function keys (F13-24), or all 24 keys. Your display
choices depend on which range you specify for the Primary range option. For terminals with 12
function keys, this setting is ignored.

The Function keys pull-down

The Function keys pull-down provides choices that enable you to display the function keys in various
forms.

Choices for changing PF key definitions

You can change the PF Keys that you have defined by using one of the first three choices on the Function
Keys pull-down. Choosing "Non-keylist PF Key settings" calls the PF Key Definitions and Labels panel,
where you can assign PF keys to ISPF commands, and label them. This choice is like using the KEYS
command.
Choosing "Keylist settings" from the pull-down is like using the KEYLIST command, and the "Tailor
Function Key Display" choice calls up the Tailor Function Key Definition Display panel.

Choices for showing PF keys on the display screen

By selecting "Show all function keys", "Show partial function keys", or "Remove function key display", you
can specify that ISPF use the long form of function key display, the short form of function key display, or
no function keys, respectively.
Each of these pull-down choices has an equivalent PFSHOW and FKA command associated with it. The
commands operate as toggles; the pull-down choices become unavailable if they are the current setting.
This table explains the relationship between the pull-down choices and their related command
combinations.

Settings (option 0) 45
Settings (option 0)

Table 6. Displaying forms of the function keys

Pull-down Choice Command Equivalent Result
Show all function keys Long setting; all available function
PFSHOW
keys displayed. This is the default
PFSHOW ON
setting.
FKA
FKA ON

Show partial function Short setting; a partial listing of the

PFSHOW (second time issued)
keys function keys displayed.
FKA (second time issued)
FKA SHORT*

Remove function key No function keys displayed. If

PFSHOW (third time issued)
display PFSHOW or FKA is issued for a
PFSHOW OFF
fourth time, the display returns to
FKA (third time issued)
the long, or ON, setting.
FKA OFF

Note: * The FKA SHORT command can be issued at any time to invoke the short setting.

Choices for determining who can use your PF keylist

The Function keys pull-down has two choices that are equivalent to the KEYLIST PRIVATE and KEYLIST
SHARED commands:
Use private and shared
Causes ISPF to use the keylist defined as private (equivalent to the KEYLIST PRIVATE command).
Private is the default. It is unavailable if it is the current setting.
Use only shared
Causes ISPF to use the keylist defined as shared (equivalent to KEYLIST SHARED). It is unavailable if
it is the current setting.

Choices for enabling keylists

The Function keys pull-down has two choices that are equivalent to the KEYLIST ON and KEYLIST OFF
commands:
Enable keylists
Causes ISPF to use the keylist defined with the panel (equivalent to the KEYLIST ON command).
Enable keylists is the default. It is unavailable if it is the current setting.
Disable keylists
Causes ISPF to ignore the keylist defined with the panel (equivalent to KEYLIST OFF). It is unavailable
if it is the current setting.

Changing default colors (the Colors action bar choice)

The Colors pull-down on the ISPF Settings action bar provides access to the Global Color Change Utility,
the ISPF CUA Attribute Change Utility, and the Point-and-shoot Color Change panel. In GUI mode, the
choice starts the Global GUI Color Change Utility.

Global colors
For ISPF-supported seven-color terminals, ISPF provides the Global Color Change Utility (on the host)
and the Global GUI Color Change Utility (on the workstation) to allow you to globally change the current
colors ISPF uses for display.
To invoke the utility appropriate for your environment, perform one of these actions:
• Select the Global colors... choice from the Colors pull-down.

46 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Settings (option 0)

• Issue the ISPF system command COLOR from any ISPF command line.
ISPF displays the Global Color Change Utility panel shown in Figure 41 on page 47 if you are running in
host mode; it displays the Global GUI Color Change Utility panel shown in Figure 42 on page 48 if you are
running in GUI mode.

Global color change utility

From the panel shown in Figure 41 on page 47, you can change the ISPF-defined default colors.

┌─────────────────────── ISPF Settings ────────────────────────┐ Help

─ │ Global Color Change Utility │ ───────────
│ │
│ Globally change one or more of the ISPF default colors and │ More: +
O │ press ENTER to immediately see the effect. Clearing a color │
│ field and pressing ENTER restores the default color or │
│ selecting the Defaults point-and-shoot field restores all │
│ default colors. │
│ │
│ Enter the EXIT command to save changes or enter the CANCEL │
│ command to exit without saving. │
│ │
│ ISPF Default Color │
│ Blue . . . . _______ │
│ Red . . . . . _______ │
│ Pink . . . . _______ │
│ Green . . . . _______ │
│ Turquoise . . _______ │
T │ Yellow . . . _______ │
│ White . . . . _______ │
│ Command ===> ____________________________________ Defaults │
C │ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward │
│ F8=Forward F9=Swap F12=Cancel │ 9=Swap
F ⋘──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 41. Global Color Change Utility panel (ISPOPT10)

Enter a new value in the color field beside the ISPF-defined default color to be changed. The valid color
choices are RED, PINK, GREEN, YELLOW, BLUE, TURQ, and WHITE.
Color changes are reflected on the panel display immediately after you press Enter. For example, if you
type BLUE in the field next to RED and press Enter, any panel element attributes defined as red change to
blue.
You can restore an ISPF-defined color to its default value by setting its field to blank and pressing Enter.
To restore all the ISPF-defined colors to their default values, select the Defaults point-and-shoot field at
the end of the command line.
The EXIT command ends the Global Color Change Utility function and saves global color changes in the
ISPSPROF system profile table. The CANCEL command ends the Global Color Change Utility function and
restores the global color definitions as they were before the utility was invoked.
Changes to the globally defined colors affect all logical screens whether they are displayed directly by
ISPF or whether ISPF has requested that GDDM perform the display. Line mode output, fields, and
graphics that the dialog has placed on the screen using direct calls to GDDM are not affected by global
color changes.

Global GUI color change utility

If you have set up the GUI interface, you can change its colors. From the Global GUI Color Change Utility
panel shown in Figure 42 on page 48, you can map each of the seven host colors to one of 16
workstation colors:

Host Colors Workstation Colors

Red Black

Settings (option 0) 47
Settings (option 0)

Host Colors Workstation Colors

Pink Dark blue
Green Dark green
Yellow Dark cyan
Blue Dark red
Turq (turquoise) Dark magenta
White Brown
Light gray
Dark gray
Light blue
Light green
Light cyan
Light red
Light magenta
Yellow
White

Choose colors that contrast with the panel background so that the text can be read easily.

Figure 42. Global GUI color change utility panel (ISPOPTG1)

48 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Settings (option 0)

This panel provides three options for mapping host colors:

1
Host colors for all panel fields. Any colors that you remap affect all panel fields.
2
Host colors for non-CUA attributes only. Any colors that you remap affect only panel fields with non-
CUA attributes.
3
Workstation default colors for all panel fields. Remapping colors will have no effect.
The display will reflect any color changes made immediately when you press Enter.
Note: If a field uses a non-CUA attribute without a color specified, ISPF does not specify a color for the
field and the field defaults to the 3270 default color on the host. That same field defaults to the
workstation default color when it is displayed on the workstation, even if "Host colors for all panel fields"
is selected.

Remapping host colors

From the Global GUI Color Change Utility panel, select a drop-down list button corresponding to one of
the seven host colors, and ISPF displays the drop-down list on the panel, as shown in Figure 43 on page
49.

Figure 43. Color change panel with drop-down list

From the drop-down list, select one of the 16 workstation colors to map to the host color you selected.
For example, if you select the workstation color light magenta to map to the host color red, any panel
element attributes defined as red change to light magenta on the next display.

Settings (option 0) 49
Settings (option 0)

The EXIT command terminates the Global GUI Color Change Utility and saves any global color changes in
the ISPSPROF system profile table. The CANCEL command terminates the Global GUI Color Change Utility
and restores the global color definitions to the values that were in effect before the utility was invoked.
Changes to the globally defined colors affect all logical screens. Background panels and split screen
panels are not immediately affected; the color change does not occur until the panels are redisplayed.

CUA cttributes
ISPF provides the CUA Attribute Change Utility to allow you to change the default values of panel colors,
intensities, and highlights for panel element attributes. See the z/OS ISPF Dialog Developer's Guide and
Reference for a description of TYPE values for CUA panel element attributes.
To invoke the ISPF CUA Attribute Change Utility, perform one of these actions:
• Select the CUA attributes... choice from the Colors pull-down.
• Issue the ISPF system command CUAATTR from any ISPF command line.

The CUA Attribute Change Utility panel shown in Figure 44 on page 50 is displayed. This is a scrollable
panel that contains the current values for CUA panel element attribute colors, intensities, and highlights.

┌─────────────────────────────── ISPF Settings ───────────────────────────────┐

│ CUA Attribute Change Utility │
│ │
│ Change colors, intensities, or highlights for panel attribute elements. │
│ Enter the EXIT command to save changes or enter the CANCEL command to exit │
│ without saving. To restore the defaults for a type, clear the field and │
│ press Enter or select the Defaults point-and-shoot field to restore all │
│ default settings for all types. │
│ │
│ Panel Element Color Intensity Highlight │
│ More: + │
│ AB Selected Choice . . . . . . YELLOW LOW NONE │
│ AB Separator Line . . . . . . BLUE LOW NONE │
│ AB Unselected Choice . . . . . WHITE HIGH NONE │
│ Action Message Text . . . . . RED HIGH NONE │
│ Active Window Frame . . . . . BLUE HIGH │
│ Caution Text . . . . . . . . . YELLOW HIGH NONE │
│ Choice Entry Field . . . . . . TURQ LOW USCORE │
│ Column Heading . . . . . . . . BLUE HIGH NONE │
│ Descriptive Text . . . . . . . GREEN LOW NONE │
│ Command ===> Defaults │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward │
│ F9=Swap F12=Cancel │
⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 44. CUA Attribute Change Utility panel (ISPOPT11)

You can change the default values by typing over the existing values in the table with new values. Table 7
on page 50 shows valid change values:
You can restore an attribute to its default value by setting its field to blank and pressing Enter. To restore
all the attributes to their default values, select the Defaults point-and-shoot field at the end of the
command line.

Table 7. Valid CUA attribute change values

Color Choices Intensity Choices Highlight Choices
RED HIGH NONE
PINK LOW BLINK
GREEN REVERSE
YELLOW USCORE
BLUE

50 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Settings (option 0)

Table 7. Valid CUA attribute change values (continued)

Color Choices Intensity Choices Highlight Choices
TURQ
WHITE

In the CUA Attribute Change Utility table, if a field is left blank and Enter is pressed, the field defaults to
the ISPF provided CUA-defined default value. Changes made to AB Selected Choice, AB Unselected
Choice, Action Message Text, Function Keys, Informational Message Text, and Warning Message Text take
effect immediately. Changes to other panel elements are reflected in the next panel display. The values of
the panel colors, intensities, and highlights are saved across ISPF invocations in your ISPF system profile
table, ISPSPROF. The changes to the panel element values affect all logical screens.
The CUA Attribute Change Utility affects only ISPF's CUA-defined attribute keywords. For example, the
CUA Attribute Change Utility does not override this panel element attribute:

% TYPE(OUTPUT) COLOR(RED)

Color changes made using the ISPF Global Color Change Utility override changes made using the ISPF
CUA Attribute Change Utility. For example, you can use the Global Color Change Utility and change red to
blue. You might then use the CUA Attribute Change Utility and change normal text to red. Normal text will
display as blue.
The ISPF-supported CUA-defined default values for the panel element attributes are listed in z/OS ISPF
Dialog Developer's Guide and Reference.

Point-and-shoot
The Point-and-Shoot panel element on the CUA Attribute Change Utility panel (shown in Figure 45 on
page 51) allows you to adjust the color, intensity and highlighting of point-and-shoot fields.
See the ISPF User Interface topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I for information on the point-and-
shoot feature.
To display this panel, positioned on the Point-and-Shoot panel element, perform one of these actions:
• Select the Point-and-Shoot... choice from the Colors pull-down.
• Issue the ISPF system command PSCOLOR from any ISPF command line.

┌─────────────────────────────── ISPF Settings ───────────────────────────────┐

│ CUA Attribute Change Utility │
│ │
│ Change colors, intensities, or highlights for panel attribute elements. │
│ Enter the EXIT command to save changes or enter the CANCEL command to exit │
│ without saving. To restore the defaults for a type, clear the field and │
│ press Enter or select the Defaults point-and-shoot field to restore all │
│ default settings for all types. │
│ │
│ Panel Element Color Intensity Highlight │
│ More: - │
│ PD Unavailable Choices . . . . BLUE LOW NONE │
│ Reference Phrase . . . . . . . WHITE HIGH NONE │
│ Scroll Information . . . . . . WHITE HIGH NONE │
│ Sel. Available Choices . . . . WHITE LOW NONE │
│ Sel. Unavailable Choices . . . BLUE LOW NONE │
│ Variable Output Info. . . . . TURQ LOW NONE │
│ Warning Message Text . . . . . YELLOW HIGH NONE │
│ Warning Text . . . . . . . . . RED HIGH NONE │
│ Work Area Separator Line . . . BLUE LOW NONE │
│ Command ===> Defaults │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward │
│ F9=Swap F12=Cancel │
⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 45. CUA Attribute Change Utility panel positioned on the point-and-shoot panel element (ISPOPT1X)

Settings (option 0) 51
Settings (option 0)

To change any of the three attributes, type over the existing values. The changes are reflected on the next
panel displayed after you exit this panel. Table 8 on page 52 shows valid change values:

Table 8. Valid point-and-shoot change values

Color Choices Intensity Choices Highlight Choices
RED HIGH NONE
PINK LOW BLINK
GREEN REVERSE
YELLOW USCORE
BLUE
TURQ
WHITE

Specifying ISPF ENVIRON settings (the Environ action bar choice)

Figure 46 on page 52 shows the ISPF ENVIRON Command Settings panel from which you can choose
parameter options for the ENVIRON command. To display this panel, perform one of these actions:
• Select the Environ choice on the ISPF Settings panel action bar, then select option 1, "Environ
settings…".
• Issue the ISPF system command ENVIRON from any ISPF command line.

Log/List Function keys Colors Environ Workstation Identifier Help

┌─────────────────────────────── ISPF Settings ───────────────────────────────┐
│ ISPF ENVIRON Command Settings │
│ │
│ Enter "/" to select option │
│ Enable a dump for a subtask abend when not in ISPF TEST mode │
│ │
│ Terminal Tracing (TERMTRAC) │
│ Enable . . . 3 1. Enable terminal tracing (ON) │
│ 2. Enable terminal tracing when a terminal error is │
│ encountered (ERROR) │
│ 3. Disable terminal tracing (OFF) │
│ DDNAME . . . ISPSNAP (DDNAME for TERMTRAC ON, ERROR, or DUMP.) │
│ │
│ Terminal Status (TERMSTAT) │
│ Enable . . . 3 1. Yes, invoke TERMSTAT immediately │
│ 2. Query terminal information │
│ 3. No │
│ │
│ Rexx ENVBLK check (REXCHK) │
│ Enable . . . 3 1. ON, check Rexx ENVBLK pointer │
│ 2. Dump, dump if bad ENVBLK pointer │
│ 3. OFF │
│ Command ===> │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward │
│ F9=Swap F12=Cancel │
⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 46. ISPF ENVIRON Settings panel (ISPENVA)

The panel text provides an overview of the command and its parameters. For a complete description of
the ENVIRON command and its parameters, see z/OS ISPF Dialog Developer's Guide and Reference.

52 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Settings (option 0)

Specifying shared profile settings (the Environ action bar choice)

Figure 47 on page 53 shows the Multi-Logon Profile Sharing Settings panel from which you can choose
parameter options for the SHRPROF command. To display this panel, perform one of these actions:
• Select the Environ choice on the ISPF Settings panel action bar, then select option 2, "Shared Profile
settings…".
• Issue the ISPF system command SHRPROF from any ISPF command line.

Log/List Function keys Colors Environ Workstation Identifier Help

┌─────────────────────────────── ISPF Settings ───────────────────────────────┐
ISPISSA Multi-Logon Profile Sharing Settings
Command ===>

Profile Enqueue settings

Enter "/" to select option ENQ Lock Wait . . . . . . 1000
/ Prompt for Profile ENQ Lockout ENQ Lock Retry Count . . 1

Profile conflicts
System Profile conflicts Reference List conflicts
1 1. Keep 1 1. Keep
2. Discard 2. Discard
3. Prompt 3. Prompt

ISPF Profile conflicts Edit Profile conflicts

1 1. Keep 1 1. Keep
2. Discard 2. Discard
3. Prompt 3. Prompt

Application Profile conflicts Batch Profile conflicts

1 1. Keep 1 1. Keep
2. Discard 2. Discard
3. Prompt

Other Profile conflicts

1 1. Keep
2. Discard
3. Prompt
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward
F9=Swap F12=Cancel
⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 47. Multi-Logon Profile Sharing Settings (ISPISSA)

The panel text provides an overview of the command and its parameters. For a complete description of
the SHRPROF command and its parameters, see z/OS ISPF Dialog Developer's Guide and Reference.

Specifying workstation parameters (the Workstation action bar choice)

Figure 48 on page 53 shows the Workstation pull-down menu on the ISPF Settings panel action bar.

Log/List Function keys Colors Environ Workstation Identifier Help

───────────────────────────────────── ┌───────────────────────────────────────┐
ISPF │ 1. Workstation connection... │
│ 2. GUI panel settings... │
Options │ *. Workstation Tool Integration... │
Enter "/" to select option │ 4. Download ISPF C/S component... │
/ Command line at bottom │ *. Disconnect from the workstation │
/ Panel display CUA mode ⋘───────────────────────────────────────┘
/ Long message in pop-up
/ Tab to action bar choices
Tab to point-and-shoot fields General

Figure 48. Workstation pull-down on the ISPF settings panel action bar (ISPISMMN)

Settings (option 0) 53
Settings (option 0)

From this pull-down you can start a workstation session, specify GUI panel settings, configure the
Workstation Tool Integration dialog, download the ISPF C/S component, and disconnect from the
workstation.
Before you can perform these tasks, you must have completed these tasks:
• Successful installation and initialization of TCP/IP or APPC.
'Appendix B: Configuring Communications for the ISPF Client/Server', in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol
I, contains procedures to help you to test whether you have satisfied this requirement.
• Successful installation of the ISPF Workstation Agent component.
See 'Appendix A: Installing the Client/Server component', in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I for
additional information.
• Initialization of the ISPF WSA component.
To initialize the WSA:
– If you have created a shortcut on your desktop that automatically launches the WSA, double-click the
icon.
If you do not have a shortcut icon:
1. Go to a command line in your operating system (Windows or AIX®).
2. Change to the directory that contains your WSA executable file.
3. Enter WSA.
The Workstation Agent window is displayed on your workstation.

Figure 49. The Workstation Agent window

This window represents the executing ISPF C/S workstation program. For more information about
this window, see 'Appendix A: Installing the Client/Server component', in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide
Vol I. You can minimize this window but you cannot close it while ISPF is running in GUI mode.
Note: If you do not close the WSA window after you end an ISPF C/S session, you will not have to
repeat this step to start another ISPF C/S session; that is, as long as the ISPF C/S component has
been started, you can start a workstation session.
Note: You can specify the GUI panel settings without having established a workstation connection and
without running in GUI mode. However, your changes will not be seen until you next run GUI mode.

Workstation connection
When you select "Workstation connection" from the Workstation pull-down, one of two events can occur.
Either the Initiate Workstation Session panel is displayed, or ISPF tells you that a newer version of the
Workstation Agent code is available (if your system programmer has not disabled this feature).

Initiate the workstation connection

If you select "Workstation connection" and your Workstation Agent code matches the latest level
available, the Initiate Workstation Connection panel appears, as shown in Figure 50 on page 55.

54 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Settings (option 0)

┌──────────────────────────── ISPF Settings ────────────────────────────┐

─ │ Initiate Workstation Connection │ ──
│ │
│ / Save values in system profile? (/=Yes) │ +
O │ │
│ Workstation Connection GUI Network Protocol │
│ 1 1. With GUI display 1 1. TCP/IP │
│ 2. Without GUI display 2. APPC │
│ 3. Use ISPDTPRF file │
│ │
│ GUI Title │
│ │
│ TCP/IP Address │
│ │
│ APPC Address │
│ │
│ │
│ │
T │ Host Codepage . . . Host Character Set . . . │
│ │
│ GUI Window Frame Default Window Background Color │
│ 1 1. Standard (STD) 1 1. Dialog (DLG) │
│ 2. Fixed (FIX) 2. Standard (STD) │
│ 3. Dialog (DLG) │
│ │
T │ Press ENTER to initiate a session. Press EXIT or CANCEL to return │
│ without initiating a session. │
│ Command ===> │
C │ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward │
│ F9=Swap F12=Cancel │
F ⋘───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 50. Initiate Workstation Connection panel (ISPISMGI)

Note: If your WSA is not running, this panel will appear but you will not be able to establish a connection.
Note: If the SAF resource ISPF.WSA is defined in the FACILITY class and you are not permitted access to
that resource, this panel will appear, but you will not be able to establish a connection.
The Initiate Workstation Session panel allows you to specify that you want to start a GUI session. Starting
a GUI session from this panel if you are in split screen mode or 3290 partition mode is not supported. If
you select Workstation connection, you must specify the information in these fields, as appropriate:
Save values in system profile?
The default for this setting is YES. Any changes to this field are saved in the user's system profile.
Workstation connection
Allows you to specify one of these types of connections for your workstation session:
With GUI display
A GUI interface is provided for this session.
Without GUI display
A standard ISPF type of interface is provided for this session.
GUI Network Protocol
The type of network you use to connect the workstation to the host: TCP/IP or APPC.
You can also select the third option "Use ISPDTPRF file", to specify that ISPF get your network
address from the file allocated to DD ISPDTPRF. The file can be sequential or a member of a PDS, and
it can be fixed blocked (FB) or variable blocked (VB). Each line of the file should be formatted as
follows: userid WORKSTAT protocol_id:network_address, where:
userid
user's TSO userid
protocol_id
network protocol identifier, either ip for TCP/IP or lu for APPC.
network_address
workstation address
For example, KEENE WORKSTAT ip:9.45.202.69.

Settings (option 0) 55
Settings (option 0)

GUI Title
The title you want displayed in the window frame of your GUI session. This value will be used if dialog
variable ZWINTTL or ZAPPTTL is not found.
TCP/IP Address
The workstation's IP address. Required if you specified TCP/IP in the GUI Network Protocol field. The
TCP/IP Address prompt is point-and-shoot text. If selected, a pop-up window is displayed containing
the last five addresses saved in the system profile.
A TCP/IP address can be in dotted decimal format or in domain name format. Dotted decimal format is
a sequence of decimal numbers separated by periods, for example, 9.87.654.321.
A TCP/IP address in domain name format consists of one or more domain qualifiers separated by
periods. The minimum specification for addresses within the same domain is a TCP/IP host name, for
example, jsmith. The fully-qualified domain name for jsmith is formed by appending the appropriate
subdomain name and root domain name to jsmith, such as jsmith.raleigh.ibm.com. To use domain
naming, a domain name server must be active and providing domain name resolution for domain
names within your TCP/IP network. The domain name server address is determined by the value of
the NSINTERADDR statement in the TCP/IP configuration data set. ISPF must be able to locate the
TCP/IP configuration data set as described in the section on configuring TCP/IP connections in the
z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
If an asterisk (*) is specified, the TCP/IP address is obtained automatically from the value of the
system variable ZIPADDR.
APPC Address
The workstation's APPC network name. Required if you specified APPC in the GUI Network Protocol
field. The APPC Address prompt is point-and-shoot text. If selected, a pop-up window is displayed
containing the last five addresses saved in the system profile.
An APPC address can be in fully-qualified LU name format or in symbolic destination name format. A
fully-qualified LU name format consists of a network identifier and an LU name, separated by a period.
For example, USIBMNR.NRI98X00 is a fully-qualified LU name.
An APPC address in symbolic destination name format consists of a 1- to 8-character name such as
JSMITH. The symbolic destination name must be defined as a DESTNAME and the corresponding
fully-qualified LU name must be defined as the associated PARTNER_LU in the APPC/MVS side
information.
Host Codepage
The host code page value used in translating data from the host to the workstation. This value must
be specified with a Host Character Set value if it is to be used. If only one, or neither, of these values is
specified, the values from the terminal query are used. If your terminal or emulator does not support
code pages, the CODEPAGE and CHARSET parameter values on the ISPSTART command are used. If
the ISPSTART values are not specified, the default code page and character set is ENGLISH.
Host Character Set
The host character set value used in translating data from the host to the workstation. This value must
be specified with a Host Codepage value if it is to be used. If only one, or neither, of these values is
specified, the values from the terminal query are used. If your terminal or emulator does not support
code pages, the CODEPAGE and CHARSET parameter values on the ISPSTART command are used. If
the ISPSTART values are not specified, the default code page and character set is ENGLISH.
GUI Window Frame
Allows you to specify one of these types of window frames for your GUI session:
1
Standard (STD). A GUI window frame that can be resized and that has max/min buttons.
2
Fixed (FIX). A GUI window frame that has a min button but cannot be resized.
3
Dialog (DLG). A GUI window frame that cannot be resized and that does not have max/min
buttons.

56 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Settings (option 0)

Note: Pop-up panels will always be displayed in dialog window frames.

Default window background color
Select the background color:
Dialog (DLG)
Standard (STD)
When you complete the fields shown in Figure 50 on page 55 and press Enter, the WSA connection panel
is displayed in a separate window (unless your system has been set up to bypass it - see the topic about
the System Register panel in "Installing the Client/Server component", in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I
for details).

Figure 51. WSA connection panel

This panel indicates the requestor and the type of connection requested. Click on Yes to accept the
connection as described, or No to reject the connection.
If you accept the connection, the ISPF Settings panel is displayed. This will be in standard or GUI mode,
depending on the option selected in the With GUI display field.

Client/server component update

If you select "Workstation connection" but the WSA code does not match the latest level available, the
Client/Server Component Update panel is displayed, as shown in Figure 52 on page 58.

Settings (option 0) 57
Settings (option 0)

Note: If you have not started the WSA, the Initiate Workstation Connection panel displays, but you will
not be able to establish a connection.

┌──────────────────────────── ISPF Settings ────────────────────────────┐

─ │ Client/Server Component Update │ ──
│ │
│ Your workstation agent is level . . . . . . . . : 439 │ +
O │ │
│ It is recommended that you download level . . . : 505 │
│ │
│ Download New Agent? │
│ 1 1. Download now │
│ 2. Do not download │
│ 3. Cease warnings │
│ │
│ Directory to copy file to: │
│ │
│ │
│ Data Set to copy file from: │
│ 'ISP.SISPGUI' │
│ │
T │ Enter "/" to select option │
│ Create directory to which the file is to be copied. │
│ Command ===> │
C │ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward │
│ F9=Swap F12=Cancel │
F ⋘───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 52. Client/Server Component Update panel (ISPDTVD1)

From this panel, you can download the latest WSA or continue to use your current WSA, and even tell
ISPF not to notify you again if your WSA does not match the latest available. In the Download New Agent?
field, you can specify one of three choices:
Download now
The download copies an installation program for the latest level of the WSA. You must specify the
target directory in the "Directory to copy file to:" field. To create a new directory (one that does not
already exist on your workstation) for the file, enter a slash mark (/) in the "Create directory to which
the file is to be copied" field. The "Data Set to copy file from:" field should already be initialized by
your system programmer. If it is not, you must specify the host data set that holds the latest WSA
installation program. For example, 'SYS1.ISP.SISPGUI'.
After downloading the installation program for the WSA, end your ISPF/GUI connection, terminate
your old Workstation Agent, and run the installation program to install the new one.
Do not download
You might want to download the new WSA later. If so, select "Do not download". ISPF does not
download the new installation program at this time, but will prompt you again the next time you start
a GUI session. Of course, you can always download the agent yourself with the Client/Server
Component download function of the ISPF Utilities panel at any time. See “Download data set to
workstation utility (option 3.7)” on page 174 for more information.
Cease warnings
ISPF does not download the agent installation program and you will not be notified again that your
current WSA does not match the latest available on the host until an even higher level is available.
That is, if you currently run level 433 and you have asked to Cease warnings at level 440, ISPF will not
notify you again until at least level 441 is available.
Upon successful download of the new agent, the panel in Figure 53 on page 59 appears. This panel gives
you the option to end your GUI session and begin the installation immediately (by choosing option 1), or
continuing your present session and installing the new Workstation Agent at a later time. See “Download
data set to workstation utility (option 3.7)” on page 174 for more information.

58 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Settings (option 0)

┌──────────────────────────── ISPF Settings ────────────────────────────┐

─ │ ISPF Client/Server Component Install Program │ ──
│ │
│ The ISPF Client/Server Component workstation install program has been │ +
O │ copied to your workstation in the current working directory of your │
│ current workstation agent. │
│ │
│ End your workstation connection and resume the installation by running│
│ the install program ISPFINST on your workstation in the working │
│ directory of your active workstation agent. The program is a self │
│ extracting executable that will result in additional files being │
│ generated on your workstation. │
│ │
│ Do you wish to end your workstation connection now? │
│ 1. Yes, end workstation connection now │
│ 2. No, do not end workstation connection now │
│ │
│ │
T │ │
│ │
│ Command ===> │
C │ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward │
│ F9=Swap F12=Cancel │
F ⋘───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 53. Client/Server Component Install Program panel (ISPWSD0A)

GUI panel settings

When you select "GUI panel settings" from the Workstation pull-down, the GUI Settings pop-up window is
displayed, as shown in Figure 54 on page 59.
Note: You do not need to have a Workstation connection running, or to be in GUI mode, to change these
settings.

Log/List Function keys Colors Environ Workstation Identifier Help

─ ┌───────────────────────── ISPF Settings ─────────────────────────┐ ────────
│ GUI Settings │
│ More: + │ e: +
O │ Close Window │
│ 1 1. Cancel │
│ 2. End │
│ 3. Exit │
│ 4. Return │
│ │
│ Enter "/" to select option │
│ / Display ENTER Key │
│ / Accelerator Support │
│ / Continue 3270 Mode After Losing Workstation Connection │
│ / Download Images │
│ Make Path for Images │
│ │
│ Path for Images: │
T │ │
│ Command ===> │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward │
C │ F8=Forward F9=Swap F12=Cancel │
⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘ wap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 54. GUI settings pop-up window (ISPISMGS)

The GUI Settings pop-up window allows you to specify these GUI parameters:
Close Window
Allows you to specify that one of these commands be processed when you close a GUI window:
• CANCEL
• END
• EXIT
• RETURN.

Settings (option 0) 59
Settings (option 0)

Display Enter Key

Select this field to display an Enter push button at the bottom of all GUI panels.
Accelerator Support
Select this field to use accelerator keys in this session.
3270 mode after losing workstation connection
Select this field if you want the ISPF session to continue in the 3270 emulator session rather than
abend with code 989 when the workstation connection is lost while running in GUI mode.
Download Images
Select this field to download images from the host library defined to ddname ISPILIB, to the
workstation image path. If you are not running ISPF in GUI mode, this setting is ignored.
Make Path for Images
Select this field to have ISPF create the image path you specify, when the image path you specify does
not already exist on the workstation.
Path for images
In GUI mode, this field enables you to specify a workstation path for images. The image path can be
244 characters long with no embedded blanks. The image path you specify must follow the accepted
path notation for whichever operating system you are using. If you do not specify an image path, ISPF
puts the image requested into the workstation's working directory.

Workstation tool integration

ISPF enables you to edit host data on the workstation, and workstation data on the host. ISPF calls this
function distributed editing.
The ISPF Workstation Tool Integration dialog, or tool integrator, is a workstation customization tool that
enables any workstation application to use data from an MVS host system. After setting up the tool
integrator, your workstation-installed applications can interact with the ISPF View and Edit functions and
services. Data flow goes both ways with the tool integrator connection. You can work with workstation
files on the host or with host files on the workstation.
Overall, the tool integrator enables MVS-based users to use workstation applications and then share data
through MVS. MVS, its file system, and RACF®, provide data integrity, security, and distribution capabilities
beyond the workstation. Sharing data this way can reduce your installation's dependence on complex
LANs, off-load CPU cycles to your workstation, and take advantage of workstation tools.

Starting the tool integration dialog

Before you can use the tool integrator, the Workstation Agent must have been installed and configured.
See “Workstation connection” on page 54 for details on these prerequisite tasks.
You can run the tool integrator in either GUI mode or the standard ISPF mode. For information about
running ISPF in GUI mode, see the topic about the ISPF user interface in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Note: You cannot issue a WSDISCON command or service call while running the workstation tool
integration dialog.
You can display the Workstation Tool Integration Configuration panel, shown in Figure 55 on page 61,
using any of these methods:
• Select Workstation Tool Integration from the Workstation pull-down.
• Select the Workstation choice on the action bars found on the Edit or View panels, then choose
Workstation Tool Integration.
• Type INT on any ISPF command or action line and press Enter.

60 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Settings (option 0)

Log/List Function keys Colors Environ Workstation Identifier Help

┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ File Map Help │
│ ─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│ Workstation Tool Integration Configuration │
│ │
│ Press EXIT to save tool configuration to connected workstation hard drive. │
│ Press CANCEL to temporarily update tool configuration for this session. │
│ │
│ Action: E=Edit V=View │
│ │
│ Description Code Data Mode Command │
│ View V TEXT MODELESS e │
│ Edit E TEXT MODAL e │
│ **End** │
│ │
│ Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward │
│ F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel │
⋘───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Screen format 2 1. Data 2. Std 3. Max 4. Part
Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 55. ISPF Workstation Tool Integration panel

The information contained on this panel is defined as follows:

(Line command field)
Enter v (view) or e (edit) to display the Tool Configuration panel in View or Edit mode.
Description
Text explaining the ISPF action.
Code
The ISPF action code assigned to this workstation application.
Data
The format used for the object file during download and upload to the host.
Mode
The processing mode for this action.
Command
The workstation invocation command string or name.
You use this panel to begin to define how the ISPF actions interact with the workstation applications, or
just to look at the actions you have already defined.

The Tool Integrator action bar choices

These action bar choices are available on the Workstation Tool Integration panel:
File
Edit
Calls the edit function to update the parameters of a workstation action.
View
Displays the parameters of a particular action.
Cancel changes
Exit edit without updating the workstation action.
Exit and Save
Exit edit and save changes made to the workstation action parameters.
Map
Extension
Starts the Extension Mapping dialog. See “Extension mapping” on page 63 for more information.

Settings (option 0) 61
Settings (option 0)

Updating an action
To update the configuration of an action, use either of these methods:
• Type e (edit) in the line command field next to View or Edit, and press Enter.
• Type / in the line command field next to View or Edit, then choose File > Edit from the action bars in the
panel
After you choose to edit an action, the screen shown in Figure 56 on page 62 is displayed.

┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐ ier Help

│ Modify Tool Configuration │ ──────────────
│ More: + │
│ Description . : View Code . : V │ More: +
│ │
│ Options │ 2
│ Data . . 1 1. Text Invocation 2 1. Modal │
│ 2. Binary 2. Modeless │ 1
│ │
│ Workstation command │
│ e │
│ │ B
│ Additional parameters │ ;
│ │
│ │
│ Working directory │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward │
│ F8=Forward F9=Swap F12=Cancel │ F9=Swap
⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 56. Modify Tool Configuration window

The fields found on this panel are as follows:

Description
Text explaining the ISPF action.
Code
The ISPF action code assigned to this workstation application.
Data
The format used for the object file during download and upload to the host. Use Binary for data that
you want to leave unchanged on the host, for example, image files such as bitmaps.
Invocation
The processing mode for this action. Use Modal to ensure that an action is completed before your
application moves on to another task. For example, if you want to upload and replace an object on the
host, specify Modal. Modeless means that the action can continue while your application performs
other tasks, effectively running in parallel with the application.
Workstation Command
The workstation invocation command string or name. This can be the actual command name of the
workstation application, or a workstation path and command name.
Additional Parameters
Additional parameters that are recognized by the workstation command.
Working Directory
The directory on the workstation in which files used by Workstation Edit are stored. These include
saved copies of workstation files and temporary copies of host files that are being processed by Edit
or View on the workstation.
If you do not specify a location, a default directory is used. On Windows, the default is the directory
where the ISPF WSA was started. On UNIX systems, the default is the user's home directory.

62 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Settings (option 0)

Extension mapping
The Map choice on the tool integrator action bar enables you to associate a workstation file extension of
up to 3 characters with a host data set type. The host data set type is the last qualifier of the data set.
These are frequently longer than 3 characters, while most workstation file extensions are 3 or less. The
Extension Mapping dialog panel, shown in Figure 57 on page 63, shows how certain host data set types
map to their workstation file extension counterparts.

Log/List Function keys Colors Environ Workstation Identifier Help

┌─────────────────────────────────────────┐───────────────────────────────────
│ Workstation Tool Extension Mapping │ gs
│ │ More: +
│ Action: I=Insert D=Delete R=Repeat │ rint Graphics
│ │ Family printer type 2
│ Host Type Workstation Extension │ Device name . . . .
│ │ Aspect ratio . . . 1
│ **End** │
│ │
│ │ eneral
│ │ Input field pad . . B
│ │ Command delimiter . ;
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit │ 3. Max 4. Part
│ F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap │
└─────────────────────────────────────────┘ Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 57. Extension Mapping Dialog window

To map a host to workstation pair, perform one of these actions:

1. In the Action field, type R to repeat a previous mapping, I to insert a new mapping, or D to delete a
current mapping.
2. In the Host Type field, type the last qualifier of the host data set to be mapped.
3. In the Workstation Extension field, type the extension name to be used for the temporary workstation
file created.
4. Press Enter.
If you attempt to use a host data set on a workstation and you have not mapped the data set type to one
on your workstation, the first 3 characters of the data set type are used by default.

Download ISPF C/S component

When you select "Download ISPF C/S Component" from the Workstation pull-down, the Client/Server
component dialog starts. See “Download data set to workstation utility (option 3.7)” on page 174 for
more information.

Disconnect from the workstation

When you select "Disconnect from the workstation" from the Workstation pull-down, the Workstation
Disconnect Confirmation dialog starts. From the dialog you have the choice of YES to disconnect, or NO
which cancels the disconnect request.

Displaying message, system, user, panel, and screen IDs

The Identifier action bar choice allows you to display message IDs with the message text, and to display
system, user, panel, and screen identifiers at the start of the Title line.

Settings (option 0) 63
Settings (option 0)

Log/List Function keys Colors Environ Workstation Identifier Help

─────────────────────────────────────────────── ┌─────────────────────────────┐
ISPF Settings │ 1. Message identifier... │
│ 2. Panel identifier... │
Options Print │ 3. Screen name... │
Enter "/" to select option Fam │ 4. System name... │
/ Command line at bottom Dev │ 5. User ID... │
/ Panel display CUA mode Asp ⋘─────────────────────────────┘
/ Long message in pop-up
/ Tab to action bar choices
Tab to point-and-shoot fields General
/ Restore TEST/TRACE options Input field pad . . B
Session Manager mode Command delimiter . ;

Figure 58. Identifier pull-down on the ispf settings panel action bar (ISPISMMN)

Message identifier
You can specify that you want to display message identifiers in either of two ways:
• Select the "Message identifier" choice from the Identifier pull-down on the ISPF Settings panel action
bar, as shown in Figure 58 on page 64.
• Issue the ISPF system command MSGID ON.
When you select "Message identifier" from the Identifier pull-down, the Message Identifier panel is
displayed.
If you select the "Display message identifier" option, the message identifier is set to On. The identifier will
now display within the message text whenever a long message option is accessed (that is, when you enter
the HELP command). Deselect this choice (or issue the MSGID OFF command) to set the message
identifier to Off.
This setting only applies to the current ISPF session. To retain the setting across ISPF sessions, select
"Default setting for message identifier".
Figure 59 on page 64 shows an error message on the ISPF Settings panel displayed with the message
identifier set to on.

Log/List Function keys Colors Environ Workstation Identifier Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
ISPF Settings Invalid value
More: +
Options Print Graphics
Enter "/" to select option Family printer type 2
/ Command line at bottom Device name . . . .
/ Panel display CUA mode Aspect ratio . . . 8
/ Long message in pop-up ┌────────────────────┐
/ Tab to action bar choices │ ISPG213 Valid │
Tab to point-and-shoot fields General │ values are: 0 or 1 │
/ Restore TEST/TRACE options Input field ⋘────────────────────┘
Session Manager mode Command delimiter . ;

Figure 59. Panel displayed with the message identifier set to on

System name
You can specify that you want to display the system name in either of two ways:
• Select the "System name" choice from the Identifier pull-down on the ISPF Settings panel action bar.
• Issue the ISPF system command SYSNAME ON.
When you select "System name" from the Identifier pull-down, the System Name Identifier panel is
displayed.

64 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Settings (option 0)

If you select the "Display system name identifier" option, the system name identifier is set to On. The
identifier will now display in the panelid area. Deselect this choice (or issue the SYSNAME OFF command)
to set the system name identifier to Off.
This setting only applies to the current ISPF session. To retain the setting across ISPF sessions, select
"Default setting for system name".
This figure shows the top portion of the ISPF Settings panel displayed with the screen identifier set to On.

Log/List Function keys Colors Environ Workstation Identifier Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
ZISD10 ISPF Settings Invalid value
More: +
Options Print Graphics
Enter "/" to select option Family printer type 2
/ Command line at bottom Device name . . . .
/ Panel display CUA mode Aspect ratio . . . 8
/ Long message in pop-up ┌────────────────────┐

Figure 60. Panel displayed with the system name set to on

Note: The commands SYSNAME, USERID, PANELID, and SCRNAME share the same 17-character area at
the start of the Title line. If more than one of these commands are specified, ISPF displays as many as will
fit, in this order of priority: SYSNAME, if specified, is always displayed. Then, as long as there is enough
room, USERID is displayed, then PANELID, then SCRNAME.

User ID
You can specify that you want to display the user ID in either of two ways:
• Select the "User ID" choice from the Identifier pull-down on the ISPF Settings panel action bar.
• Issue the ISPF system command USERID ON.
When you select "User ID" from the Identifier pull-down, the User Identifier panel is displayed.
If you select the "Display user identifier" option, the user identifier is set to On. The identifier will now
display in the panelid area. Deselect this choice (or issue the USERID OFF command) to set the user
identifier to Off.
This setting only applies to the current ISPF session. To retain the setting across ISPF sessions, select
"Default setting for user identifier".
This figure shows the top portion of the ISPF Settings panel displayed with the user identifier (and the
system name) set to On.

Log/List Function keys Colors Environ Workstation Identifier Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
ZISD10 MBURNS ISPF Settings Invalid value
More: +
Options Print Graphics
Enter "/" to select option Family printer type 2
/ Command line at bottom Device name . . . .
/ Panel display CUA mode Aspect ratio . . . 8
/ Long message in pop-up ┌────────────────────┐

Figure 61. Panel displayed with the user ID set to on

Note: The commands SYSNAME, USERID, PANELID, and SCRNAME share the same 17-character area at
the start of the Title line. If more than one of these commands are specified, ISPF displays as many as will

Settings (option 0) 65
Settings (option 0)

fit, in this order of priority: SYSNAME, if specified, is always displayed. Then, as long as there is enough
room, USERID is displayed, then PANELID, then SCRNAME.

Panel identifier
You can specify that you want to display panel identifiers in either of two ways:
• Select the "Panel identifier" choice from the Identifier pull-down on the ISPF Settings panel action bar,
as shown in Figure 58 on page 64.
• Issue the ISPF system command PANELID ON.
When you select "Panel identifier" from the Identifier pull-down, the Panel Identifier panel is displayed.
If you select the "Display panel identifier" option, the panel identifier is set to On. The identifier will now
display in the panelid area. Deselect this choice (or issue the PANELID OFF command) to set the panel
identifier to Off.
This setting only applies to the current ISPF session. To retain the setting across ISPF sessions, select
"Default setting for panel identifier".
This figure shows the top portion of the ISPF Settings panel displayed with the panel identifier set to On.

Log/List Function keys Colors Environ Workstation Identifier Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
ISPISMMN ISPF Settings
More: +
Options Print Graphics
Enter "/" to select option Family printer type 2
/ Command line at bottom Device name . . . .
/ Panel display CUA mode Aspect ratio . . . 1
/ Long message in pop-up

Figure 62. Panel displayed with the panel identifier set to on

Note: The commands SYSNAME, USERID, PANELID, and SCRNAME share the same 17-character area at
the start of the Title line. If more than one of these commands are specified, ISPF displays as many as will
fit, in this order of priority: SYSNAME, if specified, is always displayed. Then, as long as there is enough
room, USERID is displayed, then PANELID, then SCRNAME.

Screen name
You can specify that you want to display the screen name in either of two ways:
• Select the "Screen name" choice from the Identifier pull-down on the ISPF Settings panel action bar.
• Issue the ISPF system command SCRNAME ON.
When you select "Screen name" from the Identifier pull-down, the Screen Name Identifier panel is
displayed.
If you select the "Display screen identifier" option, the screen identifier is set to On. The identifier will now
display in the panelid area. Deselect this choice (or issue the SCRNAME OFF command) to set the screen
identifier to Off.
This setting only applies to the current ISPF session. To retain the setting across ISPF sessions, select
"Default setting for screen identifier".
This figure shows the top portion of the ISPF Settings panel displayed with the screen identifier set to On.

66 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Settings (option 0)

Log/List Function keys Colors Environ Workstation Identifier Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
SETTINGS ISPF Settings Invalid value
More: +
Options Print Graphics
Enter "/" to select option Family printer type 2
/ Command line at bottom Device name . . . .
/ Panel display CUA mode Aspect ratio . . . 8
/ Long message in pop-up ┌────────────────────┐

Figure 63. Panel displayed with the screen identifier set to on

Note: The commands SYSNAME, USERID, PANELID, and SCRNAME share the same 17-character area at
the start of the Title line. If more than one of these commands are specified, ISPF displays as many as will
fit, in this order of priority: SYSNAME, if specified, is always displayed. Then, as long as there is enough
room, USERID is displayed, then PANELID, then SCRNAME.

Settings (option 0) 67
Settings (option 0)

68 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

Chapter 3. View (option 1)

The View option (1) displays the View Entry Panel shown in Figure 64 on page 69.

Menu RefList RefMode Utilities Workstation Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
View Entry Panel
More: +
ISPF Library:
Project . . . MYPROJ
Group . . . . DEV . . . . . . . . .
Type . . . . SOURCE
Member . . . (Blank or pattern for member selection list)

Other Partitioned, Sequential or VSAM Data Set, or z/OS UNIX file:

Name . . . . . .
Volume Serial . . . (If not cataloged)

Workstation File:
File Name . . . . .
Options
Initial Macro . . . . Confirm Cancel/Move/Replace
Profile Name . . . . . Browse Mode
Format Name . . . . . View on Workstation
Data Set Password . . Warn on First Data Change
Record Length . . . . Mixed Mode
Line Command Table . .
Data Encoding (View mode only)
1. ASCII
2. UTF-8

Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 64. View Entry panel (ISRBRO01)

This option enables you to view or browse source data and listings stored in ISPF libraries, other
partitioned or single-volume or multivolume sequential data sets, or z/OS UNIX files.
View
Allows you to use all Edit line commands, primary commands, and macros to manipulate the data.
View functions exactly like Edit, with the exception of these primary commands:
SAVE
When you enter the SAVE command, ISPF issues a message that you must use the CREATE
command to save any data you have changed.
END
When you enter the END command, ISPF terminates the View function; no data changes are
saved.
Browse
Allows you to use the Browse primary commands described in “Browse primary commands” on page
73 to manipulate data.
View is enabled by default. You can disable View, thus allowing only Browse, by modifying the ISPF
Configuration Table. You must set the keyword IS_VIEW_SUPPORTED to NO. For more information, see
the topic about the ISPF Configuration Table in z/OS ISPF Planning and Customizing.
You can view or browse data that has these characteristics:
• Record Format (RECFM):
– Fixed, variable (non-spanned), or undefined

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2019 69

 Note: If you try to view a data set with RECFM=U, the Browse function is substituted.
– Blocked or unblocked
– With or without printer control characters
• Logical Record Length (LRECL):
– For fixed-length records, up to 32 760 characters. For view only, the minimum record length is 1
character.
– For variable-length records, up to 32 756 characters. For view only, the minimum record length is 5
characters.
• VSAM data
– VSAM data can be browsed if the ISPF Configuration table has been customized to enable VSAM
support (that is, VSAM_BROWSE_ENABLED or VSAM_VIEW_ENABLED is set to "YES").
Note: When VSAM support is enabled, the default value for VSAM_BROWSE_COMMAND is "FMNINV
DSB /" and for VSAM_VIEW_COMMAND is "FMNINV DSV /". If the command is not available,
IKJ56500I COMMAND FMNINV NOT FOUND, is issued as a TSO message.
• z/OS UNIX files.

View Entry Panel action bar

The View Entry Panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu
See the details about the Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface topic of the z/OS ISPF User's
Guide Vol I for information about the Menu pull-down.
RefList
See the Using Personal Data Set Lists and Library Lists topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I for
information about referral lists.
RefMode
See the information about Personal List Modes in the Using Personal Data Set Lists and Library Lists
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I for information about referral list modes.
Utilities
For more information, see the details about the Utilities Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Workstation
The Workstation pull-down offers you one choice:
1. Workstation Tool Integration
See the information about the ISPF Workstation Tool Integration Program in the ISPF User
Interface topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I for more information.
Help
The Help pull-down provides general information about the options and commands available in View,
as well as information about each available choice on the View Entry Panel.

View Entry Panel fields

The "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I contains information about
all the fields on the View Entry Panel except these:
Initial Macro
You can specify an Edit macro to be processed before you begin viewing your sequential data set or
any member of a partitioned data set. This initial macro enables you to set up a particular
environment for the View session you are beginning.

70 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Browsing a data set

If you leave the Initial Macro field blank and your Edit profile includes an initial macro specification,
the initial macro from your Edit profile is processed.
If you want to suppress the processing of an initial macro in your Edit profile, enter NONE in the Initial
Macro field.
Profile Name
You can specify a profile name to override the default Edit profile.
Format Name
Contains the name of a format definition, which is used to view or browse a formatted data set.
Browse Mode
Specifies that you want to browse the data set using the Browse function. This function is useful for
large data sets and data sets that are formatted RECFM=U.
Confirm Cancel/Move/Replace
Specifies that you want ISPF to display a confirmation panel whenever you issue a Cancel, Move, or
Replace command.
Mixed Mode
Specifies that you want to view or browse unformatted data that contains both EBCDIC and DBCS
characters.
View on Workstation
Specifies that you want to view the data on your workstation. This option requires a workstation
connection to be used.
Warn on First Data Change
Specifies that you want ISPF to warn you that changes cannot be saved in View. The warning is
displayed when the first data change is made.
Record Length
Can be used when browsing a z/OS UNIX file. The numeric value entered in this field is used by ISPF
to display the data in the file as fixed-length records, rather than using the newline character to
delimit each record. This is useful for browsing files which would otherwise have very large records if
the newline character is used as the record delimiter.
Line Command Table
Use this field to define a set of user line commands that you can use during the view session. The
table you specify can be generated using the ISPF table editor and contains the line commands that
you wish to have available and associates each line command with an edit macro that will be run if the
line command is entered during the view session.
Data Encoding
You can use this option to select whether to view data as ASCII (CCSID 819) or UTF-8 (CCSID 1208).
You can also specify this option when creating a new file, data set, or member containing ASCII or
UTF-8 data. When you select a value for this option, the editor uses the selected CCSID in converting
the data to the CCSID for the terminal.
For ASCII or UTF-8 z/OS UNIX files, the editor breaks up data into records using the ASCII linefeed
character (X'0A') and the ASCII carriage return character (X'0D') as the record delimiter. The linefeed
and carriage return characters are removed from the data loaded into the editor, but written back to
the file when the data is saved.
It is not necessary to use the Data Encoding option when the z/OS UNIX file is tagged with a CCSID of
819 or 1208. If ISPF detects the file is tagged with CCSID 819 or 1208, it converts the data from
ASCII or UTF-8 to the CCSID of the terminal. When the file is saved, ISPF ensures the file is tagged
with a CCSID of 819 or 1208.

Browsing a data set

If you select Browse Mode on the View Entry Panel, ISPF displays either a member selection list or a
Browse data display. For information about displaying a member list, see the topic about Using Member
Selection Lists in the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.

View (option 1) 71
Browsing a data set

Note: If you specify a volume serial on the View Entry Panel, you can browse a single volume of a non-
SMS multivolume data set.
A Browse data display is shown in Figure 65 on page 72.

Figure 65. Browse - data display (ISRBROBA)

Each character in the data that cannot be displayed is changed on the display to either a period or a
character that you have specified. Using the DISPLAY command, you can specify whether printer carriage-
control characters are to be treated as part of the data, and thus displayed.
You can browse data that is stored in a Unicode format. MVS Conversion Services must first be set up for
the appropriate conversions. See z/OS ISPF Planning and Customizing.
During Browse, four-way scrolling is available through the scroll commands. You can also use the FIND
and LOCATE commands to scroll to a particular character string, line number, or symbolic label.
Whenever you enter a command, such as FIND or one of the scroll commands, that puts the cursor under
a character string in the data set, ISPF highlights that character string. This highlighting occurs whether
you type the command on the command line and press Enter or press a function key that the command is
assigned to.

Ending browse
To end a Browse data display, use the END command. This returns you to the previous panel, which is
either a member list display or the View Entry panel. If a member list is displayed, the name of the
member you just browsed is at the top of the list. You can select another member from the list or enter
the END command again to return to the View Entry Panel.
When the View Entry Panel is displayed again, you can select another data set or member, or you can use
the END command to return to the ISPF Primary Option menu.

72 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Browsing a data set

Browse primary commands

You can prefix any BROWSE command with an ampersand to keep the command displayed on the
command line after the command has been processed. This technique allows you to repeat similar
commands without reentering the data. For example, if you enter:

Command ===> &FIND ABCD

the command is displayed after the string has been found, which allows you to then change the operand
and issue another FIND command.
Browse provides the functions described in these topics, each of which is controlled by a command that
you can type on the command line:
“BROWSE—browse recursively” on page 73
“COLUMNS—identify columns” on page 73
“DISPLAY—control the display” on page 74
“EDIT—edit a member” on page 76
“FIND—find character strings” on page 76
“HEX—display data in hexadecimal format” on page 81
“LOCATE—locate lines” on page 83
“RESET—remove the column-identification line” on page 84
“SUBMIT—submit a job stream for background execution” on page 84
“VIEW—view a member” on page 84

BROWSE—browse recursively
The BROWSE command allows you to browse another member of the same data set. It also allows you to
browse any other data set or a z/OS UNIX file without ending your current Browse session.
The BROWSE command has this syntax:

BROWSE
member

where:
member
An optional member of the ISPF library or other partitioned data set that you are currently browsing.
You may enter a member pattern to generate a member list.
For example, if you were browsing a member of library ISPFDEMO.XXX.COBOL, you could enter this
command to display the panel shown in Figure 65 on page 72:

BROWSE CBLMAIN

If you do not specify a member name, the Browse Command - Entry Panel is displayed.
You end a nested Browse session the same way you would a normal one. When you end the nested
Browse session, the current Browse session resumes.

COLUMNS—identify columns
You can use the COLUMNS command to provide a temporary indication of where columns occur on the
panel. This command displays a column-identification line on the first line of the data area. The command
has this syntax:

ON
COLUMNS
OFF

View (option 1) 73
Browsing a data set

where:
ON
The default. Displays the column-identification line.
OFF
Removes the column-identification line from the display.
Note: You can also remove the column-identification line by entering the RESET command.
An example of the column-identification line is shown in Figure 66 on page 74. The digits on the
identification line show the tens positions: 1 shows column 10, 2 shows column 20, and so forth. The plus
signs (+) show the fives positions (columns 5, 15, 25, and so forth.)

Menu Utilities Compilers Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
BROWSE SBURNF.CALL.TRACE Line 00000017 Col 001 080
Command ===> Scroll ===> CSR
----+----1----+----2----+----3----+----4----+----5----+----6----+----7----+----8
ISPVCALL Command: ISPVCALL
ISPF Invocation ISPF
==============================< Cached Panels >=================================
ISR@PRIM
==========================< Active Command Tables >=============================
USERCMDS SITECMDS ISPCMDS
======================< Entries in Open Command Tables >========================
⋮

Figure 66. Browse - column-identification line (ISRBROBA)

DISPLAY—control the display

The DISPLAY command allows you to view data that would not normally be displayed, such as carriage
control characters and Unicode data. For other nondisplayable data you can specify a character to
represent each character that cannot be displayed.
The DISPLAY command has two formats. The first is used to display carriage-control characters and other
nondisplay characters. The second allows data stored using a Unicode CCSID (Coded Character Set
Identifier) to be displayed using the CCSID of the terminal.

Carriage-control characters and other nondisplay characters

NOCC NORDW
DISPLAY
char CC RDW

You must enter at least one operand, but you can enter them in any order. If you enter only one operand,
the other operand retains its current value.
where:
char
The character you want to use to represent characters that cannot be displayed on the screen. It can
be a single character, or a single character enclosed in apostrophes (') or quotation marks ("). If you
specify a blank as the character, you must enclose it in apostrophes or quotation marks.
CC
Shows that carriage control characters are to be displayed and are to be considered part of the data.
NOCC
Shows that carriage control characters are not to be displayed and are not to be considered part of the
data.

74 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Browsing a data set

RDW
Indicates that the record descriptor word (RDW) is to be displayed and hex mode is to be turned on.
Only applicable when the data consists of variable length records. If hex mode is turned off using the
HEX command, display of the record descriptor word is also turned off. The RDW is a 4-byte field
describing the record. The first 2 bytes contain the length of the logical record. The length value
includes the length of the RDW as well as any carriage control characters, even when they are not
displayed.
NORDW
Indicates that the record descriptor word is not to be displayed. When display of the record descriptor
word is turned off, hex mode is also turned off. Only applicable when the data consists of variable
length records.
The char, CC, and NOCC operands are stored in your user profile and are in effect whenever you are using
Browse. You need to reenter the DISPLAY command only if you want to change one of these operands.
The RDW and NORDW operands are not stored in your user profile. The initial settings for display mode
are period (.), NOCC, and NORDW, but the carriage control character status has no effect if the data that
you are browsing has no carriage control characters.

Unicode data
DISPLAY

CCSID ccsid_number
LINE COLS ASCII
start_line end_line start_col end_col
USASCII

EBCDIC

UCS2

UTF8

UTF16

UTF32

RESET

where:
LINE start_line end_line
Specifies the number of the first and last lines within which Unicode data is displayed. If the LINE
keyword is not specified, the DISPLAY command applies to the all lines in the data. If only one value is
specified, the DISPLAY command only applies to that line.
COLS start_col end_col
Specifies the number of the first and last column within which Unicode data is displayed. If the COLS
keyword is not specified, the DISPLAY command applies to the full range of columns in the data. If
only one value is specified, the DISPLAY command only applies to that column.
CCSID ccsid_number | ASCII | USASCII | EBCDIC | UCS2 | UTF8 | UTF16 | UTF32
Specifies the CCSID of the data. The CCSID represents a code page and character set combination.
RESET
This format of the command resets all definitions made with the DISPLAY command. All data is
displayed as though it had been stored using the terminal CCSID.
LINE and COLS are optional. LINE, COLS, and CCSID can be specified in any order.
You can issue multiple DISPLAY commands, in which case the specifications are merged. If a range of
data is specified more than once, later specifications take precedence over earlier specifications. For
example, if you specify one CCSID that applies to rows 3 to 10, then specify another CCSID that applies to
columns 30 to 60, the second CCSID takes effect in the area where the DISPLAY commands overlap—that
is, columns 30 to 60 in rows 3 to 10.
When you exit the current Browse session, all definitions are reset (as though you had entered DISPLAY
RESET).

View (option 1) 75
Browsing a data set

Examples
• To use blanks to represent characters that cannot be displayed, enter:

DISPLAY " "

• To use a vertical bar (|) to represent characters that cannot be displayed, enter:

DISPLAY |

• To suppress the display of carriage control characters, enter:

DISPLAY NOCC

• To display columns 20 through 30 of lines 5 through 15 as though the data had been stored using a
CCSID of UTF16:

DISPLAY LINE 5 15 COLS 20 30 CCSID 1200

• To display lines 4 through 18 as though the data had been stored using a CCSID of UTF16, except for
column 72 in lines 12 through 18, which should be displayed as though the data had been stored using
a CCSID of ASCII:

DISPLAY LINE 4 18 UTF16

DISPLAY LINE 12 18 COLS 72 ASCII

• To revert to displaying the data as though it had been stored using the CCSID of the terminal:

DISPLAY RESET

EDIT—edit a member
The EDIT command allows you to edit another member of the same data set. It also allows you to edit any
other data set or z/OS UNIX file without ending your current Browse session.
The EDIT command has this syntax:

EDIT
member

where:
member
An optional member of the ISPF library or other partitioned data set that you are currently browsing.
You may enter a member pattern to generate a member list.
For example, if you were browsing a member of library ISPFDEMO.XXX.COBOL, you could enter this
command to display the panel shown in Figure 65 on page 72:

EDIT CBLMAIN

If you do not specify a member name, the Edit Command - Entry Panel is displayed.
You end a nested Edit session the same way you would a normal one. When you end the nested Edit
session, the current Browse session resumes.

FIND—find character strings

The FIND command allows you to find a specified character string. The syntax of the FIND command is:

76 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Browsing a data set

NEXT CHARS
FIND string
UTF8 ALL PREFIX

ASCII FIRST SUFFIX

USASCII LAST WORD

PREV

left_col right_col

Note: FIND as a Browse command, shown here, has the same syntax as FIND as an Edit command,
except the optional X/NX/EX and line range operands are not included.
where:
string
Required operand. The character string you want to find.
NEXT | ALL | FIRST | LAST | PREV
Optional operands that define the starting point, direction, and extent of the search. NEXT is the
default.
CHARS | PREFIX | SUFFIX | WORD
Optional operand. Operands that set the conditions for a character string match. CHARS is the default.
UTF8 | ASCII | USASCII
Optional operand which specifies that the FIND string is either a UTF8, ASCII, or USASCII character
string. This form of the FIND command is only available for the character FIND command, and only for
UTF8, ASCII, or USASCII strings.
left_col and right_col
Optional operands. Numbers that identify the columns the FIND command is to search.
You can separate the operands with blanks or commas and you can type them in any order, but right_col,
if typed, must follow left_col.

Specifying find strings

The string operand specifies the characters to be found. For examples of different string formats, refer to
the description of the FIND command in z/OS ISPF Edit and Edit Macros.
The default is not to differentiate between uppercase and lowercase characters when searching. Except
for the character (C) string, differences between uppercase and lowercase strings are ignored. For
example, this command:

FIND ALL 'CONDITION NO. 1'

successfully finds any of these:

CONDITION NO. 1
Condition No. 1
condition No. 1
condition no. 1

Omitting string delimiters

Generally, you enter the strings without delimiters. For example, to find all occurrences of ABC, enter:

FIND ALL ABC

View (option 1) 77
Browsing a data set

Using string delimiters

You must use delimiters if a string contains embedded blanks or commas, or if a string is the same as a
command keyword. You delimit strings with either apostrophes (') or quotation marks ("). For example,
to find the next occurrence of every one, enter:

FIND 'every one'

The FIND command does not find the apostrophe or quotation mark string delimiters.
Note: The Browse FIND command does not work with a search argument that contains the command
delimiter, even if string delimiters are used. You can specify a hexadecimal search string or use ISPF
Option 0 to change the command delimiter to a different character.

Starting point, direction, and extent of search

You can control the starting point, direction, and extent of the search by using one of these operands:
NEXT
The scan starts at the first position after the current cursor location and searches ahead to find the
next occurrence of the string. NEXT is the default.
ALL
The scan starts at the top of the data and searches ahead to find all occurrences of the string. A
message in the upper-right corner of the screen shows the number of occurrences found. The second-
level message that is displayed when you enter the HELP command shows which columns were
searched.
FIRST
The scan starts at the top of the data and searches ahead to find the first occurrence of the string.
LAST
The scan starts at the bottom of the data and searches backward to find the last occurrence of the
string.
PREV
The scan starts at the first position before the current cursor location and searches backward to find
the previous occurrence of the string.
If you specify FIRST, ALL, or NEXT, the direction of the search is forward; pressing the RFIND function key
(F5/17) finds the next occurrence of the designated string. If you specify LAST or PREV, the direction of
the search is backward; pressing the RFIND function key finds the previous occurrence of the string. The
other optional operands remain in effect, as specified in the last FIND command. These operands include
CHARS, WORD, PREFIX, SUFFIX, and left_col, right_col.
The search proceeds until one or all occurrences of the string are found, or until the end of data is found.
If the string is not found, one of these actions takes place:
• If the FIND command was entered on the Command line, a NO string FOUND message is displayed in
the upper-right corner of the screen.
• If the FIND command was repeated using the RFIND command, either a BOTTOM OF DATA REACHED
message or a TOP OF DATA REACHED message is displayed, depending on the direction of the search.
When these messages appear, you can press the RFIND function key again to continue the search by
wrapping to the top or bottom of the data. If the string is still not found anywhere in the data, a NO
string FOUND message is displayed.

Conditions for character string matches

The operands CHARS, PREFIX, SUFFIX, and WORD control the conditions for a successful match with the
string based on whether the data string begins and/or ends with a non-alphanumeric character; that is, a
special character or a blank. You can abbreviate PREFIX, SUFFIX, and CHARS to PRE, SUF, and CHAR,
respectively.

78 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Browsing a data set

In this example, the highlighted strings would be found and the strings that are not highlighted would be
ignored:

CHARS 'DO' - DO DONE ADO ADOPT 'DO' +ADO (DONE) ADO-

PREFIX 'DO' - DO DONE ADO ADOPT 'DO' +ADO (DONE) ADO-

SUFFIX 'DO' - DO DONE ADO ADOPT 'DO' +ADO (DONE) ADO-

WORD 'DO' - DO DONE ADO ADOPT 'DO' +ADO (DONE) ADO-

If you do not specify an operand, the default is CHARS.

Using text strings

Text strings are processed exactly the same as delimited strings. They are provided for compatibility with
prior versions of the product.

Using character strings

A character string, which may be used as a string operand in a FIND command, requires that the search
be satisfied by an exact character-by-character match. Lowercase alphabetic characters match only with
lowercase alphabetic characters and uppercase alphabetic characters match only with uppercase.
If you specify a text string that contains any SO or SI characters, the string is considered a character
string.
Specifying the keyword UTF8, ASCII, or USASCII with this form of the FIND command will find
occurrences of 'string' within the data being browsed, where 'string' has been stored in the corresponding
CCSID format.
Here are some examples:
To find the next occurrence of the characters XYZ only if they are in uppercase:

FIND C'XYZ'

To find the next occurrence of the characters xyz only if they are in lowercase:

FIND C'xyz'

To find the next occurrence of the UTF-8 string 'Found' (but not 'FOUND', 'found', or 'FoUnD'):

FIND C'Found' UTF8

Using picture strings

A picture string used as a string operand in a FIND command allows you to search for a particular type of
character, without regard for the specific character involved. You can use special characters within the
picture string to represent the type of character to be found, as follows:
String
Meaning
P'='
Any character
P'¬'
Any nonblank character
P'.'
Any nondisplayable (invalid) character
P'#'
Any numeric character (0-9)
P'-'
Any nonnumeric character

View (option 1) 79
Browsing a data set

P'@'
Any alphabetic character (uppercase or lowercase).
String
Meaning
P'<'
Any lowercase alphabetic character
P'>'
Any uppercase alphabetic character
P'$'
Any special character (not alphabetic or numeric).
If an APL or TEXT keyboard is being used, this additional character can be used in a picture string:

P' '
Any APL-specific or TEXT-specific character
P'_'
Any underscored alphabetic APL character and delta.
Only the special characters listed are valid within a picture string, but the string can include alphabetic or
numeric characters that represent themselves.
A DBCS subfield cannot be specified as the subject of a picture string for the FIND command.
Examples of picture strings:
P'###'
A string of 3 numeric characters
P'¬ ¬'
Any 2 nonblank characters separated by a blank
P'.'
Any nondisplayable character
P' #'
A blank followed by a numeric character
P'#AB'
A numeric character followed by 'AB'.
Examples of FIND commands using picture strings:
FIND P'.'
Find next nondisplayable character
FIND P'¬' 72
Find next nonblank character in column 72
F P' ¬' 1
Find the next line with a blank in column 1 followed by a nonblank.
When you use the special characters '=' or '.' and a nondisplayable character is found, a hexadecimal
representation is used in the confirmation message that appears in the upper-right corner of the screen.
For example:

FIND P'..'

could result in the message CHARS X'0205' FOUND.

Column limitations
The left_col and right_col operands allow you to search only a portion of each line, rather than the
complete line. These operands, which are integers separated by a comma or by at least one blank, show
the starting and ending columns for the search. These rules apply:

80 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Browsing a data set

• If you specify neither left_col nor right_col, the search continues across all columns within the current
boundary columns.
• If you specify left_col without right_col, the string is found only if it starts in the specified column.
• If you specify both left_col and right_col, the complete string, not just part of it, must be within the
specified columns.
• If the DISPLAY RDW command is entered to display the record descriptor word, the left_col and
right_col operands should not include the 4-byte record descriptor word that appears at the start of
each displayed record.

Using RFIND
The RFIND command, which is usually assigned to the F5/17 key, allows you to repeat the previous FIND
command without retyping it. Therefore, you can use this command to find successive occurrences of the
string specified in the last FIND command. You can also use the RFIND command to return to the top of
your data and continue searching when the BOTTOM OF DATA REACHED message appears. If you enter
the RFIND command on the Command line instead of using a function key, you must position the cursor to
the desired starting location before pressing Enter.
If you specify a 1-byte hexadecimal string as the FIND string and the string is found at the second byte of
a double-byte character set (DBCS) character, hardware sets the cursor to the first byte of the character.
If you then request RFIND, the same data is found again. To find the next occurrence of the string, you
must move the cursor to the next character position before requesting RFIND again.

HEX—display data in hexadecimal format

The HEX command causes data to be displayed in hexadecimal format. The syntax of the command is:

VERT
HEX ON
DATA

VERT

DATA

OFF

You can specify the operands in any order:

where:
ON
Turns hexadecimal mode on. This is the default.
OFF
Turns hexadecimal mode off. If the DISPLAY RDW command was used to display the record descriptor
word, display of the record descriptor word is also turned off.
VERT
Valid only when hexadecimal mode is ON. This is the default. Figure 67 on page 82 shows how VERT
causes the hexadecimal representation to be displayed vertically, two rows per byte, under each
character.
DATA
Valid only when hexadecimal mode is ON. Figure 68 on page 83 shows how DATA causes the
hexadecimal representations to be displayed as a string of hexadecimal characters, two per byte.
Because the hexadecimal string is twice the length of the data string, it occupies two rows. If you omit
this operand, VERT is assumed.
When using browse and placing the cursor anywhere within the record, SCROLL UP positions the data
where the cursor is located as the last complete line record on the display. A complete line record
consists of the standard character form line, two hexadecimal character lines, and a separator line.

View (option 1) 81
Browsing a data set

For example, this command would display the hexadecimal notation vertically:

HEX VERT

Three lines are displayed for each source line. The first line shows the data in standard character form.
Figure 67 on page 82 shows the next two lines with the same data in vertical hexadecimal
representation. A separator line is displayed between the two representations to make it easier for you to
read the data.

Figure 67. Browse hexadecimal display - vertical (ISRBROBA)

To display the hexadecimal notation horizontally, use this command:

HEX DATA

Figure 68 on page 83 shows the next two lines with the same data in DATA hexadecimal representation.

82 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Browsing a data set

Figure 68. Browse hexadecimal display - data (ISRBROBA)

You can use the FIND command to find invalid characters or any specific hexadecimal character
regardless of the setting of hexadecimal mode. See the syntax for picture strings and hexadecimal strings
under the description of the FIND command in z/OS ISPF Edit and Edit Macros.

LOCATE—locate lines
Use the LOCATE command to bring a particular line to the top of the display. You can identify the line by
either its relative line number or a previously defined label.
During Browse, the current position of the screen window is shown by the line/column numbers in the
upper-right corner of the screen. The line number refers to the first line of data following the two header
lines, and shows the relative position of that line in the data. The Top of Data message is treated as
relative line zero. You must enter either a line number or a label as an operand.

LOCATE line-number

label

where:
line-number
A numeric value less than 2147483648 that shows the position of the line from the beginning of the
data. The line number is displayed in the upper-right corner.
label
Defined by scrolling to the top of the screen the line with which you want to associate the label. You
then type the label on the command line in the form:

.ccccccc

View (option 1) 83
Browsing a data set

For example, to find line 18463, you could enter this command:

LOCATE 18463

ISPF then moves line 18463 to the top of the screen. You can assign a label to it by entering:

.label

The label is a period followed by up to seven characters that can be displayed, except the comma and the
space. It is treated as an internal symbol and is equated to the top line on the screen. You are required to
specify the period when you define the label. The next time you want to find this line, you can enter:

LOCATE .label

The period is usually optional when you use it as an operand in a LOCATE command. However, if the first
character in the label is a number, you must specify the period to distinguish the label from a line number.
The latest assignment of a label overrides any previous assignments. You can assign several labels to the
same line. Labels are not retained when you leave the Browse option.

RESET—remove the column-identification line

The RESET command removes the column-identification line that you can display by using the COLUMNS
command (see “COLUMNS—identify columns” on page 73). This command has no operands.

SUBMIT—submit a job stream for background execution

The SUBMIT command is used to submit a job stream that is being browsed. If the data set being
browsed is modified and saved by another user or by the same user on another screen, the SUBMIT
command will submit the updated data set, not the copy being browsed. The TSO SUBMIT command is
invoked directly to submit the job stream, so the data set has to be fixed-record format with a record
length of 80.
Note: The Browse SUBMIT command is not supported if the underlying data is packed.

VIEW—view a member
The VIEW command allows you to view another member of the same data set. It also allows you to view
any other data set or z/OS UNIX file without ending your current Browse session.
The VIEW command has this syntax:

VIEW
member

where:
member
An optional member of the ISPF library or other partitioned data set that you are currently browsing.
You may enter a member pattern to generate a member list.
For example, if you were browsing a member of library ISPFDEMO.XXX.COBOL, you could enter this
command to display the panel shown in Figure 65 on page 72:

VIEW CBLMAIN

If you do not specify a member name, the View Command - Entry Panel is displayed.
You end a nested View session the same way you would a normal one. When you end the nested View
session, the current Browse session resumes.

84 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Edit (option 2)

Chapter 4. Edit (option 2)

The Edit option (2) allows you to create, display, and change data stored in ISPF libraries, other
partitioned or single-volume or multivolume sequential data sets, or z/OS UNIX files with these
characteristics:
• Record Format (RECFM):
– Fixed or variable (non-spanned)
– Blocked or unblocked
– With or without printer control characters
• Logical Record Length (LRECL):
– From 1 to 32 760, inclusive, for fixed-length records
– From 5 to 32 756, inclusive, for variable-length records.
• VSAM data
– VSAM data can be edited if the ISPF Configuration table has been customized to enable VSAM
support (that is, VSAM_EDIT_ENABLED is set to "YES").
Note: When VSAM support is enabled, the default value for VSAM_EDIT_COMMAND is "FMNINV
DSE /". If the command is not available, IKJ56500I COMMAND FMNINV NOT FOUND, is issued as a
TSO message.
• z/OS UNIX files.

Editing a data set

When you select the Edit option, the Edit Entry Panel shown in Figure 69 on page 85 is displayed.

Menu RefList RefMode Utilities Workstation Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Edit Entry Panel

ISPF Library:
Project . . . MYPROJ
Group . . . . DEV . . . . . . . . .
Type . . . . SOURCE
Member . . . (Blank or pattern for member selection list)

Other Partitioned, Sequential or VSAM Data Set, or z/OS UNIX file:

Data Set Name . . .
Volume Serial . . . (If not cataloged)

Workstation File:
File Name . . . . .
Options
Initial Macro . . . . / Confirm Cancel/Move/Replace
Profile Name . . . . . Mixed Mode
Format Name . . . . . Edit on Workstation
Data Set Password . . Preserve VB record length
Record Length . . . .
Line Command Table . . Data Encoding
1. ASCII
2. UTF-8

Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 69. Edit Entry panel (ISREDM01)

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2019 85

Edit (option 2)

Edit Entry Panel action bar

The Edit Entry Panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu
See the details about the Menu Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface topic in the z/OS ISPF
User's Guide Vol I for information about the Menu pull-down.
RefList
See the Using Personal Data Set Lists and Library Lists topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I for
information about referral lists.
RefMode
See the details about Personal List Modes in the Using Personal Data Set Lists and Library Lists topic
in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I for information about referral list modes.
Utilities
For more information, see the details about the Utilities Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Workstation
Configure ISPF workstation tool integration.
Help
The Help pull-down provides general information about the Edit environment as well as information
about the main options and edit commands.

Edit Entry Panel fields

You can specify a concatenated sequence of up to four ISPF libraries, but the libraries must have been
previously allocated to ISPF with the Data Set utility (3.2).
The fields on this panel are:
Project
The common identifier for all ISPF libraries belonging to the same programming project.
Group
The identifier for the particular set of ISPF libraries; that is, the level of the libraries within the library
hierarchy.
You can specify a concatenated sequence of up to four existing ISPF libraries.
The editor searches the ISPF libraries in the designated order to find the member and copies it into
working storage. If the editor does not find the member in the library, it creates a new member with
the specified name.
When you save the edited member, the editor places or replaces it in the first ISPF library in the
concatenation sequence, regardless of which library it was copied from.
Type
The identifier for the type of information in the ISPF library.
Member
The name of an ISPF library or other partitioned data set member. Leaving this field blank or entering
a pattern causes PDF to display a member list. See z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I if you need
information about entering patterns.
Name
Any fully qualified data set name or z/OS UNIX file path name.
For more details about the Name field, see the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF
User's Guide Vol I.
Volume Serial
A real DASD volume or a virtual volume residing on an IBM 3850 Mass Storage System. To access
3850 virtual volumes, you must also have MOUNT authority, which is acquired through the TSO
ACCOUNT command.

86 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Edit (option 2)

Workstation File:
If you have made a connection to the workstation, you can specify a workstation file name, for
example C: \AUTOEXEC.BAT, in this field.
Initial Macro
You can specify a macro to be processed before you begin editing your sequential data set or any
member of a partitioned data set. This initial macro allows you to set up a particular editing
environment for the Edit session you are beginning. This initial macro overrides any IMACRO value in
your profile.
If you leave the Initial Macro field blank and your edit profile includes an initial macro specification,
the initial macro from your edit profile is processed.
If you want to suppress an initial macro in your edit profile, type NONE in the Initial Macro field. See
the topics about Initial Macros and the IMACRO primary command in the z/OS ISPF Edit and Edit
Macros for more details.
Profile Name
The name of an edit profile, which you can use to override the default edit profile. See the topics about
Edit Profiles and the edit environment in the z/OS ISPF Edit and Edit Macros.
Format Name
The name of a format definition or blank if no format is to be used.
Data Set Password
The password for OS password-protected data sets. This is not your RACF password.
Record Length
Applicable when editing a z/OS UNIX file. ISPF normally treats z/OS UNIX files as having variable
length records. This field allows you to specify a record length which is used by the editor to load the
records from the file into the edit session as fixed-length records. When the file is saved, it is saved
with fixed-length records. The Record Length field allows you to convert a variable-length file to fixed
length. The value specified in this field must be able to accommodate the largest record in the file. If
the editor finds a record that is larger than the length specified, an error message is displayed and the
edit session does not proceed.
Line Command Table
Use this field to define a set of user line commands that you can use during the edit session. The table
you specify can be generated using the ISPF table editor and contains the line commands that you
wish to have available and associates each line command with an edit macro that will be run if the line
command is entered during the edit session. For more information about EDIT line command tables,
see “Line command table support” on page 246.
Confirm Cancel/Move/Replace
When you select this field with a "/", a confirmation panel displays when you request one of these
actions, and the execution of that action would result in data changes being lost or existing data being
overwritten.
• For MOVE, the confirm panel is displayed if the data to be moved exists. Otherwise, an error
message is displayed.
• For REPLACE, the confirm panel is displayed if the data to be replaced exists. Otherwise, the
REPLACE command functions like the edit CREATE command, and no confirmation panel is
displayed.
• For CANCEL, the confirmation panel is displayed if any data changes have been made, whether
through primary commands, line commands, or typing.
Note: Any commands or data changes pending at the time the CANCEL command is issued are
ignored. Data changes are "pending" if changes have been made to the displayed edit data, but no
interaction with the host (ENTER, PF key, or command other than CANCEL) has occurred. If no other
changes have been made during the edit session up to that point, the confirmation panel is not
displayed.

Edit (option 2) 87
Edit (option 2)

Mixed Mode
When you select this field with a "/", it specifies that the editor look for shift-out and shift-in delimiters
surrounding DBCS data. If you do not select it, the editor does not look for mixed data.
Edit on Workstation
You can select this option to use your workstation as the editing environment for whichever host data
set or workstation file you want to edit.
Preserve VB record length
When you select this field with a "/", it specifies that the editor store the original length of each record
in variable-length data sets and when a record is saved, the original record length is used as the
minimum length for the record. The minimum length can be changed using the SAVE_LENGTH edit
macro command. The editor always includes a blank at the end of a line if the length of the record is
zero or eight.
Data Encoding
You can use this option to select whether to edit data as ASCII (CCSID 819) or UTF-8 (CCSID 1208).
When you select a value for this option, the editor uses the selected CCSID in converting the data to
the CCSID for the terminal.
For ASCII or UTF-8 z/OS UNIX files, the editor breaks up data into records using the ASCII linefeed
character (X'0A') and the ASCII carriage return character (X'0D') as the record delimiter. The linefeed
and carriage return characters are removed from the data loaded into the editor, but written back to
the file when the data is saved.
It is not necessary to use the Data Encoding option when the z/OS UNIX file is tagged with a CCSID of
819 or 1208. If ISPF detects the file is tagged with CCSID 819 or 1208, it converts the data from
ASCII or UTF-8 to the CCSID of the terminal. When the file is saved, ISPF ensures the file is tagged
with a CCSID of 819 or 1208.

Distributed editing
If you have made a connection to the workstation, you can also specify a workstation file name such as C:
\AUTOEXEC.BAT on the Edit Entry Panel. Or you can specify which environment (host or workstation)
should be used to edit a data set. With these options, one of four editing situations can occur:
• Edit a host data set on the host
• Edit a host data set on the workstation
• Edit a workstation file on the host
• Edit a workstation file on the workstation.
Edit a Host Data Set on the Host
The editor searches the ISPF libraries in the designated order to find the member and copy it into
working storage. If you specified a nonexistent member of an ISPF library, a new member is created
with the specified name.
When you save the edited member, the editor places or replaces it in the first ISPF library in the
concatenation sequence, regardless of which library it was copied from.
Edit a Host Data Set on the Workstation
The editor searches the ISPF libraries in the designated order to find the member and copy it into
working storage. The data set name is converted to a workstation file name, and that name is
appended to the workstation's current working directory. The host data set is transferred to the
workstation, and the working file is then passed to the user's chosen edit program.
When you finish the edit session, the working file is transferred back to the host and stored in the first
ISPF library in the concatenation sequence.
Edit a Workstation File on the Host
The editor searches the workstation files to find the desired file and copy it into working storage. The
workstation file name is converted to a host data set name, and, if greater than 44 characters, it is
truncated to be 44. The workstation file is transferred to the host, where you can edit it.

88 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Edit (option 2)

When you finish the edit session, the working file is transferred back to the workstation and stored.
Edit a Workstation File on the Workstation
This edit proceeds as it normally does on your workstation.
Note: Some file names are reserved or restricted depending on the workstation operating system. An
attempt to edit a file name that is reserved or restricted by your operating system might cause your
workstation operating system or host system to hang. See your workstation operating system
documentation to learn restricted or reserved file names.

Double-byte character set support

The ISPF editor supports DBCS alphabets in two ways:
• Formatted data where DBCS characters are in the column positions specified in the format definition
created with the Format Utility (option 3.11)
• Mixed characters delimited with the special shift-out and shift-in characters.
If you are using mixed mode and the record length of a data set is greater than 72 bytes, there is a
possibility that a DBCS character might encroach on the display boundary. Here, PDF attempts to
display the other characters by replacing an unpaired DBCS character byte with an SO or SI character. If
there is a possibility that the replaced SO or SI character was erased, the line number of the line is
highlighted. If you change the position of the SO and SI characters on the panel, or if you delete the SO
and SI characters entirely, the DBCS character on the boundary is removed to keep the rest of the data
intact.

Edit (option 2) 89
Edit (option 2)

90 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Library utility (option 3.1)

Chapter 5. Utilities (option 3)

The Utilities option (3) provides a variety of functions for library, data set, and catalog maintenance, each
of which is described in this topic. The Utility Selection Panel is shown in Figure 70 on page 91.

Menu Help
───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Utility Selection Panel

1 Library Compress or print data set. Print index listing. Print,

rename, delete, browse, edit or view members
2 Data Set Allocate, rename, delete, catalog, uncatalog, or display
information of an entire data set
3 Move/Copy Move, or copy members or data sets
4 Dslist Print or display (to process) list of data set names.
Print or display VTOC information
5 Reset Reset statistics for members of ISPF library
6 Hardcopy Initiate hardcopy output
7 Transfer Download ISPF Client/Server or Transfer data set
8 Outlist Display, delete, or print held job output
9 Commands Create/change an application command table
11 Format Format definition for formatted data Edit/Browse
12 SuperC Compare data sets (Standard Dialog)
13 SuperCE Compare data sets Extended (Extended Dialog)
14 Search-For Search data sets for strings of data (Standard Dialog)
15 Search-ForE Search data sets for strings of data Extended (Extended Dialog)
16 Tables ISPF Table Utility
17 Udlist Print or display (to process) z/OS UNIX directory list
Option ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 70. Utility Selection Panel (ISRUTIL)

Utility Selection Panel action bar

The Utility Selection Panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu
For more information, see the details about the Menu Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Help
The Help pull-down provides information about each available choice on the Utilities Menu.

Library utility (option 3.1)

When you select this option, a panel is displayed (Figure 71 on page 92) that allows you to specify a data
set and an action to be performed. The Library utility is intended primarily for maintenance of partitioned
data sets. However, the print index listing (X), print entire data set (L), data set information (I), and short
data set information (S) functions also apply to sequential data sets.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2019 91

Library utility (option 3.1)

Menu RefList Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Library Utility
More: +
blank Display member list I Data set information B Browse member
C Compress data set S Short data set information D Delete member
X Print index listing E Edit member R Rename member
L Print entire data set V View member P Print member

Enter "/" to select option

ISPF Library: / Confirm Member Delete
Project . . . MYPROJ Enhanced Member List
Group . . . . DEV . . . . . . . . .
Type . . . . SOURCE
Member . . . (If B, D, E, P, R, V, or blank selected)
New name . . (If R selected)

Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set:

Data Set Name . . .
Volume Serial . . . (If not cataloged)

Option ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 71. Library Utility panel (ISRUDA1)

Library Utility panel action bar

The Library Utility panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu
For more information, see the details about the Menu Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
RefList
For information about referral lists, see the details about Using Personal Data Set Lists and Library
Lists in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Utilities
For more information, see the details about the Utilities Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Help
The Help pull-down provides information on the options available for processing libraries and
members, including compressing and printing partitioned data sets, displaying data set information
and member lists, and printing, renaming, deleting, browsing, editing, and viewing members.

Library Utility panel fields

All the fields on the Library Utility panel, with the exception of the "New name" field, are discussed in the
Libraries and Data Sets topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I. The "New name" field is required when
option R (rename member) is chosen; the field must contain the new member name. See “R — rename
member” on page 103 for more information about this option.

Library utility options for data sets

The topics listed here describe the options shown on the left side of the Library Utility panel shown in
Figure 71 on page 92. These options are used to work with data sets.
• “Blank — (display member list)” on page 93
• “C — compress data set” on page 93
• “X — print index listing” on page 93
• “L — print entire data set” on page 94
• “I — data set information” on page 94
• “S — short data set information” on page 98

92 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Library utility (option 3.1)

Blank — (display member list)

If you leave the Option field blank, you must specify a partitioned data set. ISPF displays a member list
when you press Enter. For more information, see the details about Using Member Selection Lists and
Library and Data Set List Utility Line Commands in the Libraries and Data Sets topic in the z/OS ISPF User's
Guide Vol I.
Note:
1. The column headers on a member list display (with the exception of Rename) are point-and-shoot sort
fields.
2. If you enter a slash in the 1-character or 9-character command field, the Member List Commands pop-
up window shown in Figure 72 on page 93 is displayed so that you can select the command you want
to use.
3. The 1-character or 9-character line command field is a point-and-shoot field. If you select the line
command field beside a member name, the Member List Commands pop-up window shown in Figure
72 on page 93 is displayed so that you can select the command you want to use. In addition, you can
enter commands (for example, TSO) directly in the 9-character field.
4. You can chain the P, R, D, V, E, and B commands; that is, you can select multiple members from a
member list for various processing tasks. Use the CANCEL command (from a View, Browse, or Edit
session) to break the chain and return to the member list.

Menu Functions Confirm Utilities Help

─ ┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────┐ ──────────────────────
│ ISRCMLEP Action for Member TEST │ Row 00001 of 00001
│ │ anged ID
/ │ Member Action │ 08 13:32:15 GRAHAMP
│ 1. Edit 8. Copy │
│ 2. View 9. Reset │
│ 3. Browse 10. Open Edit │
│ 4. Delete 11. Submit │
│ 5. Rename 12. TSO Cmd │
│ 6. Print 13. WS Cmd │
│ 7. Move 14. Select **None** │
│ │
│ Prompt Action . . (For prompt field) │
│ │
│ Select a choice and press ENTER to continue │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit │
│ F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap │
⋘───────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F5=Rfind F7=Up F8=Down F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 72. Member list commands pop-up window (ISRCMLEP)

C — compress data set

If you select option C, you can specify any partitioned data set. The compress function is not valid for a
PDSE. The compress is accomplished by calling either of these:
• The IEBCOPY utility
• An optional compress request exit routine, which can be specified by your installation.
Using this option can change an existing data set allocation to exclusive.
ISPF allocates the IEBCOPY SYSUT3 and SYSUT4 data sets as one primary cylinder, one secondary
cylinder. If this is not sufficient for your compress request, these DDNAMES can be preallocated.

X — print index listing

If you select option X, you must specify either a DASD-resident sequential or partitioned data set. The
index listing is recorded in the ISPF list data set. For a partitioned data set, the index listing includes
general information about the data set followed by a member list. For a sequential data set, the index
listing includes general information only. See the topic about Listing Formats in z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol
I for examples of the index listing format for source libraries and load libraries.

Utilities (option 3) 93
Library utility (option 3.1)

Note:
1. A volume serial is not allowed for multivolume data sets using option X.
2. If ISPF was entered in TEST mode, the listing also includes TTR data for each member of the data set.
This data is the track and record address, where the members reside on the volume.

L — print entire data set

If you select option L, you must specify either a DASD-resident sequential or partitioned data set. The
allowable data set characteristics are the same as for Browse, except that data sets with a logical record
length greater than 300 characters are not printed. Also, the data should not contain any printer control
characters. Use the Hardcopy utility (option 3.6) to print data sets that contain printer control characters.
A source listing of the complete data set (including all members of a partitioned data set), preceded by an
index listing, is recorded in the ISPF list data set.
Note:
1. A volume serial is not allowed for multivolume data sets using option L.
2. The page-numbering format of the ISPF list data set is PAGE: XX of YY. The YY value is calculated using
the data set member's current size statistic. When the member's current size is larger than the actual
member size, the result is PAGE: XX of YY, where YY is a page number greater than the last value of XX.
When the size statistic is smaller than the actual member size, the result is PAGE: XX of YY, until the
actual size number XX exceeds YY. Then the result is PAGE: XX, until the end of the member is
processed.

I — data set information

If you select option I, the location, characteristics, and current space utilization of the specified data set
are displayed. The format ISPF uses to display data set information when DFSMSdfp is not installed or is
not available, or when the Storage Management Subsystem is not active, is shown in “U — uncatalog data
set” on page 114. See “Information for managed data sets” on page 96 to see how ISPF displays data
set information when these products are installed, available, and active.
For sequential data sets, options I and S display the same information. For multivolume data sets, options
I and S display current allocation and utilization values that represent totals from all volumes used. You
may not enter a volume serial when you are requesting information on a multivolume data set.
Note:
1. The space for data sets allocated in blocks is calculated as if all of the tracks, including the last one,
contain only full blocks of data. Any partial "short" blocks are ignored.
2. The information shown for current space utilization is the actual data that the data set contains, based
on the number of allocation units (blocks, tracks, bytes, megabytes, and so on) that have been written.
For a data set allocated in units other than tracks and cylinders, it does not include the unused portion
of a track that is only partially filled.
For example, if a data set allocated in bytes with block size of 600 has one block written to a device
with a track size of 1000, 600 bytes of data are written and the remaining 400 bytes cannot be used by
a different data set. A track is the smallest possible unit of physical allocation to a data set on DASD.
ISPF reports 600 bytes used while other products (such as ISMF) report 1000 bytes used. ISPF
reports the space occupied by data in the data set. ISMF reports the space used by this data set that is
not available for use by another data set. The difference is a relative indication of the effectiveness of
the block size used when the data set was created.

94 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Library utility (option 3.1)

Data Set Information

Data Set Name . . . . : MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE

General Data Current Allocation

Management class . . : STANDARD Allocated cylinders : 1
Storage class . . . : BASE Allocated extents . : 1
Volume serial . . . : MVS8WF Maximum dir. blocks : 20
Device type . . . . : 3390
Data class . . . . . : **None**
Organization . . . : PO Current Utilization
Record format . . . : FB Used cylinders . . : 1
Record length . . . : 80 Used extents . . . : 1
Block size . . . . : 27920 Used dir. blocks . : 1
1st extent cylinders: 1 Number of members . : 1
Secondary cylinders : 1
Data set name type : PDS

Creation date . . . : 2002/07/08 Referenced date . . : 2002/07/23

Expiration date . . : ***None***

Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F12=Cancel

Figure 73. Data Set Information panel (ISRUAIP)

If the volume serial is followed by a plus (for example, HSM016+), the data set spans multiple volumes.
Press Enter to display a list of all allocated volumes that have been used, as shown in Figure 74 on page
95.

Figure 74. Volume Information for a Multivolume Data Set (ISRUAMVI)

The "Allocated units" and "Used units" fields can vary, depending on the value that was specified in the
"Space units" field when you allocated the data set. For example, Figure 74 on page 95 shows what the
Data Set Information panel would look like if the data set was allocated by specifying Cylinders in the
"Space units" field.

Utilities (option 3) 95
Library utility (option 3.1)

If directory block information is not available, the Data Set Information panel shows a value of 0 * for the
"Maximum dir. blocks", "Used dir. blocks", and "Number of members" fields. The asterisk beside the zero
refers you to a note on the panel, which states that the directory is unavailable.
If the data set is a PDS, ISPF must open it to retrieve the directory information. This updates the
referenced date for the next time option I is displayed.
If the data set is a PDSE, the "Data set name type" field is LIBRARY and the "Maximum dir. blocks" field is
NOLIMIT. Because the used blocks, used extents, and used directory blocks are not applicable to a PDSE,
the Data Set Information panel replaces these values with "Used pages" and "% Utilized" (Figure 75 on
page 96). Other values that can appear in the "Data set name type" field are:
• HFS - MVS Hierarchical File System data set
• EXTENDED - DFSMSdfp Striped data set
• LARGE - Large format sequential data set
Note: When a PDSE data set is created, it sets aside five pages. This may cause a significant change to the
"% Utilized" value for a small data set.

Figure 75. Data Set Information for PDSE Managed Data Sets (ISRUAISE)

Information for managed data sets

The Library Utility option I (Figure 76 on page 97) displays information for data sets that reside on
Storage Management Subsystem Volumes (also called managed data sets) when:
• DFSMSdfp is installed and available.
• Storage Management Subsystem is active.
• Directory block information is available.

96 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Library utility (option 3.1)

Figure 76. Data Set Information for Managed Data Sets (ISRUAISE)

Note: A "+" may be displayed beside the Volume serial field if the data set is a multiple volume data set.
This is determined from the number of volume entries in the catalog. Depending on the system set-up, a
"+" may not be displayed until the additional volumes have been accessed. For example, a data set with a
non-zero dynamic volume count in the SMS dataclass will not show multiple volume entries in the catalog
until the additional volumes have been accessed. Other vendor products which can dynamically expand
the volume list will also not show multiple volume entries in the catalog until the additional volumes have
been accessed.
Press Enter to display a list of all allocated volumes as shown in Figure 77 on page 98.

Utilities (option 3) 97
Library utility (option 3.1)

Figure 77. Volume Information for a Managed Multivolume Data Set (ISRUAMVI)

The major difference between this information and the information that is displayed for data sets on non-
managed volumes is the addition of these classes:
• Management class
• Storage class
• Data class

S — short data set information

If you select option S, information about the selected data set is displayed. The information displayed by
option S is the same as that displayed by option S of the Data Set utility (option 3.2), but it differs from
option I in two respects. Information for partitioned data sets, when displayed by option S, lacks the
number of maximum and used directory blocks, and the number of members. For sequential data sets,
options I and S display the same information. You can not enter a volume serial when you are requesting
information on multivolume data sets.
Note:
1. The space for data sets allocated in blocks is calculated as if all of the tracks, including the last one,
contain only full blocks of data. Any partial "short" blocks are ignored.
2. The information shown for current space utilization is the actual data that the data set contains, based
on the number of allocation units (blocks, tracks, bytes, megabytes, and so on) that have been written.
For a data set allocated in units other than tracks and cylinders, it does not include the unused portion
of a track that is only partially filled.
For example, if a data set allocated in bytes with block size of 600 has one block written to a device
with a track size of 1000, 600 bytes of data are written and the remaining 400 bytes cannot be used by
a different data set. A track is the smallest possible unit of physical allocation to a data set on DASD.
ISPF reports 600 bytes used while other products (such as ISMF) report 1000 bytes used. ISPF
reports the space occupied by data in the data set. ISMF reports the space used by this data set that is

98 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Library utility (option 3.1)

not available for use by another data set. The difference is a relative indication of the effectiveness of
the block size used when the data set was created.
Figure 78 on page 99 shows a short format example of data set information for a partitioned data set.
This is the short format ISPF uses to display data set information when DFSMSdfp is not installed or not
available, or when the Storage Management Subsystem is not active. See “Short information for managed
data sets” on page 99 to see how ISPF displays data set information when these products are installed,
available, and active.

Data Set Information

More: +
Data Set Name . . . . : MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE

General Data Current Allocation

Management class . . : STANDARD Allocated cylinders : 1
Storage class . . . : BASE Allocated extents . : 1
Volume serial . . . : MVS8WF
Device type . . . . : 3390
Data class . . . . . : **None** Current Utilization
Organization . . . : PO Used cylinders . . : 1
Record format . . . : FB Used extents . . . : 1
Record length . . . : 80
Block size . . . . : 27920
1st extent cylinders: 1
Secondary cylinders : 1
Data set name type : PDS

Creation date . . . : 2002/07/08 Referenced date . . : 2002/07/31

Expiration date . . : ***None***

Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F12=Cancel

Figure 78. Short data set information (ISRUAIP)

The "Allocated units" and "Used units" fields can vary, depending on the value that was specified in the
"Space units" field when you allocated the data set. For example, Figure 78 on page 99 shows what the
short format of the Data Set Information panel would look like if the data set was allocated by specifying
CYLS in the "Space units" field.

Short information for managed data sets

The Library Utility option S displays information (Figure 79 on page 100) for data sets that reside on
Storage Management Subsystem volumes (also called managed data sets) when:
• DFSMSdfp is installed and available
• Storage Management Subsystem is active.

Utilities (option 3) 99
Library utility (option 3.1)

Figure 79. Data Set Information (Short) for Managed Data Sets (ISRUAISE)

The major difference between this information and the information that is displayed for data sets on non-
managed volumes is the addition of these classes:
• Management class
• Storage class
• Data class
If the data set is a PDSE, the "Data set name type" field is LIBRARY. Because the used blocks and used
extents are not applicable to a PDSE, the Data Set Information panel replaces these values with "Used
pages" and "% Utilized" (Figure 80 on page 101). Other values that can appear in the "Data set name
type" field are:
• HFS - MVS Hierarchical File System data set
• EXTENDED - DFSMSdfp Striped data set. When the Data Set Name Type is EXTENDED, the SMS
Compressible field indicates if the data set is compressible or not (YES or NO).
• LARGE - Large format sequential data set

100 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Library utility (option 3.1)

Figure 80. Data Set Information (Short) for a PDSE (ISRUAISE)

Library utility options for members and library utility member list line commands
The topics listed here describe the options on the Library Utility panel (shown in Figure 71 on page 92)
that you can use to work with members and the line commands that you can use on a member list that
you display from the Library Utility panel.
• “B — browse member” on page 102
• “C — copy member” on page 102
• “D — delete member” on page 102
• “E — edit member” on page 102
• “G — reset member statistics” on page 102
• “I — display member information” on page 103
• “J — submit member” on page 103
• “M — move member” on page 103
• “P — print member” on page 103
• “R — rename member” on page 103
• “T — invoke TSO command for member” on page 103
• “V — view member” on page 104
• “W — invoke workstation command for member” on page 104
Note:
1. You can chain these commands; that is, you can select multiple members from a member list for
various processing tasks. Use the CANCEL command (from a View, Browse, or Edit session) to break
the chain and return to the member list.

Utilities (option 3) 101

Library utility (option 3.1)

2. With an enhanced member list, you can enter other commands. See “M — display member list” on
page 153.

B — browse member
You can specify B as an option on the Library Utility panel or as a line command on a member list that you
display from the Library Utility panel.
The specified member is displayed in Browse mode. You can use all the Browse commands.
If you select B as an option on the Library Utility panel, you must also specify a partitioned data set and a
member name on the Library Utility panel. When you exit Browse, the Library Utility panel reappears.

C — copy member
You can specify C as a line command on a member list that you display from the Library Utility panel.
If you enter line command C, the Copy Entry panel appears where you must specify a partitioned data set
and member name for the new member. You can also specify other options for the copy on this panel.

D — delete member
You can specify D as an option on the Library Utility panel or as a line command on a member list that you
display from the Library Utility panel.
You are prevented from deleting a PDS member that any user is currently editing.
If you select D as an option on the Library Utility panel:
• You must also specify a partitioned data set and a member name or pattern on the Library Utility panel.
• If you select Confirm Member Delete on the Library Utility panel, you are asked to confirm your intention
to delete this member. Note that Confirm Member Delete is forced on when you delete members using a
pattern.
• When the deleted member is a primary member, the primary member and all associated aliases are
deleted. When the deleted member is an alias, only the alias and its directory entry are deleted.
• When a member pattern is specified:
– Every primary member whose name matches the member pattern is deleted.
– Every alias that is associated with a primary member whose name matches the member pattern is
deleted, even if the alias name itself does not match the member pattern.
– Every alias whose name matches the member pattern is deleted, even if the alias is associated with a
primary member whose name does not match the member pattern.
If you enter line command D on a member list that you display from the Library Utility panel:
• If you have selected 1. Set Delete Confirmation On from the Confirm pull-down on the Library Utility -
Member List panel (ISRUDMM), then you are asked to confirm your intention to delete this member.
• When the deleted member is a primary member, the primary member and all associated alias names
are deleted. When the deleted member is an alias, only the alias and its directory entry are deleted.

E — edit member
You can specify E as an option on the Library Utility panel or as a line command on a member list that you
display from the Library Utility panel.
The specified member is displayed in Edit mode. You can use all EDIT commands.
If you select E as an option on the Library Utility panel, you must also specify a partitioned data set and
member name on the Library Utility panel. When you exit Edit, the Library Utility panel reappears.

G — reset member statistics

You can specify G as a line command on a member list that you display from the Library Utility panel.

102 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Library utility (option 3.1)

If you enter line command G, the Reset Member Statistics panel is displayed where you can enter the
action to be performed and any additional options for the reset action.

I — display member information

You can specify I as a line command on a member list that you display from the Library Utility panel.
If you enter line command I, the Member Statistics panel is displayed showing the statistics for the
member.

J — submit member
You can specify J as a line command on a member list that you display from the Library Utility panel.
If you enter line command J, the member is submitted as JCL for batch processing.

M — move member
You can specify M as a line command on a member list that you display from the Library Utility panel.
If you enter line command M, the Move Entry panel is displayed where you must enter the destination
data set and member name. You can also specify other options for the move on this panel.

P — print member
You can specify P as an option on the Library Utility panel or as a line command on a member list that you
display from the Library Utility panel.
A source listing of the member is recorded in the ISPF list data set.
If you select P as an option on the Library Utility panel, you must also specify a partitioned data set and a
member name on the Library Utility panel.
Note: If any members are to be printed, the data set characteristics must conform to those for the L
option.

R — rename member
You can specify R as an option on the Library Utility panel or as a line command on a member list that you
display from the Library Utility panel.
You are prevented from renaming a member that is currently being edited by you or another user.
If you select R as an option on the Library Utility panel, you must also specify a partitioned data set and
member name on the Library Utility panel. You must also specify a new member name in the "New name"
field.
If you enter line command R on a member list that you display from the Library Utility panel, you can
specify the new member name in the Prompt field. If the new member name is not entered in the Prompt
field, the Member Rename panel is displayed where you must enter the new member name.
Where the data set refers to a partitioned data set load library (RECFM=U), and the member to be
renamed is the name of a primary member, the user data component of any associated alias names will
be updated to refer to the renamed primary name.

T — invoke TSO command for member

You can specify T as a line command on a member list that you display from the Library Utility panel.
When you use the T line command, enter the name of the TSO command you want to execute in the
Prompt field to the right of the member name. The fully-qualified data set name, including the member is
passed as a parameter to the TSO command. If you want to execute a member that is a REXX exec or
CLIST, use the T line command on the line for that member, and enter EXEC in the Prompt field. If you
leave the Prompt field blank, the TSO Command Action panel appears, where you can enter the TSO
command to be run for the member and any additional parameters that are needed for the command.

Utilities (option 3) 103

Data set utility (option 3.2)

V — view member
You can specify V as an option on the Library Utility panel or as a line command on a member list that you
display from the Library Utility panel.
The specified member is displayed in View mode. You can use all EDIT commands. For more information,
see the topic about View (option 1) in z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
If you select V as an option on the Library Utility panel, you must also specify a partitioned data set and
member name on the Library Utility panel. When you exit View, the Library Utility panel reappears.

W — invoke workstation command for member

You can specify W as a line command on a member list that you display from the Library Utility panel.
If you enter line command W, the WS Command Action panel appears, where you can enter the
workstation command to be run for the member and any additional parameters that are needed for the
command.

Data set utility (option 3.2)

When you select this option, a panel is displayed (Figure 81 on page 104) that allows you to specify a data
set and an action to be performed.

Menu RefList Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Data Set Utility

A Allocate new data set C Catalog data set

R Rename entire data set U Uncatalog data set
D Delete entire data set S Short data set information
blank Data set information V VSAM Utilities

ISPF Library:
Project . . Enter "/" to select option
Group . . . / Confirm Data Set Delete
Type . . . .

Other Partitioned, Sequential or VSAM Data Set:

Data Set Name . . .
Volume Serial . . . (If not cataloged, required for option "C")

Data Set Password . . (If password protected)

Option ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 81. Data Set Utility panel (ISRUDA2S)

Data Set Utility panel action bar

The Data Set Utility panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu
For more information, see the details about the Menu Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
RefList
For information about referral lists, see the topic about Using Personal Data Set Lists and Library Lists
in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Utilities
For more information, see the details about the Utilities Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.

104 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Data set utility (option 3.2)

Help
The Help pull-down provides information on:
• allocating new partitioned and sequential data sets
• processing existing data sets (renaming, deleting, cataloging, uncataloging, and displaying data set
information)
• The VSAM utilities

Data Set Utility panel fields

All the fields on the Data Set Utility panel are explained in the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of
the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I. For option A you can specify any DASD-resident sequential or partitioned
data set. For the other options, you can specify any DASD-resident data set that is not VSAM. You can get
short information on a VSAM data set.

Data set utility options

These topics describe the options shown on the Data Set Utility panel:
• “A — allocate new data set” on page 105
• “Allocation errors” on page 112
• “C — catalog data set” on page 113
• “R — rename entire data set” on page 113
• “U — uncatalog data set” on page 114
• “D — delete entire data set” on page 114
• “S — data set information (short)” on page 116
• “Blank — (data set information)” on page 117
• “V — VSAM utilities” on page 117

A — allocate new data set

Use option A to allocate a new data set with or without the Storage Management Subsystem classes
(management class, storage class, and data class). A data set that is allocated on a volume that is
managed by the Storage Management Subsystem (SMS) is called a managed data set. A data set that is
allocated on a volume that is not managed by the SMS is called a non-managed data set.
To use option A, you must:
1. Enter one of these:
• An ISPF library name in the Project, Group, and Type fields
• Another partitioned or sequential data set name in the Data Set Name field.
See the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I for information on
how to enter the ISPF library name or the data set name.
2. If you entered an ISPF library name, the value in the Volume Serial field is ignored. However, if you
entered another data set name, you can specify the volume on which to allocate the data set in the
Volume Serial field. Do not enter a volume serial if you want to do one of these:
• Use the authorized default volume.
• Enter a generic unit address in the "Generic unit" field on the Allocate New Data Set panel.
Note that an SMS-eligible data set may be allocated on a volume different from any entered value.
For more information about Volume Serials, see the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS
ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
3. If your ISPF libraries and data sets are password-protected, enter the password in the Data Set
Password field.

Utilities (option 3) 105

Data set utility (option 3.2)

For more information about Data Set Passwords, see the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the
z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Note: You cannot assign a password to a managed data set. Therefore, the Data Set Password field is
ignored when you allocate a managed data set.
4. Press Enter.
The Allocate New Data Set panel is displayed. This panel enables you to specify data set allocation values.
The fields displayed on this panel depend upon the value of the ALLOWED_ALLOCATION_UNITS keyword
in the ISPF configuration table. When ALLOWED_ALLOCATION_UNITS is not 'A' the panel shown in Figure
82 on page 106 is displayed.

Menu RefList Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Allocate New Data Set
More: +
Data Set Name . . . : HANKO.TEST.DATADEV

Management class . . . PRIMARY (Blank for default management class)

Storage class . . . . PRIMARY (Blank for default storage class)
Volume serial . . . . A$US20 (Blank for system default volume) **
Data class . . . . . . (Blank for default data class)
Space units . . . . . CYLINDER (BLKS, TRKS, CYLS, KB, MB, BYTES
or RECORDS)
Average record unit (M, K, or U)
Primary quantity . . 1 (In above units)
Secondary quantity 20 (In above units)
Directory blocks . . 0 (Zero for sequential data set) *
Record format . . . . FB
Record length . . . . 80
Block size . . . . . 27920
Data set name type (LIBRARY, HFS, PDS, LARGE, BASIC, *
EXTREQ, EXTPREF or blank)
Data set version . .
Num of generations :
Extended Attributes (NO, OPT or blank)
Expiration date . . . (YY/MM/DD, YYYY/MM/DD
MM.DDD, MMMM.DDD in Julian form)
Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 82. Allocate New Data Set panel (ISRUAAP2)

Otherwise, this panel is displayed: (Figure 83 on page 107).

106 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Data set utility (option 3.2)

Menu RefList Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Allocate New Data Set
More: +
Data Set Name . . . : MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE2

Management class . . . PRIMARY (Blank for default management class)

Storage class . . . . PRIMARY (Blank for default storage class)
Volume serial . . . . P$US03 (Blank for system default volume) **
Device type . . . . . (Generic unit or device address) **
Data class . . . . . . (Blank for default data class)
Space units . . . . . CYLINDER (BLKS, TRKS, CYLS, KB, MB, BYTES
or RECORDS)
Average record unit (M, K, or U)
Primary quantity . . 5 (In above units)
Secondary quantity 5 (In above units)
Directory blocks . . 0 (Zero for sequential data set) *
Record format . . . . FB
Record length . . . . 80
Block size . . . . . 32720
Data set name type . LIBRARY (LIBRARY, HFS, PDS, LARGE, BASIC, *
EXTREQ, EXTPREF or blank)
Data set version . : 2
Num of generations : 20
Extended Attributes (NO, OPT or blank)
Expiration date . . . (YY.DDD, YYYY.DDD in Julian form
Enter "/" to select option DDDD for retention period in days
Allocate Multiple Volumes or blank)

( * Specifying LIBRARY may override zero directory block)

( ** Only one of these fields may be specified)

Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 83. Allocate New Data Set —managed data set support panel (ISRUAASE)

When you press Enter with this panel displayed, the new data set is allocated and cataloged. Entering the
END command returns you to the previous panel without allocating the data set.
An optional installation exit, the data set allocation exit, can control all data set creation, deletion,
allocation, and deactivation done directly by ISPF. This does not include allocations done by ISPF, the TSO
ALLOCATE command, or other TSO commands. See z/OS ISPF Planning and Customizing for more
information about the data set allocation exit.
Your installation must use DFSMSdfp to define the values that you enter in the "Management class",
"Storage class", and "Data class" fields. If you have no specific requirements, you can leave these fields
blank. However, be aware that your installation may provide default management, storage, and data
classes. These defaults would take effect if you leave any of the class fields blank and may even override
any classes that you specify.
Management class
Used to obtain data management-related information (migration, backup, and retention criteria, such
as expiration date) for the data set allocation.
If you have no specific management class requirements, you can leave this field blank. However, be
aware that your installation may provide a default management class. This default may even override
any management class that you specify.
Storage class
Used to obtain the storage-related information (volume serial) for the data set allocation. Any volume
serial that you enter in the " Volume serial" field is ignored unless the storage class that you use
includes the Guaranteed Space=Yes attribute (useful if you are allocating multivolume data sets).
Data class
Used to obtain the data-related information (space units, primary quantity, secondary quantity,
directory block, record format, record length, and data set name type) for the allocation of the data
set.
Default values are provided for the fields in Figure 82 on page 106, except for expiration date, based on
which of these occurred most recently:

Utilities (option 3) 107

Data set utility (option 3.2)

• What you last entered on this panel

• The last display data set information request (options 3.1, 3.2, or 3.4).
You can type over the displayed defaults if you want to change them. Here is a list of the fields on this
panel and their definitions:
Volume serial
This field is one that you probably will not need to use very often. It is not required and is usually
ignored by the Storage Management Subsystem. Do not enter a volume serial if you want to do one of
these:
• Use the authorized default volume.
• Enter a generic unit address in the Generic unit field.
• Use the volume specified by the storage class you are using.
When a storage class is used, your installation and the SMS assume joint responsibility for
determining the volume on which the data set is allocated. The SMS enables the installation to select
the volumes that are eligible to contain the data set. It then chooses one of those volumes and
allocates the data set. The SMS's volume choice is based on:
• storage requirements
• The amount of space a volume has available.
Note: ISPF does not support allocation of tape data sets.

Generic unit
The generic unit address for the direct access volume that is to contain the data set, such as 3380 or
3390. This field overrides the Volume Serial field on the Data Set Utility panel. Therefore, you should
leave this field blank if you want to do one of these:
• Use the authorized default volume
• Enter a volume serial in the Volume serial field.
Note:
1. Leave both the Volume serial and Generic unit fields blank to allow ISPF to select an eligible
volume. Eligibility is determined by the unit information in your user entry in the TSO User Attribute
Data Set (UADS) or the TSO segment of RACF.
2. At some installations, you are limited to eligible volumes even when an explicit volume serial is
specified. At other installations you can specify any mounted volume. This is an installation option.
3. To allocate a data set to a 3850 virtual volume, you must also have MOUNT authority, gained by
using the TSO ACCOUNT command or by using the RACF PERMIT command for the TSO AUTH
general resource class.
4. If you are allocating an SMS data set, you can enter either an installation defined group name or a
generic device type in the Generic unit field, but not a specific device number.
Space units
Any of these:
Track
Shows that the amounts entered in the primary and secondary quantity fields are expressed in
tracks.
Cylinder
Shows that the amounts entered in the primary and secondary quantity fields are expressed in
cylinders.
Block
Shows that the amounts entered in the primary and secondary quantity fields are expressed in
blocks.

108 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Data set utility (option 3.2)

Megabyte
Shows that the amounts entered in the primary and secondary quantity fields are expressed in
megabytes.
Kilobyte
Shows that the amounts entered in the primary and secondary quantity fields are expressed in
kilobytes.
Byte
Shows that the amounts entered in the primary and secondary quantity fields are expressed in
bytes.
Records
Shows that the amounts entered in the primary and secondary quantity fields are the average
number of records of the size specified by the block size field.
Note: "Space units" allows the shortest unique abbreviation for each attribute; for example, T for
TRKS, C for CYLS, K for KB, and M for MB, BY for BYTE, R for RECORDS, and BL for BLKS.
Average record unit
Shows the unit used when allocating average record length. U specifies single-record units (bytes). K
specifies thousand-record units (kilobytes). M specifies million-record units (megabytes). The default
value is U.
Primary quantity
The primary allocation quantity in tracks, cylinders, blocks, megabytes, kilobytes, bytes, or records, as
shown in the "Space units" field. This number can be zero for sequential data sets, but must be
greater than zero for PDSs. Also, if the primary quantity is zero, the secondary quantity must be
greater than zero.
Secondary quantity
The secondary allocation quantity in tracks, cylinders, blocks, megabytes, kilobytes, bytes, or records,
as shown in the "Space units" field. This quantity is allocated when the primary quantity is insufficient.
Directory blocks
Enter one of these:
• For partitioned data sets, you must specify the number of directory blocks. Each 256-byte block
accommodates these number of directory entries:
– Data sets with ISPF statistics: 6
– Data sets without ISPF statistics: 21
– Load module data sets: 4-7, depending on attributes
• ISPF requests a data set organization (DSORG) of PS when the value is zero or PO if the value is
greater than zero. Note that ISPF converts a blank value to zero.
Record format
Any valid combination of these codes:
F
Fixed-length records.
V
Variable-length records.
U
Undefined format records.
B
Blocked records.
A
ASA printer control characters.
M
Machine code printer control characters.

Utilities (option 3) 109

Data set utility (option 3.2)

S
Standard (for F) or spanned (for V); use only with sequential data sets.
T
Track-overflow feature.
Note:
1. You must enter either F, V, or U.
2. You can specify S and T, but ISPF does not otherwise support them.
Record length
The logical record length, in bytes, of the records to be stored in the data set.
Block size
The block size, also called physical record length, of the blocks to be stored in the data set. Use this
field to specify how many bytes of data to put into each block, based on the record length. For
example, if the record length is 80 and the block size is 3120, 39 records can be placed in each block.
Note: The record length and block size are verified to be consistent with the record format. If you
need to use non-standard characteristics, use the TSO ALLOCATE command.
Data set name type
The type of data set to be allocated:
LIBRARY
Allocates a partitioned data set extended.
HFS
Allocates an HFS PDSE. This is valid for DFSMS 1.2 only.
PDS
Allocates a partitioned data set.
LARGE
Allocates a large format sequential data set.
EXTREQ
Indicates that an extended data set is required.
EXTPREF
Indicates that an extended data set is preferred.
BASIC
Indicates that neither an extended nor a large format sequential data set is to be allocated.
blank
Allocates a partitioned or sequential data set based on the data set characteristics entered.
Note: If you specify LIBRARY and a zero directory size, ISPF allocates a PDSE and overrides the zero
directory size. If you specify blanks for the directory size, a sequential data set is allocated instead of
a PDSE.
Data set version
The version number when the Data set name type is LIBRARY. Valid values are:
1
Library version 1
2
Library version 2
blank
ISPF does not specify the library version and this is determined by system defaults.
Num of generations
This field is used only when when the Data set name type is LIBRARY and the Data set version is 2.
Specifies the maximum number of generations that are kept for members in the data set. Valid values
are from 0 to the system-defined maximum (MAXGENS_LIMIT in PARMLIB member IGDSMSxx). A
value of 0 indicates that no generations are kept.

110 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Data set utility (option 3.2)

Extended Attributes
Valid values are:
NO
Data set cannot have extended attributes or reside in EAS. This is the default for non-VSAM data
sets.
OPT
Data set can have extended attributes and reside in EAS. This is the default for VSAM data sets.
blank
Use default based on data type.
Expiration date
Allows you to protect valuable data by specifying a date, in your national language, when the data set
may be deleted. If you try to delete an unexpired data set, ISPF displays two panels: a Confirm Delete
panel, followed by a Confirm Purge panel. See “D — delete entire data set” on page 114 for more
information about deleting unexpired data sets.
An expiration date is not required, but if you enter one it should be in one of these formats:
YYYY/MM/DD
Date shown in year, month, and day, or your equivalent national format. The maximum expiration
date allowed is 2155/12/31.
YYYY.DDD
Date shown in Julian format, such as 2006.066 for March 7, 2006. The maximum expiration date
allowed is 2155.365.
You can specify a DDD value of up to 366 if the YYYY value represents a leap year.
DDDD
The number of days, starting with the creation date, after which the data set can be deleted. DDDD
has a range of 0 to 9999.
PERM, NOLIMIT, NEVER, 9999
Specifying any of these values causes ISPF to translate it to a value of 1999.365. This is treated
by ISPF as permanent retention.
Allocate Multiple Volumes
Allows you to allocate sequential data sets that span multiple volumes. ISPF supports a maximum of
59 volumes. Place a slash in this field and press Enter to display a panel similar to the one shown in
Figure 84 on page 111.

Menu RefList Utilities Help

─ ┌──────────── Multivolume Allocation ─────────────┐ ────────────────────────
│ ISRUAMV │
│ │ More: - +
│ Enter the number of volumes to allocate or │ device address) **
D │ the names of one or more volumes and │ lt data class)
│ press Enter to allocate or enter Cancel │ S, KB, MB, BYTES
│ command to exit. If a number is entered, │
│ any volume names will be ignored. │
│ More: + │
│ Number of volumes to allocate: │
│ │ tial data set) *
│ Volume names: │
│ 1. MVS8WF 2. 3. 4. │
│ Command ===> │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit │ DS, or blank) *
│ F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap │ MM/DD
⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────────┘ D in Julian form
Enter "/" to select option DDDD for retention period in days
/ Allocate Multiple Volumes or blank)

Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 84. Multivolume allocation panel (ISRUAMV)

Utilities (option 3) 111

Data set utility (option 3.2)

This panel allows you to specify up to 59 volumes.

Note:
• Although the volume input fields are numbered consecutively, you may enter volume names in any
of the fields.
• The volume that you enter in the "Volume serial" field on the Allocate New Data Set panel will be
placed in the first field of the Multivolume Allocation panel.
• If you enter only one volume, standard data set allocation is invoked.
• If you enter a number in the "Number of volumes to allocate" field, any volume names left in the
name fields are ignored, and might or might not be the volumes the data set is allocated to.
• When displaying information about a multivolume data set, depending on your system setup, all
volumes might not be shown until they have been accessed.

Allocation errors
ISPF attempts to recognize inconsistent attributes for partitioned and sequential data sets before
allocating them. However, when conditions outside ISPF's control result in the allocation of such a data
set, the Allocation Error panel (Figure 85 on page 112) is displayed. These conditions are caused by:
• A data class that specifies inconsistent attributes
• Attributes entered on the Allocate New Data Set panel that create inconsistency by overriding other
attributes specified by the data class.

Figure 85. Allocation Error Panel (ISRUADCS)

The term inconsistent attributes refers to incompatible values that have been specified for one or more of
these items: Space units; Primary or Secondary quantity; Directory blocks; Record format; Record length;
Block size.

112 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Data set utility (option 3.2)

For example, if you allocate a data set with an undefined record format (RECFM=U) and a block size of
zero (BLOCKSIZE=0), some ISPF functions (such as Move and Copy) and services (such as LMMOVE,
LMCOPY, and LMINIT) cannot use the data set.
However, when either the linkage editor or the IEBCOPY utility has been called, these functions and
services determine the best block size for the data set. Then, when the data set has a block size greater
than zero, the ISPF functions and services listed can be used.
The Allocation Error panel gives you the opportunity to delete such a data set because other ISPF
functions, such as View (option 1) and Edit (option 2), may not be able to use it.
For information about allocation errors and how they affect data set promotion when using SCLM, refer to
z/OS ISPF Software Configuration and Library Manager Guide and Reference.

C — catalog data set

If you select option C, the specified data set is cataloged. For this option, you must specify the volume
serial on which the data set resides, regardless of whether the data set is specified as project, library, and
type, or as another data set name. The data set must reside on the specified volume.
The preceding instructions for cataloging data sets do not apply to data sets that reside on Storage
Management Subsystem volumes. These data sets are automatically cataloged when you allocate them.
They cannot be cataloged by using option C.

R — rename entire data set

If you select option R, a panel is displayed to allow you to enter the new data set name.
Type the new data set name and press Enter to rename, or enter the END command to cancel. Either
action returns you to the previous panel.
If you specify a volume serial for a data set to be renamed, ISPF checks to see whether the data set is
cataloged on that volume. If it is, the Rename panel prompts you to specify whether to recatalog the data
set. If you specify a volume serial and the data set is not cataloged, it remains uncataloged after you
rename it. If a volume serial is not specified, the data set is recataloged to the new data set name and the
old data set name is uncataloged.
Note:
1. ISPF does not rename VSAM data sets or password-protected data sets.
2. A volume serial is not allowed for multivolume data sets using Rename.
3. Generation Data Group (GDG) data sets can only be renamed to something other than GDG names.

Attention: Trying to rename GDG data sets to a different generation or version number can
cause deletion of your GDG data set or group of GDG data sets.
4. When you rename a data set that resides on a Storage Management Subsystem volume, you cannot
specify a volume serial in the Volume Serial field. Both the cataloged entry and the VTOC entry are
renamed.

Rename processing with RACF

The normal order of processing when ISPF is asked to rename a data set is as follows:
1. The new data set name is cataloged using SVC 26
2. The data set is renamed using SVC 30
3. The old data set name is uncataloged using SVC 26
There are three occasions, however, when ISPF will deviate from this order of processing:
• If the data set is a System Managed (SMS) data set, the update of the catalog (both cataloging the new
name and uncataloging the old name) is handled by the operating system when the SVC 30 is issued. In
this case, ISPF does not issue either of the SVC 26 requests.

Utilities (option 3) 113

Data set utility (option 3.2)

• If the data set is an uncataloged data set, no catalog update will be done. The data set is renamed using
the SVC 30 only.
• If the data set is cataloged, but the user specified both the data set name and volume, panel ISRUARP2
is displayed. The user has the option of specifying whether the catalog processing should be done. If the
user indicates (via a NO in the "Reply to uncatalog the data set" field) that no catalog processing should
be done, only the SVC 30 is used to rename the data set. If the reply is YES, the SVC 30 as well as both
SVC 26 requests are issued.
If an error is encountered during a rename request, an attempt is made to return the data set to its
original name, and to reset the catalog entries to their original status (remove the new name from the
catalog and leave the old name in the catalog).
This order of processing is intended to minimize the possibility that an uncataloged data set will result if
an error is encountered during the rename process. Errors may be encountered due to certain
combinations of RACF data set profiles and user access to the groups under which those data set profiles
fall. When an error occurs, the user receives a message indicating the status of the data set name, and of
the catalog entries.
See the z/OS Security Server RACF Security Administrator's Guide or equivalent documentation for your
security package, to determine the authorization levels required for each of these operations. The user
will need authorization first to catalog the new data set name, then to rename the data set, and then to
uncatalog the old data set name. This will require adequate authorization to any discrete or generic data
set profiles involved and to the catalogs involved. Be aware that a discrete data set profile is renamed
when the data set is renamed.

Renaming with expiration dates

If the data set has an expiration date in its catalog entry, the expiration date is not propagated forward to
the new catalog entry. In this case, a confirmation panel is displayed.
As directed by the panel, press Enter if you want to confirm the rename request. If you want the data set
to have an expiration date under its new name, use the TSO ALTER command or a similar function to
update the new catalog entry.

Renaming with aliases

The results of renaming a data set with an alias differ depending upon whether the data set is on a System
Managed Storage (SMS) volume or not. For an SMS data set, DFSMS ensures the alias is preserved and is
associated with the new data set name. For a non-SMS data set, the alias is removed.

U — uncatalog data set

If you select option U, the specified data set name is uncataloged. There is no need for the specified data
set to be allocated or for the volume on which it resides to be mounted.
If the catalog entry being removed contains an expiration date in the future, a confirmation panel is
displayed. Press Enter if you want to confirm the uncatalog request, otherwise press END to cancel the
request.
Note: Uncatalog is not allowed for multivolume data sets.
You cannot use option U to uncatalog a data set that resides on a Storage Management Subsystem
volume. However, the system uncatalogs these data sets when you delete them, which is done by using
option D of either the Data Set utility (option 3.2) or the Data Set List utility (option 3.4).

D — delete entire data set

If you select option D, a confirmation panel is displayed (Figure 86 on page 115) so you can make sure
you did not select this option by mistake.

114 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Data set utility (option 3.2)

Menu RefList Utilities Help

─ ┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐ ──────
│ Confirm Delete │
│ More: + │
│ Data Set Name . : MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE │
│ Volume . . . . : MVS8WF │
│ Creation date . : 2002/07/08 │
b │ │
│ Enter "/" to select option │
I │ Set data set delete confirmation off │
│ │
│ Instructions: │
│ Press ENTER to confirm delete. │
│ (The data set will be deleted and uncataloged.) │
O │ │
│ Press CANCEL or EXIT to cancel delete. │
│ │ "C")
│ Command ===> │
D │ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward │
│ F9=Swap F12=Cancel │
⋘───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Option ===> D
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 86. Confirm Delete panel (ISRUADC1)

If you specify a volume serial for the data set to be deleted, ISPF checks to see whether the data set is
cataloged on that volume. If so, the Confirm Delete panel prompts you to specify whether to uncatalog
the data set. The displayed default is YES. If no volume serial is specified, and the data set does not have
an expiration date, the data set is deleted and uncataloged.
Note:
1. ISPF does not delete password-protected data sets or data sets allocated with an esoteric device type.
2. A volume serial is not allowed for multivolume data sets using Delete.
As directed on the panel, perform one of these actions:
• Press Enter to confirm the data set deletion.
• Enter the CANCEL or EXIT command to cancel. This action returns you to the previous panel.
If the data set has an expiration date that has not expired, ISPF displays a Confirm Purge panel (Figure 87
on page 115) after the Confirm Delete panel.

Menu RefList Utilities Help

─ ┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐ ─────
│ Confirm Delete │
│ │
│ Data Set being deleted has an expiration date which has not expired │
│ Data Set Name . : MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE │
│ Volume . . . . : MVS8WF │
b │ Creation date . : 2002/07/08 │
│ Expiration Date : 2002/10/01 │
I │ │
│ Enter "/" to select option │
│ Purge Data Set │
│ │
│ Instructions: │
O │ Enter "/" to confirm the purge request. │
│ (The data set will be deleted and uncataloged.) │
│ │
│ Press CANCEL or EXIT to cancel the purge request. │
│ │
│ Command ===> │
D │ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward │
│ F9=Swap F12=Cancel │
⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 87. Confirm purge panel (ISRUADC3)

Utilities (option 3) 115

Data set utility (option 3.2)

Use a slash to select Purge Data Set if you want ISPF to purge the data set. The statement that is enclosed
in parentheses on the Confirm Purge panel shows whether the data set to be purged will be uncataloged.
When you delete a data set, the volume name is compared to the volume name in the configuration table.
If the names match, the command specified in the configuration table is used in place of the ISPF delete
processing. This lets you delete migrated data sets without first causing them to be recalled.

Delete processing with RACF

If the data set is an SMS data set, it is deleted using SVC 29. The update of the catalog entry is handled by
the operating system.
If the data set is not an SMS data set and either it is not cataloged or the user indicates on panel
ISRUADC2 (panel ISRUADC2 is shown if the volume is supplied) that it is not to be uncataloged, it is
deleted using SVC 29.
If the data set is not an SMS data set and it is cataloged and/or the user indicates on panel ISRUADC2
(panel ISRUADC2 is shown if the volume is supplied) that it is to be uncataloged, this process is followed:
1. The data set is deleted using SVC 29 (SCRATCH).
2. The data set is uncataloged using SVC 26.
This order of processing is intended to minimize the possibility that an uncataloged data set will result if
an error is encountered during the delete process. Some combinations of RACF generic and discrete data
set profiles and user access to the groups under which those profiles fall can cause this process to fail. If
an error is encountered in this process the user is notified via a message of the status of the data set and
catalog entries.
See the z/OS Security Server RACF Security Administrator's Guide or equivalent documentation for your
security package, to determine the authorization levels required for each of these operations. The user
will need authorization first to delete the data set and then to uncatalog the data set name. This will
require adequate authorization to any discrete or generic data set profiles involved and to the catalogs
involved. Be aware that a discrete data set profile is deleted when the data set is deleted.

S — data set information (short)

If you select option S, information about the selected data set is displayed. The information displayed by
option S is the same information displayed by option S on the Library Utility panel (option 3.1). See “S —
short data set information” on page 98 for more information and Figure 78 on page 99 for an example. To
return to the previous panel, press Enter or enter the END command.
The space for data sets allocated in blocks is calculated as if all of the tracks, including the last one,
contain only full blocks of data. Any partial "short" blocks are ignored.
Note:
1. The information shown for current space utilization is the actual data that the data set contains, based
on the number of allocation units (blocks, tracks, bytes, megabytes, and so on) that have been written.
For a data set allocated in units other than tracks and cylinders, it does not include the unused portion
of a track that is only partially filled.
For example, if a data set allocated in bytes with block size of 600 has one block written to a device
with a track size of 1000, 600 bytes of data are written and the remaining 400 bytes cannot be used by
a different data set. A track is the smallest possible unit of physical allocation to a data set on DASD.
ISPF reports 600 bytes used while other products (such as ISMF) report 1000 bytes used. ISPF
reports the space occupied by data in the data set. ISMF reports the space used by this data set that is
not available for use by another data set. The difference is a relative indication of the effectiveness of
the block size used when the data set was created.
2. Space utilization values are not displayed for VSAM or BDAM data sets.
See “Short information for managed data sets” on page 99 to learn more about the data set information
that is displayed for managed data sets.

116 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Data set utility (option 3.2)

Blank — (data set information)

If you leave the Option field blank, information about the selected data set is displayed. The information
displayed is the same information displayed by option I on the Library Utility panel (option 3.1). See “I —
data set information” on page 94 for more information and “U — uncatalog data set” on page 114 for an
example. To return to the previous panel, press Enter or enter the END command.
Note:
1. For multivolume data sets, options I and S display current allocation and utilization values that
represent totals from all volumes used.
2. You can not enter a volume serial when you are requesting information on a multivolume data set.
3. The space for data sets allocated in blocks is calculated as if all of the tracks, including the last one,
contain only full blocks of data. Any partial "short" blocks are ignored.
4. The information shown for current space utilization is the actual data that the data set contains, based
on the number of allocation units (blocks, tracks, bytes, megabytes, and so on) that have been written.
For a data set allocated in units other than tracks and cylinders, it does not include the unused portion
of a track that is only partially filled.
For example, if a data set allocated in bytes with block size of 600 has one block written to a device
with a track size of 1000, 600 bytes of data are written and the remaining 400 bytes cannot be used by
a different data set. A track is the smallest possible unit of physical allocation to a data set on DASD.
ISPF reports 600 bytes used while other products (such as ISMF) report 1000 bytes used. ISPF
reports the space occupied by data in the data set. ISMF reports the space used by this data set that is
not available for use by another data set. The difference is a relative indication of the effectiveness of
the block size used when the data set was created.
5. Space utilization values are not displayed for VSAM or BDAM data sets.
See “Information for managed data sets” on page 96 for information about the data set information that
is displayed for managed data sets.

V — VSAM utilities
Use option V to create the IDCAMS commands to define, delete, and list catalog information for VSAM
data sets. Before the command is issued, you will be allowed to edit it in an ISPF Edit session. The
command will process in the foreground.
Note: The VSAM utilities function builds a command that is syntactically correct; the utility does not do
any compatibility checking of the fields used to build the command.
When you select option V, the panel shown in Figure 88 on page 118 is displayed.

Utilities (option 3) 117

Data set utility (option 3.2)

┌────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
─ │ Menu Utilities Help │ ─
│ ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│ VSAM Utilities │
│ More: + │
│ Process Request Data Type │
│ 1. Define 1. Alias │
b │ 2. Delete 2. Alternate Index │
│ 3. Information (Listcat) 3. Cluster │
I │ 4. Generation Data Group │
│ 5. Non-VSAM │
│ 6. Page Space │
│ 7. Path │
│ 8. User Catalog │
O │ 9. Data * │
│ 10. Index * │
│ 11. NVR ** │
│ 12. Truename ** │
D │ 13. VVR ** │
│ * Listcat Only │
│ Command ===> │
O │ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward │
│ F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel │
F ⋘────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 88. VSAM Utilities panel (ISRUVSAM)

VSAM Utilities panel action bar

The VSAM Utilities panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu
For more information, see the details about the Menu Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Utilities
For more information, see the details about the Utilities Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Help
The Help pull-down provides information on the VSAM utilities, including the VSAM profile data set
and the GET, SAVE, and CHANGE commands.

VSAM Utilities panel fields

There are two fields on the VSAM Utilities panel:
Process Request
Required field. Indicates what is going to be done to the VSAM data set:
1
Define. Process an IDCAMS define request
2
Delete. Process an IDCAMS delete request against one or more data sets.
3
Listcat. Process an IDCAMS list catalog request.
VSAM Data Type
Required field. Indicates what kind of data set is to be defined, deleted or listed:
1
Alias. Define, delete, or list an alternate name for a non-VSAM data set or a user catalog
2
Alternate Index. Specify that an alternate index is to be defined, deleted, or listed or that an
alternate index entry is to be recataloged
3
Cluster. Specify that a cluster is to be defined, deleted, or listed or that a cluster entry is to be
recataloged

118 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Data set utility (option 3.2)

4
Generation Data Group. Specify that a generation data group entry is to be defined, deleted, or
listed
5
Non-Vsam. Specify that a non-VSAM, non-SMS-managed data set is to be defined, deleted, or
listed
6
Page Space. Specify that a page space is to be defined, deleted, or listed
7
Path. Specify that a path is to be defined, deleted, or listed or that a path entry is to be
recataloged
8
User Catalog. Specify that a catalog is to be defined, deleted, or listed
9
Data. List data level information (Listcat request only)
10
Index. List index level information (Listcat request only)
11
NVR. Delete an SMS-managed non-VSAM volume record entry (Delete request only)
12
Truename. Delete the truename entry for a data or index component of a cluster or alternate
index or the name of an alternate index (Delete request only)
13
VVR. Delete an unrelated VSAM volume record entry (Delete request only).

Example usage – defining a cluster

To define a cluster, on the VSAM Utilities panel, type 1 in the Process Request field and 3 in the VSAM
Data Type field. The Define Cluster panel is displayed as shown in Figure 89 on page 119.

Menu Function Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Define Cluster

Enter "/" to select option

/ Edit IDCAMS command
/ Browse errors only
Cluster Name . . . MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE3
More: +
Cluster Level Information:

Space Units . . . . . . . 1. Cylinders Primary Quantity . . .

2. Tracks Secondary Quantity . .
3. Records
4. Kilobytes
5. Megabytes
Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Buffer Space . . . . . . .
Control Interval Size . .
Data Class . . . . . . . .
Management Class . . . . .
Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 89. Define Cluster panel (ISRUVPC3)

Note:

Utilities (option 3) 119

Data set utility (option 3.2)

1. Select the Edit IDCAMS command option to edit the IDCAMS command that this process generates
before the command is issued. If you do not select this option, the command will be issued when you
press Enter.
2. Select the Browse errors only option to browse the output from IDCAMS only when a nonzero return
code is returned by IDCAMS.
Fill in the required fields or use a VSAM profile data set as described in “Building a VSAM profile data set”
on page 121. When you press Enter, the screen shown in Figure 90 on page 120 is displayed.
Note: If you try to use a profile that was defined for a different request type (for example, Generation Data
Group), you will receive a "Type mismatch" error.

Menu Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Columns 00001 00072

Instructions:

Enter EXECute command to issue request.

Enter CANcel, END, or RETURN command to cancel request.

****** ***************************** Top of Data ******************************
==MSG> -Warning- The UNDO command is not available until you change
==MSG> your edit profile using the command RECOVERY ON.
000001 /* IDCAMS COMMAND */
000002 DEFINE CLUSTER (NAME(MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE3) -
000003 ) -
000004 DATA (NAME(MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE3.DATA) -
000005 ) -
000006 INDEX (NAME(MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE3.INDEX) -
000007 )
****** **************************** Bottom of Data ****************************

Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F5=Rfind F6=Rchange F7=Up
F8=Down F9=Swap F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 90. Editing the IDCAMS command (ISRUVEDT)

When you are ready to process the command, type EXEC on the Command line and press Enter. If the
command processes with a nonzero return code, the panel shown in Figure 91 on page 121 is displayed.

120 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Data set utility (option 3.2)

Figure 91. Browsing IDCAMS Errors (ISRUVBRO)

Press Exit (F3) to return to the panel shown in Figure 90 on page 120, make the necessary changes, and
resubmit the command.

Building a VSAM profile data set

You can build a VSAM profile data set, each member of which can be used to store input fields on a VSAM
input panel for later retrieval to the same panel. If you try to use a profile that was defined for a different
request type (for example, Generation Data Group), you will receive a "Type mismatch" error.
When you have filled in a VSAM input panel, select the Save to Profile choice from the Functions pull-
down on the action bar. ISPF displays the Profile Member Name panel.
Type in a member name for the profile data set member. When you press Enter, the data set is created
with the attributes RECFM=variable blocked, LRECL=203, Type=PDS.

Using a VSAM profile data set

When you have displayed a VSAM input panel, select the Get from Profile choice from the Functions pull-
down on the input panel action bar to display the panel shown in Figure 92 on page 122.

Utilities (option 3) 121

Move/Copy utility (option 3.3)

Menu Functions Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
GET USERID.VSAM.PROFILE Row 00001 of 00001
Name Prompt Size Created Changed ID
. PMNTEST 78 2002/08/05 2002/08/05 11:56:23 USERID
**End**

Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F5=Rfind F7=Up F8=Down F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 92. Using a VSAM profile data set (ISRVMLGT)

When you select a profile and press Enter, the fields on the entry panel will fill with the values stored in
the profile data set member.

Changing the VSAM profile data set

To change the name of the active VSAM profile data set, select the Change Profile Data Set choice from
the Functions pull-down on an input panel action bar to display the panel shown in Figure 93 on page
122.

Menu Function Utilities Help

─ ┌────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐ ─
│ Menu Utilities Help │
│ ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│ Profile Data Set │
│ │
│ Profile Data Set . . 'USERID.VSAM.PROFILE' │
│ │
│ │ +
│ Command ===> │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F9=Swap F10=Actions │
│ F12=Cancel │
└────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
3. Records
4. Kilobytes

Figure 93. Panel for changing the name of the VSAM profile data set (ISRUVGET)

You can type the name of a different profile data set. When you press Enter, the data set is created if it
does not exist, and this data set becomes the active profile data set.

Move/Copy utility (option 3.3)

When you select this option, a panel is displayed (Figure 94 on page 123) that allows you to specify the
"From" data set (and member if it is partitioned) and an option to be performed. The Move/Copy Utility
prevents you from moving or copying a PDS member that you or another user is currently editing.

122 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Move/Copy utility (option 3.3)

Menu RefList Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Move/Copy Utility

C Copy data set or member(s) CP Copy and print

M Move data set or member(s) MP Move and print

Specify "From" Data Set below, then press Enter key

From ISPF Library:

Project . . . ________ (--- Options C and CP only ---)
Group . . . . ________ . . . ________ . . . ________ . . . ________
Type . . . . ________
Member . . . ________ (Blank or pattern for member list,
"*" for all members)

From Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set:

Data Set Name . . . _______________________________________________________
Volume Serial . . . ________ (If not cataloged)

Data Set Password . . (If password protected)

Option ===> __________________________________________________________________
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 94. Move/Copy Utility panel (ISRUMC1)

Move/Copy Utility panel action bar

The Move/Copy Utility panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu
For more information, see the details about the Menu Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
RefList
For information about referral lists, see the topic about Using Personal Data Set Lists and Library Lists
in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Utilities
For more information, see the details about the Utilities Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Help
The Help pull-down provides information on how to specify the "From" and "To" data sets, how to
select members to copied, and the rules relating to how different data types are moved or copied.

Move/Copy Utility panel fields

All the fields on the Move/Copy Utility panel are explained in the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of
the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I. On this panel, you specify the data set that you want to copy, move, lock,
or promote. This is called the "From" data set.
If you request a member list or specify an asterisk (*) in the Member field on the "From" panel, ISPF does
not display a Member field on the "To" panel. See the Member Selection List Commands section of the
"ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I for information about primary
and line commands that are available for the Move/Copy utility member list display.
You can copy or move load modules stored in partitioned data sets with undefined record formats, but
you cannot print them.
The deletion of any member because of a move is recorded in your ISPF log data set, if allocated.
When you complete the panel and press Enter, ISPF displays another panel that is determined by the
option you selected. This panel allows you to specify the "To" or "Target" data set or controlled library.
The "From" data set must already exist. If the "Target" data set does not exist the user is prompted to see
if the data set should be allocated. Choices are to allocate the "Target" data set using the characteristics
of the "From" data set as a model, or to allocate the new data set by specifying the characteristics for it. If
the user uses the "From" data set as a model, then that data set must be cataloged and the volume field is

Utilities (option 3) 123

Move/Copy utility (option 3.3)

ignored. This function can be suppressed through the ISPF Configuration table. If it is suppressed, an
allocate request for a nonexistent data set fails.

Move/Copy utility options

These topics describe the options shown on the Move/Copy Utility panel:
• “C and CP — copying data sets” on page 124
• “M and MP — moving data sets” on page 126
• “Using the move/copy utility with load modules” on page 127
• “Moving or copying alias entries” on page 128
• “Member list processing when using IEBCOPY” on page 129

C and CP — copying data sets

When you use the C and CP options, ISPF supports library concatenation. This allows you to specify up to
four input libraries as the "From" data set. The libraries are searched from left to right as they are entered
on the panel. The member to be copied, which is either specified in the Member field or selected from a
member list, is copied from the first library in which it is found.
If you select C or CP, the panel shown in Figure 95 on page 125 is displayed. This panel allows you to
specify the "To" data set—the library or data set name that you want the copied data to be stored under.
Note: The Move/Copy utility does not support:
• Supplying a volume serial when attempting to copy a multivolume data set
• Copying unmovable data sets (data set organization POU or PSU).

C — copy data set or member(s)

Use option C to copy a data set. You can specify either a DASD-resident sequential or partitioned data set
for both the "From" or "To" data sets. The "From" data set is not deleted.

CP — copy and print

Use this option as you would use option C, except that source listings are recorded in the ISPF list data
set, as follows:
• If the "To" data set is partitioned, a listing of each new or replaced member is recorded.
• If the "To" data set is sequential, a listing of its complete contents is recorded.

124 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Move/Copy utility (option 3.3)

Menu RefList Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
COPY From MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE
More: +
Specify "To" Data Set Below

To ISPF Library: Options:

Project . . MYPROJ Enter "/" to select option
Group . . . DEV _ Replace like-named members
Type . . . . SOURCE / Process member aliases

To Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set:

Data Set Name . . . _______________________________________________________
Volume Serial . . . ______ (If not cataloged)

Data Set Password . . (If password protected)

To Data Set Options:

Sequential Disposition Pack Option SCLM Setting
_ 1. Mod 3 1. Yes 3 1. SCLM
2. Old 2. No 2. Non-SCLM
Command ===> ________________________________________________________________
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 95. Move/Copy Utility - "To" panel for copying (ISRUMC2B)

All the fields on the Move/Copy Utility "To" panels for copying data sets are explained in the Libraries and
Data Sets topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I, except these general Options and To Data Set Options:
Replace like-named PDS members
Select this option to allow replacement of a member in the "To" data set with a like-named member in
the "From" data set.
Process member aliases
Select this option to allow the primary member and all alias members to be copied together.
Sequential Disposition
If the "To" data set is sequential, enter:
1
To add the "From" data set to the end of the "To" data set (Mod).
2
To replace the "To" data set's entire contents with the contents of the "From" data set (Old).
If the "From" data set consists of several members of an ISPF library or a partitioned data set to be
moved or copied to a sequential data set, the members are written to the "To" data set one after
another. The "To" data set disposition (Old or Mod) controls only the beginning location of the "To"
data set after the copy or move is completed.
Pack Option
To indicate how the data is to be stored in the "To" data set, enter:
1
If you want the data in the "To" data set to be packed.
2
If you do not want the data in the "To" data set to be packed.
3
If you want the data to be stored in the same format in the "To" data set as it is in the "From" data
set.
If you are copying data to a sequential data set with disposition of MOD, you cannot mix packed
and unpacked data, nor can you copy multiple packed members.
The technique used to pack data is an internal algorithm used only by ISPF. If the data is packed,
attempts to access or process the data outside ISPF can cause unwanted results. See the description
of the PACK primary command in z/OS ISPF Edit and Edit Macros for more information.

Utilities (option 3) 125

Move/Copy utility (option 3.3)

SCLM Setting
The SCLM setting is a bit that ISPF uses to determine what type of edit the file last had performed
upon it.
1 SCLM
This bit is ON to specify that the last edit of this file was under SCLM control.
2 Non-SCLM
This bit is ON to specify that the last edit of this file was under control of something other than
SCLM.
3 As-is
This bit is ON to specify that this operation leaves the current setting unchanged.

M and MP — moving data sets

When you use the M and MP options, ISPF does not provide library concatenation support. You can
specify up to four input libraries as the "From" data set. However, only the first library in the sequence is
searched. Therefore, the member to be moved, which is either specified in the Member field or selected
from a member list, is moved only if it is found in the first library. However, the other three library names
remain on the panel and can be used with the C and CP options.
If you select M or MP, the panel shown in Figure 96 on page 127 is displayed. This panel allows you to
specify the "To" data set—the library or data set name that you want the moved data stored under.
Note: The Move/Copy utility does not support:
• Supplying a volume serial when attempting to copy a multivolume data set
• Copying unmovable data sets (data set organization POU or PSU).

M — move data set or member(s)

Use option M to move a data set. You can specify either a DASD-resident sequential or partitioned data
set for both the "From" or "To" data sets.
Option M causes data sets to be deleted after they have been successfully moved to the "To" data set, as
follows:
• If the "From" data set is partitioned, the selected members are deleted from it.
• If the "From" data set is sequential, the complete "From" data set is deleted.

MP — move and print

Same as option M, except source listings are recorded in the ISPF list data set, as follows:
• If the "To" data set is partitioned, a listing of each new or replaced member is recorded.
• If the "To" data set is sequential, a listing of its complete contents is recorded.

126 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Move/Copy utility (option 3.3)

Menu RefList Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
MOVE From MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE
More: +
Specify "To" Data Set Below

To ISPF Library: Options:

Project . . MYPROJ Enter "/" to select option
Group . . . DEV _ Replace like-named members
Type . . . . SOURCE / Process member aliases

To Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set:

Data Set Name . . . ______________________________________________________
Volume Serial . . . ______ (If not cataloged)

Data Set Password . . (If password protected)

To Data Set Options:

Sequential Disposition Pack Option SCLM Setting
1 1. Mod 3 1. Yes 3 1. SCLM
2. Old 2. No 2. Non-SCLM
Command ===> ________________________________________________________________
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 96. Move/Copy Utility - "To" panel for moving (ISRUMC2B)

All the fields on the Move/Copy Utility "To" panels for moving data sets are explained in the "ISPF
Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I, except these general Options and To
Data Set Options:
• Replace like-named PDS members.
• Process member aliases
• Sequential Disposition
• Pack Option
• SCLM Settings
See “C and CP — copying data sets” on page 124 for descriptions of these fields.

Using the move/copy utility with load modules

For a move or copy of load modules, these rules apply:
• Both data sets must be partitioned and must have an undefined record format (RECFM=U).
• Load modules that were created for planned overlay cannot be moved or copied.
• The print option, if specified, is ignored.
• If the "To" library is LLA-managed, it must be in NOFREEZE mode.
• For Move or Copy, reblocking can be done for load modules only, and is done by using the IEBCOPY
COPYMOD function. Whether the load module is reblocked depends on the block sizes for the "To" and
"From" data sets, as well as the value of the USE_IEBCOPY_COPY_OR_COPYMOD_OPTION and
WHEN_TO_USE_IEBCOPY keyword settings in the ISPF Configuration table (see z/OS ISPF Planning and
Customizing for more information).
– If the WHEN_TO_USE_IEBCOPY setting is 0, IEBCOPY is only used:
- When copying from a data set with a larger block size to a data set with a smaller block size.
- When a PDSE has been specified in the "From" data set concatenation or as the "To" data set.
– If the WHEN_TO_USE_IEBCOPY setting is 1, IEBCOPY is always used to copy load modules.
– If the WHEN_TO_USE_IEBCOPY setting is 2, IEBCOPY is only used when a PDSE has been specified in
the "From" data set concatenation or as the "To" data set.
– If the WHEN_TO_USE_IEBCOPY setting indicates that IEBCOPY should be used, these rules apply
when determining whether to reblock or not:
- When the USE_IEBCOPY_COPY_OR_COPYMOD_OPTION setting is 1:

Utilities (option 3) 127

Move/Copy utility (option 3.3)

• If the "To" and "From" block sizes are the same, no reblocking occurs. ISPF uses IEBCOPY COPY.
• If the "To" block size is larger than the "From" block size, no reblocking occurs. ISPF uses
IEBCOPY COPY.
• If the "To" block size is smaller than the "From" block size, reblocking occurs. ISPF uses IEBCOPY
COPYMOD.
- When the USE_IEBCOPY_COPY_OR_COPYMOD_OPTION setting is 2:
• If the "To" and "From" block sizes are the same, no reblocking occurs. ISPF uses IEBCOPY COPY.
• If the "To" block size is larger than the "From" block size, reblocking occurs. ISPF uses IEBCOPY
COPYMOD.
• If the "To" block size is smaller than the "From" block size, reblocking occurs. ISPF uses IEBCOPY
COPYMOD.
– When the USE_IEBCOPY_COPY_OR_COPYMOD_OPTION setting is 3:
- Reblocking occurs. ISPF uses IEBCOPY COPYMOD.
• If IEBCOPY is used to process the copy, ISPF allocates these data sets:
zprefix.zuser.SPFnnn.IEBCOPY
IEBCOPY SYSPRINT data set
SYSIN
IEBCOPY SYSIN data set
SYSUT3 and SYSUT4
IEBCOPY work data sets
The SYSPRINT data set is deleted when the copy ends successfully. If errors are encountered, it is kept
to help you diagnose errors. SYSIN, SYSUT3, and SYSUT4 are temporary data sets that use VIO if
available, and are freed upon completion of the copy. All allocations use the value of ISPF Configuration
table keyword PDF_DEFAULT_UNIT as the unit. The sizes for the SYSUT3 and SYSUT4 data sets are
calculated dynamically, based on the number of members to be copied. If this is not sufficient for your
move/copy request, these DDNAMES can be preallocated. If they are preallocated, ISPF does not free
them when the copy is finished.

Moving or copying alias entries

Alias entries can be moved or copied from one partitioned data set to another under these conditions:
• If the "To" library is LLA-managed, it must be in NOFREEZE mode
• If the "Process member aliases" option has been selected (ALIAS mode), these rules apply:
– Either the Primary member or any alias member may be selected to copy the primary member and all
of its aliases. This will occur even if a single member is specified or some of the members are not
displayed in the current member selection list.
– Alias members are copied for both load and non-load data sets, as well as for PDS and PDSE data
sets.
– Copying to the same data set is not supported when aliases are automatically selected, as this would
result in the from and to member name being the same.
• If ISPF is not using IEBCOPY and the "Process member aliases" option has not been selected (NOALIAS
mode):
– After the move or copy is successfully completed for the main member or members, then the alias
entry or entries can be copied.
– From a member list:
- When the main member or members are selected first, are not renamed, and are successfully
moved or copied, then the alias entry or entries can be copied if they are selected without leaving
the member list.
- If the target data set is a PDSE, alias entries cannot be copied.

128 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Data set list utility (option 3.4)

• If IEBCOPY is being used and NOALIAS is in effect:

– The method described for copying when not using IEBCOPY will also work when using IEBCOPY. In
addition, if all main members and aliases are selected at the same time they are processed by the
same invocation of IEBCOPY and are copied correctly.
– If the target data set is a PDSE, alias entries must be selected and processed together with the main
member.
In all other cases for move and copy where NOALIAS is in effect, you can select alias names, but they are
not preserved as aliases in the "To" data set. That is, the members to which they refer are moved or
copied, and the alias entries are stored in the "To" data set with the alias flags turned off.

Member list processing when using IEBCOPY

When copying load modules using the IEBCOPY interface, all selected members are processed as a group.
This means that the processing does not stop on the first failure but will attempt to process all selected
members before the member list is redisplayed. The Prompt field will be updated to indicate the result for
each individual member.
No error message is displayed if two or more members are not processed successfully because they may
have failed for different reasons. Reselecting a member and processing it individually will display a
specific error message if the processing for that member fails again. These values can appear in the
Prompt field:
*COPIED
Member was copied or copied/locked successfully
*MOVED
Member was moved successfully
*REPL
Member was replaced in the output library (Moved or Copied)
*NO DATA
Member was not found in the input library or BLDL error
*INUSE-I
ENQ failed on input member
*INUSE-O
ENQ failed on output member
*NO-COPY
Member was not copied successfully
*MIXED
You are attempting to mix load and non-load data
*NO-DEL
The delete step failed on a Move request
*NO-REPL
Member exists in the output library and replace not requested
*NO-LOCK
LMF lock failed on Copy/Lock request
*ALIAS
Member is a PDSE Program Object alias and cannot be copied individually. It will be copied when the
main member is copied.

Data set list utility (option 3.4)

When you select this option, the Data Set List Utility panel (Figure 97 on page 130) is displayed. You can
either display or print lists of ISPF libraries, data sets, or volume table of contents (VTOC) information.

Utilities (option 3) 129

Data set list utility (option 3.4)

Menu RefList RefMode Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Data Set List Utility

blank Display data set list P Print data set list

V Display VTOC information PV Print VTOC information

Enter one or both of the parameters below:

Dsname Level . . . PDFTOOL.COMMON
Volume serial . .

Data set list options

Initial View Enter "/" to select option
1 1. Volume / Confirm Data Set Delete
2. Space / Confirm Member Delete
3. Attrib / Include Additional Qualifiers
4. Total / Display Catalog Name
/ Display Total Tracks
Prefix Dsname Level
When the data set list is displayed, enter either:
"/" on the data set list command field for the command prompt pop-up,
an ISPF line command, the name of a TSO command, CLIST, or REXX exec, or
"=" to execute the previous command.
Option ===>__________________________________________________________________
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 97. Data Set List Utility panel (ISRUDLP)

Data Set List Utility panel action bar

The Data Set List Utility Panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu
For more information, see the details about the Menu Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
RefList
For information about referral lists, see the topic about Using Personal Data Set Lists and Library Lists
in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Note: When you use a referral list from within the Data Set List Utility, these functions are performed
before the referral list is processed:
• The quotes are removed from the data set name.
• The value in ZPREFIX is added preceding the non-quoted data set name if the first qualifier is not
ZPREFIX.
• The member name is removed.
RefMode
For information about referral list modes, see the details about Personal List Modes in the Using
Personal Data Set Lists and Library Lists topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Utilities
For more information, see the details about the Utilities Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Help
The Help pull-down provides information about displaying and printing data set lists and VTOC
information.

Data Set List Utility panel fields

The fields on this panel are:

130 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Data set list utility (option 3.4)

Dsname level
This field is used to specify the level or levels of any data set that you want ISPF to list or print for you. An
optional installation exit, called the data set list (DSLIST) exit, can control whether a data set name should
appear in the list. See z/OS ISPF Planning and Customizing for more information about this exit.
When you specify the Dsname Level, you are defining the level qualifiers for the data set names to be
included in the list. Therefore, in Figure 97 on page 130, the value PDFTOOL.COMMON represents the first
two levels of a data set name. An ISPF library typically has a three-level name: project, group, and type.
The Dsname Level field supports the inclusion of system symbols.
ISPF retains the information you put in this field and displays it the next time you use this panel.
Except for the first level, you can specify the level qualifiers fully, partially, or use defaults. Do not enclose
the value in the Dsname Level field in quotes.
Asterisks and percent signs may be used to filter the list of data sets that is displayed. For ICF catalog lists
and volume lists, asterisks and percent signs may be used in the high-level qualifier. Asterisks may be
used anywhere in a qualifier, not just in the first and last positions. However, one qualifier must be at least
partially qualified.
A single asterisk by itself indicates that at least one qualifier is needed to occupy that position. A single
asterisk within a qualifier indicates that zero or more characters can occupy that position. A double
asterisk by itself indicates that zero or more qualifiers can occupy that position. A double asterisk is
invalid within a qualifier.
In this example, all data set names with SYS1 as the first qualifier and at least one other qualifier will be
listed.

SYS1.*

In this example, all data set names with SYS1 as the first qualifier will be listed.

SYS1 or SYS1.**

In this example, all data set names that have a qualifier of CLIST and are in catalogs that you have
authority to will be listed. A VTOC list will contain all data set names that have a qualifier of CLIST.

**.CLIST

Note:
1. If you enter a high-level qualifier of '*' or '**', ISPF displays a pop-up window to warn you that the
search will be for all catalogs on the system and will take time. If there are many catalogs, this search
could take a considerable amount of time. You can press Enter to continue the search, or you can enter
Cancel or End from the pop-up window to cancel the search. Be aware that if you have mount
authority, a catalog search with '*' or '**' as the high-level qualifier can require that volumes be
mounted for the catalogs to be searched.
2. The ISPF Configuration table contains a selectable option, named DISALLOW_WILDCARDS_IN_HLQ, to
disallow the use of the '*' or '%' in the high-level qualifier.
3. If the first character of the dsname level is a dot(.), tilde (~) or forward slash (/), the string is passed
unchanged to UDLIST. No exits or other processing normally associated with the Data Set List Utility is
performed.
A single percent sign indicates that any one single alphanumeric or national character can occupy that
position. One to eight percent signs can be specified in each qualifier. This example is valid for Dsname
Level:

AAA%*.B*%%%B.C

In this example, the list will contain all data sets that start with AAA and one or more other characters,
have a second qualifier that starts and ends with B and has at least three other characters between the

Utilities (option 3) 131

Data set list utility (option 3.4)

B's, and have a third qualifier of 'C'. The list will contain entries from catalogs that you have authority to. A
VTOC list will contain entries that match these characteristics.
In this example, the list will contain all data sets that start with SYS and one other character, such as SYS1
or SYS2.

SYS%

If you enter a SYS% alias for a SYS1 data set as the Dsname Level (for example, SYSP as a single
qualifier), you see SYSP as an ALIAS because this single qualifier is an alias for SYS1. The data set names
pointed to by a SYS% alias can be displayed in a data set list by entering any of these:
• a Dsname Level of SYS1 and a volume
• a Dsname Level of SYS%
• a Dsname Level of the fully qualified data set name (such as SYSP.PARMLIB)
PRO**CT is not valid as a data set name level because a double asterisk (**) is not valid in the middle of a
qualifier.
Alias names that match the specified Dsname Level will be displayed as the alias name itself. The volume
field for all alias names will contain the characters '*ALIAS' to indicate this. Real names that match the
Dsname Level will also be displayed.
If you enter ISPFTEST as a Dsname Level and you have real data set names that start with ISPFTEST and
aliases for those real names that start with ISPFTEST, you would see a list of this format:

ISPFTEST.BASE.CLIST TSOPK1
ISPFTEST.BASE.CLIST.ALIAS *ALIAS
ISPFTEST.BASE.SOURCE TSOPK1
ISPFTEST.BASE.SOURCE.ALIAS *ALIAS

A VSAM cluster entry is flagged in the volume field as '*VSAM*'. A VSAM path entry is flagged in the
volume field as '*PATH*'. A VSAM alternate index entry is flagged in the volume field as '*AIX*'.
Note:
1. A catalog search may result in the DSLIST containing duplicate names. This can occur when the
definition of user catalog aliases results in multiple catalogs being searched when the data set list is
built. Line commands against duplicate data sets in the DSLIST are supported. Selecting the "Display
Catalog Name" option will display the name of the catalog associated with each data set on the Total
view. This can identify where duplicate data set names were found. The existence of duplicates may be
inconsistent when changing the DSLEVEL qualifiers. For example, SYS1.PARM.* may have different
results than SYS1.PAR*. Duplicate entries may or may not display in a consistent manner, however the
DSLIST will always be complete, with no omissions.
2. If a VSAM cluster matches the Dsname Level, all parts of the cluster are listed even if the data and
index portions do not match the Dsname Level.
When a multicluster (key-range) data portion of a VSAM cluster is displayed on a catalog list, no
information is shown except for the volume and device. The information comes from the VTOC and the
catalog name does not match the VTOC name. When using a VTOC list the information is displayed.

Volume serial
Use this field to specify the volume serial whose VTOC is to be used by ISPF to display or print a list of
data set names or VTOC information. ISPF retains the information you put in this field and displays it the
next time you use this panel.
If you want to display a list of only the data sets that reside on a particular volume, leave the Dsname
Level field blank and enter the volume serial in the Volume field.
The Volume serial field supports the inclusion of system symbols.
You can enter a single volume name or a generic volume name to list data sets from more than one
volume. The volume name can be partially specified using asterisks as global volume name characters

132 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Data set list utility (option 3.4)

and percent signs as placeholders in the volume name. A single asterisk within a volume name indicates
that zero or more characters can occupy that position. A single percent sign indicates that any one
alphanumeric or national character can occupy that position. Examples follow.
*
Lists data set names matching the Dsname Level from all volumes
PRM*
Lists names from all volumes beginning with 'PRM'
M%C*
Lists names from volumes beginning with 'M', followed by any single character, a 'C', and any three
other characters
Note:
1. During pre-allocation verification processing for a data set list line command, ISPF issues a LOCATE
(SVC 26) for the data set name. This occurs even when you specify a volume serial on the Data Set List
Utility panel. If this LOCATE fails (for example, an SMS data set by the same name exists and the
volume for the SMS data set is not available), ISPF issues an error message and the line command
fails.
2. Specifying a single asterisk as a volume name will require more time to display of print the VTOC list.
3. A generic volume name can not be used to display VTOC information.

Initial view
Use this field to tell ISPF which view of the data set list you would like to see. ISPF retains the information
you put in this field and displays it the next time you use this panel.
All the scroll commands function normally from these displays, except for the LEFT and RIGHT
commands. These commands switch from one view to another, because the panels used to show the
different views are connected as if they formed a ring. Each time you enter the LEFT or RIGHT command,
another view is displayed in the sequence shown in Figure 98 on page 133, starting from the current view.

Figure 98. Sequence of data set list display views

If you enter the RIGHT command with the Total view in the sequence displayed, ISPF displays the Volume
view. If you enter the LEFT command with the Volume view displayed, ISPF displays the Total view. The
available views are:
1. Volume
This view shows a data set list that contains data set names and the volumes on which they reside.
Figure 99 on page 137 shows a typical data set list display using the Volume view.

Utilities (option 3) 133

Data set list utility (option 3.4)

2. Space
The Space view shows a data set list that contains data set names, tracks, percentages used, extents,
and devices. An additional header line, displayed above the column headings and showing the total
tracks of all data sets, the total tracks of all non-excluded data sets, the number of data sets listed
and the number of non-excluded data sets listed, is displayed if the Display Total Tracks option is
selected. Figure 100 on page 138 shows a typical data set list display using the Space view with the
Total Tracks header line.
3. Attrib
This view shows a data set list that contains data set names, data set organizations, record formats,
logical record lengths, and block sizes. Figure 101 on page 139 shows a typical data set list display
using the Attributes view.
Note: For each of the views, the list is sorted by data set name. See the list under Figure 102 on page
139 for descriptions of the fields shown on this panel.
4. Total
This view shows a data set list that contains all the information displayed by the Volume, Space, and
Attributes views, plus the created and expired or referred dates. (The Display Expiration Date option
on the DSLIST Settings of the options pull-down on the Data Set List utility (option 3.4) allows
you to display either the expiration date or the referred date of the data set.) The list is sorted by
data set name and has two lines per data set. Figure 102 on page 139 shows a typical data set list
display using the Total view.
The catalog name can also be displayed if the Display Catalog Name option is selected and no value is
entered into the Volume Serial field. If the Display Catalog Name option is selected, three lines per
data set are displayed. Figure 103 on page 139 shows a typical data set list display using the Total
view with the Catalog name. See the list under the figure for descriptions of the fields shown on this
panel.
An additional header line, displayed above the column headings and showing the total tracks of all
data sets, the total tracks of all non-excluded datasets, the number of data sets listed, and the
number of non-excluded data sets listed, is displayed if the Display Total Tracks option is selected.

Confirm data set delete

This field controls whether the Confirm Delete panel appears when you use the D (delete data set) line
command or the TSO DELETE command from the displayed data set list. Use a slash to select this option.
If you select this option, ISPF displays the Confirm Delete panel (Figure 86 on page 115), giving you an
opportunity to change your mind and keep the data set. If you try to delete an unexpired data set, the
Confirm Purge panel (Figure 87 on page 115) is displayed following the Confirm Delete panel. Follow the
directions on the panel to either confirm or cancel the data set purge.
Attention:
If you deselect the option and the data set is deleted, it cannot be retrieved.
See “D — delete data set” on page 154 for more information about the D line command.

Confirm member delete

This field controls whether the Confirm Member Delete panel is displayed when you use the D (delete)
command for a member in the displayed data set list. Use a slash to select this option.
If you select this option, ISPF displays the Confirm Member Delete panel. This panel gives you an
opportunity to change your mind and keep the member.

Include additional qualifiers

This field is used to generate the data set list with all data sets matching the qualifiers in the Dsname
Level field, including data sets with additional qualifiers.
If this field is not selected, the data set list will include only data sets that match the qualifiers entered in
the Dsname Level field.

134 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Data set list utility (option 3.4)

Examples
Assume that these data sets exist:

PDFTOOL.COMMON.ASM
PDFTOOL.COMMON.CLIST
PDFTOOL.COMMON.CLIST.OLD
PDFTOOL.COMMON.CLIST.VB
PDFTOOL.COMMON.CNTL
PDFTOOL.COMMON.CNTL.INPUT
PDFTOOL.COMMON.EXEC

1. List data sets whose name starts with PDFTOOL.COMMON. The data set can include additional
qualifiers:
Dsname Level . . . PDFTOOL.COMMON / Include Additional Qualifiers

PDFTOOL.COMMON.ASM
PDFTOOL.COMMON.CLIST
PDFTOOL.COMMON.CLIST.OLD
PDFTOOL.COMMON.CLIST.VB
PDFTOOL.COMMON.CNTL
PDFTOOL.COMMON.CNTL.INPUT
PDFTOOL.COMMON.EXEC

2. List data sets whose name is PDFTOOL.COMMON, with no additional qualifiers:

Dsname Level . . . PDFTOOL.COMMON Include Additional Qualifiers
(No data set names found)
3. List data sets whose name starts with PDFTOOL.COMMON and whose third qualifier starts with "C".
The data set can include additional qualifiers:
Dsname Level . . . PDFTOOL.COMMON.C* / Include Additional Qualifiers

PDFTOOL.COMMON.CLIST
PDFTOOL.COMMON.CLIST.OLD
PDFTOOL.COMMON.CLIST.VB
PDFTOOL.COMMON.CNTL
PDFTOOL.COMMON.CNTL.INPUT

4. List data sets whose name starts with PDFTOOL.COMMON and whose third qualifier starts with "C".
The data set must not have additional qualifiers after the third qualifier:
Dsname Level . . . PDFTOOL.COMMON.C* Include Additional Qualifiers

PDFTOOL.COMMON.CLIST
PDFTOOL.COMMON.CNTL

Display catalog name

Use this option to have the Total view display for each data set in the list the name of the catalog in which
the data set was located.
The option is only applicable when a catalog search is used to build the Data Set List, therefore, it is
ignored when a value is entered in the Volume Serial field.

Display total tracks

Use this option to display an additional header line on the Space or the Total view, showing the total
tracks of all data sets, the total tracks of all non-excluded data sets, the number of data sets listed, and
the number of non-excluded data sets listed.
Depending on the size of the data set list, processing time increases because the tracks information for all
data sets has to be collected before the list is displayed. When the list comprises 50 data sets or more, a
pop-up panel is displayed, indicating the progress of the data collection. The keyboard locks when this
pop-up panel appears and stays locked until the data set list is displayed.

Utilities (option 3) 135

Data set list utility (option 3.4)

Prefix Dsname Level

Use this option to have ISPF automatically add your TSO user prefix as the first qualifier of the Dsname
Level. When this option is selected and you have created a TSO user prefix, that prefix is added to the
beginning of the Dsname Level provided the Dsname Level is not enclosed in single quotes. If the Dsname
Level is entered enclosed in quotes, ISPF will not add your TSO user prefix. When this option is not
selected ISPF will not accept the Dsname Level enclosed in quotes.

Data set list utility options

Sub-sections describe the options shown on the Data Set List Utility panel.

Blank — display data set list

Leave the Option line blank to display a data set list. You can use these parameters to control what data
set information is displayed and how delete requests are processed:
1. Enter one or more data set name level qualifiers in the Dsname Level field. See “Dsname Level” for
more information.
2. Enter a volume serial in the Volume field if you want ISPF to create a data set list from the VTOC. If
you leave this field blank, the list is created from the catalog. See “Volume serial” on page 132 for
more information.
3. In the Initial View field, enter the view of the data set list (Volume, Space, Attributes, or Total) that
you want to see first. Examples of these views are shown in Figure 99 on page 137, Figure 100 on
page 138, Figure 101 on page 139, and Figure 102 on page 139, respectively.
4. Enter a slash (/) in the Confirm Data Set Delete field to tell ISPF to display a confirmation panel if you
enter the D (delete data set) line command or the TSO DELETE command. See “Confirm data set
delete” on page 134 for more information.
5. Enter a slash (/) in the Confirm Member Delete field to tell ISPF to display a confirmation panel if you
enter the D (delete) command for a member in a data set list.
6. Enter a slash (/) in the Include Additional Qualifiers field to tell ISPF to list all data sets that match
the qualifiers in the Dsname Level field, including data sets with additional qualifiers.
7. Enter a slash (/) in the Display Catalog Name field to tell ISPF to display the name of the catalog
associated with each data set in the Total view.
8. Enter a slash (/) in the Display Total Tracks field to tell ISPF to display an additional header line above
the column headings, showing the total tracks of all data sets, the total tracks of all non-excluded
data sets, the number of data sets listed and the number of non-excluded data sets listed. Depending
on the size of the data set list, processing time increases because the tracks information has to be
collected for the whole list up front. When the list comprises 50 data sets or more, a pop-up panel is
displayed, indicating the progress of the data collection.
9. Enter a slash (/) to prefix the data set name level qualifiers in the Dsname Level field.
10. Press Enter to display the data set list, as shown in Figure 99 on page 137.
Note: If a plus displays after the volume serial (for example, HSM020+) on a list obtained from the
catalog, the data set spans multiple volumes. Information displayed about that data set by selecting
Information or Short Information or by using the Space or Total view will represent the total amounts
across all used volumes. For further information, see the description for Volume at “Volume” on page
142.
When a VTOC list is displayed and a multivolume data set is included on that volume, there will not be an
indicator that this data set spans multiple volumes, and the information on a space or total view will be for
that volume only. The information displayed on a VTOC list is only information obtained from the VTOC of
that volume. When the multivolume data set is selected for information or for short information, the space
information will be for all volumes that the data set spans.

136 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Data set list utility (option 3.4)

Menu Options View Utilities Compilers Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
DSLIST - Data Sets Matching HANKO3 Row 1 of 14

Command - Enter "/" to select action Message Volume

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
HANKO3 *ALIAS
HANKO3.DDIR *VSAM*
HANKO3.DDIR.D D$US50
HANKO3.DDIR.I D$US50
HANKO3.EXEC D$US08
HANKO3.ISD1.ISPF.ISPPROF D$US23
HANKO3.ISD1.ISPVCALL.TRACE D$US48
HANKO3.ISPF.ISPPROF D$US26
HANKO3.ISPVCALL.TRACE D$US14
HANKO3.LOAD D$US08
HANKO3.MAKEDSNS.OUTPUT D$US35
HANKO3.SYS2.BRODCAST D$US04
HANKO3.TASID.SNAPSHOT D$US05
HANKO3.TEST D$US08
***************************** End of Data Set list ****************************
Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F5=Rfind F7=Up F8=Down F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 99. Data set list - volume view (ISRUDSL0)

Data set list panel action bar

The Data Set List panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu
For more information, see the details about the Menu Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Options
The Options pull-down offers these choices:
DSLIST Settings
The settings to control the behavior of the data set list display. Options are:
• Display Edit/View entry panel
Note: If this field is selected and a workstation Edit request is initiated when no valid
workstation connection exists, ISPF indicates on the Edit/View entry panel that no connection
exists and treats the request as a host Edit request.
• Update ON (Reference lists)
• List pattern for MO,CO,RS,D actions
• Show status for MO,CO,RS,D actions
• Confirm Member delete
• Confirm Data Set delete
• Do not show expanded command
• E,V,B enhanced member list
Selecting this choice causes the enhanced member list to be used when the E,V, or B commands
are used. De-selecting this choice causes traditional member list processing to occur.
• Display Total Tracks
• Execute Block Commands for excluded Data Sets
• Display Expiration Date
Refresh List
Refresh the display of the data set list.
Append to List
Select a Personal data set list to append to the existing DSLIST. The DSLIST is rebuilt, including
the data sets or data set name levels from the personal list selected.

Utilities (option 3) 137

Data set list utility (option 3.4)

Note: The APPEND is based on the selected personal data set list. If an entry in the list is not
quoted, your TSO prefix is added as the first level of the data set name. If the entry contains a
member, the member is ignored. Duplicate personal list entries are ignored. If the entry contains a
volume and "Include volume on retrieve" is selected on the Referral List Settings panel, a VTOC
search is used instead of the catalog. A catalog search is recommended for best performance. A
volume should be used only if the data set is not cataloged.
Enter the DSLIST primary command REFRESH on the DSLIST display panel to erase all appended
personal lists.
Save List
Saves the data set list to a file.
Reset
Resets the data set list.
View
The View pull-down offers these choices:
Note: The current setting is shown as an unavailable choice; that is, it is displayed in blue (the default)
with an asterisk as the first digit of the selection number (if you are running in GUI mode, the choice
will be grayed).
1
Volume Changes the display to the Volume view, as shown in Figure 99 on page 137.
2
Space Changes the display to the Space view.

Menu Options View Utilities Compilers Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
DSLIST - Data Sets Matching HANKO3 Row 1 of 14

Total Tracks: 86 non-x: 86 Data Sets: 14 non-x: 14

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Command - Enter "/" to select action Tracks %Used XT
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
HANKO3
HANKO3.DDIR
HANKO3.DDIR.D 45 ? 1
HANKO3.DDIR.I 1 ? 1
HANKO3.EXEC 15 12 1
HANKO3.ISD1.ISPF.ISPPROF 1 100 1
HANKO3.ISD1.ISPVCALL.TRACE 2 100 1
HANKO3.ISPF.ISPPROF 1 100 1
HANKO3.ISPVCALL.TRACE 2 100 1
HANKO3.LOAD 15 13 1
HANKO3.MAKEDSNS.OUTPUT 1 100 1
HANKO3.SYS2.BRODCAST 1 0 1
HANKO3.TASID.SNAPSHOT 1 100 1
Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F5=Rfind F7=Up F8=Down F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 100. Data set list - space view (ISRUDSL0)

3
Attributes Changes the display to the Attributes view.

138 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Data set list utility (option 3.4)

Menu Options View Utilities Compilers Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
DSLIST - Data Sets Matching HANKO3 Row 1 of 14

Command - Enter "/" to select action Dsorg Recfm Lrecl Blksz

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
HANKO3
HANKO3.DDIR VS
HANKO3.DDIR.D VS ? ? ?
HANKO3.DDIR.I VS ? ? ?
HANKO3.EXEC PO-E FB 80 32720
HANKO3.ISD1.ISPF.ISPPROF PO FB 80 27920
HANKO3.ISD1.ISPVCALL.TRACE PS FB 80 27920
HANKO3.ISPF.ISPPROF PO FB 80 6160
HANKO3.ISPVCALL.TRACE PS FB 80 27920
HANKO3.LOAD PO U 0 32760
HANKO3.MAKEDSNS.OUTPUT PS FB 80 27920
HANKO3.SYS2.BRODCAST PS FB 150 1500
HANKO3.TASID.SNAPSHOT PS VBA 255 27998
HANKO3.TEST PS VBA 138 13800
***************************** End of Data Set list ****************************
Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F5=Rfind F7=Up F8=Down F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 101. Data set list - attributes view (ISRUDSL0)

4
Total Changes the display to the Total view.

Menu Options View Utilities Compilers Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
DSLIST - Data Sets Matching HANKO3 Row 1 of 14

Total Tracks: 86 non-x: 86 Data Sets: 14 non-x: 14

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Command - Enter "/" to select action Message Volume
Tracks % XT Device Dsorg Recfm Lrecl Blksz Created Referred
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
HANKO3 *ALIAS

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
HANKO3.DDIR *VSAM*
VS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
HANKO3.DDIR.D D$US50
45 ? 1 3390 VS ? ? ? 2007/02/21 2007/02/21
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
HANKO3.DDIR.I D$US50
1 ? 1 3390 VS ? ? ? 2007/02/21 ***None***
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F5=Rfind F7=Up F8=Down F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 102. Data set list - total view (ISRUDSL0)

Menu Options View Utilities Compilers Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
DSLIST - Data Sets Matching HANKO3 Row 1 of 14

Total Tracks: 86 non-x: 86 Data Sets: 14 non-x: 14

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Command - Enter "/" to select action Message Volume
Tracks % XT Device Dsorg Recfm Lrecl Blksz Created Referred
Catalog
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
HANKO3 *ALIAS

CATALOG.MASTER.SYSPLEXD
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
HANKO3.DDIR *VSAM*
VS
CATALOG.USER1.SYSPLEXD
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
HANKO3.DDIR.D D$US50
45 ? 1 3390 VS ? ? ? 2007/02/21 2007/02/21
CATALOG.USER1.SYSPLEXD
Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F5=Rfind F7=Up F8=Down F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 103. Data set list - total view with catalog name (ISRUDSL0)

Utilities (option 3) 139

Data set list utility (option 3.4)

5
Sort You can sort the data set list by any of these fields:
1. Name
2. Message
3. Volume
4. Tracks
5. Percent Used
6. Extents
7. Dsorg
8. Recfm
9. Lrecl
10. Blksz
11. Creation date
12. Expiration date
13. Referenced date
14. Device
15. Volume indicator
16. Catalog
You can also specify the sort sequence (ascending or descending) or accept the default sequence
for the associated sort field. By default, character fields are sorted alphabetically and numeric
fields are sorted in descending order.
Utilities
For more information, see the details about the Utilities Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Compilers
The Compilers pull-down offers you these choices:
1
Foreground Compilers. Displays the Foreground Selection Panel.
2
Background Compilers. Displays the Batch Selection Panel.
3
ISPPREP Panel Utility Displays the Preprocessed Panel Utility panel.
4
DTL Compiler Displays the ISPF Dialog Tag Language Conversion Utility panel.
Help
The Help pull-down provides general information about the data set list, including the format of the
displayed list and the available line commands and primary commands.

Data set list panel fields

The fields listed here can appear on the data set list panels. The fields displayed will vary depending on
the view that you select.
Total Tracks
Total number of tracks of all data sets in the list.
non-x
Total number of tracks of all data sets in the list, not including the tracks of all excluded data sets.
When the number of total tracks or total non-excluded tracks exceeds 10 digits (the maximum
provided in the header line), the display changes as follows:

140 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Data set list utility (option 3.4)

nnnnnnnnkB
Kilobyte. The total number is divided by 1000.
nnnnnnnnMB
Megabyte. The total number is divided by 1,000,000.
nnnnnnnnGB
Gigabyte. The total number is divided by 1,000,000,000.
nnnnnnnnTB
Terabyte. The total number is divided by 1,000,000,000,000.
The unchanged number of tracks and non-excluded tracks is available in the shared pool variables
ZDLSIZET and ZDLSIZTX .
Data Sets
Total number of data sets in the list.
non-x
Total number of data sets in the list, not including excluded data sets.
Command
Field used to enter a line command, TSO command, CLIST, or REXX EXEC when displaying a data set
list. See “Data set list utility line commands” on page 150 for more information.
Name
Data set name, as in the VTOC or catalog.
Message
This field is initially blank. After you perform an operation on a data set using one of the built-in line
commands, one of these messages is displayed in this field:
LineCommand
Message
B
Browsed
C
Cataloged
E
Edited
U
Uncataloged
D
Deleted
P
Printed
PX
Index Printed
R
Renamed
I
Info - I
M
Member List
S
Info - S
Z
Compressed

Utilities (option 3) 141

Data set list utility (option 3.4)

F
Free Completed
=
(message shown for last command entered)
V
Viewed
RA
Refadd
CO
Copied
MO
Moved
RS
Reset
X
– 1 data set(s) not displayed
NX
(no message)
NXF
(no message)
NXL
(no message)
If you enter a TSO command, CLIST, or REXX exec on the Command line, a default message appears in
the Message field. The message you see can be one of these:
• In this format, depending on the results of the TSO command, CLIST, or REXX exec:

XXXXXXXX RC=#

where:
XXXXXXXX
The command entered
#
The return code.
• "ERROR MSG LOGGED".
This may occur with PDSE or HFS data sets. A fully formatted message appears in the ISPF log,
provided one has been allocated.
Note: See “Data set list utility line commands” on page 150 for a description of the Data Set List
Utility line commands.
Volume
Volume serial number.
An indicator may be displayed beside the Volume field:
+ (plus sign)
May be displayed beside the Volume serial field if the data set is a multiple volume data set. This
is determined from the number of volume entries in the catalog. Depending on the system set-up,
a "+" may not be displayed until the additional volumes have been accessed. For example, a data
set with a non-zero dynamic volume count in the SMS dataclass will not show multiple volume
entries in the catalog until the additional volumes have been accessed. Other vendor products
which can dynamically expand the volume list will also not show multiple volume entries in the
catalog until the additional volumes have been accessed.

142 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Data set list utility (option 3.4)

1
Migrated to disk
2
Migrated to tape
C
Migrated to cloud
Tracks
Number of tracks allocated to the data set.
%Used
Percentage of allocated tracks used, expressed in whole numbers, not rounded. If any track is used,
the minimum percentage is 1. If the data set is a PDSE, the % refers to the percentage of allocated
pages used.
See “F — free unused space” on page 155 for information about freeing track space manually.
Note: Space utilization values are not displayed for VSAM or BDAM data sets.
XT
Number of extents allocated to the data set.
Device
Device type on which the volume that contains the data set is mounted.
Dsorg
One of the data set organizations shown. In the definitions of these data set organizations, unmovable
means the data set contains absolute addresses instead of relative addresses. These data sets are not
moved to any other DASD storage location during read/write operations.
PS
Sequential
PS-E
Sequential Extended Format
PS-L
Large Format Sequential
PSU
Sequential unmovable
PO
Partitioned
POU
Partitioned unmovable
PO-E
Partitioned extended (PDSE)
DA
Direct
DAU
Direct unmovable
HSF
MVS Hierarchical File System
VS
VSAM
VS-E
VSAM Extended Format
blank
None of the preceding data set organizations.

Utilities (option 3) 143

Data set list utility (option 3.4)

Recfm
Record format specified when the data set was allocated. See “A — allocate new data set” on page
105 for more information about record formats.
Lrecl
Logical record length, in bytes, specified when the data set was allocated.
Blksz
Block size, in bytes, specified when the data set was allocated.
Created
Creation date in the national format.
Expires
Expiration date in the national format, specified when the data set was allocated. If no expiration date
was specified, ***None*** is displayed. If a "never expire" date (1999/12/31 or its equivalent) is
specified, ***Perm*** is displayed. See “A — allocate new data set” on page 105 for more information
about expiration dates.
Note: The expiration date is only available with the I and S line commands.
Referred
Date, in the national format, that this data set was last accessed.
Catalog
The name of the catalog in which the data set was located. Only displayed in the Total view when the
Display Catalog Name option is selected and no value is entered in the Volume Serial field.

Actions you can take from the data set list panel
These topics describe actions you can take from the Data Set List panel:
• “Line commands” on page 144
• “TSO commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs” on page 144
• “Using the slash ( / ) character” on page 144
• “TSO command/CLIST/REXX exec variables” on page 146

Line commands
Line commands can be entered in the Command field to the left of the data set names. See “Data set list
utility line commands” on page 150 for definitions of these line commands.

TSO commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs

Besides the ISPF-supplied line commands, you can also enter TSO commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs
that use a fully qualified data set name as an operand. You can type over the field containing the data set
name to enter commands that require more space than is provided in the Command field. ISPF
determines the end of the command by scanning the Command field and the field containing the data set
name from right to left. The first character found that differs from the original is considered to be the last
character of the command. Therefore, it is best to enter a blank after the last character of your command
if it extends into the field containing the data set name.
TSO commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs entered are invoked using the ISPF SELECT CMD service.
Variable names starting with an ampersand (&) are evaluated by ISPF. If you want the underlying
command processor to see the ampersand you must specify 2 ampersands. For example:

DEF NONVSAM(NAME(/) DEVT(0000) VOLUME(&&SYSR2))

Note: If the TSO command, CLIST, or REXX exec issues a return code greater than or equal to 8,
processing stops and an error message is displayed.

Using the slash ( / ) character

If a command, CLIST, or REXX exec requires the data set name in a position other than the first operand
or if other operands are needed, you can use the slash ( / ) character to represent the quoted data set

144 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Data set list utility (option 3.4)

name. If no operands are specified after the command, ISPF uses the name of the data set being acted on
as the command's first operand.
To specify a member of a partitioned data set, enclose the member name or pattern in parentheses
immediately following the / character. You can use this format with the V (view data set), B (browse data
set), D (delete data set), E (edit data set), and M (display member list) line commands. For information
about these line commands, see “Data set list utility line commands” on page 150.
You may find it helpful to call the SHOWCMD primary command before using the slash ( / ) for the first
time. After you call SHOWCMD, a special Data Set List Utility panel appears each time you enter a line
command, TSO command, CLIST, or REXX exec on a data set list display. The panel shows you the
command you entered and how ISPF expanded, and thus interpreted, that command. See “SHOWCMD
command” on page 163 for more information about and an example of the SHOWCMD primary command.
Rules for substituting data set names in line commands
The rules shown apply to substituting the slash ( / ) character for a data set name or adding the data set
name as the last operand. Each rule is followed by one or more examples that prove the rule by using
either a CLIST or a line command.
In each example, the data set being acted on is USER.TEST.DATA, which always appears, either
completely or partially, in uppercase. However, the CLIST or line command is typed in lowercase to
differentiate between the CLIST or line command and USER.TEST.DATA when this data set name is either
completely or partially typed over.
Each example also shows:
Original
The line as it appears before the CLIST or line command is entered.
As typed
The line as it appears after the CLIST or line command is typed.
After
The line as it appears after the CLIST or line command is expanded to show the placement of quotes
and data set name substitution for the slash (/) character.
1. You can type over the data set name. Expanded commands can contain a maximum of 255 characters
and are converted to uppercase. This example shows how rule “1” on page 145 would apply if you
typed %clist1 da(/):

(Original) USER.TEST.DATA
(As typed) %clist1 da(/).TEST.DATA
(After) %CLIST1 DA('USER.TEST.DATA')

2. The data set name substitution character (/) is replaced with the quoted, fully qualified data set name
if the character following the / is not a number, letter, or national character. This example shows how
rule “2” on page 145 would apply if you typed %clist2 / newdate(1986/03/15):

(Original) USER.TEST.DATA
(As typed) %clist2 / newdate(1986/03/15)
(After) %CLIST2 'USER.TEST.DATA' NEWDATE(1986/03/15)

3. If a slash ( / ) is followed immediately by a member name in parentheses, the ending quote for the data
set is placed after the closing parenthesis that follows the member name. This example shows how
rule “3” on page 145 would apply if you typed %clist3 da(/(xyz)):

(Original) USER.TEST.DATA
(As typed) %clist3 da(/(xyz)).DATA
(After) %CLIST3 DA('USER.TEST.DATA(XYZ)')

Utilities (option 3) 145

Data set list utility (option 3.4)

4. If the first operand is the unquoted data set name as it appears in the list, quotes are added around it
or after a closing parenthesis following a member name. This example shows how rule “4” on page
146 would apply if you typed b (the B (browse) line command) and added member (abc):

(Original) USER.TEST.DATA
(As typed) b USER.TEST.DATA(abc)
(After) B 'USER.TEST.DATA(ABC)'

5. If the line command does not have any operands or if the data set name has not been substituted as
specified by either rule “3” on page 145 or rule “4” on page 146, the quoted, fully qualified data set
name is added to the end of the line command. This example shows how rule “5” on page 146 would
apply if you typed %clist4 user.test.fortran:

(Original) USER.TEST.DATA
(As typed) %clist4 user.test.fortran
(After) %CLIST4 USER.TEST.FORTRAN 'USER.TEST.DATA'

This example shows how rule “5” on page 146 would apply if you typed %clist4
'user.test.fortran'. The purpose of this example is to show that if you enclose the CLIST
operand in quotes, ISPF still puts quotes around the data set name being acted on. The results are the
same.

(Original) USER.TEST.DATA
(As typed) %clist4 'user.test.fortran'
(After) %CLIST4 'USER.TEST.FORTRAN' 'USER.TEST.DATA'

This example shows how rule “5” on page 146 would apply if you typed %clist5 member1(abc).
The purpose of this example is to show that the results do not change if the CLIST operand contains a
member name enclosed in parentheses.

(Original) USER.TEST.DATA
(As typed) %clist5 member1(abc)ATA
(After) %CLIST5 MEMBER1(ABC) 'USER.TEST.DATA'

This example shows how rule “5” on page 146 would apply if you partially over typed the data set
name to get a new data set name. Adding the quotation marks fully qualifies the new data set name.

(Original) USER.TEST.DATA
(As typed) al 'USER.TEmp.DATA'
(After) AL 'USER.TEMP.DATA' 'USER.TEST.DATA'

If quotation marks are not used, the operand is truncated at the last changed character.

(Original) USER.TEST.DATA
(As typed) al USER.TEmp.DATA
(After) AL USER.TEMP 'USER.TEST.DATA'

TSO command/CLIST/REXX exec variables

If you use a TSO command, CLIST, or REXX exec, ISPF puts the variables described in Table 9 on page
146 in the shared pool for the TSO command, CLIST, or REXX exec to use.

Table 9. TSO command/CLIST/REXX exec variables (output)

Length in
Variable Name Description Characters
ZDLBLKSZ Data set block size 5

146 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Data set list utility (option 3.4)

Table 9. TSO command/CLIST/REXX exec variables (output) (continued)

Length in
Variable Name Description Characters
ZDLCAT Cataloged status; one of these: (1)
0
Data set is cataloged on volume ZDLVOL.
2
Data set is cataloged on a volume other than ZDLVOL and is
either:
• on volume ZDLCAT but uncataloged
• on volume ZDLCAT and defined in a user catalog that is
connected to the master catalog, but not in the normal
catalog search path
The name of the user catalog is in ZDLCATNM.
4
Data set is uncataloged on volume ZDLVOL.
6
Data set is not cataloged on any volume and is uncataloged
on volume ZDLVOL.
8
Data set is not available on volume ZDLVOL. This status is
returned for data sets that have been either migrated or
deleted.

ZDLCATNM Name of the catalog in which the data set was located 44
ZDLCDATE Creation date 10
ZDLCMD Line command 9
ZDLCONF Delete confirmation (Y | N) 1
ZDLDEV Device type 8
ZDLDSN Data set name 44
ZDLDSNTP Data set name type 8
ZDLDSORG Data set organization 4
ZDLEDATE Expiration date 10
ZDLEXT Number of extents used 3
ZDLEXTX Number of extents used, long format 5
ZDLLCMD Expanded line command 255
ZDLLRECL Data set logical record length 5
ZDLMIGR Whether the data set is migrated (YES or NO) 3
ZDLMVOL Multivolume indicator 1

Utilities (option 3) 147

Data set list utility (option 3.4)

Table 9. TSO command/CLIST/REXX exec variables (output) (continued)

Length in
Variable Name Description Characters
ZDLOVF Whether variables ZDLEXTX and ZDLSIZEX should be used to 3
obtain the 'number of extents used' and 'data set size in tracks'
values (YES or NO). The value is YES when the 'number of
extents used' value exceeds the size of variable ZDLEXT or the
'data set size in tracks' value exceeds the size of variable
ZDLSIZE.
ZDLRDATE Date last referenced 10
ZDLRECFM Data set record format 5
ZDLSIZE Data set size in tracks 6
ZDLSIZEX Data set size in tracks, long format 12
ZDLSPACU Space units: either BLOCKS, TRACKS, CYLINDERS, BYTES, 10
KILOBYTES, or MEGABYTES
ZDLUSED Percentage of used tracks 3
ZDLVOL Volume 6
ZDLXSTAT Exclude status 1

When you select the Display Total Tracks option, and the data set list is displayed either in SPACE view or
in TOTAL view, ISPF also puts the variables described in Table 10 on page 148 in the shared pool for the
TSO command, CLIST, or REXX exec to use.

Table 10. TSO command/CLIST/REXX exec additional variables (output)

Length in
Variable Name Description Characters
ZDLSIZET Total tracks of all data sets in the list 19
ZDLSIZTX Total tracks of all data sets in the list, not including the tracks of 19
excluded data sets
ZDLDST Total number of data sets in the list (available for all display 6
views)
ZDLDSX Total number of data sets in the list, not including the excluded 6
data sets

Note: ISPF cannot calculate reliable space utilization values for VSAM or BDAM data sets. Therefore,
question marks (?) are returned in variables that report space utilization for these data sets.
A TSO command, CLIST, or REXX exec can set these variables and place them in the shared pool to
communicate with the Data Set List utility (option 3.4).

Table 11. TSO command/CLIST/REXX exec variables (input)

Length in
Variable Name Description Characters
ZDLNDSN New data set name to appear in list 44
ZDLMSG Message to appear in list 16
ZDLREF Refresh data set information; Y | N 1

148 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Data set list utility (option 3.4)

P — print data set list

Use option P to print a data set list. You must:
1. Enter one of these:
• One or more data set name level qualifiers in the Dsname Level field and a volume serial in the
Volume field. The list will contain all data sets for the specified levels and volume. Only the specified
volume is searched. See “Dsname Level” and “Volume serial” on page 132 for more information.
• One or more data set name level qualifiers in the Dsname Level field, but leave the Volume field
blank. The list will contain all data sets for the specified levels that are cataloged.
• A volume serial in the Volume field, but leave the Dsname Level field blank. The list will contain only
the data sets on the specified volume. Only the specified volume is searched.
Note: All data set lists are formatted the same when they are printed. Therefore, values entered in the
Initial View field have no effect when you use option P.
2. Press Enter to print the data set list. The data set list is stored in the ISPF list data set.
ISPF displays a progress status pop-up panel when the necessary information to perform a P (print data
set list) command has to be retrieved and the data set list comprises 50 or more data sets. The keyboard
locks when this pop-up panel appears and stays locked until the P command is completed. This happens
regardless of the setting of Display Total Tracks option and the value entered in the Initial View field.

V — display VTOC information

Option V is used to display VTOC (volume table of contents) information. To use option V:
1. In the Volume field, specify the volume serial for which you want ISPF to display information.
Note: VTOC information is formatted the same, whether displayed or printed. Therefore, values
entered in the Initial Display View field have no effect when you use option V.
2. Press Enter to display the VTOC information.
Note: The Dsname Level field is not applicable for the V or PV command. Only the Volume field is
relevant.
Figure 104 on page 149 shows an example of a VTOC display.

Menu RefList RefMode Utilities Help

┌────────────────────────── VTOC Summary Information ──────────────────────────┐
│ Volume . : MVS8WF │
│ │
│ Unit . . : 3390 │
│ │
│ Volume Data VTOC Data Free Space Tracks Cyls │
│ Tracks . : 50,085 Tracks . : 59 Size . . : 1,146 1 │
│ %Used . : 97 %Used . . : 60 Largest . : 22 0 │
│ Trks/Cyls: 15 Free DSCBS: 1,187 │
│ Free Extents . : 323 │
│ │
│ Command ===> │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F9=Swap F12=Cancel │
⋘───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
3. Attrib / Include Additional Qualifiers
4. Total / Display Catalog Name
/ Display Total Tracks
When the data set list is displayed, enter either:
"/" on the data set list command field for the command prompt pop-up,
an ISPF line command, the name of a TSO command, CLIST, or REXX exec, or
"=" to execute the previous command.
Option ===> V
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 104. VTOC summary information panel (ISRUDSLV)

Track values do not include the remaining alternate tracks for the volume. The free space track values are
the number of tracks for the free cylinders plus any additional free tracks.
The fields shown on the VTOC Summary Information panel are:

Utilities (option 3) 149

Data set list utility (option 3.4)

Unit
Shows the type of DASD device the volume is on, such as 3380 or 3390.
Volume Data
Describes general information about the volume:
Tracks
Total tracks on the volume.
%Used
Percentage of total tracks or pages not available for allocation.
Trks/Cyls
Number of tracks per cylinder for this volume.
VTOC Data
Describes general information about the VTOC on the volume:
Tracks
Total tracks allocated to the VTOC.
%Used
Percentage of allocated tracks or pages used by data set control blocks (DSCBs).
Free DSCBS
Number of unused DSCBs.
Free Space
Describes the free space available for data set allocation on the volume under the headings Tracks
and Cyls, showing:
Size
Total number of free tracks and cylinders.
Largest
The largest number of contiguous free tracks and cylinders.
Free Extents
The number of free areas with free cylinders.

PV — print VTOC information

Option PV is used to print VTOC information. To use option PV:
1. Blank out the Dsname Level field.
2. In the Volume field, specify the volume serial for which you want ISPF to print information.
Note: VTOC information is formatted the same, whether displayed or printed. Therefore, values
entered in the Initial View field have no effect when using option PV.
3. Press Enter to print the VTOC information. The VTOC information is stored in the ISPF list data set.
Note: The Dsname Level field is not applicable for the PV or V command. Only the Volume field is
relevant.

Data set list utility line commands

This section documents the line commands that you can enter in the Data Set List Utility when a data set
list is displayed. For information on the line commands that you can enter in the Data Set List Utility when
a member list is displayed, see the information about Using Member Selection Lists and Library and Data
Set List Utility Line Commands in the ISPF Libraries and Data Sets topic in z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
After you display a data set list by leaving the Option field blank, you can enter a line command to the left
of the data set name. You can also enter TSO commands, CLIST names, or REXX exec names. If a '>' is
used before the CLIST or REXX exec name, the parameters passed to the command are not translated to
upper case. The z/OS UNIX commands OGET and OPUT can be entered and the parameters are also not
translated to upper case.

150 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Data set list utility (option 3.4)

The slash ( / ) character, which can be used with TSO commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs, can also be
used with the B (browse data set), CO (copy data set), D (delete data set), E (edit data set), M (display
member list), MO (move data set), and V (view data set) line commands to specify a member name or a
pattern. You can type over the field containing the data set name to enter commands that require more
than the space provided. For more information about using this symbol, see “Using the slash ( / )
character” on page 144. For more information about member name patterns, see the details about
Displaying Member Lists in the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
You can also enter line commands in block command format to execute the same line command for
several data sets at once. You mark the block by typing a "//" at the beginning of a block of rows and
another "//" at the end of the block of rows. You must type the line command either immediately after
the // on the first row of the block, or immediately after the // on the last row of the block. You can enter
several blocks of commands at the same time, but you cannot nest them. Single line commands are not
allowed within a block command. You can execute all line commands, including TSO commands, Clists
and REXX execs as block commands. If you have selected the DSLIST settings option Execute Block
Commands for excluded Data Sets, all applicable excluded rows are unexcluded before the block
commands are executed.
Line commands that are valid for aliases may be used with any alias data sets that are listed. Uncatalog,
delete, and rename commands are not valid for alias data sets. A line command such as 'B' for browse or
'I' for information will display the real name of the data set.
The Data Set List Utility always supports the U (uncatalog) line command for tape data sets. The Data Set
List Utility can support additional line commands for data sets stored on tape and other removable media,
by calling external commands such as DFSMSrmm. This interface is configured in the ISPF configuration
table and enabled by setting the configuration table keyword DSLIST_RM_ENABLED to YES.
Depending on the removable media interface, these line commands may be supported:
I
Information
S
Short Information
D
Delete
R
Rename
C
Catalog
M
Member List
P
Print
X
Print Index
CO
Copy
MO
Move
Which line commands are actually supported by a particular interface depends on the capabilities of the
external command.
For more information about configuring the Data Set List Utility removable media interface, see z/OS ISPF
Planning and Customizing.
If a CLIST, REXX exec, or program is issued against a data set, ISPF gathers information on the data set
and makes it available through dialog variables. See Table 9 on page 146 for the list of those variables. If
the data set being processed is on an unmounted file system, a temporary mount is issued, file system.

Utilities (option 3) 151

Data set list utility (option 3.4)

The Command field and the field containing the data set name fields make up a single point-and-shoot
field. If you enter a slash in the Command field or if you select any part of the combined point-and-shoot
field, the Data Set List Actions pop-up shown in Figure 105 on page 152 is displayed so that you can
select the command you want to use.

Menu Options View Utilities Compilers Help

─ ┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐ ──────────
D │ Data Set List Actions │ ow 1 of 12
│ More: │
│ Data Set: BILLSWA │
C │ │ Volume
- │ DSLIST Action │ -----------
/ │ 1. Edit 15. Reset │ *ALIAS
│ 2. View 16. Move │ A$US05
│ 3. Browse 17. Copy │ A$US08
│ 4. Member List 18. Refadd │ A$US03
│ 5. Delete 19. Exclude │ A$US07
│ 6. Rename 20. Unexclude 'NX' │ A$US12
│ 7. Info 21. Unexclude first 'NXF' │ A$US02
│ 8. Short Info 22. Unexclude last 'NXL' │ A$US07
│ 9. Print 23. SuperC 'SC' │ A$US06
│ 10. Catalog 24. SuperCE 'SCE' │ A$US08
│ 11. Uncatalog 25. Search-For 'SF' │ A$US08
│ 12. Compress 26. Search-ForE 'SFE' │ A$US06
│ 13. Free 27. Allocate │ A$US01
│ 14. Print Index │ A$US08
│ │ A$US06
│ Select a choice and press ENTER to process data set action. │ A$US01
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward │
C │ F8=Forward F9=Swap F12=Cancel │ ===> PAGE
⋘───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘ 9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 105. Data set list commands pop-up (ISRUDABC)

E — edit data set

For the E command, the processing is similar to selecting the Edit option (2) and entering the library or
data set name on the Edit Entry Panel, except that mixed mode is the assumed operation mode.
Note: Multivolume data sets do not support the Volume Serial field for the Edit command.
If you select a library or other partitioned data set, an Edit member list is displayed. For more information
about using member selection lists, see the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF User's
Guide Vol I.
The E line command uses the values from a prompt panel to specify items including the initial macro,
profile name, panel name, format, mixed mode, and workstation editing. These values are stored in the
profile and are used on subsequent edits.
To change these values, use the "DSLIST settings" panel on the data set list Options pull-down. Check
both the "E,V,B enhanced member list" and the "Display Edit/View entry panel" options. The prompt panel
is always shown when you edit a sequential file, or when you directly edit a member of a partitioned data
set. When you are using a member list you can force the display of the panel by placing a slash mark (/) in
the Prompt field next to the member you select.
If the editor appears to be invoking an unexpected initial macro, or it appears to be using an unexpected
profile, follow the process described to check the values on the prompt panel.

V — view data set

For the V command, the processing is similar to selecting the View option (1) and entering the library or
data set name on the View Entry Panel. If you have set your DSLIST options to not show the edit/view
entry panel:
• Mixed mode is the assumed operation mode.
• You cannot specify a data set format, an edit profile, or an initial macro.
Note: Multivolume data sets do not support the Volume Serial field for the View command.

152 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Data set list utility (option 3.4)

If you select a library or other partitioned data set, an Edit member list is displayed. For more information
about using member selection lists, see the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF User's
Guide Vol I.

B — browse data set

For the B command, processing is the same as if you specify Browse Mode from View (option 1), except
that mixed mode is the assumed operation mode and you cannot specify a data set format. To browse a
data set with mixed mode off, you must use the View option; deselect Mixed Mode and select Browse
Mode on the View Entry Panel. If you enter the B line command beside an ISPF library or other partitioned
data set, a Browse member list is displayed. For more information about using member selection lists, see
the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Note: From a catalog list, multivolume data sets do not support the Volume Serial field for the Browse
command.

M — display member list

For the M command, a member selection list of a partitioned data set is displayed. This member list
provides an expanded line command field in the area to the left of the list. The line command field in other
member lists has room for only one character, unless the browse, view, or edit enhanced member list is
selected.
From the member list, you can use the same primary commands and line commands that are valid for
Library utility (option 3.1) member selection lists. See the information about Using Member Selection Lists
and Library and Data Set List Utility Line Commands in the Libraries and Data Sets topic in the z/OS ISPF
User's Guide Vol I.
Note:
1. From a VTOC list, you can browse a single volume of a multivolume non-SMS data set.
2. You can chain the line commands; that is, you can select multiple members from a member list for
various processing tasks. Use the CANCEL command (from a View, Browse, or Edit session) to break
the chain and return to the member list.
You can also enter TSO commands, CLISTs, or REXX EXECs in the Line Command field. If you enter a line
command other than B (browse member), C (copy member), D (delete member), E (edit member), G
(reset member statistics), I (display member information), J (submit member), M (move member), P (print
member), R (rename member), T (invoke TSO command for member), V (view member) or W (invoke
workstation command for member), ISPF interprets it as a TSO command, CLIST, or REXX EXEC.
If the prompt field contains non-blank data that does not start with "*" then the prompt field data is
passed as an argument:

COMMAND 'DSN(MEMBER)' prompt

See “TSO commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs” on page 144 for more information.
Note: If the TSO command, CLIST, or REXX exec issues a return code greater than or equal to 8,
processing stops and an error message is displayed.
Figure 106 on page 154 shows an example of a member list with statistics and an expanded line
command field.

Utilities (option 3) 153

Data set list utility (option 3.4)

Menu Functions Confirm Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
DSLIST MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE Row 0000001 of 0000373
Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE
Name Prompt Size Created Changed ID
_________ FL@SPCGB 21 2003/12/10 2003/12/10 02:58:01 LSACKV
_________ FL@SPCIM 21 2003/12/15 2003/12/15 09:37:51 LSACKV
_________ FL@SPCLO 21 2003/12/05 2003/12/05 22:52:24 LSACKV
_________ FL@SPCMI 21 2003/12/10 2003/12/10 06:22:13 LSACKV
_________ FL@SPCNG 21 2003/12/01 2003/12/02 23:09:25 LSACKV
_________ FL@SPCPR 21 2003/12/12 2003/12/12 01:46:48 LSACKV
_________ FL@SPCRA 21 2003/12/12 2003/12/12 04:03:30 LSACKV
_________ FL@SPCSC 23 2004/04/21 2005/12/23 11:54:27 BBAGG
⋮
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F5=Rfind F7=Up F8=Down F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 106. Member list display - expanded line command field (ISRUDSM)

Figure 107 on page 154 shows load module library statistics with an expanded line command field.

Menu Functions Confirm Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
DSLIST PDFTDEV.SVT.LOAD Row 0000001 of 0000505
Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE
Name Prompt Alias-of Size TTR AC AM RM
_________ FLM$CP FLMIO24 0000A3E8 089B0F 00 24 24
_________ FLM$CPI 000000E8 00F80A 00 31 ANY
_________ FLM$DE FLMIO24 0000A3E8 089B0F 00 24 24
_________ FLM$DT FLMIO24 0000A3E8 089B0F 00 24 24
_________ FLM$99 FLMIO24 0000A3E8 089B0F 00 24 24
_________ FLMA 00008278 076E0D 00 31 ANY
_________ FLMB 000AA8B8 084A10 00 31 ANY
_________ FLMBCMD FLMDDL 00140A68 087906 00 31 ANY
⋮
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F5=Rfind F7=Up F8=Down F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 107. Load module library display - expanded line command field (ISRUDSM)

D — delete data set

For the D command, the processing is the same as if you had selected option D from the Data Set utility
(option 3.2) without specifying a volume serial. This command deletes and uncatalogs the entire data set.
If a member name or pattern is supplied then a member delete will occur.
Note: Delete is not allowed for multivolume data sets from a VTOC list.
If you select the Confirm Delete option on the Data Set List Utility panel, the Confirm Delete panel (Figure
86 on page 115) is displayed to allow you to continue or cancel the operation. Note that Confirm Delete is
forced on when deleting members by pattern. If you are trying to delete an unexpired data set, the
Confirm Purge panel (Figure 87 on page 115) is also displayed.
When you delete a data set the volume name is compared to the volume name in the configuration table.
If the names match, the command specified in the configuration table is used in place of the ISPF delete
processing. This allows you to delete migrated data sets without first causing them to be recalled.

R — rename data set

For the R command, the processing is the same as if you had selected option R from the Data Set utility
(option 3.2). The Rename Data Set panel is displayed to allow you to specify the new name.
Note: Rename is not allowed for multivolume data sets from a VTOC list.
See “R — rename entire data set” on page 113 for more information.

154 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Data set list utility (option 3.4)

I — data set information

For the I command, the processing is the same as if you had selected option I from the Library utility
(option 3.1) or left the Option field blank with the Data Set utility (option 3.2). See “I — data set
information” on page 94 and “Information for managed data sets” on page 96 for more information.
Note:
1. For multivolume data sets, options I and S display current allocation and utilization values that
represent totals from all volumes used.
2. Space utilization values are not displayed for VSAM or BDAM data sets.

S — information (short)
For the S command, the processing is the same as if you had selected option S from the Library utility
(option 3.1) or the Data Set utility (option 3.2). See “S — short data set information” on page 98 and
“Short information for managed data sets” on page 99 for more information.
Note:
1. For multivolume data sets, options I and S display current allocation and utilization values that
represent totals from all volumes used.
2. Space utilization values are not displayed for VSAM or BDAM data sets.

P — print data set

For the P command, the processing is the same as if you had selected option L from the Library utility
(option 3.1). This command formats the contents of a source data set for printing and records the output
in the ISPF list data set. It also produces an index listing, which appears at the beginning of the output.
Note: The Print command is not allowed for multivolume data sets from a VTOC list.

C — catalog data set

For the C command, the processing is the same as if you had selected option C from the Data Set utility
(option 3.2). See “C — catalog data set” on page 113 for more information.
Note: Multivolume data sets are always cataloged.

U — uncatalog data set

For the U command, the processing is the same as if you had selected option U from the Data Set utility
(option 3.2). See “U — uncatalog data set” on page 114 for more information.
Note: The U command is not supported for multivolume data sets.

Z — compress data set

For the Z command, the processing is the same as if you had selected option C from the Library utility
(option 3.1). This command recovers wasted space that was formerly occupied by deleted or updated
members and is now available for use again. You do not need to compress a PDSE. If you use the Z
command on a PDSE, the data is not reorganized.
The Z command calls either the IEBCOPY utility or the compress request exit routine. See z/OS ISPF
Planning and Customizing for more information.

F — free unused space

For the F command, space that is not being used by the data set is released. For example, if a data set is
allocated with 100 tracks but is only using 60 tracks, the F command releases the 40 tracks that are not
being used.
Note: The F command for non-SMS multivolume data sets only releases space on the last volume written
to. Volumes after the last write position may still have unused allocated space after the command
completes.

Utilities (option 3) 155

Data set list utility (option 3.4)

However, if the data set has been allocated with CYLS (cylinders) specified as the space units, only the
tracks beyond the last cylinder used are freed. For example, if a data set occupies 1.2 of 3 allocated
cylinders, the F command frees all tracks beyond the last used cylinder, leaving 2 cylinders allocated.

PX — print index listing

For the PX command, the processing is the same as if you had selected option X from the Library utility
(option 3.1). The index listing is recorded in the ISPF list data set. See “X — print index listing” on page 93
for more information.
Note: The Print command is not allowed for multivolume data sets from a VTOC list.

RS — reset
For the RESET command, a panel is displayed that prompts you to reset or delete ISPF statistics, and to
enter a new user ID, version number, or modification level.

MO — move
For the MOVE command, a panel is displayed that prompts you for a library or data set name for the to
data set.
Note: How aliases are handled by the MO and CO line commands depends on how the Process member
aliases option is set. For more information see “Moving or copying alias entries” on page 128.

CO — copy
For the COPY command, a panel is displayed that prompts you for a library or data set name for the to
data set.
Note: How aliases are handled by the MO and CO line commands depends on how the Process member
aliases option is set. For more information see “Moving or copying alias entries” on page 128.

RA — RefAdd
For the REFADD command, you are provided with an interface to referral lists, where you can add a data
set and a volume to a Personal Data Set List.

X — exclude data set

For the EXCLUDE command, one data set from a data set list is excluded from the list.

NX — unexclude data set

For the Unexclude command, one data set, or a set of data sets that have been excluded from a data set
list are re-shown.

NXF — unexclude first data set

For the UNEXCLUDE FIRST command, the first of a set of excluded data sets is re-shown.

NXL — unexclude last data set

For the UNEXCLUDE LAST command, the last of a set of excluded data sets is re-shown.

SC — SuperC
The SC command invokes the SuperC Compare Utility with the data set predefined in the "New" Data Set
field. These keyword parameters can be entered after the SC command:
NDSN(new data set)
NVOL(volume for NDSN)
ODSN(old data set)
OVOL(volume for ODSN)
M(member mask)
PROMPT

156 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Data set list utility (option 3.4)

By default no prompting for SuperC information happens.

See “SuperC utility (option 3.12)” on page 190 for more information.

SCE — SuperCE
The SCE command invokes the SuperCE Compare Utility with the data set predefined in the New DS Name
field. These keyword parameters can be entered after the SCE command:
NDSN(new data set)
NVOL(volume for NDSN)
ODSN(old data set)
OVOL(volume for ODSN)
M(member mask)
PROMPT
By default no prompting for SuperC information happens.
See “SuperCE utility (option 3.13)” on page 199 for more information.

SF — Search-For
The SF line command invokes the Search-For Utility on the selected data set.
If the selected data set is a PDS or PDSE then the SRCHFOR Member List function is invoked. You can
provide a single search string with the SF line command. (Example: SF string1). If no search string is
provided the Srchfor Options popup window is displayed. Use this panel to enter multiple search strings,
process options, and output options. You can use the process options "Set EDIT FIND string" and "Set
BROWSE FIND string" to initialize the FIND string in Edit and Browse from the first SRCHFOR string. Use
the output option "Filter list" to list only the subset of members that contain one of the search strings.
An option E, V, or B can be entered immediately after the SF command. This will set the default action
(Edit, View, or Browse) for when the S line command is used to select a member in the enhanced member
list. (Example: SF B sets the default action in the member list to Browse.)
See “Search-For utility (option 3.14)” on page 210 for more information.

SFE — Search-ForE
The SFE line command invokes the Extended Search-For Utility on the selected data set.
If the selected data set is a PDS or PDSE then the SRCHFOR Member List function is invoked. You can
provide a single search string with the SFE line command. (Example: SFE string1). If no search string is
provided the Srchfor Options popup window is displayed. Use this panel to enter multiple search strings,
process options, and output options. You can use the process options "Set EDIT FIND string" and "Set
BROWSE FIND string" to initialize the FIND string in Edit and Browse from the first SRCHFOR string. Use
the output option "Filter list" to list only the subset of members that contain one of the search strings.
An option E, V, or B can be entered immediately after the SFE command. This will set the default action
(Edit, View, or Browse) for when the S line command is used to select a member in the enhanced member
list. (Example: SFE B sets the default action in the member list to Browse.)
See “Search-ForE utility (option 3.15)” on page 216 for more information.

AL — Allocate
The AL line command uses a new data set name as a parameter. If no parameter is supplied, then the
displayed data set must have been previously deleted by another command. When a new data set name is
provided, then the displayed data set can be used as a model for allocation attributes.

= — repeat last command

For the = command, the most recently used line command is repeated. This command is most helpful
when the same TSO command, CLIST, or REXX EXEC is to be called for more than one data set in a data

Utilities (option 3) 157

Data set list utility (option 3.4)

set list. For example, suppose you have a CLIST named TESTABC and two data sets named USER.DATA1
and USER.DATA2. To run the CLIST with the two data sets consecutively from a data set list, you could:
1. Type TESTABC in the Command field beside USER.DATA1.
2. Type = in the Command field beside USER.DATA2.
3. Press Enter.
This procedure saves keystrokes because you type the CLIST name only once and you press Enter only
once.

Data set list utility primary commands

Primary commands are available when you use the Data Set List utility. These commands, which you enter
on the command line, are:
• APPEND
• CONFIRM
• EXCLUDE
• FIND and RFIND
• LC
• LOCATE
• MEMBER
• REFRESH
• RESET
• SAVE
• SHOWCMD
• SORT
• SRCHFOR
• VA, VS, VT, and VV
These topics describe these commands:
• “APPEND command” on page 158
• “CONFIRM command” on page 159
• “EXCLUDE command” on page 159
• “FIND and RFIND commands” on page 160
• “LC command” on page 160
• “LOCATE command” on page 161
• “MEMBER command” on page 161
• “REFRESH command” on page 161
• “RESET command” on page 161
• “SAVE command” on page 161
• “SHOWCMD command” on page 163
• “SORT command” on page 164
• “SRCHFOR command” on page 165
• “VA, VS, VT, and VV commands” on page 166

APPEND command
The APPEND primary command appends additional data sets to an existing displayed DSLIST. Use this
format:

158 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Data set list utility (option 3.4)

APPEND
list_name

DSname_level

You can use the APPEND command with no parameters to get a list of your personal data sets. Then
select the one you want to append to the current list.
If you give a list_name with the command, the list given is appended.
By specifying DSname_level as a parameter, you can use the resulting list to select which list to append to
the current one. For example, entering APPEND Userid.C* gives you a list of all personal lists that begin
with C as the second-level identifier. Then you can select the one to append.
By specifying DSname_level in quotes, data sets beginning with DSname_level are appended to the data
set list.
The APPEND primary command accepts system symbols. For example:

APPEND 'SYS2.**.&SYSPLEX'

CONFIRM command
The CONFIRM primary command controls display of the Confirm Delete panel. Use this format:

ON

CONFIRM OFF

You can use these operands with the CONFIRM command:

ON
Tells ISPF to display the Confirm Delete panel when you enter the D (delete data set) line command or
TSO DELETE command. This is the default setting.
OFF
Tells ISPF not to display the Confirm Delete panel.
For example, this command would tell ISPF not to display the Confirm Delete panel:

CONFIRM OFF

EXCLUDE command
The EXCLUDE primary command excludes data sets from a list based on a character string. Use this
format:

EXCLUDE
character string ALL PREFIX NEXT

CHARS FIRST SUFFIX LAST WORD

PREV

You can use these operands with the EXCLUDE command:

character string
Tells ISPF which data set to exclude from the list.
ALL
Tells ISPF to exclude every data set in the list.

Utilities (option 3) 159

Data set list utility (option 3.4)

NEXT| FIRST | LAST | PREV

Operands that define the starting point, direction, and extent of the lines to exclude.
PREFIX | CHARS | SUFFIX | WORD
Operands that set the conditions for a character string match.
For example, this command tells ISPF to exclude a data set that includes BILBO3 in the name from a list:

EXCLUDE BILBO3

FIND and RFIND commands

The FIND primary command finds and displays a character string within the data set name. Use this
format:

FIND string
NEXT CHARS ALL PREFIX X

FIRST SUFFIX NX LAST WORD

PREV

For example, this command would tell ISPF to find all occurrences of the character string ELSE:

FIND ELSE ALL

The operands X and NX can be used to limit your search to excluded (X) or unexcluded (NX) data sets.
For more information about the operands used with this command, see “FIND—find character strings” on
page 76. NEXT and CHARS are the default operands.
ISPF automatically scrolls to bring the character string to the top of the list. To repeat the search without
reentering the character string, use the RFIND command.
Note: RFIND search starts from the second data set in the list. It is not cursor-sensitive.

LC command
The LC primary command invokes the color change utility from the command line of a data set list display,
as shown in Figure 108 on page 160.

Data Set List Color Change Utility

Change one or more of the Data Set List Field Attributes and press Enter
to immediately see the effect. Clearing a field restores defaults.
More: +
Field: Color: Intens: Hilite: Defaults:
Volume . . . . . . BLUE . . . LOW . . . NONE Blue
* Data Set Name . . GREEN . . . LOW . . . NONE Green
Data Set Stats . . TURQ . . . LOW . . . NONE Turquoise
Create,Expire,
Catalog . . . . . YELLOW . . . LOW . . . NONE Yellow
Message . . . . . WHITE . . . LOW . . . NONE White
Tracks,Device . . WHITE . . . LOW . . . NONE White
Marked Data Set . YELLOW . . . HIGH . . . NONE Yellow
* _ Use Point-and-Shoot field attributes on Data Set Name field
--------------------------------- Example ------------------------------------
Command - Enter '/' to select action Message Volume
Tracks % XT Device Dsorg Recfm Lrecl Blksz Created Referred
Catalog
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ISR.V5R5M0.ISRLOAD Browsed HSM001
Command ===> ____________________________________________________ Defaults
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F12=Cancel

Figure 108. Data Set List Color Change Utility panel (ISRDLCP)

160 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Data set list utility (option 3.4)

LOCATE command
The LOCATE primary command scrolls the list of data sets based on the field on which the data set list is
sorted, as described under “SORT command” on page 164. Use this format:

LOCATE lparm

You can use the lparm operand with the LOCATE command for either of these situations:
• If the list is sorted by data set name, specify a data set name.
• If the list is sorted by another field, specify a value for the field by which the list is sorted.
For example, for a data set list sorted by volume, you could enter:

LOCATE TSOPK1

This command locates the first data set in the list on volume TSOPK1. If the value is not found, the list is
displayed starting with the entry before which the specified value would have occurred.

MEMBER command
The MEMBER primary command is used to search for a member name or pattern in all of the partitioned
data sets in the data set list. It can be abbreviated as M or MEM. The parameters, X, EX, NX, RECALL1, and
RECALL2 are optional. X and EX limit the search to excluded data sets. NX limits the search to non-
excluded data sets. RECALL1 includes data sets migrated to DASD in the search. RECALL2 includes all
migrated data sets in the search. Use this format:

MEMBER string

X
EX NX RECALL1 RECALL2

The data set list is scrolled so that the first data set containing the member or pattern is at the top of the
list. The MEMBER command finds any occurrence of the specified member name or pattern within a
partitioned data set.

REFRESH command
The REFRESH primary command updates the display of the data set list to whatever the list's current
state is. For example, after deleting several items on the list, REFRESH causes the list to be displayed
without the deleted items. If you have appended to the list, REFRESH restores the list to its status before
the append operation.

RESET command
The RESET primary command unexcludes data sets that were excluded from a list, and removes any
pending line commands and messages from the data set list.

SAVE command
The SAVE primary command writes the data set list to the ISPF list data set or to a sequential data set.
ISPF writes the data set list in its current sort order. If the Display Catalog Name option is selected and
Volume Serial was not entered, the catalog name associated with each data set is included in the Data Set
List written to the sequential file. Use this format:

SAVE
list-id

Utilities (option 3) 161

Data set list utility (option 3.4)

where list-id is an optional user-specified qualifier of the data set to which the member list will be written.
ISPF names the data set:

prefix.userid.list-id.DATASETS

where:
prefix
Your data set prefix, as specified in your TSO user profile. If you have no prefix set, or if your prefix is
the same as your user ID, the prefix is omitted and the data set name will be: userid.list-id.DATASETS.
userid
Your TSO user ID.
The data set is created if it does not exist, or written over if it exists, and has compatible attributes. If you
omit the list-id operand, the list is written to the ISPF list data set and includes the list and column
headings and this data set information:
• Data set name
• Volume
• Org
• Recfm
• Lrecl
• Blksz
• Trks
• %Used
• XT
• Created
• Catalog Name (depending on the setting of the Display Catalog Name option)
If you enter SAVE without a list-id and the Display Total Tracks option is selected, an additional header
line with the accumulated tracks of all data sets and the number of all data sets in the list is written above
the column headings. If you provide the list-id operand, the list does not include the column headings and
contains all the data set information of the list without the listid provided, plus this information:
• Device
• Expires
• Referred
This command would tell ISPF to write the list to a sequential data set named either
prefix.userid.MY.DATASETS or userid.MY.DATASETS.

SAVE MY

If the sequential data set already exists, ISPF writes over it; if not, ISPF creates it.
ISPF displays a progress status pop-up panel when the necessary information to perform a SAVE or SORT
primary command has to be retrieved and the data set list comprises 50 or more data sets. The keyboard
locks when this pop-up panel appears and stays locked until the SAVE or SORT command is completed.
This happens regardless of the setting of Display Total Tracks option and the value entered in the Initial
View field.
Note: When Display Total Tracks is ON and Initial View = 2 (Space) or 4 (Total), the pop-up panel appears
during the data set list display when it comprises 50 or more data sets and all the track information is to
be retrieved. When the SAVE command is subsequently issued the pop-up is not displayed as the data is
already available.

162 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Data set list utility (option 3.4)

SHOWCMD command
The SHOWCMD primary command controls the display of line commands and their operands as they are
called. Use this format:

ON
SHOWCMD
OFF

where:
ON
Tells ISPF to display line commands. This is the default setting.
OFF
Tells ISPF not to display line commands. Though the SHOWCMD default is ON, SHOWCMD is initially
set to OFF.
After you enter SHOWCMD ON, a panel (Figure 109 on page 163) is displayed each time you enter a line
command, TSO command, CLIST, or REXX exec on a data set list display.
On this panel, you see the command as you typed it and then, a few lines down, you see the command as
ISPF interpreted it. Seeing these commands displayed can be especially useful when you use the slash
( / ) character to substitute for the data set name because the panel shows the line command after
expansion occurs. Therefore, you can tell immediately whether you need to add operands to the
command.
For example, suppose you have a data set list displayed on the screen and decide to browse member
MEMB1 of data set USER.TEST.DATA. To see how ISPF interprets the B (browse) line command, type
SHOWCMD ON on the Command line and press Enter. Then, enter this line command in the Line
Command field to the left of USER.TEST.DATA:

B /(MEMB1)

When you press Enter, the panel shown in Figure 109 on page 163 is displayed.

Data Set List Utility

Data Set Name. : USER.TEST.DATA

Command before expansion:

B /(MEMB1)

Command after expansion:

===> B 'USER.TEST.DATA(MEMB1)'

The expanded command field shown here can be modified,

but the data set name field may not be changed for built-in commands.

Press ENTER key to process the command.

Enter END command to return without processing the command.

Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 109. Data Set List Utility - SHOWCMD panel (ISRUDSLS)

Note:
1. The data set name and commands shown in Figure 109 on page 163 are for illustrative purposes only.
These values are determined by the command you enter and the data set acted on by that command.

Utilities (option 3) 163

Data set list utility (option 3.4)

2. SHOWCMD must be entered from a data set list. It is invalid if you use a line command, such as M, to
display a member list before calling it.
When the panel showing the commands is displayed, you can perform one of these actions:
• Press Enter to call the command displayed in the "Command after expansion" field.
• Change the command displayed in the "Command after expansion" field and then press Enter to call the
changed command.
• Enter the END command to return to the data set list display.
For information about using line commands, TSO commands, CLISTs, REXX EXECs, and the / character on
a data set list display, see “Blank — display data set list” on page 136.

SORT command
The SORT primary command sorts the data set list by the specified field. Use this format:

SORT
field1
A field2

D A

where:
field1
The major sort field. If only one operand is used, ISPF treats it as field1. If both operands are used,
ISPF sorts the list by field1 first, then by field2 within field1.
field2
The minor sort field.
A|D
The direction in which values are sorted for this field (A=ascending, D=descending).
For example, to sort a data set list by volume and block size within each volume, use this command:

SORT VOLUME BLKSZ

If you do not specify a field, ISPF sorts the list by data set name. The keywords described in Table 12 on
page 164 tell ISPF by which fields to sort the data set list.

Table 12. Sort fields for source libraries

Field Default Sequence Description
NAME Ascending Data set name
MESSAGE Ascending Command completion message
VOLUME Ascending Volume serial
DEVICE Ascending Device type
DSORG Ascending Data set organization
RECFM Ascending Record format
LRECL Descending Logical record length
BLKSZ Descending Block size
TRACKS Descending Data set size
%USED Descending Percentage used

164 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Data set list utility (option 3.4)

Table 12. Sort fields for source libraries (continued)

Field Default Sequence Description
XT Descending Extents used
CREATED Descending Creation date
EXPIRES Ascending Expiration date
REFERRED Descending Last accessed data
MVOL Ascending Multivolume or migration level
CATALOG Ascending Catalog Name
PROMPT Descending Data displayed in PROMPT field

Automatic scrolling is performed, if necessary, to bring the major sort field into view. ISPF displays a
progress status pop-up panel when the necessary information to perform a SAVE or SORT primary
command has to be retrieved and the data set list comprises 50 or more data sets. The keyboard locks
when this pop-up panel appears and stays locked until the SAVE or SORT command is completed. This
happens regardless of the setting of Display Total Tracks option and the value entered in the Initial View
field.
Note: When Display Total Tracks is ON and Initial View = 2 (Space) or 4 (Total), the pop-up panel appears
during the data set list display when it comprises 50 or more data sets and all the track information is to
be retrieved. When the SORT command is subsequently issued the pop-up is not displayed as the data is
already available.

SRCHFOR command
Use the SRCHFOR primary command to search the data sets in the data set list for one or more strings of
data using the SuperC Utility (see Option 3.14). You may limit the search to excluded or non-excluded
data sets, and control whether migrated data sets are recalled and searched or not. Use this format:

SRCHFOR string

The string parameter is optional but always converted to uppercase. If specified it is used to prefill the
first search string on the subsequent DSLIST Srchfor Options panel.
WORD, SUFFIX, and PREFIX are available operands for search string specification. Note that the search
strings are case sensitive and must match exactly as specified. Consider the 'Any case' process option if
you want to disregard case.
Select the "ASCII" process option to cause ISPF to process the data in the data sets as ASCII. The data
read from the data sets is converted from ASCII to EBCDIC. Any search string given in hexadecimal
notation is assumed to be in ASCII, matching the original input data. The ASCII code page is assumed to
be ISO 8859-1 (CCSID 819). The terminal code page is used as the EBCDIC code page. If the terminal
code page cannot be determined code page 1047 is used.
You can use the C (continuation) operand to specify that both the current and previous string must be
found on the same line to constitute a match. Otherwise, lines with either string are treated as matching.

Table 13. SRCHFOR command search string examples

Example Search strings Explanation
===> ABC Either string ABC or EFG may be found in the search data set.
===> EFG

Utilities (option 3) 165

Reset ISPF statistics utility (option 3.5)

Table 13. SRCHFOR command search string examples (continued)

Example Search strings Explanation
===> ABC WORD The two strings (ABC and EFG) must be found on the same line. ABC must
===> EFG C be a complete word, while EFG (a continuation definition) can be part of
any word.
===> ABcD prefix The string (ABcD) is detected if the case of each letter matches and it is a
prefix of a word.
===> X'7b00' The hex string is specified as the search string. The listing must be
browsed with 'HEX ON'.
===> 'AB C''D' The string (AB C'D) is specified.

To start the search, press the Enter key from the DSLIST Srchfor Options panel. To cancel the request and
return to the Data Set List, enter END or CANCEL.
Output is in the listing DSN you specify and in the MESSAGE field in the DSLIST. Sort on this field to
consolidate results.

VA, VS, VT, and VV commands

The VA, VS, VT, and VV commands change the data set list display to the Attributes, Space, Total, and
Volume views, respectively.

Reset ISPF statistics utility (option 3.5)

If you have set STATS mode on, the ISPF editor automatically generates statistics for each member of a
partitioned data set. You might want to reset these statistics for these reasons:
• The program you are developing has been completed and you would like to reset all version numbers
before starting on the next release.
• A person has left the project, and you wish to reassign some of the members to the user ID of the
person who is taking over the work.
• You would like to create ISPF statistics for some members that were created or modified on a system
other than ISPF.
• You want to delete existing statistics from a partitioned data set to save space in the directory.
This option allows you to create, update, or delete statistics and to reset sequence numbers.
The Reset ISPF Statistics utility handles only partitioned data sets whose record length is in this range:
• From 1 to 32 760, inclusive, for fixed-length records
• From 5 to 32 756, inclusive, for variable-length records.
For more information about ISPF Member Statistics, see the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter in the
z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.

166 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Reset ISPF statistics utility (option 3.5)

Menu RefList Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Reset ISPF Statistics

R Reset (create/update) ISPF statistics D Delete ISPF statistics

New Userid . . . . . . ________ (If userid is to be changed)

New Version Number . . __ (If version number is to be changed)

SCLM Setting Enter "/" to select option

3 1. SCLM 2. Non-SCLM 3. As is / Reset Mod Level
/ Reset Sequence Numbers
ISPF Library: / Reset Date/Time
Project . . . JOHNLEV / Reset Number of Lines
Group . . . . TEST
Type . . . . DATA
Member . . . (Blank or pattern for member selection
list, "*" for all members)
Other Partitioned Data Set:
Name . . . . . . .
Volume Serial . . . (If not cataloged)

Data Set Password . . (If password protected)

Option ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 110. Reset ISPF Statistics panel (ISRURSP)

Reset ISPF statistics panel action bar

The Reset ISPF Statistics panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu
For more information, see the details about the Menu Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
RefList
For information about referral lists, see the topic about Using Personal Data Set Lists and Library Lists
in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Utilities
For more information, see the details about the Utilities Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Help
The Help pull-down offers these choices:
1
General
2
Why you might want to Reset ISPF statistics
3
Filling in the reset utility panel
4
Using the Member list
6
ISPF statistics
7
Appendices
8
Index

Utilities (option 3) 167

Reset ISPF statistics utility (option 3.5)

Reset ISPF statistics panel fields

All the fields on this panel are described in the Libraries and Data Sets topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide
Vol I, except these fields:
New Userid
This field is used to set the ID field in the statistics. Enter a new user ID here if you want to change the
user ID the statistics are recorded under. It is required if you do not specify a new version number.
If you are updating the user ID but not resetting the sequence numbers, the statistics are updated but
the data is not scanned or renumbered.
New Version Number
Enter a number here if you want to change the version number. This field is required if you do not
specify a new user ID when resetting statistics. It is ignored if you are deleting statistics.
Reset Mod Level
Use a slash to select this option and reset the modification level. Deselect this option if you do not
want to reset the modification level. A new version number is required to reset the modification level.
Reset Sequence Numbers
Use a slash to select this option and reset the sequence numbers. Deselect this option if you do not
want to reset the sequence numbers. A new version number is required to reset the sequence
numbers. Only standard (STD) sequence numbers are reset.
If the data is in packed format, there can be no sequence number processing. However, statistics for
members in packed format can be created or updated if the sequence numbers are not being reset.
SCLM Settings
The SCLM setting is a bit that ISPF uses to determine what type of edit the file last had performed
upon it.
1 SCLM
This bit is ON to specify that the last edit of this file was under SCLM control.
2 Non-SCLM
This bit is ON to specify that the last edit of this file was under control of something other than
SCLM.
3 As-is
This bit is ON to specify that this copy operation transfers the current setting of this file as it
already is.
Reset Date/Time
The setting of this option determines whether to reset the Last Modified Date or Time and the Creation
Date of the file.
Reset Number of Lines
The setting of this option determines whether to reset the Current Number of Lines, the Initial
Number of Lines, and the Number of Modified Lines settings. If this option is selected, the Current
Number of Lines and Initial Number of Lines settings are set to the actual number of lines of the
member.
The Number of Modified Lines setting is dependent on the Reset Mod Level and Reset Sequence
Numbers options. If either of those are reset and the Reset Date/Time field is selected, then the value
of the Number of Modified Lines is set to zero. Otherwise, the Number of Modified Lines remains as is.
Extended statistics are automatically generated if you select this option and extended statistics are
enabled in the site configuration and any of the line count values exceed 65535. More space is
occupied in the PDS directory by each member with extended statistics.

Reset ISPF statistics utility options

These topics describe the options shown on the Reset ISPF Statistics panel:
• “R — reset (create/update) ISPF statistics” on page 169

168 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Reset ISPF statistics utility (option 3.5)

• “D — delete ISPF statistics” on page 169

• “Results of resetting statistics” on page 169

R — reset (create/update) ISPF statistics

Use option R either to create statistics in a library that does not currently have them, or to update
statistics in a library.
The New Userid field is optional for option R. If you specify a user ID, it is placed in the ID field of the
statistics. If you leave the New Userid field blank and select a member without statistics, the ID field of
the statistics is set to the current user ID.
Either a new user ID or a new version number is required when you use this option. When you specify a
version number, the statistics are created or reset as follows:
Version Number
Set to the specified value.
Modification Level
Set to zero if requested; otherwise, unchanged.
Creation Date
Set to current date in the national format.
Change Date
Set to current date, in the national format, and time.
Current No. Lines
Set to the current number of data records.
Initial No. Lines
Set to the current number of data records.
No. Modified Lines
Set to zero if the Reset Sequence Numbers field is selected.
If you have requested updating of the modification level and resetting of the sequence numbers, the last
two digits of each sequence number are set to zeros. Otherwise, they are not changed.
If you have requested updating of sequence numbers, the data is scanned to determine if valid, ascending
sequence numbers are present in all records. If so, the data is renumbered. Otherwise, the data is
assumed to be unnumbered and renumbering is not done.

D — delete ISPF statistics

Use option D to delete ISPF statistics for an ISPF library or other partitioned data set. The New Userid and
New Version Number fields are ignored when you use option D.

Results of resetting statistics

What you specify for the New Version Number, Reset Mod Level, and Reset Sequence Numbers fields
controls the resetting of the sequence numbers, the modification flags within the data, and the statistics.
A new version number is required to reset the modification level and sequence numbers. Therefore, if a
new version number is entered and the data is not in packed format, Table 14 on page 169 shows the
various combinations you can use for the Reset Mod Level and Reset Sequence Numbers fields and the
results of those combinations.

Table 14. Reset mod level and reset sequence numbers combinations
Reset Mod Level Selected Reset Mod Level Deselected
Reset Sequence Numbers RESET MOD FLAGS=UNCHANGED SEQ
Selected #'s=RESET
Reset Sequence Numbers Unchanged Unchanged
Deselected

Utilities (option 3) 169

Hardcopy utility (option 3.6)

Processing of alias entries

If statistics are updated or created for members of a data set by entering a wildcard as part of the
member name and no member selection list is displayed, statistics for alias members are not created,
thus leaving the alias bit untouched.
If alias members are selected from a member selection list, a confirmation pop-up panel is displayed for
each alias selected, before creating ISPF statistics. If statistics are created for an alias member, the alias
bit is turned off, effectively creating a non-alias member using the same TTR as the original member for
which the alias was created.

Hardcopy utility (option 3.6)

The Hardcopy utility allows you to specify a sequential data set or a member of a partitioned data set to
be printed, and the destination of the output. It also allows you to specify whether a sequential data set is
to be kept or deleted after printing. Partitioned data set members are always kept.
You can use the Hardcopy utility to print any DASD-resident data set except ISPF list and log data sets;
use the ISPF LIST command to print log and list data sets during an ISPF session.
An optional print utility exit can be specified by your installation. If this exit is installed, it may cause the
Hardcopy utility's response to differ from the descriptions shown here. See z/OS ISPF Planning and
Customizing for more information about the print utility exit.
Another factor that can affect the Hardcopy utility's performance is whether the TSO/E Information
Center Facility is installed. If the TSO/E Information Center Facility is installed, your installation can
optionally allow ISPF to display a panel for submitting TSO/E Information Center Facility information with
the print request. See “Using the TSO/E information center facility” on page 173 for more information.
If the TSO/E Information Center Facility is not installed, the Hardcopy utility first displays the panel shown
in Figure 111 on page 170.

Menu RefList Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Hardcopy Utility
More: +
Process option 1. Print and keep data set or member
2. Print and delete sequential data sets

Data Set Name . .

Volume Serial . . . . (If not cataloged)
Data Set Password . . (If password protected)

Print Mode . . . . . . . BATCH (Batch or Local)

Batch Sysout class . . . (BATCH only)

Local printer ID or
writer-name . . . . . . (LOCAL only)
Local Sysout class . . . (LOCAL only)

Job statement information: (If not to local printer/external writer, verify

before proceeding)
Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 111. Hardcopy Utility panel - before JCL generation (ISRUHCP)

Hardcopy utility panel action bar

The Reset ISPF Statistics panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu
For more information, see the details about the Menu Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.

170 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Hardcopy utility (option 3.6)

RefList
For information about referral lists, see the topic about Using Personal Data Set Lists and Library Lists
in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Utilities
For more information, see the details about the Utilities Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Help
The Help pull-down offers these choices:
1
General
2
Function of the hardcopy utility
3
Selecting a print mode
4
Submitting a background job to print a data set or member
5
Routing a data set to a printer local to your terminal group
6
Printing a data set using TSO/E Information Center Facility
7
Appendices
8
Index

Hardcopy utility panel fields

The Data Set Name, Volume Serial, Data Set Password, and Job statement information fields, shown in
Figure 111 on page 170, are explained in the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF
User's Guide Vol I. The other fields on the panel are:
Print Mode
Lets you specify one of these print modes:
BATCH
Submits your print request as a background job.
LOCAL
Routes your data to a local printer, such as an IBM 328x printer that is connected to your terminal
group.
Batch Sysout Class
Destination of printed data set. Used only if the data set is to be printed and Batch SYSOUT class is
specified.
Local Printer ID or Writer name
Destination of printed data set. Used only if the data set is to be printed and Local Printer ID or
external writer name is specified.
Note: If you specify a Local Printer ID or writer name and you have selected the Edit PRINTDS
Command option on the ISPF Settings panel (option 0), ISPF displays the Local Print Command Edit
panel to allow you to intercept and edit the PRINTDS command before it is processed. For more
information on editing the PRINTDS command, see the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter in the
z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Local Sysout Class
Used in conjunction with the Local Printer ID or Writer Name. Specifies the output class to use for
output processing.

Utilities (option 3) 171

Hardcopy utility (option 3.6)

Generating and submitting JCL

Follow these steps to generate and submit JCL for your print jobs:
1. Choose one of the options listed at the top of the panel and type its code, 1 (for PK) or 2 (for PD), in the
Option field.
2. Specify a fully qualified data set name and member name.
This is a required field. If you are entering a fully qualified TSO data set name, you must enclose the
name in quotes. If you omit the quotes, the data set prefix from your TSO user profile is automatically
added to the beginning of the data set name.
3. If the data set is not cataloged, specify the volume serial.
4. If your data set is password protected, type the password in the Data Set Password field. For more
information on data set passwords, see the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF
User's Guide Vol I.
5. Specify either BATCH or LOCAL in the Print Mode field.
6. Specify one of these:
• If you chose BATCH in the previous step, type a Batch SYSOUT class and any job statement
information you need.
• If you chose LOCAL in the previous step, type the name of a local printer or writer name in the Local
Printer ID field. Job statement information is ignored.
7. Press Enter.
What happens next depends on your choice in step “5” on page 172. If you chose BATCH, see step
“7.a” on page 172. If you chose LOCAL, see step “7.b” on page 173.
a. If you chose BATCH, ISPF generates the JCL and displays the panel shown in Figure 112 on page
172, with the message JCL generated in the upper-right corner.

Menu RefList Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Hardcopy Utility JCL generated
More: +
Process option 1 1. Print and keep data set or member
2. Print and delete sequential data sets
3. Exit without submitting job

Enter End command to submit job.

Data Set Name . . 'MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE(TESTA)'

Volume Serial . . . . (If not cataloged)
Data Set Password . . (If password protected)

Batch Sysout class . . . A

Print Mode . . . . . . : BATCH (Batch or Local)
Local printer ID or
writer-name . . . . . :
Local Sysout class . . :

Job statement information:

Command ===>
F1=HELP F2= F3=END F4=DATASETS F5=FIND F6=CHANGE
F9=SWAP F10=LEFT F11=RIGHT F12=SUBMIT

Figure 112. Hardcopy Utility panel - after JCL generation (ISRUHCJP)

At this point you can either:

• Cancel the job by typing the CANCEL command in the Option field and pressing Enter.
• Submit the job by typing the END command and pressing Enter. ISPF displays this message at the
bottom of the panel:

IKJ56250I JOB jobname(jobid) SUBMITTED

***

172 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Hardcopy utility (option 3.6)

Press Enter. For more information about BATCH printing, see “Additional batch printing
information” on page 173.
• Specify another data set name for printing.
b. If you chose LOCAL, ISPF calls the PRINTDS TSO command processor to print the data set on the
specified local printer.
A message is displayed in the short message area to show that PRINTDS has accepted the request.
At this point, you can:
• Specify another option and press Enter
• Enter the END command
• Enter the CANCEL command
8. If you entered CANCEL or END, ISPF determines the next panel you see as follows:
• If you entered the Hardcopy utility from the ISPF Primary Option Menu or through the jump function
(=), ISPF displays the ISPF Primary Option Menu.
• If you entered the Hardcopy utility from the Utility Selection Panel, ISPF returns you to that panel.

Additional batch printing information

When you enter the desired information and press Enter, ISPF generates JCL that contains the job
statement operands and a job step that prints the specified data set, using the IBM IEBGENER utility.
Note:
1. IEBGENER does not support packed data. If you try to print packed data, you may get unwanted
results. IEBGENER prints the data set one logical record per print line. If the logical record length is
greater than the printer width, the logical record is truncated.
2. ISPF does not unpack data automatically before printing it. Therefore, if you need to unpack data
before printing it, edit the data set and enter the PACK primary command with the OFF operand. See
z/OS ISPF Edit and Edit Macros for more information about the PACK command.
Once the JCL for the first job step is generated, the job statement operands are shown for information
aboutly. They are no longer highlighted and you cannot type over them, since the job statement has
already been generated. You can then select another data set name to cause another job step to be
generated.

Using the TSO/E information center facility

If the TSO/E Information Center Facility is installed, your installation can allow ISPF to display the panel
shown in Figure 113 on page 174.

Utilities (option 3) 173

Download data set to workstation utility (option 3.7)

Hardcopy Utility

Process option 1 1. Print and keep data set or member

2. Print and delete sequential data set

Data Set Name . . . .

Volume Serial . . . . (If not cataloged)
Data Set Password . . (If password protected data set)

Printer location . .

Printer format . . .

Number of copies . .

Command ===>
F1=HELP F2= F3=END F4=DATASETS F5=FIND F6=CHANGE
F9=SWAP F10=LEFT F11=RIGHT F12=SUBMIT

Figure 113. Hardcopy Utility panel - with the TSO/E information center facility installed (ISRUHCPI)

Follow these steps to use the TSO/E Information Center Facility to submit your print jobs:
1. Choose one of the options listed at the top of the panel and type its code, PK or PD, in the Option field.
2. Enter a fully qualified data set name and member name.
You must specify at least the low-level qualifier, such as LIST. If you enter your user prefix as part of
the data set name, you must enclose the complete data set name in quotes. However, if you omit the
user prefix and quotes, your user prefix is automatically added to the beginning of the data set name.
3. If the data set is not cataloged, enter the volume serial.
4. If your data set is password-protected, enter the password in the Data Set Password field. For more
information about data set passwords, see the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF
User's Guide Vol I.
5. You can either leave the Printer location field blank or enter the location ID of the printer to be used.
The location ID is assigned by your installation.
You can also enter a partial location name followed by an asterisk (*).
6. You can either leave the "Printer format" field blank or enter the format ID of the printer to be used.
The format ID is assigned by your installation.
You can also enter a partial format name followed by an asterisk (*). If your printer location and format
entries do not identify a specific printer, a printer selection list is displayed. From this list, which is
similar to a member selection list, you can select a printer.
7. Specify the number of copies you want.
8. Press Enter.
The values entered in the fields on this panel are passed directly to the TSO/E Information Center
Facility for processing.

Download data set to workstation utility (option 3.7)

The Download Data Set to Workstation utility allows you to upload or download data sets from the host
environment to your workstation. This utility is also used to download the WSA installation files needed to
create a workstation connection.
Before you install the workstation utility:

174 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Download data set to workstation utility (option 3.7)

Review the information in the topic "Installing the Client/Server component" in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide
Vol I before you use this utility to install the WSA for the first time.
When you select option 7 from the Utility Selection Panel, ISPF displays the Download Data Set to
Workstation panel (ISPUDL). This panel has two options:
1. Download the ISPF C/S component to your workstation
2. Download or upload an ISPF library, PDS or sequential data set

Download ISPF C/S component

This option enables you to download the ISPF Workstation Agent (WSA) component installation program
to your desktop workstation. After downloading the WSA and installing it, you can use ISPF on a z/OS host
through GUI windows on your workstation and use your workstation connection in distributed editing. See
the topic "Installing the Client/Server component" in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I for a description of
the download and installation processes.
When you select option 1 from the Download Data Set to Workstation panel, ISPF displays the ISPF
Client/Server Component Download panel shown in Figure 114 on page 175.

Client/Server Component Download

Download methods
1. FTP (requires workstation FTP server)
2. ISPF C/S (requires workstation connection)
3. Manual

Workstation Type
1. Windows 3. AIX 5. Reserved
2. Reserved 4. Reserved

Directory to copy file to:

Data Set to copy file from:

Enter "/" to select option

Create directory to which the file is to be copied.

Command ===>
F1=HELP F2= F3=END F4=DATASETS F5=FIND F6=CHANGE
F9=SWAP F10=LEFT F11=RIGHT F12=SUBMIT

Figure 114. ISPF Client/Server Component Download panel (ISPWSD01)

The Client/Server Component Download panel enables you to choose the download method and
workstation type you want to use to put the WSA installation program on your desktop.

Client/Server Component Download panel

The Client/Server Component Download panel contains these fields:
Download methods
You have three choices for downloading the WSA installation program.
FTP (requires workstation FTP server)
Download using FTP. ISPF invokes the host FTP client to connect with the FTP server on your
workstation and transfer the WSA installation program. This option can be used to download the
WSA installation program for the first time. It is described in the topic "Installing the Client/Server
component" in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
ISPF C/S (requires existing workstation connection)
Download using ISPF Client/Server. If you already have a workstation agent installed on your
workstation, you can use the built-in file transfer services to download a new or updated WSA
installation program. The file must be downloaded in binary format.

Utilities (option 3) 175

Download data set to workstation utility (option 3.7)

Manual
ISPF tells you the name of the file you need to copy. You can copy it with any method you prefer as
long as you maintain the data integrity of the WSA installation program. The file must be
downloaded in binary format. This option can be used to download the WSA installation program
for the first time. It is described in the topic "Installing the Client/Server component" in the z/OS
ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Workstation type
The workstation agent runs on different workstation platforms and you must indicate which platform
you have, so that you receive the correct version.
1. Windows
2. Reserved
3. AIX
4. Reserved
5. Reserved
Directory to copy file to
Specify a directory on your workstation where you want to store the WSA installation program. You
can specify a full path name or a relative directory, or leave this field blank. If you leave it blank, the
download is made to your home directory (in the case of FTP downloads) or the current directory (in
the case of client/server downloads). If you specify a relative directory (one that does not start with a
drive letter or slash character) the directory is relative to the FTP home directory or the client/server
current directory.
Data set to copy file from
The host data set that contains the WSA installation program. This value varies depending on the
naming convention that was used when ISPF was installed.
Create directory to which the file is to be copied
If you want ISPF to create the directory on your workstation before copying the WSA installation
program, enter a "/" in this field.

ISPF client/server (c/s) download

When you select choice 2 "ISPF C/S (requires workstation connection)" under Download methods on the
ISPF Client/Server Component Download panel, you are choosing to use the ISPF Client/Server method of
downloading. This method is used to obtain updated versions of the WSA and can only be used if you have
already installed and initiated the WSA and established a workstation connection. If this is the first time
you are downloading the WSA, use the FTP or Manual methods of downloading, instead.
If you do not already have a workstation connection (with or without GUI display) established, ISPF
displays the ISPF Client/Server Installation Notice panel shown in Figure 115 on page 177.

176 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Download data set to workstation utility (option 3.7)

┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
─ │ ISPWSD03 Client/Server Installation Notice │
I │ │
│ A workstation connection is required to download a new Client/Server │
1 │ component using workstation agent file transfer services. │
2 │ │
│ Do you wish to start a workstation connection now? │
│ 1. Yes, start workstation connection now and continue with download │
│ 2. No, do not start workstation connection │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ Command ===> │
O │ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward │
│ F9=Swap F12=Cancel │
F ⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 115. ISPF Client/Server Installation Notice (ISPWSD03)

The field on this panel is:

Do you wish to start a workstation connection now?
This field enables you to start a workstation connection directly from the panel. This assumes, of
course, that you have a previous copy of the WSA installed on your workstation.
1. Yes, start workstation connection now and continue with download.
Select this option when you know you have a Workstation Agent installed and you have initiated it
on your workstation.
2. No, do not start workstation connection
Select this option when you know that a prerequisite for establishing a workstation connection has
not been met and you want to return to the Client/Server Component Download panel.
If you have already established a workstation connection (see “Initiate the workstation connection” on
page 54) and you select this download method, the Client/Server transfer service is immediately invoked
to copy the WSA installation program to your workstation. A successful transfer results in the panel shown
in Figure 116 on page 177.

┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
─ │ ISPF Client/Server Component Install Program │ ──
I │ │
│ The ISPF Client/Server Component workstation install program has been │
1 │ copied to your workstation in directory: │
2 │ │
│ C:\TEMP │
│ │
│ in directory: │
│ │
│ End your workstation connection, close the active workstation agent, │
│ and complete the installation by running the install program ISPFINST │
│ on your workstation in the directory specified. The program is a self │
│ extracting executable that will result in additional files being │
│ generated on your workstation. │
│ │
│ Do you wish to end your workstation connection now? │
│ 1. Yes, end workstation connection now │
│ 2. No, do not end workstation connection now │
│ │
│ Command ===> │
O │ F1=HELP F2= F3=END F4=DATASETS F5=FIND │
│ F6=CHANGE F9=SWAP F10=LEFT F11=RIGHT F12=SUBMIT │
F ⋘───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 116. ISPF Client/Server Component Install Program panel (ISPWSD06)

Utilities (option 3) 177

Download data set to workstation utility (option 3.7)

Running the installation program (ISPFINST)

After you have downloaded the Workstation Agent Installation program, resume the installation by
running the program called ISPFINST.EXE (ispfinst on UNIX platforms). This is a self-extracting
executable program that generates additional necessary files on your workstation. See the topic
"Installing the Client/Server component" in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I for a description of the
Workstation Agent installation process.

Download/upload data set

The final option on the Download Data Set to Workstation (option 3.7) panel is called "Data Set —
Download/upload ISPF library, partitioned, or seq data set". This option provides a panel-driven interface
to the ISPF FILEXFER service, enabling you to transfer data between the host and the workstation. This is
a manually controlled alternative to using the Workstation Tool Integration (see “Workstation tool
integration” on page 60).
Selecting option 2 displays the panel shown in Figure 117 on page 178:

Menu RefList RefMode Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Download/Upload Data Set To/From Workstation

ISPF Library:
Project . . . MYPROJ
Group . . . . DEV . . . . . . . . .
Type . . . . SOURCE
Member . . . (Blank or pattern for member selection list)

Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set:

Data Set Name . . .
Volume Serial . . . (If not cataloged)

Workstation File:
File Name . . . . .

Transfer Option Options

1. Download to workstation Generate statistics on upload
2. Upload from workstation Transfer in text mode
Replace existing member/file
Command ===>
F1=HELP F2= F3=END F4=DATASETS F5=FIND F6=CHANGE
F9=SWAP F10=LEFT F11=RIGHT F12=SUBMIT

Figure 117. ISPF data set panel (ISPUDLDS)

Use the Download or Upload selections to indicate whether you want to download host data to the
workstation, or upload workstation data to the host. Enter 1 for "download to workstation". Enter 2 for
"upload from workstation".
You can transfer data from either PDS or sequential host data sets. The host data set must exist before
attempting a transfer, but a PDS member is created if it does not already exist. Workstation files need not
exist before downloading data from the host, but the specified directory must be there.
For downloading only, you can specify an asterisk (*) character in the workstation file name. ISPF
substitutes the member name of the data being downloaded for the *. This enables you to select multiple
members from the member list to be downloaded as separate files.
"Generate Statistics on Upload" indicates whether ISPF member statistics should be generated when a
workstation file is uploaded to a member of a PDS. Statistics are only generated when the host data set is
record format F or V.
The "Transfer in Text mode" field determines whether the file transfer is done in text mode (with ASCII to
EBCDIC translation) or in binary mode (without any translation). When transferring in text Mode, the ispf
filexfer service provides a one-to-one mapping of all 256 code points between the host code page and the
workstation code page. Most other file transfer utilities (for example, ftp) only provide a one-to-one
mapping of displayable characters.

178 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Outlist utility (option 3.8)

Outlist utility (option 3.8)

This utility gives you the ability to browse, print, delete, or requeue job output that is in a held SYSOUT
queue. When you select this option, a panel is displayed (Figure 118 on page 179) that allows you to
select an option and enter the appropriate operands.

Menu Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Outlist Utility
More: +
L List job names/id(s) via the TSO STATUS command
D Delete job output from SYSOUT hold queue
P Print job output and delete from SYSOUT hold queue
R Requeue job output to a new output class
blank Display job output

For Job to be selected:

Jobname . .
Class . . .
JobID . . .

For Job to be requeued:

New Output class . .

For Job to be printed:

Printer Carriage Control . . (A for ANSI )
(M for machine )
Option ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 118. Outlist Utility panel (ISRUOLP1)

Outlist Utility panel action bar

The Outlist Utility panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu
For more information, see the details about the Menu Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Utilities
For more information, see the details about the Utilities Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Help
The Help pull-down offers you these choices:
1
General
2
Listing the status of jobs
3
Deleting the output of a held job
4
Printing the output of a held job
5
Requeueing the output of a held job
6
Displaying the Output of a held job
7
Appendices

Utilities (option 3) 179

Outlist utility (option 3.8)

8
Index

Outlist Utility panel fields

The fields on this panel are:
Jobname
The held SYSOUT job. It is required for all options except option L.
Class
The SYSOUT hold queue. If you omit the CLASS operand, all SYSOUT queues are searched for the
specified job.
JobID
Required only if more than one job exists with the same job name.
New Output class
When requeuing a job (option R), enter the new SYSOUT hold class here.
Printer Carriage Control
When printing a data set (option P), enter a value here that corresponds to the type of carriage control
characters in the data set. Valid values are:
A
If the data contains American National Standard Institute (ANSI) carriage control characters.
M
If the data contains machine control characters.
Blank
If the data contains no carriage control characters.
The record formats for the corresponding data sets are FBA, FBM, and FB, respectively.

Outlist utility options

These topics explain the options listed at the top of the Outlist Utility panel:
• “L — list job names/ID(s) via the TSO STATUS command” on page 180
• “D — delete job output from SYSOUT hold queue” on page 180
• “P — print job output and delete from SYSOUT hold queue” on page 180
• “R — requeue job output to a new output class” on page 181
• “Blank — display job output” on page 181

L — list job names/ID(s) via the TSO STATUS command

If you select option L, a list of job names and job IDs is displayed. If you leave the job name blank, or if the
job name is your user ID plus one identifying character, the status is listed for all jobs having job names
consisting of your user ID followed by that identifying character. If you supply any other job name, the
status for that exact job is displayed.
The list of job names is displayed on the lower portion of the panel. If the list is too long to fit on the
screen, three asterisks are displayed on the last line of the screen. You can display the remainder of the
list by pressing Enter.

D — delete job output from SYSOUT hold queue

If you select option D, the held output for a specific job is deleted from the specified SYSOUT queue.

P — print job output and delete from SYSOUT hold queue

If you select option P, the held output for a specific job is removed from the SYSOUT queue and placed in
an ISPF-defined data set for printing. You can choose the record format for this data set by putting an
entry in the Printer Carriage Control field.

180 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Command table utility (option 3.9)

An optional print utility exit can be installed by your system programmer. If this exit is installed, it may
cause the Outlist utility's response to differ from the descriptions provided here. See z/OS ISPF Planning
and Customizing for more information about the print utility exit.
Another factor that can affect the performance of the Outlist utility is whether the TSO/E Information
Center Facility is installed. If the TSO/E Information Center Facility is installed, your installation can
optionally allow ISPF to display a panel for submitting the TSO/E Information Center Facility information
with the print request. See Figure 204 on page 327 for an example of this panel and “Using the TSO/E
information center facility” on page 173 for information about the fields on this panel.
If the TSO/E Information Center Facility is not installed, the Outlist utility displays the panel shown in
Figure 203 on page 320 when you press Enter. Use this panel to tell ISPF how and where the job output is
to be printed. This option does not honor multiple copies for output on hold queue. To print multiple
copies use option R.
ISPF uses temporary data sets named prefix.userid.SPFnnn.OUTLIST (if your data set prefix in your TSO
user profile is different from your TSO userid) or userid.SPFnnn.OUTLIST (if your prefix and userid are the
same), where nnn is a number between 100 and 999.
Attention: If you keep or use all data sets through 999, ISPF resets to 100 and uses the existing
data sets. Also, ISPF can use the data sets that you allocate using the temporary data set naming
convention.

R — requeue job output to a new output class

If you select option R, the held output for a specific job is requeued to another SYSOUT class from the
specified SYSOUT queue. You must enter the new SYSOUT class on the panel in the "New Output class"
field. You can use this option to print output with multiple copies by requeuing to a SYSOUT class
predefined to print multiple copies.

Blank — display job output

If you leave the Option field blank, the held output for the specified job is displayed in Browse mode. You
can use all Browse commands. The data remains in the SYSOUT queue. When you enter the END or
RETURN command to end Browse, the Outlist Utility panel is displayed again, and you can then choose to
print, requeue, or delete the job output.

Command table utility (option 3.9)

The Command Table utility (option 3.9) enables you to create or change ISPF application command
tables. When you select this option, a panel is displayed (Figure 119 on page 182) to prompt you for an
application ID. The name of the command table is then derived by adding CMDS to the application ID. If
the table exists in the table input library, ISPTLIB, it is displayed and can be modified. If the table does
not exist in the table input library, a new table is generated.
The command table displays the search order of commands for a particular logical screen. The order is
from top to bottom of those commands displayed. The "User table" and "Site table" fields are blank if no
values are set for them in the ISPF Configuration table, or if values have been set but the tables do not
exist in the "ISPTLIB" concatenation.
You cannot use this utility to change a command table that is currently in use. Command table ISPCMDS,
the system command table, is always in use by the Dialog Manager component. If you enter ISP in the
Application ID field, ISPF displays the ISPCMDS command table in read-only mode.
While you are using this utility to change a command table, the table cannot be used for other purposes.
For example, you cannot use split screen and select a function with NEWAPPL(XYZ) if you are changing
command table XYZCMDS.

Utilities (option 3) 181

Command table utility (option 3.9)

Menu Help
─ ┌─────────────────────────────── Commands ────────────────────────────────┐
I │ ISPUCMA Command Table Utility │
│ │
1 │ Specifications Command table search order │
│ Application ID . . ISR Application table . : ISR │
2 │ Enter "/" to select option User table 1 . . . . : USER │
│ Show description field User table 2 . . . . : │
3 │ User table 3 . . . . : │
4 │ Site table 1 . . . . : SITE │
│ Site table 2 . . . . : │
5 │ Site table 3 . . . . : │
6 │ System table . . . . : ISP │
7 │ │
8 │ If no application ID is specified, the current application ID will be │
9 │ used. The name of the command table to be processed is formed by │
1 │ prefixing the application id to the string 'CMDS'. For example: │
1 │ Application ID . . TST results in a command table name of 'TSTCMDS'. │
1 │ │
1 │ Command ===> │
1 │ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward │
O │ F9=Swap F12=Cancel │
⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 119. Command Table Utility panel (ISPUCMA)

Command Table Utility panel fields

The fields on the Command Table Utility panel function as follows:
Application ID
Contains the name of an application for which you want to define commands.
Show description field
Allows you to display the descriptions as well as the commands and definitions.
The command table for the named application is displayed on a Command Table editing panel (Figure 120
on page 182). This panel can be scrolled up and down using the scroll commands.

File Menu Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Update TSTCMDS Row 1 to 4 of 4

Insert (I), delete (D), repeat (R) and edit (E) command entries.
Enter END command to save changes or CANCEL to end without saving.

Verb T Action
SORT 0 SELECT PGM(PQRSORT) PARM(&ZPARM)
PREPARE 4
QUIT 2 ALIAS END
EXPLAIN 4
******************************* Bottom of data ********************************

Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 120. Command table editing panel (ISPUCMD)

The column headings on the panel are:

182 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Command table utility (option 3.9)

Verb
The command verb, which is the name of the command you are defining in the command table. A
command verb must be 2 to 8 characters long, inclusive, and must begin with an alphabetic character.
The content of this column is assigned to the ZCTVERB system variable.
T (truncation)
The minimum number of characters that you must enter to find a match with the command verb. If
this number is zero or equal to the length of the command verb, you must enter the complete
command verb. For example, in Figure 120 on page 182 the PREPARE command has a truncation
value of 4. Therefore, for the TST application used as the example in the figure, only the first four
letters, PREP, must be entered to call this command. The content of this column is assigned to the
ZCTTRUNC system variable.
Action
The actual coding of the action to be carried out when you enter the command. The action length
must not be greater than 240 characters. The content of this column is assigned to the ZCTACT
system variable.
To enter or edit the coding for the action:
1. Enter the E command table line command to display the Extended Command Entry panel
(ISPUCMX).
2. Type the required coding in the Action lines.
Normally, any text you type in lowercase is translated to uppercase before it is saved.
To define some of the parameters in lowercase select the Allow mixed-case in Action field option
on the Extended Command Entry panel. The case of the text you type is not translated and is saved
as you input it.
Note that when you select the Allow mixed-case in Action field option:
a. The first word must be input in uppercase.
b. If you use &ZPARM to obtain parameters from the command line, the parameters may be
translated to uppercase (regardless of the setting of the Allow mixed-case in Action field
option).
3. Optionally, type a brief description of the purpose of the command in the Description lines.
4. Press PF3 to return to the Command Table Editing panel.
Note:
1. Do not use ACTIONS, CANCEL, CRETRIEV, CURSOR, EXIT, PRINT, PRINTG, PRINTHI, PRINTL,
PRINTLHI, RESIZE, RETF, RETP, RETRIEVE, SPLIT, SPLITV, SWAP, WINDOW, or WS as keywords in
the Action column. These keywords are intended only for use in the system command table
distributed with ISPF. They are not intended for use in application command tables.
2. Take care with ACTIONs that use ZPARM, as the ISPF parser will add a matching parenthesis if one
appears to be missing. Consider an entry of "SELECT CMD(%CMD &ZPARM) NEWAPPL(ISR)". If
"(XYZ" is passed then the command will receive "(XYZ) NEWAPPL(ISR)" as a parameter.
The valid actions are:
SELECT
Causes the selected dialog (command, program, or selection panel) to be given control
immediately. See z/OS ISPF Dialog Developer's Guide and Reference for more information about
the SELECT statement and its keywords.
ALIAS
Allows one command verb to carry out the action defined for another. For example, in Figure 120
on page 182, QUIT is an alias for END. Therefore, for the TST application used as the example in
the figure, entering QUIT causes the same action to occur as entering END.
An ALIAS command must be defined before the command for which it is an ALIAS.

Utilities (option 3) 183

Command table utility (option 3.9)

PASSTHRU
Causes the command to be passed through to the dialog as if it had not been found in the
command table.
SETVERB
Causes the command to be passed through to the dialog, with the command verb stored
separately from the operands.
NOP
Causes the command to be inoperative. An inactive command message is displayed.
Blank
Causes the command table entry to be ignored. ISPF continues to search for additional entries for
the same command verb. If the command is not found in either the application command table or
the system command table, an invalid command message is displayed.
xxxxx
A variable name, beginning with an ampersand (&), allows dynamic specification of the command
action.
DESCRIPTION
An optional, brief description of the action the command verb is to perform. Since this column is
offset three spaces under the Action column, the description length must not be greater than 80
characters. The content of this column is assigned to the ZCTDESC system variable.
For a new table, this panel initially contains dummy entries with all fields shown as underscores. The
underscores are pad characters and need not be blanked out. However, any null entries where at least the
verb contains all underscores are automatically deleted when the table is saved.

Scrolling a command table

You can scroll the table entries, using the ISPF UP and DOWN scroll commands, and change one or more
entries simply by typing over them.

Saving a command table

The END command causes the table to be saved in the table output library, ISPTABL, and ends the utility.

Canceling a command table

The CANCEL command ends the command table display without saving the table.

Using command table line commands

The line commands you can enter at the left of any entry (by typing over the four quotation marks) are
described in these topics:
• “D — deleting lines” on page 184
• “E — editing lines” on page 185
• “I — inserting lines” on page 185
• “R — repeating lines” on page 185
• “V — viewing lines” on page 185
Multiple line commands or changes can be entered in a single interaction. Line commands followed by a
number, such as D3, are repeated that number of times. The lines are processed in the order in which they
appear on the screen. Any line commands or changes that are entered concurrently with the END
command are processed before the table is saved.

D — deleting lines
The D command deletes one or n lines

184 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Format specifications utility (option 3.11)

1
D n

E — editing lines
The E command displays the Extended Command Entry panel (ISPUCMX) where you can edit the action
and description fields for a line.

I — inserting lines
The I command inserts one or n lines.

1
I n

The inserted lines contain underscores (pad characters) in all field positions.

R — repeating lines
The R command repeats a line one or n times. The repeated lines contain underscores (pad characters) in
the Verb and T (truncation) fields, but the Action and Description fields are copied from the line on which
the R command was entered.

1
R n

V — viewing lines
The V command views one or n lines. You can look at the entire command entry including the command
action and description fields, but you cannot change them.

1
V n

Format specifications utility (option 3.11)

The Format Specifications utility (option 3.11) is provided to support the IBM 5550 terminal using the
Double-Byte Character Set (DBCS). It is used to maintain formats that are used when viewing, browsing,
and editing to display data sets that contain predefined formatted records.
The purpose of a format is to structure data from a record into fields, and to define the order these fields
are to be physically displayed on the screen when you are viewing, browsing, and editing.
When you select this option, a panel is displayed (Figure 121 on page 186) that allows you to add, copy,
delete, or update a format. You can also display the format list.

Utilities (option 3) 185

Format specifications utility (option 3.11)

Menu Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Format Specifications
More: +
A Add a new format
C Copy formats
D Delete a format
U Update format
L or BLANK Display format list

Format Name . . .

For COPY operations, specify the following:

From Format . . . (Blank for format list, * for all formats)

From Table . . . (Default is "ISRFORM" )

Note: The Format Utility is provided for support of the IBM 5550 terminal
Option ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 121. Format Specifications panel (ISRFM01)

Format Specifications panel action bar

The Format Specifications panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu
For more information, see the details about the Menu Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Utilities
For more information, see the details about the Utilities Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Help
The Help pull-down introduces formats and provides information about how to add, copy, delete,
update, and display formats.

Format Specifications panel fields

The fields on this panel are:
Format Name
The name of the format that you want to add, delete, or update. When copying a format (option C), this
is the name you want the copied format stored under.
From Format
When copying a format (option C), you can:
• Enter the name of a format you want to copy
• Enter an asterisk (*) to copy all formats
• Leave the field blank to display a copy format selection list.
See Figure 123 on page 188 for an example of a Copy Format Selection List display.
From Table
When copying a format (option C), you can:
• Enter the name of a table from which you want to copy a format
• Leave the field blank if you want to copy a format from the ISRFORM table.
Note: The ISRFORM table is the default location in which all of your user-defined formats are
stored. If you have not yet defined any formats, this table will be empty.

186 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Format specifications utility (option 3.11)

Format Specifications panel options

These topics describe the options shown at the top of the Format Specifications panel:
• “A — add a new format” on page 187
• “C — copy formats” on page 188
• “D — delete a format” on page 189
• “U — update a format” on page 189
• “L or BLANK — display format list” on page 189

A — add a new format

If you specify option A and a format name, the Format Definition panel (Figure 122 on page 187) is
displayed.

Format Definition (FORM01)

More: +

Field Start Field Field Field Start Field Field

Number Column Length Type Number Column Length Type
1 00000 00 2 00000 00
3 00000 00 4 00000 00
5 00000 00 6 00000 00
7 00000 00 8 00000 00
9 00000 00 10 00000 00
11 00000 00 12 00000 00
13 00000 00 14 00000 00
15 00000 00 16 00000 00
17 00000 00 18 00000 00
19 00000 00 20 00000 00

Field Number: Identifies the field position on the screen.

Start Column: From 1 to 32760; Specifies column position in the record.
field Length: From 1 to 71; Fields must not overlap.
Field Type : E - single-byte, D - double-byte, M - mixed data

Enter the END command to exit and save the format.

Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 122. Format Definition panel (ISRFM02)

A field definition includes:

Field Number
The number of the field for which you are defining a format. You can define up to 20 fields.
Start Column
Starting column position in the record.
Field Length
Field length in bytes; the maximum is 71 bytes.
Field Type
The type of data that can be entered in the field. Valid types are:
E
EBCDIC (single-byte)
D
DBCS (double-byte)
M
Mixed data
Note: All three of these field types can contain extended graphics characters. CAPS ON processing is
not possible because of context dependencies. Therefore, it is ignored when you are editing formatted
data.

Utilities (option 3) 187

Format specifications utility (option 3.11)

The format definition information applies to both existing records and inserted records in a data set.
Note: It is recommended that you avoid using STD or COBOL formats with numbered data. The results
can be different from using formats with unnumbered data. If you must use numbered data, do not define
the columns the sequence numbers will appear in, or define an EBCDIC or mixed data field for them.

C — copy formats
If you specify option C on the Format Specifications panel:
• If you specify both an asterisk (*) in the From Format field and a table name other than ISRFORM in the
From Table field, all formats stored in the "From" table are copied to ISRFORM.
Note: If you specify a table name in the From Table field, and that table does not have the same format
as ISRFORM, a severe error occurs.
• If you specify both a format name and a "From" format, the format is copied. If you specified a "From"
table (other than ISRFORM), the format is copied from that table. Otherwise, the format is copied from
ISRFORM. The Format Definition panel for the newly created format, containing the currently defined
fields, is displayed. You can add, delete, and update field definitions. When you enter the END
command, the format definition is stored in ISRFORM under the format name you specified.
• If you specify a format name but no "From" format, the Copy Format Selection List panel (Figure 123 on
page 188) is displayed.
If you did not specify a "From" table, the formats listed are those stored in ISRFORM, the default format
table. Otherwise, the formats listed are those stored in the table you specified.
Note: The ISRFORM table is the default location in which all of your user-defined formats are stored. If
you have not yet defined any formats, the table will be empty and you will receive a "No formats found"
message.
You can select a format to copy by entering the S line command to the left of that format name. Other
commands you can enter are U (Update), R (Rename), D (Delete), SELECT (which is similar to S), SORT,
and LOCATE. See “Format selection list commands” on page 189 for a description of these commands.
The format is copied, and the Format Definition panel for the newly created format, containing the
currently defined fields, is displayed. You can add, delete, and update field definitions. When you enter
the END command, the format definition is stored in ISRFORM under the format name you specified on
the Format Specifications panel.
• If you specify neither a format name nor a "From" format, but you do specify a "From" table (other than
ISRFORM), the Copy Format Selection List panel is displayed. You can select one or more formats to
copy by entering the S line command to the left of each format names. Each of these formats is copied
under the same name from the specified "From" table to the ISRFORM table.
Note: If you do not specify option C but specify a name in the From Format field, the From Format field is
ignored.

Copy Format Selection List (ISRFORM) Row 1 to 4 of 4

Name Rename Created Last Modified ID
COMMON01 02/11/19 02/11/19 11:08 USERID
COMMON02 02/11/19 02/11/19 11:16 USERID
COMMON03 02/11/19 02/11/19 11:16 USERID
COMMON04 02/11/19 02/11/19 11:16 USERID
******************************* Bottom of data ********************************

⋮
Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F12=Cancel

Figure 123. Copy Format Selection List panel (ISRFM04)

188 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Format specifications utility (option 3.11)

D — delete a format
If you specify option D and a format name on the Format Specifications panel, the format is deleted.

U — update a format
If you specify option U and a format name on the Format Specification panel, the Format Definition panel
containing the currently defined fields is displayed. You can add, delete, and update field definitions.

L or BLANK — display format list

If you specify option L or leave the Option line blank on the Format Specifications panel, the Format
Selection List panel (Figure 124 on page 189) is displayed.

Format Selection List Row 1 to 4 of 4

Name Rename Created Last Modified ID
COMMON01 02/11/19 02/11/19 11:08 USERID
COMMON02 02/11/19 02/11/19 11:16 USERID
COMMON03 02/11/19 02/11/19 11:16 USERID
COMMON04 02/11/19 02/11/19 11:16 USERID
******************************* Bottom of data ********************************

⋮
Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F12=Cancel

Figure 124. Format Selection List panel (ISRFM03)

Format selection list commands

These topics describe the commands you can use on a Format Selection List panel:
• “Locating format names” on page 189
• “Renaming a format” on page 190
• “Sorting format names” on page 190
• “Updating or selecting a format” on page 190

Deleting a format
If you specify the D line command beside a format name, the format is deleted.

Locating format names

The LOCATE command is another useful tool, especially if you have a long format list. To use the LOCATE
command, ensure that the list is sorted by name. Next, enter the LOCATE command on the Command line.
The syntax is:

LOCATE name

where:
name
The name of the format you want to find.
For example, this command would find a format named FORM03:

LOCATE FORM03

Utilities (option 3) 189

SuperC utility (option 3.12)

If the format exists, the entry for the specified format name appears as the second line following the
header lines. If the specified name is not found, the existing format name that would immediately
precede the specified name appears as the first line following the header lines.

Renaming a format
If you specify the R line command beside a format name, you must also specify its new name in the
Rename field before you press Enter. If you do not, the Enter required field message appears in
the upper-right corner of the screen and the cursor moves to the Rename field.

Sorting format names

You can sort the name list on this panel by entering the SORT command on the Command line. The syntax
of the SORT command is:

SORT NAME

TIME

where:
NAME
Sort by name.
TIME
Sort by time last modified.
For example, this command would sort a format selection list by time:

SORT TIME

Updating or selecting a format

If you specify the U or S line command beside a format name, the Format Definition panel containing the
currently defined fields is displayed. You can add, delete, and update field definitions.
You can specify that multiple operations be done at the same time. However, if you specify U or S with
other line commands, any commands after the first U or S are ignored.
The SELECT command provides you with another way to specify a format. This command is entered on
the Command line.
The syntax of the SELECT command is:

SELECT name

where:
name
The name of the format you want to select.
If the format exists, the Format Definition panel containing the currently defined fields is displayed. You
can add, delete, and update field definitions.
If no format exists for that name, a new format is created, and the Format Definition panel is displayed to
allow you to define fields.

SuperC utility (option 3.12)

Note: For an introduction to the SuperC and SuperCE utilities (options 3.12 and 3.13), see Appendix A,
“SuperC reference,” on page 443.

190 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 SuperC utility (option 3.12)

The SuperC utility (option 3.12) is a dialog that uses the SuperC program to compare data sets of
unlimited size and record length at the file, line, word, or byte level. The panel shown in Figure 125 on
page 191 is used to specify the name of a new data set.
Note: In this context, a new data set is an updated version of a previously created data set, such as a data
set in your private library that has been modified but has not yet been promoted.

Menu RefList Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
SuperC Compare Utility - New Data Set

Specify "New" Data Set to be compared, then press the ENTER key.
More: +
Project . . .
Group . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type . . . .
Member . . . (Blank or pattern for member selection list,
"*" for all members)

"New" Other Partitioned, Sequential or VSAM Data Set:

Data Set Name . . .
Volume Serial . . . (If not cataloged)

Profile DS Name . . .
Data Set Password . . (If New data set password protected)

Enter "/" to select option Execution Mode Output Mode

Mixed Mode 1 1. Foreground 1 1. View
Bypass selection list 2. Batch 2. Browse
Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 125. SuperC Utility panel (ISRSSNEW)

This panel requires only the names of the input data sets and a foreground or batch mode setting.
Note:
1. For DBCS searches and compares to function properly, ISPF must be invoked with the JAPANESE
keyword, on a terminal that supports DBCS, and the MIXED process option must be supplied to
SuperC.
2. When a member of a PDSE version 2 data set that is configured for member generations is specified as
the old or new data set, the current generation of the member is used for the comparison.

SuperC Compare Utility panel action bar

The SuperC Utility panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu
For more information, see the details about the Menu Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
RefList
For information about referral lists, see the topic about Using Personal Data Set Lists and Library Lists
in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Utilities
For more information, see the details about the Utilities Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Help
The Help pull-down provides general information about SuperC topics, as well as information about
specifying the data sets and options and interpreting listings.

Utilities (option 3) 191

SuperC utility (option 3.12)

SuperC Compare Utility panel fields

All the fields on this panel are explained in the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF
User's Guide Vol I, except:
Profile DSN
The name of an optional data set that can contain a compare type, listing type, sequence numbers
setting, Browse setting, process options, and process statements. All these elements, when combined
in one data set or member, are called a profile. See “Profiles and defaults - activate profiles and
defaults” on page 208 for information about using the SuperCE utility (option 3.13) to create a profile
data set.
The listing type and sequence numbers setting of the profile are copied onto the panel used to specify
the old data set name (Figure 126 on page 193), but can be typed over or blanked out. However, other
elements of the profile are in effect, even though they are not shown on the panel.
Mixed Mode
Select this field to have SuperC scan and parse the input data set lines for DBCS text strings.
Note: Mixed Mode is not valid for the File or Byte compare.
Bypass Selection List
When a member pattern is entered in the PDS Member List field or the member name portion of the
data set field (such as MY.DATA.SET(pattern)), selecting this field causes SuperC to process all
members matching that pattern without displaying a member selection list. Leaving this field blank
causes the member list to be displayed.
Execution Mode
The processing mode you want to use when comparing the data sets. Choose one of these:
1
Foreground. After the old data set panel and member selection, if any, are completed, foreground
mode compares the new and old data sets and stores the results in the data set specified in the
Listing DS Name field, which you can browse at the terminal.
2
Batch. After the old data set panel and the member list, if any, are completed, batch mode causes
the display of the SuperC Utility - Submit Batch Jobs panel, so you can specify job card and print
disposition information or edit the JCL. Then, the batch job is submitted to compare the new and
old data sets. See “Submitting a SuperC job in batch mode” on page 196 for more information.
Note: You cannot specify a data set password in batch mode. If your data sets are password
protected, use foreground mode.
Output Mode
The output mode you want to use when displaying the listing file. Choose one of these:
1
View. This enables the listing file to be displayed in view mode. All View functions are enabled in
this mode.
2
Browse. This enables the listing file to be displayed in the browse mode. All Browse functions are
enabled in this mode.
3
Eview. This option only appears on non-English panels. It operates exactly the same as View
except that Superc is invoked with an English language constants module. All titles and headings
are in English. This facilitates use of hiliting of Superc listings on non-DBCS terminals.
When you complete the New Data Set panel and press Enter, ISPF displays the panel shown in Figure 126
on page 193. Of the five fields shown at the bottom of the panel (Volume Serial, Listing DS Name, Data Set
Password, Listing Type, and Sequence Numbers), all except Listing Type may not appear, depending on
the mode you choose (foreground or batch) and the contents of the profile data set. Also, if you request a
member list or specify an asterisk (*) in the Member field on the new data set panel, ISPF does not display
a Member field on the old data set panel.

192 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 SuperC utility (option 3.12)

Note: In this context, an old data set is a base version of a data set, such as a data set in a production
library.

Menu RefList Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
SuperC Compare Utility - Old Data Set

Specify "Old" Data Set to be compared, then press the ENTER key to compare to
"New" Data set . . : MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE
More: +
Project . . . MYPROJ
Group . . . . TEST . . . . . . . . .
Type . . . . SOURCE
Member . . .

"Old" other Partitioned, Sequential or VSAM Data Set:

Data Set Name . . .
Volume Serial . . . (If not cataloged)

Listing DS Name . . . SUPERC.LIST

Data Set Password . . (If Old data set password protected)

Listing Type . . . . 1 1. Delta 2. CHNG 3. Long 4. OVSUM 5. Nolist

Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 126. SuperC Utility - Old Data Set panel (ISRSSOLD)

Specify the name of an old data set. The type of old data set that you can specify depends on the type of
new data set you specified on the previous panel. For example, you can compare:
• A complete new PDS to a complete old PDS
• A new sequential data set to:
– An old sequential data set
– An old membered PDS
• A new membered PDS to an old sequential data set.
In this context, the term membered PDS refers to a PDS for which a single member has been specified,
such as:

'USERID.TEST.SCRIPT(NEWDATA)'

SuperC treats a membered PDS as a sequential data set because the comparison is done on a one-to-one
basis. However, SuperC cannot compare a sequential data set to a complete PDS because it cannot
compare one data set to more than one member of another data set.
When you press Enter, ISPF either displays a member selection list or begins the comparison. All the
fields on this panel are explained in the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF User's
Guide Vol I, except:
Update DS Name
Tells SuperC the name of the data set that will contain column-oriented results of the comparison.
Note: This field is not displayed unless your profile data set contains an update (UPDxxxx) process
option.
This data set is normally used as input to post processing programs and can be specified in addition to
the normal listing data set. See the Process Options selection in “Process options - select process
options” on page 206 for information about the SuperC process options.
If you leave this field blank, SuperC uses this default name:

prefix.userid.SUPERC.UPDATE

Utilities (option 3) 193

SuperC utility (option 3.12)

where prefix is your TSO prefix and userid is your user ID. If your prefix and user ID are identical, only
your prefix is used. Also, if you do not have a prefix, only your user ID is used.
Note: If the ISPF configuration table field USE_ADDITIONAL_QUAL_FOR_PDF_DATA_SETS is set to
YES, an additional qualifier defined with the ISPF_TEMPORARY_DATA_SET_QUALIFIER field is
included before the SUPERC qualifier.
If you enter a fully qualified data set name SuperC uses it as specified. Otherwise, SuperC only
appends your TSO prefix to the front of the data set name specified. If you run with TSO PROFILE
NOPREFIX, SuperC uses the name as you entered it, which can result in an attempt to catalog the
name in the master catalog.
If you enter the name of a data set that already exists, the contents of that data set are replaced by
the new update output.
If you enter the name of a data set that does not exist, SuperC allocates it for you. The data set is
allocated as a sequential data set unless you enter a member name after it, in which case it is
allocated as a partitioned data set.
Note: For the UPDMVS8, UPDCMS8, UPDSEQ0, and UPDPDEL process options, the update data set
contains valid data but only after a successful compare when differences are detected. The data set is
always empty after a comparison that shows the data sets or members being compared have no
differences.
Listing Type
The type of listing you want SuperC to create when it compares the data sets. This is a required field,
so you must choose one of the listing types shown here. See Appendix B, “Understanding the listings,”
on page 489 for sample listings.
DELTA
Lists the differences between the source data sets, followed by the overall summary.
CHNG
Lists the differences between the source data sets, plus up to 10 matching lines before and after
the differences. This listing is a variation of the DELTA listing; the matching lines before and after
help you recognize changed areas of the source data sets.
LONG
Lists all the new data set source lines, plus old data set deleted lines. Both inserted and deleted
lines are flagged.
OVSUM
Lists only the overall summary of the comparison. However, a PDS comparison generates an
individual summary line for each PDS member.
NOLIST
Produces no listing output. In foreground mode, only a message is returned to show the outcome
of the compare.
Listing DS Name
The name of the list data set to which SuperC writes the results of the comparison. However, if you
enter NOLIST in the Listing Type field, SuperC does not create an output listing, so this name is
ignored. Also, if you chose batch mode, this field does not appear on the panel. The SuperC Utility -
Submit Batch Jobs panel is used instead.
If you leave this field blank, SuperC allocates a list data set, using default data set attributes and this
data set name:

prefix.userid.SUPERC.LIST

where prefix is your TSO prefix and userid is your user ID. If your prefix and user ID are identical, only
your prefix is used. Also, if you do not have a prefix, only your user ID is used.
Note: If the ISPF configuration table field USE_ADDITIONAL_QUAL_FOR_PDF_DATA_SETS is set to
YES, an additional qualifier defined with the ISPF_TEMPORARY_DATA_SET_QUALIFIER field is
included before the SUPERC qualifier.

194 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 SuperC utility (option 3.12)

If you enter a fully qualified data set name SuperC uses it as specified. Otherwise, SuperC only
appends your TSO prefix to the front of the data set name specified. If you run with TSO PROFILE
NOPREFIX, SuperC uses the name as you entered it, which can result in an attempt to catalog the
name in the master catalog.
If you enter the name of a data set that already exists, the contents of that data set are replaced by
the new output listing. However, if the data set is sequential, you can add this listing to the data set
instead of replacing it by including the APNDLST process option in your profile data set.
If you enter the name of a data set that does not exist, SuperC allocates it for you. The data set is
allocated as a sequential data set unless you enter a member name after it, in which case it is
allocated as a partitioned data set.
Sequence Numbers
A value that tells SuperC whether to exclude sequence number fields from its comparison of your data
sets. This field is not displayed if the compare type is FILE or BYTE. You can choose one of these:
blank
Exclude Sequence Number fields from the comparison if the data set is F 80 or V 255 and the
compare type is

Line

Otherwise, treat as data.

SEQ
Exclude Sequence Number fields from the comparison. Sequence numbers are assumed in
columns 73-80 in F 80 and in columns 1-8 in V 255 data sets.
NOSEQ
Treat F 80/V 255 standard sequence number columns as data.
COBOL
Ignore columns 1-6 in F 80 data sets. Data in columns 1-6 is assumed to be sequence numbers.

SuperC member lists

The panel shown in Figure 127 on page 196 is displayed after you specify the old data set name, but only
if all these statements are true:
• The new data set is partitioned.
• The Member field, shown on the SuperC Utility panel (see Figure 125 on page 191), or the PDS Member
List field, shown on the SuperCE Utility panel (see Figure 130 on page 200) was left blank or a pattern
was used, and Bypass Selection List was not selected. For more information on Displaying Member
Lists, see the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
• The profile data set or statements data set being used does not contain any SELECT process
statements.

Utilities (option 3) 195

SuperC utility (option 3.12)

Menu Functions Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
COMPARE USERID.COPYBOOK Row 00001 of 00027

Enter END command to process selections or CANCEL to leave the member list.
Enter Old member(Oldmem) name if it is different from New member(Newmem) name.

Newmem Oldmem Size Created Changed ID

. BIGCHAR 4 2001/06/29 2002/02/25 10:42:27 USERID
. BIGKSDS 3 2001/08/10 2001/08/10 13:15:59 USERID
. CONVT1 24 2001/06/18 2001/06/18 16:04:26 USERID
. COPYCONC 12 2001/07/05 2001/07/05 17:33:41 USERID
. COPYMM 2 2001/06/11 2001/06/11 10:57:01 USERID
. COPY01 9 2001/02/24 2001/06/13 16:09:28 USERID
. COPY0102 15 2000/05/11 2001/06/11 11:08:49 USERID
. COPY02 7 2001/02/24 2001/02/24 17:09:50 USERID
. DITTST1 27 2001/06/13 2001/06/13 10:38:16 USERID
. FLMLDATE 443 2001/12/12 2001/12/12 12:41:44 USERID
. FLMUDU 415 2001/12/10 2001/12/10 20:44:55 USERID
. FMNCCPY1 35 2000/10/18 2002/09/10 17:18:42 USERID
. FMNCCPY2 35 2000/10/18 2002/09/10 17:19:11 USERID
Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F5=Rfind F7=Up F8=Down F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 127. SuperC member list panel (ISRSSML)

The members displayed in this list are members in the new data set. If the OLDMEM column is blank,
SuperC assumes each member in the new data set is to be compared with a member of the same name in
the old data set.
If you enter a member name in the OLDMEM column, SuperC compares this member to the one listed
beside it in the NEWMEM column.
To compare your selections, enter the END command. If you have not selected any members, ISPF
returns you to the previous panel.
To cancel your selections, enter either:
• The RESET command to remove all unprocessed selections without ending the member list display
• The CANCEL command to end the member list display without processing selections that are still on the
screen.
Note: Both the jump function (=) and the RETURN command cause an implied cancellation of selections
before they are carried out.
For more information about member lists, see the Using Member Selection Lists section of the "ISPF
Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.

Submitting a SuperC job in batch mode

If you selected Batch Mode (2) on the SuperC Utility panel, the panel shown in Figure 128 on page 197 is
displayed before the job is submitted. This panel allows you to specify one of these:
• The SYSOUT class, which determines the printer to which your job is sent and the format used for the
printed output.
• The name of a listing data set.
• Output data definitions that you can use to give the printer additional instructions, such as an output
destination that is not defined by a SYSOUT class.

196 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 SuperC utility (option 3.12)

SuperC Utility - Submit Batch jobs

More: +
Press ENTER to continue submit

Enter "/" to select option Generate Output Type:

/ Edit JCL before user submit 1 1. SYSOUT Class
2. Data Set Name
3. //OUTDD DD
SYSOUT Class . . . . A

Data Set Name . . .

//OUTDD DD . . . . .
// . . . . . . . . .
LRECL for the Listing Output will be 133

Job statement information: (Required - Enter/Verify JOB control statement)

===>
===>
===>
Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F12=Cancel

Figure 128. SuperC Utility - Submit Batch Jobs panel (ISRSCSUB)

The "Job statement information" field is explained in the Job Statement Information section of the "ISPF
Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I. The other fields on the panel shown
in Figure 128 on page 197 are:
SYSOUT class
A system output classification defined by your installation, which defines certain print characteristics,
such as the printer and the format that is used to produce the output. You can enter any valid SYSOUT
parameters. This field is required if you leave the Option field blank.
If you enter either option 1 or option 2, the "SYSOUT class" field is ignored. However, for option 2, you
can include the SYSOUT= operand in an OUTDD DD field.
Data Set Name
The name of the listing data set that you want ISPF to store your compare results in. This data set can
be either partitioned or sequential.
The Data Set Name field is required if you use option 1 on this panel. This field serves the same
purpose as the Listing DS Name field, which is used when running the SuperC utility in foreground
mode.
The logical record length (LRECL) of the listing data set is displayed under the blank OUTDD lines on
the SuperC Utility - Submit Batch Jobs panel. SuperC creates listings with one of four LRECLs:
132
Standard listing for the NOPRTCC process option; printer control characters are omitted.
133
Standard listing.
202
Wide listing for the NOPRTCC process option; printer control characters are omitted.
203
Wide listing.
If you specify an existing sequential data set with an incorrect LRECL, SuperC overrides the data set
specifications. This applies to any listing and update data sets in both foreground and batch.
A separate operation, such as using the Hardcopy utility (option 3.6), is needed to print the listing data
set.
If you leave the Option field blank or enter option 2, the Data Set Name field is ignored. Therefore, to
specify an output data set in either of these two situations, you must include the DSN= operand in an
OUTDD DD field.

Utilities (option 3) 197

SuperC utility (option 3.12)

When you are specifying the name of an existing data set, these rules apply:
• When you submit JCL for processing, the output listing produced by that JCL usually replaces the
contents of the specified data set, if any exist. Therefore, be careful when specifying the name of an
existing data set.
You can keep a history of changes by using the APNDLST compare option when you run the
comparison. This compare option adds the new output listing to the contents of the specified
sequential data set instead of replacing it.
Note: Using the APNDLST process option with a packed output listing file may cause unpredictable
results in the output listing file.
• Use standard TSO data set naming conventions.
When you are specifying the name of a data set that does not exist, these rules apply:
• If you include a member name in the data set specification, ISPF allocates a partitioned data set
with suitable attributes for the listing.
• If you do not specify a member name, ISPF allocates a sequential data set.
//OUTDD DD
Output data definitions that are used to specify additional printer instructions in job control language
(JCL). This field is required if you use this panel. Otherwise, it is ignored.
The OUTDD DD fields are provided so you can pass to your printer all the JCL needed to format special
types of output that may not be supported by your installation's SYSOUT class definitions. The
example shown in Figure 128 on page 197 specifies a wide format for printing on 14 3/4-inch forms.
The "SYSOUT class" and Data Set Name fields are ignored. If you need to specify this information, be
sure to include it in your OUTDD DD job card. If you specify a data set name in your OUTDD DD job
card, the output data set is printed and kept. Otherwise, it is printed and deleted. Here are some
examples:
• To specify a SYSOUT class, enter:

//OUTDD DD SYSOUT=X

where X is the SYSOUT class, such as A, B, or C.

• To specify a data set name, enter:

//OUTDD DD DSN=fully.qualified.name
// DISP=XXXXX...

where XXXXX... is one of these:

– For an old data set:

OLD

– For a new sequential data set:

(NEW,CATLG),SPACE=(3325,(50,100),RLSE),UNIT=SYSDA

– For a new partitioned data set

(NEW,CATLG),SPACE=(3325,(50,100,25)),UNIT=SYSDA

– For a sequential data set that will be modified by, instead of replaced by, the comparison results:

MOD

Note: These three fields are independent of one another. Also, none of them requires you to provide an
OUTDD card in the "Job statement information" field.

198 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 SuperCE utility (option 3.13)

Using the NOLIST listing type in batch mode

If you enter the NOLIST listing type and choose batch mode, the options on the SuperC Utility - Submit
Batch Jobs panel shown in Figure 128 on page 197 are not valid because no listing is produced.
Therefore, an alternate panel is displayed, which blanks out the fields that are not valid but still allows you
to submit job statement JCL. This panel is shown in Figure 129 on page 199.

Batch Submit - Nolist

Press ENTER to continue submit job or END to Cancel

Enter "/" to select option

/ Edit JCL before user submit

NOLIST listing type was specified. There will be no output generated.

Job statement information: (Required - Enter/Verify JOB control statement)

===>
===>
===>
===>

Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 129. SuperC Utility - submit batch jobs panel using NOLIST (ISRSCSB1)

When this panel is displayed, you can either:

• Type the job statement JCL and press Enter to submit the job
• Enter the END command to cancel the job.

SuperCE utility (option 3.13)

The SuperCE utility (option 3.13) is a dialog that uses the SuperC program to compare data sets of
unlimited size and record length at the file, line, word, or byte level. It is appropriate if you need more
flexibility than the standard SuperC utility (option 3.12) provides.
Note: For an introduction to the SuperC and SuperCE utilities (options 3.12 and 3.13), see Appendix A,
“SuperC reference,” on page 443.
The panel shown in Figure 130 on page 200 is the first panel of the SuperCE utility. It requires only the
names of the input data sets, which are entered using standard TSO naming conventions, such as:

New DS Name . . . . 'USERID.TEST2.SCRIPT'

Note: When a member of a PDSE version 2 data set that is configured for member generations is specified
as the old or new data set, the current generation of the member is used for the comparison.

Utilities (option 3) 199

SuperCE utility (option 3.13)

Menu Utilities Options Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
SuperCE Utility

New DS Name . . .
Old DS Name . . .
PDS Member List (blank/pattern - member list, * - compare all)
(Leave New/Old DSN "blank" for concatenated-uncataloged-password panel)
Compare Type Listing Type Display Output
2 1. File 2 1. OVSUM 1 1. Yes
2. Line 2. Delta 2. No
3. Word 3. CHNG 3. Cond
4. Byte 4. Long 4. UPD
5. Nolist
Listing DSN . . . . SUPERC.LIST
Process Options . .

Statements Dsn . . .
Update DSN . . . . .

Enter "/" to select option Execution Mode Output Mode

Bypass selection list 1 1. Foreground 1 1. View
2. Batch 2. Browse
Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 130. SuperCE Utility panel (ISRSEPRI)

SuperCE Utility panel action bar

The SuperCE Utility panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu
For more information, see the details about the Menu Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Utilities
For more information, see the details about the Utilities Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Options
The Options pull-down offers you these choices:
1
Edit Statements
2
Process Options
3
Profiles and Defaults
Help
The Help pull-down provides general information about SuperCE topics, including how to specify the
input data sets and options.

SuperCE Utility panel fields

A default compare type, listing type, listing data set name, and Browse option are provided if you choose
not to specify your own. The fields on the SuperCE Utility panel are:
New DS Name and Old DS Name
Specify the name of a sequential data set, PDS, or membered PDS. Use standard TSO naming
conventions, including quotes for fully qualified names. Leave either or both of these fields blank to
display a panel on which you can specify concatenated, uncataloged, and password-protected data
sets. These panels are shown in Figure 131 on page 204 (foreground compare) and Figure 132 on
page 205 (batch compare).

200 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 SuperCE utility (option 3.13)

PDS Member List

Leave this field blank to display a member selection list for the new data set. Otherwise, enter either a
pattern or an asterisk (*). See “SuperC member lists” on page 195 for more information.
pattern
Entering a pattern causes ISPF to display a list of the members in the new data set that match the
pattern, unless Bypass Selection List has been specified. For more information about using
patterns, see the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I. For
example:

PDS Member List . . ISR*

*
Entering an asterisk causes all the members in the new data set to be compared to any like-
named members in the old data set. A member list is not displayed. For example:

PDS Member List . . *

Members in either data set not having like-named members in the other data set are not
compared, but are listed in the output list data set.
When entire data sets are compared by using an asterisk for a member name pattern, each real
member that appears in both the old and new data sets is compared once. Alias entries are
processed but only to determine if they have matching alias and/or real entries.
Note: You can also use SELECT process statements in the statements data set to specify an optional
set of PDS members to be searched. However, the SELECT statement turns off the PDS member list
function.
Compare Type
The type of comparison you want SuperC to perform. Choose one of these:
File
Compares source data sets for differences, but does not show what the differences are. This is the
simplest and fastest method with the least amount of processing overhead. For this compare type,
SuperC prepares summary information only and causes all listing types to produce the same
output, except NOLIST, which does not produce any output listing. A message is returned to notify
you of the compare results.
Line
Compares source data sets for line differences. Reformatted lines (that is, lines with blanks
inserted or deleted) are automatically detected for lines less than or equal to 256 characters. This
compare type is the default. It is most useful for comparisons of program source code because it
is record-oriented and points out inserted or deleted lines of code. Lines can be of unlimited size.
Word
Compares source data sets for word differences. In this context, a word is a group of characters
that begins and ends with a blank or other line delimiter. If you use the XWDCMP process option,
all non-alphanumeric characters are considered to be delimiters. Also, a word cannot be longer
than 256 characters.
The Word compare type is most useful for comparing text data sets. If two data sets contain the
same words in the same order, SuperC considers them to be identical, even if those words are not
on the same lines.
Byte
Compares source data sets for byte differences. The output listing data set consists of a
hexadecimal printout with character equivalents listed on the right. A BYTE compare with a LONG
listing of a data set against itself results in a hexadecimal dump of that data set. This compare
type is most useful for comparing machine readable data.

Utilities (option 3) 201

SuperCE utility (option 3.13)

Listing Type
The type of listing you want SuperC to create when it compares the data sets. Listing Type is not a
required field in SuperCE. If you do not specify a listing type, the default is DELTA. See the topic about
Listing Formats in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I for sample listings.
OVSUM
Lists only the general summary of the comparison. However, a PDS comparison generates an
individual summary line for each PDS member.
Delta
Lists the differences between the source data sets, followed by the general summary.
CHNG
Lists the differences between the source data sets, plus up to 10 matching lines before and after
the differences. This listing is a variation of the DELTA listing; the matching lines before and after
help you recognize changed areas of the source data sets.
Long
Lists all the new data set source lines, plus old data set deleted lines. Both inserted and deleted
lines are flagged.
Nolist
Produces no listing output. In foreground mode, a message is returned to show the outcome of
the comparison.
Listing Dsn
The name of the list data set to which SuperC writes the results of the comparison. However, if you
enter NOLIST in the Listing Type field, SuperC does not create an output listing, so this name is
ignored.
If you leave this field blank, SuperC allocates a list data set, using default data set attributes and this
data set name:

prefix.userid.SUPERC.LIST

where prefix is your TSO prefix and userid is your user ID. If your prefix and user ID are identical, only
your prefix is used. Also, if you do not have a prefix, only your user ID is used.
Note: If the ISPF configuration table field USE_ADDITIONAL_QUAL_FOR_PDF_DATA_SETS is set to
YES, an additional qualifier defined with the ISPF_TEMPORARY_DATA_SET_QUALIFIER keyword is
included before the SUPERC qualifier.
If you enter a fully qualified data set name SuperC uses it as specified. Otherwise, SuperC only
appends your TSO prefix to the front of the data set name specified. If you run with TSO PROFILE
NOPREFIX, SuperC uses the name as you entered it, which can result in an attempt to catalog the
name in the master catalog.
If you enter the name of a data set that already exists, the contents of that data set are replaced by
the new output listing. However, if the data set is sequential, you can add this listing to the data set
instead of replacing it by using the APNDLST process option.
If you enter the name of a data set that does not exist, SuperC allocates it for you. The data set is
allocated as a sequential data set unless you enter a member name after it, in which case it is
allocated as a member of a partitioned data set.
Process Options
Keywords that tell SuperC how to process the compare operation. You can type these keywords in the
Process Options fields or select them from a panel. See “Process options” on page 446 for a table of
keywords.
Statements Dsn
The name of the data set that contains your process statements. All statements data sets must be
fixed block with 80-byte records (FB 80). See “Edit statements - edit statements data set” on page
207 for more information.

202 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 SuperCE utility (option 3.13)

Update Dsn
Tells SuperC the name of the data set that will contain column-oriented results of the comparison.
This data set is normally used as input to post processing programs and can be specified besides the
normal listing data set.
If you leave this field blank and use an update (UPDxxxx) option, SuperC uses this default name:

prefix.userid.SUPERC.UPDATE

where prefix is your TSO prefix and userid is your user ID. If your prefix and user ID are identical, only
your prefix is used. Also, if you do not have a prefix, only your user ID is used.
Note: If the ISPF configuration table field USE_ADDITIONAL_QUAL_FOR_PDF_DATA_SETS is set to
YES, an additional qualifier defined with the ISPF_TEMPORARY_DATA_SET_QUALIFIER field is
included before the SUPERC qualifier.
If you enter a fully qualified data set name SuperC uses it as specified. Otherwise, SuperC only
appends your TSO prefix to the front of the data set name specified. If you run with TSO PROFILE
NOPREFIX, SuperC uses the name as you entered it, which can result in an attempt to catalog the
name in the master catalog.
If you enter the name of a data set that already exists, the contents of that data set are replaced by
the new update output. However, if the data set is sequential, you can add this listing to the data set
instead of replacing it by using the APNDUPD process option.
If you enter the name of a data set that does not exist, SuperC allocates it for you. The data set is
allocated as a sequential data set unless you enter a member name after it, in which case it is
allocated as a partitioned data set.
Note: For the UPDMVS8, UPDCMS8, UPDSEQ0, and UPDPDEL process options, the update data set
contains valid data, but only after a successful compare when differences are detected. The data set
is always empty after a comparison that shows the data sets or members being compared have no
differences.
Display Output
Tells ISPF whether you want to display the output listing in Browse mode. Enter one of these:
Note: The NOLIST listing type overrides Yes, No, and Cond.
Yes
Call Browse to display the listing data set after processing the comparison. This is the default.
No
Do not call Browse to display the SuperC listing data set.
Cond
Do not call Browse unless SuperC finds differences between the data sets.
UPD
Browse the update data set instead of the list data set. This parameter is not valid unless you
create an update data set by using one or more of the SuperC process options that begin with UPD
(UPDxxxx).
Bypass Selection List
When a member pattern is entered in the PDS Member List field, selecting this field causes SuperC to
process all members matching that pattern without displaying a member selection list. Leaving this
field blank causes the member list to be displayed.
Execution Mode
Foreground
If you choose Foreground, SuperC processes the data sets in foreground mode, so you can
browse the results of the compare. This choice locks your keyboard until SuperC processing is
complete.

Utilities (option 3) 203

SuperCE utility (option 3.13)

The panel shown in Figure 131 on page 204 is displayed if you specify Foreground in the
Execution Mode field and you leave the New DS Name or Old DS Name field blank on the SuperCE
Utility panel.

SuperCE - Concatenation Foreground Entry

"New" Concatenation
DS1 . . .
DS2 . . .
DS3 . . .
DS4 . . .

Other "New" Partitioned, Sequential or VSAM Data Set

Data Set Name . . .
Volume Serial . . . (If not cataloged)
Password . . . . . (Password allowed only in foreground mode)

"Old" Concatenation
DS1 . . .
DS2 . . .
DS3 . . .
DS4 . . .

Other "Old" Partitioned, Sequential or VSAM Data Set

Data Set Name . . .
Volume Serial . . . (If not cataloged)
Password . . . . . (Password allowed only in foreground mode)
Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F12=Cancel

Figure 131. SuperCE - concatenation interactive entry panel (ISRSECAT)

Batch
If you choose Batch, SuperC processes the data sets in batch mode. This choice frees the
keyboard, allowing you to continue using ISPF while waiting for SuperC to compare the data sets.
The output listing is sent to the destination specified on the SuperC Utility - Submit Batch Jobs
panel (Figure 128 on page 197).
The panel shown in Figure 132 on page 205 is displayed if you specify Batch in the Execution
Mode field and you leave the New DS Name or Old DS Name field blank on the SuperCE Utility
panel. You can concatenate up to four data sets that have like attributes. For example, all must be
either sequential or partitioned.

204 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 SuperCE utility (option 3.13)

SuperCE - Concatenation Batch Entry

"New" Concatenation
DS1 . . .
DS2 . . .
DS3 . . .
DS4 . . .

Other "New" Partitioned, Sequential or VSAM Data Set

Data Set Name . . .
Volume Serial . . . (If not cataloged)
Password . . . . . (Password allowed only in foreground mode)

"Old" Concatenation
DS1 . . .
DS2 . . .
DS3 . . .
DS4 . . .

Other "Old" Partitioned, Sequential or VSAM Data Set

Data Set Name . . .
Volume Serial . . . (If not cataloged)
Password . . . . . (Password allowed only in foreground mode)
Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F12=Cancel

Figure 132. SuperCE - Concatenation Batch Entry panel (ISRSECAT)

This panel is the same as the panel shown in Figure 131 on page 204, except the Password field is
used only in foreground mode. If your data sets are password protected, compare the data sets in
foreground mode by specifying Foreground in the Execution Mode field on the SuperCE Utility
panel.
Printing a SuperCE listing in batch mode:
If you specify Batch in the Execution Mode field on the SuperCE Utility panel, the panel shown in
Figure 128 on page 197 is displayed before the job is submitted. This panel allows you to
determine whether to print your SuperC listing or write it to a list data set.
Output Mode
The output mode for displaying the listing file. Choose one of these:
1
View. This enables the listing file to be displayed in view mode. All View functions are enabled in
this mode.
2
Browse. This enables the listing file to be displayed in the browse mode. All Browse functions are
enabled in this mode.
3
Eview. This option only appears on non-English panels. It operates exactly the same as View
except that SuperC is invoked with an English language constants module. All titles and headings
are in English. This facilitates use of hiliting of SuperC listings on non-DBCS terminals.

SuperCE Utility primary commands

The SuperCE utility provides the functions described in these topics, each of which is controlled by a
command that you can type on the command line:
A – Profile Manager
When you enter primary command A on the SuperCE Utility panel, the Profile Manager panel is
displayed. See “Profiles and defaults - activate profiles and defaults” on page 208 for information
related to the Profile Manager panel.
B – Batch
When you enter primary command B on the SuperCE Utility panel, processing is the same as when
you press Enter with Batch specified in the Execution Mode field. The value specified in the Execution

Utilities (option 3) 205

SuperCE utility (option 3.13)

Mode field is ignored. See the section describing the Batch option in the Execution Mode field for
information on batch processing.
E – Edit statements
When you enter primary command E on the SuperCE Utility panel, the statements data set that you
specified in the Statements Dsn field is displayed in Edit mode. See “Edit statements - edit statements
data set” on page 207 for information related to the edit statements data set.
P – Process options
When you enter primary command P on the SuperCE Utility panel, a Compare Process Options panel is
displayed. This panel contains the process options that are available for the compare type (File, Line,
Word, or Byte) that is selected. See “Process options - select process options” on page 206 for
information related to the Compare Process Options panel.
S – Extended Search-For Utility
When you enter primary command S on the SuperCE Utility panel, the Extended Search-For Utility
panel is displayed. See “Search-ForE utility (option 3.15)” on page 216 for information related to the
Extended Search-For Utility.

SuperCE utility options

These topics describe the options that are available in the Options pull-down on the SuperCE Utility panel
action bar:
• “Process options - select process options” on page 206
• “Edit statements - edit statements data set” on page 207
• “Profiles and defaults - activate profiles and defaults” on page 208

Process options - select process options

When you select Process Options from the Options pull-down menu, a Compare Process Options panel is
displayed. This panel contains the process options that are available for the compare type (File, Line,
Word, or Byte) that is selected. You can also access the Compare Process Options panel by entering the
primary command P on the SuperCE Utility panel.
The compare type that you select determines the available process options:
Line Compare

ALLMEMS ANYC APNDLST APNDUPD ASCII CKPACKL CNPML COBOL COVSUM

Cpnnnnn DLMDUP DLREFM DPACMT DPADCMT DPBLKCL DPCBCMT DPCPCMT DPFTCMT
DPMACMT DPPLCMT DPPSCMT EMPTYOK FMVLNS GWCBL LOCS LONGLN MIXED
NARROW NOPRTCC NOSEQ NOSUMS REFMOVR SEQ UPDCMS8 UPDCNTL UPDLDEL
UPDMVS8 UPDPDEL UPDREV UPDREV2 UPDSEQ0 UPDSUMO VTITLE WIDE Y2DTONLY

Word Compare

ALLMEMS ANYC APNDLST APNDUPD ASCII CKPACKL COBOL COVSUM Cpnnnnn

DPACMT DPADCMT DPBLKCL DPCBCMT DPCPCMT DPFTCMT DPMACMT DPPLCMT DPPSCMT
EMPTYOK GWCBL LOCS MIXED NOPRTCC NOSEQ NOSUMS SEQ UPDCNTL
UPDREV UPDREV2 UPDSUMO VTITLE XWDCMP

Byte Compare

ALLMEMS APNDLST APNDUPD ASCII COVSUM Cpnnnnn EMPTYOK LOCS NOPRTCC

NOSUMS UPDCNTL UPDSUMO VTITLE

File Compare

ALLMEMS APNDLST ASCII COVSUM Cpnnnnn EMPTYOK FMSTOP LMCSFC LOCS

NOPRTCC

To select one or more SuperCE process options, perform either of these actions:
• Type any nonblank character to the left of the process options you want to select. Use the Backward
and Forward keys, as necessary, to move through the panel. Press Enter when you have finished. This

206 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 SuperCE utility (option 3.13)

causes the options you chose to be displayed in the Process Options fields on the SuperCE Utility panel.
If you select two options that cannot be chosen together, or if you enter an option name incorrectly, an
error message is displayed.
• Use the CANCEL command to return to the SuperCE Utility panel without processing selections.
SuperC process options can affect how the input data is processed, and determine the format and content
of the output listing data set. They can also help you save processing time by avoiding comments and
blank lines. A separate group of options, called update data set options (UPDxxxx), allow you to create
update data sets, examples of which are shown in Appendix C, “Update files,” on page 511.
All these options can be chosen from the XXXX Compare Process Options panels, where XXXX is the
compare type (FILE, LINE, WORD, or BYTE) that you are using, or you can type any of them in the Process
Options field on the SuperCE Utility panel. Errors caused by mistyping process options are detected when
you call the SuperCE utility.
For definitions of the SuperC process options, see “Process options” on page 446.

Edit statements - edit statements data set

A statements data set consists of process statements that contain instructions for the SuperC program.
They are similar to the process options, but are composed of a keyword and one or more operands. See
“Process options - select process options” on page 206 for information about SuperCE process options.
When you select the Edit Statements option from the SuperCE Utility Options pull-down menu, the
SuperCE utility displays the statements data set you specified in the Statements Dsn field. You can also
display the statements data set by entering the primary command E on the SuperCE Utility panel. The
statements data set is always displayed in Edit mode, allowing you to add, change, or delete SuperC
process statements as needed. Only one process statement can appear on each line of the statements
data set.
The size of the Edit window depends on the number of lines your terminal can display. The sample panel
shown in Figure 133 on page 207 shows how the Edit window appears on a 24-line display. Examples of
some common process statements are listed below the Edit window so you can easily compose the
proper input line.

USERID.SUPERC.STMTS Columns 00001 00072

Enter or change Process Statements in the EDIT window below:

****** ***************************** Top of Data ******************************
''''''
''''''
''''''
''''''
''''''
****** **************************** Bottom of Data ****************************

Examples Explanation
CMPCOLM 5:60 75:90 Compare using two column compare ranges
LSTCOLM 25:90 List columns 25:90 from input
DPLINE 'PAGE ' Exclude line if "PAGE " found anywhere on line
SELECT MEM1,NMEM2:OMEM2 Compare MEM1 with MEM1 and NMEM2 with OMEM2
CMPLINE NTOP 'MACRO' Start comparing after string found in new DSN
LNCT 66 Set lines per page to 66
- - - - -
Others: CHNGV CMPBOFS CMPCOLMN CMPCOLMO CMPSECT DPLINEC NCHGT
Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F5=Rfind F6=Rchange F7=Up
F8=Down F9=Swap F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 133. SuperC process statements panel (ISRSEPRS)

The SuperC program validates process statements at run time. Invalid process statements are not used
and are noted at the bottom of the listing. Unless a higher return code is required by some other
condition, a return code of 4 is generated.

Utilities (option 3) 207

SuperCE utility (option 3.13)

See “Process statements” on page 457 for process statement syntax, definitions, and examples.

Profiles and defaults - activate profiles and defaults

A SuperC profile is a data set that can contain a compare type, a listing type, a Browse setting, and various
combinations of process options and process statements that you select.
SuperC profiles are useful for a wide range of users. Beginners can use profiles created by others as a
simple method of running SuperC. Experienced SuperC users can create profiles for the groups of options
they use often so that they do not have to remember individual process options and statements. Also,
profiles give system programmers a mechanism for setting up complex compare tools that others can
simply call by profile name.
Some other characteristics of profiles are:
• A profile can be either a sequential data set or a member of a PDS.
• Data set names are not represented in a profile.
• Profiles can be created only with the SuperCE utility (option 3.13). However, once they are created, they
can be used in the standard SuperC utility (option 3.12).
• To change a profile, activate it by selecting the Activate option on the Profile Manager panel and make
the necessary changes to the information in the fields on the SuperCE Utility panel. Then select the
Create option on the Profile Manager panel, entering in the Activate/Create Profile DS Name field the
name of the profile data set that you want to modify.
• You can modify the SuperC default settings by selecting the Defaults option on the Profile Manager
panel. See Figure 136 on page 210 for an example of the SuperC - Defaults panel.
• You can display the contents of a profile data set using View, Browse, or Edit. Figure 134 on page 208
shows a Browse display of a profile data set.

Menu Utilities Compilers Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
USERID.TESTPROF Line 00000000 Col 001 080
********************************* Top of Data **********************************
.* PROF PREFIX CTYP=LINE,LTYP=DELTA ,BRW=YES
.* PROF PREFIX PROC1= * MARGIN*
.* PROF PREFIX PROC2= * MARGIN*
******************************** Bottom of Data ********************************

Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F5=Rfind F7=Up F8=Down F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 134. Browse a SuperCE profile

When you select Profiles and Defaults from the Options pull-down menu, the Profile Manager panel is
displayed. You can also access the Profile Manager panel by entering the primary command A on the
SuperCE Utility panel. The panel is used to activate and create profiles and to modify SuperC default
values.

208 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 SuperCE utility (option 3.13)

SUPERCE - Profile Manager

A Activate Reads the specified input profile data set:

1. Establishes the process and compare options from the
profile prefix lines.
2. Establishes the profile as the process statement data set
if any process statements are detected.

C Create Creates an output profile data set:

1. Combines process and compare options from the Primary Panel
and any process statements from the Statements Data Set:
SUPERC.STMTS
2. Rewrites the profile data set (if the data set exists) or
allocates a new data set before generating the profile.

D Defaults Presents panel for modifying SuperC defaults.

Activate/Create
Profile DS Name . . .

Option ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 135. SuperCE - Profile Manager panel (ISRSEPMG)

The only field on this panel is:

Activate/Create Profile DS Name
The name of the profile data set that you want to either activate or create. This field is required when
you choose option A (Activate) or C (Create).
These topics describe the options shown at the top of the SuperCE - Profile Manager panel:
• “A — activate” on page 209
• “C — create” on page 209
• “D — defaults” on page 210

A — activate
Option A (Activate) uses the contents of the profile data set specified in the Activate/Create Profile DS
Name field to populate fields on the SuperCE Utility panel. For example, process options stored in the
profile appear in the Process Options fields. When you choose option A, the profile data set that you enter
in the Activate/Create Profile DS Name field must be cataloged.

C — create
Option C (Create) causes SuperCE to copy data entered on the SuperCE Utility panel and place it in the
profile data set specified in the Activate/Create Profile DS Name field. Be sure the correct information is
displayed on that panel and that the statements data set, if you specify one, contains the correct process
statements before you create the profile.
If the profile data set that you specify does not already exist, SuperCE allocates it for you. Data stored in
the profile data set can include:
• These values taken from the fields on the SuperCE Utility panel. The abbreviations in parentheses show
how these values are identified in a profile data set:
– Compare type (CTYP)
– Listing type (LTYP)
– Browse setting (BRW)
– Process options (PROC1 and PROC2).
• Process statements copied from the statements data set that was specified in the Statements Dsn field.
This data set name is displayed and highlighted on the SuperCE - Profile Manager panel. For example,
the sample panel shown in Figure 135 on page 209 displays the name SUPERC.STMTS.

Utilities (option 3) 209

Search-For utility (option 3.14)

If you leave the Statements Dsn field blank, the data set name is not displayed on the SuperCE - Profile
Manager panel and SuperCE does not include any process statements in your profile. See these topics
about process options and process statements, respectively:
– “Process options - select process options” on page 206
– “Edit statements - edit statements data set” on page 207

D — defaults
Option D (Defaults) brings up the SUPERC – Defaults panel, shown in Figure 136 on page 210, that allows
you to:
• Specify SuperC output data set default allocation parameters
The first extent and secondary space values are used whenever Options 3.12, 3.13, or 3.14 create a
new output data set such as a listing or statements data set. If you specify a new data set with a
member name, the directory space value is used to create a PDS. If you blank out any of the values,
SuperC will supply defaults.
Space values are applicable only if you select "Invoke SuperC via PROGRAM interface".
Note: New data set allocation block size parameters are controlled by the ISPF Configuration Table. See
z/OS ISPF Planning and Customizing for details.
• Specify your own Statements data set initial edit macro name
• Enable or disable a high performance program interface to SuperC. If you select "Invoke SuperC via
PROGRAM interface", ISPF invokes SuperC directly. Otherwise, ISPF invokes SuperC via a CLIST named
ISRSFORG (ISRSSRCH for Search-For). The CLIST interface may be useful if you need to customize the
allocations or wish to post-process the result. The PROGRAM interface is more efficient and is the
default.

SUPERC - Defaults

Verify entries below. End or Enter to exit.

New List data set allocation in blocks:

1st Extent . . 50 Secondary . . 100 Directory . . 5

New Update data set allocation in blocks:

1st Extent . . 15 Secondary . . 30 Directory . . 5

New Profile data set allocation in blocks:

1st Extent . . 5 Secondary . . 5 Directory . . 5

New Statements data set allocation in blocks:

1st Extent . . 5 Secondary . . 5 Directory . . 5

Statements data set initial edit macro name . . !ISRSMAC

Enter "/" to select option

/ Invoke SuperC via PROGRAM interface

Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 136. SuperC - Defaults panel (ISRSDFLT)

Search-For utility (option 3.14)

Note: For an introduction to the Search-For and Extended Search-For utilities (options 3.14 and 3.15), see
Appendix A, “SuperC reference,” on page 443.

210 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Search-For utility (option 3.14)

The Search-For utility (option 3.14) is a dialog that uses the SuperC program to search your data sets or
PDS members for one or more character strings. The Search-For Utility panel, shown in Figure 137 on
page 211, is the first panel of the Search-For utility. The only requirements for this panel are:
• A string to be searched for, unless you select "Specify additional search strings"
• A data set to search, along with a volume serial and password if necessary.
A default listing data set name is provided if you choose not to enter your own.
Note: When member generations of a PDSE version 2 data set are searched for character strings, only
members of the current generation are searched.

Menu RefList Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Search-For Utility
More: +
Search String . .

ISPF Library:
Project . . .
Group . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type . . . .
Member . . . (Blank or pattern for member selection list,
"*" for all members)
Other Partitioned, Sequential or VSAM Data Set:
Data Set Name . . .
Volume Serial . . . (If not cataloged)

Listing Data Set . . . SRCHFOR.LIST

Data Set Password . . (If Search-For data set password protected)

Enter "/" to select option Execution Mode Output Mode

Specify additional search strings 1 1. Foreground 1 1. View
Mixed Mode 2. Batch 2. Browse
Bypass selection list
Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 137. Search-For Utility panel (ISRSFSPR)

Search-For Utility panel action bar

The Search-For Utility panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu
For more information, see the details about the Menu Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
RefList
For information about referral lists, see the topic about Using Personal Data Set Lists and Library Lists
in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Utilities
For more information, see the details about the Utilities Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Help
The Help pull-down provides general information about Search-For topics, including how to specify
the input data sets, search string, and options.

Search-For Utility panel fields

All the fields on this panel are explained in the Libraries and Data Sets topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide
Vol I, except these:

Utilities (option 3) 211

Search-For utility (option 3.14)

Search String
A string to be searched for. No distinction is made between uppercase and lowercase characters. Use
the Extended Search-For utility (option 3.15) to specify case-sensitive searches.
Four keywords—C, PREFIX, SUFFIX, and WORD—can help you narrow the scope of a search. See
“Search-For strings and keywords” on page 213 for information about these keywords and the rules
that govern search string entry.
Specify additional search strings
Select this field to have the Search-For utility search for more than one string. The Search-For utility
displays the panel shown in Figure 138 on page 213, on which you can specify additional search
strings. This panel precedes a member list request.
If you do not select this option, the Search-For utility searches only for the string entered in the
Search String field.
Mixed Mode
Select this field to have the Search-For utility scan and parse the input data set lines for DBCS text
strings.
Note: The Word, Prefix, and Suffix Search-For qualifiers have no effect on DBCS strings.
Bypass Selection List
When a member pattern is entered in the PDS Member List field or the member name portion of the
data set field (such as MY.DATA.SET(pattern)), selecting this field causes SuperC to process all
members matching that pattern without displaying a member selection list. Leaving this field blank
causes the member list to be displayed.
Execution Mode
The processing mode you want to use when searching the data sets. Specify one of these:
1
Foreground. Searches the data sets and stores the results in the data set specified in the Listing
Data Set Name field. You can browse the listing data set at the terminal.
2
Batch. Causes the display of the Search-For Utility - Submit Batch Jobs panel so that you can
specify job card and print disposition information or edit the JCL statements. Then, Search-For
submits the batch job to search the data sets. See “Submitting a Search-For job in batch mode” on
page 215 for more information.
Note: You cannot specify a data set password in batch mode. If your data sets are password
protected, use foreground mode.
Output Mode
The output mode you want to use when displaying the listing file. Choose one of these:
1
View. This enables the listing file to be displayed in view mode. All View functions are enabled in
this mode.
2
Browse. This enables the listing file to be displayed in the browse mode. All Browse functions are
enabled in this mode.
Listing Data Set
The name of the listing data set to which the SuperC program writes the results of the search. If you
leave this field blank, the Search-For utility allocates a listing data set, using default data set
attributes and this data set name:

prefix.userid.SRCHFOR.LIST

where prefix is your TSO prefix and userid is your user ID. If your prefix and user ID are identical, only
your prefix is used. Also, if you do not have a prefix, only your user ID is used.

212 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Search-For utility (option 3.14)

Note: If the ISPF configuration table field USE_ADDITIONAL_QUAL_FOR_PDF_DATA_SETS is set to

YES, an additional qualifier defined with the ISPF_TEMPORARY_DATA_SET_QUALIFIER field is
included before the SRCHFOR qualifier.
If you enter a fully qualified data set name SuperC uses it as specified. Otherwise, SuperC only
appends your TSO prefix to the front of the data set name specified. If you run with TSO PROFILE
NOPREFIX, SuperC uses the name as you entered it, which can result in an attempt to catalog the
name in the master catalog.
If you enter the name of a data set that does not exist, the Search-For utility allocates it for you. The
data set is allocated as a sequential data set unless you enter a member name after it, in which case it
is allocated as a partitioned data set.

Specifying additional search strings

The panel shown in Figure 138 on page 213 is displayed if you select "Specify additional search strings"
on the Search-For Utility panel. You can specify:
• Additional strings to be searched for
• Optional scan-type and continuation keywords.

Menu RefList Utilities Help

─ ┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐ ──
I │ Search-For Strings │
│ │
S │ Specify 1 or more Search Strings below: │
│ │
I │ ==> │
│ ==> │
│ ==> │
│ ==> │
│ ==> │ ,
│ ==> │
O │ ==> │
│ ==> │
│ ==> │
│ ==> │
L │ │
D │ Press ENTER to start search or END command to exit. │
│ Command ===> │
E │ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward │
/ │ F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel │
C └───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 138. Additional Search Strings panel (ISRSFSST)

From this panel, pressing Enter either:

• Displays a member list, if requested
• Runs the search if no member list is needed.
Entering the END command returns you to the Search-For Utility panel.

Search-For strings and keywords

Enter the strings that you want SuperC to find. When you press Enter, SuperC looks for the strings without
regard to whether they appear in uppercase or lowercase in the original data set. If you are searching a
partitioned data set concatenation, SuperC will inform you (in the CONCAT# field in the listing) in which
group it first found the string. If you want SuperC to search all the groups for each member, you can use
the SDUPM process option of Extended Search-For (option 3.15). If you want the search to distinguish
between uppercase and lowercase, you must use Extended Search-For (option 3.15). If any of the strings
are found (string-1 OR string-2 OR string-3) on the line, SuperC considers the condition met. You can

Utilities (option 3) 213

Search-For utility (option 3.14)

restrict SuperC searches further by using one of the SuperC Search-for keywords discussed in “Using
keywords” on page 214.

Entering search strings

Enclose the string in single quotation marks if it contains embedded blanks or apostrophes. Two
consecutive apostrophes must be entered to specify a single apostrophe within a search string.
If you need to specify a DBCS string that contains a hexadecimal '7D' (x'7D', the hexadecimal
representation of a single quotation mark) as half of a DBCS pair, you must use the Enhanced SearchFor
option (option 3.15) with the MIXED process option.
This example searches for the string IT'S A LIVING.

==> 'IT'S A LIVING'

Using keywords
These keywords can help you narrow the range of the search. If you do not use a keyword, SuperC will
find the string wherever it exists, even if that happens to be in the middle of a word.
PREFIX
Shows the string is preceded by a non-alphanumeric character, such as a blank space. It cannot be
used on the same line with SUFFIX or WORD. For example, you can do this:

==> ELSE PREFIX

==> ELSE SUFFIX

but not this:

==> ELSE PREFIX SUFFIX

SUFFIX
Shows the string is followed by a non-alphanumeric character. It cannot be used on the same line with
PREFIX or WORD. See the examples under PREFIX.
WORD
Shows the string is both preceded and followed by a non-alphanumeric character. It cannot be used
on the same line as PREFIX or SUFFIX. See the examples under PREFIX.
C
Continuation. Shows continuation of the previous line(s). Continuation lines generate additional
strings, all of which must be found in the same line of an input data set.
Also, the C keyword can be entered on the same line as one of the other keywords. This example tells
SuperC to find ELSE and to also find IF, but only when IF is on the same line as ELSE.

==> ELSE WORD

==> IF WORD C

Search-For member lists

A panel similar to the one shown in Figure 139 on page 215 is displayed only if:
• The search data set is partitioned.
• The Member field on the Search-For Utility panel (Figure 137 on page 211) or the PDS Member List field
on the Extended Search-For Utility panel (Figure 141 on page 217) was left blank or a pattern was used
and Bypass Selection List was not selected. For more information on Displaying Member Lists, see the
"ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
• For the Extended Search-For utility (option 3.15), the statements data set being used does not contain
any SELECT process statements.
Note: When member generations of a PDSE version 2 data set are searched for character strings, only
members of the current generation are searched.

214 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Search-For utility (option 3.14)

Menu Functions Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
SEARCH USERID.DATASET Row 00001 of 00026

Enter END command to process selections or CANCEL to leave the member list.

Name Prompt Size Created Changed ID

. COPY01T 10 2002/09/06 2002/09/17 12:56:47 USERID
. COPY01TM 10 2002/08/26 2002/08/28 18:23:19 USERID
. COPY0102 17 2002/09/05 2002/09/06 09:59:12 USERID
. DCAR 7 2002/08/06 2002/08/06 13:59:01 USERID
. DT1 5 2002/08/08 2002/08/08 17:09:42 USERID
. FMNCCPY1 17 2002/09/12 2002/09/18 14:45:55 USERID
. FMNCCPY2 17 2002/09/12 2002/09/12 15:10:06 USERID
. NEWCPPYT 17 2002/09/05 2002/09/05 18:24:29 USERID
. TEMP0102 17 2002/08/28 2002/08/28 18:38:02 USERID
. TESTMD1 10 2002/08/29 2002/08/29 17:02:17 USERID
. TEST0102 17 2001/03/08 2002/09/02 15:18:53 USERID
. TEST3 17 2002/09/06 2002/09/06 10:04:59 USERID
. TEST4 17 2002/09/06 2002/09/06 11:26:50 USERID
Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F5=Rfind F7=Up F8=Down F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 139. Search member list panel (ISRSSML)

To start the search, enter the END command.

To cancel your selections, enter either:
• The RESET command to remove all unprocessed selections without ending the member list display
• The CANCEL command to end the member list display without processing selections still on the screen.
Note: Both the jump function (=) and the RETURN command cause an implied cancellation of selections
before they are carried out.
For more information about member lists, see the Using Member Selection Lists section of the "ISPF
Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.

Submitting a Search-For job in batch mode

If you selected Batch Mode (2) on the Search-For Utility panel, the panel shown in Figure 140 on page
216 is displayed before the job is submitted.

Utilities (option 3) 215

Search-ForE utility (option 3.15)

Search-For Utility - Submit Batch jobs

Press ENTER to continue submit

Enter "/" to select option Generate Output Type:

/ Edit JCL before user submit 1 1. SYSOUT Class
2. Data Set Name
3. //OUTDD DD
SYSOUT Class . . . . A

Data Set Name . . .

//OUTDD DD . . . . .
// . . . . . . . . .
LRECL for the Listing Output will be 133

Job statement information: (Required - Enter/Verify JOB control statement)

===>
===>
===>
===>
Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F12=Cancel

Figure 140. Search-For Utility - Submit Batch Jobs panel (ISRSFSUB)

This panel allows you to specify one of these Generate Output types:
• The SYSOUT class, which determines the printer to which your job is sent and the format used for the
printed output
• The name of a listing data set
• Output data definitions that you can use to give the printer additional instructions, such as an output
destination that is not defined by a SYSOUT class.
The Job Statement information field is explained in the details about Job Statement Information in the
Libraries and Data Sets topic of the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I. The other fields on this panel, as well as
the options listed at the top of the panel, are described in “Submitting a SuperC job in batch mode” on
page 196.

Search-ForE utility (option 3.15)

Note: For an introduction to the Search-For and Extended Search-For utilities, see Appendix A, “SuperC
reference,” on page 443.
If you select option 3.15, the Extended Search-For Utility panel, shown in Figure 141 on page 217, is
displayed. This utility is a dialog that uses the SuperC program to search your data sets or PDS members
for one or more character strings. It is appropriate if you need more flexibility than the standard Search-
For utility (option 3.14) provides.
Note: When member generations of a PDSE version 2 data set are searched for character strings, only
members of the current generation are searched.

216 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Search-ForE utility (option 3.15)

Menu Utilities Options Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Extended Search-For Utility
More: +
Search DS Name . .
PDS Member List . . (blank/pattern - member list, * - search all)

(Leave Search DSN "blank" for concatenated-uncataloged-password panel)

Enter Search Strings and Optional operands (WORD/PREFIX/SUFFIX,C)

Caps . .
Caps . .
Caps . .
Asis . .
Asis . .

Listing DSN . . . . SRCHFOR.LIST

Process Options . .
Statements Dsn . .

Enter "/" to select option Execution Mode Output Mode

Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 141. Extended Search-For Utility panel (ISRSFPRI)

Search-ForE Utility panel action bar

The Search-ForE Utility panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu
For more information, see the details about the Menu Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Utilities
For more information, see the details about the Utilities Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Options
1
Edit statements
2
Process options
Help
The Help pull-down provides general information about Extended Search-For topics, including how to
specify data sets, search strings, process options and process statements.

Search-ForE Utility panel fields

The panel requires only the entry of character string(s). The fields on this panel are:
Search DS Name
Specify the name of a sequential data set, PDS, or membered PDS. Use standard TSO naming
conventions, including quotes for fully qualified names. Leave this field blank to display a panel on
which you can specify concatenated, uncataloged, and password-protected data sets. This panel is
shown in Figure 142 on page 220.
PDS Member List
Leave this field blank to display a list of all the members in the search data set. Otherwise, enter a
pattern or an asterisk (*). See “Search-For member lists” on page 214 for more information.
pattern
Entering a pattern causes ISPF to display a list of the members in the search data set that match
the pattern unless Bypass Selection List was selected. See the topic about Displaying Member

Utilities (option 3) 217

Search-ForE utility (option 3.15)

Lists in the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I for more
information about using patterns. For example:

PDS Member List . . . ISR*

*
Entering an asterisk causes all the members in the search data set to be searched.
You can also use SELECT process statements in the statements data set to specify an optional set of
PDS members to be searched. However, the SELECT statement turns off the PDS member list
function.
CAPS
A search string that you want the Extended Search-For utility to find. This search string is converted to
uppercase before the search begins and is found only if it exists in the search data set in uppercase.
The ANYC process option causes the string to be found in any case, (uppercase, lowercase, or mixed
case) even if you enter the string in the CAPS field.
You can enter up to three uppercase search strings, one in each CAPS field. Here are some examples:
example 1
Either of these strings may be found in the search data set:

CAPS . . . . THEN
CAPS . . . . IF

example 2
The two strings shown must be found on the same line because of the continuation (C) keyword.
THEN must be a complete word, while ISR must be the prefix of a word.

CAPS . . . . THEN WORD

CAPS . . . . ISR PREFIX C

example 3
In the next example, a hexadecimal string is specified as the search string. Use this to find
unprintable characters.

CAPS . . . . X'7B00'

example 4
This example searches for the string JOE'S CLIST. Notice that the string is enclosed in single
quotation marks and the apostrophe following Joe's name has been doubled.

CAPS . . . . 'JOE''S CLIST'

ASIS
A search string that you want the Extended Search-For utility to find. This search string is searched for
as it is when you enter it in the ASIS field. Therefore, the Extended Search-For utility does not find the
string unless it exists in the data set exactly as you enter it in an ASIS field. You can enter one search
string in each ASIS field.
The examples following the CAPS field definition apply to the ASIS field as well.
See “Search-For strings and keywords” on page 213 for a list of rules that determine the format
required for entering search strings and for definitions of the keywords that are shown in the
examples.
The SRCHFOR and SRCHFORC process statements override any strings entered in the CAPS and ASIS
fields.

218 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Search-ForE utility (option 3.15)

Listing DSN
The name of the list data set to which the Extended Search-For utility writes the listing information. If
you leave this field blank, Extended Search-For allocates a list data set, using default data set
attributes and this data set name:

prefix.userid.SRCHFOR.LIST

where prefix is your TSO prefix and userid is your user ID. If your prefix and user ID are identical, only
your prefix is used. Also, if you do not have a prefix, only your user ID is used.
Note: If the ISPF configuration table field USE_ADDITIONAL_QUAL_FOR_PDF_DATA_SETS is set to
YES, an additional qualifier defined with the ISPF_TEMPORARY_DATA_SET_QUALIFIER field is
included before the SRCHFOR qualifier.
If you enter a fully qualified data set name SuperC uses it as specified. Otherwise, SuperC only
appends your TSO prefix to the front of the data set name specified. If you run with TSO PROFILE
NOPREFIX, SuperC uses the name as you entered it, which can result in an attempt to catalog the
name in the master catalog.
If you enter the name of a data set that already exists, the contents of that data set are replaced by
the new listing output. However, if the data set is sequential, you can add this listing to the data set
instead of replacing it by using the APNDLST process option.
If you enter the name of a data set that does not exist, Search-For allocates it for you. The data set is
allocated as a sequential data set unless you enter a member name after it, in which case it is
allocated as a partitioned data set.
Process Options
Keywords that tell SuperC how to process the search-for operation. You can type these keywords in
the Process Options field or select them from a panel. See “Process options” on page 446 for tables of
keywords.
Bypass Selection List
When a member pattern is entered in the PDS Member List field, selecting this field causes SuperC to
process all members matching that pattern without displaying a member selection list. Leaving this
field blank causes the member list to be displayed.
Statements Dsn
The name of the data set that contains your search-for process statements, which you can create or
change by using primary command E on the Extended Search-For Utility panel. SuperC reads these
process statements before conducting the search. All statements data sets must be fixed block with
80-byte records (FB 80).
Execution Mode
Foreground
If you choose option 1, Foreground, and you leave the Search DS Name field blank, the Extended
Search-For - Concatenation Data Set Entry panel, shown in Figure 142 on page 220, is displayed.

Utilities (option 3) 219

Search-ForE utility (option 3.15)

Extended Search-For Concatenation Foreground Entry

"Search" Concatenation
DS1 . . .
DS2 . . .
DS3 . . .
DS4 . . .

Other "Search" Partitioned, Sequential or VSAM Data Set

Data Set Name . . .
Volume Serial . . . (If not cataloged)
Password . . . . . (Password allowed only in foreground mode)

Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F12=Cancel

Figure 142. Extended Search-For - concatenation data set entry panel (ISRSFCON)

For fields DS1 through DS4, use normal TSO naming conventions. You can specify a series of
concatenated data sets, an uncataloged or password-protected data set, or a cataloged data set
name.
Up to four data sets can be concatenated. Make sure the data sets are concatenated in the proper
sequence, as follows:
1. If two or more sequential data sets are concatenated as one input data set, the data set
attributes, such as block size, must be identical.
2. PDS concatenations must have the data set with the largest block size as the first in any
concatenation.
3. Search-For uses only the first occurrence of a member in the concatenated series of PDSs as
source input for a search. Any other occurrences of the member are ignored. You may specify
the SDUPM process option to cause SuperC to search for and report all occurrences of the
string for the entire concatenated series of PDS members.
Other partitioned or sequential data sets, volume serials, and data set passwords are specified as
on any other data entry panel. For more information, see the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets"
chapter in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Note: The Password field applies only to the other partitioned or sequential data set. TSO prompts
you if any concatenated data sets are password-protected.
Batch
Option 2 causes SuperC to process the data sets in batch mode. This choice frees the keyboard,
allowing you to continue using ISPF while waiting for SuperC to search the data sets. The output
listing is sent to the destination specified on the Search-For Utility - Submit Batch jobs panel
(Figure 140 on page 216).
The panel shown in Figure 143 on page 221 is displayed if you select option 2, Batch, and leave
the Search DS Name field blank on the Extended Search-For Utility panel. You can concatenate up
to four data sets that have like attributes. For example, all must be either sequential or
partitioned.

220 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Search-ForE utility (option 3.15)

Extended Search-For Concatenation Batch Entry

"Search" Concatenation
DS1 . . .
DS2 . . .
DS3 . . .
DS4 . . .

Other "Search" Partitioned, Sequential or VSAM Data Set

Data Set Name . . .
Volume Serial . . . (If not cataloged)
Password . . . . . (Password allowed only in foreground mode)

Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F12=Cancel

Figure 143. Extended Search-For - concatenation batch entry panel (ISRSFCON)

This panel is the same as the panel shown in Figure 142 on page 220, except the Password field is
used only in foreground mode. If your data sets are password-protected, search the data sets in
foreground mode by specifying Foreground in the Execution Mode field on the Extended Search-
For Utility panel.
If you selected the Batch option on the Extended Search-For Utility panel, the panel shown in
Figure 140 on page 216 is displayed before the job is submitted. Use this panel to specify whether
your Search-For listing is to be printed or written to a list data set.
Output Mode
The output mode you want to use when displaying the listing file. Choose one of these:
View
This enables the listing file to be displayed in view mode. All View functions are enabled in this
mode.
Browse
This enables the listing file to be displayed in the browse mode. All Browse functions are enabled
in this mode.

Search-ForE Utility primary commands

The SuperCE utility provides the functions described in these topics, each of which is controlled by a
command that you can type on the command line:
B – Batch
When you enter primary command B on the Extended Search-For Utility panel, processing is the same
as when you press Enter with Batch specified in the Execution Mode field. The value specified in the
Execution Mode field is ignored. See the section describing the Batch option in the Execution Mode
field for information on batch processing.
E – Edit statements
When you enter primary command E on the Extended Search-For Utility panel, the statements data
set that you specified in the Statements Dsn field is displayed in Edit mode. See “Edit statements -
edit Search-For statements data set” on page 222 for information related to the edit statements data
set.
P – Process options
When you enter primary command P on the Extended Search-For Utility panel, the Extended Search-
For Process Options panel is displayed. This panel contains the Extended Search-For process options.
See “Process options - select Search-For process options” on page 222 for information related to the
Extended Search-For Process Options panel.

Utilities (option 3) 221

Search-ForE utility (option 3.15)

Search-ForE Utility options

These topics describe the options that are available in the Options pull-down on the Extended Search-For
Utility panel action bar:
• “Process options - select Search-For process options” on page 222
• “Edit statements - edit Search-For statements data set” on page 222

Process options - select Search-For process options

When you select Process Options from the Options pull-down menu, the Extended Search-For Process
Options panel is displayed. This panel contains the Extended Search-For process options. You can also
access the Extended Search-For Process Options panel by entering the primary command P on the
Extended Search-For Utility panel.
Table 15 on page 222 lists all of the process options for Search-For.

Table 15. Search-For process options

ALLMEMS ANYC APNDLST ASCII CKPACKL COBOL Cpnnnnn

DPACMT DPADCMT DPBLKCL DPCBCMT DPCPCMT DPFTCMT DPMACMT
DPPLCMT DPPSCMT EMPTYOK FINDALL FMSTOP IDPFX LMTO
LNFMTO LONGLN LPSF LTO MIXED NOPRTCC NOSEQ
NOSUMS SDUPM SEQ XREF

These rules govern the selection of Search-For process options:

• Type any nonblank character to the left of one or more process options. Then press Enter. This causes
the options you specify to be displayed in the Process Options field on the Extended Search-For Utility
panel. If you select two options that cannot be specified together, or if you enter an option name
incorrectly, an error message is displayed. Use the Backward and Forward keys, as necessary, to move
through the panel.
• Use the CANCEL command to return to the Extended Search-For Utility panel without processing
selections.
Search-For process options can affect how the input data is processed, and determine the format and
content of the output listing data set. They can also help you save processing time by avoiding comments
and blank lines.
All these options can be chosen from the Search-For Process Options panel or you can type them in the
Process Options field on the Extended Search-For Utility panel. Errors caused by mistyping process
options are detected when you call the Extended Search-For utility.
For definitions of the Search-For process options, see “Process options” on page 446.

Edit statements - edit Search-For statements data set

A statements data set consists of process statements that contain instructions for the SuperC program.
They are similar to the process options, but are composed of a keyword and one or more operands. See
“Process options - select Search-For process options” on page 222 for information about Search-For
process options.
When you select Edit Statements from the Options menu on the Extended Search-For Utility panel, the
Extended Search-For utility displays the statements data set you specified in the Statements Dsn field.
You can also display the statements data set by entering the primary command E on the Extended
Search-For Utility panel. The statements data set is always displayed in Edit mode, allowing you to add,
change, or delete search-for process statements as needed.
The size of the Edit window depends on the number of lines your terminal can display. The sample panel
shown in Figure 144 on page 223 shows how the Edit window appears on a 24-line display. Examples of
some common process statements are listed below the Edit window so you can easily compose the
proper input line.

222 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 ISPF table utility (option 3.16)

USERID.SRCHFOR.STMTS Columns 00001 00072

Enter or change Process Statements in the EDIT window below:

****** ***************************** Top of Data ******************************
''''''
''''''
''''''
''''''
''''''
''''''
''''''
''''''
****** **************************** Bottom of Data ****************************
Examples Explanation
SRCHFOR 'ABCD',W Search for the word "ABCD"
SRCHFORC 'DEFG' "DEFG" must be on same line as word "ABCD"
CMPCOLM 1:60 75:90 Search columns 1:60 and 75:90 for string(s)
DPLINE 'PAGE ',87:95 Exclude line if "PAGE " found in columns 87:99
DPLINE 'PAGE ' Exclude if "PAGE " found anywhere on line
SELECT MEM1,MEM2 Search only members MEM1 and MEM2 of PDS
- - - - -
Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F5=Rfind F6=Rchange F7=Up
F8=Down F9=Swap F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 144. Search-For process statements panel (ISRSFPRS)

The SuperC program validates the process statements at run time. Invalid process statements are not
used and are noted at the bottom of the listing. Unless a higher return code is required by some other
condition, a return code of 4 is returned.
For the syntax and examples of the Search-For process statements, see “Process statements” on page
457.

ISPF table utility (option 3.16)

The ISPF Table Utility (Option 3.16) provides functions for processing ISPF tables. When you select this
option, the ISPF Table Utility entry panel is displayed. This panel allows you to specify a table data set or
DD, a table name, and an option to be performed.
The Edit and Browse functions allow you to view the data in the rows of an ISPF table in full-screen mode
(that is, multiple rows are displayed on a screen). Line commands allow you to work with individual or
multiple table rows. Primary commands are provided to support processing against the entire table,
including changing the format of the displayed data. Table data can be scrolled in any direction (up, down,
left, or right). All table column values are displayed in scrollable fields, allowing columns to be scrolled
left or right, and individual column values to be expanded and displayed in a popup window. The values
for any extension variables associated with a particular table row can be displayed.
The Edit function allows you to change the data in a table simply by overtyping the displayed value. Edit
function line commands are available to insert new table rows, repeat rows, and delete rows. Extension
variables for a table row can be created, modified, or deleted.
The Export function writes the data in an ISPF table to a sequential file so that it can be browsed or
edited. You can customize the format of the data written to the sequential file.
The Import function uses the data in a sequential file to either create a new ISPF table or replace an
existing table. The data in the sequential file is required to be in a special format generated by the ISPF
Table Utility Export function.

Utilities (option 3) 223

ISPF table utility (option 3.16)

Menu RefList Utilities Options Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
ISPF Table Utility
Option ===>

blank Display table list E Edit table

B Browse table I Import table data

Enter one of the parameters below:

Table Data Set . .
or Table DD . . . ISPTLIB (Default is ISPTLIB)

Table Name . . . . ________ (Blank or pattern for table selection list)

Import Data Set ______________________________________________

Enter "/" to select option

_ Open table in SHARE mode
_ Table is an EDIT line command table

F1=Help F3=Exit F12=Cancel F13=Help F15=End F16=Return

F17=Rfind F18=Rchange F22=Left F23=Right F24=Cretriev

Figure 145. ISPF Table Utility panel (ISRUTBP0)

Table Utility panel action bar

The Table Utility Panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu
For more information, see the details about the Menu Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
RefList
For information about referral lists, see the topic about Using Personal Data Set Lists and Library Lists
in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Utilities
For more information, see the details about the Utilities Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Options
The Options pull-down offers these choices:
1
Table Utilities Options
2
Export Report Options
3
Export Data Set Attributes
Help
The Help pull-down provides general information about Table Utility topics as well as information
about each of the main panels and options.

Table Utility panel fields

The fields on the ISPF Table Utility panel are:
Table Data Set
The name of the data set containing the table you wish to process.
Table DD
The name of the DD allocated to your ISPF session which contains the table you wish to process.
The default is the ISPTLIB DD if you do not enter data for either the Table Data Set or Table DD. If you
enter data in both the Table Data Set and Table DD fields, the Table Data Set takes precedence.

224 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 ISPF table utility (option 3.16)

Table Name
The name of the table you wish to process.
If you leave this field blank or supply a pattern the table selection list will be displayed showing the
matching tables in the table data set or DD.
Import Data Set
The name of the sequential data set containing the data used to create or replace a table through the
Import function.
Open table in SHARE mode
Select this option if the table you choose to process is already open on another logical screen, or if you
might need to share the table with another logical screen.
Table is an EDIT line command table
Select this option to create a table that can be used as an Edit line command table. The utility creates
predefined columns. This option also formats unique headings to be used with an Edit line command
table.

Table utility entry panel options

These are the options shown on the ISPF Table Utility entry panel:
Blank - (Display Table List)
If you leave the Option field blank, a list of tables for the Table Data Set or Table DD is displayed when
the Table Name is either blank or contains a pattern. If a valid Table Name is entered, the table list is
bypassed and the Edit/Browse panel is displayed.
B - (Browse Table)
If a valid Table Name for the Table Data Set or Table DD is entered, the Browse Table panel is
displayed. If the Table Name is either blank or contains a pattern, the table list is displayed allowing
you to select the table to be browsed.
E - (Edit Table)
If a valid Table Name for the Table Data Set or Table DD is entered, the Edit Table Display panel is
displayed. If the Table Name is either blank or contains a pattern, the table list is displayed allowing
you to select the table to be edited.
I - (Import Table Data)
The Import function uses data from a sequential data set to create a new ISPF table or update an
existing ISPF table. You must supply a Table Data Set and Table Name for the new or updated table.
The sequential data set containing the data that will be used to create or update the table must be
specified in the Import Data Set field.

Table data set selection list

This selection list is displayed when you enter a table data set name and either no table name or a table
name pattern on the table utility entry panel.

Utilities (option 3) 225

ISPF table utility (option 3.16)

Menu Utilities Options Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
ISPF Table List Row 1 to 12 of 29
Command ===> ________________________________________________ Scroll ===> CSR

List of tables in table library PDFTOOL.COMMON.TABLES

Name
--------
_ BLG0CMDS
_ BLG0KEYS
_ BLG0PROF
_ BLSGEDIT
_ BLSGEDRT
_ BLSGPROF
_ BLSLPROF
_ DAFCMDS
_ ECXPDFPC
_ HSOCMDS
_ MOSCMDS
_ MVS8CMDS
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 146. Table data set selection list panel (ISRUTBP1)

If no table name is supplied, all members in the table data set are shown in the selection list. If a table
name pattern is supplied, all members in the table data set that have a name matching the pattern are
shown in the selection list.
These line commands are available on the table data set selection list panel:
E
The Edit line command displays the EDIT table panel. It is available if you did not enter an option on
the table utility entry panel.
B
The Browse line command displays the BROWSE table panel. It is available if you did not enter an
option on the table utility entry panel.
S
When you use the Select line command against a table, either the BROWSE table or EDIT table panel
is displayed:
• BROWSE table is displayed if you entered option B on the entry panel.
• EDIT table is displayed if you entered option E on the entry panel.
• If you did not enter option B or E on the entry panel, the panel is determined by how the option "Use
EDIT as default to process selected table" is set. To set this option, select Table Utility Options panel
from the Options pull-down.
These primary commands are available on the table data set selection list panel:
L string
The Locate command scrolls the selection list and positions at the top of the display the entry which
either matches or precedes (in alphabetic sequence) the value of string.
S tblname
The Select command searches the selection list for an entry that matches tblname. If a matching
entry is found the table is displayed in either the BROWSE table or EDIT table panel, following the
same rules as for the Select line command.
E tblname
The Edit command is available if you did not enter an option on the table utility entry panel. The
selection list is searched for an entry that matches tblname. If a matching entry is found the EDIT
table panel is displayed.

226 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 ISPF table utility (option 3.16)

B tblname
The Browse command is available if you did not enter an option on the table utility entry panel. The
selection list is searched for an entry that matches tblname. If a matching entry is found the BROWSE
table panel is displayed.

Table DD selection list

This selection list is displayed when you enter a table DD and either no table name or a table name
pattern on the table utility entry panel.

Menu Utilities Options Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
ISPF Table List Row 1 to 12 of 443
Command ===> ________________________________________________ Scroll ===> CSR

List of tables in data sets allocated to DD ISPTLIB

Concat.
Name Number Table Data Set
-------- ------- ----------------------------------------------
_ $ISRPROF 1 PDFTDEV.LSACKV.TABLES
_ #ISRPROF 1 PDFTDEV.LSACKV.TABLES
_ ABCPROF 7 LSACKV.ISPF.ISPPROF
_ ACBKEYS 17 SYS1.DGTTLIB
_ ADB2DB2D 9 SYS2.TABLES.SYSPLEXD
_ ADB2PARM 23 DB2.ADMIN.V2R1M0.SADBTLIB
_ ADB21D 23 DB2.ADMIN.V2R1M0.SADBTLIB
_ ADB21DI2 23 DB2.ADMIN.V2R1M0.SADBTLIB
_ ADB21S 23 DB2.ADMIN.V2R1M0.SADBTLIB
_ ADB21SP 23 DB2.ADMIN.V2R1M0.SADBTLIB
_ ADB21T 23 DB2.ADMIN.V2R1M0.SADBTLIB
_ ADB21X 23 DB2.ADMIN.V2R1M0.SADBTLIB
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 147. Table DD selection list panel (ISRUTBP2)

If no table name was supplied, all members in the data sets allocated to the table DD are shown in the
selection list. If a table name pattern was supplied, all members in the data sets allocated to the table DD
which have a name matching the pattern are shown in the selection list.
The table DD selection list is sorted in member name order. Along with the member name, the selection
list displays the name of the table data set where the member was found, and the concatenation number
for that data set within the table DD.
These line commands are available on the table DD selection list panel:
E
The Edit line command displays the EDIT table panel. It is available if you did not enter an option on
the table utility entry panel.
B
The Browse line command displays the BROWSE table panel. It is available if you did not enter an
option on the table utility entry panel.
S
When you use the Select line command against a table, either the BROWSE table or EDIT table panel
is displayed:
• BROWSE table is displayed if you entered option B on the entry panel.
• EDIT table is displayed if you entered option E on the entry panel.
• If you did not enter option B or E on the entry panel, the panel is determined by how the option "Use
EDIT as default to process selected table" is set. To set this option, select Table Utility Options panel
from the Options pull-down.
These primary commands are available on the table data set selection list panel:

Utilities (option 3) 227

ISPF table utility (option 3.16)

L string
The Locate command scrolls the selection list and positions at the top of the display the entry which
either matches or precedes (in alphabetic sequence) the value of string.
S tblname
The Select command searches the selection list for an entry that matches tblname. If a matching
entry is found the table is displayed in either the BROWSE table or EDIT table panel, following the
same rules as for the Select line command.
E tblname
The Edit command is available if you did not enter an option on the table utility entry panel. The
selection list is searched for an entry that matches tblname. If a matching entry is found the EDIT
table panel is displayed.
B tblname
The Browse command is available if you did not enter an option on the table utility entry panel. The
selection list is searched for an entry that matches tblname. If a matching entry is found the BROWSE
table panel is displayed.

Edit/browse table panel

The table display panel used for the Edit and Browse functions of the table utility shows multiple rows on
the one screen. Each row occupies one line on the screen. The UP and DOWN primary commands allow
you to scroll through the rows in a table.

Options Help
───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
BROWSE ISPF Table BLSGEDIT Row 1 to 15 of 17
Command ===> ________________________________________________ Scroll ===> CSR
Shift ===> PAGE
ZEDPTYPE ZEDPLRCL ZEDPRCFM ZEDPFLAG ZEDPBNDL ZEDPBNDR
----+--- ----+--- ----+--- ----+----1----+----2---- ----+--- ----+---
__ TRACE 128 F 000000101000000000010000 0 0
__ CLIST 251 V 010000000000100000010000 0 0
__ PANELS 80 F 000000101000100000010000 0 0
__ TRACE 72 F 000000101000000000010000 0 0
__ CNTL 80 F 000000001000100000010000 0 0
__ JCL 80 F 010000000000100000010000 0 0
__ VCALL 80 F 000000001000000000000000 0 0
__ TRACE 121 V 000000001000000000000000 0 0
__ F02 80 F 000000001000000000000000 0 0
__ F03 121 V 000000001000000000000000 0 0
__ PRINT1 129 V 000000001000000000000000 0 0
__ TEXT 251 V 010000000000000000000000 0 0
__ ISPVCALL 80 V 000000000000000000000000 0 0
__ TRACE 80 F 000000000000000000000000 0 0
__ LOG 121 V 000000000000000000000000 0 0
F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Expand F5=Rfind F12=Cancel F13=Help
F15=End F16=Return F17=Rfind F22=Left F23=Right F24=Cretriev

Figure 148. Table display panel, edit mode (ISRUTBP3)

The dialog variables for the table rows are displayed in columns across the screen, with the dialog
variable names shown as column headings. The RIGHT and LEFT primary commands allow you to view
any columns that are not currently visible.
Two options on the Table Utility Options panel control how key values are displayed:
• Color used to display table key values specifies the color (BLUE, RED, PINK, GREEN, TURQ, YELLOW, or
WHITE).
• Intensity used to display table key values specifies the intensity (HIGH or LOW).
The default color is GREEN and the default intensity is HIGH. For the Edit function, key values are always
underscored. For the Browse function, key values are not underscored.
To determine the width required for each column field, the table utility must scan the table rows and
check the length of the table variable values. While the utility uses an efficient method to scan a table, this

228 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 ISPF table utility (option 3.16)

process can be time consuming for a table with an extremely large number of rows. You can limit the
number of rows scanned through the "Maximum rows searched to determine column width" option on the
Table Utility Options panel.
All table variables are displayed in scrollable fields, with a scale indicator displayed below each column
heading. Using scrollable fields allows the EXPAND primary command to be used to display the value of a
table variable in a popup window. This popup window can display and edit data in HEX mode. The
scrollable fields also allow you to use the RIGHT and LEFT primary commands to horizontally scroll
column values.
For the Browse function, all the fields displaying table variable values are protected. For the Edit function,
all these fields are unprotected and you can make changes to the table variable values by overtyping the
displayed data.
For the Edit function, when you press Exit (F3) the changes are saved to a table output library. Normally
the changes would be saved to the originating data set.
If you specified the table name and a Table DD on the ISPF Table Utility panel, and the "Always save table
in originating data set" check box on the Table Utility Options panel is not selected, ISPF prompts you to
specify the output data set. See “Table output data set selection” on page 238 for more information.

Line commands
This topic describes the line commands available on the Edit/Browse panel.
E
Extension Variables. Use this command to display the extension variables for the table row. When
using the Edit function, the values of the extension variables can be changed, new extension variables
can be created, and existing extension variables can be deleted. See “Extension Variables panel” on
page 229.
In
Insert Row After. Use this command to insert one or more rows after the row where the line command
was entered. The table variable values for an inserted row are initialized with blanks.
Bn
Insert Row Before. Use this command to insert one or more rows before the row where the line
command was entered. The table variable values for an inserted row are initialized with blanks.
Rn
Repeat Row. Use this command to create one or more copies of the table row. The copied rows are
inserted after the row where the line command was entered. For the copied rows, all variables
excluding keys are initialized using the values from the corresponding variables in the row where the
line command was entered. Key variables are initialized with blanks.
Dn
Delete Row. Use this command to delete one or more table rows.
Note:
1. The E command is available in both the Edit and Browse functions. The I, B, R, and D commands are
only available in the Edit function.
2. For all line commands except E, an optional number from 1 to 9 can be entered as a suffix to the line
command character. This causes the command to operate on multiple rows starting with the row on
which the command was entered.
3. When processing a keyed table, the optional number is ignored for the line commands I, B, and R.

Extension Variables panel

The Extension Variables panel shows the names and values of the extension variables defined for a table
row. To display the extension variables panel, enter the E line command against a table row on the table
display screen.

Utilities (option 3) 229

ISPF table utility (option 3.16)

Options Help
───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
BLSGEDIT Extension Variables for Row 1 Row 1 to 3 of 3
Command ===> ________________________________________________ Scroll ===> CSR

Extension variable values scrollable width: 65

S Name Value
-- -------- -----------------------------------------------------------------
----+----1----+----2----+----3----+----4----+----5----+----6----+
__ ZEDPIMAC
__ ZEDPFLG2 01000011
__ ZEDPFLG3 00000001
******************************* Bottom of data ********************************

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F5=Rfind F7=Up F8=Down

F9=Swap F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 149. Extension Variables Panel (ISRUTBP4)

When you edit a table, the extension variable names and their values and the "Extension variable values
scrollable width" are displayed in unprotected fields. You can change the extension variable names and
values by overtyping the displayed data. You can use the selection field to enter a line command against
an extension variable. When you browse a table, the extension variable names and values are protected,
and the selection field is unavailable.
The extension variable values are displayed in scrollable fields with a scale indicator displayed below the
column heading. You can use the RIGHT and LEFT primary commands to horizontally scroll through one of
the values. You can enter the EXPAND primary command to display the value of an extension variable in a
popup window. This popup window also enables you to display and edit data in HEX mode.
The "Extension variable values scrollable width" field initially displays the length of the scrollable width of
the field that displays the extension variable values. This length will be the maximum of either:
• The length of the field displaying the values. This length depends on the width of the screen. For
example, if the screen has a width of 80 characters the field will have a length of 65 characters. For a
screen with a width of 132 characters the field will have a length of 117 characters.
• The length of the largest value for the extension variables displayed.
If you need to lengthen the value for an extension variable beyond the scrollable limit, you can use this
field to enter a numeric value to increase the scrollable width of the field. You can then use the EXPAND
primary command (F4) to update the value of the extension variable.

Line commands
This topic describes the line commands available on the Extension Variables panel.
In
Insert Extension Variable After. Use this command to insert one or more extension variables after the
row where the line command was entered. The name and value for the inserted extension variable are
initialized with blanks.
Bn
Insert Extension Variable Before. Use this command to insert one or more extension variables before
the row where the line command was entered. The name and value for an inserted extension variable
are initialized with blanks.
Rn
Repeat Extension Variable. Use this command to create one or more copies of the extension variable.
The extension variables are inserted after the row where the line command was entered. For the new

230 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 ISPF table utility (option 3.16)

extension variables, the names and values are copied from the extension variable where the line
command was entered.
Dn
Delete Extension Variable. Use this command to delete one or more extension variables.
Note:
1. Line commands on the extension variables panel are only available when using the Edit function.
2. For all line commands, an optional number from 1 to 9 can be entered as a suffix to the line command
character. This causes the command to operate on multiple extension variables starting with the
extension variable against which the command was entered.

Primary commands
This topic describes the primary commands available on the Table Utility Edit/Browse panel:
Navigating through the table
• UP
• DOWN
• LEFT
• RIGHT
• FIND
• RFIND
Changing the data or how it is displayed
• INSERT
• EXPAND
• SORT
• STATS
• STRUCT
Saving or exporting table data
• SAVE
• CANCEL
• EXPORT
• FEXPORT
Browse and Edit primary commands are entered in the Command field. All the primary commands except
SAVE are available in both the Edit and Browse functions. The SAVE command is only available in Edit.
CANCEL
Terminate Edit without Saving Changes. The CANCEL command (F12) terminates table editing without
saving the table data to the output data set.
CAN can be used as an abbreviation for the CANCEL command.
DOWN
Scroll Down. The standard ISPF DOWN command (F8|F20) can be used to vertically scroll the table
display towards the bottom of the table.
ISPF supported scroll amount values used for the DOWN command can be entered in the Scroll field.
You can also enter a valid scroll amount in the Command field.
EXPAND
Expand Display of Scrollable Field. The standard ISPF EXPAND command (F4) can be used to display
a table variable value in a popup window containing a scrollable dynamic area. To do this, enter
EXPAND while the cursor is placed on the field displaying a table variable value.

Utilities (option 3) 231

ISPF table utility (option 3.16)

EXPORT
Display Table Export Layout. The Export Layout panel is displayed when the EXPORT primary
command is entered on the Edit/Browse panel. This panel shows the structure used to format the
table data written to the export output data set. You can make changes to the structure to alter the
format of the data written to the output data set.

Options Help
───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Table BLG0CMDS Export Layout Row 1 to 9 of 9
Command ===> ________________________________________________ Scroll ===> CSR

Overtype the Order column and press ENTER to rearrange the fields into the
order in which you would like them to be dumped. Change Width as required.
Only fields with an Order value less than 999 will be dumped.
Use the FILE primary command to write the table data to the export data set.
Cumulative
Order Name Field Heading Width Width
----- -------- ---------------------------------- ------- ----------
001 ZEDPTYPE ZEDPTYPE 8 9
002 ZEDPLRCL ZEDPLRCL 8 18
003 ZEDPRCFM ZEDPRCFM 8 27
004 ZEDPFLAG ZEDPFLAG 24 52
005 ZEDPBNDL ZEDPBNDL 8 61
006 ZEDPBNDR ZEDPBNDR 8 70
007 ZEDPTABC ZEDPTABC 8 79
008 ZEDPMASK ZEDPMASK 8 88
009 ZEDPTABS ZEDPTABS 8 97
******************************* Bottom of data ********************************
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 150. Table Export Layout panel (ISRUTBP7)

The screen shows the current structure used to format the table data written to the export data set.
The list contains these fields:
Order
This input field allows you to enter a number which defines the sequence in which the table
variables for each row are placed in the export data set. For example, assigning an Order of 001 to
a table variable makes it the first to be written to each table data record in the export data set.
Note: Only table variables that have an Order value less than 999 are written to the export data
set.
Name
The name of the table variable.
Field Heading
This input field allows you to define a heading for each table variable written to the export data
set. It is initialized with the name of the associated table variable.
Width
This input field allows you to define the number of characters allocated to the column used to
print a table variable value. This field is initialized to the display length of the table variable value
on the table display screen.
Cumulative Width
This field shows the total number of characters required in the export data set record to
accommodate this variable and all the preceding table variables.
When you are happy you have the correct format defined, use the FILE primary command to write the
table data to the export data set.
These abbreviations can be used for the EXPORT command:

EX
EXP
EXPO
EXPOR

232 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 ISPF table utility (option 3.16)

FILE
The FILE command causes the table data to be written to the export data set in the format defined
on the export layout panel.
The name of the export output data set can be specified as a parameter to the FILE command. You
can enter any fully qualified data set name by enclosing it in apostrophes. If you omit the
apostrophes, your TSO prefix or user ID (if no TSO prefix is defined in your TSO user profile) is
added to the beginning of the data set name. For example, if a user whose TSO prefix is LSACKV
issues the command FILE TAB1.DATA, the table data report is written to the export data set
LSACKV.TAB1.DATA.
If you do not specify an export data set name on the FILE command, a default name is generated
according to these rules:
• If no TSO prefix is defined in your TSO user profile: userid.tblname.TBLDUMP
• If your TSO prefix and user ID are the same: tsopref.tblname.TBLDUMP
• If your TSO prefix and user ID are not the same: tsopref.userid.tblname.TBLDUMP
tsopref is your TSO prefix. userid is your TSO user ID. tblname is the name of the table you are
processing.
Note: If the ISPF configuration table field USE_ADDITIONAL_QUAL_FOR_PDF_DATA_SETS is set
to YES, an additional qualifier defined with the ISPF_TEMPORARY_DATA_SET_QUALIFIER field is
included before the tblname qualifier.
A warning message might be displayed if the export data set already exists. You then have the
option of terminating the command to avoid overwriting the data set. If you don't want to receive
these warnings in future, clear the "Warn if export data set exists" check box on the Table Utility
Options panel.
When the FILE command has finished, the export data set is displayed. The "Display mode for
export data set" option on the Table Utility Options panel allows you to choose either the ISPF
Browse, View, or Edit functions to display the export data set.
These abbreviations can be used for the FILE command:

FI
FIL

FEXPORT
Fast EXPORT Command. The FEXPORT command writes the table data to the export output data set
without displaying the export layout panel.
The name of the export output data set can be specified as a parameter to the FEXPORT command.
You can enter any fully qualified data set name by enclosing it in apostrophes. If you omit the
apostrophes, your TSO prefix or user ID (if no TSO prefix is defined in your TSO user profile) is added
to the beginning of the data set name. For example, if a user whose TSO prefix is LSACKV issues the
command FEXPORT TAB1.DATA, the table data report is written to the export data set
LSACKV.TAB1.DATA.
If you do not specify an export data set name on the FEXPORT command, a default name is generated
according to these rules:
• If no TSO prefix is defined in your TSO user profile: userid.tblname.TBLDUMP
• If your TSO prefix and user ID are the same: tsopref.tblname.TBLDUMP
• If your TSO prefix and user ID are not the same: tsopref.userid.tblname.TBLDUMP
tsopref is your TSO prefix. userid is your TSO user ID. tblname is the name of the table you are
processing.
Note: If the ISPF configuration table field USE_ADDITIONAL_QUAL_FOR_PDF_DATA_SETS is set to
YES, an additional qualifier defined with the ISPF_TEMPORARY_DATA_SET_QUALIFIER field is
included before the tblname qualifier.

Utilities (option 3) 233

ISPF table utility (option 3.16)

If the export data set exists when the FEXPORT command is issued and you have selected "Warn if
export data set exists" on the Table Utility Options panel, a warning popup panel is displayed. You
then have the option of terminating the command to avoid overwriting the data set.
When the FEXPORT command has finished, the export data set is displayed. The "Display mode for
export data set" option on the Table Utility Options panel allows you to choose either the ISPF
Browse, View, or Edit functions to display the export data set.
These abbreviations can be used for the FEXPORT command:

FE
FEX
FEXP
FEXPO
FEXPOR

FIND
Search for String in Table. The FIND command can be used to search for the occurrence of a character
string in a specified column in the table. If the string is found, the row in which it is found is positioned
at the top of the display.
The FIND command has these formats:

FIND varname string

FIND n string

where:
varname
The name of any of the table variables.
n
The ordinal number of any column displayed on the current screen.
string
The character string to be searched for. The search is not case sensitive.
These abbreviations can be used for the FIND command:

F
FI
FIN

INSERT
Insert a Blank Row at the Top of the Table. Use the INSERT command to create a new blank row as the
first row in the table. This command allows you to create a row in an empty table.
LEFT
Scroll Left. The LEFT command (F10|F22) can be used to scroll the table display horizontally towards
the first table column.
The scroll amount values used for the LEFT command can be entered in the Shift field. You can also
enter one of these valid scroll amounts in the Command field:
PAGE
Causes the display to scroll left by the width of the screen.
MAX
Causes the display to scroll left so that the first column for the table is the leftmost displayed.
0 to 9999
Causes the display to scroll left the specified number of columns.
Note: Table variable values are displayed in scrollable fields. Therefore if the cursor is placed in a field
displaying a table variable value, the LEFT command operates on that field, not on the whole table
display.

234 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 ISPF table utility (option 3.16)

RFIND
Repeat Last FIND Command. The RFIND command (F5|F17) is used to repeat the last FIND
command. It is most useful when assigned to a function key.
R can be used as an abbreviation for the RFIND command.
RIGHT
Scroll Right. The RIGHT command (F11|F23) can be used to scroll the table display horizontally
towards the last table column.
The scroll amount values used for the RIGHT command can be entered in the Shift field. You can also
enter one of these valid scroll amounts in the Command field:
PAGE
Causes the display to scroll right by the width of the screen.
MAX
Causes the display to scroll right so that the last column for the table is the rightmost displayed.
0 to 9999
Causes the display to scroll right the specified number of columns.
Note: Table variable values are displayed in scrollable fields. Therefore if the cursor is placed in a field
displaying a table variable value, the RIGHT command operates on that field, not on the whole table
display.
SAVE
Save Table Changes. The SAVE command causes the changes to the table data to be written to the
table output library. Normally the changes would be saved to the originating data set.
If you specified the table name and a Table DD on the ISPF Table Utility panel, and the "Always save
table in originating data set" check box on the Table Utility Options panel is not selected, ISPF
prompts you to specify the output data set. See “Table output data set selection” on page 238 for
more information.
SAV can be used as an abbreviation for the SAVE command.
SORT
Display Table Sort Definition. The Sort Specification panel is displayed when the SORT primary
command is entered on the Edit/Browse panel. This panel allows you to sort the table according to the
values of one or more table variables.

Options Help
───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Table BLSGEDIT Sort Specification Row 1 to 9 of 9
Command ===> ________________________________________________ Scroll ===> CSR

Overtype the Order column and press ENTER to rearrange the table variables
into the order in which you would like them to be sorted. Change Sequence to A
(Ascending) or D (Descending) as required. Table BLSGEDIT will only be sorted
using table variable with an Order less than 999.

Order Name Sequence (A/D)

----- -------- --------------
999 ZEDPTYPE A
999 ZEDPLRCL A
999 ZEDPRCFM A
999 ZEDPFLAG A
999 ZEDPBNDL A
999 ZEDPBNDR A
999 ZEDPTABC A
999 ZEDPMASK A
999 ZEDPTABS A
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 151. Table Sort Specification panel (ISRUTBP8)

The screen displays a list of the table variables and contains these fields:

Utilities (option 3) 235

ISPF table utility (option 3.16)

Order
This input field allows you to enter a number which defines the sort priority for the associated
table variable. For example, assigning an Order of 001 makes the associated table variable the
primary sort key.
Note: The table will only be sorted on those variables that have an Order value less than 999.
Name
The name of the table variable.
Sequence (A/D)
This input field allows you to define whether to sort in ascending (A) or descending (D) sequence
for the associated table variable.
When you press Exit (F3) to return to the Edit/Browse panel it is sorted based on changes made on the
table sort display.
Note: If you are using Edit, the sort criteria entered on this screen are saved with the table.
These abbreviations can be used for the SORT command:

SO
SOR

STATS
Display Table Statistics. The table statistics display is invoked when the STATS primary command is
entered on the browse/edit table display. This screen shows the statistical information that ISPF
maintains for the table.

┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ Statistics for Table BLG0CMDS │
│ Command ===> __________________________________________________________ │
│ The following information is returned by the TBSTATS service: │
│ │
│ Created on . . . : 1997/01/14 at 13:26:23 │
│ Last updated on : 2004/08/27 at 09:37:02 by LSACKV │
│ │
│ Initial number of rows when created . . . . . . : 101 │
│ Current number of rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . : 101 │
│ Number of existing rows which have been updated : 2 │
│ Number of times table has been updated . . . . . : 7 │
│ Virtual storage size (bytes) . . . . . . . . . . : 8,072 │
│ │
│ Last TABLE SERVICES command . . . . . . . . . . : TBTOP │
│ Return code from above service . . . . . . . . . : 0 │
│ │
│ Status 1 : 1 - table exists in input library chain │
│ Status 2 : 3 - table is open in WRITE mode in this logical screen │
│ Status 3 : 2 - table is not available for WRITE mode │
│ │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward │
│ F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel │
⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 152. Table statistics panel (ISRUTBP6)

The screen shows these fields:

Created on
The date and time the table was originally created.
Last updated on
The date and time the table was last modified.
by
User ID of the last user who modified the table.
Initial number of rows when created
Number of rows that were added during the session when the table was first created and then
closed.

236 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 ISPF table utility (option 3.16)

Current number of rows

Number of rows currently in the table.
Number of existing rows which have been updated
Number of rows that have been modified in the table at least once. A row that is added to an
existing table is considered a modified row.
Number of times table has been updated
Number of editing sessions during which the table has been modified. Opening a table, then
making one or more updates, then closing and saving the table increments this count by one.
Virtual storage size (bytes)
Number of bytes of virtual storage required by the table.
Last TABLE SERVICES command
The name of the last table service called.
Return code from above service
The return code issued by the last table service called.
Status 1
The status of the table in the table input library chain.
Status 2
The status of the table in this logical screen.
Status 3
The availability of the table to be used in WRITE mode.
STRUCT
Display Table Structure. The table structure panel is invoked when the STRUCT primary command is
entered on the Edit/Browse panel. This panel shows the structure used to format the browse/edit
table display. You can change the data displayed on this screen to alter the format of the table display.

Options Help
───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Structure of Table BLSGEDIT Row 1 to 7 of 9
Command ===> ________________________________________________ Scroll ===> CSR

Rows scanned to produce

Number of Rows . . : 17 structure . . . . . . . . . . : 17
Number of Keys . . : 0
Number of Names . : 9
────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
ZEDPTYPE ZEDPLRCL ZEDPRCFM ZEDPFLAG ZEDPBNDL ZEDPBNDR
────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────

Column Name Type Length Display Area

------ -------- ---- ------ ------------------------------
001 ZEDPTYPE Name 8 <= start of display
002 ZEDPLRCL Name 8 <= displayed
003 ZEDPRCFM Name 8 <= displayed
004 ZEDPFLAG Name 24 <= displayed
005 ZEDPBNDL Name 8 <= displayed
006 ZEDPBNDR Name 8 <= end of display
007 ZEDPTABC Name 8
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 153. Table structure panel (ISRUTBP5)

The top area of this screen shows this information about the table:
• Number of Rows
• Number of Keys
• Number of Names
• Rows scanned to produce structure

Utilities (option 3) 237

ISPF table utility (option 3.16)

Note: This value is controlled by the "Maximum rows searched to determine column width" option
on the Table Utility Options panel.
The next area of the screen shows the current column headings for the table display.
The bottom area of the screen shows the current structure used to format the table display. This is a
list containing these fields:
Column
This input field shows a number representing the relative position of the associated table variable
in the table display. You can change the position of a variable in the table display by altering this
number.
Name
The name of the table variable.
Type
Shows a value of Key if the associated variable is defined as a key for the table. Otherwise shows a
value of Name.
Length
This input field shows the number of characters used to display the table variable value. The table
utility calculates this number by scanning the table rows and finding the largest length value for
each table variable.
Note: If you have specified a value for the "Maximum rows searched to determine column width"
option on the Table Utility Options panel, the table utility might not scan all the table rows and
therefore the calculated length value might not be large enough for all variable values.
Display Area
Identifies the table variables currently shown on the table display screen.
When you press Exit (F3) to return to the Edit/Browse panel it is reformatted based on changes made
on the table structure display.
These abbreviations can be used for the STRUCT command:

STR
STRU
STRUC

UP
Scroll Up. The standard ISPF UP command (F7|F19) can be used to vertically scroll the table display
towards the top of the table.
ISPF supported scroll amount values used for the UP command can be entered in the Scroll field. You
can also enter a valid scroll amount in the Command field.

Table output data set selection

This panel is displayed when either the first SAVE command is issued or the EXIT command (F3) is issued,
and these conditions are all true:
• The table you have modified was specified on the Table Utility Entry panel
• you did not select "Always save table in originating data set" on the Table Utility Options panel
• you specified a Table DD rather than a Table Data Set on the Table Utility Entry panel

238 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 ISPF table utility (option 3.16)

Help
───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Table Output Data Set Selection Row 1 to 7 of 2
Command ===> ________________________________________________ Scroll ===> CSR

No table data set was originally specified, only a table DD. Since there was
more than one table data set allocated to this DD, please select which data
set should receive the updated table. All future SAVE requests will
automatically use the selected table data set. Use END or CANCEL to return
without saving the table.

S Table Data Set

- ----------------------------------------------
_ PDFTDEV.LSACKV.TABLES
_ PDFTOOL.COMMON.TABLES
_ PDFTDEV.STG.TABLES
_ PDFTDEV.INT.TABLES
_ PDFTDEV.SVT.TABLES
_ ISPFTEST.TABLES
_ LSACKV.ISPF.ISPPROF
_ MBURNS.ISPF.ISPPROF
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 154. Table Output Data Set Selection panel (ISRUTBP9)

This panel lists the data sets allocated to the table DD specified on the table utility entry panel. Enter an S
in the selection field for the data set in which you would like the updated table to be saved. If you press
Enter without selecting a data set, the table update is canceled.

Table utility options

To display the Table Utility Options panel, select Table Utility Options from the Options menu on the
action bar. This panel allows you to set options that control certain behaviors within the ISPF Table Utility.
These options on the first section of the panel affect the Edit and Browse functions:
Open table in SHARE mode
Select this option if the table you are to process is already open on another logical screen or if you
might need to share the table with another logical screen.
Use EDIT as default to process selected table
When you select this option, you will default to Edit mode if you do not specify either the Edit or
Browse functions on the table utility entry panel or the table selection panel. You will default to
browse mode when this option is not selected.
Always save table in originating data set
When this option is selected: If the table you are editing was specified on the table utility entry panel
but the Table data set was not specified, the table is automatically saved in the original data set.
When this option is cleared: When you first attempt to save the table, the table output data set
selection panel will be displayed. This panel allows you to choose within the table DD the data set
where the table will be saved.
Maximum rows searched to determine column width
To determine the width required to display each column field, the table utility scans the table rows
and checks the length of the table variable values. This option allows you to specify a number which
acts as the limit for the number of rows scanned in this process. If you leave this value blank, all rows
will be scanned.
Note: Because the table utility uses an efficient method to scan a table, you can leave this option
blank for all but extremely large tables.
Color used to display table key values
Use this option to specify the color (BLUE, RED, PINK, GREEN, TURQ, YELLOW, or WHITE) used to
display the values for the key variable in the table. The default is GREEN.

Utilities (option 3) 239

ISPF table utility (option 3.16)

Intensity used to display table key values

Use this option to specify the intensity (HIGH or LOW) used to display the values for the key variables
in the table. The default is HIGH.
These options on the second section of the panel affect the Import function:
Warn if table exists in the output library
When this option is selected, a warning message will be displayed if you try to import data into a table
that already exists in the specified output data set. You can then choose either to overwrite the
existing table or to cancel the import process. If you don't want to receive warning messages in this
situation, clear this option.
Use Edit to view the imported table
When this option is selected, the table utility uses the Edit function to display the table that was
created or updated by the Import function. If this option is not set, the Browse function will be used to
display the table.
These options on the final section of the panel affect the Export function:
Warn if export data set exists
When this option is selected, a warning message will be displayed if the data set you are exporting
table data into already exists. You can then choose either to overwrite the data set or to cancel the
export process. If you don't want to receive warning messages in this situation, clear this option.
Display mode for export data set
This option allows you to choose whether to use either the ISPF Browse, View, or Edit function to
display the export data set after the export process has completed.

Table export report options

To display the Table Export Reports Options panel, select Export Report Options from the Options menu
on the action bar. This panel allows you to set options which control the format of the report written to the
output data set by the table utility Export function.

┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ Table Export Report Options │
│ Command ===> _____________________________________________________________ │
│ │
│ │
│ Enter "/" to select option │
│ Set options to match IMPORT format report │
│ │
│ / Generate headings │
│ / Underline headings │
│ │
│ Heading, column and page spacing: │
│ │
│ Blank lines after heading . . . . . 0 (0 - 9) │
│ │
│ Number of spaces between columns . . 1 (0 - 99) │
│ │
│ Number of lines per page . . . . . . 0 (0 - 99) │
│ (0 if no paging is required) │
│ │
│ Number of blank lines between pages 0 (0 - 99) │
│ (ignored if lines/page = 0) │
│ │
│ Enter END to save changes. │
│ Enter CANCEL to cancel changes. │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward │
│ F9=Swap F12=Cancel │
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 155. Table Export Report Options panel (ISRUTBO2)

The panel provides these options:

240 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 ISPF table utility (option 3.16)

Set options for IMPORT format report

Select this option if you want to write the export report in the same format that is used by the table
utility Import function. Selecting this option causes other options on the panel to be set so as to
produce the export report in the appropriate format.
Generate headings
Select this option if you want the export report to have headings for the columns showing the table
variable values.
Underline headings (in export report)
Select this option if you want the column headings to be underlined. Column headings for key
variables are underlined with plus signs (++++++++). Column headings for non-key variables are
underlined with dashes (--------).
Blank lines after heading
This option allows you to specify the number of blank lines printed after the column headings. The
number must be between 0 and 9.
Number of spaces between columns
This option allows you to specify the number of spaces printed between the columns showing the
table variable values. The number must be between 0 and 99.
Number of lines per page
This option allows you to specify the maximum number of lines printed on each page of the report.
The number must be between 0 and 99. If you specify 0, no page breaks will be generated.
Number of blank lines between pages
This option allows you to specify the number of blank lines printed at the end of a page to separate it
from the following page. The number must be between 0 and 99. This option is ignored if you specify
0 for the "Number of lines per page" option.

Export data set attributes

To display the Export Data Set Attributes panel, select Export Data Set Attributes from the Options menu
on the action bar. This panel allows you to set various attributes for the output data set created by the
table utility Export function.

┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ Export Data Set Attributes │
│ Command ===> ____________________________________________________________ │
│ │
│ Management class . . . (Blank for default management class) │
│ Storage class . . . . (Blank for default storage class) │
│ Volume serial . . . . (Blank for system default volume) ** │
│ Device type . . . . . SYSALLDA (Generic unit or device address) ** │
│ Data class . . . . . . (Blank for default data class) │
│ Space units . . . . . TRACK (BLKS, TRKS, or CYLS) │
│ Primary quantity . . 5 (In above units) │
│ Secondary quantity 5 (In above units) │
│ │
│ ( ** Only one of these fields may be specified) │
│ │
│ Enter END to save changes. │
│ Enter CANCEL to cancel changes. │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward │
│ F9=Swap F12=Cancel │
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 156. Table Export Data Set Attributes panel (ISRUTBO3)

The panel provides these options:

Utilities (option 3) 241

ISPF table utility (option 3.16)

Management class
Specify the SMS management class for the data set. The management class is used to obtain data
management-related information for the data set, such as migration, backup, and retention criteria.
Storage class
Specify the SMS storage class for the data set. The storage class is used to obtain storage-related
information (volume serial) for the data set.
Volume serial
For a non-SMS data set, specify the volume serial of the direct-access volume you wish to contain the
data set.
Device type
For a non-SMS data set, specify the generic unit address for the direct access volume you wish to
contain the data set.
Data class
Specify the SMS data class for the data set. The data class is used to obtain data-related information
(space units, primary quantity, secondary quantity, directory block, record format, record length, and
data set name type) for the data set.
Space units
Specify the disk space units (TRACK, CYLINDER, or BLOCK).
Primary quantity
Enter a number for the primary allocation in space units.
Secondary quantity
Enter a number for the secondary allocation in space units.

Importing data into a table

The ISPF Table Utility supports an Import function, where data in a sequential data set is used to load an
ISPF table. The import function is invoked by entering option I (Import table data) on the ISPF Table
Utility entry panel.
When you use the Import function, enter these fields on the table utility entry panel:
Table Data Set
This identifies the data set where the table that will be created or updated by the Import function is
saved.
Table Name
The name of the table that will be created or updated by the Import function.
Import Data Set
The name of the data set containing the data used as input to the Import function.
The Import function requires the Import Data Set to contain a report in a specific format. This format is
generated by the ISPF table utility Export function and has these features:
• The variable name is used as a heading for each column showing the values for the table variables.
• The headings are underlined. Column headings for key variables are underlined with plus signs (++++++
++). Column headings for non-key variables are underlined with dashes (--------).
• There are no blank lines after headings.
• There is only 1 space between columns.
• There is no paging.
A warning message might be displayed if the table you specify already exists in the Table Data Set. You
then have the option of terminating the command to avoid overwriting the table. If you don't want to
receive these warnings in future, clear the "Warn if table exists in the output library" check box on the
Table Utility Options panel.

242 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 ISPF table utility (option 3.16)

When the import process has finished, the table that was created or updated is displayed. The "Use Edit
to view the imported table" option on the Table Utility Options panel allows you to choose either the table
utility Edit or Browse function to display the imported table. The default is Browse.

Exporting data from a table

The ISPF Table Utility supports an Export function, where data in an ISPF table is used to write a
customizable report to a sequential file. The Export function is invoked by using either the EXPORT or
FEXPORT primary commands from the table display screen for the table utility Edit and Browse functions.
Note: The report does not show the values for extension variables defined for table rows.
The EXPORT primary command displays the Export Layout panel, where you can control the layout of the
table data in these ways:
• Exclude table variables from the report
• Change the order in which the table variables appear in the report
• Change the column headings
The Table Export Report Options panel allows you to change the format of the report. Selecting the "Set
options for IMPORT format report" option ensures the generated report is in a format that can be
processed by the table utility Import function. The Export Data Set Attributes panel allows you to define
the allocation attributes for the export data set.
Figure 157 on page 243 shows an example of the export report in a format suitable for the Import
function:

********************************* Top of Data **********************************

SUBSYS SERVER DESCRIPT BSECEXIT BCATOWN BJCLASS BJS
+++++++ ------- ----------------------------------- -------- ------- ------- ---
DB2D DB2 Version 5 A
DB26 DB2 Version 6 - Subsystem 1 A
DB62 DB2 Version 6 - Subsystem 2 A
DB27 DB2 Version 7 A
DBT5 DB2 Version 5.1 for FM/DB2 FVT only A
DBT6 DB2 Version 6.1 for FM/DB2 FVT only A
DBT7 DB2 Version 6.1 for FM/DB2 FVT only A
******************************** Bottom of Data ********************************

Figure 157. Export report example

Processing tables that are currently open

Normally, ISPF does not allow a table to be opened and processed if that table is currently open.
However, if the table currently open has been opened with the SHARE option, a subsequent open of the
table is allowed if:
• The SHARE option is used, and
• The WRITE/NOWRITE option is the same as specified when the table was initially opened
The ISPF Table Utility provides support which allows you to process a table even when that table is
currently open.
If a table is currently open in SHARE mode, the ISPF Table Utility can be used to process that table
provided you select the "Open table in SHARE mode" option on the ISPF Table Utility panel and the Edit
(WRITE) or Browse (NOWRITE) option specified matches the WRITE/NOWRITE setting when the table
was originally opened.
If a table data set (rather than a table DD) is specified on the entry panel, the ISPF Table Utility also
allows you to process a table that is open but not in SHARE mode, or a table that is open in SHARE mode
but the WRITE/NOWRITE (edit/browse) setting does not match that of the open table. When this situation
is detected, one of the popup windows shown here is displayed allowing you to specify the way in which
to process the table:

Utilities (option 3) 243

ISPF table utility (option 3.16)

┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ ISRUTBC2 Confirm Table Processing │
│ Command ===> │
│ │
│ CAUTION: │
│ The table TSTTABA is currently open to you or another user. │
│ │
│ Instructions: │
│ │
│ Press ENTER key to process a temporary copy of the table in data │
│ set VANDYKE.TBUTIL.TABLES. │
│ │
│ Press CANCEL or EXIT to cancel processing of the table. │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
⋘───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 158. Panel displayed when the selected table is currently open but not in SHARE mode

The panel shown in Figure 158 on page 244 is displayed when the selected table from the table data set
(TSTTABA) is currently open but not in SHARE mode.

┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ ISRUTBC1 Confirm Table Processing │
│ Command ===> │
│ │
│ CAUTION: │
│ The table TSTTABA is currently open to you in SHARE/NOWRITE mode │
│ │
│ Instructions: │
│ │
│ Press ENTER key to process a temporary copy of the table in data │
│ set VANDYKE.TBUTIL.TABLES. │
│ │
│ Press EXIT key to process the currently open table │
│ in SHARE/NOWRITE (browse) mode. │
│ │
│ Press CANCEL to cancel processing of the table. │
│ │
│ │
│ │
⋘───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 159. Panel displayed when the selected table is currently open in SHARE mode for NOWRITE

The panel shown in Figure 159 on page 244 (ISRUTBC1) is displayed when the selected table (TSTTABA)
from the table data set is currently open in SHARE mode for NOWRITE (not for update) and you either:
• Did not select the Open table in SHARE mode option on the entry or options panel, or
• Requested to edit (WRITE) the table

244 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 ISPF table utility (option 3.16)

┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ ISRUTBC1 Confirm Table Processing │
│ Command ===> │
│ │
│ CAUTION: │
│ The table TSTTABA is currently open to you in SHARE/WRITE mode. │
│ │
│ Instructions: │
│ │
│ Press ENTER key to process a temporary copy of the table in data │
│ set VANDYKE.TBUTIL.TABLES. │
│ │
│ Press EXIT key to process the currently open table │
│ in SHARE/WRITE (edit) mode. │
│ │
│ Press CANCEL to cancel processing of the table. │
│ │
│ │
│ │
⋘───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 160. Panel displayed when the selected table is currently open in SHARE mode for WRITE

The panel shown in Figure 160 on page 245 (ISRUTBC1) is displayed when the selected table (ISRPLIST)
is currently open in SHARE mode for WRITE (for update) and you either:
• Did not select the Open table in SHARE mode option on the entry or options panel, or
• Requested to browse (NOWRITE) the table
If you press Enter, the table utility:
• Creates a temporary partitioned data set.
• Copies the table from the table data set you specified. into a member in the temporary data set using a
generated member name.
• Opens the table using the generated name.
• Displays the table data.
If you press the Exit key (usually PF3) on panel ISRUTBC1, the table utility:
• Displays the data for the currently open table. If this table was originally opened for WRITE, the data is
displayed for edit, otherwise it is displayed for browse.
If you press Cancel (or Exit on panel ISRUTBC2):
• The table is not processed and you are returned to the entry or table selection panel.
If you edit a temporary copy of an open table, this panel is displayed when you exit the edit display:

ISRUTBPB Save Temporary Table

Command ===>

Specify the names of the data set and member where the temporary table
will be saved.

Partitioned Data Set Name and Member

Name . . . . . . . 'VANDYKE.TBUTIL.TABLES'
Member . . . . . . ISRPLIST

Enter "/" to select option

Replace existing member

Instructions:

Press ENTER key to save the temporary table in the specified data set
and member.

Press EXIT or CANCEL to exit without saving the temporary table.

This panel allows you to save the updated table in a specified data set and member. The panel initially
shows the table data set and table (member) you requested to edit. The "Replace existing member"

Utilities (option 3) 245

ISPF table utility (option 3.16)

option allows you to replace an existing member with the data from the table you have edited. If you
press Enter, the table utility writes the table data to the specified data set and member. If you press Exit
or Cancel, the data from the temporary table is not saved.

Line command table support

Figure 161 on page 246 shows Edit line command table LINECMD.

Options Help
───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
ISPF EDIT Line Command Table LINECMD Row 1 to 5 of 5

Command ===> Scroll ===> CSR

Shift ===> PAGE
User MACRO Program Block Multi Dest
Command Macro format line Used
----+--- ----+--- ----+--- ----+--- ----+--- ----+---
CE POSLINE N Y Y Y
RV POSLINE N Y Y Y
LEF POSLINE N Y Y Y
RIT POSLINE N Y Y Y
XB $XB N N N N
******************************* Bottom of data ********************************

Figure 161. ISPF EDIT Line Command Table (LINECMD)

Figure 161 on page 246 defines five commands: CE, RV, LEF, RIT and XB. The first four commands are
processed by edit macro POSLINE and the last command is processed by $XB.
Each row in the table contains the following columns:

Table 16. ISPF EDIT Line Command Table Description

Column Description
User Command The line command value. Must not conflict with
ISPF editor line commands.
MACRO The name of the program, REXX exec, or CLIST edit
macro to be run when the specified Edit line
command is entered.
Program Macro Y - the macro is a program
N - the macro is a CLIST or REXX exec
Block format Y - the line command supports a block format
indicated by repeating the last character of the
command
N - block format is not supported
Multi line Y - the line command supports processing a range
of lines by providing a numeric suffix with the
command
N - processing a range is not supported
Dest Used Y - the line command requires a destination line
command
N - no destination command is required

Each row describes the characteristics of a user-written line command.

246 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

The following is an example of REXX Edit Macro POSLINE:

/* REXX implement CE, RV, LEF, and RIT line commands */

/* */
/* CE : Center text on a line */
/* RV : Reverse text on a line */
/* LEF: Move text all the way left */
/* RIT: Move text all the way right */
Address isredit /* Start of macro */
"MACRO (PARM) NOPROCESS" /* Get line command */
/* Parm contains the value exactly as entered in the line cmd area */
/* If user enters a block or multi-line format it would be easier */
/* to have the table entry handy */
Address ispexec "VGET (ZLMACENT) SHARED" /* Get the line command*/
Address ispexec "CONTROL ERRORS RETURN" /* Return ISPF errors */
If wordpos(zlmacent,"CE RV LEF RIT") = 0 Then/* If not an expected */
Do /* command */
zinfo=parm /* Set up for message */
Address ispexec "SETMSG MSG(ISRE041)" /* Invalid command */
Exit 8 /* let ISPF handle the error */
End /* */
"PROCESS RANGE" zlmacent /* Get range for command */
If rc>0 Then /* If an error occurred */
Do /* */
Address ispexec "SETMSG MSG(ISRZ002)" /* Set ISPF's message */
Exit 8 /* Let ISPF handle the error */
End /* */
parmin = parm /* Actual value might be needed later */
parm = zlmacent /* just keeping the comments in line */
"(START) = LINENUM .ZFRANGE" /* Get 1st line number in the range */
"(STOP) = LINENUM .ZLRANGE" /* Get last line number in the range */
"(DW) = DATA_WIDTH" /* Get the width of the editable data */
Do a = start to stop /* Loop through the range of lines */
"(LINE) = LINE "a /* Get old line value */
SELECT /* process the command for this line */
When(parm = "CE") Then line=center(strip(line),dw) /* Center */
When(parm = "RV") Then line=reverse(line) /* Reverse */
When(parm = "LEF") Then line=strip(line,"L") /* Left justify */
When(parm = "RIT") Then line=right(strip(line,"T"),dw) /* Right */
/* Justify */
Otherwise Nop /* Otherwise, no op (should not occur) */
End /* */
"LINE "a" = (LINE)" /* Set new line value */
End /* End of loop through lines */
exit 0 /* Return to ISPF */

z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

The z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility (option 3.17) supports processing of directories and files in a z/OS
UNIX directory structure. When you select this option, the z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility panel
(ISRUULP) is displayed.
The layout and options of the Directory List Utility are similar to those in the Data Set List Utility (ISPF
option 3.4). You can either display the directory list under the specified path name for further processing,
or print the directory list to the ISPF list data set.

Utilities (option 3) 247

z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

Menu RefList RefMode Utilities Options File_Systems Help

────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility

blank Display directory list P Print directory list

Pathname . . . /var +

Enter "/" to select option

/ Confirm File Delete
/ Confirm Non-empty Directory Delete

When the directory list is displayed, enter either:

"/" on the directory list line command field for the command prompt pop-up,
an ISPF line command, the name of a TSO command, CLIST, or REXX exec, or
"=" to execute the previous command.

Option ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward F8=Forward
F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 162. z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility panel (ISRUULP)

Note: When the z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility panel is first displayed, a message is displayed showing
the time zone that is used to calculate the date and time values displayed in the directory list. The time
zone value is obtained from the z/OS UNIX TZ environment variable. If a value for the TZ environment
value is not found in the system-wide /etc/profile file or the user's .profile file, the utility calculates
displayed date and time values using the operating system GMT offset.

z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility panel action bar

The z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility Panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu
For more information, see the details about the Menu Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
RefList
For information about referral lists, refer to the Using Personal Data Set Lists and Library Lists topic in
the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
RefMode
For information about referral list modes, refer to information about Personal List Modes in Using
Personal Data Set Lists and Library Lists topic in z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Utilities
For more information, see the details about the Utilities Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Options
The Options pull-down offers these choices:
1
Directory List Options
Options that control the behavior of the directory list display.
2
Directory List Column Arrangement
Settings that alter the order and size of the column fields that are displayed in the directory list.

248 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

3
Directory List Default Line Commands
Settings that define the default line commands for the different z/OS UNIX file types.
4
Enable superuser mode(SU)
Select this option to switch to superuser mode.
File_Systems
The File_Systems pull-down offers these choices:
1
Mount Table by File System...
Displays the z/OS UNIX mounted file systems, ordered by file system name. For more information,
see “z/OS UNIX Mounted File Systems” on page 294.
2
Mount Table by Mount Point...
Displays the z/OS UNIX mounted file systems, ordered by mount point name. For more
information, see “z/OS UNIX Mounted File Systems” on page 294.
3
Mount...
Provides the option to mount a file system. For more information, see “MOUNT command” on
page 307.
4
New zFS...
Provides the option to create a new zSeries File System (zFS) data set. For more information, see
“Creating a new zFS” on page 309.
5
zFS aggregates...
Displays the attached zFS aggregates. Provides options for displaying aggregate and file system
information and extending the size of a zFS aggregate. For more information, see “zFS aggregates”
on page 311.
Help
The Help pull-down provides general information about z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility topics as well
as information about displaying and printing a z/OS UNIX Directory List.

z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility panel fields

The z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility panel contains these fields:
Pathname
This is a scrollable field where you enter the path name of the directory you want to list or print. If you
leave this field blank, your home directory is used. If the field is blank and you do not have a home
directory, you are prompted to enter a path name.
Note: If you often enter long path names (greater than 56 characters), consider using the KEYLIST
utility to update the keylist for the panel and assign the ZEXPAND command to a function key. The
ZEXPAND command displays the scrollable input field in a scrollable dynamic area in a pop-up
window, making the task of entering a long pathname easier.
When you enter a z/OS UNIX file path name, a z/OS UNIX directory selection list is displayed.
When you enter a z/OS UNIX file path name containing glob characters and the entered value does not
match a z/OS UNIX directory, ISPF uses the C/C++ glob function to search the UNIX file system for

Utilities (option 3) 249

z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

files and directories that match the mask. Unicode Conversion services are used to internally convert
the path name from the terminal codepage to codepage 1047 for use by the search function.
You can use these special characters at the beginning of the Pathname field to represent the path
name for a particular directory:
~
(Tilde) The path name for your home directory.
.
(Period) The path name for your current working directory.
..
(Double period) The path name of the parent directory of your current working directory.
Note: Within the z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility, you can also use these special characters in any field
where a z/OS UNIX file path name can be entered.
Glob characters and their meaning are:
?
Match any single character.
*
Match multiple characters.
[
Open a set of single characters.
]
Close the set of single characters. Each character in the set can match a single character at the
position specified.
Confirm File Delete
This option controls the display of the Confirm Delete panel. This panel is displayed when deleting
files or empty directories from the directory list display using the D line command. If this option is
selected, the Confirm Delete panel is displayed. If this option is not selected, the panel is not
displayed and the file or empty directory is deleted without any additional user interaction.
Confirm Non-empty Directory Delete
This option controls the display of the Confirm Non-empty Directory Delete panel. This panel is
displayed when using the directory list D line command to delete a directory that contains files and
subdirectories. If this option is selected, the Confirm Non-empty Directory Delete panel is displayed.
If this option is not selected, the panel is not displayed and the directory (including all contained files
and subdirectories) is deleted without any additional user interaction.

z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility panel options

See:
• “Blank—display directory list” on page 250
• “P—print directory list” on page 259

Blank—display directory list

To display a directory list for the specified path, leave the Option line blank and press Enter. If you leave
the Pathname field blank, your home directory will be used.
You can also specify the options Confirm File Delete and Confirm Non-empty Directory Deleteto control
the behavior of the D (delete file) line command in the directory list.

250 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

Menu Utilities View Options Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
z/OS UNIX Directory List Row 1 to 13 of 25
Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE

Pathname . : /SYSTEM/etc

Command Filename Message Type Permission Audit Ext Fmat

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
. Dir rwxr-xr-x fff---
.. Dir rwxr-xr-x fff---
.nfsc File rw-r--r-- fff--- --s- ----
ant.conf File rwxrwxrwx fff--- --s- ----
bpa Dir rwxr-xr-x fff---
cmx Dir rwxr-xr-x fff---
dce Dir rwxr-xr-x fff---
dfs Dir rwxr-xr-x fff---
inetd.conf File rwxrwxrwx fff--- --s- ----
inetd.pid File rw-r--r-- fff--- --s- ----
ioepdcf Syml rwxrwxrwx fff---
ldap Dir rwxr-xr-x fff---
licmgmt Dir rwxr-xr-x fff---
log File rw-rw---- fff--- --s- ----
pkiserv Dir rwxr-xr-x fff---
profile File rwxr-xr-x fff--- --s- ----
security Dir rwxr-xr-x fff---
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F5=Rfind F7=Up F8=Down
F9=Swap F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 163. z/OS UNIX Directory List panel (ISRUUDL0)

The information for each entry in the directory is displayed in column fields across the screen. The
number of columns displayed depends on the available screen width. Figure 163 on page 251 shows the
initial directory list display on a terminal with a screen width of 80 and a screen depth of 28.
The RIGHT primary command can be used to scroll the displayed column fields to the right. Figure 164 on
page 251 shows the directory list display when the RIGHT command is issued on the previous display:

Menu Utilities View Options Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
z/OS UNIX Directory List Row 1 to 13 of 25
Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE

Pathname . : /SYSTEM/etc

Command Filename Message Owner Group Links Size

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
. IBMUSER OMVSGRP 14 8192
.. IBMUSER OMVSGRP 6 8192
.nfsc IBMUSER OMVSGRP 1 0
ant.conf IBMUSER OMVSGRP 1 29
bpa IBMUSER OMVSGRP 2 8192
cmx IBMUSER OMVSGRP 2 8192
dce IBMUSER OMVSGRP 9 8192
dfs IBMUSER OMVSGRP 8 8192
inetd.conf IBMUSER OMVSGRP 1 1215
inetd.pid IBMUSER OMVSGRP 1 10
ioepdcf IBMUSER OMVSGRP 1 22
ldap IBMUSER OMVSGRP 2 8192
licmgmt IBMUSER OMVSGRP 6 8192
log IBMUSER OMVSGRP 1 0
pkiserv IBMUSER OMVSGRP 2 8192
profile IBMUSER OMVSGRP 1 10665
security IBMUSER OMVSGRP 2 8192
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F5=Rfind F7=Up F8=Down
F9=Swap F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 164. z/OS UNIX Directory List—scrolling right

Note: These two screens assume that the default column arrangement settings are used. You can change
the width of column fields and the order in which they are displayed, and remove selected columns from
the directory list display. See “z/OS UNIX Directory List Column Arrangement panel” on page 291.

Utilities (option 3) 251

z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

z/OS UNIX Directory List panel action bar

The z/OS UNIX Directory List panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu
For more information, see the details about the Menu Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Utilities
For more information, see the details about the Utilities Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
View
The View pull-down offers this choice: 1. Sort
You can sort the list by any of these fields:
1. Filename
2. Message
3. File Type
4. Permissions
5. Permissions - Octal
6. Owner
7. Audit
8. Extended Attributes
9. Format
10. Group
11. Links
12. Size
13. Changed Date/Time
14. Modified Date/Time
15. Accessed Date/Time
16. Created Date/Time
You can also specify the sort sequence (ascending or descending) or accept the default sequence for
the associated sort field. By default, character fields are sorted alphabetically and numeric fields are
sorted in descending order.
Options
The Options pull-down offers these choices:
1
Directory List Options
Options that control the behaviour of the directory list display.
2
Directory List Column Arrangement
Settings that alter the order and size of the directory list column fields and allow you to remove
columns from the display.
3
Directory List Default Line Commands
Settings that define the default line commands for the different z/OS UNIX file types.
4
Enable superuser mode(SU)
Select this option to switch to superuser mode.

252 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

5
Refresh List
Refresh the display of the directory list.
6
Save List
Save the directory list to a file.
7
Reset
Reset the directory list.
Help
The Help pull-down provides general information about z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility topics,
including the format of the directory list and the available line commands and primary commands.

z/OS UNIX Directory List panel fields

The fields listed here can appear on the directory list panel. Which fields are displayed depends on the
column arrangements settings and whether the display has been scrolled left or right.
Command
Field used to enter a line command, z/OS UNIX command, TSO command, CLIST, or REXX exec
against a directory list entry.
Filename
The name of the file or subdirectory.
Message
This field is initially blank. After you run one of the built-in line commands on a file or subdirectory, a
message is displayed showing the last function used on that file or subdirectory:
LineCommand
Message
AA
Modified
B
Browsed
CI
Replaced
CO
Copied
E
Edited
D
Deleted
FS
Information
I
Information
L
Listed
MF
Modified
MG
Modified

Utilities (option 3) 253

z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

MM
Modified
MO
Modified
MX
Modified
N
Created
R
Renamed
UA
Modified
X
(Depends on whether a z/OS UNIX command or TSO command is executed)
If you enter a TSO command, CLIST, or REXX exec on the Command line, a default message appears in
the Message field. The message is in this format:

XXXXXXXX RC=#

where:
XXXXXXXX
is the command entered
#
is the return code from the command
If you enter a z/OS UNIX command, the completion status is indicated by one of these messages
being displayed in the Message field:
Ended xxx
Command has ended with a return code of xxx
Terminated xxx
Command has terminated due to signal xxx
Stopped xxx
Command has stopped due to signal xxx
Timed out
The elapsed running time of the command exceeded the specified time limit. ISPF sent a SIGKILL
signal to terminate the process.
Type
The directory entry type. The possible values are:
Dir
Directory
File
Regular file
Char
Character special file
FIFO
FIFO (first-in-first-out) special file
Syml
Symbolic link
Extl
External symbolic link

254 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

Perm
The file or subdirectory permissions, in octal format. The permissions are displayed as three octal
(range 0-7) digits. The first digit defines the access permission for the file owner. The second digit
defines the access permission for any member of the file's group. The third digit defines the access
permission for anyone else. Table 17 on page 255 shows the values and associated permissions for
the octal digits:

Table 17. Octal permission values

Value Permissions
0 None
1 Search (or execute)
2 Write
3 Write and search (or execute)
4 Read
5 Read and search (or execute)
6 Read and write
7 Read, write and search (or execute)

If there are extended access control list (ACL) entries defined for the file or subdirectory, the character
+ is displayed after the octal value.
Permissions
The file or subdirectory permissions, in symbolic format. There are three groups of three characters.
The first group describes owner permissions; the second describes group permissions; and the third
describes other (or "world") permissions. The characters that may appear in each group are:
r
Permission to read the file
w
Permission to write to the file
x
Permission to execute the file
These characters can appear in the execute (third) position of each group:
s
If in owner permissions group, the set-user-ID bit is on; if in group permissions section, the set-
group-ID bit is on.
S
Same as s except the execute bit is off.
t
The sticky bit is on.
T
Same as t except the execute bit is off.
Note: You can specify whether permissions are to be displayed in octal or symbolic format on the
z/OS UNIX Directory List Options panel.
Audit
Two groups of three characters describing the audit bit settings. The first three characters describe
the user-requested audit information. The last three characters describe the auditor-requested audit
information. Each group of three characters shows the read, write, and execute (search) audit options.
The possible values are:

Utilities (option 3) 255

z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

s
Audit successful access attempts
f
Audit failed access attempts
a
Audit all access attempts
-
No audit
Ext
A group of four characters describing the extended attributes for a regular file. The possible values
are:
a
Program runs APF-authorized if linked AC=1
p
Program is considered program-controlled
s
Program is enabled to run in a shared address space
l
Program is loaded from the shared library region
-
Attribute not set
Fmat
File format for regular files. The possible values are:
bin
Binary data
nl
New line
cr
Carriage return
lf
Line feed
crlf
Carriage return followed by line feed
lfcr
Line feed followed by carriage return
crnl
Carriage return followed by new line
Owner
The user ID of the owner of the file or subdirectory.
Group
The group name of the owner of the file or subdirectory.
Links
For a file, the number of hard links to the file. For a subdirectory, the number of subdirectories it
contains.
Size
The file size, in bytes.
Modified
The date and time the file was last changed.

256 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

Changed
The date and time the status of the file was last changed.
Accessed
The date and time the data in the file was last accessed.
Created
The date and time the file was created.

Actions you can take from the Directory List panel

These topics describe actions you can take from the Directory List panel:
• “Line commands” on page 257
• “z/OS UNIX commands, TSO commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs” on page 257
• “Using the path name substitution character” on page 258

Line commands
Line commands can be entered in the Command field to the left of the directory list entries.

z/OS UNIX commands, TSO commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs

Besides the ISPF-supplied line commands, you can also enter z/OS UNIX Commands, TSO commands,
CLISTs, and REXX EXECs that use a path name as an operand. The line command field is a scrollable field
with a maximum length of 255 characters and a display length of 8 characters. If the command you want
to enter requires more space than is available in the display field, use the EXPAND function key (F4) to
display the entire 255-character line command input field in a pop-up window.
The line command prefix characters > and < are used to identify a command to be run in z/OS UNIX. ISPF
uses the spawn service (BPX1SPN) to create a new process and execute the command. The > prefix
character requests that the command be run by the z/OS UNIX login shell. The < prefix character requests
that the command be run directly.
Figure 165 on page 257 shows an example of using the c89 shell command to compile, link-edit, and
assemble the C program contained in the file /u/myhome/hello.c. The > character before the command
name indicates that it will be run in a login shell environment:

z/OS UNIX Directory List Row 1 to 6 of 6

Command ===> Scroll ===> CSR

Pathname . : /u/myhome

Command Filename Message Type Permission Audit Ext Fmat

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
. Dir rwxrwxrwx fff---
.. Dir rwxrwxrwx fff---
bin Dir rwxrwxrwx fff---
>c89_ hello.c File rwxrwxrwx fff--- --s- ----
prog1 File rwxrwxrwx fff--- --s- ----
test1 File rwxrwxrwx fff--- --s- ----
******************************* Bottom of data ********************************

Figure 165. Example: specifying a z/OS UNIX command to run on a selected file

Figure 166 on page 258 shows an example of running the program /u/myhome/hello.c directly in z/OS
UNIX. The < character indicates that the selected file is the name of a command that is to be run:

Utilities (option 3) 257

z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

z/OS UNIX Directory List Row 1 to 6 of 6

Command ===> Scroll ===> CSR

Pathname . : /u/myhome/bin

Command Filename Message Type Permission Audit Ext Fmat

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
. Dir rwxrwxrwx fff---
.. Dir rwxrwxrwx fff---
bin Dir rwxrwxrwx fff---
<_ hello.c File rwxrwxrwx fff--- --s- ----
prog1 File rwxrwxrwx fff--- --s- ----
test1 File rwxrwxrwx fff--- --s- ----
******************************* Bottom of data ********************************

Figure 166. Example: running the selected file directly

A line command that is not recognized as a z/OS UNIX Directory List line command, or is not prefixed with
< or >, is assumed to be a TSO command, CLIST, or REXX EXEC. These commands are passed to TSO for
execution using the ISPF SELECT CMD service. Variable names that start with an ampersand (&) are
evaluated by ISPF. If you want the underlying command processor to see the ampersand you must
specify two consecutive ampersands (&&).
Figure 167 on page 258 shows an example of running a REXX EXEC called LISTDATA against the file prog1
in directory /u/myhome. This is the same as entering this command on the Command line:

TSO LISTDATA '/u/myhome/prog1'

z/OS UNIX Directory List Row 1 to 6 of 6

Command ===> Scroll ===> CSR

Pathname . : /u/myhome

Command Filename Message Type Permission Audit Ext Fmat

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
. Dir rwxrwxrwx fff---
.. Dir rwxrwxrwx fff---
bin Dir rwxrwxrwx fff---
hello.c File rwxrwxrwx fff--- --s- ----
listdata prog1 File rwxrwxrwx fff--- --s- ----
test1 File rwxrwxrwx fff--- --s- ----
******************************* Bottom of data ********************************

Figure 167. Example: specifying a REXX exec to run on a selected file

Note: If the TSO command, CLIST, or REXX exec issues a return code greater than or equal to 8,
processing stops and an error message is displayed.

Using the path name substitution character

If a command, CLIST, or REXX exec requires the file or subdirectory path name in a position other than the
first operand or if other operands are needed, you can use the path name substitution character to
represent the path name. If no operands are specified after the command, ISPF uses the path name of
the file or subdirectory that is being acted on as the first operand of the command.
Note: For TSO commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs, the path name is enclosed in quotes.
The ISPF-defined default for the path name substitution character is the exclamation point (!) character.
You can change the value of this character using the z/OS UNIX Directory List Options panel.

258 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

For example, if you specify: CLIST1 FILE(!) DEBUG in the line command field for file test_data in
directory u/myhome the effect will be the same as if you had entered this primary command:

TSO CLIST1 FILE('/u/myhome/test_data') DEBUG

P—print directory list

Use option P to print a directory list. You must:
1. Enter the path name for the directory you want to list in the Pathname field. If you leave this field
blank, the path name for your home directory will be used.
2. Press Enter to print the directory list. The directory list is stored in the ISPF list data set.
Note: The format of the printed directory list is not affected by any changes you make using the z/OS
UNIX Directory List Column Arrangement panel.

z/OS UNIX directory list utility line commands

After you display a directory list by leaving the Option field blank, you can enter a line command to the left
of a directory entry. You can also enter TSO commands, CLIST names, or REXX exec names. The path
name substitution character can be used with TSO commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs to represent the
quoted path name for a file or subdirectory. For more information about using this symbol, see “Using the
path name substitution character” on page 258.
The line command field is a scrollable field with a maximum length of 255 characters and a display length
of 8 characters. If the command you want to enter requires more space than is available in the display
field, use the EXPAND function key (F4) to display the entire 255-character line command input field in a
pop-up window.
If you enter a slash (/) in the Command field, the Directory List Actions pop-up window is displayed. This
window allows you to select the line command you wish to invoke.
You can also enter line commands in block command format to execute the same line command for
several files at once. You mark the block by typing a "//" at the beginning of a block of rows and another
"//" at the end of the block of rows. You must type the line command either immediately after the // on the
first row of the block, or immediately after the // on the last row of the block. You can enter several blocks
of commands at the same time, but you cannot nest them. Single line commands are not allowed within a
block command. You can execute all line commands, including z/OS UNIX commands, TSO commands,
Clists and REXX execs as block commands.

Utilities (option 3) 259

z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

Menu Utilities View Options Help

─ ┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐ ───────────
│ Directory List Actions │ to 5 of 5
C │ │ ===> PAGE
│ File ----- /u/myhome/bin/ctest │
P │ │
│ DIRLIST Action │
C │ 1. Edit 13. File System │ Fmat
- │ 2. Edit - ASCII 14. Modify Mode Fields │ -----------
│ 3. View 15. Modify Extended Attrs │ ----
│ 4. View - ASCII 16. Modify Owning User │ ----
│ 5. Browse 17. Modify Owning Group │ - ----
│ 6. New 18. Modify Format │ - ----
│ 7. Directory List 19. User Auditing │ - ----
* │ 8. Delete 20. Auditor Auditing │ ***********
│ 9. Rename 21. Execute command │
│ 10. Copy Out 22. Refadd │
│ 11. Copy In 23. Manage ACLs │
│ 12. Information │
│ │
│ Select a choice and press ENTER to process data set action. │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand │
│ F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap F10=Actions │
⋘───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 168. z/OS UNIX Directory List Actions pop-up window

AA—auditor auditing
The AA (auditor auditing) line command can be entered against any directory entry. This line command
causes the Modify z/OS UNIX File Auditor Audit Options panel to be displayed.

Menu Utilities View Options Help

┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
─ Modify z/OS UNIX File Auditor Audit Options ─
─ Command ===> ─
─ ─
─ Pathname . : /u/myhome/prog1 ─
─ Type . . . : File ─
─ ─
─ Read 1 1. None Write 1 1. None Execute 1 1. None ─
─ 2. Failure 2. Failure 2. Failure ─
─ 3. Success 3. Success 3. Success ─
─ 4. Both 4. Both 4. Both ─
─ ─
─ ─
─ ─
─ ─
─ ─
─ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward ─
─ F8=Forward F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel ─
⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 169. Modify z/OS UNIX File Auditor Audit Options panel (ISRUULAA)

The Pathname field displays the path name of the selected file. The Type field display the file type for the
selected file.
The auditor auditing options for the file can be changed by a user defined with AUDITOR authority in the
security system. These options allow you to define the access attempts that will be audited by the

260 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

security system. You can specify auditing to occur for read, write, and search or execute attempts on the
file or directory.
The panel displays fields for specifying the Read, Write and Execute (or search) audit settings. For each of
these fields you enter one of the listed numbers corresponding to one of these results for the access
attempt:
None
No audit record is to be written for this type of access.
Failure
Write an audit record if this type of access fails.
Success
Write an audit record if this type of access is successful.
Both
Write an audit record for both failed and successful access attempts.

B—browse regular file

The B (browse) line command can be entered against a regular file or directory. The ISPF browse function
is invoked, allowing you to view the data in the file.
If you enter the B line command beside a directory a directory list is displayed allowing you to select a
regular file to browse.
A numeric record length can also be specified as an option with the B line command for a regular file. This
option allows you to browse fixed-length record files containing text or binary data without new line
delimiters.

C or CO—copy data out

The C or CO (copy out) line command can be entered against a regular file or directory.
Note: In the panel displayed by the CO line command, you can specify a "+" (plus) character as the first
character of a path name to represent the path name of the directory currently listed.

Copying from a regular file

When the C or CO line command is entered against a regular file, the Copy From z/OS UNIX File panel is
displayed.

Copy From z/OS UNIX File

Command ===>

From z/OS UNIX file:

Name . . . : /u/mburns/cargs1.c

To z/OS UNIX file, data set, or member:

Name . . . . +
Permissions 700 (Octal)

Options
/ Confirm copy to existing target
Update permissions for existing target file
Binary copy
Convert

Conversion Table

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F5=Rfind F7=Up

F8=Down F9=Swap F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 170. Copy From z/OS UNIX File panel (ISRUULCF)

Utilities (option 3) 261

z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

This panel allows you to copy the data in a regular file to another z/OS UNIX file, a sequential data set, or
a member of a partitioned data set.
Note: When copying to a sequential data set or member of a partitioned data set, ISPF invokes the z/OS
UNIX OGET command to perform the copy operation.
The panel displays the path name of the file being copied.
These mandatory input fields are displayed on this panel:
Name
The destination where the data from the file will be copied. Any of these can be specified:
• The path name of a z/OS UNIX file.
• The name of a sequential data set.
• The names of an existing partitioned data set and member.
Permissions
When copying to a z/OS UNIX file, defines the permissions for that file. Enter as three octal (range 0-7)
digits. The first digit defines the access permission for the file owner. The second digit defines the
access permission for any member of the file's group. The third digit defines the access permission for
anyone else. See Table 17 on page 255.
These optional input fields are available on this panel:
Confirm copy to existing target
When this option is selected and the target z/OS UNIX file, data set, or member exists, the Confirm
Copy panel displays a warning that the data in the target will be overwritten if the copy proceeds.
In this situation, proceeding with the copy will cause the data in the target to be overwritten. Since
this is an irrevocable process which may cause loss of valuable data, ISPF requires you to confirm you
really want the copy to proceed. If you have made a mistake, the copy operation can be canceled
using the CANCEL or EXIT commands.
Update permissions for existing target file
If this option is selected and the target of the copy is an existing z/OS UNIX file, the value specified in
the Permissions field will be used to update the permissions for this file.
Binary copy
When this option is selected it indicates the file being copied contains binary data. This causes the
copy to take place without any consideration for newline characters or the special characteristics of
DBCS data. If this option is not selected the file is assumed to contain TEXT data.
Note: This option is ignored when copying to another z/OS UNIX file.
Convert
This option specifies whether data conversion is required during the copy operation. Typically,
conversion is only required when the data contains square brackets. If no value is entered in the
Conversion Table field, the data being copied is converted using the default conversion table
(BPXFX000) in the standard library concatenation. By default, this would cause a conversion between
code pages IBM-037 and IBM-1047. Otherwise the value in the Conversion Table field identifies a
conversion table to be used for the copy operation.
Note: This option is ignored when copying to another z/OS UNIX file.
Conversion Table
These types of values can be specified in this field:
• data_set_name(member_name)
The partitioned data set and member containing the character conversion table.
• data_set_name
The partitioned data set that has the member BPXFX000 containing the character conversion table.
• (member_name)

262 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

The member containing the character conversion table. It is assumed to be in a data set in the
standard library concatenation. (The default data set is SYS1.LINKLIB.)
Note: This field is ignored if the Convert option is not selected or if copying to another z/OS UNIX
file.
For further information on the character conversion table refer to the description of the OGET
command in the z/OS UNIX System Services Command Reference.

Copying from a directory

When the C or CO line command is entered against a directory, the Copy From z/OS UNIX Directory panel
is displayed.

Copy From z/OS UNIX Directory

Command ===>

From z/OS UNIX directory:

Name . . . : /u/mburns/jcldir

To partitioned data set:

Name . . . .

Options
Replace like-named members
Selection list...
/ Include lowercase names
/ Strip suffix (Suffix to strip)
Binary copy
Convert

Conversion Table

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward

F8=Forward F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 171. Copy From z/OS UNIX Directory panel (ISRUULCD)

This panel allows you to copy the data from regular files in a directory to members in a partitioned data
set.
Note: When copying to a member of a partitioned data set, ISPF invokes the z/OS UNIX OGET command
to perform the copy operation.
For a file to be selected for copying, it must have a file name that conforms to the naming conventions for
a partitioned data set member. This panel also provides options that allow you to further control the files
selected for copying.
The panel displays the path name of the directory being copied. These mandatory input fields are
displayed on this panel:
Name
The name of an existing partitioned data set where the regular files in the directory will be copied. The
files are copied into members in the partitioned data set.
These optional input fields are available on this panel:
Replace like-named members
When this option is selected, if the file into which the data from a selected member is to be copied
already exists in the directory, the existing file will be overwritten with the data from the selected
member. If this option is not selected, the member will not be copied.
Selection list
If this option is selected, the z/OS UNIX Directory Copy Selection List panel is displayed. This panel
displays a list of the regular files that are eligible to be copied to the partitioned data set. The list
contains these fields:

Utilities (option 3) 263

z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

S
An input field where you can enter S to indicate the associated regular file is to be copied to the
partitioned data set.
Filename
The name of a regular file that can be copied to the partitioned data set. The name conforms to
the rules for a member name and fits the selection criteria specified on the Copy From z/OS UNIX
Directory panel.
Member
The name to be used for the member into which the data from the associated regular file will be
copied. Each member name is generated from the name of the source file. You can change a
generated member name to something other than the name assigned by ISPF. For example, if
ISPF generates the same member name for two files, you can change one of the member names
to make them both unique.
Message
This field displays a message indicating the result of copying the regular file to the member. The
possible values displayed are:
*COPIED
The data from the regular file was successfully copied to a new member in the partitioned data
set.
*REPL
The data from the regular file was copied to an existing member in the partitioned data set.
The data in the member was overwritten. This can only occur when the Replace like-named
members option is selected on the Copy From z/OS UNIX Directory panel.
*NO-REPL
The data from the regular file was not copied to the partitioned data set member because the
member already existed and the Replace like-named members option was not selected on the
Copy From z/OS UNIX Directory panel.
*FAILED RC=xx
The OGET command invoked to copy the data from the file to the member failed with return
code xx. The data was not copied.
When you press Enter on this panel, the selected files will be copied to the partitioned data set.
The Message field indicates the result of the copy operation for each file.
Include lowercase names
When this option is selected the file names for the regular files will be converted to uppercase before
being checked for a valid member name. If this option is not selected, regular files whose file name
contains lowercase characters will not be considered for copying to the partitioned data set.
Strip suffix
When this option is selected suffixes will be stripped from the file name at the first period (.) before
being checked for a valid member name. The accompanying input field allows you to specify a
particular suffix to be stripped (regular files with other suffixes will not be considered for copying). If
this option is not selected, any regular files whose file name includes suffixes will not be copied to the
partitioned data set.
Selecting this option can result in ISPF attempting to copy different files into the same member. For
example, if the Strip suffix option is selected and the directory being copied contains these files:
• pgm1.exe
• pgm1.o
• pgm1.C
the data for each of these files is written to member PGM1. If the Replace like-named members
option is also selected, member PGM1 will contain the data from file pgm1.C. If the Replace like-
named members option is not selected, member PGM1 will contain the data from file pgm1.exe.

264 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

Binary copy
When this option is selected it indicates the file being copied contains binary data. This causes the
copy to take place without any consideration for newline characters or the special characteristics of
DBCS data. If this option is not selected the file is assumed to contain TEXT data.
Convert
This option specifies whether data conversion is required during the copy operation. Typically,
conversion is only required when the data contains square brackets. If no value is entered in the
Conversion Table field, the data being copied is converted using the default conversion table
(BPXFX000) in the standard library concatenation. By default, this would cause a conversion between
code pages IBM-037 and IBM-1047. Otherwise the value in the Conversion Table field identifies a
conversion table to be used for the copy operation.
Conversion Table
These types of values can be specified in this field:
• data_set_name(member_name)
The partitioned data set and member containing the character conversion table.
• data_set_name
The partitioned data set that has the member BPXFX000 containing the character conversion table.
• (member_name)
The member containing the character conversion table. It is assumed to be in a data set in the
standard library concatenation. (The default data set is SYS1.LINKLIB.)
Note: This field is ignored if the Convert option is not selected or if copying to another z/OS UNIX
file.
For further information on the character conversion table refer to the description of the OGET
command in the z/OS UNIX System Services Command Reference.

CI—copy data in
The CI (copy in) line command can be entered against a regular file or directory.
Note: In the panel displayed by the CI line command, you can specify a "+" (plus) character as the first
character of a path name to represent the path name of the directory currently listed.

Copying into a regular file

When the CI line command is entered against a regular file, the Replace z/OS UNIX File panel is displayed.

Replace z/OS UNIX File

Command ===>

Into z/OS UNIX file:

Name . . . : /u/mburns/abcde

From z/OS UNIX file, data set, or member:

Name . . . . +

Options
Binary copy
Convert

Conversion Table

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward

F8=Forward F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 172. Replace z/OS UNIX File panel (ISRUULRF)

Utilities (option 3) 265

z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

This panel allows you to copy into a regular file data from another z/OS UNIX file, a sequential data set, or
a member of a partitioned data set.
Note:
1. When copying from a sequential data set or member of a partitioned data set, ISPF invokes the z/OS
UNIX OPUT command to perform the copy operation.
2. this operation will cause existing data in the regular file to be overwritten.
The panel displays the path name of the file into which the data will be copied. These mandatory input
fields are displayed on this panel:
Name
The source of the data to be copied into the file. Any of these can be specified:
• The path name of a z/OS UNIX file
• The name of a sequential data set
• The names of an existing partitioned data set and member
These optional input fields are available on this panel:
Binary copy
When this option is selected it indicates the data set/member being copied contains binary data. This
causes the copy to take place without any consideration for newline characters or the special
characteristics of DBCS data. If this option is not selected the data set/member is assumed to contain
TEXT data.
Note: This option is ignored when copying to another z/OS UNIX file.
Convert
This option specifies whether data conversion is required during the copy operation. Typically,
conversion is only required when the data contains square brackets. If no value is entered in the
Conversion Table field, the data being copied is converted using the default conversion table
(BPXFX000) in the standard library concatenation. By default, this would cause a conversion between
code pages IBM-037 and IBM-1047. Otherwise the value in the Conversion Table field identifies a
conversion table to be used for the copy operation.
Note: This option is ignored when copying to another z/OS UNIX file.
Conversion Table
These types of values can be specified in this field:
• data_set_name(member_name)
The partitioned data set and member containing the character conversion table.
• data_set_name
The partitioned data set that has the member BPXFX000 containing the character conversion table.
• (member_name)
The member containing the character conversion table. It is assumed to be in a data set in the
standard library concatenation. (The default data set is SYS1.LINKLIB.)
Note: This field is ignored if the Convert option is not selected or if copying from another z/OS UNIX
file.
For further information on the character conversion table refer to the description of the OPUT
command in the z/OS UNIX System Services Command Reference.

Copying into a directory

When the CI line command is entered against a directory, the Copy Into z/OS UNIX Directory panel is
displayed.

266 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

Copy Into z/OS UNIX Directory

Command ===>
More: +
Into z/OS UNIX directory:
Name . . . : /u/mburns/abcdir1

From partitioned data set:

Name . . . . EXEC

Permissions 777
Suffix . . . .

Options
Replace like-named files
Update permissions for replaced files
/ Selection list...
/ Convert to lowercase
Binary copy
Convert

Conversion Table
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward
F8=Forward F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 173. Copy Into z/OS UNIX Directory panel (ISRUULRD)

This panel allows you to copy the data from members of a partitioned data set into regular files in a
directory.
Note: ISPF invokes the z/OS UNIX OPUT command to perform the operation of copying data from a
member of a partitioned data set into a regular file.
The panel displays the path name of the directory into which the members of the partitioned data set will
be copied. These mandatory input fields are displayed on this panel:
Name
The name of an existing partitioned data set containing the members that will be copied as regular
files into the selected directory.
Permissions
Defines the permissions for new regular files created when copying a partitioned data set member in
the directory. When the option "Update permissions for replaced files" is selected, it also defines new
permissions applied to a file replaced during the copy operation. Enter as three octal (range 0-7)
digits. The first digit defines the access permission for the file owner. The second digit defines the
access permission for any member of the file's group. The third digit defines the access permission for
anyone else. See Table 17 on page 255.
These optional input fields are available on this panel:
Suffix
This field allows you to specify a value that will be added to the end of the member name to form the
file name of the regular file that is created or updated during the copy operation. The member name
and suffix are separated by a period (.). Any leading periods specified in the suffix are ignored.
Replace like-named files
When this option is selected, if the file into which the data from a selected member is to be copied
already exists in the directory, the contents of the existing file will be overwritten with the data from
the selected member. If this option is not selected, the copy of that member will not be performed.
Update permissions for replaced files
When this option is selected it causes existing files that are replaced by the copy operation to also
have their permissions changed to the value specified in the Permissions field.
Selection List
If this option is selected, the Copy Into z/OS UNIX Directory - Selection List panel is displayed. This
panel displays a list of the members in the partitioned data set that can be selected for copying into
the directory. The list contains these fields:

Utilities (option 3) 267

z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

S
An input field where you can enter S to indicate the associated member is to be copied into the
directory.
Member
The name of the partitioned data set member that can be copied into the directory.
Filename
The name to be used for the regular file into which the data from the associated member will be
copied. This is an input field, allowing you to change the file name to something other than the
name assigned by ISPF. The field is scrollable and is 1023 bytes long. Use the EXPAND function
key (F4) to display the entire field in a pop-up window.
Message
This field displays a message indicating the result of copying the member to the regular file. The
possible values displayed are:
*COPIED
The data from the member was successfully copied to a new regular file in the directory.
*REPL
The data from the member was copied to an existing regular file in the directory. The data in
the file was overwritten. This can only occur when the Replace like-named files option is
selected on the Copy Into z/OS UNIX Directory panel.
*NO-REPL
The data from the member was not copied to the file in the directory because the file already
existed and the Replace like-named files option was not selected on the Copy Into z/OS UNIX
Directory panel.
*FAILED RC=xx
The OPUT command invoked to copy the data from the member to the regular file failed with
return code xx. The data was not copied.
When you press Enter on this panel, the selected members will be copied to the directory. The
Message field indicates the result of the copy operation for each member.
Convert to lowercase
When this option is selected it causes the member name to be converted to lowercase before it is
used to generated the file name for the target regular file.
Binary copy
When this option is selected it indicates the members being copied contains binary data. This causes
the copy to take place without any consideration for newline characters or the special characteristics
of DBCS data. If this option is not selected the members are assumed to contain TEXT data.
Convert
This option specifies whether data conversion is required during the copy operation. Typically,
conversion is only required when the data contains square brackets. If no value is entered in the
Conversion Table field, the data being copied is converted using the default conversion table
(BPXFX000) in the standard library concatenation. By default, this would cause a conversion between
code pages IBM-037 and IBM-1047. Otherwise the value in the Conversion Table field identifies a
conversion table to be used for the copy operation.
Conversion Table
These types of values can be specified in this field:
• data_set_name(member_name)
The partitioned data set and member containing the character conversion table.
• data_set_name
The partitioned data set that has the member BPXFX000 containing the character conversion table.
• (member_name)

268 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

The member containing the character conversion table. It is assumed to be in a data set in the
standard library concatenation. (The default data set is SYS1.LINKLIB.)
Note: This field is ignored if the Convert option is not selected.
For further information on the character conversion table refer to the description of the OPUT
command in the z/OS UNIX System Services Command Reference.

D—delete a file
The D (delete file) line command can be entered against any directory entry. If entered against a file or an
empty directory and the Confirm File Delete option is selected, the Confirm Delete panel is displayed. This
panel allows the delete operation to be canceled if necessary using the CANCEL or EXIT commands. You
can prevent this panel being displayed for subsequent delete operations by selecting the "Set file delete
confirmation off" option.
If the deletion proceeds successfully, the file or directory is removed from the file system.
If the D line command is entered against a directory containing files and subdirectories and the Confirm
Non-empty Directory Delete option is selected, the Confirm Non-empty Directory Delete panel is
displayed. This panel allows the delete operation to be canceled if necessary using the CANCEL or EXIT
commands. You can prevent this panel being displayed for subsequent delete operations by selecting the
"Set non-empty directory delete confirmation off" option.
If the deletion proceeds successfully the directory, including all contained files and subdirectories, is
removed from the file system.

E—edit regular file

The E (edit) line command can be entered against a regular file or directory. The ISPF editor is invoked,
allowing you to change the data in the file.
If you enter the E line command beside a directory, a directory list is displayed allowing you to select a
regular file to edit.
A numeric record length can also be specified as an option with the E line command for a regular file. This
option allows you to set the record length when editing fixed-length text files. When specified, the file is
processed as variable length but loaded into the editor as fixed-length records and saved as fixed-length
records. This lets you convert a variable-length file to fixed length.
The Edit Entry panel can be displayed when the E line command is entered. This panel allows you specify
items including the initial macro, profile name, panel name, format, mixed mode, and workstation editing.
These values are stored in the profile and are used on subsequent edits. The Bypass z/OS UNIX File Edit
Options panel option on the z/OS UNIX Directory List Options panel can be selected to stop this panel
being displayed for subsequent file edit sessions.

EA—edit ASCII file

The EA (Edit - ASCII) line command can be entered against a regular file that contains data encoded in
ASCII and the file is not tagged with a CCSID of 819. The ISPF editor is invoked with the ASCII edit facility
which converts the ASCII data to the CCSID of the terminal, allowing you to read and change the ASCII
data in file. If the E line command is used and the file is tagged with a CCSID of 819, ISPF invokes the
ASCII edit facility.

EU—edit UTF-8 file

The EU (Edit - UTF-8) line command can be entered against a regular file that contains data encoded in
UTF-8 and the file is not tagged with a CCSID of 1208. The ISPF editor is invoked with the UTF-8 edit
facility which converts the UTF-8 data to the CCSID of the terminal, allowing you to read and change the
UTF-8 data in file. If the E line command is used and the file is tagged with a CCSID of 1208, ISPF invokes
the UTF-8 edit facility.

Utilities (option 3) 269

z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

FS—file system
The FS (file system) line command can be entered against any directory entry except a FIFO or character
special file. This line command causes the z/OS UNIX File System Attributes panel to be displayed.

z/OS UNIX File System Attributes

Command ===>

Pathname : /u/myhome/prog1

File system name . : OMVS.USERS.ISD1

Mount point . . . : /u

Status . . . . . . : Available
File system type . : HFS
Mount mode . . . . : R/W

Device number . . : 7
Type number . . . : 1
DD name . . . . . : SYS00012

Ignore SETUID . . : NO
Bypass Security . : NO
Automove . . . . . : YES
Owning system . . : ISD1

CCSID . . . . . . :
Text Convert . . . : NO
Seclabel . . . . . :

Block size . . . . : 4096

Total blocks . . . : 2880000
Available blocks . : 2178092
Blocks in use . . : 701411

Data blocks read . . . : 0

Data blocks written . . : 0
Directory blocks r/w . : 0

Mount parameters

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 174. z/OS UNIX File System Attributes panel (ISRUULFS)

This panel displays the attributes of the file system for the file in these fields:
File system name
The name of the data set for the file system.
Mount point
The name of the directory that is the mount point for this file system.
Status
One of these values describing the current state of the file system:
Available
The file system is mounted and available for use.
Not Active
The file system is not available for use.
Reset in progress
A reset unmount request is currently being processed.
Unmount drain in progress
The file system will be unmounted when it is no longer in use.
Unmount force in progress
The file system is being unconditionally unmounted.

270 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

Unmount immediate in progress

The file system is being unmounted, even though it may be in use.
Unmount in progress
The file system is being unmounted if it is not currently in use.
Pending unmount reset or force
An immediate unmount request failed.
Quiesced by (process ID)
The file system is quiesced, usually for backup.
Mount in progress
The file system is being mounted.
Recycling
The physical file system is in a recycle but a mount has not yet been done for this file system.
Recycling, Asynch Mounting
The physical file system is in a recycle and the file system is in an asynchronous mount.
Recycling, Not Active
The physical file system is in a recycle and the file system failed to successfully mount.
Unowned
The file system has become unowned.
In Recovery
Recovery processing is in progress.
Super Quiesced
The file system is in a super quiesced state.
File system type
The type of physical file system that manages this mounted file system.
Mount mode
Shows whether the file system is mounted read/write (R/W) or read-only(R/O).
Device number
The device number that uniquely identifies the mounted file system. This is a hexadecimal value.
Type number
A number set by the physical file system to indicate the type of this file system. The HFS file system
sets this value to 1.
DD name
The MVS data definition name used by the physical file system to access the mounted file system.
Ignore SETUID
This value indicates whether the SETUID and SETGID mode bits on any executable in this file system
be ignored when the program is run.
Bypass Security
This value indicates whether security checks are not enforced for files in this file system.
Automove
This value indicates whether the system can automatically move the file system to another system
and remain local and unowned, or be unmounted.
Owning system
The name of the system that owns this file system.
CCSID
The coded character set identifier to be implicitly set for untagged files in the file system.
Text Convert
This value indicates whether untagged files are implicitly marked as containing pure text data that can
be converted.

Utilities (option 3) 271

z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

Seclabel
This security label assigned to a file system that is mounted read-only. This security label applies to
all objects within the file system that do not have security labels assigned.
Block size
The length, in bytes, of a data block for the physical file system.
Total blocks
The total number of 4096-byte blocks in this file system.
Available blocks
The number of 4096-byte blocks in this file system that are available for use.
Blocks in use
The number of 4096-byte blocks in this file system that are currently in use.
Data blocks read
The block I/O count for user data reads. This value is only available if SMF type 92 records are active.
Data blocks written
The block I/O count for user data writes. This value is only available if SMF type 92 records are active.
Directory blocks r/w
The block I/O count for directory I/Os. This value is only available if SMF type 92 records are active.
Mount parameters
The parameters specified with the mount command for this file system.

I—information
The I (information) line command can be entered against any directory entry.

Information display for non-link files

When entered against any directory entry type apart from symbolic and external links, the z/OS UNIX File
Information panel is displayed. Figure 175 on page 272 shows an example.

Modify
───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
z/OS UNIX File Information
Command ===>
More: +
Pathname . . : /SYSTEM/etc/profile

General Data Mode Fields

File Type . . : File Permissions . : 755
File Size . . : 10665 Set User ID . : NO
Links . . . . : 1 Set Group ID : NO
Inode . . . . : E0 Sticky Bit . : NO
File Format . : ----
Last Modified : 2003/07/10 03:21:51 Extended Attributes
Last Changed : 2003/07/10 03:22:40 Shared AS . . : YES
Last Accessed : 2006/04/05 01:20:34 APF Auth . . : NO
Created . . . : 2003/07/10 03:18:18 Pgm Control . : NO
CCSID . . . . : Shared Lib . : NO
Text Convert : NO
Audit
Owner Auditor . . . : ---
File . . . . : IBMUSER(0) User . . . . : fff
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward F8=Forward
F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 175. z/OS UNIX File Information panel (ISRUULIN)

This panel displays information describing the attributes of a z/OS UNIX file. The Pathname field displays
the path name of the selected z/OS UNIX file.
The General Information section of the panel displays these fields:
File Type
The type of z/OS UNIX file. The possible values are:

272 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

Dir
Directory
File
Regular file
Char
Character special file
FIFO
FIFO (first-in-first-out) special file
Size
The file size, in bytes.
Links
For a file, the number of hard links to the file. For a directory, the number of subdirectories.
Inode
File identification number, unique within the file system.
File Format
File format for regular files. The possible values are:
----
Not specified
bin
Binary data
nl
New line
cr
Carriage return
lf
Line feed
crlf
Carriage return followed by line feed
lfcr
Line feed followed by carriage return
crnl
Carriage return followed by new line
Last Modified
The date and time the file was last changed.
Last Changed
The date and time the status of the file was last changed.
Last Accessed
The date and time the data in the file was last accessed.
Created
The date and time the file was created.
CCSID
The coded character set identifier assigned to the file for Enhanced ASCII support.
Text Convert
A value of YES indicates the file is enabled for Enhanced ASCII automatic conversion. NO indicates
the file is not enabled for automatic conversion.
The Owner section of the panel displays these fields:
File
The user ID and UID number of the owner of the file or directory.

Utilities (option 3) 273

z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

Group
The group name and GID number of the owner of the file or directory.
The Mode Fields section of the panel displays these fields:
Permissions
The file or directory permissions, in octal format. If there are extended access control list (ACL)
entries defined for the file or directory, + is displayed after the octal value.
Set User ID
A value of ON indicates the SETUID bit is on causing the effective user ID of the user process
executing a program to be set to that of the file owner when this file is run.
Set Group ID
A value of ON indicates the SETGID bit is on causing the effective group ID of the user process
executing a program to be set to that of the file owner when this file is run.
Sticky Bit
A value of ON indicates the sticky bit for the file or directory is set on. For files that are programs this
causes z/OS UNIX to search for the program in the user's STEPLIB, the link pack area, or the link list
concatenation. For a directory it means a user can only remove or rename a file or remove a
subdirectory if one of these conditions is true:
• The user owns the file or subdirectory
• The user owns the directory
• The user has superuser authority
The Extended Attributes section of the panel displays these fields:
Shared AS
A value of YES indicates that the program can run in a shared address space.
APF Auth
A value of YES indicates that the program can run APF authorized if it has been linked with AC=1.
Pgm Control
A value of YES indicates that the program can run as if it were from a program controlled library.
Shared Lib
A value of YES indicates that the program is loaded as a system shared library program.
The Audit section of the panel displays these fields:
Auditor
Shows the audit criteria for this file as defined by a user with auditor authority. The value shows three
characters describing the audit bit settings for read, write, and execute (search) access. The possible
values for each character are:
s
Audit successful access attempts
f
Audit failed access attempts
a
Audit all access attempts
-
No audit
User
Shows the audit criteria for this file as defined by the file owner or a superuser. See the field Auditor
for the possible values displayed.
The Device Data section of the panel displays these fields:
Device Number
A hexadecimal number that uniquely identifies the mounted file system for this file.

274 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

Major Device
For a character special file, this is a number that identifies the device type. The possible values are:
1
Master pseudo-TTY device, which is tied to a slave device by the minor number
2
Slave pseudo-TTY device, which is tied to a master device by the minor number
3
Controlling terminal TTY
4
Null file
5
File descriptor file, which is tied to a file descriptor by the minor number
6
UNIX domain socket name special file
9
System console file
Minor Device
A number that identifies a specific device of a given device type.
The Modify action bar choice provides these options:
Mode Fields
Displays the Modify z/OS UNIX File Mode Fields panel where you can update the mode fields for the
currently displayed file.
Extended Attributes
Displays the Modify z/OS UNIX File Extended Attributes panel where you can update the extended
attributes for the currently displayed file.

Information display for link files

When the I line command is entered against a symbolic or external link file, the z/OS UNIX Symbolic Link
Information panel is displayed. Figure 176 on page 275 shows an example.

z/OS UNIX Symbolic Link Information

Command ===>

Pathname . . . : /SYSTEM/etc/ioepdcf

General Data
External Link : NO
File Size . . : 22
Links . . . . : 1
Inode . . . . : 7
Last Modified : 2002/11/20 19:30:53
Last Changed : 2002/11/20 19:30:53
Last Accessed : 2002/11/20 19:30:53
Created . . . : 2002/11/20 19:30:53

Owner
File . . . . : IBMUSER(0)
Group . . . . : OMVSGRP(1)

Symbolic Link -
../etc/dfs/etc/ioepdcf

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 176. z/OS UNIX Symbolic Link Information panel (ISRUULIS)

Utilities (option 3) 275

z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

This panel displays information describing the attributes of a z/OS UNIX symbolic or external file. The
Pathname field displays the path name of the selected symbolic or external link file.
The General Information section of the panel displays these fields:
External Link
A value of YES indicates the file is an external link to an object outside of the file system. A value of NO
indicates the file is a link to another file or a directory.
Size
The file size, in bytes.
Links
The number of hard links to the file.
Inode
File identification number, unique within the file system.
Last Modified
The date and time the file was last changed.
Last Changed
The date and time the status of the file was last changed.
Last Accessed
The date and time the data in the file was last accessed.
Created
The date and time the file was created.
The Owner section of the panel displays these fields:
File
The user ID and UID number of the owner of the file or directory.
Group
The group name and GID number of the owner of the file or directory.
The Symbolic Link field is a scrollable field that displays the path name or external name to which this
symbolic link file refers.

L—directory list
The L (list directory) line command can be entered against a directory. This line command causes a new
z/OS UNIX Directory List panel to be displayed, showing the entries for the selected directory. This new
directory list display is nested so entering the END or EXIT command on this panel will return you to the
previous directory list. Entering the CANCEL command on a nested directory list display will return you to
the directory list utility entry panel.

MA—modify ACL
The MA (modify ACL) line command can be entered against any directory or file entry. This line command
causes the Modify z/OS UNIX ACL list panel to be displayed.

276 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

z/OS UNIX ACL List Row 1 from 75

Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE

S UID Read Write eXecute Name Type

108 R BILLSWA USER
607 R MBOTES USER
204 R SCLMU GROUP
991 R TGROUP1 GROUP
992 R W X TGROUP2 GROUP
993 R W TGROUP3 GROUP
******************************* Bottom of data ********************************

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 177. Modify z/OS UNIX ACL list panel (ISRUULMA)

Panel ISRUULMA may display with no entries indicating that no ACL entries have been created.
The list is sorted in UID order.
You can enter these commands on the command line:
A
Add a new ACL.
SA
Sort the ACL list alphabetically by userid.
SN
Sort the ACL list numerically on UID.
ST
Sort the ACL list alphabetically by type.
If there are ACL entries displayed, these fields are shown:
S
Select field. These commands are valid:
A
To add further entries.
D
To delete the entry.
X
To list members of an OMVS group.
UID
UNIX UID value.
Read, Write, eXecute
Read, write, and execute permissions for this ACL.
Name
The name associated with the UID value.

Utilities (option 3) 277

z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

Type
Describes whether the entry is for a USER or GROUP.

MF—modify format
The MF (modify format) line command can be entered against any directory entry except a symbolic link
file. This line command causes the Modify z/OS UNIX File Format panel to be displayed.

Menu Utilities View Options Help

┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
e Modify z/OS UNIX File Format │
│ Command ===> │
│ │
│ Pathname . : /u/myhome/prog1 │
│ Type . . . : File │
│ │
│ Format . . . 1 1. NA 3. NL 5. LF 7. LFCR │
│ 2. Binary 4. CR 6. CRLF 8. CRNL │
│ │
│ CCSID . . . │
│ │
│ Enter "/" to select option │
│ Automatic Conversion │
│ │
│ │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward │
│ F8=Forward F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel │
⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 178. Modify z/OS UNIX File Format panel (ISRUULMF)

The Pathname field displays the path name of the selected file. The Type field display the file type for the
selected file.
The format and tag information for the file can be changed by updating these input fields on the panel:
Format
Enter one of the listed numbers corresponding to one of these formats required for the file:
NA
No format specified.
Binary
Binary data.
NL
Text file; lines delimited by the newline character.
CR
Text file; lines delimited by the carriage-return character.
LF
Text file; lines delimited by the line-feed character.
CRLF
Text file; lines delimited by carriage-return and line-feed characters.
LFCR
Text file; lines delimited by line-feed and carriage-return characters.
CRNL
Text file; lines delimited by carriage-return and newline characters.

278 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

CCSID
Enter the numeric coded character set identifier (CCSID) associated with the file. The numeric value
must be between 0 and 65535. You can set this field to blanks or enter a value of 0 to indicate there is
no CCSID associated with the file.
Automatic Conversion
Select this option to identify the file as a candidate for automatic conversion provided by z/OS UNIX
Enhanced ASCII support.
Note:
1. A superuser or the owner can change the file format of a file.
2. A superuser, the owner, or a user with write permission can change the tag information (CCSID and
automatic conversion setting) for a file.
3. File tag information cannot be set for a z/OS UNIX directory. Therefore when processing a directory the
CCSID and Automatic Conversion fields are protected.

MG—modify group
The MG (modify group) line command can be entered against any directory entry except a symbolic link
file. This line command causes the Modify z/OS UNIX File Owning Group panel to be displayed.

Menu Utilities View Options Help

┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ Modify z/OS UNIX File Owning Group │
│ Command ===> │
│ │
│ Pathname . : /u/myhome/prog1 │
│ Type . . . : File │
│ │
│ GID Number 108 │
│ Group ID . . SYSADMIN │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward │
│ F8=Forward F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel │
⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 179. Modify z/OS UNIX File Owning Group panel (ISRUULMG)

The Pathname field displays the path name of the selected file. The Type field display the file type for the
selected file.
The owning group for the file can be changed by a superuser or the owner by updating one of these input
fields on the panel:
GID Number
This field allows you to enter the GID of the new group. This must be a number, in the range 1 to
2147483647, and must be defined as a z/OS UNIX GID in your security data base.
Group ID
This field allows you to enter the group ID of the new group. The group ID must be defined as a z/OS
UNIX group in your security data base.

Utilities (option 3) 279

z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

MM—modify mode fields

The MM (modify mode) line command can be entered against any file type apart from symbolic and
external link files. This line command causes the Modify z/OS UNIX File Mode Fields panel to be
displayed. This panel allows you to modify mode fields for the selected z/OS UNIX file.
The Pathname field displays the path name of the selected file. The Type field display the file type for the
selected file.
These optional input fields allow you to make modifications to the mode of the file:
Permissions
This field allows you to change the permissions defined for the file. The current permissions for the file
are initially displayed. The permissions are displayed and entered as three octal (range 0-7) digits.
The first digit defines the access permission for the file owner. The second digit defines the access
permission for any member of the file's group. The third digit defines the access permission for
anyone else. See Table 17 on page 255.
Set UID bit
When this option is selected, the file mode SETUID bit is set on. When the option is not selected, the
SETUID bit is set off. If the SETUID bit is on, the effective user ID of the user process executing a
program will be set to that of the file owner when this file is run.
Set GID bit
When this option is selected, the file mode SETGID bit is set on. When the option is not selected, the
SETGID bit is set off. If the SETGID bit is on, the effective group ID of the user process executing a
program will be set to that of the file owner when this file is run.
Sticky bit
When this option is selected, the file mode sticky bit is set on. When this option is not selected, the
sticky bit is set off. If the sticky bit is on for a file that is a program, z/OS UNIX will search for the
program in the user's STEPLIB, the link pack area, or the link list concatenation. If the sticky bit is on
for a directory it means a user can only remove or rename a file or remove a subdirectory if one of
these conditions is true:
• The user owns the file or subdirectory
• The user owns the directory
• The user has superuser authority

MO—modify owner
The MO (modify owner) line command can be entered against any directory entry except a symbolic link
file. This line command causes the Modify z/OS UNIX File Owning User panel to be displayed.

280 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

Menu Utilities View Options Help

┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ Modify z/OS UNIX File Owning User │
│ Command ===> │
│ │
│ Pathname . : /u/myhome/prog1 │
│ Type . . . : File │
│ │
│ UID Number 0 │
│ User ID . . IBMUSER │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward │
│ F8=Forward F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel │
⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 180. Modify z/OS UNIX File Owning User panel (ISRUULMO)

The Pathname field displays the path name of the selected file. The Type field display the file type for the
selected file.
The owner of the file can be changed by a superuser by updating one of these input fields on the panel:
UID Number
This field allows you to enter the UID of the new owner. This must be a number, in the range 1 to
2147483647, and must be defined as a z/OS UNIX UID in your security data base.
User ID
This field allows you to enter the user ID of the new owner. The user ID must be defined in your
security data base and have the authority to use z/OS UNIX resources.

MX—modify extended attributes

The MX (Modify eXtended) line command can be entered against regular files in the directory list. This line
command causes the Modify z/OS UNIX File Extended Attributes panel to be displayed. This panel allows
you to modify the extended attributes for the selected z/OS UNIX regular file. These attributes only affect
files that are programs.
The Pathname field displays the path name of the selected file. The Type field display the file type for the
selected file.
These optional input fields allow you to modify the extended attributes:
Use Shared Address Space
When this option is selected, ISPF sets the extended attribute that makes the program eligible to run
in a shared address space.
APF Authorized
When this option is selected, ISPF sets the extended attribute that makes the program eligible to run
APF-authorized if it has been linked with AC=1.
Program Controlled
When this option is selected, ISPF sets the extended attribute that makes the program eligible to run
as if it were from a program controlled library.
Shared Library
When this option is selected, ISPF sets the extended attribute that causes the program to be loaded
from the system shared library region.

Utilities (option 3) 281

z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

N—create a new directory entry

The N (new) line command can be entered against any directory entry. The Create New z/OS UNIX File
panel is displayed.

Create New z/OS UNIX File

Command ===>

Pathname . . . . /u/sclmtest +

Permissions . . (Octal)

Link . . . . . . +

Options
File Type . . . 1. Directory Set sticky bit
2. Regular file Copy...
3. FIFO Edit...
4. Symbolic Link
5. External Link
6. Hard Link

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward

F8=Forward F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 181. Create New z/OS UNIX File panel (ISRUULNW)

These mandatory input fields are displayed on this panel:

Pathname
The path name for the z/OS UNIX file to be created. This field is initialized with the path name of the
file that the N line command was entered against. The field is scrollable with a length of 1023 bytes.
Use the EXPAND function key (F4) to display the entire field in a pop-up window.
Note: In the panel displayed by the N line command, you can specify a "+" (plus) character as the first
character of a path name to represent the path name of the directory currently listed.
Permissions
The permissions defined for the new file. Enter as three octal (range 0-7) digits. The first digit defines
the access permission for the file owner. The second digit defines the access permission for any
member of the file's group. The third digit defines the access permission for anyone else. See Table 17
on page 255.
Link
This field is only mandatory when creating a Symbolic Link, External Link, or Hard Link. When creating
a Symbolic Link or a Hard Link this field is used to define the path name of the existing file the link
refers to. When creating an External Link this field is used to define the external name the link refers
to. The field is scrollable with a length of 1023 bytes. Use the EXPAND function key (F4) to display the
entire field in a pop-up window.
File Type
This field is used to enter one of the listed numbers corresponding to the type of file you want to
create.
1. Directory
2. Regular file
3. FIFO
4. Symbolic Link
5. External Link
6. Hard Link
These optional fields can be selected on this panel:

282 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

Set sticky bit

When this option is selected it causes the sticky bit to be set on for the new file or subdirectory. When
the sticky bit is set for a directory, a user cannot remove or rename a file in the directory unless one or
more of these is true:
• The user owns the file
• The user owns the directory
• The user has superuser authority
If the sticky bit is set for a program file, when executing the program z/OS UNIX will search for the
program in the user's STEPLIB, the link pack area, or the link list concatenation.
Copy
When this option is selected and you are creating a new regular file, it causes the Replace z/OS UNIX
File panel to be displayed, allowing you to have the data from a z/OS UNIX file, data set, or partitioned
data set member copied into the new file. When selected and you are creating a new directory, it
causes the Copy Into z/OS UNIX Directory panel to be displayed, allowing you to have the data from
members in a partitioned data set copied into files in the new directory.
Edit
When this option is selected and you are creating a new regular file, it causes the edit function to be
invoked allowing you to create and modify data in the new file.

R—rename a file
The R (rename file) line command can be entered against any directory entry. This line command causes
the Rename z/OS UNIX File panel to be displayed. This panel displays the Pathname and Type of the file
being renamed. Use the New Pathname field to enter the new name for the file.
Note: In the panel displayed by the R line command, you can specify a "+" (plus) character as the first
character of a path name to represent the path name of the directory currently listed.
When you press Enter, ISPF attempts to rename the file.
Attention: If the New Pathname you specified corresponds to an existing file, the Confirm Rename
panel is displayed. In this situation, proceeding with the rename will cause the existing file with
the same name to be deleted.

RA—Add to Personal Data Set List

The RA (refadd) line command is used to add the pathname of the selected file or directory to a personal
data set list. When the RA line command is entered, the pop-up panel shown here is displayed, allowing
you to enter the name of the personal data set where the entry for the pathname is to be added.

Utilities (option 3) 283

z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

Menu Utilities View Options Help

─ ┌─────────────────────────────────────┐ ─────────────────────────────────────
│ Personal Data Set List Add │ tory List Row 1 to 6 of 6
C │ │ Scroll ===> PAGE
│ Enter a Personal List Name: │
P │ │
│ List Name . . . │
C │ │ Type Permission Audit Ext Fmat
- │ │ -------------------------------------
│ │ Dir rwxrwxrwx fff---
│ │ Dir rwxrwxrwx fff---
│ Press ENTER to add data set. │ Dir rwxrwxrwx fff---
r │ Press CANCEL to cancel Refadd. │ File rwxrwxrwx fff--- --s- ----
│ │ File rwxrwxrwx fff--- --s- ----
│ F1=Help F2=Split │ File rwxrwxrwx fff--- --s- ----
* │ F3=Exit F7=Backward │ data ********************************
⋘─────────────────────────────────────┘

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F5=Rfind F7=Up F8=Down

F9=Swap F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 182. Personal Data Set List Add pop-up panel

UA—user auditing
The UA (user auditing) line command can be entered against any directory entry. This line command
causes the Modify z/OS UNIX File User Audit Options panel to be displayed.

Menu Utilities View Options Help

┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ Modify z/OS UNIX File User Audit Options │
│ Command ===> │
│ │
│ Pathname . : /u/myhome/prog1 │
│ Type . . . : File │
│ │
│ Read 2 1. None Write 2 1. None Execute 2 1. None │
│ 2. Failure 2. Failure 2. Failure │
│ 3. Success 3. Success 3. Success │
│ 4. Both 4. Both 4. Both │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward │
│ F8=Forward F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel │
⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 183. Modify z/OS UNIX File User Audit Options panel (ISRUULUA)

The Pathname field displays the path name of the selected file. The Type field display the file type for the
selected file.
The user auditing options for the file can be changed by a superuser or the owner. These options allow
you to define the access attempts that are audited by the security system. You can specify auditing to
occur for read, write, and search or execute attempts on the file or directory.
The panel displays fields for specifying the Read, Write and Execute (or search) audit settings. For each of
these fields, you enter one of the listed numbers corresponding to one of these results for the access
attempt:
None
No audit record is to be written for this type of access.

284 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

Failure
Write an audit record if this type of access fails.
Success
Write an audit record if this type of access is successful.
Both
Write an audit record for both failed and successful access attempts.

V—view regular file

The V (view) line command can be entered against a regular file or directory. The ISPF editor is invoked,
allowing you to view the data in the file.
If you enter the V line command beside a directory, a directory list is displayed allowing you to select a
regular file to view.
The View Entry panel can be displayed when the V line command is entered. This panel allows you specify
items including the initial macro, profile name, panel name, format, mixed mode, and workstation editing.
These values are stored in the profile and are used on subsequent edits. The Bypass z/OS UNIX File Edit
Options panel option on the z/OS UNIX Directory List Options panel can be selected to stop this panel
being displayed for subsequent file edit sessions.

VA—view ASCII file

The VA (View - ASCII) line command can be entered against a regular file that contains data encoded in
ASCII and the file is not tagged with a CCSID of 819. The ISPF editor is invoked with the ASCII edit facility
which converts the ASCII data to the CCSID of the terminal, allowing you to view the ASCII data in file. If
the V line command is used and the file is tagged with a CCSID of 819, ISPF invokes the ASCII edit facility.

VU—view UTF8 file

The VU (View - UTF8) line command can be entered against a regular file that contains data encoded in
UTF8 and the file is not tagged with a CCSID of 1208. The ISPF editor is invoked with the UTF8 edit facility
which converts the UTF8 data to the CCSID of the terminal, allowing you to view the UTF8 data in file. If
the V line command is used and the file is tagged with a CCSID of 1208, ISPF invokes the UTF8 edit
facility.

X—execute command
The X (eXecute command) line command can be entered against regular files, directories, or symbolic
links to regular files or directories in the directory list. This line command causes the Execute Command
for z/OS UNIX File panel to be displayed.
This panel allows you to enter and execute a z/OS UNIX command, TSO command, CLIST, or REXX EXEC,
with the path name of the selected file being passed as a parameter.
The Pathname field displays the path name of the selected file.
These input fields allow you to specify the command and select the method by which it is run:
Command for file
Use this field to enter the z/OS UNIX command, TSO command, CLIST, or REXX exec to be run.
By default, ISPF appends the path name of the selected file to the end of the command you have
entered. If you need to have the path name in a position other than the end of the command, use the
path name substitution character to indicate where you want the path name to be placed. The default
pathname substitution character is ! (exclamation point). For more information about using this
symbol, see “Using the path name substitution character” on page 258.
The path name substitution character can also be changed using the Directory List Options panel (see
page “Path name substitution character” on page 291).
If the command is to run in z/OS UNIX by selecting a Run method of Direct or Login shell, then this
field can be left blank. This causes the selected file to be executed.

Utilities (option 3) 285

z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

Run method
This field is mandatory. It allows you to select one of these methods for running the command:
Direct
Causes the command to be run in z/OS UNIX.
Login shell
Causes the command to be run under the login shell in z/OS UNIX.
TSO
Causes the command to be passed to TSO for execution.
z/OS UNIX command time limit
This field allows you to set a limit to the amount of time the command can run. This time limit is
entered as a number of seconds. If this limit is exceeded, ISPF sends a SIGKILL signal to the process
running the command to terminate execution. If you do not want a time limit set, leave the field blank
or enter a value of zero.
The time limit value can also be specified on the Directory List Options panel (see page “z/OS UNIX
command time limit” on page 291).

z/OS UNIX directory list utility primary commands

These topics describe the primary commands available when using the z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility:
• “EDIT command” on page 286
• “FIND and RFIND commands” on page 287
• “LEFT command” on page 287
• “LOCATE command” on page 288
• “REFRESH command” on page 288
• “RESET command” on page 288
• “RIGHT command” on page 288
• “SAVE command” on page 289
• “SORT command” on page 289
• “SU command” on page 290
• “z/OS UNIX commands” on page 290
Note: If you enter a "/" (forward slash) in the primary command field, ISPF displays a panel with an
extended primary command field allowing you to enter commands up to 255 characters in length.

EDIT command
The EDIT primary command is used to edit a file in the directory currently listed. Use this format:
EDIT filename

The command can be abbreviated as E, EA, or EU. If EA is used, the editor is invoked with the ASCII edit
feature. If EU is used, the editor is invoked with the UTF-8 edit feature.
For example, if the command shown here was entered while displaying the directory list for u/myhome it
would invoke Edit for the file with a path name of /u/myhome/prog1:

E prog1

ISPF calls the ISPF editor to edit the file. If the file specified on the EDIT command does not exist in the
directory, the ISPF editor is still called and can be used to create a new file in the directory.

FILTER command
The FILTER command is used to append to or replace the current path name filter. If the current display is
a personal list, then the filter can only be replaced.

286 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

APPEND
FILTER string
REPLACE

If the current filter is /u/harry/test* then

FILTER p
changes the filter to /u/harry/test*p.
The REFRESH command restores the entry value.

FIND and RFIND commands

The FIND primary command is used to find and display the next occurrence of a character string in the list
of file names. Use this format:

NEXT

FIND string ALL

FIRST

LAST

PREV

The command can be abbreviated as F.

For example, this command would tell ISPF to find all occurrences of the character string dat1:

F dat1 ALL

For more information about the operands used with this command, see “FIND—find character strings” on
page 76.
ISPF automatically scrolls to bring the character string to the top of the directory list. To repeat the search
without re-entering the character string, use the RFIND command.
Note: The RFIND search starts from the second file on the current directory list screen. It is not cursor-
sensitive.

LEFT command
The LEFT primary command scrolls the columns displaying information for the directory list to the left.
These columns do not include the Filename and Message columns, which are fixed as the left-hand
columns of the Directory List display. Use this format:
LEFT
PAGE

MAX
n

where:
PAGE
Specifies to scroll left by the number of columns of data (not counting the fixed fields) that can be
displayed within the current screen width. This is the default. P can be used as an abbreviation.
MAX
Specifies to scroll left so that the first column of data is displayed in the leftmost position. M can be
used as an abbreviation.
n
Is a numeric value specifying the number of columns to be scrolled to the left.

Utilities (option 3) 287

z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

Note: If you issue the LEFT command while the cursor is positioned in a scrollable field such as the
Filename field, ISPF will scroll the scrollable field and the directory list columns will not be scrolled to the
left.

LOCATE command
The LOCATE primary command scrolls the directory list based on the field on which the directory list is
sorted, as described under “SORT command” on page 289. Use this format:

LOCATE lparm

You can use the lparm operand with the LOCATE command for either of these situations:
• If the list is sorted by the Filename field, specify a file name.
• If the list is sorted by another field, specify a value for the field by which the list is sorted.
The command can be abbreviated as L.
For example, for a directory list sorted by type, you could enter:

L Syml

This command locates the first symbolic link file in the directory list. If the value is not found, the list is
displayed starting with the entry before which the specified value would have occurred.

REFRESH command
The REFRESH primary command updates the display of the directory list to whatever the list's current
state is. For example, after deleting several items on the list, REFRESH causes the list to be displayed
without the deleted items. ISPF rebuilds the directory list display by re-reading the entries for the
directory.
The command can be abbreviated as REF

REFRESH

REF

RESET command
The RESET primary command removes any pending line commands and messages from the directory list.
The command can be abbreviated as RES.

RESET

RES

RIGHT command
The RIGHT primary command scrolls the columns displaying information for the directory list to the right.
These columns do not include the Filename and Message columns, which are fixed as the left-hand
columns of the Directory List display. Use this format:
RIGHT
PAGE

MAX
n

where:
Page
Specifies to scroll right by the number of columns of data (not counting the fixed fields) that can be
displayed within the current screen width. This is the default. P can be used as an abbreviation.

288 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

Max
Specifies to scroll right so that the first column of data is displayed in the rightmost position. M can be
used as an abbreviation.
n
Is a numeric value specifying the number of columns to be scrolled to the right.
Note: If you issue the RIGHT command while the cursor is positioned in a scrollable field such as the
Filename field, ISPF will scroll the scrollable field and the directory list columns will not be scrolled to the
right.

SAVE command
The SAVE primary command writes the directory list to the ISPF list data set or to a sequential data set.
ISPF writes the directory list in its current sort order. Use this format:
SAVE
list-id

where list-id is an optional user-specified qualifier of the data set to which the directory list will be
written. ISPF names the data set prefix.userid.list-id.DIRLIST where:
prefix
Your data set prefix, as specified in your TSO user profile. If you have no prefix set, or if your prefix is
the same as your user ID, the prefix is omitted and the data set name will be: userid.list-id.DIRLIST
userid
Your TSO user ID.
If the data set does not exist it is created. If the data set already exists and has compatible attributes it is
overwritten. If you omit the list-id operand, the list is written to the ISPF list data set.
This command would tell ISPF to write the list to a sequential data set named either
prefix.userid.MY.DIRLIST or userid.MY.DIRLIST:

SAVE MY

If the sequential data set already exists, ISPF overwrites it; if not, ISPF creates it.

SORT command
The SORT primary command sorts the directory list by the specified field. Use this format:
SORT
field1
A field2 A

D D

where:
field1
The major sort field. If omitted, Filename is assumed.
field2
The minor sort field. If both operands are used, ISPF sorts the list by field1 first, then by field2 within
field1.
A|D
Specifies the sort sequence for the associated sort field (A=ascending; D=descending). By default,
character fields are sorted alphabetically and numeric fields are sorted in descending order.
For example, to sort a directory list by file type and then in descending order by modification date and
time within each file type, use this command:

SORT TYPE MODIFIED

Utilities (option 3) 289

z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

This table identifies the sort field names and associated sort sequence:

Table 18. Sort field names and associated sort sequence

Field Sequence Description
FILENAME|FILE|NAME Ascending File name
MESSAGE|MES Ascending Command message
TYPE Ascending File type
PERM Ascending Permissions
PERMO Descending Permissions (octal)
AUDIT|AUD Ascending Audit bit settings
EXTA|EXT Ascending Extended attributes
FORMAT|FMAT Ascending File format
OWNER|OWN Ascending File owner
GROUP|GRP Ascending Owner group
LINKS Descending File links
SIZE Descending File size
MODIFIED|MOD Descending Date/time file last changed
CHANGED|CHG Descending Date/time file status last changed
ACCESSED|ACC Descending Date/time file status last accessed
CREATED|CRE Descending Date/time file was created

SU command
The SU primary command allows you to switch to super-user mode (UID 0) or switch back to your initial
UID.
For more details, see “Switching UIDs with the SU primary command” on page 316.

z/OS UNIX commands

You can also enter z/OS UNIX commands in the primary command field on the directory list display panel
if the option Enter z/OS UNIX commands in Command field is selected on the z/OS UNIX Directory List
Options panel. These commands run under the login shell in z/OS UNIX.
If you enter / (forward slash) in the primary command field the z/OS UNIX Directory List Command Entry
panel is displayed. This panel provides a 255 character length command field for entering long z/OS UNIX
and TSO commands. The panel also has a list of point-and-shoot fields showing the last 10 z/OS UNIX
commands entered from the z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility. The point-and- shoot fields allow you to
retrieve and execute z/OS UNIX commands. The List action bar allows you to activate or deactivate
updates to the list. The Mode action bar allows you to specify that commands are just retrieved or
retrieved and executed from the list. There is also an option that allows you to delete entries from the list.
The Function action bar provides an option to compress null entries from the list.

z/OS UNIX directory list options panels

These topics describe the panels available through the Options pull-down menu:
• “z/OS UNIX Directory List Options panel” on page 291
• “z/OS UNIX Directory List Column Arrangement panel” on page 291
• “z/OS UNIX Directory List Default Line Commands panel” on page 292

290 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

z/OS UNIX Directory List Options panel

This panel allows you to set and save options that change the behaviour of z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility
functions. This panel contains these optional input fields:
Width of filename column
Use this field to define the width of the column used to display file names in the directory list. The
minimum value you can specify is 8. The maximum value is 110. If the value is larger than the screen
width minus 50, ISPF uses the screen width minus 50 for the width of the filename column.
Note: The panel field used for the Filename column is defined as scrollable.
Path name substitution character
This field defines the character that can be used to represent the full path name of a selected file. This
character shows the position of the file name when it is specified as an argument in a z/OS UNIX
command, TSO command, CLIST, or REXX exec. The substitution character can be used with
commands that are invoked either as a line command in the directory list or through the Execute
Command for z/OS UNIX File panel (see “X—execute command” on page 285). The default character
is ! (exclamation point).
z/OS UNIX command time limit
This field allows you to set a limit to the amount of elapsed time for a z/OS UNIX command run either
directly or under the login shell. z/OS UNIX commands can be invoked via the X line command (see “X
—execute command” on page 285) or by using the line command prefix characters < (direct) or >
(login shell) (see “z/OS UNIX commands, TSO commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs” on page 257). If
the time limit set is exceeded by a z/OS UNIX command, ISPF sends a SIGKILL signal to the process
running the command to terminate execution.
If you do not want to set a time limit, leave the field blank or enter a value of zero.
Output Mode
This field allows you to display the output from z/OS UNIX commands in View or Browse mode.
Confirm File Delete
This option controls the display of the Confirm Delete panel. This panel is displayed when you use the
directory list line command "D" to delete files or empty directories. When this option is selected, the
Confirm Delete panel is displayed. When this option is not selected, the panel is not displayed and the
file or empty directory is deleted without any additional user interaction.
Confirm Non-empty Directory Delete
This option controls the display of the Confirm Non-empty Directory Delete panel. This panel is
displayed when you use the directory list line command "D" to delete a directory that contains files
and subdirectories. When this option is selected, the Confirm Non-empty Directory Delete panel is
displayed. When this option is not selected, the panel is not displayed and the directory (including all
contained files and subdirectories) is deleted without any additional user interaction.
Bypass z/OS UNIX File Edit Options panel
When this option is selected, ISPF will not display the z/OS UNIX File Edit Options panel when the
directory list line command "E" is used to edit a regular file. When this option is not selected, this
panel, which allows you to specify an edit profile and initial edit macro, will be displayed before
editing a regular file.
Display permissions in octal format
When this option is selected, permissions for files in the directory list are displayed in octal format.
When this option is not selected, permissions are displayed in symbolic format.

z/OS UNIX Directory List Column Arrangement panel

This panel allows you to alter the order and width of the columns displayed on the directory list panel. It
lists each column in the z/OS UNIX Directory List. These fields are displayed for each entry:
Restore default column arrangements
Selecting this option allows you to reset the Order and Width values used to format the directory list
display to their default values.

Utilities (option 3) 291

z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

Order
This input field displays the current ordinal position for the column on the directory list display. You
can update the value in this field to alter the position of this column on the directory list display. For
example, to move the Owner field to be the second column displayed, type 02 over its current Order
number and press Enter. The list of Columns is rearranged to show the Owner field in the second
position. When you next display a directory list, the columns are shown in the new order:

Pathname . : /

Command Filename Message Type Owner Permission Audit Ext

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
bin Dir IBMUSER rwxr-xr-x fff---
dev Syml IBMUSER rwxrwxrwx fff---
etc Syml IBMUSER rwxrwxrwx fff---

Column
This output field displays the heading for the column on the directory list display.
Width
This input field displays the current width for the field for the column on the directory list display. You
can update this value to increase or decrease the size of the field for the column. Setting the width
value to 0 (zero) means the column will not be displayed in the directory list.
Maximum
This output field displays the maximum value that can be entered in the Width field.

z/OS UNIX Directory List Default Line Commands panel

This panel allows you to set and save the default line commands for the different z/OS UNIX file types
displayed in a z/OS UNIX directory list. The default line command for a file type is invoked when the
cursor is positioned in the line command field for a file of that type, the Enter key is pressed but a
command is not entered in the field. This panel contains these input fields:
Directory
Use this field to define the default line command for directories. The valid values are:
• CO
• CI
• N
• L (default)
• I
• D
• R
• MM
• MO
• MG
• MF
• X
• UA
• AA
• FS
Regular file
Use this field to define the default line command for regular files. The valid values are:
• E
• EA
• V

292 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

• VA
• B (default)
• CO
• CI
• N
• I
• D
• R
• MM
• MX
• MO
• MG
• MF
• X
• UA
• AA
• FS
• RA
Character special
Use this field to define the default line command for character special files. The valid values are:
• N
• I (default)
• D
• R
• MM
• MO
• MG
• MF
• UA
• AA
FIFO
Use this field to define the default line command for FIFO files. The valid values are:
• N
• I (default)
• D
• R
• MM
• MO
• MG
• MF
• UA
• AA

Utilities (option 3) 293

z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

Symbolic link
Use this field to define the default line command for symbolic link files. The valid values are:
• E
• EA
• V
• VA
• B
• CO
• CI
• N
• I (default)
• D
• R
• X

Use of scrollable fields for path names

Because path names can be up to 1023 characters in length, ISPF uses scrollable fields throughout the
z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility for the display and entry of path names.
For path name output fields, if a + (scroll indicator) is displayed to the right of the path name it indicates
that the path name is larger than the display field length. The RIGHT primary command can be used to
view more of the path name by scrolling the value right. Use the EXPAND function key (F4) to display the
entire path name field in a pop-up window.
For path name input fields the + scroll indicator is always displayed to the right of the path name,
indicating that you can enter a path name larger than the input field length. The RIGHT primary command
can be used to obtain more input space by scrolling the value right. Use the EXPAND function key (F4) to
display the entire path name input field in a pop-up window.

z/OS UNIX Mounted File Systems

When you select Mount Table by File System... from the File_Systems pull-down menu on the action bar
of the z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility Panel, ISPF displays the z/OS UNIX Mounted File Systems panel
(ISRUUMT0). The entries in the displayed list are ordered by file system name.
Note: The z/OS UNIX Mounted File Systems panel is initially displayed with all entries collapsed. Figure
184 on page 295 is an example of the panel with all list entries expanded.

294 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

Menu Utilities Options Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
z/OS UNIX Mounted File Systems Row 1 from 148

File System Name Mount Point Type Mode Owner A/M Status I/O Counts
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-DB2.**
-DB2.V810.**
-DB2.V810.OMVS
-DB2.V810.OMV
DB2.V810.OM /apc/db2810/ HFS R/O ISA1 YES Available 0
-DB2.V810.OMV
DB2.V810.OM /apc/db2810/ HFS R/O ISA1 YES Available 0
DB2.V810.OMV /apc/db2810/ HFS R/O ISA1 YES Available 0
-DB2.V810.OMV
DB2.V810.OM /apc/db2810/ HFS R/O ISA1 YES Available 0
-DB2.V910.**
-DB2.V910.SDSN
DB2.V910.SDS /apc/tdb2910 HFS R/O ISA1 YES Available 0
-DB2.V910.SDSN
DB2.V910.SDS /apc/tdb2910 HFS R/O ISA1 YES Available 0
-DB2.V910.SDSN
DB2.V910.SDS /apc/tdb2910 HFS R/O ISA1 YES Available 0
-DB2.V910.SDSN
DB2.V910.SDS /apc/tdb2910 HFS R/O ISA1 YES Available 0
-FEK.**
-FEK.V850.**
-FEK.V850.OMVS

Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward F8=Forward
F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 184. z/OS UNIX Mounted File Systems panel (ISRUUMT0), ordered by file system name

When you select Mount Table by Mount Point... from the File_Systems pull-down menu on the action bar
of the z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility Panel, ISPF displays the z/OS UNIX Mounted File Systems panel
(ISRUUMT0). The entries in the displayed list are ordered by mount point name.
Note: The z/OS UNIX Mounted File Systems panel is initially displayed with all entries collapsed. Figure
185 on page 296 is an example of the panel with all list entries expanded.

Utilities (option 3) 295

z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

Menu Utilities Options Help

────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
z/OS UNIX Mounted File Systems Row 1 from 75

Mount Point File System Name Type Mode Owner A/M Status I/O Counts
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-/ SYS1.OMVS.$$SRCB. HFS R/O ISA1 YES Available 0
-/apc OMVS.APC.HFS.ISA1 HFS R/W ISA1 YES Available 0
-/apc/db28
-/apc/db2
-/apc/db
/apc/d DB2.V810.OMVS.DB2 HFS R/O ISA1 YES Available 0
/apc/d DB2.V810.OMVS.DB2 HFS R/O ISA1 YES Available 0
/apc/d DB2.V810.OMVS.HFS HFS R/O ISA1 YES Available 0
/apc/d DB2.V810.OMVS.MSY HFS R/O ISA1 YES Available 0
/apc/itim ITIMRACF.V5.HFS HFS R/O ISA1 YES Available 0
-/apc/tdb2
-/apc/tdb
-/apc/td
/apc/t DB2.V910.SDSNAHFS HFS R/O ISA1 YES Available 0
/apc/t DB2.V910.SDSNJCC. HFS R/O ISA1 YES Available 0
/apc/t DB2.V910.SDSNMQLS HFS R/O ISA1 YES Available 0
/apc/t DB2.V910.SDSNWORF HFS R/O ISA1 YES Available 0
/apc/tipt IPT4Z.V114.OMVS.H HFS R/O ISA1 YES Available 0
/apc/trdz RD4Z.V710.OMVS.HF HFS R/O ISA1 YES Available 0
/apc/trdz RD4Z.V750.OMVS.HF HFS R/O ISA1 YES Available 0
/apc/trdz RD4Z.V760.OMVS.HF HFS R/O ISA1 YES Available 0
/apc/trdz RD4Z.V801.OMVS.HF HFS R/O ISA1 YES Available 0

Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward F8=Forward
F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 185. z/OS UNIX Mounted File Systems panel (ISRUUMT0), ordered by mount point name

The z/OS UNIX Mounted File Systems panel, whether ordered by file system name or mount point name,
provides you with these options:
• Expand or contract sections of the list
• Modify the format of the list
• Find file systems or mount points in the list
• Display information for a file system
• Display directory list information for a file system
• Modify the attributes of a file system
• Reset the pending quiesce of a file system
• Mount or unmount a file system.

z/OS UNIX Mounted File Systems panel action bar

The z/OS UNIX Mounted File Systems panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu
For more information, refer to the details about the Menu Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Utilities
For more information, refer to the details about the Utilities Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User
Interface topic in z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Options
The Options pull-down offers these choices:
1
Mount Table List Options...
This option allows you to define the width of the leftmost column in the mounted file systems list.
For more information, see “Setting the mounted file systems list options” on page 297.

296 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

2
Mount Table Column Arrangement...
This option allows you to alter the order and width of the columns displayed on the Mounted File
Systems panel. For more information, see “Setting the mounted file systems list column
arrangement” on page 298.
3
Expand All Entries
Expands all entries in the mounted file systems list and all subentries. This function is also
provided by primary command XA. For more information on primary command XA, see “XA
command” on page 309.
4
Mount...
Provides the option to mount a file system. This function is also provided by primary command
MOUNT. For more information on primary command MOUNT, see “MOUNT command” on page
307.
Help
The Help pull-down provides information about the z/OS UNIX Mounted File Systems primary
commands and line commands as well as information about the format of the mounted file systems
list.

Setting the mounted file systems list options

When you select Mount Table List Options... from the Options pull-down menu on the action bar, ISPF
displays the z/OS UNIX Mount Table List Options panel (ISRUMNO1).

Menu Utilities Options Help

┌────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ z/OS UNIX Mount Table List Options │
│ │
│ Width of Mount Point column in Mount │
│ Point List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 │
│ │
│ Width of File System column in File │
│ System List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ Command ===> │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward │
│ F8=Forward F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel │
└────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Command ===> MTBOPTS Scroll ===> PAGE

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward F8=Forward
F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 186. z/OS UNIX Mount Table List Options panel (ISRUMNO1)

This panel allows you to define the width of the leftmost column in the mounted file systems list. This
column displays:

Utilities (option 3) 297

z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

• Mount point names when the list is ordered by mount point name.
• File system names when the list is ordered by file system name
The following fields are available on this panel:
Width of Mount Point column in Mount Point List:
This field allows you to define the width of the column used to display mount point names in the
mount point list. The minimum value is 11 and the maximum value is 110. If the value is larger than
the screen width minus 50, ISPF uses the screen width minus 50 for the width of the mount point
name column.
Width of File System column in File System List:
This field allows you to define the width of the column used to display file system names in the file
system list. The minimum value is 16 and the maximum value is 110. If the value is larger than the
screen width minus 50, ISPF uses the screen width minus 50 for the width of the file system name
column.

Setting the mounted file systems list column arrangement

When you select Mount Table Column Arrangement... from the Options pull-down menu on the action bar,
ISPF displays the Mount Table Column Arrangement panel (ISRUMNO2).

Menu Utilities Options Help

┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ Mount Table Column Arrangement Row 1 to 7 of 7 │
│ │
│ Enter "/" to select option │
│ Restore default column arrangements │
│ │
│ Order Column Width Maximum │
│ 01 File System Name 025 70 │
│ 02 Type 004 8 │
│ 03 Mode 004 4 │
│ 04 Owner 008 8 │
│ 05 A/M 003 3 │
│ 06 Status 040 40 │
│ 07 I/O Counts 003 10 │
│ ***************************** Bottom of data ****************************** │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward │
│ F8=Forward F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel │
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward F8=Forward
F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 187. Mount Table Column Arrangement panel (ISRUMNO2)

This panel allows you to modify the order and width of the columns displayed on the z/OS UNIX Mounted
File Systems panel. You can also restore the settings to their default values.
The order and width settings are kept separately for the display ordered by file system name and the
display ordered by mount point name. The settings that are displayed and updated on the Mount Table
Column Arrangement panel are for the display that is active when the Mount Table Column Arrangement
panel is selected. Figure 187 on page 298 shows an example of the Mount Table Column Arrangement
panel when it is selected from the display ordered by mount point name.
The following input fields are available on this panel:

298 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

Restore default column arrangements

Indicates that the z/OS UNIX Mounted File Systems panel is displayed with the default column
arrangements. The default order and column lengths are:

Order Column Width

1 File system name 35
or
Mount point name 25

2 Type 4
3 Mode 4
4 Owner 8
5 A/M 3
6 Status 10
7 I/O Counts 10

Order
The order for each of the columns on the panel.
Width
The length for each of the columns on the panel. The maximum length allowed for each column is also
displayed.

z/OS UNIX Mounted File Systems panel fields

The z/OS UNIX Mounted File Systems panel displays the following information about the file systems:
File System Name
The name of the data set for the file system.
Mount point
The name of the directory that is the mount point for the file system.
Type
The type of physical file system that manages the mounted file system.
Mode
The mount mode of the file system. Possible values are R/W (Read/Write) and R/O (Read only).
Owner
The name of the owning system of the file system.
A/M
Indicates whether the automove function is enabled for the file system.
Status
The status of the file system. For the possible status values and their explanations, see the FS (file
system) line command topic under “z/OS UNIX directory list utility line commands” on page 259.
I/O Counts
The sum of the block input/output counts for user data reads, user data writes, and directory inputs/
outputs. This value is only available if SMF type 92 records are active.

z/OS UNIX mounted file systems line commands

After you display the z/OS UNIX mounted file systems list, you can enter a line command to the left of a
list entry.
If you enter a slash (/) to the left of a list entry, the Mounted File Systems List Actions pop-up window is
displayed. This window allows you to select the line command you want to invoke.

Utilities (option 3) 299

z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

Menu Utilities Options Help

─ ┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐ ─────
│ Mounted File Systems List Actions │ 148
│ │ unts
│ Selected entry . . : DB2.V910.SDSNWORF.HFS │ -----
- │ │
│ Action: │
│ 1. Display file system information │
│ 2. Display directory list information │
│ 3. Modify file system attributes │
│ 4. Reset quiesce file system │ 0
│ 5. Unmount file system │
│ 6. Expand or contract list entry │ 0
│ 7. Expand list entry and all subentries │ 0
│ │
│ Select a choice and press ENTER to process action. │ 0
│ │
│ │
│ │ 0
│ │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward │ 0
│ F9=Swap F12=Cancel │
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘ 0

Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward F8=Forward
F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 188. Mounted File Systems List Actions pop-up window

I — information
The I (information) line command displays the z/OS UNIX File System Attributes panel (ISRUULFS). This
panel, which displays file system information and attributes, is the same panel that is displayed by the FS
(file system) line command under z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility. For more information, see the FS--file
system topic under “z/OS UNIX directory list utility line commands” on page 259. The I command can be
entered only on lines that display both a file system name and a mount point name.
z/OS UNIX File System Attributes panel (ISRUULFS)

300 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

z/OS UNIX File System Attributes

Command ===>

Pathname : /apc/db2810/usr/lpp/db2ext_08_01_00

File system name . : DB2.V810.OMVS.DB2EXT.HFS

Mount point . . . : /apc/db2810/usr/lpp/db2ext_08_01_00

Status . . . . . . : Available
File system type . : HFS
Mount mode . . . . : R/O

Device number . . : C
Type number . . . : 1
DD name . . . . . : SYS00015

Ignore SETUID . . : NO
Bypass Security . : NO
Automove . . . . . : YES
Owning system . . : ISA1

CCSID . . . . . . :
Text Convert . . . : NO
Seclabel . . . . . :

Block size . . . . : 4096

Total blocks . . . : 5220
Available blocks . : 320
Blocks in use . . : 4869

Data blocks read . . . : 0

Data blocks written . . : 0
Directory blocks r/w . : 0

Mount parameters

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel

L — directory list
The L (directory list) line command displays the z/OS UNIX Directory List panel (ISRUUDL0). This panel,
which displays directory list information for the file system, is the same panel that is displayed when Enter
is pressed on the z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility panel while the Option line is blank. For more
information, see the Blank—display directory list topic under “z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility panel
options” on page 250. The L command can be entered only on lines that display both a file system name
and a mount point name.

Utilities (option 3) 301

z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

Menu Utilities View Options Help

────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
z/OS UNIX Directory List Row 1 to 13 of 25
Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE

Pathname . : /SYSTEM/etc

Command Filename Message Type Permission Audit Ext Fmat

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
. Dir rwxr-xr-x fff---
.. Dir rwxr-xr-x fff---
.nfsc File rw-r--r-- fff--- --s- ----
ant.conf File rwxrwxrwx fff--- --s- ----
bpa Dir rwxr-xr-x fff---
cmx Dir rwxr-xr-x fff---
dce Dir rwxr-xr-x fff---
dfs Dir rwxr-xr-x fff---
inetd.conf File rwxrwxrwx fff--- --s- ----
inetd.pid File rw-r--r-- fff--- --s- ----
ioepdcf Syml rwxrwxrwx fff---
ldap Dir rwxr-xr-x fff---
licmgmt Dir rwxr-xr-x fff---
log File rw-rw---- fff--- --s- ----
pkiserv Dir rwxr-xr-x fff---
profile File rwxr-xr-x fff--- --s- ----
security Dir rwxr-xr-x fff---
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F5=Rfind F7=Up F8=Down
F9=Swap F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 189. z/OS UNIX Directory List panel (ISRUUDL0)

M — modify attributes
The M (modify attributes) line command displays the Select the Attribute to Change panel (ISRUMATR),
allowing you to modify the file system attributes. The M command can be entered only on lines that
display both a file system name and a mount point name. This function is restricted to superusers.

Menu Utilities Options Help

─ ┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐ ───────
│ Select the attribute to change │ om 148
│ │
│ File system . : DB2.V910.SDSNWORF.HFS │ Counts
- │ │ -------
│ Select the attribute to change │
│ 1. Change mount mode to R/W │
│ 2. Change owning system from ISA1 │
│ 3. Change automove attribute... │
│ 4. Remount samemode R/O │ 0
│ │
│ New owning system │ 0
│ │ 0
│ │
│ Command ===> │ 0
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward │
│ F8=Forward F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel │
└───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘ 0

Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward F8=Forward
F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 190. Select the Attribute to Change panel (ISRUMATR)

The Select the Attribute to Change panel provides the following options:
1
Change mount mode
You can change the mount mode between R/O (Read-only) and R/W (Read/Write).

302 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

2
Change owning system
In sysplex mode, the owning system can be changed. For this option, you must also specify the name
of the new owning system at the bottom of the selection menu.
3
Change automove attribute
In sysplex mode, the automove attribute can be changed. If automove is set to no, the file system
becomes unavailable when the owning system is shutting down.
4
Remount samemode
You can remount the file system without changing the mode. This can be used in an attempt to regain
use of a file system with I/O errors.
When you select the Change mount mode option, ISPF displays the Mode Change Confirmation panel
(ISRUCHGM).

Menu Utilities Options Help

─ ┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐ ───
│ Mode Change Confirmation │ 48
│ │
│ CAUTION: │ ts
- │ The selected file system is about to be remounted. The file system │ ---
│ is first unmounted and then mounted with a different mount mode. │
│ │
│ File system name: DB2.V910.SDSNWORF.HFS │
│ │
│ │ 0
│ To proceed with the remount, press the ENTER key. To cancel the │
│ remount, use the CANCEL or EXIT function key. │ 0
│ │ 0
│ │
│ │ 0
│ │
│ Command ===> │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward │ 0
│ F8=Forward F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel │
└───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘ 0

Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward F8=Forward
F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 191. Mode Change Confirmation panel (ISRUCHGM)

If you press the Enter key on the Mode Change Confirmation panel, the file system is first unmounted and
then remounted in the changed mode.
When you select the Change automove attribute option, ISPF displays the Set Automove Attribute panel
(ISRUSAMA).

Utilities (option 3) 303

z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

Menu Utilities Options Help

─ ┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐ ─────────────
│ Set Automove Attribute │ w 1 from 148
│ │
│ Select the automove attribute │ I/O Counts
- │ _ 1. Yes │ -------------
│ 2. No │
│ 3. Unmount │
│ 4. Include systems │
│ 5. Exclude systems │
│ │ 0
│ │
│ System names for Include or Exclude │ 0
│ │ 0
│ │
│ │ 0
│ │
│ │
│ │ 0
│ │
│ │ 0
│ Command ===> │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand │ 0
│ F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap F10=Actions │
m └─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘ 0

Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward F8=Forward
F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 192. Set Automove Attribute panel (ISRUSAMA)

The automove attribute specifies the action that is to be taken for the file system when the system is in
sysplex mode and the owning system fails.
The Set Automove Attribute panel provides the following options:
1
Yes
Select this option to set automove to on. Recovery of the file system is performed when the current
owner fails. Use this option on mounts of file systems that are critical to operation across all the
systems in the sysplex. This is the default.
2
No
Select this option to set automove to off. Attempts are not made to keep the file system active when
the current owner fails. The file system remains in the hierarchy for possible recovery when the
original owner reinitializes. Use this option on mounts for system-specific file systems to have
automatic recovery when the original owner rejoins the sysplex.
If this option is used, the file system becomes unowned when the owning system exits the sysplex.
The file system remains unowned until the last owning system restarts, or until the file system is
unmounted. The mount point for the file system is still in use because the file system still exists in the
file system hierarchy.
An unowned file system is a mounted file system that does not have an owner. It can be recovered or
unmounted because it still exists in the file system hierarchy.
3
Unmount
Select this option to set automove to unmount. If the current owner fails, the file system becomes
inactive. The file system, as well as all the file systems mounted within it, is unmounted if the owner is
no longer active in the sysplex.
Use this option for system-specific file systems, such as those that would be mounted at /etc, /
dev, /tmp and /var.

304 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

4
Include Systems
Select this option to ensure that recovery of a file system transfers ownership only to a particular
system or set of systems in the sysplex. Recovery of the file system is performed in priority order only
by the list of systems specified in the include list. Specify the include list under System names for
Include or Exclude.
5
Exclude Systems
Select this option to prevent recovery of a file system from transferring ownership to a particular
system, or set of systems, in the sysplex. When the current owner fails, recovery of the file system is
performed by a randomly selected owner outside the exclude list. Specify the exclude list under
System names for Include or Exclude.

R — release from quiesce

The R (release from quiesce) line command displays the Release From Quiesce Status panel (ISRURFQS).
The R command can be entered only on lines that display both a file system name and a mount point
name. This function is restricted to superusers.

Menu Utilities Options Help

─ ┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐ ───
│ Release From Quiesce Status │ 48
│ │
│ CAUTION: │ ts
- │ The selected file system is about to be released from the quiesce │ ---
│ status. │
│ │
│ A backup in progress may be invalidated. │
│ │
│ File system name: DB2.V910.SDSNWORF.HFS │ 0
│ │
│ │ 0
│ To proceed with the Release, press the ENTER key. To cancel the │ 0
│ Release, use the CANCEL function key. │
│ │ 0
│ │
│ Command ===> │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward │ 0
│ F8=Forward F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel │
└───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘ 0

Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward F8=Forward
F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 193. Release From Quiesce Status panel (ISRURFQS)

If the release operation is successful, the file system returns to the available status. A file system is likely
to be in a quiesced status during a file system backup.

U — unmount
The U (unmount) line command displays the Unmount a z/OS UNIX File System panel (ISRUMNUM). The
U command can be entered only on lines that display both a file system name and a mount point. A file
system cannot be unmounted if other file systems are mounted on it. This function is restricted to
superusers.

Utilities (option 3) 305

z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

Menu Utilities Options Help

┌────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ Unmount a z/OS UNIX File System │
│ │
│ CAUTION: │
│ The file system is about to be unmounted. │
│ │
│ File System Name . : DB2.V910.SDSNWORF.HFS │
│ │
│ Unmount Type . . . . _ 1. Normal │
│ 2. Immediate │
│ 3. Force │
│ │
│ │
│ Command ===> │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward │
│ F8=Forward F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel │
└────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward F8=Forward
F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 194. Unmount a z/OS UNIX File System panel (ISRUMNUM)

The Unmount a z/OS UNIX File System panel provides the following options:
1. Normal
Performs a normal unmount request. If the files in the named file system are not in use, the unmount
is performed. Otherwise, the request is rejected.
2. Immediate
Performs an unmount immediate request. The file system is unmounted immediately, forcing any
users of any files in the named file system to fail. All data changes that were made up to the time of the
request are saved. If there is a problem saving the data, the unmount request fails.
3. Force
Performs an unmount force request. The file system is unmounted immediately, forcing any users of
any files in the named file system to fail. All data changes that were made up to the time of the request
are saved. If there is a problem saving the data, the request continues and data might be lost. Because
data might be lost, the request is rejected unless an immediate unmount request was previously
attempted.

X — expand
If the mounted file systems list entry is not expanded and there are subentries available, the X (expand)
line command expands the entry by one level. If the mounted file systems list entry is expanded, the X
(expand) line command contracts the entry.

XA — expand all
If the mounted file systems list entry is not expanded and there are subentries available, the XA (expand
all) line command expands the entry and all subentries.

z/OS UNIX mounted file systems primary commands

These topics describe the primary commands available on the z/OS UNIX Mounted File Systems panel:
• “FIND and RFIND commands” on page 307
• “LEFT command” on page 307
• “MOUNT command” on page 307
• “RIGHT command” on page 309
• “XA command” on page 309

306 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

FIND and RFIND commands

The FIND primary command is used to find and display the next occurrence of a character string within
the mounted file systems list. The string can be found in either the mount point name or the file system
name. Use this format:

NEXT

FIND string ALL

FIRST

LAST

PREV

The command can be abbreviated as F.

For example, this command finds all occurrences of the character string dat1:

F dat1 ALL

For more information about the ALL, FIRST, NEXT, LAST, and PREV operands, see “FIND—find character
strings” on page 76.
ISPF automatically scrolls to bring the character string to the top of the list. To repeat the search without
re-entering the character string, use the RFIND command.
Note: The RFIND search starts from the second entry in the displayed list. It is not cursor-sensitive.

LEFT command
The LEFT primary command scrolls the columns displaying information for the mounted file systems to
the left. These columns do not include the leftmost column, which is fixed on the z/OS UNIX Mounted File
Systems display. Use this format:

PAGE
LEFT
MAX
n

where:
PAGE
Specifies to scroll left by the number of columns of data (not counting the leftmost column, which is
fixed) that can be displayed within the current screen width. This is the default. P can be used as an
abbreviation.
MAX
Specifies to scroll left so that the first scrollable column of data is displayed in the leftmost scrollable
position. M can be used as an abbreviation.
n
Specifies the number of columns to be scrolled to the left.
Note: If you issue the LEFT command while the cursor is positioned in a scrollable field, ISPF scrolls the
scrollable field and the mounted file systems list columns are not scrolled to the left.

MOUNT command
The MOUNT primary command displays the Mount z/OS UNIX File System panel (ISRUMNMT). This panel
can be used to logically mount a mountable file system. When a file system is mounted it is added to the
file system hierarchy. Use this format:

MOUNT

Utilities (option 3) 307

z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

The command can be abbreviated as MO, MOU, or MOUN.

Note: The MOUNT command is also available by using the Mount... choice on the Options pull-down menu
on the action bar.

Mount z/OS UNIX File System

Mount Point . . . /u/testuser_ +

File System Name

File System Type New Owner . . . . .

Owning System . . Character Set ID . .

Additional Mount Options

Read-only file system Set automove attribute...
Ignore SETUID and SETGID Enable text conversion
Bypass security

Mount Parameter +

Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward F8=Forward
F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 195. Mount z/OS UNIX File System panel (ISRUMNMT)

This panel allows you to enter the information needed to mount a file system. These required input fields
are displayed on this panel:
Mount point
The name of the directory that is the mount point for the file system.
File System Name
The name of the data set for the file system.
File System Type
The type of physical file system that manages the mounted file system.
These optional input fields are available on this panel:
New Owner
The name of the system that is designated to own the file system if the current owning system fails.
Owning system
The name of the system that owns the file system.
Character Set ID
The coded character set identifier to be implicitly set for untagged files in the file system.
Read-only file system
Indicates that the file system is mounted in read-only (R/O) mode.
Ignore SETUID and SETGID
Indicates that the SETUID and SETGID mode bits are ignored on any executable file in the file system
when the program is run.
Bypass security
Indicates that the security checks are not enforced for files in the file system.
Set automove attribute...
Indicates that you want the Set Automove Attribute panel to be displayed when you press Enter. Use
this panel to specify the action that is to be taken for the file system when the system is in sysplex

308 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

mode and the owning system fails. For more information, see the section on the Set Automove
Attribute panel under “M — modify attributes” on page 302.
Enable text conversion
Indicates that untagged files are implicitly marked as containing pure text data that can be converted.
Mount parameters
The parameters that are specified with the mount command for the file system.

RIGHT command
The RIGHT primary command scrolls the columns displaying information for the mounted file systems to
the right. These columns do not include the leftmost column, which is fixed on the z/OS UNIX Mounted
File Systems display. Use this format:

PAGE
RIGHT
MAX
n

where:
PAGE
Specifies to scroll right by the number of columns of data (not counting the leftmost column, which is
fixed) that can be displayed within the current screen width. This is the default. P can be used as an
abbreviation.
MAX
Specifies to scroll right so that the last scrollable column of data is displayed in the rightmost position.
M can be used as an abbreviation.
n
Specifies the number of columns to be scrolled to the right.
Note: If you issue the RIGHT command while the cursor is positioned in a scrollable field, ISPF scrolls the
scrollable field and the mounted file systems list columns are not scrolled to the right.

XA command
The XA primary command expands all entries in the z/OS UNIX Mounted File Systems list and all
subentries. Use this format:

XA

Note: The XA primary command is also available by using the Expand All Entries choice on the Options
pull-down menu on the action bar.

Creating a new zFS

When you select New zFS from the File_Systems pull-down menu on the action bar of the z/OS UNIX
Directory List Utility Panel, ISPF displays the Create a zFS Aggregate and File System panel (ISRUUFS4).

Utilities (option 3) 309

z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

Menu RefList RefMode Utilities Options File_Systems Help

┌────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ Create a zFS Aggregate and File System │
│ │
│ Enter the fields as required then press Enter. │
│ │
│ Aggregate name . . . . . _ │
│ Owning user . . . . . . . (Number or user name) │
│ Owning group . . . . . . (Number or group name) │
│ Permissions . . . . . . . 750 (3 digits, each 0-7) │
│ Primary cylinders . . . . │
│ Secondary cylinders . . . │
│ Storage class . . . . . . │
│ Management class . . . . │
│ Data class . . . . . . . │
│ Volume names . . . . . . │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ Command ===> │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward │
│ F8=Forward F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel │
└────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Option ===> UDLFSZ

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward F8=Forward
F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 196. Create a zFS Aggregate and File System panel (ISRUUFS4)

The Create a zFS Aggregate and File System panel allows you to allocate a data set for an aggregate,
format the aggregate, and create a file system in that aggregate. The file system defined in the aggregate
is the same name as the aggregate and data set. For detailed information on zFS aggregates, file systems,
and their attributes, refer to the zFS Administration book.
The following attributes can be specified for the create operation:
Aggregate name
Specify the fully qualified name for the new data set by enclosing it in apostrophes. If you omit the
apostrophes, your TSO prefix is left-appended to the data set name. If you omit the trailing
apostrophe, the apostrophe is assumed.
Owning user
Specify the UID or user id for the owner of the root directory for the file system that is created. If this
attribute is not specified, your UID is used.
Owning group
Specify the GID or group id for the owning group of the root directory for the file system that is
created. If this attribute is not specified, your GID is used.
Permissions
Specify the permissions in octal format. If this attribute is not specified, the value 750 is used.
Primary cylinders
Specify the number of cylinders to allocate for the primary extent for the data set. The aggregate is
formatted to fit within this space. A line command is available to increase the size of the aggregate to
expand into the secondary allocation extents. This field must be specified.
Secondary cylinders
Specify the secondary allocation for the data set. If this attribute is not specified, the value 0 is used.
Storage class
If the data set is to be SMS managed, specify the SMS storage class for the data set allocation. If this
attribute is not specified for an SMS managed data set, the default storage class is used.
Management class
If the data set is to be SMS managed, specify the SMS management class for the data set allocation. If
this attribute is not specified for an SMS managed data set, the default management class is used.

310 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

Data class
If the data set is to be SMS managed, specify the SMS data class for the data set allocation. If this
attribute is not specified for an SMS managed data set, the default data class is used.
Volume names
If the data set is not to be SMS managed, you must enter the volume names for the data set
allocation.

zFS aggregates
When you select zFS aggregates from the File_Systems pull-down menu on the action bar of the z/OS
UNIX Directory List Utility Panel, ISPF displays the Attached zFS Aggregates panel (ISRUUZ01). The name
of each attached zFS aggregate is displayed, along with the associated free space and total space values.

Attached zFS Aggregates Row 1 to 4 of 4

Select an aggregate with a line command.

A=Attributes L=List file systems E=Extend

S Aggregate Name Free Space Total Space

_ FEK.V850.OMVS.ZFS 39399 136800
_ FEK.V900.OMVS.ZFS 23209 168480
_ ISPFTEST.ZFS.ISA1 6988 7200
_ SYS1.OMVS.$$SRDG.ROOT 23899 2415600
******************************* Bottom of data ********************************

Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward F8=Forward
F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 197. Attached zFS Aggregates panel (ISRUUZ01)

Attached zFS aggregates line commands

After you display the attached zFS aggregates list, there are three line commands that you can use with
the displayed aggregates. Enter the line command in the S column to the left of the aggregate name.
A (Attributes)
Show the attributes of the aggregate.
E (Extend)
Extend the size of the aggregate.
L (List file systems)
List the file systems in the aggregate. You can perform actions on the file systems from this list.

A — Attributes
When the A (Attributes) line command is entered beside an aggregate name on the Attached zFS
Aggregates panel, the Aggregate Attributes panel (ISRUUZ11) is displayed.

Utilities (option 3) 311

z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

Attached zFS Aggregates Row 1 to 4 of 4

┌────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ Aggregate Attributes │
│ │
│ Aggregate name . . . . : ISPFTEST.ZFS.ISA1 │
│ Attach mode . . . . . . : Read/write │
│ Monitored for full . . : Disabled │
│ Auto-extend . . . . . . : Enabled │
│ Number of file systems : 1 │
│ Threshold . . . . . . . : 0 │
│ Increment . . . . . . . : 0 │
│ Number of fragments . . : 7200 │
│ Fragment size . . . . . : 1024 │
│ Block size . . . . . . : 8192 │
│ Blocks available . . . : 7200 │
│ Maximum fragments . . . : 6988 │
│ Minimum fragments . . . : 0 │
│ │
│ │
│ Command ===> │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward │
│ F8=Forward F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel │
└────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward F8=Forward
F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 198. Aggregate Attributes panel (ISRUUZ11)

The Aggregate Attributes panel displays the following information for the selected aggregate. For detailed
information on zFS aggregates and their attributes, refer to the zFS Administration book.
Aggregate name
The name of the aggregate.
Attach mode
The attach mode of the aggregate. Possible values are Read only and Read/write.
Monitored for full
Indicates whether aggregate full monitoring is enabled or disabled.
Auto-extend
Indicates whether auto-extend is enabled or disabled.
Number of file systems
The number of file systems in the aggregate.
Threshold
The threshold percentage value used for aggregate full monitoring.
Increment
The increment percentage value used for aggregate full monitoring.
Number of fragments
The number of fragments in the aggregate.
Fragment size
The size of the fragments in the aggregate.
Block size
The size of the blocks in the aggregate.
Blocks available
The number of blocks available in the aggregate.
Maximum fragments
The maximum number of fragments in the aggregate.
Minimum fragments
The minimum number of fragments in the aggregate.

312 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

E—Extend
The E (Extend) line command, entered beside an aggregate name on the Attached zFS Aggregates panel,
displays the Extend Aggregate panel (ISRUUZ07).

Attached zFS Aggregates Row 1 to 4 of 4

┌────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ Extend Aggregate │
│ │
│ Enter the New Aggregate Size in Kilobytes. │
│ │
│ Aggregate . . : ISPFTEST.ZFS.ISA1 │
│ Current size . : 7200 │
│ New size . . . . _ │
│ │
│ Command ===> │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward │
│ F8=Forward F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel │
└────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward F8=Forward
F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 199. Extend Aggregate panel (ISRUUZ07)

The Extend Aggregate panel displays the name of the selected aggregate and its current size, in kilobytes.
To extend the aggregate, enter the new size in kilobytes. zFS extends the aggregate to a size equal to or
greater than what you specify based on block boundaries. The data set for the aggregate must be defined
with sufficient space, secondary extents, or volumes to contain the increased allocation size.

L— List file systems

The L (List file systems) line command, entered beside an aggregate name on the Attached zFS
Aggregates panel, displays the File System List panel (ISRUUZ03). The name of each file system in the
selected aggregate is displayed, along with the associated space used and total space values.

Utilities (option 3) 313

z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

Attached zFS Aggregates Row 1 to 4 of 4

┌────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ File System List Row 1 to 1 of 1 │
│ │
│ Select a file system with a line command. │
│ A=Attributes │
│ │
│ S File System Name Space Used Total Space │
│ _ ISPFTEST.ZFS.ISA1 59 7200 │
│ ***************************** Bottom of data ***************************** │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward │
│ F8=Forward F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel │
└────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward F8=Forward
F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 200. File System List panel (ISRUUZ03)

File system list line commands

The File System List panel provides one line command that you can use with the displayed file systems.
Enter the line command in the S column to the left of the file system name.
A (Attributes)
Shows the attributes of the file system.

A (Attributes)
The A (Attributes) line command, entered beside a file system name on the File System List panel,
displays the File System Attributes panel (ISRUUZ10).

314 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

Attached zFS Aggregates Row 1 to 4 of 4

┌────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ File System Attributes │
│ │
│ File system name . . . : ISPFTEST.ZFS.ISA1 │
│ Mount status . . . . . : Read/write │
│ Create time . . . . . . : 2013/03/12 14:46:17 │
│ Update time . . . . . . : 2013/05/23 09:48:06 │
│ Access time . . . . . . : 2013/05/23 09:48:06 │
│ Allocation limit . . . : 4294967232 │
│ Allocation used . . . . : 59 │
│ Threshold . . . . . . . : 0 │
│ Increment . . . . . . . : 0 │
│ │
│ │
│ Command ===> │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward │
│ F8=Forward F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel │
└────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F7=Backward F8=Forward
F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 201. File System Attributes panel (ISRUUZ10)

The File System Attributes panel displays the following information for the selected file system. For
detailed information on zFS file systems and their attributes, refer to the zFS Administration book.
File system name
The name of the file system.
Mount status
The mount status of the file system. Possible values are Read only, Read/Write, and Not mounted.
Create time
The date and time when the file system was created.
Update time
The date and time when the file system was last updated.
Access time
The date and time when the file system was last accessed.
Allocation limit
The allocation limit for the file system in kilobytes.
Allocation used
The amount of allocation used in kilobytes.
Threshold
The threshold percentage value used for file system full monitoring.
Increment
The increment percentage value used for file system full monitoring.

Switching to super-user (UID 0) mode and back

On the entry panel and the directory list display panel, you can switch to super-user mode (UID 0) or
switch back to your initial UID with either:
• The Options pull-down menu, or
• The SU primary command

Utilities (option 3) 315

z/OS UNIX directory list utility (option 3.17)

Switching UIDs with the Options pull-down menu

The Options pull-down menu available on the entry panel and the directory list display panel provides an
option that lets you switch to super-user mode (UID 0) or switch back to your initial UID.
When you are operating under your UID, the Options pull-down menu displays this option:

3. Enable superuser mode(SU)

Note: If you select this option, and you have permission to the BPX.SUPERUSER facility class, you are
switched to UID 0 (super-user mode).
When you are operating in super-user mode, the Options pull-down menu displays this option:

3. Reset UID to nnn

If you select this option, you are switched back to your UID nnn.

Switching UIDs with the SU primary command

From the entry or directory list panels, you can switch to super-user mode (UID 0) or switch back to your
initial UID with the SU primary command. Use this format:
SU
UIDnum

where:
UIDnum
The UID to which you you want to switch.
Note: To switch to another UID, you must have permission to the BPX.DAEMON facility class (if defined).
If you do not specify a UID number, you are switched either to UID 0 (if you are currently operating under
your UID), or reset back to your UID (if you are currently operating in super-user mode).
If you specify a UID number, you must have read access to the SURROGAT class profile
BPX.SRV.uuuuuuuu (where uuuuuuuu is the MVS userid associated with the target UID).

316 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

Chapter 6. Foreground (option 4)

The Foreground option (4) allows ISPF to run the foreground processors shown on the Foreground
Selection panel, Figure 202 on page 317. All these processors except for COBOL interactive debug,
SCRIPT/VS, and FORTRAN interactive debug are also available with the Batch option (5).
When you run a foreground processor, you must wait until the processor ends before doing anything else
with ISPF. If you want to use ISPF while waiting for the processor to end, submit the input as a batch job.
You can do this by using the Batch option if the processor you need is listed on the Batch Selection panel,
Figure 221 on page 347.

Menu Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Foreground Selection Panel

1 Assembler 11 *FORTRAN debug

2 COBOL 12 Member Parts List
3 VS FORTRAN 13 *C/370
5 PL/I 14 *REXX/370
6 VS PASCAL 15 *ADA/370
7 *Binder/Link editor 16 *AD/Cycle C/370
9 SCRIPT/VS 18 ISPDTLC
10 *VS COBOL II debug 19 *OS/390 C/C++
10A *OS/VS COBOL debug

Enter "/" to select option * No packed data support

Source Data Packed

Option ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 202. Foreground Selection Panel (ISRFPA)

The names of the foreground processors on this panel are point-and-shoot fields. For more information,
see the Point-and-Shoot Text Fields section of the ISPF User Interface topic of the z/OS ISPF User's Guide
Vol I.

Foreground selection panel action bar

The Foreground Selection Panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu
For more information, see the details about the Menu Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Utilities
For more information, see the details about the Utilities Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Help
The Help pull-down provides general information about foreground processing as well as information
about each available choice on the Foreground Selection Panel.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2019 317

Foreground—processing sequence

Foreground processing sequence

This topic describes the main sequence for foreground processing.
1. If you do not know whether the source data is in packed format, find out by editing the data set and
entering the PROFILE command. If the source data is in packed format, the profile shows PACK ON.
If the data is packed, select the Source Data Packed option. If the data is not packed, deselect this
option.
Also, you should read “Expanding packed data” on page 320, paying close attention to:
• Information that applies to the foreground processor you plan to use.
• The difference between expanding a sequential data set and expanding members of a partitioned
data set.
When you are satisfied that the data set is ready to be processed, continue with the next step.
2. Select one of the foreground processors listed at the top of the Foreground Selection panel shown in
Figure 202 on page 317.
Note: A region size of 2 megabytes or more will probably be required to run the VS FORTRAN
compiler in the foreground.
3. Select the Source Data Packed option to tell ISPF if it needs to expand the source data.
Note: The Source Data Packed option has no effect on the Member parts list option (4.12). Member
parts list can read both packed and unpacked data sets, so no expansion is needed.
4. When the Session Manager licensed program, 5740-XE2, is installed, you can select the Session
Manager mode option on the ISPF Settings panel so that you enter Session Manager mode when you
call any of the foreground processors. Once you call Session Manager, it stays in effect for all logical
screens until you turn it off. For example, if you call Session Manager and then split the screen,
Session Manager will be in effect on both logical screens.
Note: If graphics interface mode is active, Session Manager does not get control of the screen.
Graphics interface mode is started when a GRINIT service has been issued, but a GRTERM service
has not been issued. See z/OS ISPF Services Guide for more information about these two services.
5. Press Enter. ISPF displays the data entry panel for the processor you selected. The remainder of this
processing sequence applies to all foreground processors except SCRIPT/VS, VS COBOL II interactive
debug, COBOL interactive debug, and Member Parts List. For these processors, use the sequence
referred to in this list:
Processor
Reference
SCRIPT/VS
“SCRIPT/VS processor (option 4.9)” on page 333
VS COBOL II interactive debug
“VS COBOL II interactive debug (option 4.10)” on page 338
COBOL interactive debug
“OS/VS COBOL debug (option 4.10A)” on page 338
Member parts list
“Member parts list (option 4.12)” on page 341
6. Enter the appropriate ISPF library and concatenation sequence or data set name. If the input data set
is partitioned, you can leave the member name blank or use a pattern to display a member list. If you
need help, see:
• The Naming ISPF Libraries and Data Sets section of the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of
the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I for help in entering library or data set names
• The Displaying Member Lists section of the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF
User's Guide Vol I for information about patterns and displaying member lists

318 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Foreground—processing sequence

• “Input data sets” on page 324 for information about the regular concatenation sequence
• “Object data sets” on page 326 for information about object modules
• “Linkage editor concatenation sequence” on page 332 for help with the linkage editor
concatenation sequence
VS FORTRAN has no LIB option, which some foreground processors use to specify the input data set
concatenation sequence. Therefore, the concatenation sequence specified in the Group fields is used
to find the member to be compiled.
For FORTRAN interactive debug, the TYPE, or last qualifier, must be either OBJ or LOAD. However, if
you specify an OBJ data set as your input data set, you must include a load library or data set in the
input search sequence (see step “11” on page 319).
7. This step applies to FORTRAN interactive debug only. Use the Source Type field to tell ISPF the Type,
or last qualifier, of the data set used to create the input object module or load module.
8. Use the List ID field to tell ISPF what to name the output listing. See “List data sets” on page 325 for
more information.
9. Enter your password in the Password field if your input data set is password-protected. See
“Password protection” on page 326 for more information.
10. The Option field, whether ASSEMBLER, COMPILER, LINKAGE EDITOR, or DEBUG, is remembered
from one session to another. Therefore, you do not need to change this field unless the options you
need are not displayed.
Be careful not to enter any options that ISPF generates automatically. These options are listed on the
data entry panel. For more information about the options available for your processor, refer to the
documentation supplied with that processor.
11. Enter any additional input libraries you need. For FORTRAN interactive debug, enter any input LOAD
libraries that you need to complete the search sequence. These libraries must be LOAD libraries only.
See “Input data sets” on page 324 if you need help.
12. Once all the input fields have been specified, press Enter to call the foreground processor.
If the Session Manager is installed and you selected Session Manager mode on the ISPF Settings
panel, the foreground processor and all function keys and PA keys are under the control of the
Session Manager. When foreground processing is complete, you are prompted to enter a null line to
return to ISPF control.
If the Session Manager is not called, the PA and function keys have their usual TSO-defined
meanings; generally, the function keys are treated the same as the Enter key.
13. Communication with foreground processors is in line-I/O mode. Whenever you see three asterisks,
press Enter.
14. If the foreground processor generated an output listing, the listing is displayed automatically in
Browse mode.
Note: If a Foreground processing program ends abnormally, ISPF displays a message in the upper-
right corner of the screen and does not enter Browse mode. The list data set is retained, but the
Foreground Print Options panel (see step “15” on page 319) is not displayed.
You can scroll the output up or down using the scroll commands. All the Browse commands are
available to you. When you finish browsing the listing, enter the END command.
15. An optional print utility exit routine can be installed by your system programmer. If this exit routine is
installed, it may cause the Foreground option's response to differ from the descriptions shown here.
See z/OS ISPF Planning and Customizing for more information about the print utility exit.
Another factor that can affect the performance of the Foreground option is whether the TSO/E
Information Center Facility is installed. If the TSO/E Information Center Facility is installed, your
installation can optionally allow ISPF to display a panel for submitting TSO/E Information Center
Facility information with the print request. See Figure 204 on page 327 for an example of this panel
and “Using the TSO/E information center facility” on page 173 for information about the fields on this

Foreground (option 4) 319

Foreground—expanding packed data

panel. If the TSO/E Information Center Facility is not installed, the Foreground option displays the
panel shown in Figure 203 on page 320 to allow you to print, keep, or delete the output.

Foreground Print Options

PK Print data set and keep K Keep data set (without printing)
PD Print data set and delete D Delete data set (without printing)

If END command is entered, data set is kept without printing.

Data set name . :

Print mode . . . BATCH (Batch or Local)

Batch SYSOUT class . .

Local Printer id or
writer-name. . . (For local printer)
Local SYSOUT class . .

Job statement information: (Required for system printer)

===>
===>
===>
===>
Option ===>
F1=HELP F2= F3=END F4=DATASETS F5=FIND F6=CHANGE
F9=SWAP F10=LEFT F11=RIGHT F12=SUBMIT

Figure 203. Foreground Print Options panel (ISRFPPRT)

On this panel, the "Data set name" field shows the name of the list data set that contains the output
generated by the processor you selected. In the Option field, enter one of the options shown at the
top of the panel. The "Print mode", "Batch SYSOUT class", "Local Printer id or writer name", and Local
SYSOUT Class fields on this panel are described under “Hardcopy utility (option 3.6)” on page 170.
The "Job statement information" field is described under the Job Statement Information section of
the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
When you press Enter, the processor entry panel is displayed again. A message indicating completion
of the process is displayed in the upper-right corner of the screen.
16. You can perform one of these actions:
• Enter other parameters and call the same processor.
• Enter the END command to return to the Foreground Selection panel and select another processor.
• Enter the RETURN command to go to the ISPF Primary Option Menu.
• Use the jump function (=) to choose any primary option.

Expanding packed data

Packed data is data in which ISPF has replaced any repeating characters with a sequence showing how
many times the character is repeated. Packing data allows you to use direct access storage devices
(DASD) more efficiently because the stored data occupies less space than it would otherwise.
If the source data that you want to process is packed, it must be expanded before it can be successfully
processed by any of the language processors. Which expansion method you should use depends on
whether your source data is:
• A sequential data set that contains expansion triggers
An expansion trigger is a keyword that tells ISPF to expand additional data before copying, including, or
imbedding it in the source data. Examples are INCLUDE and COPY statements, and SCRIPT .IM (imbed)
control words. For information about defining your own expansion triggers, refer to z/OS ISPF Planning
and Customizing.

320 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Foreground—member expansion (ISRLEMX)

ISPF does not recognize expansion triggers in data stored as a sequential data set. Therefore, for this
type of data, you should follow these steps:
1. Manually expand the data that is to be copied, included, or imbedded in your source data. To do this,
edit the source data, enter the PACK OFF command, and then save the data. When you have finished
processing the data, you can repack it by editing it again and entering PACK ON.
2. Select the Source Data Packed option before calling one of the language processors.
• Either of these:
– A sequential data set that does not contain expansion triggers
– Any member of a partitioned data set, either with or without expansion triggers.
ISPF does recognize expansion triggers in data stored as members of a partitioned data set. Also, if your
source data does not contain expansion triggers, you do not have to be concerned with them. Therefore,
for these two types of data, select the Source Data Packed option before calling one of the language
processors.
In each of the preceding situations, selecting the Source Data Packed option causes ISPF to expand
packed source data before it is processed. For partitioned data sets, any included members are also
expanded inline where the INCLUDE or COPY statements, .IM SCRIPT control words, or other user-
defined trigger statements are found.

Member expansion (ISRLEMX)

Member expansion uses simple language scanners to find expansion triggers. If you specify that the
source data is not packed, the ISRSCAN program is used. However, if you specify that the source data is
packed, member expansion uses the ISRLEMX program.
These scanners do not have all the sophistication of the actual language processors. Therefore, unusual
code or code that does not compile cannot be successfully processed by member expansion. Examples
are trigger statements:
• With comments that extend onto the next line
• That have compiler instructions to change the content of the code to be included.
Compiler control statements and symbolic substitution are not considered during member expansion.
Instead, ISRLEMX creates a temporary data set to be used as input to the language processor. All
members to be processed, including members imbedded with COPY, INCLUDE, or .IM statements, are
copied into this data set, expanded, and passed on to the language processor. The temporary data set will
have the same block size as the input data set that contains your source data.
When using languages that allow multiple compilations, such as VS FORTRAN, you must put the source
statement that ends the program in your original, or top-level, program. This statement cannot be in an
included member.
Table 19 on page 321 shows the languages processed by member expansion, their expansion triggers,
syntax, and the input columns processed for fixed-record data and variable-record data.

Table 19. Expansion triggers and syntax

Input Columns Input Columns
Expansion Processed for Processed for
Language Trigger Syntax F/FB Format V/VB Format
Assembler COPY COPY name 1 - 80 N/A
PL/I %INCLUDE %INCLUDE 2 - 72 10 - 100
DDNAME(name);
%INCLUDE name;

Foreground (option 4) 321

Foreground—member expansion (ISRLEMX)

Table 19. Expansion triggers and syntax (continued)

Input Columns Input Columns
Expansion Processed for Processed for
Language Trigger Syntax F/FB Format V/VB Format
COBOL COPY COPY name. 7 - 72 N/A
VS FORTRAN INCLUDE INCLUDE (name) 1 - 72 N/A
Pascal %INCLUDE %INCLUDE name; 1 - 72 1 - 100
%INCLUDE
DDNAME(name);

SCRIPT .IM .IM name 1-reclength or 9- 1-reclength or 1-

reclength (reclength-8)
.IM (name)
.IM ('name')

All languages User-trigger User-trigger name N/A N/A

Restrictions on member expansion and member parts lists

These restrictions apply only to the member expansion and member parts listing functions:
• These restrictions apply to all languages:
– Expansion triggers must follow their respective language coding conventions unless otherwise noted.
– Multiple names and preprocessor variables on trigger statements are not permitted.
– User triggers and their start column are specified at installation time and must be:
- No more than 20 characters long
- Uppercase with no imbedded blanks.
No part of the user trigger can be in a comment or continuation field.
– Macros cannot be in packed form.
– The trigger statement must be the only statement in the logical record. No continuation is allowed
into or from a trigger statement. Also, the trigger keyword must be the first character on the trigger
statement that is not a blank and can be followed by only one statement delimiter.
– For compilers that allow names longer than 8 characters, the name is truncated at 8.
– For compilers that allow uppercase and lowercase names, all referenced names are converted to
uppercase.
• This restriction applies to assembler only:
– The user trigger cannot start in column 1.
• This restriction applies to FORTRAN only:
– The member expansion function allows only the fixed form of coding.
• This restriction applies to PL/I, Pascal, and COBOL:
– Free form coding is allowed except in trigger statements.
• Other COBOL restrictions are:
– The name is truncated at 8 characters or the first hyphen (-), whichever comes first.
– The first statement in the COBOL program must be either an expansion trigger, a valid COBOL division
header, a TITLE, a PROCESS, or a CBL statement. The expansion trigger can precede all other
statements, but it must start in FIELD B.

322 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Foreground—member expansion (ISRLEMX)

If an expansion trigger is the first statement, it must eventually resolve (through multiple expansion
triggers if needed) to a valid COBOL division header, TITLE, PROCESS, or CBL statement.
– In the COPY statement, the text-name is the only value processed. The statement must end on the
same line as the COPY keyword with a period followed by a space. If any option is found, the COPY
statement is not expanded.
– In the IDENTIFICATION DIVISION, the division header or paragraph header statements must be
blank except for the division or paragraph name. The trigger statement must be on the next line that
is neither blank nor a comment.
– In all other divisions, the trigger statement (line) can be on any line in the division.
– If the WITH DEBUGGING MODE clause is not found in the SOURCE COMPUTER paragraph, all debug
lines are passed to the compiler without being scanned for expansion triggers, as if they were
comment lines. If the clause is found, valid trigger statements found on debug lines are expanded
and a D is inserted in column 7 of all the non-comment, non-continuation lines included.
– Any character found in FIELD A that is not a blank causes the end of the paragraph form of the NOTE
statement.
• These are SCRIPT/VS restrictions:
– The .im statement must be the only statement in the logical record and must start in the first valid
column. The first logical record is tested for line numbers, as follows:
- For fixed-length records, if the last 8 characters are all numeric, they are skipped for the complete
library.
- For variable-length records, if the first 8 characters are all numeric, processing begins with column
9.
The statements can be in either uppercase, lowercase, or mixed case.
– Because ISPF creates a sequential data set from the imbedded members, use of the .EF control
word will cause all statements in the sequential data set following the .EF to be ignored. The use
of .EF is not recommended with packed data.

Member expansion ISRSCAN and ISRLEMX return codes

Table 20 on page 323 describes the ISRSCAN return codes.

Table 20. ISRSCAN return codes

ISRSCAN
12 Member not found.
16 OPEN error on DDNAME=IN.
20 I/O error on DDNAME=IN.
24 OPEN error on DDNAME=OUT.
28 I/O error on DDNAME=OUT.

Table 21 on page 323 describes the ISRLEMX return codes.

Table 21. ISRLEMX return codes

ISRLEMX
1-15 Parameter n was too long, where n = 1 to 15.
16 Too many parameters.

Foreground (option 4) 323

Foreground—input data sets

Table 21. ISRLEMX return codes (continued)

ISRLEMX
17 Too few parameters.
20 Severe error in expand module. An error message
should be printed in the ISRLMSG data set.

Trigger statement errors

Some of the more common errors that occur are:
• Restricted option.
• Statement on more than one line.
• Referenced member name not found.
If an error occurs, the trigger statement is not expanded and is passed to the language processor.
In SCRIPT/VS, if the error was found in a user trigger, one blank line is inserted before and after the
statement in question.

Input data sets

Input to a foreground processor is either:
• A member of an ISPF library or other partitioned data set. If you do not specify a member name, ISPF
displays a member list, or
• A sequential data set
If an ISPF library is the input source, the member can be in any library in the concatenation sequence. You
can include additional input by using:
• The COPY statement for assembler and COBOL.
• The INCLUDE statement for PL/I, FORTRAN, and Pascal.
• The SCRIPT/VS imbed control word (.im).
• Macros
• Additional input libraries.
Whenever the input source is partitioned, you can specify additional input libraries. They must be
partitioned data sets that are not password protected. You cannot specify additional input libraries if the
input source is sequential. Specify the fully qualified data set names, enclosed in apostrophes, such as:

Additional input libraries:

===> 'ABC.MACROS'

For example, in Figure 205 on page 327, a concatenation sequence of three ISPF data sets and one
additional input library has been specified. The concatenation order is:

ISPFDEMO.XXX.ASM
ISPFDEMO.A.ASM
ISPFDEMO.MASTER.ASM
ISPFTEST.FLAG.ASM

The last data set in the concatenation sequence, ISPFTEST.FLAG.ASM, is entered as an additional input
library at the bottom of the panel. Additional input libraries are always last in the sequence.

324 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Foreground—list data sets

Before calling a foreground processor, ISPF scans the concatenated sequence of libraries to find the
member to be processed. For this example, the member name is TOP. If member TOP first appears in data
set ISPFDEMO.A.ASM, this prompter command would be generated by Assembler XF.

ASM 'ISPFDEMO.A.ASM(TOP)'
LIB('SYS1.MACLIB',
'ISPFDEMO.XXX.ASM',
'ISPFDEMO.A.ASM',
'ISPFDEMO.MASTER.ASM',
'ISPFTEST.FLAG.ASM')
LOAD('ISPFDEMO.XXX.OBJ(TOP)')
PRINT(LISTASM)
LIST,TEST,TERM,RENT

The processor options are passed to the prompter exactly as you specify them.
Note: The macro library SYS1.MACLIB is included in the concatenation sequence for Assembler only.
When included, as the preceding prompter command example shows, it is always first in the sequence
because of its large block size.

List data sets

In the List ID field, you can enter the name you want ISPF to use to identify the list data set that will
contain the foreground processor output. This name is passed to the foreground processor by either the
LIST or PRINT option. These rules apply:
• If the input data set is partitioned the List ID field is optional:
– Leave the List ID field blank if you want ISPF to use the input member name to identify the output list
data set.
– Enter a LIST ID if you want to use a name other than the input member name to identify the output
list data set.
• If the input data set is sequential, you must enter a LIST ID.
For best results, if you plan to debug your program later using COBOL interactive debug:
• Enter the name of the member being compiled in the List ID field if the input data set is partitioned.
• If the input data set is sequential, enter the name of the sequential data set.
Then, when you debug your program, use these same names in the PROG ID fields on the COBOL
Interactive Debug panel.
ISPF names the listing:

prefix.userid.listid.LIST

where

prefix

is the data set prefix in your TSO profile, if you have one and if it is different from your user ID,

userid

is your user ID, and

listid

is the member name or the value in the List ID field.

If you are using the same list data set for multiple job steps, be aware that the DCB information can differ
between the language processors and the linkage editor, causing an I/O error when trying to read the list
data set. We suggest that you use a different list ID for each job step.

Foreground (option 4) 325

Foreground—password protection

Password protection
Input, object, interpretable text (ITEXT), and symbolic debug data sets can be password-protected. You
can specify the password in the Password field on the foreground processor data entry panel. The
password does not appear on the screen when you enter it, but ISPF remembers it.
Since foreground processor panels have only one Password field, ISPF prompts you if all data sets do not
have the same password.

Object data sets

The information shown here about object data sets applies to all foreground assemblers and compilers.
However, if you are using the VS FORTRAN compiler, you must enter OBJECT in the Other field to generate
an output object module. The two assemblers and the other compilers generate object modules
automatically.
If you specify an ISPF library as the input source, ISPF writes object output from the foreground
assembler or compiler to a partitioned data set. This data set has the same name as the first library in the
concatenation sequence, but has a type of OBJ. For example, if you specify PROJECT.LIB1.ASM as the
first library name, the object output is placed in data set PROJECT.LIB1.OBJ. The member name of the
object module is the same as the input member.
If you specify another data set, the object output is placed in a data set of the same name, but with the
last qualifier replaced by OBJ. If the data set name has only one qualifier, OBJ is appended as the last
qualifier. For example, if you specify an input data set named OTHER.ASM or OTHER, the object output is
placed in a data set named OTHER.OBJ. For partitioned data sets, the object output is stored in a member
with the same name as the input member. For sequential data sets, the object output is stored in a
sequential data set.
Note: The object data set must exist before invoking a foreground or batch option that creates an object
module.

Foreground—TSO/E information center facility

If the TSO/E Information Center Facility is installed, your installation can optionally allow ISPF to
substitute the panel shown in Figure 204 on page 327 for the panel shown in Figure 203 on page 320.
This panel is valid for all foreground processors except SCRIPT/VS and member parts list. See “Using the
TSO/E information center facility” on page 173 for information about the fields on this panel.

326 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Foreground—Assembler (option 4.1)

Foreground Print Options

PK Print data set and keep K Keep data set (without printing)
PD Print data set and delete D Delete data set (without printing)

If END command is entered, data set is kept without printing.

Data set name . . .:

Printer Location . .

Printer Format . . .

Number of copies . .

Option ===>
F1=HELP F2= F3=END F4=DATASETS F5=FIND F6=CHANGE
F9=SWAP F10=LEFT F11=RIGHT F12=SUBMIT

Figure 204. Foreground Print Options panel with TSO/E information center facility (ISRFPPRI)

Assembler (option 4.1)

Foreground Assembler enables you to use either High Level Assembler or Assembler H. Both are called
from the Foreground Assembler panel, shown in Figure 205 on page 327. For information about
Assembler data sets, see the topic about Allocation Data Sets in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.

Menu RefList Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Foreground Assembler
More: +
ISPF Library:
Project . . . MYPROJ
Group . . . . DEV . . . . . . . . .
Type . . . .
Member . . . (Blank or pattern for member selection list)

Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set:

Data Set Name . .

List ID . . . Assembler
Password . . 1 1. High Level Assembler 2. Assembler H

Assembler Options: (options OBJECT and LIST generated automatically)

===>

Additional input libraries:

===>
Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 205. Foreground Assembler panel (ISRFP01)

All the fields on this panel are explained in the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF
User's Guide Vol I, except List ID, which is explained in “List data sets” on page 325, "Additional input
libraries", which is explained in “Input data sets” on page 324, and here:
Assembler Options
Be careful not to enter the OBJECT and LIST options in this field. ISPF generates these options
automatically. OBJECT writes the output object module to a partitioned data set. LIST writes the
output listing to a list data set. See “Object data sets” on page 326 and “List data sets” on page 325
for more information.

Foreground (option 4) 327

Foreground—COBOL (option 4.2)

Assembler
Enables you to specify whether to use High Level Assembler or Assembler H. Specify 1 for High Level
Assembler or 2 for Assembler H.

COBOL (option 4.2)

ISPF generates an ISPEXEC SELECT PGM(IGYCRCTL) statement to invoke a COBOL compiler using the
values you enter on the Foreground COBOL Compile panel, shown in Figure 206 on page 328. For
information about COBOL allocation data sets, see the topic about Allocation Data Sets in the z/OS ISPF
User's Guide Vol I.

Menu RefList Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Foreground COBOL Compile
More: +
ISPF Library:
Project . . . MYPROJ
Group . . . . DEV . . . . . . . . .
Type . . . .
Member . . . (Blank or pattern for member selection list)

Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set:

Data Set Name . .

List ID . . . . . . . Password . .

Compiler options: (options LIB and OBJECT generated automatically)

Test . . . NOTEST (TEST or NOTEST)
Other . . .

Additional input libraries:

===>
Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 206. Foreground COBOL Compile panel (ISRFP02)

All the fields on this panel are explained in the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF
User's Guide Vol I except List ID, which is explained in “List data sets” on page 325, "Additional input
libraries", which is explained in “Input data sets” on page 324, and here:
Test
If you plan to run interactive debug after you compile your program, enter TEST in the Test field.
Otherwise, enter NOTEST.
Other
If you plan to run VS COBOL II interactive debug after you compile your program, enter RESIDENT in
the Other field. Otherwise, just enter any other options you need.
Be careful not to enter the LIB and OBJECT options in the Other field. ISPF generates these options
automatically. LIB specifies the input data set concatenation sequence. OBJECT writes the output
object module to a partitioned data set. See “Input data sets” on page 324 and “Object data sets” on
page 326 for more information.

VS FORTRAN compile (option 4.3)

The Foreground VS FORTRAN Compile panel is shown in Figure 207 on page 329.

328 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Foreground—PL/I compile (option 4.5)

Menu RefList Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Foreground VS FORTRAN Compile
More: +
ISPF Library:
Project . . . MYPROJ
Group . . . . DEV . . . . . . . . .
Type . . . .
Member . . . (Blank or pattern for member selection list)

Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set:

Data Set Name . .

List ID . . . . . . . Password . .

Compiler options:
Object . . (OBJECT or NOOBJECT)
Other . . .

Additional input libraries:

===>
Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 207. Foreground VS FORTRAN Compile panel (ISRFP03)

All the fields on this panel are explained in the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF
User's Guide Vol I except List ID, which is explained in “List data sets” on page 325, "Additional input
libraries", which is explained in “Input data sets” on page 324, and here:
Object
ISPF does not automatically generate any options for VS FORTRAN. Instead of generating an object
module automatically, the VS FORTRAN compiler allows you to decide whether to generate one. To
generate an object module, enter OBJECT in the Object field. To avoid generating an object module,
enter NOOBJECT. See “Object data sets” on page 326 for more information.
Other
If you plan to run FORTRAN interactive debug after you compile your program, enter TEST in the Other
field, along with any other options you need.

PL/I (option 4.5)

The Foreground PL/I option enables you to invoke either OS PL/I Version 2 or PL/I for MVS and VM, using
the values specified on the Foreground PL/I Compile panel shown in Figure 208 on page 330.

Foreground (option 4) 329

Foreground—VS Pascal compile (option 4.6)

Menu RefList Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Foreground PL/I Compile
More: +
ISPF Library:
Project . . . MYPROJ
Group . . . . DEV . . . . . . . . .
Type . . . .
Member . . . (Blank or pattern for member selection list)

Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set:

Data Set Name . .
List ID . . . Compiler
Password . . 1. OS PL/I Version 2 2. PLI for MVS and VM

Compiler options: (options LIB, OBJECT, and PRINT generated automatically)

===>

Additional input libraries:

===>
===>
Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 208. Foreground PL/I Optimizing Compile panel (ISRFP05)

All the fields on this panel are explained in the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF
User's Guide Vol I except List ID, which is explained in “List data sets” on page 325, "Additional input
libraries", which is explained in “Input data sets” on page 324, and here:
Compiler
Choose the compiler you want to use from the list presented.
Compiler Options
Enter any options you need in the Other field, except LIB, OBJECT, or PRINT. ISPF generates these
options automatically. LIB specifies the input data set concatenation sequence. OBJECT writes the
output object module to a partitioned data set. PRINT writes the output listing to a list data set. See
“Input data sets” on page 324, “Object data sets” on page 326, and “List data sets” on page 325 for
more information.

VS Pascal compile (option 4.6)

The Foreground VS Pascal Compile panel is shown in Figure 209 on page 331.

330 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Foreground—binder/linkage editor (option 4.7)

Menu RefList Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Foreground VS PASCAL Compile
More: +
ISPF Library:
Project . . . MYPROJ
Group . . . . DEV . . . . . . . . .
Type . . . .
Member . . . (Blank or pattern for member selection list)

Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set:

Data Set Name . .

List ID . . . . . . . Password . .

Compiler options: (options LIB, OBJECT, and PRINT generated automatically)

===>

Additional input libraries:

===>
===>
Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 209. Foreground VS Pascal Compile panel (ISRFP06)

All the fields on this panel are explained in the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF
User's Guide Vol I except List ID, which is explained in “List data sets” on page 325, "Additional input
libraries", which is explained in “Input data sets” on page 324, and here:
Other
Enter any options you need in the Other field, except LIB, OBJECT, or PRINT. ISPF generates these
options automatically. LIB specifies the input data set concatenation sequence. OBJECT writes the
output object module to a partitioned data set. PRINT writes the output listing to a list data set. See
“Input data sets” on page 324, “Object data sets” on page 326, and “List data sets” on page 325 for
more information.

Binder/linkage editor (option 4.7)

The Foreground Binder/Linkage Editor is called from the Foreground Binder/Linkage Edit panel, shown in
Figure 210 on page 331.

Menu RefList Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Foreground Binder/Linkage Editor
More: +
ISPF Library:
Project . . . MYPROJ
Group . . . . DEV . . . . . . . . .
Type . . . .
Member . . . (Blank or pattern for member selection list)

Other Partitioned Data Set:

Data Set Name . .

Processor
List ID . . . . . 1 1. Binder
Password . . . . 2. Linkage Editor

Linkage editor/binder options: (options LOAD, LIB, and PRINT generated

automatically)
===>

Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 210. Foreground Binder/Linkage Editor panel (ISRFP07B)

Foreground (option 4) 331

Foreground—binder/linkage editor (option 4.7)

All the fields on this panel are explained in the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF
User's Guide Vol I except List ID, which is explained in “List data sets” on page 325, "Additional input
libraries", which is explained in “Input data sets” on page 324, and here:
Linkage editor/binder options
Enter any options you need, except LOAD, LIB, or PRINT. ISPF generates these options automatically.
LOAD writes the output object module to a partitioned data set.
Note: Sequential data sets are invalid when using the Linkage Editor.
LIB specifies the input data set concatenation sequence. PRINT writes the output listing to a list data
set. See “List data sets” on page 325 and “Object data sets” on page 326 for more information.
Binder
Determines whether the Linkage Editor (NOBINDER) or Binder (BINDER) is invoked.
Note: The binder is available only if DFSMS 1.1, or later, is installed.
SYSLIB
The name of the data set that is to contain the ISPF library concatenation sequence used to resolve
any copy statements specified in your program. See “Input data sets” on page 324 and the SYSLIB
Data Set section in the topic about Allocation Data Sets in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I for more
information.
SYSLIN
The name of the data set that is to contain the object module. The SYSLIN field is provided to
accommodate the VS Pascal XA and NOXA processing options. See “Input data sets” on page 324 and
the SYSLIB Data Set section in the topic about Allocation Data Sets in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I
for more information.

Linkage editor concatenation sequence

The concatenation sequence used by ISPF to find the member for input to the Linkage Editor is:

project-name.lib1-name.type
project-name.lib2-name.type
(and so forth)

where type is whatever you specify on the panel. For example, it can be OBJ or some other type
containing Linkage Editor language (LEL) control statements. If the type is not OBJ, an OBJECT DDNAME
is automatically allocated to ease the use of these Linkage Editor control statements:

INCLUDE OBJECT(member-name)

For example:

Project . . . XYZ
Group . . . . MYLIB . . . MASTER . . . . . .
Type . . . . LEL
Member . . . TOP

In this example, ISPF searches data sets XYZ.MYLIB.LEL and XYZ.MASTER.LEL to find member TOP,
which should contain LEL control statements. Also, ISPF allocates to DDNAME OBJECT (DISP=SHR) these
concatenated sequence of object libraries:

XYZ.MYLIB.OBJ
XYZ.MASTER.OBJ

This concatenated sequence is searched by the Linkage Editor if member TOP contains INCLUDE
OBJECT(member-name) statements. The concatenation sequence passed to the Linkage Editor by way of
the LIB parameter has a type qualifier of LOAD and includes the system libraries you specify, as follows:

LIB('project-name.lib1-name.LOAD',
'project-name.lib2-name.LOAD',
⋮
and so forth,

332 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Foreground—SCRIPT/VS processor (option 4.9)

⋮
'syslib1-name',
⋮
and so forth)

This concatenation sequence is used by the Linkage Editor to resolve automatic call references.

SCRIPT/VS processor (option 4.9)

Use of this facility requires the installation of the Document Composition Facility (DCF) program product
and its component text processing program, SCRIPT/VS, with the Foreground Environment Feature.
Note: DCF requires the TSO profile prefix to be set. For additional information, refer to DCF
documentation.

When you select the SCRIPT/VS option, the first panel displayed is the SCRIPT/VS Processor panel shown
in Figure 211 on page 333.

Menu RefList Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
SCRIPT/VS Processor
More: +
Enter "/" to select option
Style . . . . / Display Style Options
/ Browse Output
ISPF Library:
Project . . . MYPROJ
Group . . . . DEV . . . . . . . . .
Type . . . . SOURCE
Member . . . (Blank or pattern for member selection list)

Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set:

Data Set Name . .

List ID . . . . . . . Password . .
Script Command . . . SCRIPT (SCRIPT or SCRIPTDB)

Additional input libraries:

===>
Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 211. SCRIPT/VS Processor panel (ISRFP09)

All the fields on this panel are explained in the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF
User's Guide Vol I except List ID, which is explained in “List data sets” on page 325, and Style, Display
Style Options, and the Browse Output option, which are explained in subsequent sections.

SCRIPT/VS processing sequence

A style contains options that tell SCRIPT/VS how to format a document for display or printing. These
options include the use of fonts, white space, line lengths, and so forth.
The value you put in the Style field and whether or not you select the Display Style Options and Browse
Output options determine this SCRIPT/VS processing sequence:
1. For the Style field, you can perform one of these actions:
• Enter the name of an existing style.
You can enter the name of a style you have created or one of the styles SCRIPT/VS creates for you:
DRAFT and FINAL. These two styles correspond to the formatting options available in the previous
release of SCRIPT/VS Foreground Processing. If you have not defined these options before or if this
is your first release of ISPF, the default values for the SCRIPT/VS formatting options are set for you.

Foreground (option 4) 333

Foreground—SCRIPT/VS processor (option 4.9)

If you enter the name of an existing style in the Style field, that style is used for formatting.
• Enter the name of a new style you want to define.
If you enter a new style name, the name is added to your style list. The new style uses SCRIPT/VS
formatting options that are equal to the formatting options of the last style. Step “2” on page 334
explains what to do to change these options.
• Leave the Style field blank.
If you leave the Style field blank, ISPF displays the Select SCRIPT/VS Formatting Style panel. This
panel displays a list of the available styles. See “Selecting a formatting style” on page 336 for more
information.
2. Use a slash to select Display Style Options. ISPF displays the SCRIPT/VS Options for Style panel,
which shows the options that are currently being used and allows you to change them. See “Changing
style options” on page 337 for more information.
If you do not select Display Style Options, ISPF does not display the SCRIPT/VS Options for Style
panel.
3. Enter the appropriate ISPF library and concatenation sequence or data set names. You can display a
member list by omitting the member name or by using a pattern. See the "ISPF Libraries and Data
Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I if you need help entering library or data set names,
“Input data sets” on page 324 for more information about the concatenation sequence, and the
Displaying Member Lists section of the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF User's
Guide Vol I for more information about displaying member lists.
4. Enter your password in the Password field if your input data set is password-protected. See
“Password protection” on page 326 for more information.
5. Use the List ID field to tell ISPF what to name the output SCRIPT/VS listing. See “List data sets” on
page 325 for more information.
6. Use a slash to select the Browse Output option. ISPF displays your output in Browse mode after it
has formatted.
If you do not select the Browse Output option, ISPF skips Browse mode and displays a Foreground
Print Options for Style panel, shown in Figure 212 on page 335.
7. Once all the input parameters have been specified, press Enter to call SCRIPT/VS.
8. Communication with SCRIPT/VS is in line-I/O mode. Each time you see three asterisks, press Enter.
These asterisks, which usually appear at the bottom of the screen, show that TSO is waiting for you to
clear the screen before it can proceed.
If the Session Manager is installed and you selected the Session Manager mode option on the ISPF
Settings panel, SCRIPT/VS and all PF and PA keys are under control of the Session Manager. When
formatting is complete, you are prompted to enter a null line to return to ISPF control.
If the Session Manager is not called, the PA and function keys have their usual TSO-defined
meanings; generally, the function keys are treated the same as Enter.
9. One or both of the panels listed may appear, depending on your treatment of the Style and Display
Style Options fields. If both appear, they will be in this sequence:
a. Select SCRIPT/VS Formatting Style
b. SCRIPT/VS Options for Style
See “Selecting a formatting style” on page 336 and “Changing style options” on page 337 if you need
information about using these panels. When you are finished with each panel, press Enter.
10. If SCRIPT/VS generated an output listing and you selected the Browse Output option, the output is
displayed automatically in Browse mode. Otherwise, continue with the next step.
Note: If SCRIPT/VS formatting ends abnormally, ISPF displays a message in the upper-right corner of
the screen and does not enter Browse mode. The list data set is retained, but the Foreground Print
Options for Style panel (see step “11” on page 335) is not displayed.

334 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Foreground—SCRIPT/VS processor (option 4.9)

You can scroll the output up or down using the scroll commands. All the Browse commands are
available to you. When you finish browsing the listing, enter the END command.
11. An optional print utility exit can be installed by your system programmer. If this exit is installed, it
may cause SCRIPT/VS's response to differ from the descriptions here. See z/OS ISPF Planning and
Customizing for more information about the print utility exit.
Another factor that can affect the performance of SCRIPT/VS is whether the TSO/E Information
Center Facility is installed. If the TSO/E Information Center Facility is installed, your installation can
optionally allow ISPF to display a panel for submitting the TSO/E Information Center Facility
information with the print request. See Figure 215 on page 338 for an example of this panel and
“Using the TSO/E information center facility” on page 173 for information about the fields on this
panel.
If the TSO/E Information Center Facility is not installed, SCRIPT/VS displays the panel shown in
Figure 212 on page 335.
The Foreground Print Options for Style panel allows you to optionally print the formatted document
and specify its disposition. On this panel, the Data Set Name field shows the name of the list data set
that contains the SCRIPT/VS output. On the Command line, enter one of the options shown at the top
of the panel.

Foreground Print Options for Style:

PK Print data set and keep K Keep data set (without printing)
PD Print data set and delete D Delete data set (without printing)

If END command is entered, data set is kept without printing.

Data Set Name :

Print mode . . . BATCH (Batch or Local)

Batch SYSOUT class . .

Local Printer ID or
writer-name. . . (For local printer)
Local SYSOUT class . .

Job statement information: (Required for system printer)

===>
===>
===>
===>
Command ===>
F1=HELP F2= F3=END F4=DATASETS F5=FIND F6=CHANGE
F9=SWAP F10=LEFT F11=RIGHT F12=SUBMIT

Figure 212. Foreground Print Options for Style panel (ISRFP09P)

In the Print mode field, enter either of these commands:

• BATCH to submit your print request as a background job.
If you choose BATCH, specify a valid Batch SYSOUT class and job statement information. Specifying
BATCH causes SCRIPT/VS to ignore the "Local Printer ID or writer-name" field and the "Local
SYSOUT class" field.
SCRIPT/VS list data sets are formatted DCB=RECFM=VBM. Unless the line count is altered, the
formatted page length may exceed the JES line count and cause duplicate page ejects. Therefore,
specify this job statement information to prevent JES line counting:

/*JOBPARM LINECT=0

• LOCAL to print the output on a local printer.

If you choose LOCAL, specify the "Local Printer ID or writer-name" of a local printer and optional
"Local SYSOUT class". Specifying LOCAL causes SCRIPT/VS to ignore the "Batch SYSOUT class"
field. Job statement information is ignored.

Foreground (option 4) 335

Foreground—SCRIPT/VS processor (option 4.9)

Page spacing will probably vary from the expected format because of differences between 328x
printers and 1403 or 3800 printers used as a formatting guide.
See “Hardcopy utility (option 3.6)” on page 170 if you need information about the "Print mode",
"Batch SYSOUT class", "Local Printer ID or writer-name", and "Local SYSOUT class" fields. For
information about the "Job statement information" fields, see the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets"
chapter of the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
When you press Enter, the SCRIPT/VS Processor panel is displayed again. A message indicating
completion of the process is displayed in the upper-right corner of the screen.
12. You can perform one of these actions:
• Enter other parameters and call SCRIPT/VS again.
• Enter the END command to return to the Foreground Selection panel and select another processor.
• Enter the RETURN command to go to the ISPF Primary Option Menu.
• Use the jump function (=) to choose any primary option.

Selecting a formatting style

Use the Select SCRIPT/VS Formatting Style panel shown in Figure 213 on page 336 to see which styles
are available and to select or delete styles as necessary.

Select SCRIPT/VS Formatting Style Row 1 to 2 of 2

Valid Line Commands: S - Use this STYLE for formatting

D - Delete

Line
Cmd Style Description

' DRAFT Draft SCRIPT/VS document options

' FINAL Final SCRIPT/VS document options
******************************* Bottom of data ********************************

Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F12=Cancel

Figure 213. Select SCRIPT/VS Formatting Style panel (ISRFP09T)

The Select SCRIPT/VS Formatting Style panel is a list that can be scrolled and contains all the styles
available to you. Each style is a set of predefined formatting options.
Type either S or D in the Line Cmd field and press Enter to select or delete a style, respectively. You can
only select one style at a time for formatting. However, one or more styles can be deleted at the same
time.
The display fields on the Select SCRIPT/VS Formatting Style panel contain:
Style
The names of styles that you can either select or delete.
Description
A reminder of the purpose of each style. Type over the description to change it.

336 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Foreground—SCRIPT/VS processor (option 4.9)

Changing style options

Use the SCRIPT/VS Options for Style panel to:
• See which options are currently being used for the style you chose
• Change the options as needed.
Figure 214 on page 337 shows the options available for the DRAFT style.

SCRIPT/VS Options for Style: DRAFT

More: +
Profile data set . .
FONTLIB data set . .
SEGLIB data set . . .
User macro data set . . .
System macro data set . .

Bind: #Odd . .
#Even . .

Device type . . . . .
Chars (Fonts) . . . .
SYSVAR . . . . . . .
Page . . . . . . . .

Other script parms . . .

Enter "/" to select option

Twopass / Uppercase only
/ Spelling Unformat
Index Condensed Text
Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 214. SCRIPT/VS Options for Style: DRAFT panel (ISRFP09O)

The fields on the SCRIPT/VS Options for Style panel represent SCRIPT/VS formatting options, all of which
are optional. For a complete description of these options, refer to Document Composition Facility:
Generalized Markup Language Starter Set User's Guide.
If you enter the END command from the SCRIPT/VS Options for Style panel, changes on this panel are not
saved. If the style is new, it is saved with default formatting options.
If you press Enter from the SCRIPT/VS Options for Style panel, SCRIPT/VS processes the data set, and
then one of these actions occurs:
• A Browse panel is displayed if you selected the Browse Output option on the SCRIPT/VS Processor
panel. When you finish browsing the SCRIPT/VS formatted output, a Foreground Print Options for Style
panel is displayed.
Note: If you enter the PRINT parameter in the "Other script parms" field, the Browse panel is not
displayed.
• A Foreground Print Options for Style panel is displayed if you did not select the Browse Output option on
the Script/VS Processor panel.
See step “11” on page 335 for more information about printing SCRIPT/VS output.

Using SCRIPT/VS with the TSO/E information center facility

If the TSO/E Information Center Facility is installed, your installation can optionally allow ISPF to
substitute the panel shown in Figure 215 on page 338 for the panel shown in Figure 212 on page 335. See
“Using the TSO/E information center facility” on page 173 for information about the fields on this panel.

Foreground (option 4) 337

Foreground—VS COBOL II Interactive Debug (option 4.10)

Foreground Print Options for Style:

PK Print data set and keep K Keep data set (without printing)
PD Print data set and delete D Delete data set (without printing)

If END command is entered, data set is kept without printing.

Data Set Name . . . :

Printer location . .

Printer Format . . .

Number of copies . .

Command ===>
F1=HELP F2= F3=END F4=DATASETS F5=FIND F6=CHANGE
F9=SWAP F10=LEFT F11=RIGHT F12=SUBMIT

Figure 215. Foreground Print Options for Style panel with the TSO/E information center facility (ISRFP09I)

VS COBOL II interactive debug (option 4.10)

To run VS COBOL II interactive debug in foreground, the VS COBOL II compiler, Release 2, must be both
installed and accessible, for these reasons:
• You must compile your program by using the VS COBOL II compiler (option 4.2 or option 5.2) with the
TEST and RESIDENT options before running VS COBOL II interactive debug. Debug output from the
compilation is stored in the object module, which ISPF generates automatically.
• The VS COBOL II compiler contains the Debug Productivity Aid (DPA) facility, which ISPF accesses when
you run VS COBOL II interactive debug in the foreground.
All VS COBOL II interactive debug processing in the foreground is under DPA's control. DPA displays a
series of interactive panels. When processing is complete, return to step “12” on page 319.

OS/VS COBOL debug (option 4.10A)

Before you can run COBOL interactive debug, you must first perform these actions in the order shown:
1. Allocate a symbolic debug data set and, optionally, a print output data set by using the Data Set utility
(option 3.2). See “Symbolic debug data sets” on page 340 and “Print output data sets” on page 340
for more information.
2. Compile the program by using the OS/VS COBOL compiler (option 4.2A or option 5.2A) with the TEST
option.
3. Use the linkage editor (option 4.7 or option 5.7) to generate an output load module, which COBOL
interactive debug will use as input.
The COBOL Debug panel is shown in Figure 216 on page 339.

338 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Foreground—OS/VS COBOL Debug (option 4.10A)

Menu RefList Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
COBOL Interactive Debug
More: +
ISPF Library:
Project . . .
Group . . . . (Type = LOAD assumed)
Member . . . (Blank or pattern for member selection list)

Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set:

Data Set Name . .

Prog ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Print ID . . . . . . Password . .

Enter "/" to select option

/ Source

Execution Parms:
===>
Additional input libraries:
===>
===>
===>

Note: 1. PREFIX.PRINTID.TESTLIST must exist if Print ID is specified.

2. PREFIX.PROGID.LIST must exist for each program specified if / is
specified in Source field.
Command ===>
F1=HELP F2= F3=END F4=DATASETS F5=FIND F6=CHANGE
F9=SWAP F10=LEFT F11=RIGHT F12=SUBMIT

Figure 216. COBOL Debug panel (ISRFP10A)

All the fields on this panel are explained in the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF
User's Guide Vol I, except Prog ID, Print ID, Source, and Execution Parms, which are explained in
subsequent topics.

COBOL debug processing sequence

Fill in the fields on the COBOL Debug panel as follows:
1. Enter the ISPF library or data set name that contains the input load module generated by the linkage
editor. You can display a member list by omitting the member name or by using a pattern. See the
"ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I if you need help entering
library or data set names, “Object data sets” on page 326 for more information about object modules,
and the Displaying Member Lists section of the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF
User's Guide Vol I for more information about displaying member lists.
2. The Prog ID field tells ISPF the names of the sequential list data sets generated by the OS/VS COBOL
compiler. You can enter up to four Prog ID names if you compiled a partitioned data set member or a
sequential data set for each name. See “List data sets” on page 325 for more information.
3. The Print ID field is optional. This field tells ISPF the name of a sequential data set to which it writes
the print output from the debug session. This data set must be preallocated. See “Print output data
sets” on page 340 for more information.
4. Enter your password in the Password field if your input data set is password-protected. See “Password
protection” on page 326 for more information.
5. The Source option tells ISPF whether to allocate the list data sets specified in the Prog ID field. If you
select Source, these data sets must already exist.
6. The Execution Parms field is remembered from one session to another. Therefore, you do not need to
change this field unless the parameters you need are not displayed. Enter any parameters that you
want ISPF to pass to the program being debugged.
7. To continue COBOL interactive debug, return to step “12” on page 319.

Foreground (option 4) 339

Foreground—OS/VS COBOL Debug (option 4.10A)

Symbolic debug data sets

If you want to run COBOL interactive debug on a program compiled with the OS/VS COBOL compiler, you
must use the Data Set utility (option 3.2) to allocate a symbolic debug data set before compiling the
program. Then, when you compile the program, enter TEST in the Test field on the Foreground OS/VS
COBOL Compile panel. The TEST parameter generates the debug output, which ISPF stores in the
symbolic debug data set you allocated.
Note: You do not need to allocate a symbolic debug data set for programs compiled with VS COBOL II
because the debug output, if requested, is stored in the OBJECT module, which ISPF generates
automatically.
When you allocate the data set, specify the same name as the data set that contains your COBOL
program, but:
• For an ISPF library, enter:
– The Group name you will specify in the first Group field on the Foreground OS/VS COBOL Compile
panel
– SYM in the Type field.
• For another partitioned or sequential data set, use SYM to replace the last qualifier. For example, if
COBOL.INPUT or COBOL is the input data set name, allocate COBOL.SYM as the symbolic debug data
set.
Use these values to allocate symbolic debug data sets:

Record format . . . . . F
Record length . . . . . 512
Block size . . . . . . 512

For partitioned data sets, including ISPF libraries, the debug output is stored in a member with the same
name as the input member. For sequential data sets, the debug output is stored in a sequential data set.
When you run COBOL interactive debug, the names you put in the Prog ID field on the COBOL Interactive
Debug panel must be the same as the input member names if you are to create a correct SYM data set.

Print output data sets

ISPF writes the print output from a debug session to a sequential data set, if you:
• Allocate the data set, using the Data Set utility (option 3.2), before you run COBOL interactive debug
• Enter, in the Print ID field on the COBOL Interactive Debug panel, the name of the data set you
allocated.
You can avoid generating the print output by leaving the Print ID field blank, even if you allocated the data
set.
The last qualifier in the name of the data set you allocate must be TESTLIST. For example, if you allocate a
sequential data set named DEBUG1.TESTLIST and then specify the Print ID as:

Print ID . . DEBUG1

ISPF writes the print output to a sequential data set named:

'prefix.userid.DEBUG1.TESTLIST'

where prefix is your TSO data set prefix, if you have one and if it is different from your user ID, and userid
is your TSO user ID. Use these values to allocate print output data sets:

Record format . . . . . FBA

Record length . . . . . 121
Block size . . . . . . 3146

340 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Foreground—FORTRAN Debug (option 4.11)

The value you put in the Block Size field should be a multiple of 121, the record length. Therefore, if your
print output data is too large to fit within the recommended block size (3146), increase this amount by
using a multiple of 121, such as 3267 or 3388.

FORTRAN debug (option 4.11)

Before you can run FORTRAN interactive debug, you must first compile the program using the VS
FORTRAN compiler (option 4.3 or option 5.3) with the OBJECT and TEST options.
The FORTRAN interactive debug option supports both FORTRAN Interactive Debug Version 2 (5668-903)
and FORTRAN Interactive Debug Version 1 (5734-F05). ISPF looks for Version 2 first, then Version 1, and
finally its own Debug Dialog, which displays the panel shown in Figure 217 on page 341.

Menu RefList Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
FORTRAN Interactive Debug
More: +
ISPF Library:
Project . . .
Group . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type . . . . OBJ (OBJ or LOAD)
Member . . . (Blank or pattern for member selection list)

Source Type . .

Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set:

Data Set Name . .

List ID . . . . . . . Password . .

Debug Options: (options LIB, SOURCE, and PRINT generated automatically)

===>

Additional input libraries:

===>
===>
===>
Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 217. FORTRAN Debug panel (ISRFP11)

All the fields on this panel are explained in the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF
User's Guide Vol I except List ID, which is explained in “List data sets” on page 325, "Additional input
libraries", which is explained in “Input data sets” on page 324, and here:
Debug Options
Enter any options you need, except LIB, SOURCE, or PRINT. ISPF generates these options
automatically. LIB specifies the input data set concatenation sequence. SOURCE specifies the input
source program, whose type is identified in the Source Type field. PRINT writes the output listing to a
list data set. See “Input data sets” on page 324 and “List data sets” on page 325 for more
information.

Member parts list (option 4.12)

The member parts list uses the program ISRLEMX to show this information for each source program
module specified:
• The names of the modules it calls or includes.
• The names of the modules that call or include it.
The languages permitted in the member expansion function also are permitted in the member parts list
function, and the expansion triggers have the same restrictions. See “Member expansion (ISRLEMX)” on

Foreground (option 4) 341

Foreground—member parts list (option 4.12)

page 321. Besides the expansion triggers, the member parts list also uses the CALL statements in
assembler, PL/I, COBOL, and VS FORTRAN. The format of the CALL statement is:

CALL name

where the delimiter after the name can be either a left parenthesis, a blank, or a valid statement delimiter.
In COBOL, the CALL statement is valid only in the PROCEDURE DIVISION, and the CALL PGMA and CALL
'PGMA' statements both result in a reference to the member name PGMA.
When you select the Foreground Member parts list option (4.12), the panel shown in Figure 218 on page
342 is displayed.

Menu RefList Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Foreground Member Parts List

1 Browse/Print member parts

2 Write member parts data set

ISPF Library:
Project . . .
Group . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type . . . .
Member . . . (Blank or pattern for member selection list)

Language . . . . (Defaults to Type value)

Groups for Primary members . . . 1 (1, 2, 3, or 4)

Output Data Set: (option 2 only)

Data Set Name . .

Option ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 218. Foreground Member Parts List panel (ISRFP12)

The member parts list does not use the Source Data Packed option on the Foreground Selection panel;
both packed and unpacked data sets can be read.
Fill in the fields on the Foreground Member Parts List panel as follows:
1. Select one of the options listed at the top of the panel by typing its number in the Option field.
2. Enter the appropriate ISPF library and concatenation sequence or data set names. A blank member
name results in a member list being displayed. You can select only one member from this list. A
pattern results in the processing of all member names matching the pattern; an asterisk results in all
members being processed.
See the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I if you need help
entering library or data set names, the Displaying Member Lists section of the "ISPF Libraries and Data
Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I for information about using patterns and displaying
member lists, and “Input data sets” on page 324 for more information about the concatenation
sequence.
3. The Language field is optional. It is used to specify the language in which the source code is written. If
you leave this field blank, ISPF uses the value in the Type field as the default. However, the language
must be one of these:
• Assembler
• COBOL
• FORTRAN
• Pascal
• PLI

342 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Foreground—member parts list (option 4.12)

• SCRIPT.
4. In the "Groups For Primary members" field, enter a number from 1 to 4. This number tells ISPF how
many libraries in the concatenation sequence are to be used in locating primary members. For
example, if you enter 2, the first and second libraries specified in the Group field are used to find
primary members.
5. If you selected option 2 (write member parts data set), use the Data Set Name field to tell ISPF where
to write the output data set. The name you enter:
• Can be a sequential data set or a member of a partitioned data set
• Must follow standard TSO data set naming conventions.
If you enter the name of a data set that does not exist, ISPF allocates it for you.
6. Once all the input parameters have been specified, press Enter to call the Foreground Member Parts
List processor.
If the Session Manager is installed and if you specified Session Manager mode on the Foreground
Selection panel, the Foreground Member Parts List processor and all function keys and PA keys are
under control of the Session Manager. When processing is complete, you are prompted to enter a null
line to return to ISPF control.
If the Session Manager is not called, the PA and function keys have their usual TSO-defined meanings;
generally, the function keys are treated the same as Enter.
7. Communication with the Foreground Member Parts List processor is in line-I/O mode. Each time you
see three asterisks, press Enter. These asterisks, which usually appear at the bottom of the screen,
show that TSO is waiting for you to clear the screen before it can proceed.
8. The option you chose in step “1” on page 342 determines what happens next.
Note: If the Foreground Member Parts List processing program ends abnormally, ISPF displays a
message in the upper-right corner of the screen and does not enter Browse mode. The list data set is
retained, but the Foreground Print Options panel (see step “15” on page 319) is not displayed.
Option 1 (Browse/print member parts) creates the member parts list and displays it in Browse mode.
This figure shows an example.

BROWSE - Parts List for ISPFPROJ.ABL.PLI(*) ----------------------------------

From Via From Via Member To Via To Via

------- --- -------- --- -------- -------- --- -------- ---
********************************* Top of Data **********************************
(MEMBERA )
(MEMBERB ) MEMBERC C
MEMBERB C (MEMBERC ) MEMBERD C MEMBERE I
MEMBERG C*
MEMBERC C (MEMBERD ) MEMBERE I
MEMBERC I MEMBERD I (MEMBERE )
(MEMBERF )
******************************** Bottom of Data ********************************

Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F5=Rfind F7=Up F8=Down F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 219. Member parts list display (ISRFP12B)

The figure shows that:

• Library ISPFPROJ.ABL.PLI contains these members:

Foreground (option 4) 343

Foreground—member parts list (option 4.12)

MEMBERA
Has no calls or includes.
MEMBERB
Calls MEMBERC.
MEMBERC
Calls MEMBERD and MEMBERG, and includes MEMBERE. The asterisk (*) beside the C in the third
VIA column means that MEMBERG was not found in the input library.
MEMBERD
Includes MEMBERE.
MEMBERE
Has no calls or includes.
MEMBERF
Has no calls or includes.
• A parts list is requested for all members in the first data set.
You can scroll the output up or down using the scroll commands. All the Browse commands are
available to you. When you finish browsing the listing, enter the END command and continue with step
“15” on page 319.
Option 2 (Write member parts data set) produces an intermediate sequential member parts list in the
data set you named in step “5” on page 343. This data set can be either a sequential data set or a
member of a partitioned data set.
If the data set has not been allocated, option 2 allocates it with a logical record length (LRECL) of 17, a
block size (BLKSIZE) of 3009, and a record format (RECFM) of FB. The format of the records is shown
in Table 22 on page 344:

Table 22. Foreground member parts list record formats

Field Name Format Description
Member name CHAR(8) Subject member.
Called by or calls CHAR(8) Referenced member.
member name
Call flag BIT(1) Found on a CALL statement.
Include flag BIT(1) Found by INCLUDE or COPY.
Not found flag BIT(1) Referenced member not found.
From flag BIT(1) Subject member called from referenced member.
To flag BIT(1) Referenced member called from subject member.
COBOL flag BIT(1) Member referenced outside valid COBOL division.
Reserved BIT(2) Field that is reserved.
9. You can perform one of these actions:
• Enter other parameters and call the same processor.
• Enter the END command to return to the Foreground Selection panel and select another processor.
• Enter the RETURN command to go to the ISPF Primary Option Menu.
• Use the jump function (=) to choose any primary option.

Member not found

A primary library is one of the number of libraries specified in the "Groups For Primary members" field. A
primary member is a member that starts the member parts explosion chain. An explosion chain is the

344 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Foreground—C/370 compile (option 4.13)

order in which members are nested, starting with the primary member and continuing through each
member that it includes, calls, or copies.
The chain is broken when a member cannot be found in the set of concatenated libraries or no more
members are referenced. If a member cannot be found, the name is flagged with an asterisk (*) and
processing continues. For instance, internally called routines are not found.
When no more primary members can be found, the listing is printed, written, or browsed. Calls to internal
routines or variable names result in the member not found flag being set.

C/370 compile (option 4.13)

ISPF supports the C/370 compiler through dialogs supplied with the C/370 compiler (5688-040). See C
Compiler User's Guide for MVS, SC09-1129 for additional information.

REXX/370 compile (option 4.14)

ISPF supports the REXX/370 compiler through dialogs supplied with the REXX/370 compiler (5695-013).
See IBM Compiler and Library for REXX/370 User's Guide and Reference, SH19-8160, for additional
information.

Ada/370 compile (option 4.15)

ISPF supports the Ada/370 compiler and its tools through dialogs supplied with the Ada/370 compiler
(5706-292). See IBM Ada/370 User's Guide SC09-1415, for additional information.

AD/Cycle C/370 compile (option 4.16)

ISPF supports the AD/Cycle C/370 compiler through dialogs supplied with the AD/Cycle C/370 compiler
(5688-216). See IBM SAA AD/Cycle C/370 Programming Guide SC09-1356, for additional information.

ISPDTLC (option 4.18)

ISPF supports the ISPF Dialog Tag Language compiler by running the ISPDTLC function. See z/OS ISPF
Dialog Tag Language Guide and Reference for more information about DTL.
The first ISPDTLC interface panel appears as shown in this figure.

Foreground (option 4) 345

Foreground—C/C++ for OS/390 compile (option 4.19)

┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ Menu Utilities Commands Language Options Help │
│ ────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│ ISPF Dialog Tag Language Conversion Utility - 5.5 │
│ │
│ Click here: Go to DTL input names 5-16 Reset DTL input names 2-16 │
│ Enter requested information: Current Language: ENGLISH │
│ More: + │
│ Member name . . . . . . . . (Blank or pattern for member list) │
│ DTL Source data set - 1 . . 'USERID.GML' │
│ DTL Source data set - 2 . . │
│ DTL Source data set - 3 . . │
│ DTL Source data set - 4 . . │
│ Panel data set . . . . . . 'USERID.PANELS' │
│ Message data set . . . . . 'USERID.MSGS' │
│ Log data set . . . . . . . │
│ Log File Member name . . (Required when log file is a PDS) │
│ List data set . . . . . . . │
│ List File Member name . . (Required when list file is a PDS) │
│ SCRIPT data set . . . . . . │
│ Command ===> │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward │
│ F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel │
⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 220. Foreground ISPDTLC compile panel (ISPCP01) Screen 1

The fields on this panel are explained in the topic "Using the Conversion Utility" in z/OS ISPF Dialog Tag
Language Guide and Reference.

OS/390 C/C++ compile (option 4.19)

ISPF supports the OS/390® C/C++ compiler and its tools through dialogs supplied with the OS/390 C/C++
compiler (5647-A01). For information about OS/390 C/C++, refer to the OS/390 C/C++ User's Guide.

346 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

Chapter 7. Batch (option 5)

The Batch option (5) allows ISPF to run the batch processors shown on the Batch Selection panel, Figure
221 on page 347, as batch jobs. ISPF generates job control language (JCL) for the job, based on
information you enter on the batch processing panels, and then submits the job for processing. All these
processors, plus SCRIPT/VS, COBOL interactive debug, and FORTRAN interactive debug, are also
available with the Foreground option (4).
When you run a batch processor, you can continue using ISPF while the program is running. However, if
you run these processors by using the Foreground option, you must wait for processing to end before
doing anything else with ISPF. The Foreground Selection panel is shown in Figure 202 on page 317.

Menu Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Batch Selection Panel

1 Assembler 7 *Binder/Link editor 15 *ADA/370

2 COBOL 10 *VS COBOL II debug 16 *AD/Cycle C/370
3 VS FORTRAN 12 Member Parts List 18 ISPDTLC
5 PLI 13 *C/370 19 *OS/390 C/C++
6 VS PASCAL 14 *REXX/370

Enter "/" to select option * No packed data support

/ Source data online
Source data packed

Job Statement Information: Verify before proceeding

===> //LSACKV1 JOB (ACCT),CLASS=A

===> //*
===> //*
===> //*

Option ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 221. Batch Selection panel (ISRJPA)

The names of the batch processors on this panel are point-and-shoot fields. See the information about
Point-and-Shoot Text Fields in the ISPF User Interface topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I for more
information.

Batch selection panel action bar

The Batch Selection Panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu
See the information about the Menu Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface topic in the z/OS
ISPF User's Guide Vol I for more information about the Menu pull-down.
Utilities
See the information about the Utilities Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface topic in the z/OS
ISPF User's Guide Vol I for more information about the Utilities pull-down.
Help
The Help pull-down provides general information about foreground processing as well as information
about each available choice on the Batch Selection Panel.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2019 347

Batch—processing sequence

Batch processing sequence

This topic describes the main sequence for batch processing.
1. If you do not know whether the source data is in packed format, find out by editing the data set and
entering the PROFILE command. If the source data is in packed format, the profile shows PACK ON.
If the data is not packed, continue with the next step.
If the data is packed, you should read “Expanding packed data” on page 320, paying close attention
to information that applies to the batch processor you plan to use. When you are satisfied that the
data set is ready to be processed, save the data set if you are in Edit and continue with the next step.
2. Select a batch processor. If you bypass the Batch Selection panel, you cannot verify or change the job
statement parameters, or generate multiple compilations (multiple job steps) or link-edits within the
same job.
3. Select the Source data online option to tell ISPF that the data to be processed resides on a currently
mounted volume. ISPF checks the data set information that you entered on the Batch Selection panel
and allows you to display a member list. If you do not select this option, ISPF assumes that the data
cannot be accessed except by the batch job and does not verify the existence or validity of the
specified data set.
4. Select the Source data packed option to tell ISPF that it needs to expand the source data. This option
has no effect on the member parts list option (5.12). Member parts list can read both packed and
unpacked data sets, so no expansion is needed.
5. Enter any job statement information you need. See the information about Job Statement Information
in the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I for more information.
6. Press Enter. ISPF displays the data entry panel for the processor you selected.
Note: The remainder of this processing sequence applies to all batch processors except Member
Parts List. See “Member parts list (option 5.12)” on page 357 for more information.
7. Enter the appropriate ISPF library and concatenation sequence or data set names.
For VS COBOL II interactive debug, enter the name of the input object module or load module. The
TYPE, or last qualifier, must be either OBJ or LOAD. However, if you specify an OBJ data set as your
input data set, you must include a load library or data set in the input search sequence (see step “11”
on page 349).
ISPF displays a member list if you omit the member name or use a pattern. See the information about
Naming ISPF Libraries and Data Sets in the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF
User's Guide Vol I if you need help entering library or data set names, “Input data sets” on page 324
for more information about the concatenation sequence, and the Displaying Member Lists section of
the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I for more information
about displaying member lists.
Note:
a. VS FORTRAN has no LIB option. However, the concatenation sequence is still used to find the
member to be compiled.
b. Password protection is not supported from the Batch option. Therefore, if your input or output
data sets are password-protected, use the Foreground option, which does support passwords.
If you submit a job requiring a password-protected data set, the system operator will be
requested to enter the required password.
8. The List ID field tells ISPF what to name the output listing. Leave this field blank and enter a SYSOUT
class to send the listing to a printer. See “List data sets” on page 325 for more information.
9. Enter a SYSOUT class to generate hardcopy of the listing. You can enter any valid SYSOUT parameter.
If a List ID is entered, this field is ignored.

348 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Batch—processing sequence

10. The Options field, whether ASSEMBLER, COMPILER, or LINKAGE EDITOR, is remembered from one
session to another. Therefore, you do not need to change these fields unless the options or
parameters you need are not displayed.
If you need information about the options available for your processor, refer to the documentation
provided with the processor.
11. Enter any additional input libraries you need. For VS COBOL II interactive debug, enter any input
LOAD libraries that you need to complete the search. These libraries must be LOAD libraries only. See
“Input data sets” on page 324 if you need help.
12. Once all the input fields have been specified, press Enter to call the batch processor. ISPF generates
the appropriate JCL statements. See “JCL generation—compilers” on page 350 and “JCL generation—
assemblers and linkage editor” on page 351 for more information.
Note: You can leave the entry panel without generating any JCL by entering the END command
instead of pressing Enter.
13. One of these actions occurs:
• If you used the jump function to bypass the Batch Selection panel, ISPF submits the generated JCL
and returns directly to the ISPF Primary Option Menu.
ISPF calls the TSO SUBMIT command to submit a job. The SUBMIT command displays this
message:

JOB jobname(jobid) SUBMITTED

***

When you press Enter or any other interrupt key, ISPF returns to the previous panel.
• Otherwise, ISPF returns to the Batch Selection panel with the message Job step generated
displayed in the short message area on line 1, as shown in Figure 222 on page 349.

Menu Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Batch Selection Panel Job step generated
More: +
1 Assembler 7 *Binder/Link editor 15 *ADA/370
2 COBOL 10 *VS COBOL II debug 16 *AD/Cycle C/370
3 VS FORTRAN 12 Member Parts List 18 ISPDTLC
5 PLI 13 *C/370 19 *OS/390 C/C++
6 VS PASCAL 14 *REXX/370

Enter "/" to select option * No packed data support

/ Source data online
Source data packed

Job Statement Information:

===> //LSACKV1 JOB (ACCT),CLASS=A

===> //*
===> //*
===> //*

Option ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 222. Batch Selection Panel with JCL generated (ISRJPB)

The job statement parameters are shown for information only. They are no longer intensified, and
you cannot type over them because the JOB statement has already been generated. At this point,
you can:
– Select the same or another processor to cause more JCL to be generated.
– Go to the ISPF Primary Option Menu by:
- Canceling the batch job by entering the CANCEL command

Batch (option 5) 349

Batch—JCL generation for compilers

- Entering the END or RETURN command to cause the generated JCL to be submitted for
processing.
– Use the jump function (=) to choose any primary option. If any JCL has been generated, it is
submitted for batch processing.

JCL generation—compilers
Figure 226 on page 355 shows an example for the PL/I optimizing compiler. This panel is typical of the
batch compiler entry panels. After you fill in an entry panel and press Enter, ISPF generates the
appropriate JCL statements. The JCL that would be generated for the PL/I example is:

//SCAN EXEC PGM=ISRLEMX,COND=(12,LE),

// PARM=('PLI,TOPSEG,B,N,E,4, ,00,ENU,4,7',
// '1,/,VIO')
//*
//* INSERT STEPLIB DD CARDS HERE FOR ISRLEMX AND THE NATIONAL
//* LANGUAGE LITERAL LOAD MODULE IF THEY ARE NOT IN YOUR SYSTEM
//* LIBRARY
//*
//ISRLCODE DD DSN=ISPFDEMO.XXX.PLIO,DISP=SHR
// DD DSN=ISPFDEMO.A.PLIO,DISP=SHR
// DD DSN=ISPFDEMO.MASTER.PLIO,DISP=SHR
//ISRLEXPD DD UNIT=SYSDA,DISP=(NEW,PASS),SPACE=(CYL,(2,2)),
// DSN=&&TEMP1
//ISRLMSG DD SYSOUT=(A)
//PLIO EXEC PGM=IEL0AA,REGION=1024K,COND=(12,LE),
// PARM='MACRO,XREF'
//SYSPRINT DD DSN=ISPFDEMO.LISTPLIO.LIST,UNIT=SYSDA,
// SPACE=(CYL,(2,2)),DISP=(MOD,CATLG),
// DCB=(RECFM=VBA,LRECL=125,BLKSIZE=3129)
//SYSIN DD DSN=&&TEMP1,DISP=(OLD,DELETE)
//SYSLIB DD DSN=ISPFDEMO.XXX.PLIO,DISP=SHR
// DD DSN=ISPFDEMO.A.PLIO,DISP=SHR
// DD DSN=ISPFDEMO.MASTER.PLIO,DISP=SHR
// DD DSN=ISPFTEST.FLAG.PLIO,DISP=SHR
//SYSUT1 DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,(2,2))
//SYSLIN DD DSN=ISPFDEMO.XXX.OBJ(TOPSEG),DISP=OLD\

The JCL is generated in two steps:

1. The first step processes one of these scan programs, which are distributed as part of ISPF:
ISRSCAN
Copies one member.
ISRLEMX
Copies the primary member, expands any included members, and unpacks any packed members.
The selected scan program searches the user-specified sequence of concatenated libraries to find the
designated member. If the scan program finds the member, it copies the member to a temporary
sequential data set that is shown by &&TEMP1 and generated by the system. The scan program then
exits with a return code of zero, if no errors are found. If any errors are found, the scan program exits
with one of these return codes, which prevents the processing of the second job step. Table 23 on
page 350 and Table 24 on page 351 describe ISRSCAN and ISRLEMX return codes:

Table 23. ISRSCAN return codes

ISRSCAN
12 Member not found.
16 OPEN error on DDNAME=IN.
20 I/O error on DDNAME=IN.
24 OPEN error on DDNAME=OUT.
28 I/O error on DDNAME=OUT.

350 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Batch—JCL generation for assemblers and Linkage Editor

Table 24. ISRLEMX return codes

ISRLEMX
1-15 Parameter n was too long, where n = 1 to 15.
16 Too many parameters.
17 Too few parameters.
20 Severe error in expand module. An error message
should be printed in the ISRLMSG data set.
2. In this example, the second step calls the PL/I optimizing compiler by using the temporary data set
designated by &&TEMP1 as the input data set. The concatenation sequence is passed to the compiler
through SYSLIB DD statements, to allow inclusion of subsidiary members referenced by %INCLUDE
statements in the source text.
The object module is directed to a partitioned data set with a three-level name composed of the
project name, the first library name, and a type qualifier of OBJ. The member name for the object
module is the same as the primary member to be compiled.
The compiler listing is directed to SYSOUT class A, as specified.

JCL generation—assemblers and linkage editor

For batch assembly and link-edit, an optional SYSTERM DD statement is generated (if you specify TERM)
besides the JCL shown in “JCL generation—compilers” on page 350, as follows:

//SYSTERM DD DSN=prefix.member.TERM,DISP=(MOD,CATLG)

where:
prefix
The data set prefix in your TSO user profile
member
For members of partitioned data sets, this is the same member name specified on the entry panel. For
sequential data sets, this name is TEMPNAME.

Assembler (option 5.1)

Batch Assembler enables you to invoke either High Level Assembler or Assembler H. Both are called from
the Batch Assembler panel, shown in Figure 223 on page 352. For information about Assembler
allocation data sets, see the topic about Allocation Data Sets in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.

Batch (option 5) 351

Batch— COBOL compile (option 5.2)

Menu RefList Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Batch Assembler
More: +
ISPF Library:
Project . . . PDFTDEV
Group . . . . LSACKV . . . . . . . . .
Type . . . . ASM
Member . . . (Blank or pattern for member selection list)

Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set:

Data Set Name . .

Assembler
List ID . . . . . (Blank for hardcopy) 1 1. High Level Assembler
SYSOUT class . . . (For hardcopy) 2. Assembler H

Assembler options:
Term . . . (TERM or NOTERM)
Other . . .

Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 223. Batch Assembler panel (ISRJP01)

All the fields on this panel are explained in the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF
User's Guide Vol I, except List ID, which is explained in “List data sets” on page 325, "Additional input
libraries", which is explained here and in “Input data sets” on page 324:
Term
In the Term field, enter TERM if you want ISPF to generate a terminal data set. A terminal data set
contains a synopsis of the error messages produced by the Assembler. If the input data set is
partitioned, the terminal data set name is:

prefix.member.TERM

where prefix is the data set name prefix in your TSO user profile, if you have one, and member is the
name of the member being assembled. However, if the input data set is sequential, the terminal data
set name is:

prefix.TEMPNAME.TERM

Enter NOTERM in the Term field to avoid generating the terminal data set. This is a required field.
Other
Enter any other options you need in the Other field.

COBOL compile (option 5.2)

ISPF generates an ISPEXEC SELECT PGM(IGYCRCTL) statement to invoke a COBOL compiler using the
values you enter on the Batch COBOL Compile panel, shown in Figure 224 on page 353. For information
about COBOL allocation data sets, see the topic about Allocation Data Sets in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide
Vol I.

352 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Batch—VS FORTRAN compile (option 5.3)

Menu RefList Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Batch COBOL Compile
More: +
ISPF Library:
Project . . . PDFTDEV
Group . . . . LSACKV . . . . . . . . .
Type . . . . COBOL
Member . . . (Blank or pattern for member selection list)

Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set:

Data Set Name . .

List ID . . . . . . . (Blank for hardcopy)

SYSOUT class . . . . (If hardcopy requested)

Compiler options:
Term . . . NOTERM (TERM or NOTERM)
Other . . .

Additional input libraries:

Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 224. Batch COBOL Compile panel (ISRJP02)

All the fields on this panel are explained in the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF
User's Guide Vol I, except List ID, which is explained in “List data sets” on page 325, "Additional input
libraries", which is explained here and in “Input data sets” on page 324:
Term
In the Term field, enter TERM if you want ISPF to generate a terminal data set. A terminal data set
contains a synopsis of the error messages produced by the COBOL compiler. If the input data set is
partitioned, the terminal data set name is:

prefix.member.TERM

where prefix is the data set name prefix in your TSO user profile, if you have one, and member is the
name of the member being assembled. However, if the input data set is sequential, the terminal data
set name is:

prefix.TEMPNAME.TERM

Enter NOTERM in the Term field to avoid generating the terminal data set. This is a required field.
Other
If you plan to run VS COBOL II interactive debug after you compile your program, enter TEST,
RESIDENT, and any other options you need in the Other field.

VS FORTRAN compile (option 5.3)

The Batch VS FORTRAN Compile panel is shown in Figure 225 on page 354.

Batch (option 5) 353

Batch—PL/I compile (option 5.5)

Menu RefList Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Batch VS FORTRAN Compile
More: +
ISPF Library:
Project . . . PDFTDEV
Group . . . . LSACKV . . . . . . . . .
Type . . . . FORT
Member . . . (Blank or pattern for member selection list)

Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set:

Data Set Name . .

List ID . . . . . . . (Blank for hardcopy)

SYSOUT class . . . . (If hardcopy requested)

Compiler options:
Term . . . NOTERM (TERM or NOTERM)
Other . . .

Additional input libraries:

Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 225. Batch VS FORTRAN Compile panel (ISRJP03)

All the fields on this panel are explained in the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF
User's Guide Vol I except List ID, which is explained in “List data sets” on page 325, "Additional input
libraries", which is explained here and in “Input data sets” on page 324:
Term
In the Term field, enter TERM if you want ISPF to generate a terminal data set. A terminal data set
contains a synopsis of the error messages produced by the VS FORTRAN compiler. If the input data
set is partitioned, the terminal data set name is:

prefix.member.TERM

where prefix is the data set name prefix in your TSO user profile, if you have one, and member is the
name of the member being assembled. However, if the input data set is sequential, the terminal data
set name is:

prefix.TEMPNAME.TERM

Enter NOTERM in the Term field to avoid generating the terminal data set. This is a required field.
Other
If you plan to run FORTRAN interactive debug after you compile your program, enter TEST in the Other
field, along with any other options you need.

PL/I compile (option 5.5)

The Batch PL/I Compile option enables you to invoke either OS PL/I Version 2 or PL/I for MVS and VM,
using the values specified on the Batch PL/I compile panel shown in Figure 226 on page 355.

354 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Batch—VS Pascal compile (option 5.6)

Menu RefList Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Batch PL/I Compile
More: +
ISPF Library:
Project . . . PDFTDEV
Group . . . . LSACKV . . . . . . . . .
Type . . . . PLI
Member . . . (Blank or pattern for member selection list)

Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set:

Data Set Name . .
Compiler
List ID . . . . . (Blank for hardcopy) 1 1. OS PL/I V2R3
SYSOUT class . . . (For hardcopy) 2. PL/I for MVS and VM
3. VA PL/I for OS/390

Compiler options:
===>

Additional input libraries:

Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 226. Batch PL/I Compile panel (ISRJP05)

All the fields on this panel are explained in the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF
User's Guide Vol I except List ID, which is explained in “List data sets” on page 325, "Additional input
libraries", which is explained in “Input data sets” on page 324.
Compiler
Choose the compiler you want to use from the list presented.

VS Pascal compile (option 5.6)

The Batch VS Pascal Compile panel is shown in Figure 227 on page 355.

Menu RefList Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Batch VS PASCAL Compile
More: +
ISPF Library:
Project . . . PDFTDEV
Group . . . . LSACKV . . . . . . . . .
Type . . . . PASCAL
Member . . . (Blank or pattern for member selection list)

Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set:

Data Set Name . .

List ID . . . . . . . (Blank for hardcopy)

SYSOUT class . . . . (If hardcopy requested)

Compiler options:
===>

Additional input libraries:

===>
Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 227. Batch VS Pascal Compile panel (ISRJP06)

All the fields on this panel are explained in the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF
User's Guide Vol I except List ID, which is explained in “List data sets” on page 325, and "Additional input
libraries", which is explained in “Input data sets” on page 324.

Batch (option 5) 355

Batch—binder/linkage editor (option 5.7)

Binder/linkage editor (option 5.7)

The Batch Binder or Linkage Editor is called from the Batch Binder/Linkage editor panel. The panel in
Figure 228 on page 356 shows entries you might make when link-editing a VS Pascal program.

Menu RefList Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Batch Binder/Linkage Editor
More: +
ISPF Library:
Project . . . PDFTDEV
Group . . . . COMMON . . . . . . . . .
Type . . . . LEL
Member . . . (Blank or pattern for member selection list)

Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set:

Data Set Name . .

Processor
List ID . . . . . (Blank for hardcopy) 1. Binder
SYSOUT class . . (For hardcopy) 2. Linkage Editor

Linkage editor/binder options:

Term . . . (TERM or blank)
Other . . .

Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 228. Batch Binder Linkage/Editor panel (ISRJP07B)

All the fields on this panel are explained in the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF
User's Guide Vol I except List ID, which is explained in “List data sets” on page 325, and here:
Binder
Determines whether the Linkage Editor (NOBINDER) or Binder (BINDER) is invoked.
Note: The binder is available only if DFSMS 1.1, or later, is installed.
Term
In the Term field, enter TERM if you want ISPF to generate a terminal data set. A terminal data set
contains a synopsis of the error messages produced by the linkage editor. If the input data set is
partitioned, the terminal data set name is:

prefix.member.TERM

where prefix is the data set name prefix in your TSO user profile, if you have one, and member is the
name of the member being assembled.
Note: Sequential data sets are invalid when using the Linkage Editor.
Leave the Term field blank to avoid generating the terminal data set.
Other
Enter any other options you need in the Other field.
SYSLIB
The name of the data set that is to contain the ISPF library concatenation sequence used to resolve
any copy statements specified in your program. See “Input data sets” on page 324 and the SYSLIB
Data Set section of the topic about Allocation Data Sets in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I for more
information.
SYSLIN
The name of the data set that is to contain the object module. The SYSLIN field is provided to
accommodate the VS Pascal XA and NOXA processing options. See “Input data sets” on page 324 and

356 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Batch—VS COBOL II interactive debug (option 5.10)

the SYSLIN Data Set section of the topic about Allocation Data Sets in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I
for more information.

VS COBOL II interactive debug (option 5.10)

Before you can run VS COBOL II interactive debug in batch, you must first perform these tasks in the
order shown:
1. Compile the program using the VS COBOL II compiler (option 4.2 or option 5.2) with the TEST and
RESIDENT options.
2. Use the linkage editor (option 4.7 or option 5.7) to generate an output load module, which VS COBOL II
interactive debug will use as input.
The VS COBOL II Interactive Debug panel is shown in Figure 229 on page 357.

Menu RefList Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
VS COBOL II Interactive Debug
More: +
ISPF Library:
Project . . . LSACKV
Group . . . . PRIVATE (Type = LOAD assumed)
Member . . . (Blank or pattern for member selection list)

Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set:

Data Set Name . .

List ID . . . . . . . (Blank for hardcopy)

SYSOUT class . . . . A (If hardcopy requested)

Debug command data set:

===>

Additional input libraries:

===>
===>
Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 229. VS COBOL II Interactive Debug panel (ISRJP10)

All the fields on this panel are explained in the "ISPF Libraries and Data Sets" chapter of the z/OS ISPF
User's Guide Vol I except List ID, which is explained in “List data sets” on page 325, "Additional input
libraries", which is explained in “Input data sets” on page 324, and here:
Note: For VS COBOL II interactive debug, any additional input libraries that you enter to complete the
search sequence must be LOAD libraries only.
Debug command data set
In the "Debug command data set" field, enter the name of the data set that contains the DEBUG
command that you want VS COBOL II interactive debug to enter during batch processing. See VS
COBOL II Application Programming Debugging Guide for more information.

Member parts list (option 5.12)

When you select the Batch Member Parts List option (5.12), the panel shown in Figure 230 on page 358 is
displayed.
The only difference between this panel and the Foreground Member Parts List panel is that option 1 (print
member parts) is called Browse/Print member parts list in foreground. The foreground version does not
print your member parts list unless you use the Foreground Print Options panel to do so.

Batch (option 5) 357

Batch C/370 compile (option 5.13)

Otherwise, this version operates the same as the foreground version. See “Member parts list (option
4.12)” on page 341 for more information about using the member parts list function.
The listing is 120 characters wide and uses ANSI printer controls.

Menu RefList Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Batch Member Parts List

1 Print member parts

2 Write member parts data set

ISPF Library:
Project . . . LSACKV
Group . . . . PRIVATE . . . . . . . . .
Type . . . .
Member . . . (Blank or pattern for member selection list)

Language . . . . COB (Defaults to Type value)

Groups for Primary members . . . 1 (1, 2, 3, or 4)

SYSOUT class . . . (Defaults to A )

Output Data Set: (option 2 only)

Data Set Name . .
Option ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 230. Batch Member Parts List panel (ISRJP12)

C/370 compile (option 5.13)

ISPF supports the C/370 compiler through dialogs supplied with the C/370 compiler (5688-040). See C
Compiler User's Guide for MVS, SC09-1129 for additional information.

REXX/370 compile (option 5.14)

ISPF supports the REXX/370 compiler through dialogs supplied with the REXX/370 compiler (5695-013).
See IBM Compiler and Library for REXX/370 User's Guide and Reference, SH19-8160, for additional
information.

Ada/370 compile (option 5.15)

ISPF supports the Ada/370 compiler and its tools through dialogs supplied with the Ada/370 compiler
(5706-292). See IBM Ada/370 User's Guide, SC09-1415, for additional information.

AD/Cycle C/370 compile (option 5.16)

ISPF supports the AD/Cycle C/370 compiler through dialogs supplied with the AD/Cycle C/370 compiler
(5688-216). See IBM SAA AD/Cycle C/370 Programming Guide SC09-1356, for additional information.

ISPDTLC compile (option 5.18)

ISPF supports the ISPF Dialog Tag Language compiler by running the ISPDTLC function. See z/OS ISPF
Dialog Tag Language Guide and Reference for more information.

358 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Batch OS/390 C/C++ (option 5.19)

The ISPDTLC interface panels are identical to those in the Foreground option. The first panel can be seen
in Figure 220 on page 346.
The fields on this panel are explained in the topic "Using the Conversion Utility" in z/OS ISPF Dialog Tag
Language Guide and Reference.

OS/390 C/C++ compile (option 5.19)

ISPF supports the OS/390 C/C++ compiler and its tools through dialogs supplied with the OS/390 C/C++
compiler (5647-A01). For information about OS/390 C/C++, refer to the OS/390 C/C++ User's Guide.

Batch (option 5) 359

Batch OS/390 C/C++ (option 5.19)

360 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Command (option 6)

Chapter 8. Command (option 6)

When you select this option, the ISPF Command Shell panel shown in Figure 231 on page 361 is
displayed. You can enter TSO commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs on the Command line of any panel and
in the Line Command field on data set list displays (option 3.4). However, the ISPF Command Shell panel
provides additional capabilities:
• You can enter TSO commands, ISPF commands, CLISTs, and REXX execs in a separate, but optional,
ISPF Command field. This field is displayed only if your installation chooses to do so. The default panel
shown in Figure 231 on page 361 does not display this field. When you use this field, commands that
are typed in the TSO Command Entry field (==>) are not blanked out when you enter the SPLIT
command to split the screen.
Note: If you use this field, you will not have access to the saved command area (see “The saved
command area” on page 362).
• You can enter Session Manager mode, but only if this licensed program is installed. See “Using the
session manager” on page 364 for more information.
• You can enter a long command that continues on these two lines.

Menu List Mode Functions Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
ISPF Command Shell
Enter TSO or Workstation commands below:

===>

Place cursor on choice and press enter to Retrieve command

=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap

F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 231. ISPF Command Shell panel (ISRTSO)

ISPF command shell panel action bar

The ISPF Command Shell panel action bar choices function as follows:
Note: The ISPF Command Shell panel action bar contains three pull-down choices that let you control the
saved command area.
• List
• Mode
• Functions
Menu
For more information, see the details about the Menu Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2019 361

Command (option 6)

List
The List pull-down offers you these choices:
Update On
Makes the list of commands in the saved command area live; that is, new commands are
appended automatically.
Update Off
Makes the list of commands in the saved command area static; that is, new commands are not
appended automatically.
The current setting is shown as an unavailable choice.
Mode
The Mode pull-down offers you these choices:
Retrieve
Allows commands to be retrieved from the saved command area and placed on the TSO Command
Entry field (==>) so that you can edit them before they are executed. This mode is the default.
Execute
Allows commands to be retrieved from the saved command area and executed in one step.
Delete
Allows you to delete commands from the saved command area without executing the commands.
Place the cursor on the command to be deleted and press Enter. The command will be blanked
out. This process allows you to delete a command if you are running with Update mode set off.
The current setting is shown as an unavailable choice.
Functions
The Functions pull-down offers you this choice:
Compress List
Removes duplicate entries and blank spaces in the saved command area if you are running with
Update mode set off. Entries are compressed automatically in Update mode.
TSO command
Sets the command shell to route commands to TSO
Workstation command
Sets the command shell to route commands to your workstation.
Note:
1. Workstation command is available only if you are running the ISPF Client Server.
2. Any command may be prefixed with either TSO or WS to override the command function setting.
Utilities
For more information, see the details about the Utilities Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Help
The Help pull-down provides general information on the TSO Command processor panel, including
line I/O mode and Session Manager mode, and restrictions on entering commands.

The saved command area

The ISPF Command Shell panel has a saved command area (the bottom portion of the screen) that
contains a list of up to 10 commands that you have saved; see Figure 232 on page 363 for an example.
These commands are point-and-shoot fields. What happens when you select a command depends on the
mode you specify from the Mode pull-down menu on the action bar.

362 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Command (option 6)

Menu List Mode Functions Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
ISPF Command Shell
Enter TSO or Workstation commands below:

===>

Place cursor on choice and press enter to Retrieve command

=> status
=> xmit carvm3.userid da('userid.private.clist(types)')seq
=> TIME
=> RECEIVE
=> XMIT CARVM3.SCOTT DA('USERID.PROJ.PANELS(ISAJP10)') SEQ
=> PERMIT 'BOB.*' GENERIC ACCESS(READ) ID(*)
=> rexec -1 SQUIRT -p SPARKY p:\acI13\samples\isr prim\os213\isr_prim
=> XMIT CARVM3.userid DA('USERID.BUILD.LIST77')
=> ssdf
=> XMIT CARVM3.userid DA('USERID.trace')

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap

F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 232. ISPF Command Shell panel with saved commands (ISRTSO)

Entering TSO commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs

You do not need to enter TSO before the command on this panel as you do on other panels, unless the
command exists in both ISPF and TSO and you want to process the TSO command. If you use TSO, your
processed command is blanked out when the ISPF Command Shell panel is displayed again.
TSO commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs entered are invoked using the ISPF SELECT CMD service.
Variable names starting with an ampersand (&) are evaluated by ISPF. If you want the underlying
command processor to see the ampersand you must specify 2 ampersands. For example:

DEF NONVSAM(NAME('MY.DATASET') DEVT(0000) VOLUME(&&SYSR2))

For example, the HELP, PRINT, and CANCEL commands are interpreted as the ISPF HELP, PRINT, and
CANCEL commands, unless you precede them with TSO. Therefore, to get TSO HELP information, enter:

===> TSO HELP xxx

Rules for entering TSO commands

Do not enter these commands under ISPF:
• LOGON and LOGOFF
• ISPF, PDF, or ISPSTART
• TEST
• Commands that are restricted by TSO or ISPF
• Commands that call a program authorized by the Authorized Program Facility (APF), except for the TSO
CALL command
• ISPEXEC service calls.

Rules for entering CLISTs and REXX EXECs

You can enter a CLIST name or REXX exec name on this panel, but these restrictions apply:
• The CLIST or REXX exec cannot call the restricted commands shown in the preceding list. However, this
does not apply to ISPEXEC, which can be called in a CLIST or REXX exec.
• CLIST error exits are not entered for ABENDs.

Command (option 6) 363

Command (option 6)

• CLIST TERMIN command procedure statements may cause unwanted results.

Note: Remember that a command issued through an alias may contain some of the characteristics listed
here and thus may cause unwanted results.

Using the session manager

If the Session Manager licensed program is installed and available, you can use it by selecting Session
Manager mode on the ISPF Settings panel. For information on altering the PDF configuration table to
allow you to enter Session Manager mode, refer to z/OS ISPF Planning and Customizing.
If you select this option, any display output is displayed in the Session Manager TSOOUT stream.
Note: If GDDM/ISPF mode is active, Session Manager does not get control of the screen. GDDM/ISPF
mode is started when a GRINIT service has been issued, but a GRTERM service has not been issued. See
z/OS ISPF Services Guide for more information about these two services.
The function key definitions are not transferred to the Session Manager from ISPF. When the command
ends, the Session Manager prompts you to enter a null line to return to ISPF control and displays the TSO
Command Processor panel again when you do so.
If you do not select Session Manager mode, terminal I/O occurs as though the Session Manager were not
installed. The terminal operates in normal TSO fashion. Any communication with the command is in line-
I/O mode. When the command ends, three asterisks (***) are displayed. Press Enter to display the TSO
Command Processor panel again in full screen mode.
To interrupt a TSO command, CLIST, or REXX exec, press the PA1 key. The TSO command ends and the
TSO Command Processor panel is displayed again. If terminal input is inhibited, press the Reset key
before pressing the PA1 key. If you are in Session Manager mode, enter a null line to return to ISPF full-
screen mode.
When the TSO Command Processor panel is displayed again, the command that was just processed is
displayed to the right of the arrow. Enter another command or the END command to return to the ISPF
Primary Option Menu.
For terminals with primary and alternate screen sizes, ISPF does not check to make sure the same screen
settings are in effect when a command, CLIST, or REXX exec ends. If you call a CLIST, REXX exec, or
command that changes the screen settings, you are responsible for saving and restoring them before
control is returned to ISPF.

364 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

Chapter 9. Dialog test (option 7)

This topic describes Dialog Test, option 7 on the ISPF Primary Option Menu.
Dialog Test (option 7) provides you with facilities for testing both complete ISPF applications and ISPF
dialog parts, including functions, panels, variables, messages, tables, and skeletons. The Dialog Test
option allows you to:
• Call selection panels, command procedures, and programs
• Display panels
• Add new variables and change variable values
• Display a table's structure and status
• Display, add, modify, and delete table rows
• Browse the ISPF log
• Process dialog services
• Add, modify, and delete function and variable trace definitions
• Add, modify, and delete breakpoint definitions.
You can use TSO TEST to complement this option if you want to examine and manipulate non-ISPF
storage areas.
You usually test a dialog in one of two ways:
• Test individual dialog parts, including panels, skeletons, and messages, without calling a function or a
selection panel. Eventually, you end your test session by entering the END command on the Dialog Test
Primary Option Panel.
• Test dialog functions, including programs, commands, and selection panels, using the Functions option
(7.1). You can define traces and breakpoints before calling the function.
Any requested traces for variable usage and dialog service calls are written to the ISPF log. You can
browse the log using the Log option (7.5).
If you define a breakpoint and the function gets to it, dialog processing is suspended, and Dialog Test
displays the Breakpoint Primary Option Panel (Figure 255 on page 406). At this point, you can access and
manipulate dialog parts, such as variables, tables, and so forth. Then, if you select the Go option from the
Breakpoint Primary Option Panel, the dialog resumes processing.
When the processing is complete, you are returned to the Functions option (7.1). If you select the Cancel
option from the Breakpoint Primary Option Panel, the dialog is canceled and the first primary option panel
that you were shown during your terminal session is displayed again. For example, if the first screen
displayed when you began your session was a master application panel that is different from the ISPF
Primary Option Menu, that master application panel is displayed again.

The dialog test environment

The Dialog Test Primary Option Panel, shown in Figure 233 on page 366, follows the conventions for a
primary option panel. If you use the RETURN command from one of the selected Dialog Test options, the
Dialog Test Primary Option Panel is displayed again. If you use the END command from this panel, you
return to the ISPF Primary Option Menu.
When you enter Dialog Test from the ISPF Primary Option Menu, you enter a new user application with an
ID of ISR. When you enter Dialog Test from the ISPF primary option panel, you enter a new user
application with an ID of ISP. All options listed on the Dialog Test Primary Option Panel operate in this
context. If you call a new function using the Functions options (7.1), a SELECT service call is performed,
and the rules for the SELECT service are followed.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2019 365

 Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help
┌───────────────────────────── Dialog Test ──────────────────────────────┐ ────
│ Menu Utilities View Help │
│ ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│ Primary Option Panel │ RN
│ │
│ 1 Functions Invoke dialog functions/selection panel │
│ 2 Panels Display panels │
│ 3 Variables Display/set variable information │ SH
│ 4 Tables Display/modify table information │
│ 5 Log Browse ISPF log │
│ 6 Dialog Services Invoke dialog services │ RN
│ 7 Traces Specify trace definitions │
│ 8 Breakpoints Specify breakpoint definitions │ A
│ T Tutorial Display information about Dialog Test │ 5.5
│ X Exit Terminate dialog testing │
│ Option ===> │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F5=Rfind │
│ F6=Resize F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap F10=Actions │
⋘────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Option ===> 7
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 233. Dialog test primary option panel (ISPYXD1)

Note: You can set the application ID under which you enter the Dialog Test function using the Dialog Test
appl ID choice from the Options pull-down on the ISPF Primary Option Menu or using the Dialog Test appl
ID choice from the Test pull-down on an Edit panel.
After you begin an application under Dialog Test, you can enter the DTEST command with one of its
parameters as a quicker way to start a dialog test function. For example, if you enter DTEST 8 on the
command line, the Option 7.8 Breakpoints panel is displayed. The other parameters of the DTEST
command also match the dialog test function they perform:
1
invoke Functions panel
2
invoke Display Panel panel
3
invoke Variables panel
4
invoke Tables panel
5
display Browse Log panel
6
invoke Dialog Services panel
7
invoke Traces selection panel
8
invoke Breakpoint panel
You must use a parameter with the DTEST command, otherwise an error message appears. After you
complete the entries on whichever dialog test panel you invoke, leaving the panel returns you to the
application you were running with the new entries in place.
Dialog Test is itself a dialog and, therefore, uses dialog variables. Because it is important to allow your
dialog to operate without interference, as though in a production environment, Dialog Test accesses and
updates variables independently of your dialog variables.
All breakpoints and traces that you set in Dialog Test exist only while you remain within the Dialog Test
option.

366 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 You should always allocate the ISPF log when using Dialog Test. Do not suppress its generation by typing
0 in the "Primary pages" field that appears on the "Log Data set defaults" and "List Data set defaults"
choices from the Log/List pull-down on the ISPF Settings panel. Dialog Test writes trace data to the log
when you request it. Also, if Dialog Test finds an unexpected condition, it writes problem data to the log.
When you enter Dialog Test, you are given these ISPF facilities:
• All functions you normally get by specifying the TEST parameter on the ISPSTART command
• Logging of all severe errors, both from user dialogs and Dialog Test. This is normally done when you
specify TRACE or TRACEX on the ISPSTART command.
• Suspension of the logging of all ISPEXEC dialog service requests. Such logging normally occurs when
you specify TRACE or TRACEX on the ISPSTART command. You should use the Traces option (7.7).
These facilities become active for all logical screens when you are using split-screen mode. At the
completion of the last dialog test session (dialog test is no longer active in any logical screen), these
options will be restored to the original values established during dialog manager start-up. Optionally, by
making the appropriate selection on the ISPF Settings panel, the facilities established by dialog test will
remain in effect after the last dialog test session terminates.

Dialog test primary option panel action bar

The Dialog Test Primary Option Panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu
For more information, see the details about the Menu Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Utilities
For more information, see the details about the Utilities Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
View
Allows you to select whether the Add row, Modify row, and Display row panels are displayed in pop-up
windows and whether Dialog Services (option 7.6) are displayed in a pop-up. By displaying the panel
in a pop-up window, you can see the panel underneath and move the window. By displaying the panel
as a full-screen display, you can see more data. The setting you choose will remain until you change it.
Help
The Help pull-down provides general information about Dialog Test topics as well as information
about each available choice on the Dialog Test Primary Option panel.

Using variables
When you select the Dialog Test option from the ISPF Primary Option Menu, you are given a new function
pool, a new shared pool, and the profile pool for the application ID under which you entered Dialog Test.
When you select Dialog Test from the ISPF Primary Option Menu, you are given a new function pool, a new
shared pool, and the ISPPROF profile pool. These pools are used if you set a variable, display a panel, call
an ISPF service, and so forth. When you call a new dialog, Dialog Test uses the SELECT service, and
follows the rules for the creation of new variable pools. For example, if you call a new dialog using the
NEWPOOL option, Dialog Test creates new shared and function variable pools for you. The profile variable
pool, ISRPROF or ISPPROF, remains as it was.
If you set a dialog variable in the shared pool from a dialog running under Dialog Test and then call the
dialog again from the Command line, you cannot retrieve the value of that variable.
Dialog variables should be initialized and set in the context of the dialog's processing. A dialog's function
variable pools are created when it is called; that is, when the SELECT is done. Therefore, to set function
variables in newly created pools, you must define a breakpoint early in your dialog's processing, at a point
before the function is called.
For example, if you call a dialog with the NEWPOOL parameter, you must define a breakpoint in the dialog
before the first function is called to access that dialog's function and shared variable pools. You can

Dialog test (option 7) 367

 change the dialog's profile variable pool before calling the dialog, since a new profile variable pool is not
created.
When your dialog ends, all variable pools that were created when the dialog was called are deleted.
Note: ISPF does not support TSO global variables. You can find a severe dialog test error when testing a
dialog that refers to a global variable.

Severe error handling

If your dialog finds a severe error when it calls a dialog service, the error is handled as requested by the
dialog. The current CONTROL service ERRORS setting, CANCEL or RETURN, determines what is done. If
CANCEL is in effect, you can choose whether to continue dialog testing when the Error Message panel is
displayed.
Note: If you choose not to continue dialog testing, you return to the ISPF Primary Option Menu. The TEST
and TRACE options set by dialog test are restored to the values originally established during dialog
manager start-up. Optionally, by making the appropriate selection on the ISPF Settings panel, the
facilities established by dialog test will remain in effect after the last dialog test session terminates.
If you find a severe error when manipulating your dialog at a breakpoint, Dialog Test assumes that the
CONTROL service ERRORS setting is CANCEL. For example, if you display a panel at a breakpoint and that
panel is not found, the Error Message panel is displayed. This occurs even if your current dialog has an
ERRORS setting of RETURN.
Regardless of the ERRORS setting, all your severe errors are logged.
If Dialog Test finds a severe error during its processing, the details are logged and this message is shown
to you on an error message display:

Test severe error

Details precede this message in the ISPF log

Dialog Test errors can occur because:

• Proper ISPF libraries are not being used.
• A programming problem has been found.
• You have attempted to process Dialog Test.
• You have called a Dialog Test option without being in test mode or without calling Dialog Test first.
Browse the ISPF log to find the problem; see “Log (option 7.5)” on page 393 for more information.

Commands
You can enter ISPF primary commands on Dialog Test panels. Seven commands have special meaning
during Dialog Test operations. You enter them in the Command line of the applicable Dialog Test option
panel. These commands, and the Dialog Test options with which they function, are:

Table 25. Primary commands

Primary Command Valid Options
CANCEL • Variables (option 7.3)
• Tables (option 7.4)1
• Traces (option 7.7)2
• Breakpoints (option 7.8)

1 Valid only with Tables options 3 and 4.

2 Valid only with Traces options 1 and 2.

368 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Table 25. Primary commands (continued)
Primary Command Valid Options
END • Variables (option 7.3)
• Tables (option 7.4)3
• Traces (option 7.7) 2
• Breakpoints (option 7.8)

LOCATE • Variables (option 7.3)

• Tables (option 7.4)4
• Traces (option 7.7) 2
• Breakpoints (option 7.8)

NEXT/PREV • Tables (option 7.4)4

QUAL • Breakpoints (option 7.8)

RESUME • Breakpoints (option 7.8)

SORT • Variable (option 7.3)

Dialog Test has three line commands that have special meaning during testing operations. These
commands, and the options with which they function, are:

Table 26. Line commands

Line Command Valid Options
D (delete) • Variables (option 7.3)
• Tables (option 7.4) 1
• Traces (option 7.7) 2
• Breakpoints (option 7.8)

I (insert) • Variables (option 7.3)

• Tables (option 7.4) 1
• Traces (option 7.7) 2
• Breakpoints (option 7.8)

R (repeat) • Tables (option 7.4) 1

• Traces (option 7.7) 2
• Breakpoints (option 7.8)

When using the Dialog Test primary and line commands, you should be aware that:
• You can specify both a primary command and line commands before you press the Enter key.
• You can enter multiple line commands on the display.
• You cannot carry out a deletion if one of the included lines contains another line command.
• You can delete lines that contain an input error.

3 Valid only with Tables options 1, 3, and 4.

4 Valid only with Tables options 1 and 3.

Dialog test (option 7) 369

 • The line commands are processed in row order when you press the Enter key. Any fields changed in the
row are handled before a line command is processed.
• A primary command is handled after processing for all line commands is complete.
• As in the ISPF editor, you can specify a number with each line command to denote repetitive operation,
unless you are using the Variables option (7.3). To avoid conflict with the I (insert) line command, the
Variables option does not allow you to type a number along with the D command to delete more than
one line simultaneously. Therefore, enter a single D line command on each line you want to delete.
Unlike the ISPF editor, the Variables option does not support block deletes; however, you can enter this
command on more than one line before pressing the Enter key.

Ending the current option without saving changes

The CANCEL command ends the current option. Any changes made to the data are ignored.

Saving changes
The END command ends the current option. Any changes made to the data now take effect.

Finding a character string

The LOCATE command searches for a character string and positions a scrollable display to the next row
that contains the string. The scan starts at the end of the first row currently being displayed. A message is
displayed indicating the result of the scan.
LOCATE string
where:
string
The character string you are trying to find. If the string ends in an asterisk (*), a scan for the characters
preceding the asterisk is done. The asterisk is optional in the Variables option (option 7.3).

Displaying breakpoint qualification data

The QUAL command can only be entered from the Breakpoints pop-up window. It displays the breakpoint
qualification data.
The same breakpoint qualification data can be obtained using the Qualifications choice on the Qualify
pull-down.

Restoring the format of the Breakpoints panel

The RESUME command is entered on the Breakpoints panel when qualification parameter values are
shown. It restores the format of the Breakpoints panel. Each breakpoint that has qualification is flagged
by the characters *QUAL* in columns 75 to 80 on that line of the Breakpoints panel.

Dialog test line commands

These line commands have special meaning during testing operations:

D – deleting lines
The D command deletes one line or n lines starting with this line. The syntax is:

1
D n

If you are using the Variables option (7.3), the n operand does not apply. To avoid conflict with the I
(insert) line command, the Variables option does not allow you to type a number along with the D
command to delete more than one line simultaneously. Therefore, enter a single D line command on each
line you want to delete. You can enter this command on more than one line before pressing the Enter key.

370 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 I – inserting lines
The I command inserts one line or n lines directly after this line, with underscores and quotation marks in
the appropriate fields. The syntax is:

1
I n

R – repeating lines
The R command repeats this line once or n times. The syntax is:

1
R n

Setting a keylist for dialog test

Depending on your needs and preferences, you may wish to set a dialog test-specific keylist to enhance
productivity. To modify the default function key settings, go to the Dialog Test Primary Option Panel, type
KEYS on the Command line, and press Enter to display the pop-up window shown in Figure 234 on page
371. Or, you may perform these steps to display the pop-up:
1. Select Option 0 from the ISPF Primary Option Menu.
2. Select Keylist settings from the Function keys pull-down on the ISPF Settings panel action bar.
3. Use a slash to select the ISPTEST Keylist; then select Change from the Functions pull-down.

┌────────────────────────────── Keylist Utility ──────────────────────────────┐

│ File │
│ ────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│ ISR Keylist ISRTEST Change Row 1 to 9 of 24 │
│ │
│ Make changes and then select File action bar. │
│ │
│ Keylist Help Panel Name . . . ISRTESTH │
│ │
│ Key Definition Format Label │
│ F1 . . . HELP SHORT Help │
│ F2 . . . SPLIT LONG Split │
│ F3 . . . EXIT SHORT Exit │
│ F4 . . . EXPAND SHORT Expand │
│ F5 . . . RFIND SHORT Rfind │
│ F6 . . . RESIZE SHORT Resize │
│ F7 . . . UP LONG Backward │
│ F8 . . . DOWN LONG Forward │
│ F9 . . . SWAP LONG Swap │
│ │
│ Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward │
│ F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel │
⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 234. Keylist change panel (ISPKLUCH)

On the Keylist Change panel, you can reassign existing function keys by typing over the information in the
data fields, or create a new function key assignment to suit your needs. For example, you could assign the
GO command to F4 if you typically issue GO many times during a dialog test.
If you press F3 or select Save and Exit from the File pull-down, the values that you have assigned will be
valid when you return to Dialog Test. If you select Cancel from the File pull-down, the fields return to their
original values.

Dialog test (option 7) 371

Functions (option 7.1)

Functions (option 7.1)

The Functions option (7.1) allows you to test a dialog function without having to build supporting code or
panels. Dialog functions include panels, command procedures, and programs. The name of the dialog
function and the parameters you can pass are the same as those that you can specify from a dialog
function when you call the SELECT service. When you press the Enter key, a SELECT service is called.
If you call a new function or selection panel at a breakpoint, the previous function or selection panel is
suspended and the new one is processed. When the new activity finishes, the Invoke Dialog Function/
Selection Panel is displayed. The old activity resumes when you enter the END command. When the
function that was called originally finishes processing, the Invoke Dialog Function/Selection Panel is
displayed again.
When you select the Functions option, the scrollable panel shown in Figure 235 on page 372 is displayed
to allow you to specify the dialog function that you want to test. Press F8=Forward to display the rest of
the panel.

Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help

┌─────────────────────────────── Dialog Test ────────────────────────────────┐
│ Menu Save Utilities Help │
│ ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│ Invoke Dialog Function/Selection Panel │
│ More: + │
│ Invoke selection panel: │
│ PANEL . . │
│ OPT . . . │
│ │
│ │
│ Invoke command: │
│ CMD . . . │
│ │
│ LANG . . . (APL, CREX, or blank) │
│ MODE . . . (LINE, FSCR, or blank) │
│ │
│ Invoke program: │
│ PGM . . . │
│ PARM . . . │
│ Command ===> │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F5=Rfind │
│ F6=Resize F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap F10=Actions │
⋘────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 235. Invoke Dialog Function/Selection panel (ISPYFP)

There are two alternate Invoke Dialog Function/Selection panels, ISPYFPA and ISPYFPB. ISPYFPA is
formatted with the most often used fields at the top of the scrollable area. ISPYFPB is similar, but it has a
selection field for panel, command, program, or request selection. Unlike panel ISPYFP and ISPYFPA,
when you use ISPYFPB the panel, command, program, and request selection fields can all contain values.
You can specify one of the alternate panels using the ISPF Configuration utility. See z/OS ISPF Planning
and Customizing for more information.
One of the advantages of placing dialog panels in pop-up windows is that you can move the pop-up within
the 3270 physical display area to reveal portions of the underlying panel.
See z/OS ISPF Dialog Developer's Guide and Reference for instructions on how to move a pop-up window.

Invoke dialog function/selection panel action bar

The Invoke Dialog Function/Selection Panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu
For more information, see the details about the Menu Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.

372 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Functions (option 7.1)

Save
Allows you to specify that you want to save or clear input field information when you exit this panel.
Utilities
For more information, see the details about the Utilities Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Help
The Help pull-down offers you these choices:
1
General
2
Invoke Function Panel
3
Usage Notes
4
General Dialog Test

Invoke dialog panel fields

To call a function, you must specify a value for either the PANEL, CMD, or PGM field. You cannot specify
more than one of these fields.
The fields on the Invoke Dialog Function/Selection Panel function as follows:
Invoke selection panel:
Use these fields to call a selection panel:
PANEL
The name of the selection panel to be displayed.
OPT
An optional parameter indicating the first selection option that must be valid from the specified
selection panel. This input field continues onto the next line on the panel.
Invoke command:
Use these fields to call a command:
CMD
The name of a command procedure written in CLIST or REXX, or any TSO command, to be called
as a dialog function. You can include command parameters.
Use the percent sign (%) as a prefix symbol to tell ISPF to remove the Invoke Dialog Function/
Selection Panel and use the full screen to display the results of a CLIST or REXX exec call. A
complete CLIST or REXX exec call is indicated by three asterisks. Press the Enter key to return to
the Invoke Dialog Function/Selection Panel.
If you omit the % prefix, ISPF interprets the command as a TSO command, using line mode to
display the command results at the bottom of the Invoke Dialog Function/Selection Panel.
LANG
An optional parameter used to specify APL or CREX.
Type APL in this field to specify the use of the APL language. If this is your first APL request during
the session, the command specified in the CMD keyword is called and an APL2® environment is
established. If this is not your first APL request during this session, the string specified after the
CMD keyword is passed to the APL2 workspace and processed.
Type CREX in this field to specify that the command specified in the CMD keyword is a REXX exec
that has been compiled and link-edited into a load module, and that a CLIST/REXX function pool is
to be used rather than an ISPF module function pool. LANG(CREX) is optional if the compiled
REXX has been link-edited to include any of the stubs EAGSTCE, EAGSTCPP, or EAGSTMP.

Dialog test (option 7) 373

Functions (option 7.1)

See z/OS ISPF Dialog Developer's Guide and Reference for more information about Compiled REXX
processing.
To specify any language other than APL or Compiled REXX, leave this field blank.
MODE
An optional parameter that overrides:
• Automatic line mode entry, caused when a TSO command is entered.
• Automatic full-screen display caused by the % CLIST or REXX exec prefix. However, it does not
prevent ISPF from calling the command as a CLIST or REXX exec.
If you leave this field blank, the % prefix has its normal effect. The valid values for this field are:
LINE
Used to enter line mode when calling a CLIST or REXX exec.
FSCR
Used to enter full-screen mode when calling a TSO command.
Invoke program:
Use these fields to call a program:
PGM
The name of a program to be called as a dialog function.
PARM
Optional parameters to be passed to the program. This input field continues onto the next line on
the panel.
MODE
An optional parameter used to tell ISPF whether to display the program results in line mode or
full-screen mode. If you leave this field blank, ISPF uses line mode as the default. The valid values
for this field are:
LINE
Used to enter line mode when calling a program. Results of the program are displayed at the
bottom of the Invoke Dialog Function/Selection Panel.
FSCR
Used to enter full-screen mode when calling a program. ISPF removes the Invoke Dialog
Function/Selection Panel and uses the full screen to display the program results. Three
asterisks show program completion. Press the Enter key to return to the Invoke Dialog
Function/Selection Panel.
Invoke request:
Use this field to call a workstation command:
WSCMD
A fully qualified workstation command with any of its parameters.
Options:
Use a slash to select these options:
NEWAPPL
Indication of whether a new application is being called. Select this option if the function is a new
application.
ID
A 1- to 4-character ID for a new application. If you call a new application and leave the ID field
blank, the default ID of ISP is used. Note that the ID determines the names of the profile and the
command table to be used for the application.
NEWPOOL
Indication of whether a new shared variable pool is to be created. Select this option if you want to
create a new shared variable pool; however, the selection is ignored if NEWAPPL is selected.

374 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Panels (option 7.2)

PASSLIB
Shows that the current set of application-level ISPF libraries, if any sets exist, is to be used by the
application being selected. You can select PASSLIB only if you also select NEWAPPL.
Note: For more information about the PASSLIB field, see the description of the SELECT service in
z/OS ISPF Services Guide.

Panels (option 7.2)

When you are developing panels, you can use the Panels option (7.2) to test newly created or changed
panels and messages without having to build supporting code to display them. Any variables referred to
and set during panel processing are written to the current function variable pool.
When you select the Panels option (7.2), the panel in Figure 236 on page 375 is displayed.

Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help

┌───────────────────── Dialog Test ─────────────────────┐ ───────────────────
│ Menu Save Utilities Help │
│ ──────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│ Display Panel │ er ID . : USERID
│ │ me. . . : 17:23
│ Panel name . . . . . . . │ rminal. : 3278
│ Message id . . . . . . . (Optional) │ reen. . : 1
│ Cursor field . . . . . . (Optional) │ nguage. : ENGLISH
│ Cursor position . . . . . (Optional) │ pl ID . : ISR
│ Message pop-up field . . (Optional) │ O logon : ISPF
│ │ O prefix: USERID
│ Enter "/" to select option │ stem ID : MVS8
│ Display in window │ S acct. : IBMGSA
│ │ lease . : ISPF 5.5
│ │
│ Command ===> │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand │
│ F5=Rfind F6=Resize F7=Backward F8=Forward │
⋘───────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Option ===> 7
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 236. Display panel (ISPYP1)

Display panel action bar

The Display Panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu
For more information, see the details about the Menu Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Save
Allows you to specify that you want to save or clear input field information when you exit this panel.
Utilities
For more information, see the details about the Utilities Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Help
The Help pull-down offers you these choices:
1
General
2
Display Panel
3
Usage Notes

Dialog test (option 7) 375

Panels (option 7.2)

4
General Dialog Test

Display panel fields

The fields on the Display Panel function as follows:
Panel name
The name of the panel to be displayed.
Message id
The identifier of a message to be displayed on the panel.
Cursor field
The name of the field on the panel where the cursor is to be positioned.
Cursor position
An integer specifying the position in the field where the cursor is to be placed.
Message pop-up field
The name of a panel field the pop-up message window should be placed adjacent to. Note that the
message definition determines if the message will appear in a pop-up window.
Display in window
A slash ( /) specifies that the panel is to be displayed in a pop-up window.
If you specify a panel name, entries in "Message id", "Cursor field", "Cursor Position", "Message pop-up
field", and the Display in window option are optional.
With the exception of the Display in window option, these are the same parameters that a dialog function
can specify when calling the DISPLAY service. Selecting the Display in window field is the functional
equivalent to the dialog issuing an ADDPOP service before the DISPLAY service.
When the panel is displayed, the )INIT and )PROC sections of the panel are processed in the same way
the DISPLAY service would process them.
If you want to set variables before you display the panel, you can use the Variables option (7.3) to do so.
When you display the panel, you can type in new data or type over existing data, and then verify the
variables by using the Variables option (7.3) again. Data that you type on the panel is retained until you
change it, leave Dialog Test, or reset the function pool.
Figure 237 on page 377 shows the panel that is displayed if you specify message ID ISPD241 and,
optionally, a cursor position without identifying a panel name. The long message portion of the identified
message is displayed when you enter the HELP command on that panel.

376 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Variables (Option 7.3)

Invalid option

This panel is used to display your specified message.

┌────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ The option that was entered was not valid. │
⋘────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Command ===>
F1=HELP F2= F3=END F4=DATASETS F5=FIND F6=CHANGE
F9=SWAP F10=LEFT F11=RIGHT F12=SUBMIT

Figure 237. Message display panel (ISPYP2)

When you enter the END command from the panel being tested, the Display Panel reappears on the
screen.

Variables (Option 7.3)

The Variables option (7.3) allows you to:
• Display all the ISPF variables defined in the dialog application you are testing.
• Change the value of a variable by typing over it, unless the variable has an N (non-modifiable) attribute.
• Define new variables by inserting lines or by changing the name or pool of a listed variable.
• Delete variable names and blank lines.

When you select this option, you can scroll a display showing all the current variables for the dialog being
tested, as shown in Figure 238 on page 378.
In addition to scrolling capability, you can also increase the size of the Variables pop-up window to fill the
entire 3270 physical display area using the RESIZE command. The initial RESIZE command increases the
pop-up window to its maximum size, and the subsequent RESIZE reduces the window to its original size.

Dialog test (option 7) 377

Variables (Option 7.3)

Menu Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Variables - Application: ISR Row 1 to 9 of 707

Add, delete, and change variables. Underscores need not be blanked.

Enter END command to finalize changes, CANCEL command to end without
changes.

Current scrollable width of variables is: 57

Variable P A Value
----+----1----+----2----+----3----+----4----+----5----+--
Z S N
ZACCTNUM S N IBMGSA
ZAPLCNT S N 0000
ZAPPLID S N ISR
ZBDMXCNT S N 000000000
ZCFGCMPD S N 2001/11/22
ZCFGCMPT S N
ZCFGKSRC S N
ZCFGLVL S N 480R8001

Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F5=Rfind F6=Resize
F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 238. Variables panel (ISPYVPN)

The Variables display is controlled by the selection you make in the View pull-down on the Dialog Test
Primary Option Panel action bar:
1
Display Variables in window. Variables are displayed in a pop-up window.
2
Display Variables full-screen. Variables are displayed full-screen.
Note: The current setting is shown as an unavailable choice; that is, it is displayed in blue (the default)
with an asterisk as the first digit of the selection number (if you are running in GUI mode, the choice is
grayed).

Variables panel action bar

The Variables Panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu
For more information, see the details about the Menu Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Utilities
For more information, see the details about the Utilities Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Help
The Help pull-down offers you these choices:
1
General Variables
2
Definitions
3
Variables Panel
4
Manipulating Variables
5
Primary Commands
6
Line Commands

378 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Variables (Option 7.3)

7
Usage Notes
8
General Dialog Test

Variables panel fields

Each line of the display represents a variable and contains a line command area. The fields on the
Variables panel function as follows:
Variable
Name of the variable. The variable name is alphanumeric, with the first character being either
alphabetic or one of the special characters $, #, or @. The variable name cannot be longer than eight
characters. All alphabetic characters are converted to uppercase when you press the Enter key. The
Variable field is required.
P
Pool that contains the variable; a required 1-character field, where:
V
Function pool; the variable was defined with the VDEFINE service.
I
Function pool; a variable that was created by a CLIST or REXX exec, or by using the Variables
option. This is an implicit variable, which was not explicitly defined by using the VDEFINE service.
S
Shared variable pool.
P
Profile variable pool.
A
Attributes of the variable, a non-modifiable 1-character field, where:
N
Non-modifiable variable. Some system-reserved variables are not modifiable.
H
Non-modifiable variable containing hexadecimal data. Some system-reserved variables are not
modifiable.
X
Variable containing hexadecimal data.
T
Truncated variable value. The actual value is longer than the 2048 characters that you can display
on the expanded panel.
If you change a line showing a truncated value, only the data shown on the display is stored as the
new value.
Value
Value of the variable. The value can be up to 2048 characters in length. Each value is scrollable, by
placing the cursor over the value and using the LEFT and RIGHT functions keys. The EXPAND function
key can be used to display a full screen of data and display hexadecimal values.

Variables commands
The Variables option (7.3) uses the CANCEL, END, and LOCATE commands, and the I (insert) and D
(delete) Dialog Test line commands described in “Commands” on page 368. You can change the displayed
sort order using the SORT command. SORT with no operands sorts the list by variable pools then by
variable name. SORT NAME sorts the list by variable name and then by variable pool. SORT VALUE sorts
the list by the displayed Value field. The LOCATE command can be used to search for a specific variable.
LOCATE accepts as an operand the name, or first letters of the name of a variable. If the name is not

Dialog test (option 7) 379

Variables (Option 7.3)

found, the list is positioned near the closest match. You can use the RFIND key to continue searching
other variable pools.
Normally, the variable pools are updated with the data from the display when you use the END command
to leave the option.

Manipulating variables
The rows of the display are sorted in this order:
1. By pool (function, then shared, then profile)
2. By function pool type (V, then I)
3. Alphabetically by variable name within each pool.
Insertions are left where they are typed on the display. Changes to the display are processed when you
press the Enter key. Updating of the variable pools occurs when you enter the END command.

Creating new variables

You can create new dialog variables, but you cannot create two variables with the same name in the same
variable pool.
To create a new variable, you can do one of two things:
• Use the I line command to insert a new row, and then type the variable name, pool, and value on the
new line. For each field, move the cursor to the start of the field and type new information. The
underscores are pad characters; you do not need to blank them out.
• Type over the name of an existing variable, its pool indicator, or both. This creates a new variable and
resets the old variable's value to nulls.
If you change a truncated value, the portion that is not displayed is lost. The new variable value consists
only of the visible portion on the screen.
New function pool variables are given an I (implicit) attribute and a CHAR format. If you type F in the
attribute field, ISPF changes it to I.
By using the second method, you can interchange the values of two or more variables by simply changing
their names. For example, you can interchange the values for variables A and B by changing the variable
name A to B and name B to A, and then pressing the Enter key.

Deleting variables
Any dialog variable in the shared and profile pools can be deleted, unless it has an N attribute. Though you
cannot delete a variable from the function pool, you can set its value to blanks.
To delete a variable, use the D line command. However, to avoid conflict with the I (insert) line command,
the Variables option does not allow you to type a number along with the D command to delete more than
one line simultaneously. Therefore, enter a single D line command on each line you want to delete. You
can type this command on more than one line before pressing the Enter key.

Variables usage notes

When using the Variables option (7.3), you should be aware of:
Input errors
Correct any errors before leaving a display. If you cannot correct the errors, use the CANCEL
command.
Length and format errors in variables defined with the VDEFINE service are detected when you enter
the END command. If ISPF finds such an error, it prompts you to fix the variable value.
Test mode
Variable manipulations carried out under Dialog Test at a breakpoint are considered an extension of
your dialog and, as such, are handled in user mode. Dialog variables, table data, and service return

380 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Tables (option 7.4)

codes that you introduce, delete, or change are treated as though your dialog had made those
changes.
Variable life
Profile variables that you create remain in your profile pool from one Dialog Test session to another.
Shared and function variables exist only for the duration of Dialog Test.
Split-screen mode
In split-screen mode, two logical screens can share a profile variable pool. Since the Variables option
(7.3) takes a snapshot of the variables, any change to a profile variable on one screen is not
immediately reflected on the other screen. To get the latest changes, select the Variables option (7.3)
again. Also, when one profile variable is changed on two logical screens using split-screen mode, the
changed profile variable on the screen where the last END command was entered takes precedence.
Variable value
Variables defined with the VDEFINE service as non-character are displayed in converted form. Any
changes made to the variable's value should conform to the defined format.
Do not change them using the hexadecimal representation. A format or length error causes a message
to be displayed when you use the END command. When a VDEFINE error occurs, a panel identifies the
data and its value and describes the error. You must then correct the error and press the Enter key. If
you create a new variable by changing the pool indicator of an existing variable defined as non-
character, the new variable has character (CHAR) format.
Hexadecimal data
Hexadecimal data that cannot be displayed is converted to displayable characters or typed using the
form:

X'nnnnnnnn'

where:
n
An integer 0 through 9 or an alphabetic character A through F. There must be an even number of
characters within the quotation marks.
DBCS data
A variable defined as DBCS by the VDEFINE service or displayed through the field with
FORMAT(DBCS) specified in the test environment is displayed using the form:

'¬[DBDBDB]'

where:
[ and ]
Represent the SO (shift-out) and SI (shift-in) characters, respectively.
If you type a DBCS value in this format on the Variables panel, only the DBCS characters are stored.

Tables (option 7.4)

The Tables option (7.4) allows you to examine and manipulate the rows of a table, and to display table
structure and status. When you select this option, the panel in Figure 239 on page 382 is displayed, on
which you show the table function you want and the parameters needed to identify the table.

Dialog test (option 7) 381

Tables (option 7.4)

┌──────────────────────────────── Dialog Test ────────────────────────────────┐

│ Menu Utilities View Help │
│ ────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│ Tables │
│ More: + │
│ 1 Display row 3 Modify row 5 Display structure │
│ 2 Delete row 4 Add row 6 Display status │
│ │
│ Table Name . . Open tables . . (NOWRITE or WRITE or │
│ blank for no TBOPEN) │
│ Row identification: Current row . : │
│ By row number . . * (* = current row) │
│ Variable Value (Search for row if row number blank) │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ DBCS column specification: │
│ Option ===> │
│ F1=HELP F2= F3=END F4=DATASETS F5=FIND │
│ F6=CHANGE F9=SWAP F10=LEFT F11=RIGHT F12=SUBMIT │
⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 239. Tables panel (ISPYTPI)

Tables panel action bar

The Tables panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu
For more information, see the details about the Menu Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Utilities
For more information, see the details about the Utilities Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
View
Allows you to select whether the Add row, Modify row, and Display row panels are displayed in pop-up
windows. By displaying the panel in a pop-up window, you can see the panel underneath and move
the window. By displaying the panel as a full-screen display, you can see more data. The setting you
choose will remain in effect until you change it.
Help
The Help pull-down offers you these choices:
1
General Tables
2
Definitions
3
Tables Panel
4
Display Row
5
Delete Row
6
Modify Row
7
Add Row
8
Display Structure

382 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Tables (option 7.4)

9
Display Status
10
Usage Notes
11
View Action Bar
12
General Dialog Test

Tables panel fields

The fields on the Tables panel function as follows:
Table Name
The name of the table in which you are interested. The table must be open for all, except the Display
Status option (6) of the Tables option (7.4). The table can be opened using the Dialog Services option
(7.6) or can be opened automatically by specifying the Open tables field WRITE/NOWRITE option.
Open tables
The table must be open for all but the Display Status option (6) of the Tables option (7.4). Specifying
WRITE or NOWRITE will cause Tables option to automatically open the table in the respective mode. A
blank field directs Tables to bypass the automatic open. If Tables automatically opens the table, it will
be closed automatically when the Tables option is terminated. This is done with a TBCLOSE service
which will cause any table changes to be preserved if the table were automatically opened with the
WRITE option.
This field is ignored if the table has been opened outside of the Tables (7.4) option.
Row identification
Identify a row, either directly by row number or indirectly by specifying table variable names and their
values as search operands.
Current row
The position number of the current row after you have identified a table. This field is not modifiable.
By row number
The position number of the table row that you want, or, if you are adding a row, you can use:
TOP
Makes the new row first in the table.
BOTTOM
Makes the new row last in the table.
Variable
The names of variables whose values are to be used to search the table for a row with matching
contents. You insert them by typing over the underscores beneath this heading.
Value
The value to be used in the search, up to 54 characters. For an abbreviated search, type the beginning
characters followed by an asterisk.
You can specify a DBCS value in the form:

¬[DBDBDB]

where:
[ and ]
Represent the SO (shift-out) and SI (shift-in) characters, respectively. For an abbreviated search,
type a 2-byte asterisk (*) at the end of the DBCS value. For example:

¬[DBDB**]

where ** represents the 2-byte asterisk character.

Dialog test (option 7) 383

Tables (option 7.4)

DBCS column specification

The variable names of the values that are DBCS data. The value of the variable is displayed using the
form:

¬[DBDBDB]

If you type a DBCS value in this format on the Modify Row panel or the Add Row panel, only the DBCS
characters are stored, regardless of the DBCS column specification.
Option
The number of one of the functions displayed on the Tables panel.
Note: The option names (for example, Display row) are point-and-shoot fields; however, if an option is
already specified at the Option prompt, it takes precedence over your point-and-shoot selection.
Once you specify a table name, it is retained until you change it or until you leave Dialog Test.
For the Display row (1), Delete row (2), Modify row (3), and Add row (4) options of the Tables option (7.4),
you must identify the row you want to display, delete, modify, or add. To do this, you can specify a row
number in the "By row number" field, or you can use the Variable and Value fields to specify a list of
search operands. To show the current row, leave the asterisk in the "By row number" field. If you specify
both a row number and a search operand, the row number is used and the search operand is ignored.
The current row pointer in the table can be changed only at your request or by your dialog.
The list of search operands consists of variable names and values that allow you to specify the values that
specific variables have in a row. You can specify the complete value, abbreviate the value with an asterisk
to find a row containing a variable beginning with specified characters, or leave the row blank. The search
begins with the row following the current row. If a row matching the search operand is not found, the
current row pointer is set to the top. You can repeat the search, if necessary.

Tables panel options

Subsequent topics describe the options at the top of the Tables panel.

1—display row
You can use the Display row option to display the contents of an existing row in an open table. When you
select the Display row option, perform these tasks on the Tables panel:
• Specify the name of a table in the Table Name field. If the table is not open, specify NOWRITE or WRITE
in the "Open tables" field.
• Specify a row number or a search operand list to identify a row.
Note: Use the View action bar choice on the Tables panel to specify whether this display is to be in a pop-
up or full-screen.
When you press Enter, you are shown the table row data on a display that you can scroll (Figure 240 on
page 385). The pop-up window can also be resized using the RESIZE command. In the figure, the
variables constitute one table row.

384 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Tables (option 7.4)

┌──────────────────────────────── Dialog Test ────────────────────────────────┐

│ Menu Utilities Help │
│ ────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│ Display row Table ISPKEYS row 1 Row 1 to 13 of 74 │
│ │
│ Variable T A Value │
│ KEYLISTN K ISPTEST │
│ KEY1DEF N HELP │
│ KEY1LAB N Help │
│ KEY1ATR N SHORT │
│ KEY2DEF N SPLIT │
│ KEY2LAB N Split │
│ KEY2ATR N LONG │
│ KEY3DEF N EXIT │
│ KEY3LAB N Exit │
│ KEY3ATR N SHORT │
│ KEY4DEF N │
│ KEY4LAB N │
│ KEY4ATR N │
│ │
│ Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F5=Rfind │
│ F6=Resize F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap F10=Actions │
⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 240. Display row panel (ISPYTPD)

Each line on the display shows:

Variable
Variable name
T
Type of variable:
K
Key variable.
N
Name variable; non-key.
S
Save (extension) variable.
A
Attribute of each variable:
T
Truncated to 58 characters for display.
Value
The first 58 characters of the variable value.

Display row commands

The Display Row option uses the END and LOCATE commands described in “Commands” on page 368.

2—delete row
You can use the Delete row option to remove an existing row from an open table. When you select the
Delete row option, perform these tasks on the Tables panel:
• Specify the name of a table in the Table Name field. If the table is not open, specify NOWRITE or WRITE
in the "Open tables" field.
• Specify a row number or a search operand list to identify a row.
When you press Enter, a panel is displayed (Figure 241 on page 386) to allow you to confirm the delete
request.

Dialog test (option 7) 385

Tables (option 7.4)

┌──────────────────────────────── Dialog Test ────────────────────────────────┐

│ Menu Utilities View Help │
│ ─ ┌─────────────── Confirm Table Row Delete ────────────────┐ ──────────── │
│ I │ ISPYTPCD │ │
│ │ │ More: + │
│ 1 │ Table name : ISPKEYS │ ructure │
│ 2 │ │ atus │
│ │ Row number : 1 │ │
│ T │ │ r WRITE or │
│ │ │ no TBOPEN) │
│ R │ Press ENTER key to confirm delete. │ │
│ B │ │ │
│ │ Press END key to cancel delete. │ lank) │
│ │ Command ===> │ │
│ │ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward │ │
│ │ F8=Forward F9=Swap F12=Cancel │ │
│ ⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘ │
│ │
│ │
│ DBCS column specification: │
│ Option ===> 2 │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F5=Rfind │
│ F6=Resize F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap F10=Actions │
⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 241. Confirm table row delete panel (ISPYTPCD)

The fields on the panel are:

Table name
Name of an open table
Row number
Number of the row to be deleted.
Press Enter to delete the row, or enter the END or CANCEL command to cancel the deletion.

3—modify row
You can use the Modify row option to change the contents of an existing row of an open table. When you
select the Modify row option, perform these tasks on the Tables panel:
• Specify the name of a table in the Table Name field. If the table is not open, specify NOWRITE or WRITE
in the "Open tables" field.
• Specify a row number or a search operand list to identify a row.
Note: Use the View action bar choice on the Tables panel to specify whether this display is to be in a pop-
up or full-screen.
When you press Enter, a display that you can scroll (Figure 242 on page 387) is shown. The pop-up
window can also be resized using the RESIZE command.

386 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Tables (option 7.4)

┌──────────────────────────────── Dialog Test ────────────────────────────────┐

│ Menu Utilities Help │
│ ────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│ Modify row Table ISPKEYS row 1 Row 1 to 10 of 74 │
│ │
│ Modify variable values and savenames. Underscores need not be blanked. │
│ Enter END command to finalize changes. │
│ │
│ Variable T A Value │
│ KEYLISTN K ISPTEST │
│ KEY1DEF N HELP │
│ KEY1LAB N Help │
│ KEY1ATR N SHORT │
│ KEY2DEF N SPLIT │
│ KEY2LAB N Split │
│ KEY2ATR N LONG │
│ KEY3DEF N EXIT │
│ KEY3LAB N Exit │
│ KEY3ATR N SHORT │
│ │
│ Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F5=Rfind │
│ F6=Resize F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap F10=Actions │
⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 242. Modify row panel (ISPYTPM)

Each line on the panel represents a variable in row 6 of the table and contains a line command field and
these fields:
Variable
Variable name, modifiable only for save variables.
T
Type of variable, non-modifiable:
K
Key variable.
N
Name variable; non-key.
S
Save (extension) variable.
A
Attribute of each variable, non-modifiable:
T
Truncated to 2048 characters for display.
Value
Value of the variable, up to 2048 characters.
Type in new values or change the current values for the key, name, and save variables in the Value
column. Enter new save variables by typing over the underscores in the Name column with the variable
names and specifying the desired values. The underscores are pad characters; you do not need to blank
them out.
When using the Modify row option, be aware that:
• If the table has keys, the values for the keys in the added row must be different from those in the
existing rows when you leave the Modify row option. Otherwise, a message is displayed and the row is
displayed again so you can change the keys.
• If the table was sorted using the TBSORT dialog service and a sort field is modified, the row's position in
the table can change to preserve the search order.
• You cannot change the variable name for a key variable or name variable; if you do, an error message is
displayed and the original name is restored.
• You cannot delete a key or name variable and its value from the display or table row.

Dialog test (option 7) 387

Tables (option 7.4)

• If you delete a save variable, assume that the variable no longer exists in this row.
• If more than one variable entry has the same name, all instances of that variable are assigned the value
of the last occurrence of the variable; that is, the occurrence closest to the bottom of a display that you
can scroll.
• Blank save names are ignored and do not need to be deleted, even if data is left in the value.
• Hexadecimal data that usually cannot be displayed is converted to characters that can be displayed or
is typed by using the form:

X'nnnnnnnn'

where:
n
An integer 0-9 or an alphabetic character A-F. There must be an even number of characters within
the quotation marks.
• Variables defined with the VDEFINE service as non-character are shown in converted form; do not
change them by using the hexadecimal representation. A format or length error causes a message to be
displayed when you use the END command.
• When you leave the Modify row option by using the END command, the row is replaced, and the
message Row modified is issued.

Modify row commands

The Modify row option uses the CANCEL, END, and LOCATE commands, and the D (delete), I (insert), and
R (repeat) Dialog Test line commands described in “Commands” on page 368. Inserted and repeated
lines always have a type of S, because only save variables can be added to (or deleted from) a row of an
existing table.

4—add row
You can use the Add row option to add a new row after a selected row of an opened table. When you
select the Add row option, perform these tasks on the Tables panel:
• Specify the name of a table in the Table Name field. If the table is not open, specify NOWRITE or WRITE
in the "Open tables" field.
• Specify a row number or a search operand list to identify a row.
Note: Use the View action bar choice on the Tables panel to specify whether this display is to be in a pop-
up or full-screen.

388 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Tables (option 7.4)

┌──────────────────────────────── Dialog Test ────────────────────────────────┐

│ Menu Utilities Help │
│ ────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│ Add row Table ISPKEYS after row 1 Row 1 to 10 of 73 │
│ │
│ Add variable values and savenames. Underscores need not be blanked. │
│ Enter END command to finalize changes. │
│ │
│ Variable T A Value │
│ KEYLISTN K │
│ KEY1DEF N │
│ KEY1LAB N │
│ KEY1ATR N │
│ KEY2DEF N │
│ KEY2LAB N │
│ KEY2ATR N │
│ KEY3DEF N │
│ KEY3LAB N │
│ KEY3ATR N │
│ │
│ Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F5=Rfind │
│ F6=Resize F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap F10=Actions │
⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 243. Add row panel (ISPYTPA)

When you press Enter, a scrollable display is shown (Figure 243 on page 389), containing all the key and
name variables in the table. The pop-up window can also be resized using the RESIZE command.
Each row of the display contains a line command field and these fields:
Variable
Variable name.
T
Type of variable, non-modifiable:
K
Key variable.
N
Name variable; non-key.
S
Save (extension) variable.
A
Attribute of each variable. This attribute is non-modifiable and is not used for this option.
Value
Space for the variable value to be added, up to 2048 characters.
Type the values for the key and name variables in the Value column, which is originally initialized to all
nulls. You cannot change the names of the key and name variables because they were established when
the table was created.
You can enter save variables, identified as TYPE S, by typing over the underscores with the save variable
names and specifying the desired values. The underscores are pad characters; you do not need to blank
them out.
You can add a row with no values to the table, but you are asked to confirm such an action to guard
against inadvertent use of the END command.
When using the Add row option, be aware that:
• The position of the new row in the table depends on whether the table was previously sorted using the
TBSORT dialog service. If the table was sorted, the new row is placed in sort order; if it has not been
sorted, the new row is placed after the row you specified.
• You cannot delete a key or name variable and its value from the display or table row.

Dialog test (option 7) 389

Tables (option 7.4)

• You cannot change the variable name for a key or name variable; if you do, an error message is
displayed and the original name is restored.
• If more than one variable entry has the same name, all instances of that variable are assigned the value
of the last occurrence of the variable; that is, the occurrence closest to the bottom of the display that
you can scroll.
• If the table has keys, the values for the keys in the added row must be different from those in all the
existing rows when you leave the Add Row option. Otherwise, a message is displayed and the row is
displayed again so you can change the keys.
• Blank save names are ignored and do not need to be deleted, even if data is left in the value.
• Hexadecimal data that usually cannot be displayed is converted to characters that can be displayed or
is typed by using the form:

X'nnnnnnnn'

where:
n
An integer 0-9 or an alphabetic character A-F. There must be an even number of characters within
the quotation marks.
• Variables defined with the VDEFINE service as non-character are shown in converted form; do not
change them by using the hexadecimal representation. A format or length error causes an error
message to be displayed when you use the END command.

Add row commands

The Add row option uses the CANCEL, END, and LOCATE commands, and the D (delete), I (insert), and R
(repeat) Dialog Test line commands described in “Commands” on page 368. Inserted and repeated lines
always have a type of S, because only save variables can be added to (or deleted from) a row of an
existing table.

5—display structure
When you select the Display structure option on the Tables panel, you are shown a display of the table
structure for the table specified in the Table Name field. You can scroll this display (Figure 244 on page
390) using the scroll commands. The table name appears in the panel header.

┌──────────────────────────────── Dialog Test ────────────────────────────────┐

│ Menu Utilities Help │
│ ────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│ ISPYTPSR Structure of Table ISPKEYS Row 1 to 8 of 17 │
│ │
│ Number of keys . . : 1 Number of rows . . . : 7 │
│ Number of names . : 72 Current row pointer . : 1 │
│ KEYS: KEYLISTN │
│ │
│ NAMES: KEY1DEF KEY1LAB KEY1ATR KEY2DEF KEY2LAB │
│ KEY2ATR KEY3DEF KEY3LAB KEY3ATR KEY4DEF │
│ KEY4LAB KEY4ATR KEY5DEF KEY5LAB KEY5ATR │
│ KEY6DEF KEY6LAB KEY6ATR KEY7DEF KEY7LAB │
│ KEY7ATR KEY8DEF KEY8LAB KEY8ATR KEY9DEF │
│ KEY9LAB KEY9ATR KEY10DEF KEY10LAB KEY10ATR │
│ │
│ Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE │
│ F1=HELP F2= F3=END F4=DATASETS F5=FIND │
│ F6=CHANGE F9=SWAP F10=LEFT F11=RIGHT F12=SUBMIT │
⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Option ===> 7
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 244. Structure of table panel (ISPYTPSR)

The display contains these fields:

390 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Tables (option 7.4)

Number of keys
Number of key variables in a row.
Number of names
Number of name variables in a row.
Number of rows
Number of rows currently in the table.
Current row pointer
Current row pointer value.
KEYS
A list of the names of all the key variables.
NAMES
A list of the names of all the name variables.

Display structure command

The KEYS and NAMES lists can be scrolled, and you can use the LOCATE command to find a specific
variable name. See “Finding a character string” on page 370 for information about its use.

6—display status
If you select the Display status option from the Tables panel, one of two data information panels is
displayed for the table specified in the Table Name field. The information reflects all operations using the
specified table, including those done at your request by the Tables options under Dialog Test.

Table not open

If the table is not open for your user ID, you are shown a Status of Table panel (Figure 245 on page 391)
with the value NOT OPEN in the "Status for this screen" field.

┌──────────────────────────────── Dialog Test ────────────────────────────────┐

│ Menu Utilities Help │
│ ────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│ Status of Table ISPKEYS │
│ More: + │
│ Status for this screen : NOT OPEN Date created : 1995/01/17 │
│ Table available : YES Time created : 13:47:06 │
│ Last date modified : 2002/06/03 │
│ Last time modified : 22:10:26 │
│ Last modified by : JPHILP │
│ Original row count : 1 │
│ Current row count : 7 │
│ Modified row count : 7 │
│ Update count : 83 │
│ │
│ Virtual storage │
│ Command ===> │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F5=Rfind │
│ F6=Resize F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap F10=Actions │
⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Option ===> 7
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 245. Status of table panel with table not open (ISPYTPS1)

The panel contains these fields:

Status for this screen
Shows that the table is NOT OPEN for this logical screen.
Table available
YES or NO; whether you can open the table.

Dialog test (option 7) 391

Tables (option 7.4)

Date created
Date the table was created; shown in national format.
Time created
Time the table was created.
Last date modified
Date the table was last modified; shown in national format.
Last time modified
Time the table was last modified.
Last modified by
User ID of the user who last changed the table.
Original row count
The number of rows that were added to a newly created table before closing the table for the first
time.
Current row count
The number of rows currently in the table.
Modified row count
The number of rows in the table that have been changed at least once. A row that has been added to
an existing table is also considered a changed row.
Update count
Number of times the table has been modified. One or more updates during any table open or close
sequence increments this counter by one.
Virtual storage
The number of bytes of virtual storage required by the table when it is open.
The Modify row option on the Tables panel allows you to change a key of a keyed table by adding the new
row and deleting the old row. The row counts thus reflect this processing when changing a key value.

Table open
If the table is open for your user ID, you are shown a Status of Table panel (Figure 246 on page 392) with
the value OPEN in the Status for this screen field.

┌──────────────────────────────── Dialog Test ────────────────────────────────┐

│ Menu Utilities Help │
│ ────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│ Status of Table ISPKEYS │
│ More: + │
│ Status for this screen : OPEN Date created . . . : 1995/01/17 │
│ Open option . . . . . . : NOWRITE Time created . . . : 13:47:06 │
│ Table on disk . . . . . : YES Last date modified. : 2002/06/03 │
│ Last table service . . : TBQUERY Last time modified. : 22:10:26 │
│ Last service return code: 00 Last modified by . : JPHILP │
│ Current row pointer . . : TOP Original row count. : 1 │
│ Current row count . : 7 │
│ Modified row count. : 7 │
│ Update count . . . : 83 │
│ │
│ Virtual storage │
│ Command ===> │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F5=Rfind │
│ F6=Resize F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap F10=Actions │
⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Option ===> 7
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 246. Status of table panel with table open (ISPYTPS1)

This panel contains these fields:

392 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Log (option 7.5)

Status for this screen

Shows that the table is OPEN for this logical screen.
Open option
Option used to open the table; this value can be WRITE, NOWRITE, SHR WRITE, or SHR NOWRITE.
Table on disk
Whether the table has been saved on disk; this value can be YES or NO.
Last table service
Name of the last table service called.
Last service return code
Last table services return code.
Current row pointer
Current position in the table.
Date created
Date the table was created; shown in national format.
Time created
Time the table was created.
Last date modified
Date the table was last modified; shown in national format.
Last time modified
Time the table was last modified.
Last modified by
User ID of the user who last changed the table.
Original row count
The number of rows that were added to a newly created table before closing the table for the first
time.
Current row count
The number of rows currently in the table.
Modified row count
The number of rows in the table that have been changed at least once. A row that has been added to
an existing table is also considered a changed row.
Update count
Number of times the table has been modified. One or more updates during any table open or close
sequence increments this counter by one.
Virtual storage
The number of bytes of virtual storage required by the table.
The Modify row option on the Tables panel allows you to change a key of a keyed table by adding the new
row and deleting the old row. The row counts thus reflect this processing when changing a key value.

Log (option 7.5)

The Log option (7.5) allows you to display and browse data recorded in the ISPF transaction log, as shown
in Figure 247 on page 394.

Dialog test (option 7) 393

Log (option 7.5)

Browse log - USERID.SPFLOG2.LIST Line 00000000 Col 007 086

********************************* Top of Data **********************************
Time *** ISPF transaction log *** Userid:

09:03 Start of ISPF Log - - - - Session # 16 --------------------------------

10:15 TSO - Command - - SUBMIT NOTIFY
10:37 ***** Dialog Error ***** - Application(ISR); Function Module (ISR@USER);
10:37 Line from panel: - )BODY EXPAND(//) WIDTH(&ZWIDTH) CMD(ZCMD)
10:37 Panel 'ISPYLP1' error - Invalid WIDTH value, (must be numeric chars,
******************************** Bottom of Data ********************************

Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE

F1=HELP F2= F3=END F4=DATASETS F5=FIND F6=CHANGE
F9=SWAP F10=LEFT F11=RIGHT F12=SUBMIT

Figure 247. ISPF transaction log (ISPYLP1)

You can use all the Browse commands, except BROWSE, while looking at the ISPF log.

ISPF transaction log not available

Sometimes the log is not available for browsing. This can occur when:
• The log data set is empty.
• The log data set was not created for this session because 0 was entered in the "Primary pages" field on
the Log Set Defaults and List Set Defaults pop-ups, which can be reached by selecting Option 0 from the
ISPF Primary Option Menu and then selecting the Log Data set defaults and List Data set defaults
choices from the Log/List pull-down.
• No data has been written to the log during this session, and although the log data set exists and is not
empty, you did not end the last ISPF session normally; for example, an abend can have ended the
session. You can browse the log if you take an action that causes a log entry to be written.
• The log data set was previously allocated with a disposition of OLD. It must be allocated with a
disposition of MOD.
• The log data set has been previously allocated to SYSOUT.

Trace output in ispf log

This trace output is written to the ISPF log:
• Trace header entries
• Function trace entries
• Variable trace entries.
Each type of entry follows the format of other log entries: a short summary on the left, and a detailed
entry on the right.

Trace header entries

The first line of trace data is a trace header that identifies the trace and shows the current application ID,
the current function, and the current screen. For split-screen mode, the original screen is 1 and the screen
generated by the SPLIT command is 2. The summary section of the header entry identifies the entry as a
dialog trace. The trace header entry is written during the test session whenever a function or variable
trace entry is to be written for an application, function, or screen that differs from the last.

394 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Dialog services (option 7.6)

For example, a trace of logical screen 1 of function TESTF1 in application ISR would place this line in the
ISPF log:

DIALOG TRACE ---- - APPLICATION(ISR) FUNCTION(TESTF1) SCREEN(1)

Function trace entries

A pair of function trace entries, a BEGIN entry and an END entry, is generated during a function trace for
each traced dialog service that is called. A service can be called from a user dialog that is currently
processing, or from a Dialog Test action for the user. The summary portion of each of these entries shows
the name of the dialog service, whether it is the beginning or the end of its processing, and whether it was
called indirectly from a Dialog Test panel. If the word TEST does not appear, the user dialog called the
service directly. For END entries, the service return code is shown on a second line.
The detailed section of the log entries contains an image of the service call and the parameters used to
call that service, using two lines if necessary. For example:

DISPLAY .. BEGIN ... TEST - DISPLAY PANEL(XYZ)

⋮
DISPLAY .. END.. ... TEST - DISPLAY PANEL(XYZ)
..RETURN CODE (0)

There can be many log entries between the begin and end entries. For example, any active variable traces
can cause log entries during a SELECT trace.
Note these aspects about the service call image:
• The image is truncated after the second line.
• ISPEXEC calls are shown as typed in the dialog.
• ISPLINK and ISPLNK calls (except for the ISREDIT service) are displayed with their parameter values
separated by commas. Name-lists are shown as typed in the dialog, in either string or structure format.
Structure format includes the count, element length, and list of names. For a variable services
parameter whose context is defined by the name-list parameter on the service call, the first four bytes
of the parameter value are displayed in hexadecimal format (X'nnnnnnnn').
• Dialog Test calls are shown using the command call format without the ISPEXEC prefix.

Variable trace entries

Two variable trace entry lines are generated for each variable trace log entry. The variable can be referred
to or set by a user dialog directly or indirectly by a dialog service, or explicitly set by a Dialog Test option
for a user. The summary parts of these entry lines identify the trace. Line one shows the name of the
variable, the pool that contains it (F for function, S for shared, P for profile), and an indicator (TEST) if a
Dialog Test option set the value. Line two shows the operation done for the variable (GET, PUT, or CHG)
and the name of the dialog service that did the operation for non-TEST entries.
The current value of the variable is printed in the detail section of the log entry and can span two lines. For
example:

LIB1.... POOL(P) .... - VALUE(FLAG)

...GET by EDIT -

The value is truncated after the second line.

If the variable value contains characters that cannot be displayed, the value is displayed in hexadecimal
format (X'nnnnnnnn').

Dialog services (option 7.6)

The Dialog Services option (7.6) allows you to call a dialog service by entering the service call with or
without the ISPEXEC characters.
Figure 248 on page 396 shows the Invoke Dialog Service panel.

Dialog test (option 7) 395

Dialog services (option 7.6)

Menu List Mode Functions Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Invoke Dialog Service

Enter dialog service and its parameters:

===>

Place cursor on choice and press enter to RETRIEVE command.

=> rempop
=> addpop
=> ispexec display
=> ispexec display panel(sample)
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>

Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F5=Rfind F6=Resize
F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 248. Invoke dialog service panel (ISPYS1)

On this panel, if you want to display panel XYZ, enter:

===> DISPLAY PANEL(XYZ)

or

===> ISPEXEC DISPLAY PANEL(XYZ)

The service is called when you press the Enter key. You are informed of the service's completion and
return code.
You can call any dialog service that is valid in the command environment except CONTROL at a breakpoint
or before calling a function.
The Invoke Dialog Service panel has a saved command area (the bottom portion of the screen) that
contains a list of up to 10 commands that you have saved. These commands are point-and-shoot fields.
The mode you specify from the Mode pull-down menu on the action bar determines what happens when
you select a command.

Invoke dialog service panel action bar

The Invoke Dialog Service panel action bar choices function as follows:
Note: The Invoke Dialog Service panel action bar contains three pull-down choices that let you control the
saved command area.
• List
• Mode
• Functions.
Menu
For more information, see the details about the Menu Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
List
The List pull-down offers you these choices:

396 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Dialog services (option 7.6)

Note: The current setting is shown as an unavailable choice; that is, it is displayed in blue (the default)
with an asterisk as the first digit of the selection number (if you are running in GUI mode, the choice
will be grayed).
Update On
Makes the list of commands in the saved command area live; that is, new commands are
appended to the list automatically.
Update Off
Makes the list of commands in the saved command area static; that is, new commands are not
appended to the list automatically.
Mode
The Mode pull-down offers you these choices:
Note: The current setting is shown as an unavailable choice; that is, it is displayed in blue (the default)
with an asterisk as the first digit of the selection number (if you are running in GUI mode, the choice
will be grayed).
Retrieve
Allows commands to be retrieved from the saved command area and placed on the TSO Command
Entry field (==>) so that you can edit them before they are executed. This mode is the default.
Execute
Allows commands to be retrieved from the saved command area and executed in one step.
Delete
Allows you to delete commands from the saved command area without executing the commands.
Place the cursor on the command to be deleted and press Enter. The command will be blanked
out.
Functions
The Functions pull-down offers you this choice:
Note: The choice is unavailable when you initially enter the panel and after you compress the list; that
is, it will display in blue (the default) with an asterisk as the first digit of the selection number (if you
are running in GUI mode, the choice will be grayed).
Compress List
Compresses the saved command area by removing deleted entries.
Utilities
For more information, see the details about the Utilities Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Help
The Help pull-down offers you these choices:
1
General
2
General Dialog Test

Special display panel

If you issue the DISPLAY service call with only a message parameter, or with no parameter at all, the
Special Display Panel is shown (Figure 249 on page 398).

Dialog test (option 7) 397

Traces (option 7.7)

┌──────────────────────────────── Dialog Test ────────────────────────────────┐

│ Special Display Panel │
│ │
│ This panel is used for two special DISPLAY conditions: │
│ │
│ 1. When DISPLAY is invoked without a panel name. │
│ │
│ 2. When TBDISPL is invoked without a panel name. All of the other │
│ parameters are ignored. │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ Command ===> │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F9=Swap F12=Cancel │
⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 249. Special display panel (ISPYS2)

Traces (option 7.7)

The Traces option (7.7) allows you to define, change, and delete trace specifications. You can trace
processed dialog services, except for the VPUT or VGET service issued from a panel, and dialog variables
to which are referred during dialog processing. Trace data is placed in the transaction log, where you can
browse it by using the Log option (7.5) or print it when you leave ISPF. You can also print the log data set
during an ISPF session by using the ISPF LOG command.
Since tracing can degrade dialog performance and create large amounts of output, you should be careful
in setting the scope of trace definitions.
When you select this option, a selection panel is displayed (Figure 250 on page 398) on which you can
show the type of trace you want to define.

Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help

─ ┌──────────────────────── Dialog Test ─────────────────────────┐ ───────────
│ Menu Utilities Help │
│ ─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
0 │ Traces │ : SUEBURN
1 │ │ : 11:00
2 │ 1 Function Traces Monitor dialog service calls │ : 3278
3 │ 2 Variable Traces Monitor dialog variable usage │ : 1
4 │ │ : ENGLISH
5 │ Option ===> │ : ISR
6 │ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand │ : ISPF
7 │ F5=Rfind F6=Resize F7=Backward F8=Forward │ : SUEBURN
9 ⋘──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘ : MVS8
10 SCLM SW Configuration Library Manager MVS acct. : IBMGSA
11 Workplace ISPF Object/Action Workplace Release . : ISPF 5.9
12 z/OS System z/OS system programmer applications
13 z/OS User z/OS user applications

Enter X to Terminate using Log/List defaults

Option ===> 7
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 250. Traces panel (ISPYRI1)

Subsequent topics describe the options shown at the top of the Traces panel.

398 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Traces (option 7.7)

1—function traces
The Function Traces option on the Traces panel is used to establish criteria for recording the names of
dialog service calls, the service parameters, and return code in the ISPF log. If either a dialog or Dialog
Test processing causes a service call, that call is recorded in the trace. An example of Dialog Test
processing that causes a service call is the use of the Panels option (7.2) to display a panel. Whenever a
new application or function causes data to be recorded, a header is placed in the trace.
When you select the Function Traces option, you are shown a panel that you can scroll (Figure 251 on
page 399). The pop-up window can also be resized using the RESIZE command. The panel lists all
currently defined function traces.
You can add, delete, and change function trace definitions by using this panel, either before calling a
function or at a breakpoint.

┌────────────────────────────── Function Traces ──────────────────────────────┐

│ Menu Utilities Help │
│ ────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│ Row 1 to 7 of 13 │
│ │
│ Add, delete, and change traces. Underscores need not be blanked. │
│ Enter END command to finalize changes. │
│ │
│ Function Active Dialog services to be traced │
│ (Required) (YES,NO) (No entry=all) │
│ (No entry=YES) ("OR" is assumed between names) │
│ │
│ ALL NO │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F5=Rfind │
│ F6=Resize F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap F10=Actions │
⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 251. Function traces panel (ISPYRFP)

Each line defines a function trace, showing a line command area and these fields:
Function
The name of the user function that should contain the trace, or ALL to trace every dialog function.
Initially, ALL is presented on the display but is not started. Change the NO to a YES in the Active
column to start such a trace. If you want to trace a function whose name is ALL, enclose the name in
single quotes to distinguish it; that is, type 'ALL', not ALL.
Active
Whether the trace is to be active now:
YES
The trace is currently active.
NO
The trace is currently not active.
Blank
The trace is currently active.
Dialog services to be traced
Names of dialog services to be traced. No entry in this field shows all calls to dialog services for the
function are to be traced.
All function traces exist until you leave Dialog Test, or until you delete them from this panel. Enter new
information by typing over the existing data. The underscores are pad characters to show the starting and

Dialog test (option 7) 399

Traces (option 7.7)

ending positions for each field; you do not need to blank them out. You can create several function traces
before you press the Enter key.
During dialog processing, to determine whether the criteria for a function trace have been met, Dialog Test
processes a logical AND of the Function, Active, and Dialog services fields specified for that function trace.
Dialog Test also processes a logical OR within the Dialog services field to determine whether a particular
dialog service has been matched. Therefore, if you want more than one trace for a function, you should
create multiple rows.

Function traces commands

The Function Traces option uses the CANCEL, END, and LOCATE commands, and the D (delete), I (insert),
and R (repeat) Dialog Test line commands described in “Commands” on page 368.

2—variable traces
The Variable Traces option on the Traces panel is used to establish criteria for recording variable usage. A
variable's usage is recorded if an ISPF service is directly asked to operate on the variable (such as VGET,
VPUT, and VCOPY), or if an ISPF service is indirectly asked to operate on the variable (such as DISPLAY).
Variables changed under the Variables option (7.3) are also recorded if the trace specifications are met.
When you select the Variable Traces option, you are shown a display that you can scroll (Figure 252 on
page 400). The pop-up window can also be resized using the RESIZE command. The display lists all
currently defined variable traces. You can add, delete, and change variable trace definitions at a
breakpoint, or by using this panel before calling a function.

┌────────────────────────────── Variable Traces ──────────────────────────────┐

│ Menu Utilities Help │
│ ────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│ Row 1 to 8 of 13 │
│ │
│ Add, delete, and change traces. Underscores need not be blanked. │
│ Enter END command to finalize changes. │
│ │
│ Variable Pool Operation Function Active │
│ (Required) (No entry=all) (GET,PUT,CHG) (No entry=all) (YES,NO) │
│ (No entry=all) (No entry=YES) │
│ ALL NO │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F5=Rfind │
│ F6=Resize F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap F10=Actions │
⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 252. Variable traces panel (ISPYRVP)

Each line defines a variable trace, showing a line command area and these fields:
Variable
Name of the variable to be traced, or ALL to show tracing of all variables. Initially, ALL is presented on
the display but is not started. Change the NO in the Active column to YES to start such a trace. If you
want to trace a variable whose name is ALL, enclose that name in single quotes to distinguish it; that
is, type 'ALL', not ALL.
Pool
Pool of interest for variable tracing:
F
Function variable pool.

400 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Breakpoints (option 7.8)

S
Shared variable pool.
P
Profile variable pool.
Blank
All pools.
Operation
Type of variable reference to trace:
GET
Accesses to the variable's value.
PUT
Stores to the variable's value.
CHG
Changes to the variable's value.
Blank
All references to variable are traced.
Function
If there is no entry, this variable is traced for all functions.
Active
Indication of whether the trace is to be active:
YES
The trace is currently active.
NO
The trace is currently not active.
Blank
The trace is currently active.
All variable trace definitions exist until you leave Dialog Test, or until you delete them from this panel.
Enter new information by typing over the existing data. The underscores are pad characters to show the
start and end of each field; you do not need to blank them out. You can create several variable traces
before you press the Enter key.
During dialog processing, to determine whether the criteria for a variable trace have been met, Dialog Test
processes a logical AND of the Variable, Pool, Operation, Function, and Active fields specified for that
variable trace. Therefore, if you want more than one trace for a variable, you should create multiple rows.

Variable traces commands

The Variable Traces option uses the CANCEL, END, and LOCATE commands, and the D (delete), I (insert),
and R (repeat) Dialog Test line commands described in “Commands” on page 368.

Breakpoints (option 7.8)

A breakpoint is a location at which the processing of your dialog is suspended so that you can use Dialog
Test facilities. The Breakpoints option (7.8) allows you to show where such temporary suspensions should
occur. At a breakpoint, you can examine and manipulate dialog data such as tables and variables. You can
also specify new test conditions, such as traces and other breakpoints.
Breakpoints are located immediately before a dialog service receives control or after it relinquishes
control. Breakpoint definitions cause special handling within the ISPLINK, ISPLNK, or ISPEXEC interfaces
to dialog services; no user dialog code is modified. When the criteria for a breakpoint are satisfied, your
dialog is suspended. You can then do any of the functions shown on the Breakpoint Primary Option Panel.
You cannot use as a breakpoint the VPUT or VGET service issued from a panel, nor will breakpoints occur

Dialog test (option 7) 401

Breakpoints (option 7.8)

for selections from a menu (selection) panel. Breakpoints occur only for dialog service calls that use the
ISPLINK, ISPLNK, or ISPEXEC interfaces.
Along with several menu bar items common across ISPF Version 4.1, the Breakpoints panel has added
the Qualify pull-down. You can now display the qualification parameter values from the Breakpoints panel
in two ways:
• Enter the QUAL primary command
• Select the Qualifications choice from the Qualify pull-down.
The Function and Active columns are overlaid with a column of data titled Qualification Parameter Values;
this column was logically off the screen to the right of the first Breakpoints panel. To resume the format of
the Breakpoints panel, you can either:
• Enter the RESUME primary command, or
• Select the Breakpoints choice from the Qualify pull-down

Specifying breakpoints
When you select the Breakpoints option, you are shown a display that you can scroll (Figure 253 on page
402). The pop-up window can also be resized using the RESIZE command. The display lists all currently
defined breakpoints for this session. You can use this panel to add, delete, or change breakpoint
definitions, either before calling a function or at a breakpoint.

┌──────────────────────────────── Dialog Test ────────────────────────────────┐

│ Menu Qualify Utilities Help │
│ ─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│ Breakpoints Row 1 to 5 of 13 │
│ │
│ Add, delete, and change breakpoints. Underscores need not be blanked. │
│ Enter END command to finalize changes. │
│ │
│ Service When Function Active │
│ (Required) (BEFORE,AFTER,Rnn) (No entry=all) (YES,NO) │
│ (No entry=all) (No entry=YES) │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F5=Rfind │
│ F6=Resize F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap F10=Actions │
⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 253. Breakpoints panel (ISPYBP1)

Breakpoints panel action bar

The Breakpoints panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu
For more information, see the details about the Menu Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Qualify
Displays the Qualification parameter values field on the Breakpoints panel so that you can further
constrain the conditions under which a breakpoint is to occur.
Utilities
For more information, see the details about the Utilities Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.

402 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Breakpoints (option 7.8)

Help
The Help pull-down offers you these choices:
1
General
2
Definitions
3
Breakpoints Panel
4
Qualification Panel
5
Line Commands
6
Primary Commands
7
Usage Notes
8
General Dialog Test

Breakpoints panel fields

Each line defines a breakpoint and includes a line command area and these fields:
Service
Name of the dialog service at which to interrupt dialog processing. This field is required.
When
Indication of when the breakpoint should occur:
BEFORE
Before the service receives control.
AFTER
After the service finishes processing.
Rnn
After the service finishes processing, but only if the return code is the integer nn.
Blank
Before and after service processing.
Function
The program function or command function that must be processing for the breakpoint to be taken.
No entry in this field shows that the breakpoint can occur for all functions.
Active
Indication of whether the breakpoint is to be active now:
YES
It is currently active.
NO
It is currently not active.
Blank
It is currently active.
*QUAL*
If present at the end of a row, shows that qualification data exists for the breakpoint. This field is non-
modifiable. See “Qualification parameter values” on page 404 for additional information.

Dialog test (option 7) 403

Breakpoints (option 7.8)

All input fields contain underscores. Empty lines are added to the first display to fill up the screen. If you
delete all the lines used for defining breakpoints, the display is automatically refreshed with enough
empty lines to fill the screen again.
All breakpoints exist until you end or cancel your Dialog Test session, or until you delete them from this
panel. Enter new information by typing over the existing data. The underscores are pad characters to
show the starting and ending positions for each field; you do not need to blank them out. You can create
several breakpoints before you press the Enter key.

Breakpoints commands
From the Breakpoints panel, you can use the CANCEL, END, LOCATE, QUAL, and RESUME commands, and
the D (delete), I (insert), and R (repeat) Dialog Test line commands described in “Commands” on page
368.

Qualification parameter values

A different part of the Breakpoints panel allows you to further constrain the conditions under which a
breakpoint is to occur by entering qualification parameter values. On this part of the panel, you can list
parameter data with which the named service must have been called.
The Breakpoints panel with the Qualification parameter values field is displayed (Figure 254 on page 404)
if you enter the QUAL primary command on the first part of the Breakpoints panel or if you select the
Qualifications choice from the Qualify pull-down. The Function and Active columns are overlaid with a
column of data titled Qualification parameter values; this column was logically off the screen to the right
of the first Breakpoints panel. To resume the format of the Breakpoints panel, use the RESUME primary
command or select the Breakpoints choice from the Qualify pull-down.

┌──────────────────────────────── Dialog Test ────────────────────────────────┐

│ Menu Qualify Utilities Help │
│ ─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│ Breakpoints Row 1 to 5 of 13 │
│ │
│ Add, delete, and change breakpoints. Underscores need not be blanked. │
│ Enter END command to finalize changes. │
│ │
│ Service When Qualification parameter values │
│ (Required) (BEFORE,AFTER,Rnn) (No entry=none) │
│ (No entry=all) ("AND" is assumed between values) │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Expand F5=Rfind │
│ F6=Resize F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap F10=Actions │
⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 254. Breakpoints panel with qualification parameter values (ISPYBP2)

The lines on the Breakpoints panel with qualification parameter values correspond to the lines on the first
Breakpoints panel; “Specifying breakpoints” on page 402 describes the Service and When fields. In the
Qualification parameter values field, for all services except SELECT, you can enter any combination of:
• One or more parameter values, separated by blanks, that the dialog passes to the service. No order is
implied by the specification of the parameter values.
For example, if you want a breakpoint to occur when message ABC0001 is included on a DISPLAY
service request, specify ABC0001. If the breakpoint should occur only when message ABC0001 and
panel XYZ are both included, specify ABC0001 XYZ.

404 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Breakpoints (option 7.8)

• One or more command call keywords, separated by blanks, that have values that are not blank when a
dialog calls the service. For ISPLINK or ISPLNK calls, the keywords matching the calling sequence
parameter positions are used.
For example, if you want a breakpoint to occur whenever the DISPLAY service is called with a message,
then specify MSG.
For ISPF's SELECT and ISREDIT services, you can enter one or more parameter strings that would be
entered on these two service calls. A parameter string is a series of characters delimited by a blank, a
comma, a single quotation mark, or a left or right parenthesis.
For example, if a SELECT call is:

SELECT PGM(ABC) PARM(1 2 3 5 '6'),

then all or any of these strings can be used: SELECT, PGM, ABC, 1, 2, 3, 5, 6.
For a breakpoint to be taken, all qualification data listed must be matched.
All line commands and change capabilities are still available on the Breakpoints panel with qualification
parameter values.
During dialog processing, to determine whether the criteria for a breakpoint have been met, Dialog Test
processes a logical AND of the Service, When, Function, Active, and Qualification fields specified for that
breakpoint. Therefore, if you want more than one breakpoint for an ISPF service, you should create
multiple rows.
When you use the Breakpoints option (7.8), be aware of these items:
Qualification
If you plan to qualify several breakpoints, it can be more efficient to specify all breakpoint data on the
Breakpoints panel with qualification parameter values.
END command
You can use the END primary command from either the first Breakpoints panel or the Breakpoints
panel with qualification parameter values.
Input errors
You must correct input errors before leaving any display using the END, QUAL, or RESUME command.
You can use the CANCEL command to end the Breakpoints option, even if input errors remain on the
display.
Syntax checking
A dialog service call must pass a basic syntax check before a breakpoint is honored.
Control display
If any CONTROL service settings for DISPLAY LINE or DISPLAY SM (Session Manager) were in effect
before the breakpoint, such settings are lost.

Finding a breakpoint
If you call a dialog function or selection panel and find a breakpoint, the Breakpoint Primary Option Panel
is displayed. Figure 255 on page 406 shows this selection panel at a breakpoint just after the ISPF
DISPLAY service was called while processing the TEST function in application PAY.

Dialog test (option 7) 405

Breakpoints (option 7.8)

┌──────────────────────────────── Dialog Test ────────────────────────────────┐

│ Menu Utilities Help │
│ ────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│ Breakpoint Primary Option Panel - BEFORE VDEFINE End of field │
│ │
│ 1 Functions Invoke dialog functions/selection panel │
│ 2 Panels Display panels │
│ 3 Variables Display/set variable information │
│ 4 Tables Display/modify table information │
│ 5 Log Browse ISPF log │
│ 6 Dialog Services Invoke dialog services │
│ 7 Traces Specify trace definitions │
│ 8 Breakpoints Specify breakpoint definitions │
│ T Tutorial Display information about Dialog Test │
│ G Go Continue execution from breakpoint │
│ C Cancel Cancel dialog testing │
│ │
│ Current status: │
│ Application . : PAY Function . : TEST Return Code . . 8 │
│ Breakpoint: │
│ FVR96 ISPFVR97 ISPFVR98 ISPFVR99 ISPFVR00,X'C1C2C3C4',X'C3C8C1D9',4,LIST ) │
│ < │
│ Option ===> Scroll ===> PAGE │
│ F1=HELP F2= F3=END F4=DATASETS F5=FIND │
│ F6=CHANGE F9=SWAP F10=LEFT F11=RIGHT F12=SUBMIT │
⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 255. Breakpoint Primary Option panel (ISPYXM1)

Like the Dialog Test Primary Option Panel, the Breakpoint Primary Option Panel allows you to use the
RETURN command from any one of the selected test options to display the Breakpoint Primary Option
Panel again. At the Breakpoint Primary Option Panel, the END and RETURN commands have no effect. You
must use the Go option (G) to end processing at this breakpoint and continue processing the dialog being
tested, or the Cancel option (C) to cancel the Dialog Test option (7). This protects against inadvertent loss
of data.
The Breakpoint Primary Option Panel contains all the options of the Dialog Test Primary Option Panel
except Exit (7.x) and, as such, presents all but one of the Dialog Test functions to you.
This panel also contains two options not shown on the Dialog Test Primary Option Panel: Go (G) and
Cancel (C). When a breakpoint occurs, these options allow you to continue processing or stop processing,
respectively:
G
The Go option continues dialog processing from a breakpoint. The user dialog resumes processing
from the point at which it was suspended.
C
The Cancel option ends dialog testing and displays the first primary option panel you displayed at the
beginning of your ISPF session again. All trace and breakpoint definitions are lost when you leave
Dialog Test.
When a user dialog finds a breakpoint, the current dialog environment is saved. When you select the Go
option, the environment is restored, except that:
• If you change variable, table, and file tailoring data at a breakpoint, these actions are an extension of the
suspended dialog; it is as though the dialog had taken all the actions itself during processing.
• If you change the service return code on the Breakpoint Primary Option Panel, the new return code is
passed back to the dialog as though the service had set the new return code itself.
• If you process the PANELID command at the breakpoint, the last setting for displaying panel identifiers
is retained.
• If any CONTROL service settings for DISPLAY LINE or DISPLAY SM (Session Manager) were in effect
before the breakpoint, such settings are lost.
Note that the manipulation of one dialog part can cause a change to another dialog part. For example, if a
panel is displayed, variables can be set.
All trace and breakpoint definitions are lost if you select the Cancel option.

406 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Tutorial (option 7.T)

The Breakpoint Primary Option Panel also displays this information:

AFTER or BEFORE
An indication of whether the dialog has been suspended after or before the service has processed.
Service Name
The name of the service at which the dialog has been suspended. In Figure 255 on page 406, the
service name is DISPLAY.
Current status:
The application's current status when the breakpoint occurred. These fields show this status:
Application
The application identifier of the suspended user dialog.
Function
The program or command name of the suspended user dialog.
Return code
The dialog service return code. This field is displayed only if the breakpoint occurs after the dialog
service has processed. The Return code field is modifiable; its value is passed back to the dialog
(as the service's) when you select the Go option. This helps test dialog error handling.
Breakpoint
One scrollable line showing an image of the dialog service call. Place the cursor over the image
and use LEFT, RIGHT, and EXPAND functions to scroll the area. < and > appear below the line to
indicate in which direction more data may be available. A maximum of 2048 characters may be
displayed.
ISPEXEC calls are shown as typed.
ISPLINK (ISPLNK) calls are displayed with their parameter values separated by commas. Name-
lists are shown as typed in the dialog, in string format or in structure format. Structure format
includes the count, element length, and list of names. For variable services parameters whose
context is defined by the name-list parameter on the service call (for example, the variable value
areas for a VDEFINE), the first four bytes of the parameter value are displayed in hexadecimal
format (X'nnnnnnnn').
ISPEXEC calls from a program are the same as ISPEXEC calls from a command except that
ISPEXEC is not displayed.

Tutorial (option 7.T)

The Tutorial option (7.T) allows you to display information about the Dialog Test facilities. Figure 256 on
page 408 shows the first panel displayed when you select the Tutorial option.

Dialog test (option 7) 407

Exit (option 7.X)

Tutorial ------------------- Dialog Test Tutorial ------------------- Tutorial

────────────────────────────
│ ISPF Dialog Test │
────────────────────────────

This tutorial provides information about the features and operation of Dialog
Test.

The Dialog Test tutorial consists of two parts: one describes the Dialog Test
option, as selected from the ISPF Primary Option Panel, and the other
describes the Dialog Test facilities available when a user dialog encounters a
"breakpoint" in its processing.

Beginning users should review the Dialog Test Option topic first.

The following topics are presented in sequence, or can be selected by number:

1 - Dialog Test Option

2 - At A User Dialog Breakpoint
------ Cur panel = ISP70000 Prev panel = ISPYXD1 Last msg = ISPYP014 ------
Option ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Resize F5=Exhelp F6=Keyshelp
F7=PrvTopic F8=NxtTopic F9=Swap F10=PrvPage F11=NxtPage F12=Cancel

Figure 256. Dialog Test Tutorial - first panel (ISP70000)

The default function key command assignments for a terminal with 12 function keys are shown at the
bottom of the screen if you enter the PFSHOW command.

Exit (option 7.X)

The Exit option (7.X) ends your Dialog Test session. All trace and breakpoint definitions are lost.

408 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 IBM products (option 9)

Chapter 10. IBM products (option 9)

Option 9 provides an interface to other IBM program development products. It displays a panel that lists
other IBM products that are supported as ISPF dialogs, as shown in Figure 257 on page 409.

Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help

┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ Additional IBM Program Development Products │
│ Option ===> │
│ │
│ 3 INFOMAN Tivoli Information Management for z/OS │
│ 4 COBOL/SF COBOL Structuring Facility │
│ 6 SDF II Screen Definition Facility II - Editors and Utilities │
│ 7 SDF II-P Screen Definition Facility II - Prototype │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward │
│ F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel │
⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Enter X to Terminate using Log/List defaults

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap

F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 257. Additional IBM Program Development Products Panel (ISRDIIS)

When you select one of these products, ISPF tries to call it. However, the only way ISPF can determine
whether a product is installed and available is to check for the existence of a single product-related panel
in the panel library concatenation. No other check is made to ensure that the product is correctly installed
or that it is completely available to you.
If the product is not installed or is unavailable, ISPF displays an informational panel that describes the
product and shows how to obtain more information.
The names of the products on this panel are point-and-shoot fields. For more information on point-and-
shoot fields, see the ISPF User Interface topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2019 409

IBM products (option 9)

410 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 SCLM (option 10)

Chapter 11. SCLM (option 10)

Option 10 gives you access to the Software Configuration and Library Manager (SCLM), which is an
extension of the ISPF library concept. You call SCLM functions by entering one of the options shown on
the panel in Figure 258 on page 411.
If SCLM does not appear on any of your menu panels or on the Menu pull-down, enter TSO SCLM on any
ISPF command line. If SCLM is available to your terminal session, the SCLM Main Menu is displayed.
For more information about SCLM, refer to z/OS ISPF Software Configuration and Library Manager Guide
and Reference.

Menu Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
SCLM Main Menu Enter option

Enter one of the following options:

1 View ISPF View or Browse data

2 Edit Create or change source data in SCLM databases
3 Utilities Perform SCLM database utility/reporting functions
4 Build Construct SCLM-controlled components
5 Promote Move components into SCLM hierarchy
6 Command Enter TSO or SCLM commands
6A Easy Cmds Easy SCLM commands via prompts
7 Sample Create or delete sample SCLM project
A SCLM Admin Maintaining SCLM administrators
X Exit Terminate SCLM

SCLM Project Control Information:

Project . . . . (Project high-level qualifier)
Alternate . . . (Project definition: defaults to project)
Group . . . . . (Defaults to TSO prefix)
Option ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 258. SCLM Main Menu (FLMDMN)

The option names on this panel are point-and-shoot fields. See the Point-and-Shoot Text Fields section of
the ISPF User Interface topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I for more information.

SCLM Main Menu action bar

The SCLM Main Menu panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu
For more information, see the details about the Menu Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface
topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Utilities
For more information, see details about the Utilities Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User Interface topic
in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I.
Help
The Help pull-down provides general information about SCLM topics as well as information about
each available choice on the SCLM Main Menu.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2019 411

SCLM (option 10)

SCLM overview
SCLM is a library facility that supports projects in developing complex software applications. It does this
by providing software configuration and library management support. SCLM supports the software
development cycle of an application from the program design phase to release of the final product.
SCLM allows designers and programmers to define the architecture of an application (how the
components fit together) and ensures that the architecture definition is followed by automatically
controlling, maintaining, and tracking software components. By automatically enforcing guidelines and
procedures for developing software, SCLM enhances software quality and improves programmer
productivity. For complete information on using SCLM, refer to z/OS ISPF Software Configuration and
Library Manager Guide and Reference.
SCLM addresses these software configuration and library management issues:
• Ensures that two programmers are not working on the same component at the same time.
• Allows users to integrate components only at the correct time and only by using the correct procedure.
• Logs and tracks software changes.
• Provides application integrity; all of the software components used to produce the final product are
available, but controlled.
• Documents the interfaces between the software components.
SCLM provides these facilities for automating software configuration and library management tasks:
Project Definition
Establishes the database.
Edit
Uses the ISPF editor to create and modify the software components.
Build
Integrates the software components.
Promote
Moves software components through the library hierarchy.
Utilities
Maintain the database.
Reports
Generate information about the build and promote activities, and about the contents of the database.
Interactive dialogs, batch interfaces, and callable services provide access to the functions and capabilities
of SCLM. These functions support the routine use of SCLM by:
• Allowing programmers to use the ISPF editor to create and modify software components
• Providing automated draw down and lockout functions without requiring special customizing to suit a
particular installation.

412 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Workplace (Option 11)

Chapter 12. ISPF object/action workplace (option 11)

Option 11 gives you access to the ISPF Object/Action Workplace. The Workplace combines many of the
ISPF functions onto one object-action interface. The idea of object-action is to specify an object (such as
an ISPF library, data set name, or workstation file) and then specify an action to perform upon it. You can
specify any of these objects:
• An ISPF Library—a cataloged partitioned data set (PDS) with a three-level data set name in the
project.group.type format.
• A partitioned or sequential data set.
• A VSAM data set for use with the data set actions allocate, delete, or information.
• A DSLIST level for data set list actions, for example, 'YOURID.*' for all data sets beginning with YOURID.
• A workstation file name for use with the actions edit or view.
• A volume serial number for uncataloged data sets to use with actions to retrieve volume information,
print volume information, build a DSLIST based on a volume serial number, or as a filter for a DSLIST
level.
• Personal data set lists or reference lists for use with action DL (DSLIST) only.
Additionally, Workplace provides ISPF Referral list fields to enable object selection through retrieval from
personal lists (pre-packaged lists of data sets which you create) or reference lists (lists of recently
referenced data sets which ISPF creates).
You can select an action by making a choice on an action bar or by using a command. Eighty-five ISPF
functions are available as workplace actions.
There is a fast path system command for starting the Workplace. Type ISPFWORK on any ISPF command
line and you are taken to the Workplace entry panel.
You can display the Workplace in GUI mode as well as standard mode. See “Workstation connection” on
page 54 for information about how to start GUI mode for ISPF. All of the screens that appear in associated
topics are shown in their standard mode.

Selecting objects
The first step in using the Workplace to perform ISPF functions is to specify the particular object that you
want to perform an action on, for example, a sequential data set 'YOURID.SOURCE.DATA'. Object
specification takes place on the Workplace entry panel.

Workplace entry panel

When you first enter the Workplace, the entry panel that appears is called ISPF Workplace. It is possible
to display this panel in two distinct modes, called views: the Library View or the Data Set View.
The Library View panel has the words "Library View" as a heading just above the referral lists in the lower
portion of the screen. This view enables you to work with ISPF library concatenations and library lists.
The Data Set View panel has the words "Data Set View" as a heading just above the referral lists in the
lower portion of the screen. This view enables you to work with data set lists, sequential files, or single
partitioned data sets. You can choose to work with either entry panel view by using the command
LISTVIEW, or the function key ChgView (F11) to toggle between the two panels.

Library view
You use the Library View to work with a ISPF library concatenations. The panel that appears in Figure 259
on page 414 is the Library View entry panel for the Workplace.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2019 413

Workplace (Option 11)

File View Options Space SuperC Test Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Smart Action ISPF Workplace

ISPF Library
Project . . .
Group . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type . . . . . SOURCE
Member . . . . (Blank or pattern for member action list)

┌───────────────── ISPF Referral lists for object selection ─────────────────┐

│ Library View Action #1-8=Retrieve Entry DL=DSLIST /=Open List │
│ MYLIST . . . MANUAL DUMMY DATA 02/07/08 11:36 │
│ REFLIST . . . Last 8 referenced libraries -------- ----- │
************************* End of ISPF Referral lists *************************

Action ===> Scroll ===> PAGE

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Settings F5=PrvObj F6=PrvAct
F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap F10=Actions F11=ChgView F12=Cancel

Figure 259. Workplace entry panel - library view (ISRWORK1)

When using this Workplace entry panel, you can select a data set or a group of data sets to work with in
one of these ways:
• Fill in the ISPF Library fields. These fields are used the same way as they are on other ISPF panels. You
can use the traditional method of selecting a data set by entering its Project, Group, Type, and Member
names in the ISPF Library fields. Omitting the Member name gives you a list of members to choose
from.
• Select an object or list of objects using "ISPF Referral lists for object retrieval". See “ISPF referral lists
for object retrieval” on page 415 for more information. You can access personal and reference lists, and
then select libraries from these lists.

Data set view

You use the Data Set View to work with a single data set, a list of data sets, a workstation file, or any
action that requires a volume serial.
Note: Catalog, DSLIST, Volume information, Print volume, and Workstation file actions, are only available
from the Data Set View.
The panel that appears in Figure 260 on page 415 is the Data Set View entry panel for the Workplace.

414 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Workplace (Option 11)

File View Options Space SuperC Test Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Smart Action ISPF Workplace

Data Set, DSLIST Level, or Workstation File

Object Name . . . 'MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE'
Volume Serial . . (For actions that require a volume serial)

┌───────────────── ISPF Referral lists for object selection ─────────────────┐

│ Data Set View Action #1-30=Retrieve Entry DL=DSLIST /=Open List │
│ REFLIST . . . Last 30 referenced data sets -------- ----- │
│ TEST . . . Test list 02/10/01 12:06 │
│ TEST2 . . . Second Test List 02/10/01 12:05 │
************************* End of ISPF Referral lists *************************

Action ===> Scroll ===> PAGE

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Settings F5=PrvObj F6=PrvAct
F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap F10=Actions F11=ChgView F12=Cancel

Figure 260. Workplace entry panel - data set view (ISRWORK)

When using this Workplace entry panel, you can select a data set or a group of data sets to work with in
one of these ways:
• You can use the traditional method of selecting a data set by entering its name in the Object Name field.
For example, enter 'YOURID.SOURCE.DATA' to act upon a data set on the host, or D:\YOUR.FIL to act
upon a workstation file (perhaps to edit it using the PDF editor).
Note: The Object Name field supports the inclusion of system symbols.
• Select an object or list of objects using "ISPF Referral lists for object retrieval". You can access personal
and reference lists, and select data sets, libraries, workstation files, VSAM files, and data set levels from
each list.

ISPF referral lists for object retrieval

Both views of the ISPF Workplace entry panel enable you to use referral lists. The bottom of the ISPF
Workplace panel contains a reference list entry field (REFLIST), followed by a list of personal lists. You can
display either referral library lists or referral data set lists, depending on the view you choose.
All data sets and libraries referenced during an ISPF session are appended to the reference lists. You can
use the input fields next to the referral lists to access a referral data set in one of these ways:
• Entering a slash (/) in this field causes the personal data set list or library list (depending on the selected
view) to be displayed.
• Type DL in the input field and press Enter. This builds a DSLIST based on entries in the personal data set
list, personal library lists, or Reflists.
• Enter a library entry number (from 1 to 8). If you know the list numbers of your libraries, for example,
your panels library is number 1, you can type the number in this field and press Enter. ISPF retrieves the
respective library entry from the library reference list.
• Enter a data set entry number (from 1 to 30). If you know the order of your data sets, you can type the
number in this field and press Enter. ISPF retrieves the respective data set entry from the data set
reference list.

Specifying actions
After you select the object you want to work with, choose the action to perform on it. You can select an
action by making a choice on an action bar or by using a command.

ISPF object/action workplace (option 11) 415

Workplace (Option 11)

Choices on the Workplace action bar

The Workplace action bar makes available these choices.

File
The File action bar choice enables you to manipulate files. The pull-down choices for File are:
Choice
Description
List
Displays a pop-up menu that enables you to choose either a member list, a data set list list, a list of
personal data set lists or a list of personal library lists. You can perform any of the File actions except
DSLIST against the resulting member list.
Member list
Displays a list of members for a partitioned data set. To display a member list:
1. Type the library or data set information in the appropriate fields of the Workplace entry panel
(library view).
2. Specify blank or a pattern for the member name to display a member list.
3. Select the List action from the File action bar choice.
4. Select "Member list" from the List Action prompt panel.
Note: All member lists displayed by the ISPF Workplace are enhanced member lists, all supported
member list actions and commands are available on any member list display.
Data Set list
Displays a list of data sets based on a DSLIST level and, optionally, a volume serial number. The
data set list initial view can be set from the Workplace Settings panel. To create a data set list:
1. Type the data set level in the Object name field on the Workplace entry panel (data set view). If
you do not full qualify the data set level (by enclosing it in single quotes), your TSO prefix is set
as the first level. Optionally, you can enter a volume to view just the data sets that match the
DSLIST level on the volume entered. You can also optionally enter just a volume name to list all
data sets on the volume entered.
2. Select the List action from the File action bar choice.
3. Select Data Set List from the List Action prompt panel.
Personal Data Set lists
Displays a list of your personal data set lists. All valid personal list actions can be performed
against any selected personal list. The personal data set list you used most recently is the current
active list. The currently active list cannot be directly deleted from the list dialog, however all
other list actions are valid. To list your personal data set lists:
1. Select the List action from the File action bar choice.
2. Select Personal Data Set List from the List Action prompt panel. You can perform this action
from either view of the Workplace entry panel.
Personal Library lists
Displays a list of your personal library lists. All valid personal list actions can be performed against
any selected personal list. The personal library list you used most recently is the current active
list. The currently active list cannot be directly deleted from the list dialog, however all other list
actions are valid. To list your personal library lists:
1. Select the List action from the File action bar choice.
2. Select Personal Library List from the List Action prompt panel. You can perform this action from
either view of the Workplace entry panel.

416 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Workplace (Option 11)

Edit
Starts Edit action for a member or a sequential file. The Edit action prompt panel is presented when
you choose the Edit pull-down choice on the action bar. Select a file type and an editor and press
Enter. The Edit function is used to edit a member of a partitioned data set, a sequential data set, or a
workstation file.
Type of File
Select the type of file you want to edit.
1. Host File
Edit a host file using ISPF Edit or a workstation-defined editor. The selection of host or
workstation editors is based on the Editor Choice option setting on the Edit Entry panel. To
start the member list function, enter a pattern or leave the member field blank on the
Workplace entry panel. To edit a single member on the host:
1. Type the library or data set information in the appropriate fields of the Workplace entry
panel.
2. Type the member name in the member field (for library view) or in parentheses after the
data set name (for data set view).
3. Select Edit under the File action bar choice.
4. Select Host File and ISPF Editor on the Edit Action prompt panel.
To edit a single member on the workstation:
1. Type the library or data set information in the appropriate fields of the Workplace entry
panel.
2. Type the member name in the member field (for library view) or in parentheses after the
data set name (for data set view).
3. Select Edit under the File action bar choice.
4. Select Host File and Workstation Editor on the Edit Action prompt panel.
2. Workstation File
To edit a workstation file using the ISPF editor:
1. Type the file path and name in the Object name field on the Workplace entry panel (data
set view).
2. Select Edit from the File action bar choice.
3. Select Workstation File and ISPF Editor from the Edit Action prompt panel.
To edit a workstation file using a workstation editor:
1. Type the file path and name in the Object name field on the Workplace entry panel (data
set view).
2. Select Edit from the File action bar choice.
3. Select Workstation File and Workstation Editor from the Edit Action prompt panel.
Editor Choice
1. ISPF Editor
Selects the ISPF editor.
2. Workstation Editor
Selects the workstation editor.
View
Starts View action for a member or a sequential file. The View prompt panel is presented when you
choose the View pull-down choice on the File action bar. The View function is used to view a member
of a partitioned data set, a sequential data set, or a workstation file.
Type of File
Select the type of file you want to view.

ISPF object/action workplace (option 11) 417

Workplace (Option 11)

1. Host File
View a host file using ISPF View or a workstation-defined editor/browser. The view mechanism
used is based on the View Choice setting found on the View entry panel. To enter the member
list function, type a pattern or leave the member field blank on the Workplace entry panel. To
view a single member on the host:
1. Type the library or data set information in the appropriate fields on the Workplace entry
panel.
2. Type the member name in the member field (for ISPF library view) or in parentheses after
the data set name (for data set view).
3. Select View from the File action bar choice.
4. Select Host File and ISPF View from the View Action prompt panel.
To view a single member on the workstation:
1. Type the library or data set information in the appropriate fields on the Workplace entry
panel.
2. Type the member name in the member field (for ISPF library view) or in parentheses after
the data set name (for data set view).
3. Select View from the File action bar choice.
4. Select Host File and Workstation View from the View Action prompt panel.
2. Workstation File
To view a workstation file using ISPF View:
1. Type the file path and name in the Object name field of the Workplace entry panel (data set
view).
2. Select View from the File action bar choice.
3. Select Workstation File and ISPF View from the View Action prompt panel.
To view a workstation file using a workstation editor or browser:
1. Type the file path and name in the Object name field of the Workplace entry panel (data set
view).
2. Select View from the File action bar choice.
3. Select Workstation File and Workstation View from the View Action prompt panel.
View Choice
1. ISPF View
Selects the ISPF view function.
2. Workstation View
Selects the workstation editor or browser.
Browse
Starts Browse action for a member or a sequential file.
If you do not specify a member name or if you specify a pattern and the specified data set is a PDS, a
member list is displayed. Select a member to Browse by typing s next to the member name.
To browse a single member:
1. Type the library or data set information in the appropriate fields of the ISPF Workplace panel.
2. Type the member name in the member field (for ISPF library view) or in parentheses after the data
set name (for data set view).
3. Select Browse from the File action bar choice.
Delete
Displays a pop-up prompt window with member or data set as the choices.

418 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Workplace (Option 11)

If you specify an asterisk (*) as the member name, all members of the PDS are deleted without a
member list being displayed.
If you do not specify a member name or if you specify a pattern and the specified data set is a PDS, a
member list is displayed. Select members to delete by typing s next to the member name.
Note: You can change how member name patterns are handled in your Workplace Settings. See Show
status for M,C,D,G actions for more information.
To delete a single member:
1. Type the library or data set information in the appropriate fields of the ISPF Workplace panel.
2. Type the member name in the member field (for ISPF library view) or in parentheses after the data
set name (for data set view).
3. Select Delete under the File action bar choice for member delete.
To delete a PDS or a sequential data set:
1. Enter the data set name in the Object name field, or enter a library in the ISPF Library field on the
Workplace panel.
2. Select Delete under the File action bar choice for data set delete.
Rename
Displays a pop-up prompt window with member or data set as the choices.
If you do not specify a member name or if you specify a pattern and the specified data set is a PDS, a
member list is displayed. Select a member to Rename by typing s next to the member name.
To rename a single member:
1. Type the library or data set information in the appropriate fields of the ISPF Workplace panel.
2. Type the member name in the member field (for ISPF library view) or in parentheses after the data
set name (for data set view).
3. Select Rename under the File action bar choice for member rename.
To rename a PDS or a sequential data set:
1. Type the data set name in the Object name field, or type a library in the ISPF Library field on the
Workplace panel.
2. Select Rename under the File action bar choice for data set rename.
For more information, see “Rename” on page 431.
Move
Starts the move action for a member or a sequential file. A Move entry panel is presented.
If you specify an asterisk (*) as the member name, all members of the PDS are moved without a
member list being displayed.
If you do not specify a member name or if you specify a pattern and the specified data set is a PDS, a
member list is displayed. Select members to move by typing s next to the member name.
Note: You can change how member name patterns are handled in your Workplace Settings. See Show
status for M,C,D,G actions for more information.
To move a single member:
1. Type the library or data set information in the appropriate fields of the ISPF Workplace panel.
2. Type the member name in the member field (for ISPF library view) or in parentheses after the data
set name (for data set view).
3. Select Move from the File action bar choice.
For more information, see “Move or copy” on page 430.

ISPF object/action workplace (option 11) 419

Workplace (Option 11)

Copy
Starts the copy action for a member or a sequential file. A Copy entry panel is presented.
If you specify an asterisk (*) as the member name, all members of the PDS are copied without a
member list being displayed.
If you do not specify a member name or if you specify a pattern and the specified data set is a PDS, a
member list is displayed. Select members to copy by typing s next to the member name.
Note: You can change how member name patterns are handled in your Workplace Settings. See Show
status for M,C,D,G actions for more information.
To copy a single member:
1. Type the library or data set information in the appropriate fields of the ISPF Workplace panel.
2. Type the member name in the member field (for ISPF library view) or in parentheses after the data
set name (for data set view).
3. Select Copy from the File action bar choice.
For more information, see “Move or copy” on page 430.
Reset
Starts reset action for a member. A Reset prompt panel is presented for the member.
If you specify an asterisk (*) as the member name, all members of the PDS are reset without a
member list being displayed.
If you do not specify a member name or if you specify a pattern and the specified data set is a PDS, a
member list is displayed. Select members to reset by typing s next to the member name.
Note: You can change how member name patterns are handled in your Workplace Settings. See Show
status for M,C,D,G actions for more information.
To reset a single member:
1. Type the library or data set information in the appropriate fields of the ISPF Workplace panel.
2. Type the member name in the member field (for ISPF library view) or in parentheses after the data
set name (for data set view).
3. Select Reset from the File action bar choice.
For more information, see “Resetting member statistics” on page 427.
Open
Is defined on the Workplace Settings panel, making it a user customizable action. After you set this
action, it is performed automatically each time you open a member. The Open action can be set to
these actions:
User
Any TSO command, REXX exec, or CLIST set by the Open Command field on the Workplace
Settings panel.
E
Edit
V
View
B
Browse
D
Delete member
R
Rename member
M
Move

420 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Workplace (Option 11)

C
Copy
G
Reset
P
Print member
J
Submit
T
TSO command action
To open a single member:
1. Type the member name in the member field (for ISPF library view) or in parentheses after the data
set name (for data set view).
2. Select Open from the File action bar choice. When you press the ENTER key, the action for open
runs against the member, or a member list is displayed. See “Changing workplace settings” on
page 435 for more information.
Submit
Submits the member or sequential file to TSO for job execution.
If you do not specify a member name or if you specify a pattern and the specified data set is a PDS, a
member list is displayed. Select a member to submit by typing s next to the member name.
To submit a single member, fill in these fields of the ISPF Workplace panel:
1. Type the library or data set information in the appropriate fields.
2. Type the member name in the member field (for ISPF library view) or in parentheses after data set
name (for data set view).
3. Select Submit from the File action bar choice.
Print
The Print selection enables you to print information. The pull-down choices on the Print action prompt
panel are:
Data Set
Prints the entire data set. To print a data set:
1. Type the data set name in the Object name field (for the data set view) or enter an ISPF library
name in the ISPF Library fields (for the library view).
2. Select the Print action from the File action bar choice.
3. Select Data Set from the Print Action prompt panel.
Data Set index
Prints the data set index for the selected data set. To print a data set index:
1. Type the data set name in the Object name field or type an ISPF library name in the ISPF
Library fields.
2. Select the Print action from the File action bar choice.
3. Select Data Set Index from the Print Action prompt panel.
Data Set List
Prints the list of data sets for the selected data set name level. To print a data set list:
1. Type a data set level, or optionally a volume serial, in the appropriate fields on the ISPF
Workplace panel.
2. Select Print from the File action bar choice.
3. Select Data set List from the Print Action prompt prompt panel.

ISPF object/action workplace (option 11) 421

Workplace (Option 11)

VTOC
Prints the VTOC information for the selected volume. To print a VTOC summary:
1. Type a volume serial in the proper field on the ISPF Workplace panel.
2. Select Print from the File action bar choice.
3. Select VTOC from the Print Action prompt panel.
Member
Prints the selected member. To print a member:
1. Type the data set name in the Object name field or type an ISPF library name in the ISPF
Library fields.
2. Select the Print action from the File action bar choice.
3. Select Member from the Print Action prompt panel.
Command
Enables you to enter TSO, Workstation, or ISPF commands. You are prompted to choose between
types of commands. The pull-down choices on the Command prompt are:
TSO Cmd
The TSO Cmd action is used to run a TSO command, passing the data set and member name and
any additional parameters to the TSO command entered. To run a TSO command against a single
member, fill in these fields of the ISPF Workplace panel:
1. Type the library or data set information in the appropriate fields.
2. Type the member name in the member field (for ISPF library view) or in parentheses after the
data set name (for data set view).
3. Select Command from the File action bar choice.
4. Select TSO from the Command Action prompt panel.
WS Cmd
The WS Cmd action is used to run a WS command, passing the data set and member name and
any additional parameters to the WS command entered.
To run a WS command against a single member, fill in these fields of the ISPF Workplace panel:
1. Type the library or data set information in the appropriate fields.
2. Type the member name in the member field (for ISPF library view) or in parentheses after the
data set name (for data set view).
3. Select Command from the File action bar choice.
4. Select WS command from the Command Action prompt panel.
Note: The ISPF Client/Server must be connected to run the WS command.
ISPF Command Shell
The ISPF command shell option enables TSO commands, CLISTs, and REXX execs to be run under
ISPF. You can enter the TSO commands, CLISTs, and REXX execs in the command input field of
any panel.
ISPF also enables Workstation commands to be entered in the command input field of any panel.
You can enter a long command that wraps to the next line if you want to. For more information
about the ISPF Command Shell, see “ISPF command shell” on page 429.
ISPF Command Table
The command table utility allows you to create or change application command tables.
A command table contains the specification of general commands that can be entered from any
panel during the execution of an application. Command tables are identified by application id, and
are maintained in the ISPF table input library.

422 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Workplace (Option 11)

Exit
Ends the Workplace, returning to the primary option panel.

View
The View action bar choice displays the object views that are available to you. The currently selected view
is unavailable.
The pull-down choices for View are:
Choice
Description
Data Set View
Changes the current view to reference data set list, personal data set lists, and Object name view.
To change to the data set view:
1. Select the View action bar choice.
2. Select Data Set View from the pull-down menu.
Library View
Changes the current view to reference library list, personal library lists, and ISPF Library view.
To change to the ISPF Library view:
1. Select the View action bar choice.
2. Select Library View from the pull-down menu.
By name
Changes the current view of the personal list by sorting on the name field.
By description
Changes the current view of the personal list by sorting on the description field.
By created
Changes the current view of the personal list by sorting on the created field.
By referenced
Changes the current view of the personal list by sorting on the referenced field.

Options
The Options action bar choice displays the settings available. The pull-down choices for Options are:
Choice
Description
Workplace Settings
Displays the Workplace Settings panel. See “Changing workplace settings” on page 435 for more
information.
ISPF Settings
Displays the ISPF Settings panel. See Chapter 2, “Settings (option 0),” on page 21 for more
information.
CUA Attributes
Starts the ISPF CUA Attribute Change Utility dialog. See “CUA cttributes” on page 50 for more
information.
Keylists
Starts the ISPF Keylist Utility dialog. See “Working with function keys and keylists (the Function Keys
action bar choice)” on page 34 for more information.
Point-and-Shoot
Starts the ISPF CUA Attribute Change Utility dialog indexed to the point-and-shoot entry. See “CUA
cttributes” on page 50 for more information.

ISPF object/action workplace (option 11) 423

Workplace (Option 11)

Colors
Starts the ISPF Global Color Change Utility dialog. See “Changing default colors (the Colors action bar
choice)” on page 46 for more information.

Space
The Space action bar choice enables you to create and maintain data sets. The pull-down choices
available for Space are:
Choice
Description
Allocate
Displays a pop-up menu for the allocate action. The choices on the prompt are:
Data Set
The allocate action is used to allocate a partitioned or sequential data set. To allocate a data set:
1. Type the data set name in the Object name field or type an ISPF library name in the ISPF
Library fields.
2. Select the Allocate action from the Space action bar choice.
3. Select Data Set from the Allocate Action prompt panel.
Enhanced Data Set
The enhanced allocate action is used to allocate an SMS-managed partitioned or sequential data
set. To allocate an SMS data set:
1. Type the data set name in the Object name field or enter an ISPF library name in the ISPF
Library fields.
2. Select the Allocate action from the Space action bar choice.
3. Select Enhanced Data Set from the Allocate Action prompt panel.
VSAM Data Set
The VSAM action is used to define, delete, or retrieve information for a VSAM data set. To define,
delete, or retrieve information for a VSAM data set:
1. Type the VSAM data set name in the Object name field or enter an ISPF library name in the
ISPF Library fields.
2. Select the Allocate action from the Space action bar choice.
3. Select VSAM Data Set from the Allocate Action prompt panel.
Compress
The Compress action is used to recover unused space in a partitioned or sequential data set. To
compress a data set:
1. Type the data set name in the Object name field or type an ISPF library name in the ISPF Library
fields.
2. Select the Compress action from the Space action bar choice.
Catalog
The Catalog action is used to catalog a partitioned or sequential data set on a direct access device. To
catalog a data set:
1. Type the data set name in the Object name field.
2. Type the volume name in the volume field.
3. Select the Catalog action from the Space action bar choice.
Note: You cannot catalog an SMS-managed data set.
Uncatalog
The Uncatalog action is used to uncatalog a partitioned or sequential data set from a direct access
device. To uncatalog a data set:

424 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Workplace (Option 11)

1. Type the data set name in the Object name field.

2. Select the Uncatalog action from the Space action bar choice.
Note: You cannot uncatalog an SMS-managed data set.
A confirmation dialog appears if specified in the Workplace Settings panel. See “Changing workplace
settings” on page 435 for more information.
Information
The Data Set Information action is used to retrieve information about a partitioned or sequential data
set. To retrieve data set information:
1. Type the data set name in the Object name field or type an ISPF library name in the ISPF Library
fields.
2. Select Information from the Space action bar choice.
3. Select one of these choices from the Information Action prompt panel:
Data Set Long
Displays information about the selected data set.
Data Set Short
Displays a subset of information about the selected data set.
VTOC summary
Displays VTOC information about the selected volume. You must type the volume serial of the
VTOC in the volume serial field of the Workplace entry panel.

SuperC
The SuperC action bar choice gives you access to SuperC compare and search dialogs for your data sets.
The data set you specify on the Workplace panel is automatically filled in for you in the SuperC dialog you
choose. For more information, see “SuperC utility (option 3.12)” on page 190.
The SuperC pull-down choices are:
Choice
Description
SuperC
Compare two data sets. To SuperC compare two data sets:
1. Type the first data set name in the Object name field or type an ISPF library name in the ISPF
Library fields.
2. Select the SuperC action from the SuperC action bar choice. The SuperC Compare Utility— New
Data Set Specification panel appears with the data set information entered in it. Make sure the
panel is filled in the way you want it to be.
3. Press Enter to display the Old SuperC comparison panel, and fill in the panel.
4. Press Enter again to submit the comparison.
For more information, see “SuperC utility (option 3.12)” on page 190.
SuperCE
Compare two data sets using extended options. For more information, see “SuperCE utility (option
3.13)” on page 199.
Search-For
Search data sets for strings of data. To SuperC search for strings of data:
1. Type the data set name in the Object name field or type an ISPF library name in the ISPF Library
fields.
2. Select the Search-For action from the SuperC action bar choice. The Search-For Utility panel
appears with the data set information entered in it. Make sure the panel is filled in the way you
want it to be.
For more information, see “Search-For utility (option 3.14)” on page 210.

ISPF object/action workplace (option 11) 425

Workplace (Option 11)

Search-ForE
Search a data set using extended options. For more information, see “Search-ForE utility (option
3.15)” on page 216.

Test
The Test action bar choice gives you access to the ISPF services that help you test dialogs, such as
Chapter 9, “Dialog test (option 7),” on page 365. For more information, refer to the z/OS ISPF Dialog
Developer's Guide and Reference, and the z/OS ISPF Edit and Edit Macros.
The Test pull-down choices are:
Choice
Description
Functions
Displays the Dialog Test Function/Selection panel. Select the Functions action from the Test action bar
choice. For more information, see “Functions (option 7.1)” on page 372.
Panels
Displays the Dialog Test Display panel. Select the Panels action from the Test action bar choice. For
more information, see “Panels (option 7.2)” on page 375.
Variables
Displays the Dialog Test Variables panel. Select the Variables action from the Test action bar choice.
For more information, see “Variables (Option 7.3)” on page 377.
Tables
Displays the Dialog Test Tables panel. Select the Tables action from the Test action bar choice. For
more information, see “Tables (option 7.4)” on page 381.
Log
Displays the ISPF Transaction Log panel. Select the Log action from the Test action bar choice. For
more information, see “Log (option 7.5)” on page 393.
Services
Displays the Invoke Dialog Service panel. Select the Services action from the Test action bar choice.
For more information, see “Dialog services (option 7.6)” on page 395.
Traces
Displays the Dialog Test Traces panel. Select the Traces action from the Test action bar choice. For
more information, see “Traces (option 7.7)” on page 398.
Break Points
Displays the Dialog Test Breakpoints panel. Select the Break Points action from the Test action bar
choice. For more information, see “Breakpoints (option 7.8)” on page 401.
Dialog Test
Displays the Dialog Test Primary Option panel. Select the Dialog Test action from the Test action bar
choice. For more information, see Chapter 9, “Dialog test (option 7),” on page 365.
Dialog Test appl ID
Displays the Dialog Test Application ID panel for changing the Dialog Test application ID. Select the
Dialog Test appl ID action from the Test action bar choice.

Help
The Help action bar choice provides access to the program tutorials.

Actions that require prompt windows for more information

Some actions that you call from the Workplace require additional information. You provide this
information through the use of pop-up prompt windows. Some common actions of this type are:
• Resetting member statistics
• Using TSO commands
• Using WS commands

426 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Workplace (Option 11)

• Using the ISPF command shell

• Moving or copying data
• Renaming data sets
Here are the actions and the pop-up windows that accompany each one.

Resetting member statistics

Figure 261 on page 427 shows the pop-up prompt window that appears when you choose Reset from the
File action bar, after you choose a member to work with.

Reset Member Statistics

Data Set Name:

'JOHNLEV.TEST.DATA(EMP)'

Options
1. Reset ISPF statistics
2. Delete ISPF statistics

New Userid . . . (If userid is to be changed)

New Version . . . (If version number is to be changed)
New Mod . . . . . (If mod number is to be changed)

Press ENTER to process action. Press CANCEL to cancel reset.

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 261. Reset statistics panel (ISRURSET)

For more information about how the Reset statistics option works, see “Reset ISPF statistics utility
(option 3.5)” on page 166. You can set these items from this window:
Options
Select 1 to Reset ISPF statistics, or 2 to Delete ISPF statistics.
New Userid
Sets the ID field in the statistics. If you want to change the ID the statistics are kept under, enter the
new ID here. If you do not specify a new version number, this field is required to be filled in.
New Version
Enter a number here is you want to change the version number. This field is required if you do not
enter a new userid. It is ignored if you have chosen the delete action.
New Mod
Enter a number here to change the version number.

TSO command
Figure 262 on page 428 shows the pop-up prompt window that appears when you choose Command,
from the File action bar choice, then select TSO Command from the Command Action prompt panel.

ISPF object/action workplace (option 11) 427

Workplace (Option 11)

Menu Functions Confirm Utilities Help

┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ TSO Command Action │
│ │
│ The "/" character can be used within the command string to represent the │
│ following fully qualified and quoted data set name: │
│ 'MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE(TEST)' │
│ │
│ Enter TSO Command and any additional parameters as needed: │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ Press ENTER to execute command, press CANCEL to cancel action. │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward │
│ F9=Swap F12=Cancel │
⋘───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F5=Rfind F7=Up F8=Down F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 262. TSO command panel (ISRUTCES)

You can set these items from this window:

TSO Command
The name of the TSO command you want to use. The command name can be followed by command
parameters with the / character appearing anywhere within the parameter string.

WS command
Figure 263 on page 428 shows the pop-up prompt window that appears when you choose Command,
from the File action bar choice, then select WS Command from the Command Action prompt panel. You
must have a workstation connection in place in order to use WS commands.

Menu Functions Confirm Utilities Help

┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ WS Command Action │
│ │
│ The "/" character can be used within the command string to represent the │
│ following fully qualified, unquoted data set name: │
│ MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE(TEST) │
│ * No workstation connection │
│ Enter Workstation Command and any additional parameters as needed: │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ Press ENTER to execute command, press CANCEL to cancel action. │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward │
│ F9=Swap F12=Cancel │
⋘───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F5=Rfind F7=Up F8=Down F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 263. WS command panel (ISRUWCES)

You can set these items from this window:

WS Command
The name of the WS command you want to use. The command name can be followed by command
parameters with the / character appearing anywhere within the parameter string.

428 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Workplace (Option 11)

ISPF command shell

Figure 264 on page 429 shows the pop-up prompt window that appears when you enter the ISPF
command shell. To get to this window, choose Command from the File action bar choice, then choose
ISPF Command Shell on the Command Action prompt panel.

Menu List Mode Functions Utilities Help

───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
ISPF Command Shell
Enter TSO or Workstation commands below:

===>

Place cursor on choice and press enter to Retrieve command

=> xmit carvm3.userid da('userid.private.clist(types)')seq

=> status
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap

F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 264. ISPF Command Shell panel (ISRTSO)

The ISPF Command Shell option enables you to run TSO commands, CLISTs, and REXX execs under ISPF.
This panel has one input field. Type the command and its parameters into the input field, leaving at least
one space between the command name and the first parameter. The input field continues for two full lines
below the start of the input field. The maximum number of characters that you can enter is 234. For
example:

Enter TSO or Work Station commands below

===> SEND 'THIS MESSAGE DEMONSTRATES THAT A TSO COMMAND ENTERED UNDER
ISPF CAN EXCEED ONE LINE ON THE 3270' USER(ALICE)

You can also enter ISPF commands, such as END or RETURN, in this field.
Note: If you enter HELP or CANCEL, it is interpreted as the ISPF Help or Cancel command. To issue TSO
Help, enter:

===> TSO HELP xxxxx

To issue TSO Cancel, enter:

===> TSO CANCEL xxxxx

The ISPF command shell option enables you to enter most TSO commands under ISPF. Here is a list of
commands that are not supported:
• LOGON
• LOGOFF
• ISPSTART, PDF, and ISPF
• TEST
• Commands that you are restricted from using by TSO
• Commands requiring large parameter lists (234 characters is the maximum allowed, including
command name)

ISPF object/action workplace (option 11) 429

Workplace (Option 11)

You can run command procedures under ISPF, subject to these restrictions:
• CLISTs and execs must not invoke restricted commands listed previously.
• TERMIN command procedure statements are not supported.
These restrictions also apply to commands entered from other panels.
After you type a command in the input field, press ENTER to start the command. If you are not operating
in Session Manager mode, the cursor is positioned below the command input field. Line-at-a-time I/O
from the command, if any, starts at the cursor position. When the command finishes, three asterisks (***)
may appear on the screen. To return to ISPF full-screen mode, press ENTER.
The ISPF command shell panel is then redisplayed with the command you entered displayed in the
command list (unless you entered the TSO or WS prefix, or List mode is set to update off).

Move or copy
Figure 265 on page 430 shows the pop-up prompt window that appears when you choose Move from the
File action bar, after you choose a member to work with. The panel that appears when you choose Copy is
similar to this one.

RefList Help
───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
MOVE Entry Panel
More: +
CURRENT from data set: 'MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE(TEST)'

To Library Options:
Project . . . MYPROJ Enter "/" to select option
Group . . . . DEV _ Replace like-named members
Type . . . . SOURCE / Process member aliases

To Other Data Set Name

Data Set Name . . . _____________________________________________
Volume Serial . . . ______ (If not cataloged)

NEW member name . . . ________ (Blank unless member to be renamed)

Options
Sequential Disposition Pack Option SCLM Setting
2 1. Mod 1 1. Default 3 1. SCLM
2. Old 2. Pack 2. Non-SCLM
Command ===> ________________________________________________________________
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F12=Cancel

Figure 265. Move panel (ISRUMVC)

For more information about the Move/Copy utility, see “Move/Copy utility (option 3.3)” on page 122. You
can set these items from this window:
To Library
The library to which you want to move or copy the selected data.
To Other Data Set Name
The data set to which you want to move or copy the selected data.
NEW member name
If the "To" and "From" data sets are the same, you can rename the member here.
Replace like-named members
Select this option to allow replacement of a member in the "To" data set with a like-named member in
the "From" data set.
Process member aliases
Select this option to allow the primary member and all alias members to be moved together.
Sequential disposition
Select 1 if Mod, 2 if Old

430 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Workplace (Option 11)

1
Mod adds new data at the end of data currently contained in the data set.
2
Old begins placing new data at the beginning of the data set, writing over existing data.
Pack option
Indicates how you want the data to be stored in the "To" data set.
1
Data set is packed according to your default settings.
2
Data set is packed.
SCLM setting
Indicates how you want the data to be stored in the "To" data set.
1
SCLM
2
Non-SCLM
3
As is

Rename
Figure 266 on page 431 shows the pop-up prompt window that appears when you choose Rename from
the File action bar, after you choose a member to work with.

File View Options Space SuperC Test Help

─ ┌───────────────────────────────────────────────┐ ──────────────────────────
│ Workplace Rename Action Prompt │
│ │
D │ Rename . . 1. Data Set │
│ 2. Member │
│ │ re a volume serial)
│ Select a choice and press ENTER to continue │
┌ │ │ lection ─────────────────┐
│ │ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit │ DL=DSLIST /=Open List │
│ │ F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap │ ta sets -------- ----- │
│ ⋘───────────────────────────────────────────────┘ 02/10/01 12:06 │
│ TEST2 . . . Second Test List 02/10/01 12:05 │
************************* End of ISPF Referral lists *************************

Action ===> RP Scroll ===> PAGE

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Settings F5=PrvObj F6=PrvAct
F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap F10=Actions F11=ChgView F12=Cancel

Figure 266. Rename prompt panel (ISRURNAM)

You choose to rename either a data set or a member from this panel. If you choose data set, the panel in
Figure 267 on page 432 appears.

ISPF object/action workplace (option 11) 431

Workplace (Option 11)

┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
─ │ Rename Data Set │
I │ │
│ Data Set Name . . : MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE │
D │ Volume Serial . . : MVS8WF │
│ │
│ Enter new name below: (The data set will be recataloged.) │
│ │
┌ │ ISPF Library: │
│ │ Project . . │
│ │ Group . . . │
│ │ Type . . . . SOURCE │
│ │ │
* │ Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set: │
│ Data Set Name . . . 'MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE' │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ Command ===> │
A │ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward │
│ F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel │
⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 267. Rename data set panel (ISRUARP1)

You can set these items from this window:

New name
The name that you want to use for the renamed data set.
If you choose member, the panel in Figure 268 on page 432 appears.

Menu Functions Confirm Utilities Help

─ ┌─────────────────────────────────────┐ ────────────────────────────────────
I │ Member Rename │ Row 00001 of 00001
│ │ d Changed ID
S │ Enter a new member name: │ /08 2002/07/08 13:32:15 GRAHAMP
│ │
│ Old Name . . : TEST │
│ │
│ New Name . . . │
│ │
│ │
│ Press ENTER to rename member. │
│ Press CANCEL to cancel rename. │
│ │
│ F1=Help F2=Split │
│ F3=Exit F7=Backward │
⋘─────────────────────────────────────┘

Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F5=Rfind F7=Up F8=Down F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 268. Rename member panel (ISRUREN)

You can set these items from this window:

New name
The name that you want to use for the renamed member.

Commands
You can use primary commands in the command area (Action line) of the Workplace entry panels.

432 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Workplace (Option 11)

You must be connected to the workstation to use any workstation file actions. You can configure your
workstation editor choice by selecting the Workstation action bar from the Edit or View entry prompt
panel or from the Workplace Settings panel.

Table 27. Workplace commands

Command Description Valid For:

A Allocate Data sets

ACTBAR or NOACTBAR Display or do not display action bar on panel Action prompt

AP Allocate Action prompt

B Browse Members and non-PDS data sets

C Copy Members and non-PDS data sets

COLOR Global color change Action prompt

CP Command Action prompt

CUAATTR CUA attributes Action prompt

D Delete Members and non-PDS data sets

DF Delete Data sets

DL DSLIST Data set name level

DP Delete Action prompt

DVT VTOC summary Data summary

E Edit Members and non-PDS data sets

EP Edit Action prompt

G Reset member statistics Members

I Full information Data sets

ICS ISPF command shell Action prompt

ICT ISPF command table Action prompt

IP Information Action prompt

J Submit Members and non-PDS data sets

K Catalog Data sets

KEYLIST Keylist utility Action prompt

L Print data set Data sets

LOCATE, LOC, or L Find a specified referral list in the scrollable Referral lists
display of referral lists

LP List Action prompt

LV or LISTVIEW List view Action prompt

M Move Members and non-PDS data sets

ML Member list Partitioned data sets

N Rename Data sets

O Open Members and non-PDS data sets

OPD Personal data set lists Referral lists

OPL Personal library lists Referral lists

P Print Members and non-PDS data sets

PDL Print data set list Data sets

ISPF object/action workplace (option 11) 433

Workplace (Option 11)

Table 27. Workplace commands (continued)

Command Description Valid For:

PP Print Action prompt

PSCOLOR Point and shoot Action prompt

PVT Print VTOC information Data sets

Q VSAM Data sets

R Rename Members and non-PDS data sets

RP Rename Action prompt

S Short information Data sets

SC SuperC Data sets

SCE SuperC extended Data sets

SELECT, SEL, or S Select a specified referral list in the scrollable Referral lists
display of referral lists

SETTINGS ISPF settings Action prompt

SF SearchFor Data sets

SFE SearchFor extended Data sets

T TSO command Members and non-PDS data sets

U Uncatalog Data sets

V View Members and non-PDS data sets

VP View Action prompt

W WS command Members and non-PDS data sets

WE Workstation file, edit on host Workstation files

WEW Workstation file, edit on workstation Workstation file

WPSET Workplace settings Action prompt

WV Workstation file, view on host Workstation files

WVW Workstation file, view on workstation Workstation files

X Print data set index Data sets

Y Allocate SMS (enhanced) Data sets

Z Compress Data sets

= (equal sign) Repeat last command. If no previous action, Members and non-PDS data sets
view is the default.

Default CUA function key settings

Table 28 on page 434 shows how the function keys are defined for the main Workplace panel when the
mode is set to keylist ON and function keys are set to primary LOWER.

Table 28. Workplace function key settings

Key Action Description:
F1 Help Workplace help
F2 Split Split screen
F3 Exit Exit Workplace
F4 Settings ISPF Workplace settings

434 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Workplace (Option 11)

Table 28. Workplace function key settings (continued)

Key Action Description:
F5 PrvObj Recall last object
F6 PrvAct Repeat last action
F7 Backward Scroll up Reflist
F8 Forward Scroll down Reflist
F9 Swap Swap screen
F10 Actions Cursor to action bar
F11 ChgView Change Workplace view
F12 Cancel Exit Workplace
F13 Help Help
F14 Split Split
F15 End End
F16 Return Return
F17 Rfind Repeat find
F18 Rchange Repeat change
F19 Up Up (Scroll up)
F20 Down Down (Scroll down)
F21 Swap Swap
F22 Left Left (Scroll left)
F23 Right Right (Scroll right)
F24 Cretriev Cursor/retrieve

Changing workplace settings

Figure 269 on page 436 shows the pop-up prompt window that appears when you choose the Workplace
Settings pull-down from the Options choice on the Workplace action bar. You can also start this function
by entering WPSET on the command line. The workplace settings determine how your particular
workplace behaves for various functions.

ISPF object/action workplace (option 11) 435

Workplace (Option 11)

┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ File Defaults Colors Workstation Help │
│ ────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│ ISPF Workplace Settings Main │
│ │
│ General Options View Options │
│ Enter "/" to select option Data Set List View │
│ / Display Edit/View entry panel 1 1. Volume │
│ / Automatically Update reference lists 2. Space │
│ / Update REFLIST with Dsname Level 3. Attrib │
│ / Keep member field value 4. Total │
│ / Member List for M,C,D,G actions │
│ / Show status for M,C,D,G actions Member List View │
│ / Confirm Member delete 1 1. Standard │
│ / Confirm Data Set delete 2. Extended │
│ / Show Workplace Action bar │
│ / Frame ISPF Personal list area Reflist Frame Char │
│ / Smart Action Retrieve Entry 1 1. | (X"6A") │
│ / Display Catalog Name 2. | (X"4F") │
│ / Display Total Tracks │
│ │
│ Press EXIT to save settings. Press CANCEL to cancel any changes. │
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward │
│ F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel │
⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 269. Workplace Settings panel (ISRUSETM)

You can set these items from this window:

Display Edit/View entry panel
When selected, causes the Edit/View prompt panel to appear before you can start an edit or view
action for a sequential data set. If you want to display a member list, the prompt panel is only
displayed if a slash (/) is entered in the Prompt field of the member list.
The default for this setting is selected.
Automatically Update reference lists
When selected, specifies that any data set or library, or both, is added to the respective reference list.
The default for this setting is selected.
Update REFLIST with Dsname Level
When selected, specifies that the ISPF Reference List is updated with the Dsname pattern entered in
Object Name.
Keep member field value
When selected, specifies that the member name field for ISPF Library is not to be cleared upon return
from a library action.
The default for this setting is selected.
Member List for M,C,D,G actions
When selected, specifies that the actions Move, Copy, Delete, and Reset result in a member list. When
not selected, these actions act upon all members that match the pattern without displaying a member
list.
The default for this setting is selected.
Show status for M,C,D,G actions
When selected, displays a status panel for the actions Move, Copy, Delete, and Reset. When not
selected, no status panel is displayed.
The default for this setting is selected.
Confirm Member delete
When selected, specifies that the delete confirmation panel is displayed before a member is deleted.
The default for this setting is selected.
Confirm Data Set delete
When selected, specifies that the delete confirmation panel is displayed before a data set is deleted.

436 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Workplace (Option 11)

The default for this setting is selected.

Show Workplace Action bar
When selected, specifies that the action bar appears on the workplace panels.
The default for this setting is selected.
Frame ISPF Referral list area
When selected, specifies that the ISPF referral list area be framed, using the character specified in the
Reflist Frame Char field.
Smart Action Retrieve Entry
When selected, specifies that ISPF executes the smart action option against the retrieved data set.
Display Catalog Name
When selected, specifies that the Total view of a Data Set List displays the catalog name in which the
data set was located.
Display Total Tracks
When selected, specifies that a Total Tracks header line is displayed on the data set list above the
column headings for the Space and Total view.
View Options
Specifies how to display the data set list.
volume
Displays data set list with a volume view.
space
Displays data set list with a space view.
attrib
Displays data set list with an attribute view.
total
Displays data set list in total view.
Member List View
Specifies how to display the member list
standard
Displays a member list with a 1-character command entry field.
extended
Displays a member list with an 8-character command entry field.
Reflist Frame Char
The character used to frame the ISPF referral list area on your workplace panels.

Workplace Settings panel action bar

These action bar choices appear on the Workplace Settings panel:
File
The file pull-downs give you the options to either cancel or exit the current file.
Defaults
You can choose the default enter or open actions from these pull- downs:
Default Enter action
You can select a default action to perform automatically whenever you do an Enter action. The
available actions are:
• Smart Action
The Smart Action enables ISPF to choose the action needed based on the characteristics of the
object you are using. ISPF chooses the appropriate action according to these rules:
Object type
Action selected by ISPF

ISPF object/action workplace (option 11) 437

Workplace (Option 11)

ISPF Library
Member list
Partitioned Data Set
Member list
Pattern containing "*" or "%"
Data Set List
Volume (with no object name)
Data Set List
Member Object
User selectable *
Sequential Data Set
User selectable *
Workstation File
User selectable *
* Use the Smart Action action bar choice to select the action for member objects, sequential
data sets and workstation files.
• Member List
• Data Set List
• Edit
• View
• Browse
• Rename member
• Move
• Copy
• Reset Stats
• Open
• Repeat action
Default Open action
You can select a default action to perform automatically whenever you do an Open action from the
Workplace or workplace member lists. The available actions are:
• User command (a user defined command)
• Edit
• View
• Browse
• Delete member
• Rename member
• Move
• Copy
• Reset member
• Print member
• WS Cmd
• TSO Cmd
Colors
You can choose the colors for the member list or the data set list from this action bar.
Workstation
You can connect your host and workstation with these choices:

438 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Workplace (Option 11)

1. Configure ISPF Workstation Tool Integration

2. ISPF C/S Install
Help
Provides general workplace settings help, and default enter and open help.

Workplace example scenario

The scenario here illustrates some of the advantages provided by the ISPF Workplace function. To provide
you with a reference point of view, the scenario includes points on how you can accomplish the same task
using ISPF in the traditional way.
For this example, say that your task is to:
1. Copy a sequential data set into a member of a concatenated ISPF Library.
2. SuperC compare it to another member.
3. Rename the member.
4. Change the Version number in the ISPF statistics.

Subtask 1
Your first step is to copy a sequential data set into a member of a concatenated PDS.

Traditional ISPF
Use the 3.3 Move/Copy Utility.

Workplace
Use the Copy Action against the sequential data set object.
Choose the Workplace option (Option 11) on the main menu. Use the PF11 key to toggle to the data set
view. In the Workplace you have a choice of working from a data set list or issuing commands against a
single data set.
If you are list-oriented you can specify a wildcard character in the Object Name field (such as, 'USERID.*')
to generate a data set list containing the sequential data set.
If you prefer to specify the sequential data set directly you can type it into the Object Name field either
with or without single quotes (that is, SEQ.FILE or 'USERID.SEQ.FILE').
In either case these accelerated methods can be alternatives to remembering and typing the input:
• You might be able to retrieve a recently referenced data set name or pattern from the REFLIST in the
bottom half of the Workplace.
• You might be able to retrieve a recently referenced data set name or pattern using the recall key PF5.
• You might be able to retrieve a data set name or pattern from a personal list you previously created.
These also appear in the bottom half of the Workplace.
Now that the Object has been specified you must specify the Action. In this example, the action is COPY.
You can do this several ways, depending on your preferences.
• If you are in a list, you can use the CO line command to copy the data set, or you can put a slash (/) in
the line command field to be prompted with a list of available commands to select.
• If you specified the "from" data set directly (not from a list) you can use the Copy option from the File
action bar choice, or you can type the C fast path command in the Action ==> field to copy the data set.
In either case, a pop-up panel prompts you for the target data set, member name, and other parameters.

Subtask 2
The second step is to SuperC compare one member of a concatenated PDS to another.

ISPF object/action workplace (option 11) 439

Workplace (Option 11)

Traditional ISPF
Use the 3.13 SuperC compare utility.

Workplace
Use the Workplace-to-SuperC Interface.
Using PF11, toggle back to the Workplace ISPF Library View.
Specify the ISPF library concatenation and member name of the new member you just created by the
COPY action. These accelerated methods can be used as alternatives to remembering and typing the
input:
• You might be able to retrieve a recently referenced ISPF Library concatenation from the REFLIST in the
bottom half of the Workplace.
• You might be able to retrieve a recently referenced ISPF Library concatenation using the recall key PF5.
• You might be able to retrieve an ISPF Library concatenation from a personal list you previously created.
These also appear in the bottom half of the Workplace.
Now that the Object has been specified you must specify the Action. The action at this point is SuperCE.
Again, specifying this action can be done several ways depending on your preferences.
• You can use the SuperCE option from the SuperC action bar.
• You can type the "SCE" fast path command in the Action ==> field and press Enter.
In either case, Workplace enters the SuperCE dialog. Note that your ISPF Library concatenation is
transferred to the correct New DSN fields in the SuperCE concatenation panel, so you do not have to type
it yourself.
After running your compare, exit the SuperC Utility to return to Workplace.

Subtask 3
The next step is to rename a member of an ISPF Library.

Traditional ISPF
Use the 3.1 Library Utility.

Workplace
Use the Rename member Action.
The ISPF library concatenation and member name of the new member you just compared remains on the
Workplace panel. Now you must specify the Rename Action.
How do you prefer to do this?
• You can use the Rename option from the File action bar.
• You can type the "R" fast path command in the Action ==> field, then press Enter.
• You can work from a member list and issue the "R" line command to rename the member.
Member lists can be created a number of ways in Workplace:
• Just press Enter if your default enter action is Smart Action, a mode that analyzes the object and selects
an appropriate action. Select the Workplace Settings option from the Options action bar to view or
change your defaults.
• Enter the List option from the File action bar.
• Enter the "ML" fast path command.
In any case, Workplace displays a pop-up panel to prompt you for the new member name.

440 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Workplace (Option 11)

Subtask 4
The final step in this scenario is to change a member's Version number in the ISPF statistics.

Traditional ISPF
Use the 3.5 Reset Statistics Utility.

Workplace
Use the Reset Action.
The ISPF library concatenation and member name of the new member you just compared remains on the
Workplace panel. Now you must specify the Reset Action.
Again you have a choice about how to do this:
• You can use the Reset option from the File action bar.
• You can type the "G" fast path command in the Action ==> field and press Enter.
• You can work from a member list and issue the "G" line command to rename the member or specify the
"/" line command to be prompted with an action selection list.
In all cases, Workplace displays a pop-up panel to prompt you for Reset parameters.

ISPF object/action workplace (option 11) 441

Workplace (Option 11)

442 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 SuperC - utility differences

Appendix A. SuperC reference

This topic provides information about the SuperC return codes, process options, update data set control
options, and process statements.
ISPF contains two utilities, SuperC (option 3.12) and SuperCE (option 3.13), that allow you to compare
data sets for differences. Also, ISPF contains two other utilities, Search-For (option 3.14) and Search-ForE
(option 3.15), that allow you to search data sets for strings of data.
All four of these utilities combine two major components to do their respective functions. The first
component is a dialog that provides the data entry panels, selection panels, and messages. The second
component is the program module, ISRSUPC. The CPI interface is through a standard parameter list.
You can use the SuperC program without the ISPF utilities. To do this, however, your installation must
customize a CLIST or REXX exec (for interactive use), or a PROCLIB procedure (for batch processing of a
catalog procedure). A sample CLIST has been provided to show line command processing. A sample
PROCLIB JCL catalog procedure has also been provided to show batch submission. The sample CLIST and
PROCLIB JCL are located in the ISP.SISPSAMP PDS data set as members ISRSCLST and ISRSPROC,
respectively.

Utility differences
The standard utilities, SuperC (option 3.12) and Search-For (option 3.14), are easy to use with somewhat
reduced function. The extended utilities, SuperCE (option 3.13) and Search-ForE (option 3.15), fully
exploit the SuperC program's capabilities.

Standard utilities
The standard utilities are useful for ordinary comparisons and searches. The SuperC utility (option 3.12)
uses a two-panel sequence: you specify the new input data set on the first panel and the old input data
set on the second. The Search-For utility (option 3.14) uses an optional two-panel sequence: you can
specify the input data set and one search string on the first panel, and use the second panel if you need to
specify more than one search string.
You can enter additional information on these panels as they are displayed. If you are using the SuperC
utility, you can enter the name of a previously prepared profile data set that contains additional
information to specify the comparison.
Search-For does not use a profile data set. Also, Search-For finds all occurrences without case distinction
when searching for a data string.

Extended utilities
The primary intent of the extended utilities is to provide maximum flexibility and access to all SuperC
functions. Input fields are provided to allow you to use process options and statements. Also, the Search-
ForE utility's ASIS fields allow you to specify mixed-case search strings.
The input data set name fields differ from standard ISPF format because Project, Group, Type, and
Member fields are not provided. Instead, you can enter input data set names horizontally using standard
TSO naming conventions. This includes the use of a PDS member name, if desired, as part of a data set
name.
The concatenation of input data sets is also different. Up to four data set names, as opposed to the
standard four ISPF library groups, can be entered as new or old data sets. This allows data sets with the
same attributes to be concatenated. For example, PANELS and MSGS data sets could be concatenated for
searching.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2019 443

SuperC - Program Description

Besides compare functions, the SuperCE Utility panel provides access to the Search-ForE utility (option
3.15). This gives you the added advantage of the ability to search for a data string without having to leave
SuperCE, in addition to access to more functions than Search-For (option 3.14) provides.

Program description
The SuperC program is a fast and versatile program that can process:
• Two sequential data sets
• Two complete partitioned data sets
• Members of two partitioned data sets
• Concatenated data sets.
In fact, any data set that can be processed by ISPF can be processed by the SuperC program.
Note: SuperC does not support tape data sets.
SuperC can compare data sets even when there are many differences and redundant data. Some
examples of redundant data are blank lines, duplicate words, and binary data with many duplicate
characters.
Unlike many compare programs, SuperC is not limited to comparing data sets on a line-by-line basis.
Instead, it allows you to choose between the four comparison levels listed. The compare type you select
determines which kinds of data differences are presented by SuperC. See “Reasons for differing
comparison results” on page 479 for more information about comparison results.
• File comparisons produce summary information about the differences between the data sets being
compared.
• Line comparisons are record-oriented and show matching, inserted, deleted, and reformatted lines. This
level is most useful for comparing lines of program source code. It provides the least output difference
information and is least sensitive to resynchronization.
• Word comparisons show differences between data strings that are delimited by blanks or
nonalphanumeric characters, such as commas. Matching words are found, even if they are not on the
same line. This level is most useful for comparing text data sets.
• Byte comparisons determine byte differences. It is most useful for comparing unformatted and
machine-readable data.
The SuperC program requires only the names of the input data sets. However, the utility you are using
may require other information, such as a listing type. Also, you can enter these types of processing
information and options on the utility data entry panels:
• Compare type
• Listing data set name or destination
• Process options
• Statements or profile data set name
• Browse output choice.
The SuperC program allows you to create two kinds of output:
• A listing that shows the results of the comparison or search and
• A structured data set that contains update information.
Within these two categories, you can create many kinds of output that make it easy to see where your
data differs. To see your comparison results, you can generate listings that show:
• An overall summary of total changes
• The actual source code where deltas (differences) were found
• The deltas plus up to 10 (the default) matching lines before and after

444 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 SuperC - applications

• The deltas plus all matching lines.

You can format the listings to show differences either sequentially or side-by-side.
In an update data set, output lines are identified and results are put in specific columns. An update data
set is especially useful as input to a user-written application program. It allows a program to customize
what you see, changing generalized output to information that is specific to a particular application.
The SuperC utility (options 3.12, 3.13, and 3.14) CLISTs allocate or free space under these DDNAMEs:
SYSIN, SYSIN2, OLDDD, NEWDD, OUTDD, and DELDD.

SuperC features for the year 2000 transition

SuperC includes features designed to help manage the Year 2000 transition:
• Specify a 100-year period (or "year window") so that, for dates that have only a 2-digit year, the century
can be determined. This can be based on either:
– A "fixed" year window (with a fixed starting year), or
– A "sliding" year window (starting at a specified number of years before the current year).
• Compare 2-digit year values in one data set with 4-digit year values in another data set.
• Compare compressed year values in one data set with uncompressed year values in another data set.
• Filter cosmetic differences caused by adding century digits to 2-digit years, so that you can more easily
identify real differences in content.

Applications
You can use the SuperC program for many applications other than comparing two source data sets. This
topic lists some specific applications for general users, writers and editors, and programmers and
systems administrators.
General users can:
• Compare two data sets that have been reformatted. Reformatted data sets contain such differences as
indentation level changes, spaces inserted or deleted, or lines that have been reformatted and moved to
other parts of the data set.
SuperC detects and classifies reformatted lines as special changes. You can list these lines in the
output, along with the normal insert/delete changes, or eliminate them from the listing. Reducing the
number of flagged lines may help you focus on real, rather than cosmetic, changes.
• Determine whether two PDSs, or a concatenation of PDSs, have corresponding like-named members.
Members absent from one data set but present in the other are listed, as is all change activity between
like-named members. The comparison can show changes caused by creating or deleting PDS members.
Writers and editors can:
• Detect word changes within documents.
SuperC finds word differences even if the words have moved to different lines.
• Verify that only designated areas are changed.
SuperC comparison results show all areas affected. Changes made to restricted areas may be invalid.
Therefore, unintended changes can be detected so that a complete document need not be checked for
errors again.
• Create a utility that automatically inserts SCRIPT revision codes.
You could write a program that uses Word compare to find where words in the new data set are
different, makes a copy of the new data set, and then inserts SCRIPT revision codes (.RC) before and
after the changed words. This utility could eliminate the need to insert SCRIPT revision codes manually.
Programmers and systems administrators can:

SuperC reference 445

Compare - process options

• Generate management reports that show the quantity and type of changes in program source code.
SuperC can count the changed and unchanged lines of code in an application program. Therefore,
comparison results could be used to summarize the changes between different versions of a program.
• Retain a record of change activity.
Listing data sets can be collected and retained as a permanent record of the changes made before a
new program is released. Source code differences can help detect regressions or validate the
appropriateness of any code modifications.
• Rewrite a listing data set, including additional headers or change delimiters.
Some SuperC listings may need to be rewritten before you accept the results. For example, some
installations may require security classifications. Others may require a listing created using the WIDE
process option to have box delimiters surrounding changed sections.
• Compare data sets across nonconnected systems.
SuperC can generate a 32-bit hash sum per data set or member using the File compare type. Data sets
compared on a nonconnected processor, using SuperC, should have the same hash sums if they are
identical. A File comparison of any data set to determine a hash sum can be done by specifying the
same data set as both new and old.
• Develop additional uses for update data sets.
SuperC produces general results with generalized reports. However, your installation may have
additional requirements. There are many specialized update formats that you can use to produce
listings that match these requirements. Normal SuperC listings may not fit this type of application, but
the update data sets are more structured and should be easier to use as data input. See Appendix C,
“Update files,” on page 511 for explanations and examples of the update data sets.

Process options
You can use primary command P on either the SuperCE Utility panel or the Search-ForE Utility panel to
display one or more panels from which you can select process options. For SuperCE, the options
displayed are compatible with the compare type (File, Line, Word, or Byte) that you specified in the
Compare Type field. The compare type that you select determines the available process options (Table 29
on page 446).

Table 29. Summary of process options

Process option Valid for compare type Valid
for
WOR Searc
Keyword Description FILE LINE BYTE
D h
ALLMEMS All members ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
ANYC Any case ✓ ✓ ✓
APNDLST Append listing output ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
APNDUPD Append update ✓ ✓ ✓
ASCII Convert input file data from EBCDIC to ASCII ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
CKPACKL Check for packed format ✓ ✓ ✓
CNPML “1” on Count non-paired member/file lines ✓
page 449

COBOL “2” on For COBOL source files ✓ ✓ ✓

page 449

446 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Compare - process options

Table 29. Summary of process options (continued)

Process option Valid for compare type Valid
for
WOR Searc
Keyword Description FILE LINE BYTE
D h
COVSUM Conditional summary ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
CPnnnnn EBCDIC code page used with ASCII option ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
DLMDUP Do not list matching duplicate lines ✓
DLREFM Do not list reformatted lines ✓
DPACMT Do not process asterisk (*) comment lines ✓ ✓ ✓
DPADCMT Do not process ADA-type comments ✓ ✓ ✓
DPBLKCL Do not process blank comparison lines ✓ ✓ ✓
DPCBCMT Do not process COBOL-type comment lines ✓ ✓ ✓
DPCPCMT Do not process C++ -type comment lines ✓ ✓ ✓
DPFTCMT Do not process FORTRAN-type comment lines ✓ ✓ ✓
DPMACMT Do not process PC Assembly-type comment lines ✓ ✓ ✓
DPPLCMT Do not process PL/I-type comments ✓ ✓ ✓
DPPSCMT Do not process Pascal-type comments ✓ ✓ ✓
EMPTYOK Return RC 0 in place of RC 28. See Table 31 on page ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
480.
FINDALL Require all strings found for return code 1 ✓
FMSTOP Stop immediately a difference found ✓ ✓
FMVLNS Flag moved lines ✓
GWCBL Generate WORD/LINE comparison change bar listing ✓ ✓
IDPFX Identifier-prefixed listing lines ✓
LMCSFC “3” on Load module CSECT file compare ✓
page 449

LMTO “4” on List group member totals ✓

page 449

LNFMTO “4” on List not-found member totals only ✓

page 449

LOCS List only changed entries in summary ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

LONGLN “5” on Long lines ✓ ✓
page 449

LPSF “4” on page List previous-search-following lines ✓

449

LTO “4” on page List totals only ✓

449

MIXED Mixed input (single/double byte) text ✓ ✓ ✓

SuperC reference 447

Compare - process options

Table 29. Summary of process options (continued)

Process option Valid for compare type Valid
for
WOR Searc
Keyword Description FILE LINE BYTE
D h
NARROW “5” Narrow (side-by-side) listing ✓
on page 449

NOPRTCC No printer control columns ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

NOSEQ “2” on No sequence numbers ✓ ✓ ✓
page 449

NOSUMS No summary section ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

REFMOVR Reformat override ✓
SDUPM Search duplicate members ✓
SEQ “2” on page Ignore standard sequence number columns ✓ ✓ ✓
449

SYSIN Provide alternative DD name for process statements. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

UPDCMS8 “6” Update CMS8 format ✓
on page 449

UPDCNTL “6” Update control ✓ ✓ ✓

on page 449

UPDLDEL “6” Update long control ✓

on page 449

UPDMVS8 “6” Update MVS8 format ✓

on page 449

UPDPDEL “6” Update prefixed delta lines ✓

on page 449

UPDREV “6” on Update revision ✓ ✓

page 449

UPDREV2 “6” Update revision (2) ✓ ✓

on page 449

UPDSEQ0 “6” Update sequence 0 ✓

on page 449

UPDSUMO “6” Update summary only ✓ ✓ ✓

on page 449

VTITLE Print data set volume serial ✓ ✓ ✓

WIDE “5” on Wide (side-by-side) listing ✓
page 449

XREF Cross reference strings ✓

XWDCMP Extended word comparison ✓
Y2DTONLY “7” Compare Dates Only ✓
on page 449

448 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Compare - process options

Table 29. Summary of process options (continued)

Process option Valid for compare type Valid
for
WOR Searc
Keyword Description FILE LINE BYTE
D h

Note:
1. Valid for group LINE comparisons only.
2. COBOL, SEQ, and NOSEQ are mutually exclusive.
3. Not supported for PDSE data sets.
4. LMTO, LNFMTO, LPSF, and LTO are mutually exclusive.
5. LONGLN, NARROW, and WIDE are mutually exclusive.
6. All update (UPD) process options are mutually exclusive. Also, they cannot be used with the process option
Y2DTONLY.
7. Y2DTONLY is not supported for change bar listing (process option GWCBL).

Here are the SuperC process options, listed alphabetically:

ALLMEMS
Process all members in a PDS including ALIAS members. Without this process option, when
performing a PDS compare, SuperC does not include members with the ALIAS attribute unless
explicitly specified by a SELECT process statement. The ALLMEMS process option indicates that all
directory entries including those with the ALIAS attribute are to be processed.
Valid for FILE, LINE, WORD, and BYTE compare types and Search.
ANYC
Any case. Lowercase alphabetic characters (a to z) in source files are translated to uppercase (A to Z)
before comparison processing. (The actual input files are not modified.)
Use this option to cause strings such as "ABC", "Abc", "ABc", to compare equally.
Valid for LINE and WORD compare types and Search.
APNDLST
The APNDLST process option appends the listing output to the specified or default listing file. If the
file does not exist, it is created.
APNDLST allows you to collect updates from multiple comparisons into one listing file.
Valid for FILE, LINE, WORD, and BYTE compare types and Search.
Note:
1. You can also do this by using the SELECT process statement (and, on CMS, SELECTF) that identifies
different files/members and produces a single listing.
APNDUPD
The APNDUPD process option appends the update output to the specified or default update file. If the
file does not exist, it is created.
APNDUPD allows you to collect updates from multiple comparisons into one update file.
Valid for LINE, WORD, and BYTE compare types.
Note:
1. You can also do this by using the SELECT process statement (and, on CMS, SELECTF) that identifies
different files/members and produces a single listing.

SuperC reference 449

Compare - process options

ASCII
Process ASCII input files. For LINE or WORD compare and for Search the input data is translated from
ASCII to EBCDIC. For BYTE compare, character data in the listing is translated from ASCII to EBCDIC.
For FILE compare, this option is accepted but has no effect. Any search string given in hexadecimal
notation is assumed to be in ASCII, matching the original input data.
The ASCII code page is assumed to be ISO 8859-1 (CCSID 819). The EBCDIC code page may be
specified using the Cpnnnnn option.
Valid for FILE, LINE, WORD, and BYTE compare types, and Search.
CKPACKL
Check for packed format. This option determines if the member or sequential data set has the
standard ISPF/PDF packed header format. If required, SuperC unpacks the input data set or member
during the comparison.
Valid for LINE and WORD compare types and Search.
CNPML
Count non-paired member/file lines for the group summary list. Use this option to inventory the total
number of processed and not-processed lines. Otherwise, only the paired entries are listed with line
counts.
Valid for LINE compare type.
Note: CNPML is only used when comparing a group of files.
COBOL
Ignore columns 1 to 6 in both COBOL source files. Data in columns 1 to 6 is assumed to be sequence
numbers.
Valid for LINE and WORD compare types and Search.
COVSUM
Conditional summary section. List the final summary section or the update file for the option
UPDSUMO only if there are differences. This is useful when used in combination with APNDLST or
APNDUPD.
Valid for FILE, LINE, WORD, and BYTE compare types.
CPnnnnn
Use the specified EBCDIC code page number (up to 5 digits) when translating data using the ASCII
option. If not specified ISPF uses the terminal code page. If the terminal code page cannot be
determined or is not supported SuperC uses CP1047. All CECP and Euro Latin-1 code pages are
supported. Therefore nnnnn can be any of the following values:
Default: 1047 (Open Systems Latin-1 EBCDIC)
CECP: 37, 273, 277, 278, 280, 284, 285, 297, 500, 871
ECECP (Euro): 1140 to 1149
Valid for FILE, LINE, WORD, and BYTE compare types, and Search.
DLMDUP
Do not list matching duplicate lines. Old file source lines that match new file source lines are omitted
from the side-by-side output listing.
Valid for LINE compare type.
DLREFM
Do not list reformatted lines. Old file source lines that have the same data content (that is, all data is
the same except the position and number of space characters) as the new file lines are omitted from
the listing. Only the new file reformatted lines are included in the output.
Valid for LINE compare type.

450 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Compare - process options

DPACMT
Do not process asterisk (*) comment lines. Lines with an "*" in column 1 are excluded from the
comparison set. Other forms of assembler comments are unaffected.
Valid for LINE and WORD compare types and Search.
DPADCMT
Do not process ADA type comments. ADA comments are whole or partial lines that appear after the
special "--" sequence. Blank lines are also considered part of the comment set. This option produces
a comparison listing with comments removed and part comments blanked.
Valid for LINE and WORD compare types and Search.
DPBLKCL
Do not process blank comparison lines. Source lines in which all the comparison columns are blank
are excluded from the comparison set.
Note: It is redundant to use this option with DPADCMT, DPPLCMT, or DPPSCMT as these process
options also bypass blank comparison lines.
Valid for LINE and WORD compare types and Search.
DPCBCMT
Do not process COBOL-type comment lines. COBOL source lines with an "*" in column 7 are excluded
from the comparison set
Valid for LINE and WORD compare types and Search.
DPCPCMT
Do not process C++ end-of-line type compiler comments. These are "//" delimited comments.
DPPLCMT may also be used with DPCPCMT when the source file contains "/* … */" comments
delimiters.
Valid for LINE and WORD compare types and Search.
DPFTCMT
Do not process FORTRAN-type comment lines. FORTRAN source lines with a "C" in column 1 are
excluded from the comparison set.
Valid for LINE and WORD compare types and Search.
DPMACMT
Do not process PC Assembly-type comments. This uses the IBM PC definition for assembler
comments: comments begin with either the COMMENT assembler directive or a semi-colon (;).
Valid for LINE and WORD compare types and Search.
DPPLCMT
Do not process PL/I-type comments. PL/I, C++, C, REXX comments (/* … */) and blank lines are
excluded from the comparison set. This option produces a listing with all comments removed and
blanked.
Valid for LINE and WORD compare types and Search.
DPPSCMT
Do not process Pascal-type comments. Comments of the type (* … *) and blank lines are excluded
from the comparison. DPPSCMT and DPPLCMT may be required for some Pascal compiler comments.
This option produces a comparison listing with comments removed and part comments blanked.
Valid for LINE and WORD compare types and Search.
EMPTYOK
If search or compare finds empty files, ISRSUPC will normally terminate RC 28. If this option is set,
the return code will be changed to RC 0. Any messages that are associated with empty files (such as
ISRS001I, ISRS005I) will continue to be written.
Valid for FILE, LINE, WORD, and BYTE compare types and Search.

SuperC reference 451

Compare - process options

FINDALL
All strings must be matched at least once for the overall search to be considered successful, in which
case the return code is set to one. For a search across multiple files (for example when searching PDS
members) the matches do not have to be in the same file.
Valid for Search.
Note:
1. If all searches are not satisfied, there is NO message to indicate this, other than RC=0. To find
which searches failed, specify the XREF process option.
2. If the FMSTOP option is specified, the search will stop once it has satisfied all search strings.
FMSTOP
For FILE compare, the compare is stopped with a return code of 1 when a difference is found between
the files. This option provides a quicker way of telling if two files are different.
For search, the search of each file is stopped when a search string is found. However, if the FINDALL
option is also specified, the search is stopped only when all search strings have been found at least
once (not necessarily in the same input file), so that the FINDALL return code can be set correctly.
Valid for FILE compare type and search.
FMVLNS
Flag moved lines. Identify inserted lines from the new file that match deleted lines from the old file.
Inserted-moved lines are noted with "IM" and deleted-moved lines are noted with "DM" in the listing.
Valid for LINE compare type.
Note:
1. Maximum length for lines is 256 characters.
2. Maximum length for a contiguous block of moved lines is 32K.
GWCBL
Generates WORD/LINE comparison change bar listings. SuperC lists new file lines with change bars
("|") in column 1 for lines that differ between the new and old files. Deleted lines are indicated by
flagging the lines following the deletion.
Valid for LINE and WORD compare types.
Note:
1. LINE comparison and WORD comparison may give slightly different results due to their sensitivity
to word and line boundaries. For further details, see “Reasons for differing comparison results” on
page 479.
2. GWCBL cannot be used with the process option Y2DTONLY.
IDPFX
Identifier prefixed. Member name is prefixed to the search string lines of the listing. See Figure 292 on
page 507 for an example of a IDPFX listing.
Valid for Search.
LMCSFC
Load module CSECT file compare list. Lists the name, number of bytes, and hash sum for each load
module CSECT. Unchanged paired CSECTs are omitted when you specify the LOCS process option.
Note:
1. LMCSFC is not supported for PDSE.
Valid for FILE compare type.
LMTO
List group member totals. Lists the member summary totals and the overall summary totals for the
entire file/group. See Figure 294 on page 508 for an example of an LMTO listing.

452 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Compare - process options

Valid for Search.

LNFMTO
List "not found" member totals only. Lists the members that have no strings found for the entire file/
group.
Valid for Search.
LOCS
List only changed entries in summary. Normally, for groups of files/members being compared, SuperC
lists all paired entries in the Member Summary Listing section of the listing file. Preceding the names
of these pairs is a CHNG field to indicate whether the comparison found any differences or not. Figure
281 on page 499 shows a FILE comparison without LOCS. Figure 282 on page 500 shows a FILE
comparison with LOCS.
When LOCS is specified, only those pairs which have changes are listed in the summary section.
Valid for group FILE, LINE, WORD, and BYTE compare types.
LONGLN
Long lines. LONGLN causes SuperC to create a listing with 203 columns, reflecting up to 176 columns
from the source files. This file may exceed the maximum number of columns handled by many
printers.
Valid for LINE compare type and Search.
LPSF
List previous-search-following lines. Lists the matched string line and up to 6 preceding and 6
following lines for context. The preceding and following count may be changed by using the LPSFV
process statement. This allows a count range of 1 to 50 lines. A value of 0 is invalid, since this
produces a normal search without any options.
Valid for Search.
LTO
List totals only. List the overall summary totals for the entire file/member group. See Figure 296 on
page 509 for an example of an LTO listing.
Valid for Search.
MIXED
Mixed input. Indicates that the input text may be a mixture of both single-byte and double-byte
(DBCS) text. Double-byte strings are recognized and handled differently than if MIXED were not
specified. For instance, single byte characters are not valid within double-byte strings. Special
terminal devices (for example, 5520) allow entry of DBCS characters.
Valid for LINE and WORD compare types and Search.
NARROW
Narrow side-by-side listing. Creates a 132/133 variable listing file with only 55 columns from each
source file. Insertions and deletions are flagged and appear side-by-side in the listing output. Refer to
Figure 278 on page 497 and Figure 279 on page 498 for examples of NARROW listings.
Valid for LINE comparison.
NOPRTCC
No printer control columns. SuperC generates "normal" or NARROW listing files with record lengths of
133 columns, or WIDE or LONGLN listing with 203 columns. These listings contain printer control
columns and page separators. NOPRTCC eliminates both the page separators and page header line.
With NOPRTCC, "normal" and NARROW listings are 132 columns, and WIDE and LONGLN listings are
202. Section separators and title lines are still generated. This file may be preferred for on-line
"browsing".
Valid for FILE, LINE, WORD, and BYTE compare types and Search.

SuperC reference 453

Compare - process options

NOSEQ
No Sequence numbers. Process fixed-length 80-byte record standard sequence number columns (73
to 80) as data. This option is extraneous for any record size other than 80.
Valid for LINE and WORD compare types and Search.
NOSUMS
No Summary Section. Eliminates the group and final summary section from the output listing. This
allows the user to generate a better "clean" copy for program inspection. Conversely, it eliminates the
all-problem information in case of errors and option identification.
Valid for LINE, WORD, and BYTE compare types and Search.
REFMOVR
Reformat override. Reformatted lines are not flagged in the output listing. They are, however, counted
for the overall summary statistics and influence the return code since they are a special case of an
insert/delete pair.
Valid for LINE compare type.
SDUPM
Search duplicate members. Searches all members found in concatenated PDS data sets, even if more
than one member is found to have the same name. Searches duplicate names even if the search is for
a single member or if members are specified using the SELECT process statement.
Valid for Search.
SEQ
Sequence numbers. Ignore fixed-length 80-byte record standard sequence number columns.
Sequence numbers are assumed in columns 73 to 80 for such records. This option is invalid for any
record size other than 80.
Valid for LINE and WORD compare types and Search.
SYSIN
Provide alternate DD name for process statements. Syntax is SYSIN(DDNAME). The default ddname is
SYSIN. If this option is used, SuperC only accesses process statements via the supplied ddname. It
does not attempt to access additional process statements via the SYSIN2 DD card.
Valid for FILE, LINE, WORD, and BYTE compare types and Search.
UPDCMS8
Update CMS 8 format. UPDCMS8 produces an update file that contains both control records and
source lines from the new input file. UPDCMS8 requires that the old file has fixed-length 80-byte
records with sequence numbers. The new file may have a variable or fixed length format with an
LRECL ≤ 80.
SuperC may change the status of match lines to insert/delete pairs, enlarging the sequence number
gaps of the old file. The update file (when properly named) can be used as input to CMS XEDIT. For
information and an example of this update file, see “Update CMS sequenced 8 file” on page 513.
Valid for LINE compare type.
UPDCNTL
Update Control. Produces a control file which relates matches, insertions, deletions, and
reformattings using relative line numbers (for LINE compare type), relative word positions (for WORD
compare type), or relative byte offsets (for BYTE compare type) within the new and old file. No source
or data from either input file is included in the output file. "Do not" process options/statements are
compatible selections for the LINE compare type. For information and an example of this update file,
see “Update control files” on page 514.
Valid for LINE, WORD, and BYTE compare types.
UPDLDEL
Update Long Control with all matches and delta changes. This reflects the comparison's matches,
inserts, and deletes. You can edit this update file accepting, rejecting, or modifying the changes.

454 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Compare - process options

There are control records preceding each change and matching section. After the changes have been
audited, optionally modified, and the control records removed, you should be able to reuse this
control file as a composite new file.
Valid for LINE compare type.
UPDMVS8
Update MVS8 format. Produces a file that contains both control and new file source lines. Sequence
numbers from columns 73 to 80 of the new file are used (when possible) as insert references, while
deletes use sequence numbers from columns 73 to 80 of the old file. Both files must have fixed-
length 80-byte records. The format of the generated data may be suitable as z/OS IEBUPDTE input.
For information and an example of this update file, see “Update MVS sequenced 8 file” on page 518.
Valid for LINE compare type.
UPDPDEL
Update prefixed delta lines. Produces a control data set containing header records and complete (up
to 32K line length limit) delta lines from the input source files. Each output record is prefixed with
identification and information. The update data set is a variable-length data set reflecting the input
source files' characteristics.
Valid for LINE compare type.
UPDREV
Update Revision. UPDREV produces a copy of the new file with SCRIPT/VS .rc on/off or
BookMaster® :rev/:erev revision codes delimiting most script lines that contain changes.
You may wish to contrast the source lines delimited by the UPDREV option and a similar flagging of the
lines with changes from the output listing file as produced by the GWCBL process.
Note: The revision character used is controlled by using the REVREF process statement. For details,
see “Revision code reference” on page 471.
A REVREF process statement (for example, REVREF REFID=ABC or REVREF RCVAL=1) defines the
revision level (SCRIPT/VS tags) or reference ID (BookMaster tags). Alternatively, SCRIPT/VS .rc
delimiters may be controlled by the first record in the new file. (For example, .rc 2 | as the first
record causes level 2 to be used).
Note: BookMaster requires the REFID value to be defined with a :revision tag and "RUN=YES"
attribute to have the change character inserted in the processed document.
For information and an example of this update file, see “Revision file” on page 511.
Valid for LINE and WORD compare types.
UPDREV2
Update Revision (2). UPDREV2 is identical to UPDREV with the exception that data between the
following BookMaster tags are not deleted in the update file:

:cgraphic.
:ecgraphic.

:fig.
:efig.

:lblbox.
:elblbox.

:nt.
:ent.

:screen.
:escreen.

:table.
:etable.

:xmp.
:exmp.

SuperC reference 455

Compare - process options

Valid for LINE and WORD compare types.

UPDSEQ0
Update Sequence 0 (zero). UPDSEQ0 produces a control file that relates insertions and deletions to
the relative line numbers of the old file. Both control records and new file source lines are included in
the output file. This option is like UPDCMS8 except that it uses relative line numbers (starting with
zero) instead of the sequence numbers from columns 73 to 80. The control field after a "$" designates
the number of new source lines that follow in the update file.
Both fixed and variable record length lines are allowed. Fixed-length records shorter than 80 bytes are
padded with spaces to 80. Insertion lines are full fixed or variable length copies of the new input data
set lines. For information and an example of this update file, see “Update sequenced 0 file” on page
520.
Valid for LINE compare type.
UPDSUMO
Update Summary only. UPDSUMO produces an update file of 4 lines (new file ID, old file ID, totals
header, single summary line). The summary line is tagged with a "T" in column 1 and the summary
statistics are located at fixed offsets in the output line. The file has a record length of 132. For
information and an example of this update file, see “Update summary only files” on page 520.
Valid for LINE, WORD, and BYTE compare types.
VTITLE
Volume title. VTITLE modifies the compare listing so that the data set volume serial is printed below
the data set name.
For a multi-volume data set only the VOLSER of the first volume is displayed.
VTITLE is ignored if the NTITLE or OTITLE process option is specified.
Valid for LINE, WORD, and BYTE compare types.
WIDE
Wide side-by-side listing. Creates a 202/203 variable-length listing file with 80 columns from each
source file. Inserts and deletes are flagged and appear side-by-side in the listing output. For an
example of a WIDE side-by-side listing, see Figure 280 on page 498.
Valid for LINE compare type.
XREF
Cross reference strings. Creates a cross reference listing by search string. Can be used with IDPFX,
LMTO LNFMTO, and LTO. Not implemented for LPSF.
The XREF option can be useful when more than one search string (or search condition) is specified.
The XREF listing is implemented using a multiple pass operation for listing the "lines found" for each
individual string. Be aware that XREF adds some additional processing overhead to the normal search
process. For an example of a search XREF listing, see Figure 288 on page 504.
Valid for Search.
XWDCMP
Extended WORD comparison. The word delimiter set is extended to include non-alphanumeric
characters (including spaces). For example, "ABCD(EFGH) JKL" is 2 words using normal WORD
compare type, but 5 (3 words and 2 pseudo-words) with the XWDCMP process option.
Valid for WORD compare type.
Y2DTONLY
Compare Dates Only. Indicates that the comparison process is to be performed only on the dates
defined by the Date Definition process statements. That is, all data in the input files is ignored in the
comparison process apart from that defined by NY2C, NY2Z, NY2D, NY2P, OY2C, OY2Z, OY2D, and
OY2P process statements. For further details on these process statements, see “Date definitions” on
page 476.
Note:

456 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Compare - process options

1. Y2DTONLY causes a "record-for-record" comparison to be performed between the two input files,
whereby dates are checked for being equal or unequal. (The "high/low" comparison logic that
SuperC normally uses is not applied in the case of Y2DTONLY and, as such, the relative values of
the dates have no bearing on the result of the comparison.)
2. Y2DTONLY is not supported for the process option GWCBL (change bar listing).
Valid for LINE compare type.

Process statements
You can use process statements to tailor your comparison or search according to your requirements.
Process statements provide a powerful and flexible way of ensuring that only relevant data is compared
(or searched) and that meaningful results are produced.
Broadly speaking, the two major functions that process statements perform are:
• To select the data that is to be compared (or searched) and,
• To handle various date formats.
All process statements require a keyword followed by one or more operands. They are supplied to SuperC
in the Process Statements File.
Table 30 on page 457 lists each of the process statement keywords and shows for which compare type
each keyword can be used. The table also shows whether the keyword is valid for the SuperC Search.
Note: The sequence in which each of the process statements is listed (in Table 30 on page 457 and the
pages following) is primarily alphabetic according to the process statement keyword.
However, in the interest of keeping associated "pairs" and "sets" of process statements together, the
prefixes "N" and "O" (indicating the process statement applies to the new or old file) have been ignored
when sequencing the process statements alphabetically.

Table 30. Summary of process statements

Process option Valid for compare type Valid
for
Keyword Description FILE LINE WORD BYTE Search
NCHGT Change text: new or search file ✓ ✓ ✓
OCHGT Change text: old file ✓ ✓
CHNGV Change listing value ✓ ✓ ✓
CMPBOFS Compare byte offsets ✓
CMPCOLM Compare (search) columns: new, old, search ✓ ✓ ✓
files
CMPCOLMN Compare columns: new file ✓ ✓
CMPCOLMO Compare columns: old file ✓ ✓
CMPLINE Compare lines ✓ ✓ ✓
CMPSECT “1” on Compare sections ✓ ✓
page 459

COLHEAD “2” on Define column headings ✓

page 459

DPLINE Do not process lines (containing a string) ✓ ✓ ✓

SuperC reference 457

Compare - process options

Table 30. Summary of process statements (continued)

Process option Valid for compare type Valid
for
Keyword Description FILE LINE WORD BYTE Search
DPLINEC Do not process lines continuation ✓ ✓ ✓
NEXCLUDE “4” on Exclude data: new file ✓ ✓
page 459

OEXCLUDE “4” on Exclude data: old file ✓ ✓

page 459

NFOCUS “4” on Focus on data: new file ✓ ✓

page 459

OFOCUS “4” on Focus on data: old file ✓ ✓

page 459

LNCT Line count ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

LPSFV List previous-search-following value ✓
LSTCOLM List columns ✓ ✓
REVREF Revision code reference ✓ ✓
SELECT Select PDS members (z/OS) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
SELECT Select members/files (CMS) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
SELECT Select members (z/VSE®) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
SLIST Statements listing option ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
SRCHFOR Search for a string ✓
SRCHFORC Search for a string continuation ✓
NTITLE Alternative listing title: new file ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
OTITLE Alternative listing title: old file ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
NY2AGE Aging option: new file ✓
OY2AGE Aging option: old file ✓
NY2C Date definition: new file, character format ✓
NY2Z Date definition: new file, zoned decimal ✓
format
NY2D Date definition: new file, unsigned packed ✓
decimal format
NY2P Date definition: new file, packed decimal ✓
format
OY2C Date definition: old file, character format ✓
OY2Z Date definition: old file, zoned decimal ✓
format
OY2D Date definition: old file, unsigned packed ✓
decimal format
OY2P Date definition: old file, packed decimal ✓
format

458 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Change listing value

Table 30. Summary of process statements (continued)

Process option Valid for compare type Valid
for
Keyword Description FILE LINE WORD BYTE Search
WORKSIZE Maximum number of units for comparison ✓ ✓ ✓
Y2PAST Global date option ✓
* Process Statement comment to be printed ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
.* Process Statement comment not to be ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
printed

Note:
1. Not supported on CMS.
2. Valid only for listing types DELTA and LONG.
3. Supported only on z/VSE.
4. FILE compare type is valid only with ROWS option of NEXCLUDE, OEXCLUDE, NFOCUS, and OFOCUS.
5. Supported only on CMS.

The following sections describe each process statement in detail.

Change listing value

The CHGNV process statement specifies the number of match lines listed before and after a line with a
change: insert, delete, or reformat.
Compare Types: LINE, WORD, and BYTE
CHNGV number

number
A decimal number between 1 and 1000.
Example
Description
CHNGV 3
Lists up to 3 lines before and after change.

Change text
There are two Change Text process statements:
NCHGT
Change new (or search) input text string
OCHGT
Change old input text string
These process statements change the input source image before performing the comparison.
The relative input file ("new" or "old") is scanned for text that matches a search_string. If matching text is
found, it is replaced by a corresponding output_string before the comparison process is performed.
Question marks ("?") may be used as "wildcard" characters in the search_string or output_string.
The search_string and output_string need not be the same length. The output_string may even be a null
string.
Compare Types: LINE, WORD, and Search. OCHGT cannot be used for Search.

SuperC reference 459

Comment lines

NCHGT ' search_string ' , ' output_string '

OCHGT

, start_column
: last_start_column

search_string
A character or hexadecimal string to be replaced in the input file. For one embedded apostrophe, use
two consecutive apostrophes ('').
output_string
The replacement string to be used in the comparison. For one embedded apostrophe, use two
consecutive apostrophes ('').
start_column
The column in or after which the search_string must start. Must be greater than zero.
last_start_column
The last column in which the search_string may start. Must be separated from the start_column by a
colon, and must be equal to or greater than the start_column value. If not supplied, is the equivalent
of setting the value to start_column. To search from the start_column to the end of a variable length
row, set the last_start_column to a value larger than the length of the longest row.
Example
Description
NCHGT 'ABCD','XXXX'
Changes all strings "ABCD" in the new file to "XXXX" before performing the comparison.
OCHGT 'ABCD','XXXX',1:50
Changes all strings "ABCD" in the old file, that start within columns 1 to 50, to "XXXX" before
performing the comparison.
OCHGT 'ABCD','',1:50
Changes all strings "ABCD" in the old file, that start within columns 1 to 50, to a null string before
performing the comparison. (In the comparison process, this effectively ignores any "ABCD" strings
found in those positions in the old file.)
NCHGT 'ABCD','AB'
Changes all strings "ABCD" in the new file to "AB" before performing the comparison.
NCHGT X'7B01',':1',6
Changes all hexadecimal strings X'7B01' in the new file, that start in column 6, to the character string
":1" before performing the comparison.
NCHGT 'PREF???','NPREF'
Changes all 7-character strings with the prefix "PREF" in the new file, to the 5-character string
"NPREF" before performing the comparison.
NCHGT 'PREF???','NPREF??'
Changes the first 5 characters of all 7-character strings with the prefix "PREF" in the new file, to
"NPREF" before performing the comparison.

Comment lines
There are two tags that if found at the start of a line turn it into a comment line:
*
An asterisk as the first character on a process statement line begins a printable comment line.
.*
A period-asterisk as the first two characters on a process statement line begins a comment that is not
printed in the SuperC listing.
Compare Types: FILE, LINE, WORD, BYTE, and Search

460 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Compare byte offsets

* comment
. *

*
Must be in column 1.
.*
Must be in columns 1 and 2.
Example
Description
*
This comment prints in the SuperC listing.
.*
This comment does not print in the SuperC listing.

Compare byte offsets

The CMPBOFS process statement compares a file between byte limits. The start and stop reference
values must be hex values. The statement may be specified on one complete line or may have separate
CMPBOFS statements for each of the six keyword operands: TOP, BTM, NTOP, NBTM, OTOP, and OBTM.
Compare Type: BYTE

CMPBOFS TOP hex_offset

BTM

NTOP

OTOP

NBTM

OBTM

keyword
The keyword may have one of the following values:
TOP
Top. Defines the first byte offset position in the new and old byte compare file. Means both NTOP
and OTOP. The lowest byte position is at offset zero.
NTOP
New Top. Defines the first byte offset position in the new file for the byte compare.
OTOP
Old Top. Defines the first byte offset position in the old file for the byte compare.
BTM
Bottom. Defines the last byte position in the new and old byte compare file. Means both NBTM and
OBTM.
NBTM
New Bottom. Defines the ending point in the new file for the compare.
OBTM
Old Bottom. Defines the ending point in the old file for the compare.
hex_offset
A hexadecimal value. Do not put in apostrophes, or 'bracket' it within "X'...'".
Example
Description

SuperC reference 461

Compare (search) columns

CMPBOFS NTOP 1000 OTOP 5E00

Compare the new file from hex offset X'1000' (to the end of file) with the old file from hex offset
X'5E00' (to the end of file).
CMPBOFS NTOP 1000CMPBOFS OTOP 5E00
These two separate process statements have the same effect as the "combined" statement above.

Compare (search) columns

There are three Compare Columns process options:
CMPCOLM
Applies to both the new and old files, or search file
CMPCOLMN
Applies to the new file
CMPCOLMO
Applies to the old file
These options compare (or search) the data between column limits of the input files (or search file). Up to
15 compare ranges or individual columns are allowed and may be entered on additional CMPCOLM,
CMPCOLMN, or CMPCOLMO statements. All specified ranges of columns must be in ascending order.
Compare Types: LINE and WORD CMPCOLM is also valid for Search.
Note:
1. Some process options (SEQ, NOSEQ, and COBOL) also specify columns. The CMPCOLM, CMPCOLMN,
CMPCOLMO process statements override all these process options.
2. CMPCOLM, CMPCOLMN, CMPCOLMO cannot be used for WORD compare type or Search if the input
contains a mixture of DBCS and non-DBCS data.
,

CMPCOLM start_column

CMPCOLMN : end_column

CMPCOLMO

start_column
The starting column number to be compared or searched.
end_column
The ending column number of the range of columns to be compared or searched. (Must be separated
from the start_column by a colon.)
Example
Description
CMPCOLM 25:75
Compare columns 25 through 75 in both files (or search columns 25 through 75 in the search file).
CMPCOLM 30:60,75
Compare columns 30 through 60 and column 75 in both files (or search columns 30 through 60 and
column 75 in the search file).
CMPCOLMN 48:54
Compare columns 48 through 54 in the new file.
CMPCOLMO 87
Compare column 87 in the old file.
CMPCOLMN 17:22
CMPCOLMO 15:20
Compare columns 17 through 22 in the new file with columns 15 through 20 in the old file.

462 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Compare lines

Note: Small CMPCOLM values can sometimes lead to false matches. See “How SuperC matches input
files” on page 482 for more information.

Compare lines
The CMPLINE process statement compares two files (or search) between line limits. The statement may
be specified on one complete line or may have separate CMPLINE statements for each of the six keyword
operands: TOP, BTM, NTOP, NBTM, OTOP, and OBTM. The reference values may be line numbers or data
strings.
Compare Types: LINE, WORD, and Search
Note: Keyword operands OTOP and OBTM are invalid for Search.

CMPLINE TOP line number

NTOP String operands

OTOP

BTM

NBTM

OBTM

String operands
, ' search_string '
, start_column
: last_start_column

keyword
The keyword may have one of the following values:
TOP
Top. Defines the beginning line in the new (or search) file and old compare file. Means both NTOP
and OTOP.
NTOP
New Top. Defines the beginning line in the new (or search) file.
OTOP
Old Top. Defines the beginning line in the old file.
BTM
Bottom. Defines the ending line in the new (or search) file and old compare file. Means both NBTM
and OBTM.
NBTM
New Bottom. Defines the ending line in the new (or search) file.
OBTM
Old Bottom. Defines the ending line in the old compare file.
line number
The relative number of the record in the file.
search_string
A character or hexadecimal string enclosed within apostrophes. For one embedded apostrophe, use
two consecutive apostrophes ('').
start_column
The column in or after which the search_string must start.

SuperC reference 463

Compare sections

last_start_column
The last column in which the search_string may start. Must be separated from the start_column by a
colon.
Example
Description
CMPLINE TOP 55 BTM 99
Compare from line 55 to line 99 in both files.
CMPLINE NTOP 55 NBTM 99
Compare from line 55 to line 99 in the new file.
CMPLINE NTOP 'ABCD',5:66
Compare from where "ABCD" starts within columns 5 to 66 in new file (that is, is found within columns
5 to 69).
CMPLINE OTOP 'ABCD'
Compare from where "ABCD" first found in old file.
CMPLINE TOP X'40E2',1:1
Compare from where " S" is found for both files.

Compare sections
The CMPSECT process statement compares multiple sections from one sequential data set or PDS
member to another sequential data set or PDS member. It is not valid for a PDS group comparison of more
than one member. It is functionally similar to CMPLINE but allows you to divide the input into one or more
sections for subsequent comparison or searching. A section ID name is needed to associate all keyword
operands to a particular section. Thus, multiple sections of the input can be compared (or searched) in a
single execution of SuperC.
Compare Types: LINE, WORD, and Search
Note:
1. CMPSECT is not supported for CMS.
2. Keywords OTOP and OBTM are invalid for Search.

CMPSECT section_ID TOP line_number

NTOP String operands

1
OTOP

BTM

NBTM
1
OBTM

String operands
, ' search_string '
, start_column
: last_start_column

Notes:
1 Invalid for Search-For.

464 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Compare sections

section_ID
A character string identifier (up to 8 alphanumeric characters, no embedded spaces, can start with a
numeric) relating to a section (group of lines). It allows multiple keywords to be associated with the
same section.
keyword
The keyword may have one of the following values:
TOP
Top. Defines the beginning line in the new (or search) file and old compare section. Means the
same as NTOP and OTOP.
NTOP
New Top. Defines the beginning line in the new (or search) section.
OTOP
Old Top. Defines the beginning line in the old section.
BTM
Bottom. Defines the ending line in the new (or search) file and old compare section. Means both
NBTM and OBTM.
NBTM
New Bottom. Defines the ending line in the new (or search) section.
OBTM
Old Bottom. Defines the ending line in the old compare section.
line_number
The line number associated with the keyword.
string
A character or hexadecimal string enclosed within apostrophes. For one embedded apostrophe, use
two consecutive apostrophes ('').
start_column
The column in or after which the search_string must start.
last_start_column
The last column in which the search_string may start. Must be separated from the start_column by a
colon.
Note: If a "top" condition is not found (for example, a pattern is incorrect), the compare continues but
normally reports zero lines processed for this data set.
Example
Description
CMPSECT SECT01 TOP 25 BTM 50
Compares lines 25 through 50 in both data sets or members.
CMPSECT SECT02 NTOP 60 NBTM 70
CMPSECT SECT02 OTOP 65 OBTM 75
Compares lines 60 through 70 in the new data set to lines 65 through 75 in the old data set.
CMPSECT SECTX TOP 'PART1:',2:10
CMPSECT SECTX BTM 'END PART1:',2:10
Starts the comparison of both data sets when SuperC detects the string "PART1:" starting in columns
2 through 10 and ends the comparison when SuperC detects the string "END PART1:" starting in
columns 2 through 10.
CMPSECT SECTY NTOP 'PART2:',2:10
CMPSECT SECTY OTOP 'PART2:',6:20
CMPSECT SECTY BTM 'END PART2:'
Compares a section in the new data set to a section in the old data set. The section in the new data set
begins with the string "PART2:" in columns 2 through 10 and ends with the string "END PART2:" in
columns 2 through 10. The section in the old data set begins with the string "PART2:" in columns 6
through 20 and ends with the string "END PART2:" in columns 2 through 10.

SuperC reference 465

Define column headings

Note: All the previous statements could be combined to compare multiple sections of the new and old
data sets.

Define column headings

The COLHEAD process statement defines column headings and specifies the location and format of the
corresponding data to be displayed. For an example of a listing with column headings, see Figure 277 on
page 497.
Note: COLHEAD is not available for side-by-side listings. (See “NARROW” on page 453.)
Compare Type: LINE
COLHEAD ' heading1 ' , , start_print_column :
' heading2 '

1 2
end_print_column , N start_column : last_start_column

C
1 2
, O start_column : last_start_column
B

Notes:
1 N and O must be followed by a space.
2 C, B, D, P, or Z must be preceded by a space.

heading1
The heading to appear on the first line for the print column.
heading2
The heading to appear on the second line for the print column.
start_print_column
The starting print column for the heading specified.
end_print_column
The ending print column for the heading specified. (Must be separated from the start_print_column by
a colon.)
Note: If the print-column range is shorter than the heading specified, the heading is truncated.
N
Indicates the operands following relate to the new file.
start_column
The starting position in the new file of the data to be displayed.

466 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Do not process lines

last_start_column
The ending position in the new file of the data to be displayed. (Must be separated from the
start_column by a colon.)
Data Format Indicator
The format of the data in the new file to be displayed:
C
Character
B
Binary
D
Unsigned packed decimal
P
Packed decimal
Z
Zoned decimal
O
Indicates the operands following relate to the old file.
start_column
The starting position in the old file of the data to be displayed.
last_start_column
The ending position in the old file of the data to be displayed. (Must be separated from the
start_column by a colon.)
Data Format Indicator
The format of the data in the old file to be displayed (as for the new file).
Example
Description
COLHEAD 'START','DATE',1:7,N 1:6 P,O 11:16
Defines a print column with a heading of "START" in the first line and "DATE" in the second heading
line, headings to start in print column 1. The data to be displayed from the new file is in positions 1
through 6 and is in packed format. The data to be displayed from the old file is in positions 11 through
16 and is in (the default) character format.

Do not process lines

There are two Do Not Process Lines process statements:
DPLINE
Do not Process Lines
DPLINEC
Do not Process Lines Continuation
These options remove from the compare (or search) set all lines that can be recognized by either a unique
character string or combination of related strings all appearing on the same input line. DPLINEC is the
continuation of the immediately preceding DPLINE or DPLINEC process statement. All the strings in a
DPLINE/DPLINEC group must be found on the same input line.
A start_column or start-range can also be used to restrict the columns. Relative start_columns and start-
ranges are valid only on DPLINEC statements.
Compare Types: LINE, WORD, and Search
DPLINE ' string '
, start_column
: last_start_column

SuperC reference 467

Do not process lines

DPLINEC ' string '

, start_column
: last_start_column

, + start_column
: last_start_column
, +

string
A character or hexadecimal string enclosed within apostrophes. For one embedded apostrophe, use
two consecutive apostrophes ('').
start_column
The column in, or after which, the string must start.
last_start_column
The last column in which the string may start. (Must be separated from the start_column by a colon.)
+start_column
The relative column, following the location of the previous string (as specified in the previous DPLINE
or DPLINEC statement), in, or after which, this string must start.
last_start_column
The relative last column, following the location of the previous string (as specified in the previous
DPLINE or DPLINEC statement), in which this string may start.
+
The specified string may appear anywhere following the location of the previous string (as specified in
the previous DPLINE or DPLINEC statement).

Example
Description
DPLINE 'ABCDE'
Scans all columns for string "ABCDE"
DPLINE 'AbCde',2
Scans only column 2 for start of string "AbCde"
DPLINE 'AbCde',2:2
DPLINEC 'BDEF'
Same as above example. String "BDEF" must be on the same line as the string "AbCde"
DPLINE 'ABCDE',2:50
Scans only columns 2 through 50 for start of string "ABCDE"
DPLINE 'AB''CD',2:50
Scans only columns 2 to 50 for start of string "AB'CD"
DPLINE X'C1C27BF1',2:50
Scans only columns 2 to 50 for start of hexadecimal string X'C1C27BF1'
DPLINE 'ABC'
DPLINEC 'BDEF',+
Scans for string "ABC"; if found, then scans for string "BDEF" in the same line (following "ABC")
DPLINE 'ABC'
DPLINEC 'BDEF',+5
Scans for string "ABC"; if found, then scans for string "BDEF" starting in the 5th column after the
starting column of "ABC"
DPLINE 'ABC'
DPLINEC 'BDEF',+5:12
Scans for string "ABC"; if found, then scans for string "BDEF" starting anywhere in the 5th to 12th
columns after the starting column of "ABC"

468 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Exclude data

Exclude data
There are two Exclude Data process statements:
NEXCLUDE
Exclude applies to the new file
OEXCLUDE
Exclude applies to the old file
These statements exclude rows or columns of data from the comparison. Up to 254 "exclude" statements
can be entered for each file.
Note:
1. NEXCLUDE and OEXCLUDE statements are mutually exclusive to NFOCUS and OFOCUS statements if
using the same operand keyword (ROWS or COLS).
2. Do not use the NEXCLUDE or OEXCLUDE process statement if the Y2DTONLY process statement has
been specified.
Compare Types: FILE (ROWS option only) and LINE
NEXCLUDE ROWS start_position : end_position

OEXCLUDE COLS

start_position
If ROWS operand used, the first row (record) to be excluded from the comparison. If COLS operand
used, the first column to be excluded from the comparison.
end_position
If ROWS operand used, the last row (record) to be excluded from the comparison. If COLS operand
used, the last column to be excluded from the comparison. (Must be separated from the start_position
by a colon.)
Example
Description
NEXCLUDE ROWS 5:900
Excludes rows (records) 5 through 900 on the new file.
OEXCLUDE ROWS 1:900
Excludes rows (records) 1 through 900 on the old file.
OEXCLUDE COLS 100:199
Excludes columns 100 through 199 on the old file.

Focus on data
There are two Focus on Data process statements:
NFOCUS
Focus applies to the new file
OFOCUS
Focus applies to the old file
These two statements select (or "focus on") rows or columns of data to be compared. In other words, only
these rows or columns are considered when performing the comparison (or search) process and all other
rows or columns are ignored. Up to 254 "focus" statements can be entered for each file.
Note:
1. NFOCUS and OFOCUS statements are mutually exclusive to NEXCLUDE and OEXCLUDE statements if
using the same operand keyword (ROWS or COLS).
2. Do not use the NFOCUS or OFOCUS process statement if the Y2DTONLY process statement has been
specified.

SuperC reference 469

Line count

Compare Types: FILE (ROWS option only) and LINE

NFOCUS ROWS start_position : end_position

OFOCUS COLS

start_position
If ROWS operand used, the first row (record) to be selected for the comparison. If COLS operand used,
the first column to be selected for the comparison.
end_position
If ROWS operand used, the last row (record) to be selected for the comparison. If COLS operand used,
the last column to be selected for the comparison. (Must be separated from the start_position by a
colon.)
Example
Description
NFOCUS ROWS 28:90
Selects rows (records) 28 through 90 on the new file.
OFOCUS ROWS 150:165
Selects rows (records) 150 through 165 on the old file.
OFOCUS COLS 10:18
Selects columns 10 through 18 on the old file.

Line count
The LNCT process statement specifies the number of lines per page in the listing file.
Compare Types: FILE, LINE, WORD, BYTE, and Search
LNCT number

number
A decimal number between 15 and 999999.
Example
Description
LNCT 55
Lists up to 55 lines per page.

List columns
The LSTCOLM process statement selects a range of columns to be listed in the output. This statement
overrides the defaults that SuperC generates. Column selections must be contiguous and can be no wider
than the output listing line allocated (55/80/106/176).
Compare Types: LINE and Search
LSTCOLM start_column : last_start_column

start_column
The starting column to be listed.
last_start_column
The ending column to be listed. (Must be separated from the start_column by a colon.)
Example
Description
LSTCOLM 275:355
Lists columns 275 through 355 in the output.

470 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 List previous-search-following value

List previous-search-following value

The LPSFV process statement specifies the number of lines preceding and following the search line found
to be listed. The default value is 6.
Compare Type: Search
LPSFV number

number
A decimal number between 1 and 50.
Example
Description
LPSFV 2
Lists up to 2 lines before and after the line found.

Revision code reference

The REVREF process statement identifies the revision type (BookMaster or SCRIPT/VS) and level-ID for
delimiting UPDREV and UPDREV2 output changes. The revision delimiter may, alternatively, be specified
or indicated by using a SCRIPT/VS .rc definition statement as the first line of the new input file.
If either the UPDREV or UPDREV2 process option is specified and no REVREF process statement is in the
statements file, or the first new file source line is not a .rc script definition statement, SuperC defaults
the revision definition to a SCRIPT/VS specification of .rc 1 |.
Note: BookMaster requires the REFID value to be defined with a :revision tag. Do not forget the
"RUN=YES" attribute if you want your document to have the change-bar inserted in the processed
document.
Compare Types: LINE and WORD
REVREF REFID = name

RCVAL = number

REFID=name
Name of the revision identifier for the BookMaster :rev/:erev. tags.
RCVAL=number
Numeric revision code for SCRIPT/VS revision tags.
Example
Description
REVREF REFID=ABC
BookMaster example :rev refid=ABC. and :erev refid=ABC. tags.
REVREF RCVAL=5
SCRIPT/VS example .rc 5 on/off delimiters.

Search strings in the input file

There are two process options to search for strings in the input file:
SRCHFOR
Search a text string in the input file
SRCHFORC
Search a text string continuation
These statements search for a specified string in the input Search file. The string may be further qualified
as a word, prefix, or suffix, and where it must be positioned on the line.

SuperC reference 471

Search strings in the input file

SRCHFORC is the continuation of the immediately preceding SRCHFOR or SRCHFORC process statement.
In the case of a SRCHFOR/SRCHFORC group, all the specified strings must occur on the same line for the
search to be successful.
Compare Type: Search
SRCHFOR ' string '
, W

, P

, S

, start_column
: last_start_column

SRCHFORC ' string '

, W

, P

, S

, start_column
: last_start_column

, + start_column
: last_start_column
, +

string
The character or hexadecimal string to be searched for (enclosed by apostrophes). Use two
consecutive apostrophes ('') for one apostrophe within the search string.
W
Word. String must appear as a separate word. That is, be delimited by one or more spaces or special
characters.
P
Prefix. String must appear as the first part of some other text.
S
Suffix. String must appear as the last part of some other text.
start_column
The column in which the string must start for the search to be successful. (If a last_start_column is
also specified, see description for that operand.)
last_start_column
The "latest" column in which the string can start for the search to be successful. (Must be separated
from the start_column by a colon.)
+start_column
The relative column (starting from the column where the string for the previous SRCHFOR/SRCHFORC
was found) in which the string must start for the search to be successful. (A corresponding
last_start_column operand can be specified in a similar way to that for the start_column.)
+
The string specified can occur anywhere after the position of the previously found string for the search
to be successful.
Example
Description

472 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Select PDS members (z/OS)

SRCHFOR 'ABC'
Searches for string "ABC"
SRCHFOR 'ABC',W
Searches for the word "ABC"
SRCHFOR X'4004'
Searches for the hexadecimal string X'4004'
SRCHFOR 'A''bc'
Searches for string "A'bc"
SRCHFOR 'ABC',5:10
Searches for string "ABC" starting in positions 5 to 10
SRCHFOR 'ABC',W,5
Searches for the word "ABC" starting in position 5
SRCHFOR 'ABC'
SRCHFORC 'DEF'
Searches for strings "ABC" and "DEF" in any order in the same line.

SRCHFOR 'ABC'
SRCHFORC 'DEF',+
Searches for the string "DEF" following the string "ABC"
SRCHFOR 'ABC'
SRCHFORC 'DEF',W,+
Searches for the word "DEF" following the string "ABC"
SRCHFOR 'ABC'
SRCHFORC 'DEF',+5
Searches for the string "DEF" in the 5th position after the string "ABC"
SRCHFOR 'ABC'
SRCHFORC 'DEF',+5
SRCHFORC 'GKL'
Searches for the string "DEF" in the 5th position after the string "ABC" with the string "GKL" also
anywhere in the same line

Select PDS members

The SELECT process statement selects members from a PDS for comparison or for being searched. You
can specify as many member names as fit on one line. If you need to select additional members, enter a
new SELECT statement.
For comparisons, the new members are normally compared with old members that have the same names.
Use the colon character (:) to compare members that are not named alike.
Any number of SELECT statements may be specified.
Compare Types: FILE, LINE, WORD, BYTE, and Search
,

SELECT new_member : old_member

new_member

search_member

new_member
The name of a new PDS member that is to be compared to an old PDS member.
old_member
The name of an old PDS member that does not have a like-named member in the new PDS. This
member name, if entered, must be separated from the new_member name by a colon (:).

SuperC reference 473

Statements file listing control

If the old_member name is not used, SuperC attempts to compare the new_member to a like-named
member of the old PDS.
search_member
The name of the PDS member that is to be searched.
Example
Description
SELECT NEW1,NEW2
For a comparison, compares member NEW1 from the new PDS with the member NEW1 from the old
PDS and compares member NEW2 from the new PDS with the member NEW2 from the old PDS.
For a search, selects members NEW1 and NEW2 from the PDS to be searched.
SELECT NEW1:OLD1,MEMBER2
Compares member NEW1 from the new PDS with the member OLD1 from the old PDS and compares
member MEMBER2 from the new PDS with the member MEMBER2 from the old PDS.

Statements file listing control

The SLIST process statement turns the printing of process statements in the output listing on and off.
The initial setting of this control is ON.
Compare Types: FILE, LINE, WORD, BYTE, and Search
SLIST ON

OFF

ON
Causes the lines in the process statements file following the SLIST statement to be listed in the output
listing.
OFF
Causes the lines in the process statements file following the SLIST statement to be suppressed in the
output listing.
Example
Description
SLIST OFF
Do not list following process statements.
SLIST ON
List following process statements.

Title alternative listing

There are two process statements that let you provide an alternative title:
NTITLE
New (or search) listing file title identification
OTITLE
Old listing file title identification
These statements allow an alternative file identification to be used in the output listing (instead of the
default identifiers "New File ID" and "Old File ID").
Compare Types: FILE, LINE, WORD, BYTE, and Search (NTITLE only)
NTITLE ' title_name '

OTITLE

474 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Work size

title_name
The alternative title to be used on the output listing to identify either the "new" file (NTITLE) or the
"old" file (OTITLE). The title name must be in apostrophes and may be up to 54 characters in length.
Use two consecutive apostrophes for one apostrophe within the title name.
Example
Description
NTITLE 'New Title'
Change title heading for new (or search) file to "NEW TITLE"
OTITLE 'Old Title'
Change title heading for old file to "OLD TITLE"

Work size
The WORKSIZE process statement allows the maximum size of the comparison set to be adjusted for
comparing large files.
If WORKSIZE exceeds 99999, then the SuperC LINE comparison DELTA listing type may result in wider
columns for LEN N-LN# and O-LN#. Typically, these columns contain 5-digit values. However, when
WORKSIZE exceeds 5 digits, and providing the standard record length of the listing is not affected, the
columns are extended to contain 7-digit values. If the length of the input source lines in the listing are
such that 7-digit values cannot fit, the report outputs 5-digit values by default, and only reports 7-digit
values when significant characters are otherwise lost.
Compare Type: FILE, LINE, WORD, BYTE. It is ignored if specified on a SEARCH.
32000
WORKSIZE
max_size

max_size
The maximum number of units for comparison. Maximum value is 9999999.

Year aging
There are two process statements for year aging:
NY2AGE
Aging applies to the new file
OY2AGE
Aging applies to the old file
These statements age all the defined dates in either the new or old file. That is, the number of years
specified is added to the "year" portion of each defined date in the file concerned.
Note: Dates are defined by the Date Definition process statements NY2C, NY2Z, NY2D, NY2P, OY2C,
OY2Z, OY2D, and OY2P; see “Date definitions” on page 476.
Compare Type: LINE
NY2AGE years

OY2AGE

years
A number (0 to 999) indicating the number of years by which all defined dates in the file are to be
aged.
Example
Description

SuperC reference 475

Date definitions

OY2AGE 28
Ages all defined dates in the "old" file by 28 years before being compared. The listing shows the
original date. For example, a defined date in the "old" file with a value equating to March 1, 1997, is
aged to March 1, 2025 before being compared to its equivalent in the "new" file.

Date definitions
There are eight process statements that set date definitions:
NY2C
New file, date in character format
NY2Z
New file, date in zoned decimal format
NY2D
New file, date in unsigned packed decimal format
NY2P
New file, date in packed decimal format
OY2C
Old file, date in character format
OY2Z
Old file, date in zoned decimal format
OY2D
Old file, date in unsigned packed decimal format
OY2P
Old file, date in packed decimal format
Note:
1. If any Date Definition process statements are used, also use a Y2PAST process statement, so that the
"century" portion of the date can be determined where necessary. (If a Y2PAST process statement is
not present, a default fixed window based on the current year is used.)
2. For a description of each date format (character, zone, decimal, and packed), see “Date formats
(keyword suffixes: C, Z, D, P)” on page 478.
3. If any Date Definition process statements are used, an information line is generated on the listing
output (see Figure 276 on page 496).
4. Do not use any Date Definition process statements if using the COLHEAD process statement.
Defines the location and format of a date field on the input file. Up to 254 date definition statements can
be entered for each file. The matching of the new to the old dates is performed according to the sequence
that the statements are entered. That is, the first defined old date is matched to the first defined new
date.
If the number of date definition statements for one file differ from the number of date definition
statements for the other file, the location and format details for the "missing" date definition statements
are assumed to be the same as their counterpart date definition statements for the other file.
Compare Type: LINE

476 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Date definitions

NY2C

NY2Z

NY2D

NY2P

OY2C

OY2Z

OY2D

OY2P

start_column : last_start_column date_format

1
EMPTY

Notes:
1 The EMPTY keyword, when used, must be preceded by a space
start_column
The first position of the date in the input file.
last_start_column
The last position of the date in the input file. (Must be separated from the start_column by a colon.)
date_format
A mask representing the format of the date.
For a Julian date, the mask must be either YYDDD or YYYYDDD.
For date formats other than Julian, the mask must contain 2 "D"s (representing the day part of the
date field), 2 "M"s (representing the month), and either 2 or 4 "Y"s (representing the year) or, if the
date contains a year only, it must contain either 2 or 4 "Y"s.
If the date is character, there may also be a separator between the different parts. In this case, you
can represent the position of the separators by one of the following characters:
S (indicates that this position within the date is not used in comparison)
. (period, used in comparison)
/ (forward slash, used in comparison)
: (colon, used in comparison)
Note: The length of the date_format mask must correspond to the length of the date in the input file
as indicated by the values of start_column and last_start_column.
EMPTY
This keyword is optional. If it is entered, the defined date field is checked for containing zeros, spaces,
low-values, or high-values before commencing the comparison process. If any of these values are
found, the date is not converted according to the Y2PAST criteria but instead is converted to an
extended format with the initial value. For example, a date defined by the process statement OY2C
YYMMDD which contains all zeros is compared as "YYYYMMDD" with a value of zeros.
Example
Description
NY2C 1:8 MMDDYYYY 9:16 MMDDYYYY 21:28 YYYYMMDD
The new file has dates in character format in columns 1 to 8, 9 to 16 and 21 to 28.
OY2P 5:8 YYMMDD 9:12 YYMMDD
The old file has dates in packed decimal format in columns 5 to 8 and 9 to 12.
OY2P 101:104 MMDDYY
The old file has a date in packed decimal format in columns 101 to 104,

SuperC reference 477

Global date

NY2Z 101:108 YYYYMMDD

The new file has a date in zoned decimal format in columns 101 to 108.
NY2C 101:110 YYYY.MM.DD
The new file has a date in character format (with separators) in columns 101 to 110.
OY2C 93:98 DDMMYY EMPTY
The old file has a date in character format in columns 93 to 98. If the date field contains zeros,
spaces, low-values, or high-values, the date in the old file is converted before being compared to an
extended format (DDMMYYYY) with a value of all zeros, spaces, low-values, or high-values.

Date formats (keyword suffixes: C, Z, D, P)

C
Character date data.
Examples:
'96' is represented as hexadecimal X'F9F6'
If using a MMDDYY format, March 21, 1996 is represented as hexadecimal X'F0F3F2F1F9F6'
Z
Zoned decimal date data. The date can be represented as follows:
X'xyxy' to X'xyxyxyxyxyxyxyxy'
y is hexadecimal 0 to 9 and represents a date digit. x is hexadecimal 0 to F and is ignored.
Examples:
'96' is represented as hexadecimal X'F9C6' or X'0906'
'03211996' is represented as hexadecimal X'F0F3F2F1F1F9F9C6' or X'0003020101090906'
P
Packed decimal date data. The date can be represented as follows:
X'zyyx' to X'zyyyyyyyyx'
y is hexadecimal 0 to 9 and represents a date digit. x is hexadecimal A to F and is ignored. The z part is
normally zero but is not ignored.
Examples:
'96' is represented as hexadecimal X'z96F' or X'z96C'
'1996' is represented as hexadecimal X'z1996C'
'03211996' is represented as hexadecimal X'z03211996x' (the x part is ignored).
'96203' (a Julian date) is represented as hexadecimal X'96203C'
D
Unsigned packed decimal date data. The date can be represented as follows:
'yy' to 'yyyyyyyy'
y is hexadecimal 0 to 9 and represents a date digit.
Examples:
'96' is represented as hexadecimal X'96'
'03211996' is represented as hexadecimal X'03211996'

Global date
The Y2PAST process statement specifies a 100-year period (used for determining the century-part of a
date when only a 2-digit year has been specified). The Y2PAST process statement uses either a fixed or
sliding window.
Note: Always use the Y2PAST process statement if one of the Date Definition process statements (NY2C,
NY2Z, NY2D, NY2P, OY2C, OY2Z, OY2D, OY2P) has also been used.

478 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Reasons for differing comparison results

Compare Type: LINE

Y2PAST fixed

sliding

fixed
A 4-digit number indicating a fixed window.
sliding
A 1-digit or 2-digit number indicating a sliding window.
Example
Description
Y2PAST 1986
A fixed window specifying a 100-year period from 1986 to 2085.
Y2PAST 70
A sliding window specifying (based on the current year being 2001) a 100-year period from 1931 (70
years in the past) to 2030.
Y2PAST 5
A sliding window specifying (based on the current year being 2001) a 100-year period from 1996 (5
years in the past) to 2095.

Reasons for differing comparison results

When comparing two sets of input date, it is possible that different compare types (FILE, LINE, WORD,
and BYTE) gives slightly different results.
In order for SuperC to detect only the types of differences that are of interest to you, make sure that you
are using the most appropriate compare type and, if necessary, the appropriate process options and
process statements to select only the data that you actually want compared.
Here are some of the reasons why different compare types can produce different results:
• FILE and BYTE comparisons inspect the complete file (every byte) for differences. LINE and WORD
comparisons use designated columns that are either specified by you or are within the default range of
columns assigned by SuperC.
For example, a FILE comparison of a file with fixed-length records of eighty bytes compares all columns
(that is, all bytes), whereas a LINE comparison of the same file compares columns 1 to 72 (the default).
Since the sequence number columns in the file are ignored in the LINE compare, the final results can be
different. In this case, for consistent results, specify the LINE compare type and the NOSEQ process
option.
• LINE comparisons "pad" the shorter records with spaces when comparing files with different record
lengths. However, BYTE comparisons only "recognize" spaces when they are already present in the
input file.
• For files with input line lengths <= 256, a LINE comparison is performed after padding the lines to the
longest line length. Consequently two lines, originally of unequal length, compare equally only if the
spaces at the end of the longer line coincide with the shorter line's space padding.
• For files with input line lengths > 256, a LINE comparison is performed on the lines without space
padding. As a result, lines of unequal length are always a mismatch.
• Different compare types have different sensitivity to being resynchronized. Synchronization for a LINE
comparison begins at the beginning of a line and ends at the end of a line. Synchronization for a WORD
comparison begins anywhere on a line on any word boundary and ends at the end of a word.
Synchronization for a BYTE comparison extends only one byte anywhere on a line.
• LINE comparisons detect lines that have been reformatted. However, reformatted lines have no effect
on WORD comparisons as spaces and blank lines are ignored.

SuperC reference 479

Return codes

• Results may differ depending on which input file is specified as the "new" file and which is specified as
the "old" file. The matching algorithm is sensitive to the largest matched set it finds between files. There
may be occasions where more than one set of matched data meets this criteria. The rules for deciding
which set to choose among the equals depends upon the contents of each file and which file was
nominated as the "new" file.

Return codes
SuperC displays the completion message at the top of the Primary Comparison Menu or at the top of the
Primary Search Menu. The message is an interpretation of the following return codes.

Table 31. SuperC return codes

Code Meaning
0 Normal completion.
Comparison
The input files are the same. No differences found.
Search
No matches found in the input file.

1 Normal completion.
Comparison
Differences were found in the input files.
Search
Matches found in the input file.

4 WARNING. Erroneous input was detected. Files were compared but results may not be
as expected. Check listing for more information.
6 WARNING. Old file did not contain proper sequence numbers, or the sequence number
intervals were not sufficiently large to contain insert activity (UPDCMS8 and
UPDMVS8).
8 ERROR. Error on old input file. Files were NOT compared. Check listing for more
details.
16 ERROR. Error on new or search source file. The operation was NOT performed. Check
listing for more details.
20 ERROR. I/O error writing to update file, FILEDEF missing, or APNDUPD process option
cancelled because of inconsistent file attributes.
24 ERROR. I/O error writing to the output listing file.
25 ERROR. The old output file attributes are not consistent with the new listing
requirements. The APNDLST process option can not be accepted and the operation is
immediately terminated.
26 ERROR. The output file caused a "disk full"condition. The output listing is incomplete.
27 ERROR. The output file is a "read-only" disk. All I/O operations to the disk is
suppressed.
28 ERROR. No data was compared because of invalid file names, no commonly named
members of both input file groups, or one or both input files were empty.
If you specify EMPTYOK as an option, this return code is changed to RC 0. ISRSUPC
continues to print any messages that relate to RC 28.

480 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 SuperC/search-for technical overview

Table 31. SuperC return codes (continued)

Code Meaning
32 ERROR. Insufficient storage was available for SuperC to execute. Refer to output listing
for more details.
36 ERROR. z/VSE file would not open.
40 ERROR. z/VSE label information not available.
48 ERROR. z/VSE Librarian member not found.
52 ERROR. z/VSE VSAM Showcat failed.
56 ERROR. z/VSE device type not supported.
60 ERROR. Wrong length record read on tape input.

SuperC and search-for technical overview

This topic describes these SuperC and Search-For processes:
• How SuperC and Search-For filter input file lines
• How SuperC matches input file lines
• How SuperC partitions and processes large files
• Why SuperC compare types may produce different results
• How to directly invoke the SuperC and Search-For programs.

How SuperC and search-for filter input file lines

The SuperC and Search-For utilities apply process options and process statements to the input file or files
in a specific order. Figure 270 on page 482 shows schematically the effects, in the order that they occur,
of the various “filtering” process options and process statements, on the compare and Search-For input
lines. The options and statements nearer the top affect the input line before options or statements nearer
the bottom.

SuperC reference 481

SuperC/search-for technical overview

Figure 270. Priority for filtering input lines

How SuperC matches input files

When SuperC compares files, it determines matching and missing lines or words based only on the data
content of the input files. It does not use any synchronization data, such as column or sequence numbers,
to find matching file sections. It does not use the common “start at the top”, then look-ahead or look-back
method to determine large sections of matching data. Neither does it sort the data before comparing.
SuperC is unique in that, except for files that are identical, it does not determine matching sections until it
has completely read both files. Missing data units are units that are out of sequence, as opposed to units
that have been deleted from a file. During a comparison, SuperC finds all matches, locates the largest set
of matching data units, and recursively allows this compare set to divide the file into additional partitioned
subsections. All new subsections are processed for corresponding matches. The subprocess ends when
no more matches can be found within corresponding new and old file partitioned subsections. Sections
classified as inserted or deleted are corresponding areas for which SuperC could not find a match.

482 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 SuperC/search-for technical overview

Figure 271 on page 483 shows an example of a comparison of two files that are identified as having lines
represented by A, B, C, ... F. The SuperC algorithm attempts to find the best match set from the input
lines. Notice how the match set requires consideration of duplicate lines.

New File Lines Old File Lines

───A─── ────────────Matched Line───────── ───A───

Inserted ───B─── ───I─── Deleted

Inserted ───C─── ┌─────────Matched Line───────── ───D─── Largest ──┐

│ │
───D─── ──┘ ┌──────Matched Line───────── ───E─── Set │
│ │
───E─── ─────┘ ┌───Matched Line───────── ───F─── Unchanged──┘
│
───F─── ────────┘ ───B─── Deleted

Inserted ───A─── ───C─── Deleted

───H─── ────────────Matched Line───────── ───H───

───A─── ────────────Matched Line───────── ───A───

───A─── Deleted

Sequence Left Side Right Side

Largest Set ─ D E F Divides Set D E F

Top Set ─ A Matches A
Leftover Top Set ─ B C Mismatches I
Largest Bottom Match ─ H A Matches H A
Leftover Bottom Set ─ A Mismatches B C A

Note: The inserted &odq.A&cdq. on the lower left cannot connect with the
deleted &odq.A&cdq. on the bottom right due to H A barrier.

Figure 271. Find match example

How SuperC corrects false matches

Occasionally, SuperC reports that it has detected a false line or word match and has corrected the results
in the listing and summary report. Any affected matched pair has been reclassified as an insert/delete
pair. Any resulting error might be in the masking of potential matches that would be overlooked due to the
early false match coupling. That is an equivalent yet undiscovered match may be overlooked due to the
premature false matching. The condition should be of minor importance since it happens so rarely and the
masking effect has a low probability of affecting the final results.
An equally important SuperC concern would be whether it finds the best match set and whether it finds all
matches. Unfortunately, the match-finding algorithm is not perfect. Ignoring the false match masking
problem, and the large number of duplicate source lines obscuring the match set possibilities, occasional
matches can be overlooked. Comparison of files with small CMPCOLM values can sometimes lead to false
matches. Depending on the data, increasing CMPCOLM can sometimes alleviate the number of false
matches reported.
Many Artificial Intelligence (AI) computer programs, like SuperC, only approximate the human intellect
that can sometimes make a better match set selection. Furthermore, these same computer programs are
designed for speed and efficiency. They necessarily make certain simplifying assumptions and contain
additional operational weaknesses. SuperC , however, does not fail to correctly classify mismatches and
does not incorrectly classify a mismatch as a match.

How SuperC partitions and processes large files

In SuperC, there is no limit on the size of files processed in terms of lines, words or bytes. Yet it had an
internal methodology based upon a maximum field size for each work area storage structure (for example,
array size and precision of variables). A method was developed to do the overall comparison process by
breaking very large files into smaller comparison partitions and combining the intermediate results into
one overall result. The process had to be done carefully so that it did not look as if the file partitioning was

SuperC reference 483

SuperC/search-for technical overview

determined after some arbitrary limit was reached. That could affect the results on either side of the
break point. The partitioning had to be done heuristically based upon the comparison results from the
previously inspected intermediate process.
A fixed partitioning size of 32K lines/words/bytes was selected that was based on some test studies. The
compare processes up to this limit and iteratively adjusts the intermediate ending break point of the pass
by an adaptive method. Continuation from the adjusted end point is the basis for the next pass. That end
point might even be adjusted to some previous records that had already been processed. The objective is
to achieve the next best compare set for future unprocessed records.
The overall process ends when both files reach the End-of-File during a pass. The results from the
intermediate passes are combined into one user end result. Most large compares are never suspected to
have been partitioned and recombined.
The unlimited file size solution may appear, at first, unnecessary for Line compare using a virtual address
space that is nearly unlimited. Yet there often has to be some limit—even if it is a high value. Programs
need to store data with predetermined precision limits and programs work better with limits that are
reasonable. Word compare and Byte compare eventually needed a partitioning limit for the compare as
the number of words and bytes become large even for small file sizes.
Because of this partitioning process, comparisons of large files may take a long time.

Comparing and searching alias members

When you compare or search all of the members of two partitioned data sets using the command S * (to
select all entries in the directory) on the member list, any members that have alias entries are processed
once for the real name, and once for each alias entry. For compare, unpaired aliases appear in the same
list as unpaired real members as "NON-PAIRED NEW FILE MEMBERS" or "NON-PAIRED OLD FILE
MEMBERS".
When you compare or search entire data sets by using an asterisk (*) for a member name pattern, only
real members, not aliases, are processed. For compare, all directory entries (for both real members and
aliases) are analyzed. Messages appear at the end of the SuperC output listing that give information about
unpaired alias entries for paired real members as follows:

"NEW" PAIRED MEMBERS WITH "NEW" ALIAS MEMBERS NOT PAIRED FOLLOW:
MEMBER1/ALIAS1 MEMBER1/ALIAS2 MEMBER2/ALIAS1 ...
or
"OLD" PAIRED MEMBERS WITH "OLD" ALIAS MEMBERS NOT PAIRED FOLLOW:
MEMBER1/ALIAS1 MEMBER1/ALIAS2 MEMBER2/ALIAS1 ...

followed by a listing of the unpaired member/alias entries.

Note:
1. Consider the ALLMEMS process option if you want to compare all directory entries, including aliases,
but do not want to select them from a member list. This is useful for batch comparisons of entire load
modules.
2. This listing section is not created for non-load module data sets containing alias entries.

Comparing load modules

SuperC compare of load module data might show unexpected differences. This is because SuperC
compares all the data in the load module as it is found on DASD, and does not attempt to decode which
portions are executable, and which might contain uninitialized storage.
The complex data format on DASD is dependent on the load module data set block size, and defined
storage definitions which are controlled by the linkage editor. The size stored by the linkage editor in the
PDS directory may differ from the DASD data byte count reported by SuperC and Browse depending on
the characteristics of the load module.

484 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 SuperC/search-for technical overview

If load modules are exact copies of each other, SuperC should find no differences. If load modules have
been link-edited from the same object but with different block sizes, SuperC will probably report they are
different.
Because of the relative DASD addresses (TTRs) in load modules, the recommended procedure for
comparing load modules which have not been reblocked is to use the AMBLIST utility with LISTLOAD
OUTPUT=MODLIST against both load modules, then use SuperC to compare the two AMBLIST outputs.
There is no easy way to compare load modules with different internal record sizes such as occurs when
COPYMOD or LINKEDIT processes them.

Comparing CSECTs
SuperC compare of PDS Load Module Csects (using the LMCSFC Process Option) can return unexpected
differences. SuperC looks at the length of the Csect from the control record immediately preceding the
Csect data record in the load module. This physical data length can differ from the logical Csect data
length in the load module header that the AMBLIST utility uses to report the length of the Csect.
SuperC always compares all of the physical data in each Csect. You can use SuperC Byte compare to
examine the Csect data content in detail.
Note: This option is only valid for PDS load modules.

How to directly invoke SuperC and search-for

You can run the SuperC and Search-For programs directly without using the ISPF-provided utilities
(Options 3.12, 3.13, 3.14, or 3.15). This requires an installation (or system programmer) to customize a
CLIST (for interactive usage) or a PROCLIB procedure (for batch execution of a catalog procedure).
Although these methods are not warranted by the ISPF product, a sample CLIST and a sample PROCLIB
procedure are distributed as an aid in the SAMPLIB data set as members ISRSCLST and ISRSPROC.
The sample CLIST allows a TSO user to enter a line command to communicate the operational
parameters directly to the SuperC program without displaying the ISPF panels. The sample CLIST will
request entry of a search pattern or string. A sample SuperC call as entered on the terminal might look
like:

superc newfile(.newdata.file) oldfile(ludlow.olddata.file)

or

exec clist(superc) 'new(.newdata.file) old(ludlow.olddata.file)'

where superc is the command and newfile and oldfile are the keywords for the input files.
The SuperC load module may be supported using a private library or a concatenated system library. The
installation is responsible for making the corresponding changes to the sample CLIST.
The sample CLIST uses this format:

SUPERC NEW(dsn) OLD(dsn) {keyword(parameter) .... }

Note: Avoid using uninitialized data sets (that is, empty sequential data data sets with no end-of-file
marker) in the concatenation of data sets to be compared. Including these data sets in the search can
lead to unpredictable results.
The keywords and parameters are:
CTYPE
Specifies the compare type. The parameter can be one of the SuperC compare types (File, Line, Word,
or Byte). To call the Search-For program, use CTYPE(SRCH).
LISTING
Specifies the listing type. The parameter can be one of the SuperC listing types.

SuperC reference 485

SuperC/search-for technical overview

OUTDD
Specifies the name of the Listing Data Set. Use a fully qualified dsn or use a period (.) to precede the
dsn with SYSPREF. The use of the period is a compromise because fully qualified names enclosed in
quotes are difficult to pass in CLISTs.
BROWSE
Specifies the auto display program.
SYSIN
Specifies whether SuperC prompts the user for the process statements or uses a statements data set.
The parameters can be PROMPT or the name of the statements data set.
DELDD
Specifies the name of the update data set.
PROCESS
Specifies the process options. The parameter can be a SuperC or Search-For process option. Not all
options are allowed with each compare type (for example, GWCBL is valid only with Line and Word
compare) or with other options (for example, you cannot use SEQ with COBOL). See “Process options”
on page 446 for more information.
When coding the JCL yourself, the following options are specified in the PARM field. Each may be
separated by either a space or a comma.
compare_type
The type of comparison you want performed: FILE, LINE, WORD, or BYTE. When specifying the
compare type in the PARM parameter, add the suffix "CMP" (for example, WORD becomes
WORDCMP).
listing_type
The type of listing you want from the comparison: OVSUM, DELTA, CHNG, LONG, or NOLIST. When
specifying the listing type in the PARM parameter, add the suffix "L" (for example, CHNG becomes
CHNGL).
process_options
Process options are keywords that direct SuperC how to perform the comparison or format the listing.
Process options can be separated by spaces or commas.

Examples
This example shows a SuperC compare JCL sequence:

//COMPARE EXEC PGM=ISRSUPC,PARM=('LINECMP,CHNGL,UPDCNTL')

//STEPLIB DD DSN=ISPF.LOAD,DISP=SHR
//NEWDD DD DSN=DLUDLOW.PDS(TEST1),DISP=SHR
//OLDDD DD DSN=DLUDLOW.PDS(TEST2),DISP=SHR
//OUTDD DD SYSOUT=A
//DELDD DD DSN=DLUDLOW.UCTL1,DISP=OLD
//SYSIN DD *
CMPCOLM 2:72
/*

The sequence allows the SuperC program to compare two input data sets and generates a line compare
CHANGE type listing to the spool output queue and a separate UPDCNTL update control data set output
using source columns 2 through 72.
A catalog procedure is a set of “canned” JCL statements that you can invoke as an extension of your own
JCL. Here is a simplified JCL sequence:

//SUPERC JOB
// EXEC SUPERC,
// NEWFILE='DLUDLOW.GROUP.DATA1',
// OLDFILE='MFRAME.GROUP.DATA2',
// LISTING=DELTA

The keywords NEWFILE, OLDFILE, and LISTING cause symbolic substitution before the job submittal.
Note: A sample catalog procedure is contained in the SAMPLIB member ISRSPROC.

486 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 SuperC/search-for technical overview

A simplified Search-For JCL sequence follows. The SRCHFOR process statement used in the search is part
of the JCL instead of a separate SYSIN data set. Concatenated data sets are also shown as part of the JCL.

// JOB
//SEARCH EXEC PGM=ISRSUPC,PARM=('SRCHCMP,ANYC')
//STEPLIB DD DSN=ISPF330.LOAD,DISP=SHR
//NEWDD DD DSN=USERID.PDS,DISP=SHR
// DD DSN=USERID.PDS2,DISP=SHR
//OUTDD DD SYSOUT=*
//SYSIN DD *
SRCHFOR 'NEEDLE',W,10:20
/*
//

A very simplified Search-For sample CLIST follows:

PROC 0
FREE FI(NEWDD,SYSIN,OUTDD,SYSIN2)
ALLOC FI(NEWDD) DA('USERID.PDS(TEST1)') REUSE SHR
ALLOC FI(SYSIN) DA('USERID.SYSIN.DATA(STMTS)') REUSE SHR
DELETE 'USERID.USER.PDS'
ALLOC FI(OUTDD) DA('USERID.USER.LIST') SPACE(10,20) RECFM(F B) +
REUSE TRACKS RELEASE
CALL 'USERID.ISPF.LOAD(ISRSUPC)' 'SRCHCMP,ANYC'
/******************************************************/
/* SIMPLE CLIST WITH MINIMUM STATEMENTS. */
/* “USERID.SYSIN.DATA(STMTS)” MUST CONTAIN SRCH STMTS.*/
/******************************************************/

SuperC reference 487

SuperC/search-for technical overview

488 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Understanding the listings

Appendix B. Understanding the listings

SuperC allows you to produce a range of listings (reports) which provide detailed information about the
results of your comparison or search.

General listing format

The format and content of each type of listing depends on:
• Whether you are using the SuperC Comparison or the SuperC Search
• The listing type used
Note: The NOLIST listing type suppresses the generation of any listing output or listing file.
• Whether you are comparing (or searching) a single file or a file group
• The compare type used (in the case of the SuperC Comparison)
• The process options used
• The process statements used
Note: Dates in the heading lines on the sample listing output in this document appear in the format
MM/DD/YYYY. The dates in the heading lines appear in the format YYYY/MM/DD.

How to view the listing output

The listing output is always written to a listing file (unless the NOLIST listing type is used), from which you
can print the listings.
The following pages contain:
• A description of the general format of the comparison listing (see “The comparison listing” on page
489), followed by examples of various listings produced by the SuperC Comparison.
• A description of the general format of the search listing (ssee “The search listing” on page 501),
followed by examples of various listings produced by the SuperC Search.

The comparison listing

SuperC comparison listings consist of four basic parts (although not all parts are present for all types of
listing output produced):
• Page Headings (see “Page headings” on page 490)
• Listing Output Section (see page “Listing output section” on page 490)
• Member Summary Listing (see “Member summary section” on page 492)
• Overall Summary Section (see “Overall summary section” on page 494)

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2019 489

Understanding the listings

Page headings
SuperC generates a page heading at the top of each page. The heading consists of two lines of
information.

1 ASMFSUPC - MVS FILE/LINE/WORD/BYTE/SFOR COMPARE UTILITY- V1R6M0 (07/11/2008) 07/11/2008 12.31 PAGE 1
NEW: NEW TEST1 A OLD: OLD TEST1 A

Figure 272. Example of page heading lines for the comparison listing

Figure 272 on page 490 shows typical page heading lines. The first line contains:
• Printer control page eject character ("1" in column one. Not present when the NOPRTCC process option
is specified)
• "Platform-identifier". This shows "MVS".
• Program identification title including version and the version date: V1R6M0 (07/11/2008)
• The date and time of the compare
• The page number
Note: The program version and program date are important when reporting suspected SuperC problems.
The second heading line identifies the new and old files. Normally this line shows the file IDs of the new
and old files. However, if the NTITLE and OTITLE process statements have been specified then the
corresponding alternative file titles are shown instead of the file IDs.

Listing output section

The listing output section shows where and what the changes are. Figure 273 on page 490 is an example
of a Listing Output Section for a LINE comparison with a listing type of DELTA.

1 LISTING OUTPUT SECTION (LINE COMPARE)

2 ID SOURCE LINES |…| TYPE LEN N-LN# O-LN#

3 ----+----1----+----2----+-|…|-+----8
4 I - 970521 |…| RPL= 1 00001 00001
5 INFO Date cols 11:15 packed 2|…|
6 D - 970522
5 INFO Date cols 11:14 packed 1|…|

Figure 273. Example of the listing output section of the comparison listing

1
Section title line. It tells you that this is a LINE comparison. Possible compare types are BYTE, FILE,
LINE, and WORD.
2
Column header line.
ID
A two-column prefix code that identifies the status of the line. See “Listing prefix codes” on page
491.
SOURCE LINES
The actual text or data from the source files. Under this heading, the actual data from the files is
listed.
TYPE
Further breakdown of the ID field. See “Type of difference codes” on page 492 for information
about TYPE codes.
LEN
The "length" or number of consecutive lines of the selected type.

490 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Understanding the listings

N-LN#
Indicates the relative record (line) number of this line (or where it is to be inserted) in the new
source file. Numbers are in decimal.
O-LN#
Indicates the relative record (line) number of this line (or where it was deleted from) in the old
source file. Numbers are in decimal.
3
The scale of the column positions of the input source lines.
4
An inserted (I) line. The RPL in TYPE indicates that it is a replacement line. This replacement involves
the line 00001 in both files.
Note: Occasionally, you may see some "unusual" characters on the inserted (I) and deleted (D) lines.
These characters represent data that is in a non-character (and therefore not directly printable)
format in the input record. Ignore them.
5
An information line that is generated on a comparison listing when a Date Definition process
statement is used (see “Date definitions” on page 476) and when the preceding inserted (I) line or
deleted (D) line contains a date. The information line shows you the content of the date field as it
exists on the input file and the date as used in the comparison. For a full example, see Figure 276 on
page 496.
6
A deleted (D) line.

Listing prefix codes

SuperC output lines are flagged with the following prefix codes listed under the ID column:
(space)
Match No prefix code means the data is the same in both files.
I
Insert Data that is in the new file, but is missing 5 from the sequence in the old file.
D
Delete Data that is in the old file, but is missing 5 from the sequence in the new file.
DR
Delete Replace For BYTE compare type only. The bytes in the old file that were replaced by the bytes
shown in the preceding insert (I) line.
RN
Reformat New For LINE compare type only. A reformatted line in the new file. This line contains the
same data as the old file line, but with different spacing.
RO
Reformat Old For LINE compare type only. A line in the old file that is reformatted in the new file. This
line is not shown if the DLREFM process option is used.
MC
Match Compose For WORD compare type only. A line containing words that match. The line may also
contain spaces to show the relationship between the matching words and any inserted or deleted
words. Inserted and deleted words are shown in following insert compose (IC) and delete compose
(DC) lines. See Figure 283 on page 501 for an example using a WORD compare type.
IC
Insert Compose For WORD compare type only. A line containing words from the new file that are not in
the old file. This line normally follows a match compose (MC) line.

5 "Missing" data is data that is missing from the data sequence but may exist in some other part of the file.

Understanding the listings 491

Understanding the listings

DC
Delete Compose For WORD compare type only. A line containing words from the old file that are not in
the new file. This line normally follows a match compose (MC) or insert compose (IC) line.
IM
Insert Moved For comparison listings created using the FMVLNS (flag moved lines) process option. A
line in the new file that also appears in the old file, but has been moved. If the line was reformatted,
this is indicated by a flag to the right of the listing.
DM
Delete Moved For comparison listings created using the FMVLNS (flag moved lines) process option. A
line in the old file that also appears in the new file, but has been moved. If the line was reformatted,
this is indicated by a flag to the right of the listing.
|
Change Bar For comparison listings created using the GWCBL (generate WORD/LINE comparison
change bar listing) process option. A change bar showing that words/lines were either inserted or
deleted.

Type of difference codes

At the far right of some listings are headings that provide additional information about the numbers and
types of differences SuperC has found. Headings you may see are:
MAT=
Number of matched lines.
RFM=
Number of reformatted lines.
RPL=
Number of replaced lines.
INS=
Number of lines that are in the new file, but missing in the old file.
DEL=
Number of lines that are in the old file, but missing in the new file.
IMR=
Number of lines in the new file that have been moved from where they were in the old file and
reformatted. The listing shows a matching "DMR=" flag for a line in the old file.
DMR=
Number of lines in the old file that have been moved and reformatted in the new file. The listing shows
a matching "IMR=" flag for a line in the new file.
IMV=
Number of lines in the new file that have been moved from where they were in the old file. The listing
shows a matching "DMV=" flag for a line in the old file.
DMV=
Number of lines in the old file that have been moved in the new file. The listing shows a matching
"IMV=" flag for a line in the new file.

Member summary section

SuperC generates the member summary section when you specify either a file group comparison or use a
macro library (MACLIB) or text library (TXTLIB) as input. The member summary section is really two
sections with a page separator between them.
Figure 274 on page 493 shows an example of the two member summary sections for a FILE compare
type.
The first section indicates which files were compared and whether they were found to be different or the
same. In Figure 274 on page 493, NEW TEST1 A was compared to OLD TEST1 A and NEW TEST2 A was
compared to OLD TEST2 A. Both comparisons found differences. Following the member statistics are the

492 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Understanding the listings

group statistics. As this was a FILE comparison, the statistics are in terms of files and the number of bytes
in each file.
Note: Different compare types produce slightly different results in the first section.
The second part of the member summary section shows all the members from both the new and old file
groups which were not paired (and hence not compared). In Figure 274 on page 493, only OLD TEST3 A
from the old file group was not compared to any file from the new group.

1 MEMBER SUMMARY LISTING (FILE COMPARE)

2 DIFF SAME FILE NAMES N-BYTES O-BYTES

3 ** NEW TEST1 A5 OLD TEST1 A5 240 240

** NEW TEST2 A5 OLD TEST2 A5 240 240
---------------------- ------- -------
4 GROUP TOTALS 480 480

5 2 TOTAL FILES PROCESSED AS A GROUP

6 2 TOTAL FILES PROCESSED HAD CHANGES
7 0 TOTAL FILES PROCESSED HAD NO CHANGES
8 0 TOTAL NEW FILES NOT PAIRED
9 1 TOTAL OLD FILES NOT PAIRED

1 ASMFSUPC - MVS FILE/LINE/WORD/BYTE/SFOR COMPARE UTILITY- V1R6M0

NEW: NEW TEST* A OLD:

MEMBER SUMMARY LISTING (FILE COMPARE)

NON-PAIRED NEW GROUP FILES | NON-PAIRED OLD GR

| 10 OLD TEST3 A5

Figure 274. Example of the member summary section of the comparison listing

1
Section Header. In this context, "member" can refer to either members of a MACLIB or TXTLIB, or
members of a file group.
2
Header line. Consists of several column headers.
DIFF
Contains "**" when the new and old files differ.
SAME
Contains "**" when the new and old are the same.
FILE NAMES
The file names or paired members of the file group or MACLIB/TXTLIB compared.
N-BYTES
Number of bytes processed in the new member.
O-BYTES
Number of bytes processed in the old member.
N-LINES
(Not shown) Number of lines processed in the new member.
O-LINES
(Not shown) Number of lines processed in the old member.
N-HASH-SUM
(Not shown) SuperC generated a hash value for the new member.
O-HASH-SUM
(Not shown) SuperC generated a hash value for the old member.

Understanding the listings 493

Understanding the listings

Note: The hashsums of files can be used to compare two files that are not physically on the same
system. If the hashsum of a file on system A is different from the hashsum of a file on system B, then
the files can be said to be different. If the hashsum of the files are identical, there is a high probability
that the files are the same. As secondary confirmation that the files are the same, compare the
number of lines and number of bytes.
3
Group (file) file statistics.
4
Group totals header line.
5
Total number of files that were processed as a group.
6
Total number of files compared that had differences.
7
Total number of files compared that had no differences.
8
Total number of new files that were not paired (and therefore were not compared).
9
Total number of old files that were not paired (and therefore were not compared).
10
OLD TEST3 A5 was present in the old file group. It could not be paired with a similarly named file in
the new file group and was not processed.

Overall summary section

The overall summary section gives the overall statistics of the comparison process. Figure 275 on page
494 is a representative example of an overall summary section.

1 LINE COMPARE SUMMARY AND STATISTICS

2 2 NUMBER OF LINE MATCHES 8 1 TOTAL CHANGES (PAIRED+NONPAIR

3 0 REFORMATTED LINES 9 1 PAIRED CHANGES (REFM+PAIRED
4 1 NEW FILE LINE INSERTIONS 10 0 NON-PAIRED INSERTS
5 1 OLD FILE LINE DELETIONS 11 0 NON-PAIRED DELETES
6 3 NEW FILE LINES PROCESSED
7 3 OLD FILE LINES PROCESSED

12 LISTING-TYPE = OVSUM 13 COMPARE-COLUMNS = 1:72

14 LONGEST-LINE = 80
15 PROCESS OPTIONS USED: NONE

Figure 275. Example of the overall summary section of the comparison listing

Figure 275 on page 494 shows the following information about the comparison:
1
The first word of the title tells you the type of comparison. The overall summary is provided for BYTE,
FILE, LINE, and WORD compare types.
2
Of the 3 lines in each file, 2 from the new file matched 2 corresponding lines of the old file. These are
called matching lines.
3
There are no reformatted lines.
4
There is 1 inserted line in the new file.

494 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Understanding the listings

5
The old file contains 1 line that is missing from the new source file.
6
3 lines from the new file were processed.
7
The old file also has a total of 3 lines.
8
The total number of changes is a summation of items 9 , 10 , and 11 . It is a convenient number that
best represents the change activity of the two compared files.
9
The total number of reformats and paired changes. This represents a sum of items that may be
considered to be a single change. That is, some changes are made in pairs and need only be counted
as a single instance of a change.
10
There were no non-paired inserts. Non-paired inserts are changes to the new file that have no
relationship to the old file (that is, no deletes from the old file occurred in the same area).
11
There were no non-paired deletes. Non-paired deletes are changes to the old file that have no
relationship to the new file (that is, no inserts to the new file occurred in the same area).
12
The listing type is OVSUM. This is the listing type option selected for the comparison. Other options
are: DELTA, CHNG, and LONG.
13
SuperC compared columns 1 through 72. This value provides a convenient reference for confirming if
all the columns in the line have been compared or only some portion of the line.
14
The longest line length of any line in either file is 80 characters.
15
No process options were used.

Understanding the listings 495

Understanding the listings

Examples of comparison listings

The following represent some of the output types available from SuperC.

1 ASMFSUPC - MVS FILE/LINE/WORD/BYTE/SFOR COMPARE UTILITY- V1R6M0 (07/11/2008) 07/11/2008

12.31 PAGE 1

NEW: D1 A A OLD: D2 A A

LISTING OUTPUT SECTION (LINE COMPARE)

ID SOURCE LINES TYPE LEN N-LN# O-LN#

----+----1----+----2----+----3----+----4----+----5----+----6----+----7----+----8
MAT= 1
I - 970522 øêL RPL= 1 00002 00002
INFO Date cols 11:15 packed 20970522 comp=(2097 05 22)
D - 970522 øêL
INFO Date cols 11:14 packed 970522 comp=(1997 05 22)
1 ASMFSUPC - MVS FILE/LINE/WORD/BYTE/SFOR COMPARE UTILITY- V1R6M0 (07/11/2008) 07/11/2008
12.31 PAGE 1
NEW: D1 A A OLD: D2 A A

LINE COMPARE SUMMARY AND STATISTICS

1 NUMBER OF LINE MATCHES 1 TOTAL CHANGES (PAIRED+NONPAIRED CHNG)

0 REFORMATTED LINES 1 PAIRED CHANGES (REFM+PAIRED INS/DEL)
1 NEW FILE LINE INSERTIONS 0 NON-PAIRED INSERTS
1 OLD FILE LINE DELETIONS 0 NON-PAIRED DELETES
2 NEW FILE LINES PROCESSED
2 OLD FILE LINES PROCESSED

LISTING-TYPE = DELTA COMPARE-COLUMNS = 1:72 LONGEST-LINE = 80

PROCESS OPTIONS USED: SEQ(DEFAULT)
THE FOLLOWING PROCESS STATEMENTS (USING COLUMNS 1:72) WERE PROCESSED:
Y2PAST 1987
NY2P 11:15 YYYYMMDD
OY2P 11:14 YYMMDD
NFOCUS COLS 1:20
OFOCUS COLS 1:20

Figure 276. Example of comparison listing with dates being compared

In Figure 276 on page 496, the two date definition process statements have each caused an information
("INFO") line to be generated. The information line shows:
• The position of the defined date in the record.
• The contents of the defined date field.
• The date as it was actually compared. In the second information line, you can see the defined date has a
2-digit year portion ("97") but has actually been compared using a 4-digit year portion ("1997").
For further details, see “Date definitions” on page 476.
Note: Occasionally, you may see some "unusual" characters on the inserted (I) and deleted (D) lines.
These characters represent data that is in a non-character (and therefore not directly printable) format in
the input record. Ignore them.

496 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Understanding the listings

1 ASMFSUPC - MVS FILE/LINE/WORD/BYTE/SFOR COMPARE UTILITY- V1R6M0 (07/11/2008) 07/11/2008

14.38 PAGE 1

NEW: D1 A A OLD: D2 A A

LISTING OUTPUT SECTION (LINE COMPARE)

ID SOURCE LINES TYPE LEN N-LN# O-LN#

Account Birth Surname
Number Date MAT= 1
I - 111222 19970101 Jones RPL= 1 00002 00002
D - 111222 970102 Jones
1 ASMFSUPC - MVS FILE/LINE/WORD/BYTE/SFOR COMPARE UTILITY- V1R6M0 (07/11/2008) 07/11/2008
14.38 PAGE 1
NEW: D1 A A OLD: D2 A A

LINE COMPARE SUMMARY AND STATISTICS

1 NUMBER OF LINE MATCHES 1 TOTAL CHANGES (PAIRED+NONPAIRED CHNG)

0 REFORMATTED LINES 1 PAIRED CHANGES (REFM+PAIRED INS/DEL)
1 NEW FILE LINE INSERTIONS 0 NON-PAIRED INSERTS
1 OLD FILE LINE DELETIONS 0 NON-PAIRED DELETES
2 NEW FILE LINES PROCESSED
2 OLD FILE LINES PROCESSED

LISTING-TYPE = DELTA COMPARE-COLUMNS = 1:72 LONGEST-LINE = 80

PROCESS OPTIONS USED: SEQ(DEFAULT)
THE FOLLOWING PROCESS STATEMENTS (USING COLUMNS 1:72) WERE PROCESSED:
COLHEAD 'Account','Number',1:8,N 1:6 C,O 1:6 C
COLHEAD 'Birth','Date',10:20,N 7:11 P,O 7:10 P
COLHEAD 'Surname',,22:61,N 12:51 C,O 11:50 C

Figure 277. Example of comparison listing with column headings (Using COLHEAD)

In Figure 277 on page 497, COLHEAD process statements have been used to generate column headings
("Account Number", "Birth Date", and "Surname") for the corresponding input data. For further details,
see “Define column headings” on page 466.

1 ASMFSUPC - MVS FILE/LINE/WORD/BYTE/SFOR COMPARE UTILITY- V1R6M0 (07/11/2008) 07/11/2008 15.10

NEW: JLEVERIN TEST2 A OLD: JLEVERIN TEST1

LISTING OUTPUT SECTION (LINE COMPARE)

ID NEW FILE LINES ID OLD FILE LINES N-LN# O-LN#

----+----1----+----2|…|5----+ ----+----1----+----2|…|5---
RN-This line is reforma|…|" file | RO-This line is reforma|…|"new 00001 00001
This line is the sam|…| | This line is the sam|…| 00002 00002
I -This line differs fr|…|. | D -This line differs fr|…|. 00003 00003
This line is the sam|…| | This line is the sam|…| 00004 00004
I -This line is in the |…|ld". | |…| 00005

1 ASMFSUPC - MVS FILE/LINE/WORD/BYTE/SFOR COMPARE UTILITY- V1R6M0 (07/11/2008) 07/11/2008 15.10

NEW: JLEVERIN TEST2 A OLD: JLEVERIN TEST1

LINE COMPARE SUMMARY AND STATISTICS

2 NUMBER OF LINE MATCHES 3 TOTAL CHANGES (PAIRED+NONPAIRED CHNG)

1 REFORMATTED LINES 2 PAIRED CHANGES (REFM+PAIRED INS/DEL)
2 NEW FILE LINE INSERTIONS 1 NON-PAIRED INSERTS
1 OLD FILE LINE DELETIONS 0 NON-PAIRED DELETES
5 NEW FILE LINES PROCESSED
4 OLD FILE LINES PROCESSED

LISTING-TYPE = CHNG COMPARE-COLUMNS = 1:72 LONGEST-LINE = 80

PROCESS OPTIONS USED: SEQ(DEFAULT) NARROW NOPRTCC

**ASMFSUPC INFORM04**, LISTING LINES MAY BE TRUNCATED DUE TO LIMITING OUTPUT LINE
WIDTH.

Figure 278. Example of a NARROW side-by-side listing

Understanding the listings 497

Understanding the listings

In Figure 278 on page 497, the new and old files are shown side-by-side. The NARROW listing type allows
SuperC to output 55 columns from each file. Notice how the inserts and deletes are horizontally aligned
with each other.

1 ASMFSUPC - MVS FILE/LINE/WORD/BYTE/SFOR COMPARE UTILITY- V1R6M0

NEW: JLEVERIN TEST2 A OLD: JLEVERIN TEST1

LISTING OUTPUT SECTION (LINE COMPARE)

ID NEW FILE LINES ID OLD FILE LINES N-LN# O-LN#

----+----1----+----2|…|5----+ ----+----1----+----2|…|5---
RN-This line is reforma|…|" file | RO-This line is reforma|…|"new 00001 00001
This line is the sam|…| | |…| 00002 00002
I -This line differs fr|…|. | D -This line differs fr|…|. 00003 00003
This line is the sam|…| | |…| 00004 00004
I -This line is in the |…|ld". | |…| 00005

1 ASMFSUPC - MVS FILE/LINE/WORD/BYTE/SFOR COMPARE UTILITY- V1R6M0

NEW: JLEVERIN TEST2 A OLD: JLEVERIN TEST1

LINE COMPARE SUMMARY AND STATISTICS

2 NUMBER OF LINE MATCHES 3 TOTAL CHANGES (PAIRED+NONPAIRED CHNG)

1 REFORMATTED LINES 2 PAIRED CHANGES (REFM+PAIRED INS/DEL)
2 NEW FILE LINE INSERTIONS 1 NON-PAIRED INSERTS
1 OLD FILE LINE DELETIONS 0 NON-PAIRED DELETES
5 NEW FILE LINES PROCESSED
4 OLD FILE LINES PROCESSED

LISTING-TYPE = CHNG COMPARE-COLUMNS = 1:72 LONGEST-LINE = 80

PROCESS OPTIONS USED: SEQ(DEFAULT) NARROW DLMDUP NOPRTCC

**ASMFSUPC INFORM04**, LISTING LINES MAY BE TRUNCATED DUE TO LIMITING OUTPUT LINE
WIDTH.

Figure 279. Example of a NARROW side-by-side listing (with DLMDUP)

Figure 279 on page 498, is like the previous example (Figure 278 on page 497) except that the process
option DLMDUP has been used to suppress the matched lines from the old file section. This simplifies the
combined listing output, allowing the changes to stand out more clearly.

1 ASMFSUPC - MVS FILE/LINE/WORD/BYTE/SFOR COMPARE UTILITY- V1R6M0

NEW: JLEVERIN TEST2 A OLD: JLEVERIN TEST1

LISTING OUTPUT SECTION (LINE COMPARE)

ID N|…| ID O|…| TYPE LEN TYPE LEN N-LN# O-LN#

----+----1|…|+----8 ----+----1|…|+----8
RN-This line |…|000100 | RO-This line |…|000100 RFM= 1 00001 00001
This line |…|000200 | |…| MAT= 1 00002 00002
I -This line |…|000300 | D -This line |…|000300 INS= 1 DEL= 1 00003 00003
This line |…|000400 | |…| MAT= 1 00004 00004
I -This line |…|000500 | |…| INS= 1 00005

1 ASMFSUPC - MVS FILE/LINE/WORD/BYTE/SFOR COMPARE UTILITY- V1R6M0

NEW: JLEVERIN TEST2 A OLD: JLEVERIN TEST1

LINE COMPARE SUMMARY AND STATISTICS

2 NUMBER OF LINE MATCHES 3 TOTAL CHANGES (PAIRED+NONPAIRED CHNG)

1 REFORMATTED LINES 2 PAIRED CHANGES (REFM+PAIRED INS/DEL)
2 NEW FILE LINE INSERTIONS 1 NON-PAIRED INSERTS
1 OLD FILE LINE DELETIONS 0 NON-PAIRED DELETES
5 NEW FILE LINES PROCESSED
4 OLD FILE LINES PROCESSED

LISTING-TYPE = CHNG COMPARE-COLUMNS = 1:72 LONGEST-LINE = 80

PROCESS OPTIONS USED: SEQ(DEFAULT) WIDE DLMDUP NOPRTCC

Figure 280. Example of a WIDE side-by-side listing

In Figure 280 on page 498, the new and old files are shown side-by-side in a WIDE listing. SuperC lists 80
columns from each file. Notice how the inserts and deletes are horizontally aligned with each other.
Note: The output file has a LRECL of 202/203 and may require special processing and printer capability to
obtain a hard copy. Refer to the previous NARROW option examples if the large LRECL requirement cannot
be satisfied and a side-by-side listing is still required.

498 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Understanding the listings

1 ASMFSUPC - MVS FILE/LINE/WORD/BYTE/SFOR COMPARE UTILITY- V1R6M0 (07/11/2008) 07/11/2008 16.46

NEW: PACKAGE ANNOUNCE A1 + SELECTF FILE LIST OLD: PACKAGE

MEMBER SUMMARY LISTING (FILE COMPARE)

DIFF SAME FILE NAMES N-BYTES O-BYTES N-LINES

** PACKAGE ANNOUNCE A1:PACKAGE ANNOUNCE E1 11210 51148 241

** PACKAGE EXEC A5:PACKAGE EXEC E5 151749 151646 4311
** PACKAGE HELP A5:PACKAGE HELP E5 70683 70683 1631
** PACKAGE HELPCMS A5:PACKAGE HELPCMS E1 58 65 4
** PACKAGE MENU A5:PACKAGE MENU E5 16803 16803 426
** PACKAGE MODULE A1:PACKAGE MODULE E1 127604 126076 4
** PACKAGE PACKAGE A5:PACKAGE PACKAGE E5 2408 2408 42
---------------------- ------- ------- -------
GROUP TOTALS 380515 418829 6659

Column 78 -------------------------------------->O-LINES N-HASH-SUM O-HASH-SUM

Column 80 ----------------------------------------->1147 C18E675F F5CE6031

(Continuation of previous data lines) 4310 2D2DF797 E0F1D820
1631 8A05CE27 8A05CE27
6 B1879676 F011E226
426 BAC0D5A9 BABFD5A9
4 4DF43D5A 3E820FA9
42 B29FA936 B29FA936
-------
7566

7 TOTAL FILES PROCESSED AS A GROUP

5 TOTAL FILES PROCESSED HAD CHANGES
2 TOTAL FILES PROCESSED HAD NO CHANGES
0 TOTAL NEW FILES NOT PAIRED
0 TOTAL OLD FILES NOT PAIRED

THE FOLLOWING PROCESS STATEMENT(S) WERE PROCESSED:

SELECTF PACKAGE ANNOUNCE A1 PACKAGE ANNOUNCE E1
SELECTF PACKAGE EXEC A5 PACKAGE EXEC E5
SELECTF PACKAGE HELP A5 PACKAGE HELP E5
SELECTF PACKAGE HELPCMS A5 PACKAGE HELPCMS E1
SELECTF PACKAGE MENU A5 PACKAGE MENU E5
SELECTF PACKAGE MODULE A1 PACKAGE MODULE E1
SELECTF PACKAGE PACKAGE A5 PACKAGE PACKAGE E5

Figure 281. Example of a FILE comparison of a file group

Understanding the listings 499

Understanding the listings

Figure 281 on page 499 shows a collection of files and statistics for the specified SELECTF designated file
group. Some files are the same and some files differ.

1 ASMFSUPC - MVS FILE/LINE/WORD/BYTE/SFOR COMPARE UTILITY- V1R6M0

NEW: PACKAGE ANNOUNCE A1 + SELECTF FILE LIST OLD: PACKAGE

MEMBER SUMMARY LISTING (FILE COMPARE)

DIFF SAME FILE NAMES N-BYTES O-BYTES N-LINES

** PACKAGE ANNOUNCE A1:PACKAGE ANNOUNCE E1 11210 51148 241

** PACKAGE EXEC A5:PACKAGE EXEC E5 151749 151646 4311
** PACKAGE HELPCMS A5:PACKAGE HELPCMS E1 58 65 4
** PACKAGE MENU A5:PACKAGE MENU E5 16803 16803 426
** PACKAGE MODULE A1:PACKAGE MODULE E1 127604 126076 4
---------------------- ------- ------- -------
GROUP TOTALS 380515 418829 6659

Column 78 -------------------------------------->O-LINES N-HASH-SUM O-HASH-SUM

Column 80 ----------------------------------------->1147 C18E675F F5CE6031

(Continuation of previous data lines) 4310 2D2DF797 E0F1D820
6 B1879676 F011E226
426 BAC0D5A9 BABFD5A9
4 4DF43D5A 3E820FA9
-------
7566

7 TOTAL FILES PROCESSED AS A GROUP

5 TOTAL FILES PROCESSED HAD CHANGES
2 TOTAL FILES PROCESSED HAD NO CHANGES
0 TOTAL NEW FILES NOT PAIRED
0 TOTAL OLD FILES NOT PAIRED

PROCESS OPTIONS USED: LOCS

THE FOLLOWING PROCESS STATEMENT(S) WERE PROCESSED:

SELECTF PACKAGE ANNOUNCE A1 PACKAGE ANNOUNCE E1
SELECTF PACKAGE EXEC A5 PACKAGE EXEC E5
SELECTF PACKAGE HELP A5 PACKAGE HELP E5
SELECTF PACKAGE HELPCMS A5 PACKAGE HELPCMS E1
SELECTF PACKAGE MENU A5 PACKAGE MENU E5
SELECTF PACKAGE MODULE A1 PACKAGE MODULE E1
SELECTF PACKAGE PACKAGE A5 PACKAGE PACKAGE E5

Figure 282. Example of a FILE comparison of a file group (with LOCS)

Figure 282 on page 500 is like the previous example (Figure 281 on page 499) except that the LOCS
process option has been used to limit the output to files from the file group which were found to be

500 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Understanding the listings

different. This option can greatly reduce the volume of output when the total number of files is secondary
to the change activity in the group.

1 ASMFSUPC - MVS FILE/LINE/WORD/BYTE/SFOR COMPARE UTILITY- V1R6M0

NEW: JLEVERIN TEST2 A OLD: JLEVERIN TEST1 A

LISTING OUTPUT SECTION (WORD COMPARE)

ID SOURCE LINES (COMPARED COLUMNS) N-LN# O-LN#

This line is reformatted; the spacing in the "new" file differs 00001 00001
This line is the same in both files. 00002 00002
MC-This line differs from the text in the file. 00003 00003
IC- "old" 00003 00003
DC- "new" 00003 00003
This line is the same in both files. 00004 00004
I -This line is in the "new" file, but not in the "old". 00005 00004
1 ASMFSUPC - MVS FILE/LINE/WORD/BYTE/SFOR COMPARE UTILITY- V1R6M0
NEW: JLEVERIN TEST2 A OLD: JLEVERIN TEST1 A

WORD COMPARE SUMMARY AND STATISTICS

40 NUMBER OF WORD MATCHES 14 TOTAL CHANGES (PAIRED+NONPAIRED CHNG)

14 NEW FILE WORD INSERTIONS 2 NEW FILE LINES CHANGED/INSERTED
1 OLD FILE WORD DELETIONS 1 OLD FILE LINES CHANGED/DELETED
54 NEW FILE WORDS PROCESSED 5 NEW FILE LINES PROCESSED
41 OLD FILE WORDS PROCESSED 4 OLD FILE LINES PROCESSED

LISTING-TYPE = LONG COMPARE-COLUMNS = 1:80 LONGEST-LINE = 80

PROCESS OPTIONS USED: NONE

Figure 283. Example of a WORD comparison

Figure 283 on page 501 is an output listing from a comparison using the WORD compare type and shows
how the output lines differ when the comparison is made at the WORD level. The deleted words are
normally listed under the replacement (inserted) words. Separate (both inserted and deleted) lines are
listed when completely changed lines are detected.

The search listing

The typical search listing is composed of three parts:
• Page Heading
• Source Lines Section
• Summary Section

Page heading
SuperC generates a page heading at the top of each page.

1 ASMFSUPC - MVS FILE/LINE/WORD/BYTE/SFOR COMPARE UTILITY- V1R6M0 (04/20/2004) 07/11/2008 12.32 PAGE 1

Figure 284. Example of the page heading line for the search listing

Figure 284 on page 501 shows a typical page heading line. It contains:
• Printer control page eject character ("1" in column one. not present when the NOPRTCC process option
is specified).
• "Platform-identifier". This shows "MVS".
• Program identification title including version and the version date: V1R6M0 (07/11/2008).
• The date and time of the search
• The page number.
Note: The program version and program date are important when reporting suspected SuperC problems.

Understanding the listings 501

Understanding the listings

Source lines section

The source lines section provides detailed information about the results of the Search.

1 LINE-# SOURCE LINES SRCH FN: NEW1 TESTCASE C

2 1 This NEW file is FIXED 80 with Sequence Numbers

2 /** NEW: To get rid of this PLI/REXX type comment, use DPPLCMT
3 (** NEW: To get rid of this PASCAL type comment, use DPPSCMT.
4 ! * NEW: Use DPPDCMT for this comment.
5 * * NEW: Use DPACMT to remove this assembler type comment
6 -- *NEW: Use DPADCMT to remove this line.
7 * * NEW: COBOL comment. Remove with DPCBCMT.
8 C * NEW: FORTRAN comment. Remove with DPFTCMT.
9 &&& This NEW line comes out with a DPLINE '&&&'

Figure 285. Example of the source lines section of a search listing

Figure 285 on page 502 is an example showing the source line section. Only one character string ("NEW")
was specified for the search.
1
Column Header Line.
LINE-#
Relative line number of the line where the string was found.
SOURCE LINES
Up to 106 characters of the source line where the string was found.
SRCH FN:
Identifies the file which was searched. In this example, it is NEW1 TESTCASE C.
2
Text Lines. Relative line numbers and text lines from the search file where the string "NEW" was
found.
The format of the source lines section changes when certain process options are used:
IDPFX ("Identifier Prefixed")
The file ID is prefixed to each line of source text. See “Source lines section (IDPFX)” on page 503.
LMTO ("List Group Member Totals")
Only the totals of lines found and processed are listed. See “Source lines section (LMTO)” on page
503.
XREF ("Cross-reference Strings")
Creates a cross-reference listing by search string. See “Source lines section (XREF)” on page 504.
Note: the XREF process option also generates additional totals for each search string in the summary
section.

502 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Understanding the listings

Source lines section (IDPFX)

The source line section generated when the IDPFX process option is used is like the normal source line
section but with the search file ID preceding each line of source text. See Figure 286 on page 503.

1 FNAME FTYPE FM LINE-# SOURCE-LNS SRCH FN: NEW1 TESTCASE C

2 NEW1 TESTCASE C1 1 This NEW file is FIXED 80 with Seque

NEW1 TESTCASE C1 2 /** NEW: To get rid of this PLI/REXX type comm
NEW1 TESTCASE C1 3 (** NEW: To get rid of this PASCAL type commen
NEW1 TESTCASE C1 4 ! * NEW: Use DPPDCMT for this comment.
NEW1 TESTCASE C1 5 * * NEW: Use DPACMT to remove this assembler t
NEW1 TESTCASE C1 6 -- *NEW: Use DPADCMT to remove this line.
NEW1 TESTCASE C1 7 * * NEW: COBOL comment. Remove with DPCBC
NEW1 TESTCASE C1 8 C * NEW: FORTRAN comment. Remove with DPFTCMT
NEW1 TESTCASE C1 9 &&& This NEW line comes out with a DPLINE '&&&

Figure 286. Example of the IDPFX source lines section of a search listing

1
Column Header Line.
FNAME
File name (fn) of the file where in the string was found.
FTYPE
File type (ft) of the file where in the string was found.
FM
File mode (fm) of the file where in the string was found.
LINE-#
Relative line number of the line where the string was found.
SOURCE-LNS
Up to 106 characters of the source line where the string was found.
SRCH FN:
In this example, the search file ID is NEW1 TESTCASE C.
2
The search file ID, relative line number, and text line from the search file where the string was found.

Source lines section (LMTO)

The LMTO process option generates a listing showing the total number of lines found and processed for
each file. (The individual lines found are not listed.) See Figure 287 on page 503.

1 FILES-SEARCHED LINES-FOUND LINES-PROC

2 NEW1 TESTCASE C1 9 9
NEW13 TESTCASE C1 10 15

Figure 287. Example of the LMTO source lines section of a search listing

1
Column Header Line.
FILES-SEARCHED
Identifies the files which were searched.
LINES-FOUND
Number of the lines found containing one or more of the search strings. The line is only counted
once no matter how many search strings were found in the line.
LINES-PROC
Number of lines in the file that were searched. Does not include "Do not Process" lines.

Understanding the listings 503

Understanding the listings

2
Individual file totals.

Source lines section (XREF)

The XREF process option creates a cross-reference listing where the source lines are listed by search
strings.
In Figure 288 on page 504, lines which contain the string "NEW" in NEW1 TESTCASE C1 are listed first,
then lines which contain the string "NEW" in NEW13 TESTCASE C1, then lines which contain the string
"USE" in NEW1 TESTCASE C1, and finally those lines which contain the string "USE" in NEW13 TESTCASE
C1.

1 ----- STRING="NEW" IN NEW1 TESTCASE C1 -----

2 1 This NEW file is FIXED 80 with Sequence Numbers

2 /** NEW: To get rid of this PLI/REXX type comment, use DPPLCMT. */
3 (** NEW: To get rid of this PASCAL type comment, use DPPSCMT. *)

⋮ . . .

3 ----- IN NEW13 TESTCASE C1 -----

4 1 This NEW file is FIXED 80 with Sequence Numbers

2 /** NEW: To get rid of this PLI/REXX type comment, use DPPLCMT. */
3 (** NEW: To get rid of this PASCAL type comment, use DPPSCMT. *)

⋮ . . .

5 ----- STRING="USE" IN NEW1 TESTCASE C1 -----

6 2 /** NEW: To get rid of this PLI/REXX type comment, use DPPLC
3 (** NEW: To get rid of this PASCAL type comment, use DPPSCMT. *)
4 ! * NEW: Use DPPDCMT for this comment.

⋮ . . .

7 ----- IN NEW13 TESTCASE C1 -----

8 2 /** NEW: To get rid of this PLI/REXX type comment, use DPPLC
3 (** NEW: To get rid of this PASCAL type comment, use DPPSCMT. *)
4 ! * NEW: Use DPPDCMT for this comment.

⋮ . . .

Figure 288. Example of the XREF source lines section (with ANYC)

1
Sub-section line showing string "NEW" and file NEW1 TESTCASE C1.
2
Line number and text of line where string was found.
3
Sub-section line showing file NEW13 TESTCASE C1 (string is still "NEW").
4
Line number and text of line where string was found.
5
Sub-section line showing string "USE" and file NEW1 TESTCASE C1.
6
Line number and text of line where string was found.
7
Sub-section line showing file NEW13 TESTCASE C1 (string is still "USE").
8
Line number and text of line where string was found.

504 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Understanding the listings

Summary section
The summary section (see Figure 289 on page 505) provides various totals resulting from the search and
shows any process statements which were used.

1 LINE-# SOURCE LINES SRCH FN: NEW1 TESTCASE C

2 LINES-FOUND FILES-W/LNS FILES-PROC LINES-PROC COMPARE-COLS

3 9 1 1 9 1: 80

4 THE FOLLOWING PROCESS STATEMENT(S) WERE PROCESSED:

SRCHFOR 'NEW'

Figure 289. Example of the summary section of a search listing

The summary section consists of:

1
A section heading line.
2
A column heading line.
3
One line of totals.
4
A multi-line section (two lines in Figure 289 on page 505) showing the process statements which
were used.

XREF summary section

When the XREF process option ("Cross-reference Strings") is used, additional lines are included in the
summary section. In Figure 290 on page 505, these are lines 2 , 3 , and 4 . The totals are listed
according to each search string.
Note: The XREF summary section may be produced without the XREF source line section by using the
LMTO process option.

1 SUMMARY SECTION SRCH FN: NEW1* TESTCASE C

2 STRING-FOUND LINES-FOUND FILES-W/LNS STRING-NOT-FOUND

3 "NEW" 19 2
4 "USE" 10 2

5 LINES-FOUND FILES-W/LNS FILES-PROC LINES-PROC COMPARE-COLS

6 29 2 5 64 1: 80

Figure 290. Example of the XREF summary section of a search listing

1
Section header line. Identifies the file which was searched. In this example, it is NEW1* TESTCASE C.
2
Column header line.
STRING-FOUND
Column indicating the search string.
LINES-FOUND
Lines which contained one or more occurrences of the search string.
FILES-W/LNS
Total number of files in the group in which the string was found.

Understanding the listings 505

Understanding the listings

STRING-NOT-FOUND
Indication that the string was not found in any of the files in the file group.
3
Totals for string "NEW"
4
Totals for string "USE"
5
Column header line.
LINES-FOUND
The summation of lines found for the individual search strings.
FILE-W/LNS
Number of files where lines were found to contain one or more of the search strings.
FILE-PROC
Number of files that were searched.
LINES-PROC
Number of lines that were part of the search set.
COMPARE-COLS
The column range that was searched.
6
Totals statistics arranged under the columns specified in 5 .

Examples of search listings

Search of one file

Figure 291 on page 506 shows the 3 parts of a search listing: page heading, source lines section, and
summary section.

1 ASMFSUPC - MVS LINE/WORD/BYTE COMPARE UTILITY - V1R6M0 (07/11/2008)

LINE-# SOURCE LINES SRCH FN: NEW1 TESTCASE C

2 /** NEW: To get rid of this PLI/REXX type comment, use DPPLCMT. */
3 (** NEW: To get rid of this PASCAL type comment, use DPPSCMT. *)
5 * * NEW: Use DPACMT to remove this assembler type comment.
6 -- *NEW: Use DPADCMT to remove this line.

1 ASMFSUPC - MVS LINE/WORD/BYTE COMPARE UTILITY - V1R6M0 (07/11/2008) 07/11/2008

SUMMARY SECTION SRCH FN: NEW1 TESTCASE C

LINES-FOUND FILES-W/LNS FILES-PROC LINES-PROC COMPARE-COLS LONGEST-LINE

4 1 1 9 1: 80 80

THE FOLLOWING PROCESS STATEMENT(S) WERE PROCESSED:

SRCHFOR 'remove'
SRCHFOR 'rid'

Figure 291. Example of the search listing (single file)

506 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Understanding the listings

IDPFX search of file group

The file group NEW1* TESTCASE C composed of 5 files was searched and 8 lines within 2 files had
"remove" and "rid" as the search arguments.

1 ASMFSUPC - MVS FILE/LINE/WORD/BYTE/SFOR COMPARE UTILITY- V1R6M0

FNAME FTYPE FM LINE-# SOURCE-LNS SRCH FN: NEW1* TESTCASE C

NEW1 TESTCASE C1 2 /** NEW: To get rid of this PLI/REXX type comment
NEW1 TESTCASE C1 3 (** NEW: To get rid of this PASCAL type comment,
NEW1 TESTCASE C1 5 * * NEW: Use DPACMT to remove this assembler type
NEW1 TESTCASE C1 6 -- *NEW: Use DPADCMT to remove this line.

NEW13 TESTCASE C1 2 /** NEW: To get rid of this PLI/REXX type comment
NEW13 TESTCASE C1 3 (** NEW: To get rid of this PASCAL type comment,
NEW13 TESTCASE C1 5 * * NEW: Use DPACMT to remove this assembler type
NEW13 TESTCASE C1 6 -- *NEW: Use DPADCMT to remove this line.

1 ASMFSUPC - MVS FILE/LINE/WORD/BYTE/SFOR COMPARE UTILITY- V1R6M0

SUMMARY SECTION SRCH FN: NEW1* TESTCASE C

LINES-FOUND FILES-W/LNS FILES-PROC LINES-PROC COMPARE-COLS LONGEST-LIN

8 2 5 64 1: 80 80

PROCESS OPTIONS USED: IDPFX

THE FOLLOWING PROCESS STATEMENT(S) WERE PROCESSED:

SRCHFOR 'remove'
SRCHFOR 'rid'

Figure 292. Example of IDPFX search on file group

XREF search of file group for two strings

XREF sorts the search string occurrences before producing a listing. The example shows a listing when
both strings are found in the file group.

1 ASMFSUPC - MVS FILE/LINE/WORD/BYTE/SFOR COMPARE UTILITY- V1R6M0

LINE-# SOURCE LINES SRCH FN: NEW1* TESTCASE C

----- STRING="remove" IN NEW1 TESTCASE C1 -----

5 * * NEW: Use DPACMT to remove this assembler type comment.

6 -- *NEW: Use DPADCMT to remove this line.

----- IN NEW13 TESTCASE C1 -----

5 * * NEW: Use DPACMT to remove this assembler type comment.

6 -- *NEW: Use DPADCMT to remove this line.

----- STRING="rid" IN NEW1 TESTCASE C1 -----

2 /** NEW: To get rid of this PLI/REXX type comment, use DPPLCMT. */
3 (** NEW: To get rid of this PASCAL type comment, use DPPSCMT. *)

----- IN NEW13 TESTCASE C1 -----

THE FOLLOWING PROCESS STATEMENT(S) WERE PROCESSED:

SRCHFOR 'remove'
SRCHFOR 'rid'

Figure 293. Example of XREF search on file group for two strings

Understanding the listings 507

Understanding the listings

LMTO search of file group

LMTO produces only the summary section for the search operation.

1 ASMFSUPC - MVS FILE/LINE/WORD/BYTE/SFOR COMPARE UTILITY- V1R6M0

FILE TOTALS SECTION SRCH FN: NEW1* TESTCASE C

FILES-SEARCHED LINES-FOUND LINES-PROC

NEW1 TESTCASE C1 4 9
NEW13 TESTCASE C1 4 15

1 ASMFSUPC - MVS FILE/LINE/WORD/BYTE/SFOR COMPARE UTILITY- V1R6M0

SUMMARY SECTION SRCH FN: NEW1* TESTCASE C

LINES-FOUND FILES-W/LNS FILES-PROC LINES-PROC COMPARE-COLS LONGEST-LIN

8 2 5 64 1: 80 80

PROCESS OPTIONS USED: LMTO

THE FOLLOWING PROCESS STATEMENT(S) WERE PROCESSED:

SRCHFOR 'remove'
SRCHFOR 'rid'

Figure 294. Example of LMTO search on file group

LMTO search of file group using the XREF process option

This is another example of a summary only output. Contrasting with the previous example, the string
totals are sorted before being listed.

1 ASMFSUPC - MVS FILE/LINE/WORD/BYTE/SFOR COMPARE UTILITY- V1R6M0

XREF TOTALS SECTION SRCH FN: NEW1* TESTCASE C

STRING-USED FILES-SEARCHED LINES-FOUND LINES-PROC

"remove" NEW1 TESTCASE C1 2 10
NEW13 TESTCASE C1 2 16

"rid" NEW1 TESTCASE C1 2 10

NEW13 TESTCASE C1 2 16

1 ASMFSUPC - MVS FILE/LINE/WORD/BYTE/SFOR COMPARE UTILITY- V1R6M0

SUMMARY SECTION SRCH FN: NEW1* TESTCASE C

STRING-FOUND LINES-FOUND FILES-W/LNS STRING-NOT-FOUND

"remove" 4 2
"rid" 4 2

LINES-FOUND FILES-W/LNS FILES-PROC LINES-PROC COMPARE-COLS LONGEST-LIN

8 2 5 64 1: 80 80

PROCESS OPTIONS USED: LMTO XREF

THE FOLLOWING PROCESS STATEMENT(S) WERE PROCESSED:

SRCHFOR 'remove'
SRCHFOR 'rid'

Figure 295. Example of XREF/LMTO search of file group

508 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Understanding the listings

LTO search of file group

LTO produces the overall totals section of the search results.

1 ASMFSUPC - MVS FILE/LINE/WORD/BYTE/SFOR COMPARE UTILITY- V1R6M0

SUMMARY SECTION SRCH FN: NEW1* TESTCASE C

LINES-FOUND FILES-W/LNS FILES-PROC LINES-PROC COMPARE-COLS LONGEST-LIN

8 2 5 64 1: 80 80

PROCESS OPTIONS USED: LTO

THE FOLLOWING PROCESS STATEMENT(S) WERE PROCESSED:

SRCHFOR 'remove'
SRCHFOR 'rid'

Figure 296. Example of LTO search on file group

LPSF search of file group

The process option LPSF ("List Previous-Search-Following Lines") lists lines before and after the search
text detected line. The "*" in the line number column indicate they were part of the extra lines listed.

1 ASMFSUPC - MVS FILE/LINE/WORD/BYTE/SFOR COMPARE UTILITY- V1R6M0

LINE-# SOURCE LINES SRCH FN: NEW1* TESTCASE C

NEW1 TESTCASE C1 -------------- STRING(S) FOUND --------

* This line is reformatted; the spacing in the "new" member differs.

2 /** NEW: To get rid of this PLI/REXX type comment, use DPPLCMT. */
3 (** NEW: To get rid of this PASCAL type comment, use DPPSCMT. *)
* ! * NEW: Use DPPDCMT for this comment.
5 * * NEW: Use DPACMT to remove this assembler type comment.
6 -- *NEW: Use DPADCMT to remove this line.
* * * NEW: COBOL comment. Remove with DPCBCMT.
* C * NEW: FORTRAN comment. Remove with DPFTCMT.
* &&& This NEW line comes out with a DPLINE '&&&'

NEW13 TESTCASE C1 -------------- STRING(S) FOUND --------

* This NEW file is FIXED 80 with Sequence Numbers

2 /** NEW: To get rid of this PLI/REXX type comment, use DPPLCMT. */
3 (** NEW: To get rid of this PASCAL type comment, use DPPSCMT. *)

Figure 297. Example of LPSF search on file group

Understanding the listings 509

Understanding the listings

510 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Update files

Appendix C. Update files

An update file contains information relating to the result of a comparison and is generated when one of
the update process options is specified:
UPDCMS8 (“Update CMS sequenced 8 file” on page 513)
UPDCNTL (“Update control files” on page 514)
UPDLDEL (“Update long control” on page 517)
UPDMVS8 (“Update MVS sequenced 8 file” on page 518)
UPDPDEL (“Update prefixed delta lines” on page 519)
UPDREV (“Revision file” on page 511)
UPDREV2 (“Revision file (2)” on page 512)
UPDSEQ0 (“Update sequenced 0 file” on page 520)
UPDSUMO (“Update summary only files” on page 520)
Note:
1. UPDCMS8, UPDMVS8, UPDPDEL, UPDREV, UPDREV2, and UPDSEQ0 do not generate an update file
after a comparison of matching files (Return Code = 0).
2. Dates, where applicable, in the heading lines of update files are in the format MM/DD/YYYY.
3. All "do not process" options, and DPLINE or CMPLINE process statements are invalid when used with
the process options UPDCMS8, UPDMVS8, UPDSEQ0, UPDLDEL, and UPDPDEL. The "do not process"
options are cancelled with error notification ASMF014.
Update files are normally used as input to post-processing programs and can be specified besides the
normal listing output file.
On the following pages, descriptions and examples are given of the contents of the update file produced
for each of the update (UPD…) process options.
In most of the examples shown, the same two input files are used. The contents of the old file are shown
in Figure 298 on page 511. The contents of the new file are shown in Figure 299 on page 511.

This line is reformatted; the spacing in the "new" file differs. 00000100
This line is the same in both files. 00000200
This line differs from the text in the "new" file. 00000300
This line is the same in both files. 00000400

Figure 298. The “Old” input file used in most of the update examples

This line is reformatted; the spacing in the "new" file differs. 00000100
This line is the same in both files. 00000200
This line differs from the text in the "old" file. 00000300
This line is the same in both files. 00000400
This line is in the "new" file, but not in the "old". 00000500

Figure 299. The “New” input file used in most of the update examples

Revision file
The process option UPDREV produces an update file containing a copy of the new source text with
revision tags delimiting the changed text lines.
The UPDREV process option is available for LINE and WORD compare types.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2019 511

Update files

UPDREV supports two different types of revision tags, one for SCRIPT/VS files and one for BookMaster
files. (Use the REVREF process statement (“Revision code reference” on page 471) to specify which type
of revision tag you want.)
Figure 300 on page 512 shows a SuperC UPDREV file with SCRIPT/VS revision tags (.rc on/off).

.rc 1 &vbar.
.rc 1 on
This line is reformatted; the spacing in the "new" file differs.
.rc 1 off
This line is the same in both files.
.rc 1 on
This line differs from the text in the "old" file.
.rc 1 off
This line is the same in both files.
.rc 1 on
This line is in the "new" file, but not in the "old".
.rc 1 off

Figure 300. Example of a UPDREV update file for SCRIPT/VS documents

When the UPDREV update file in Figure 300 on page 512 is processed by SCRIPT/VS, the final scripted
output has "|" revision characters in the left margin of the output document identifying the changed lines
(those between the SCRIPT/VS revision tags .rc 1 on and .rc 1 off).
Note: The revision character ("|" in the example in Figure 300 on page 512) can be specified either by
using a REVREF process statement (see “Revision code reference” on page 471) or by having a SCRIPT/
VS .rc. revision tag as the first record in the new file. Subsequent changes to the source can therefore be
separately identified by using different revision characters.
Figure 301 on page 512 shows a SuperC UPDREV file with BookMaster revision tags (:rev/:erev).

This line is reformatted; the spacing in the "new" file differs.

This line is the same in both files.
This line differs from the text in the "old" file.
This line is the same in both files.
This line is in the "new" file, but not in the "old".

Figure 301. Example of a UPDREV update file for bookmaster documents

When the UPDREV update file in Figure 301 on page 512 is processed by BookMaster, the final formatted
output has the revision character associated with the revision ID abc (as specified by a :revision.
BookMaster tag in the new input file) in the left margin of the output document identifying the changed
lines (those between the BookMaster revision tags :rev and :erev).
Note: The revision ID (abc in the example in Figure 301 on page 512) is controlled by the REVREF
process statement (see “Revision code reference” on page 471). Subsequent changes to the source can
therefore be separately identified by using different revision IDs (which are associated with unique
revision characters).

Revision file (2)

The process option UPDREV2 is identical to UPDREV with the exception that data between the following
BookMaster tags are not deleted in the update file:

:cgraphic.
:ecgraphic.

:fig.
:efig.

:lblbox.
:elblbox.

512 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Update files

:nt.
:ent.

:screen.
:escreen.

:table.
:etable.

:xmp.
:exmp.

Update CMS sequenced 8 file

The process option UPDCMS8 produces update files that are generally created for input to the CMS
UPDATE command. The CMS UPDATE command is described in z/VM® CMS Command Reference.
The UPDCMS8 process option is available for the LINE compare type only.
The old input file must have fixed-length 80-byte records with valid sequence numbers in columns 73
through 80. The new file must be fixed but may have a length less than or equal to 80.
The UPDCMS8 update file is fixed-length 80.
If the sequence numbers do not allow adequate room to insert changes from the new file, SuperC
changes the status of adjacent matched lines to find the room.
UPDCMS8 update files contain both CMS UPDATE control statements and source lines from the "new" file.
All UPDCMS8 control statements are identified by the characters "./" in columns 1 and 2 of the 80-byte
record, followed by one or more spaces and a one-character control line identifier. The control line
identifiers are sequence (S), insert (I), delete (D), replace (R), and comment (*). Figure 302 on page 513
shows an example of a UPDCMS8 update file.

1 ./ * NEW: JLEVERIN TEST2 A 07/11/2008 11.35

2 ./ * OLD: JLEVERIN TEST1 A
3 ./ R 00000100 00000100 $ 00000140 00000040
4 This line is reformatted; the spacing in the "new" file differs. 00000100
5 ./ R 00000300 00000300 $ 00000340 00000040
6 This line differs from the text in the "old" file. 00000300
7 ./ I 00000400 $ 00001400 00001000
8 This line is in the "new" file, but not in the "old". 00000500

Figure 302. Example of a UPDCMS8 update file

The example in Figure 302 on page 513, has the following lines:
1
Comment line. Lists the new file name and the date and time of the comparison.
2
Comment line. Lists the old file name.
3
Replacement control line. The first 8-digit numeric field is the sequence number (of the old file) of the
first input number to be replaced. The second 8-digit numeric field is the sequence number of the old
file that is the last record to be replaced. The dollar sign is an option separator field. The third and
fourth 8-digit fields represent the first decimal number to be used for sequencing the substitute
records and the decimal increment to be used in the sequencing.
In this example, the first line of the old file is being replaced with one line from the new file.
4
The new record which has replaced the old record at sequence number 00000100.
5
Another replacement control line.

Update files 513

Update files

6
The new record which has replaced the old record at sequence number 00000300.
7
Insert control line. After old line 4, there is a line inserted in the new file.
8
The text of the inserted line.

Update control files

The process option UPDCNTL produces a control file that relates matches, insertions, deletions, and
reformats to:
• The relative line numbers of the old and new files (LINE compare type); see Figure 303 on page 514.
• The relative word position of the old file (WORD compare type); see Figure 304 on page 515.
• The relative byte offset (BYTE compare type); see Figure 305 on page 516.
Note: No source or data from either input file is included in the update file produced by UPDCNTL.

Update control file (LINE Compare Type)

1 * NEW: JLEVERIN TEST2 A 07/11/2008 12.45

2 * OLD: JLEVERIN TEST1 A
3 * N-LINE-# O-LINE-# MAT-LEN INS-LEN DEL-LEN REFM-LEN
4 00000001 00000001 00000001
5 00000002 00000002 00000001
6 00000003 00000003 00000001 00000001
7 00000004 00000004 00000001
8 00000005 00000005 00000001
9 * END

Figure 303. Example of a UPDCNTL update file using line compare type

1
Comment line. Lists the new file name and the date and time of the comparison.
2
Comment line. Lists the old file name.
3
Header Comment line. For information about the columns, see Table 32 on page 515.
4
Shows that line 1 of the new file is a reformatted line of line 1 of the old file.
5
Line 2 from both files match.
6
Line 3 of the new file replaces line 3 of the old file.
7
Line 4 from both files match.
8
At line 5 of the new file is an inserted line.
9
Comment line. This is the end of the update file.
The following table shows the column numbers used for the UPDCNTL file:

514 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Update files

Table 32. UPDCNTL update file format using LINE compare type
Column # Identifier Data Item
4-11 N-LINE-# New line number
13-20 O-LINE-# Old line number
22-29 MAT-LEN Match length
31-38 INS-LEN Insert length
40-47 DEL-LEN Delete length
49-56 REFM-LEN Reformat length
58-65 N-DP-LEN (Not shown) New “Do not Process” length
67-74 O-DP-LEN (Not shown) Old “Do not Process” length
76-80 N-MVL (Not shown) New “moved” line length.

Update control file (WORD compare type)

1 * NEW: JLEVERIN TEST2 A 07/11/2008 12.17

2 * OLD: JLEVERIN TEST1 A
3 * N-LINE-# N-LN-LEN N-COL WD-MAT-# N-WD-INS O-WD-DEL O-LINE-# O-LN-LEN O-COL
4 00000001 00000003 00001 00000027 00000001 00000003 00001
5 00000003 00000001 00040 00000001 00000001 00000003 00000001 00040
6 00000003 00000002 00046 00000009 00000003 00000002 00046
7 00000005 00000001 00001 00000013
8 * END

Figure 304. Example of a UPDCNTL update file using WORD compare type

1
Comment line. Lists the new file name and the date and time of the comparison.
2
Comment line. Lists the old file name.
3
Header comment line. For information about the columns, see Table 33 on page 516.
4
Beginning with line one column 1, of both files, the first twenty-seven words match. This takes us to
line 3.
5
There is 1 word replaced in line 3. It begins in column forty of each file.
6
Beginning from the change in 5 , there are 9 more words that match.
7
A line of thirteen words was inserted at line 5.
8
Comment line. Ends the update file.
The following table shows the column numbers used for the UPDCNTL file:

Update files 515

Update files

Table 33. UPDCNTL update file format using WORD compare type
Column # Identifier Data Item
4-11 N-LINE-# Beginning new line number
13-20 N-LN-LEN Number of lines
22-26 N-COL New column number (beginning of word)
28-35 WD-MAT-# Number of matching words
37-44 N-WD-INS Number of new inserted words
46-53 O-WD-DEL Number of old deleted words
55-62 O-LINE-# Beginning old line number
64-71 O-LN-LEN Number of old lines
73-77 O-COL Old column number

Update control file (BYTE compare type)

1 * NEW: JLEVERIN TEST2 A 07/11/2008 12.23

2 * OLD: JLEVERIN TEST1 A
3 * N-BYTE-O O-BYTE-O MAT-LEN INS-LEN DEL-LEN
4 00000000 00000000 0000001E
5 0000001E 0000001E 00000001
0000001E 0000001F 00000008
00000026 00000027 00000001
00000026 00000028 00000002
00000028 0000002A 00000001
00000028 0000002B 00000004
0000002C 0000002F 00000001
0000002C 00000030 00000007
00000033 00000037 00000001
00000033 00000038 00000004
00000037 0000003C 00000001
00000037 0000003D 00000009
00000040 00000046 00000006
00000046 00000046 00000082
6 000000C8 000000C8 00000003 00000003
000000CB 000000CB 00000075
7 00000140 00000140 00000050
8 * END

Figure 305. Example of a UPDCNTL update file using BYTE compare type

1
Comment line. Lists the new file name and the date and time of the comparison.
2
Comment line. Lists the old file name.
3
Header comment line. For more information about the columns, see Table 34 on page 517.
4
First thirty-one (1E hex) bytes match.
5
1 byte is deleted.
6
(Skipping several lines). 3 bytes of the new file replace 3 bytes of the old file.
7
Fifty bytes inserted.

516 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Update files

8
Comment line. Ends the update file.
The following table shows the column numbers used for the UPDCNTL file:

Table 34. UPDCNTL update file format using BYTE compare type
Column # Identifier Data Item
4-11 N-BYTE-O New byte offset
13-20 O-BYTE-O Old byte offset
22-29 MAT-LEN Number of matching bytes
31-38 INS-LEN Number of inserted bytes
40-47 DEL-LEN Number of deleted bytes

Update long control

The process option UPDLDEL produces an update file that contains control records, matching new file
source records, inserted new file source records, and deleted old file source records.
The UPDLDEL process option is available for the LINE compare type only.
Figure 306 on page 518 shows an example of a UPDLDEL update file.
The control records are titled as follows:
*HDR1, *HDR2, *HDR3
Header titles and data
*M-
Matched line sequence header
*I-
Inserted line sequence header
*I-RP
Inserted line sequence header for replacement lines
*I-RF
Inserted line sequence header for reformatted lines
*D-
Deleted line sequence header
*D-RP
Deleted line sequence header for replacement lines
*D-RF
Deleted line sequence header for reformatted lines

Update files 517

Update files

Header control records are full length records that delimit the copied file records. This allows you to
quickly find changed areas. The records look like the information about a LONG listing. The two input files
must both have the same fixed record length or each have a variable record length.

*HDR1 JLEVERIN TEST2 A 07/11/2008 14.58

*HDR2 JLEVERIN TEST1 A TYPE = UPDLDEL
*I-RF INS#= 1 N-REF#=000001 O-REF#=000001 *****ASMFSUPC CHANGE HEADER*****
This line is reformatted; the spacing in the "new" file differs. 00000100
*D-RF DEL#= 1 N-REF#=000001 O-REF#=000001 *****ASMFSUPC CHANGE HEADER*****
This line is reformatted; the spacing in the "new" file differs. 00000100
*M- MAT#= 1 N-REF#=000002 O-REF#=000002 *****ASMFSUPC CHANGE HEADER*****
This line is the same in both files. 00000200
*I-RP INS#= 1 N-REF#=000003 O-REF#=000003 *****ASMFSUPC CHANGE HEADER*****
This line differs from the text in the "old" file. 00000300
*D-RP DEL#= 1 N-REF#=000003 O-REF#=000003 *****ASMFSUPC CHANGE HEADER*****
This line differs from the text in the "new" file. 00000300
*M- MAT#= 1 N-REF#=000004 O-REF#=000004 *****ASMFSUPC CHANGE HEADER*****
This line is the same in both files. 00000400
*I- INS#= 1 N-REF#=000005 O-REF#=000004 *****ASMFSUPC CHANGE HEADER*****
This line is in the "new" file, but not in the "old". 00000500

Figure 306. Example of a UPDLDEL update file

Update MVS sequenced 8 file

The process option UPDMVS8 produces a file that contains both control records and new file source lines
using sequence numbers from old file columns 73 to 80.
The UPDMVS8 process option is available for the LINE Compare Type only.
The format of the generated data may be suitable as input to the IEBUPDTE utility. See MVS/DFP Utilities
for information about the contents of this file. Figure 307 on page 518 shows an example of a UPDMVS8
update file created on CMS.

1 ./ CHANGE LIST=ALL OLD:JLEVERIN TEST1 A

2 ./ DELETE SEQ1=00000100,SEQ2=00000100
3 This line is reformatted; the spacing in the "new" file differs. 00000100
4 ./ DELETE SEQ1=00000300,SEQ2=00000300
5 This line differs from the text in the "old" file. 00000300
6 This line is in the "new" file, but not in the "old". 00000500

Figure 307. Example of a UPDMVS8 update file

1
Control record. Lists old file name.
2
Control record. Shows record deleted at sequence number 100 on the old file.
3
Inserted line from the new file.
4
Control record. Shows record deleted at sequence number 300 on the old file.
5
Inserted line from the new file.
6
Inserted line from the new file.
The files to be compared must have fixed-length 80-byte records. They must also contain sequence
numbers.

518 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Update files

Update prefixed delta lines

The process option UPDPDEL produces a variable-length update file that contains header records and
complete delta lines from the input files, up to a maximum of 32K bytes in each output line.
The UPDPDEL process option is available for the LINE compare type only.
Figure 308 on page 519 shows an example of a UPDPDEL update file.
Prefix codes (I for insert and D for delete) together with the line number precede lines from the input
files. Sub-totals are shown before each group of flagged records:
• INS#= for the number of consecutive inserted records,
• DEL#= for the number of consecutive deleted records,
• RPL#= for the number of consecutive pairs of replaced records, and
• MAT#= for the number of intervening matched records.

1 * NEW: JLEVERIN TEST2 A 07/11/2008 12.08

2 * OLD: JLEVERIN TEST1 A
3 *ID- LINE# SOURCE LINE
4 * RPL#= 00000001
5 I - 00000001 This line is reformatted; the spacing in the "new" file differs.
00000100
6 D - 00000001 This line is reformatted; the spacing in the "new" file differs.
00000100
4 * RPL#= 00000001 MAT#= 00000001
5 I - 00000003 This line differs from the text in the "old" file
00000300
6 D - 00000003 This line differs from the text in the "new" file.
00000300
7 * INS#= 00000001 MAT#= 00000001
8 I - 00000005 This line is in the "new" file, but not in the old.
9 * END
00000500

Figure 308. Example of a UPDPDEL update file

The example in Figure 308 on page 519 has the following lines:
1
Comment line. Lists the new file name and the date and time of the comparison.
2
Comment line. Lists the old file name.
3
Header comment line.
4
Sub-total line showing that 1 replaced pair of records follow.
5
The line that has replaced the line in the old file.
6
The line in the old file that has been replaced.
7
Sub-total line showing that 1 inserted record follows.
8
The line that has been inserted in the new file.
9
Comment line. Ends the update file.

Update files 519

Update files

Update sequenced 0 file

The process option UPDSEQ0 produces a control file that relates insertions and deletions to the relative
line numbers of the old file. UPDSEQ0 is like UPDCMS8, but uses relative line numbers instead of
sequence numbers from the old file.
The UPDSEQ0 process option is available for the LINE compare type only.
This update file is characterized by control statements followed by source lines from the new file. All
UPDSEQ0 control statements are identified by the characters "./" in columns 1 and 2 of the 80-byte
record, followed by one or more spaces and additional space-delimited fields. The control statements are
insert (I), delete (D), replace (R), and comment (*). Control statement data does not extend beyond
column 50. Figure 309 on page 520 shows an example of a UPDSEQ0 update file.

1 ./ * NEW: JLEVERIN TEST2 A 07/11/2008 13.34

2 ./ * OLD: JLEVERIN TEST1 A
3 ./ R 00000001 00000001 $ 00000001
4 This line is reformatted; the spacing in the "new" file differs. 00000100
5 ./ R 00000003 00000003 $ 00000001
6 This line differs from the text in the "old" file. 00000300
7 ./ I 00000004 $ 00000001
8 This line is in the "new" file, but not in the "old". 00000500

Figure 309. Example of a UPDSEQ0 update file

1
Comment line. Lists the new file name and the date and time of the comparison.
2
Comment line. Lists the old file name.
3
Replacement control record. Beginning at the first record of the old file, replace 1 record. The numeric
value after the dollar sign specifies the number of new file source lines that follow the control record.
4
Text of new file line to replace line 1.
5
Replace the third record with 1 record.
6
Text of new file line to replace line 3.
7
Insert control line. Insert 1 line after record 4 of old file.
8
Text of inserted line.

Update summary only files

The process option UPDSUMO produces an update file of 4 lines: new file name, old file name, column
headers, and a summary totals line.
The UPDSUMO process option is available for the LINE, WORD, and BYTE compare types.
The summary totals line has a "T" in column 1. The summary statistics are located at fixed offsets in the
output line. The file has a line length of 132 bytes.

520 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Update files

Update summary only file (LINE compare type)

1 * NEW: JLEVERIN TEST2 A 07/11/2008

2 * OLD: JLEVERIN TEST1 A
3 * NEW-PROC OLD-PROC NEW-INS OLD-DEL TOT-CHG TOT-RFM FI-PROC FI-DIFF
4 T 00000005 00000004 00000002 00000001 00000003 00000001 00000001 00000001

. . (Continuation of previous data lines) . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 13.39
2
3 N-NOT-PD O-NOT-PD N-DP-LNS O-DP-LNS
4 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

Figure 310. Example of a UPDSUMO file using LINE compare type

1
Comment line. Lists the new file name and the date and time of the comparison.
2
Comment line. Lists the old file name.
3
Comment line. Header line. Columns are explained in Table 35 on page 521.
4
Totals line.
In Figure 310 on page 521, the update summary file is shown in split screen mode. The bottom half of the
screen shows the result of scrolling right to see the remainder of the member.
The following table shows the column numbers used to display the update information:

Table 35. UPDSUMO format using LINE compare type

Column # Identifier Data Item
NEW-PROC Number of new lines processed
OLD-PROC Number of old lines processed
NEW-INS Number of new line insertions
OLD-DEL Number of old line deletions
TOT-CHG Total number of line changes
TOT-RFM Total number of reformats
FI-PROC Total number of files/members processed
FI-DIFF Total number of files/members different
N-NOT-PD Total new files/members not processed
O-NOT-PD Total old files/members not processed
N-DP-LNS Total number of new "do not process" lines
O-DP-LNS Total number of old "do not process" lines

Update files 521

Update files

Update summary only file (WORD compare type)

1 * NEW: JLEVERIN TEST2 A 07/11/2008

2 * OLD: JLEVERIN TEST1 A
3 * NEW-PROC OLD-PROC NEW-INS OLD-DEL TOT-CHG FI-PROC FI-DIFF
4 T 00000049 00000037 00000013 00000001 00000013 00000001 00000001

. . (Continuation of previous data lines) . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 13.48
2
3 N-NOT-PD O-NOT-PD
4 00000000 00000000

Figure 311. Example of a UPDSUMO file using WORD compare type

1
Comment line. Lists the new file name and the date and time of the comparison.
2
Comment line. Lists the old file name.
3
Comment line. Header line. Columns are explained in Table 36 on page 522.
4
Totals line.
In Figure 311 on page 522, the UPDSUMO file is shown in split screen mode. The bottom half of the
screen is scrolled right to show the remainder of the member.
The following table shows the column numbers used to display the update information:

Table 36. UPDSUMO format using WORD compare type

Column # Identifier Data Item
NEW-PROC Number of new words processed
OLD-PROC Number of old words processed
NEW-INS Number of new word insertions
OLD-DEL Number of old word deletions
TOT-CHG Total number of word changes
FI-PROC Total number of files/members processed
FI-DIFF Total number of files/members different
N-NOT-PD Total new files/members not processed
O-NOT-PD Total old files/members not processed

522 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 Update files

Update summary only file (BYTE compare type)

1 * NEW: JLEVERIN TEST2 A 07/11/2008

2 * OLD: JLEVERIN TEST1 A
3 * NEW-PROC OLD-PROC NEW-INS OLD-DEL TOT-CHG FI-PROC FI-DIFF
4 T 00000400 00000320 00000089 00000009 00000095 00000001 00000001

. . (Continuation of previous data lines) . . . . . . . . . . . .

COMMAND ===> _ SCROLL ===> PAGE

1 13.51
2
3 N-NOT-PD O-NOT-PD
4 00000000 00000000

Figure 312. Example of a UPDSUMO file using BYTE compare type

1
Comment line. Lists the new file name and the date and time of the comparison.
2
Comment line. Lists the old file name.
3
Comment line. Header line. Columns are explained in Table 37 on page 523.
4
Totals line.
In Figure 312 on page 523, the UPDSUMO file is shown in split screen mode. The bottom half of the
screen shows the result of scrolling right to see the remainder of the member.
The following table shows the column numbers used to display the update information:

Table 37. UPDSUMO format using BYTE compare type

Column # Identifier Data Item
NEW-PROC Number of new bytes processed
OLD-PROC Number of old bytes processed
NEW-INS Number of new byte insertions
OLD-DEL Number of old byte deletions
TOT-CHG Total number of byte changes
FI-PROC Total number of files/members processed
FI-DIFF Total number of files/members different
N-NOT-PD Total new files/members not processed
O-NOT-PD Total old files/members not processed

Update files 523

Update files

524 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

Appendix D. Accessibility

Accessible publications for this product are offered through IBM Knowledge Center (www.ibm.com/
support/knowledgecenter/SSLTBW/welcome).
If you experience difficulty with the accessibility of any z/OS information, send a detailed email message
to [email protected].

Accessibility features

Accessibility features help users who have physical disabilities such as restricted mobility or limited vision
use software products successfully. The accessibility features in z/OS can help users do the following
tasks:
• Run assistive technology such as screen readers and screen magnifier software.
• Operate specific or equivalent features by using the keyboard.
• Customize display attributes such as color, contrast, and font size.

Consult assistive technologies

Assistive technology products such as screen readers function with the user interfaces found in z/OS.
Consult the product information for the specific assistive technology product that is used to access z/OS
interfaces.

Keyboard navigation of the user interface

You can access z/OS user interfaces with TSO/E or ISPF. The following information describes how to use
TSO/E and ISPF, including the use of keyboard shortcuts and function keys (PF keys). Each guide includes
the default settings for the PF keys.
• z/OS TSO/E Primer
• z/OS TSO/E User's Guide
• z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I

Dotted decimal syntax diagrams

Syntax diagrams are provided in dotted decimal format for users who access IBM Knowledge Center with
a screen reader. In dotted decimal format, each syntax element is written on a separate line. If two or
more syntax elements are always present together (or always absent together), they can appear on the
same line because they are considered a single compound syntax element.
Each line starts with a dotted decimal number; for example, 3 or 3.1 or 3.1.1. To hear these numbers
correctly, make sure that the screen reader is set to read out punctuation. All the syntax elements that
have the same dotted decimal number (for example, all the syntax elements that have the number 3.1)
are mutually exclusive alternatives. If you hear the lines 3.1 USERID and 3.1 SYSTEMID, your syntax
can include either USERID or SYSTEMID, but not both.
The dotted decimal numbering level denotes the level of nesting. For example, if a syntax element with
dotted decimal number 3 is followed by a series of syntax elements with dotted decimal number 3.1, all
the syntax elements numbered 3.1 are subordinate to the syntax element numbered 3.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2019 525

 Certain words and symbols are used next to the dotted decimal numbers to add information about the
syntax elements. Occasionally, these words and symbols might occur at the beginning of the element
itself. For ease of identification, if the word or symbol is a part of the syntax element, it is preceded by the
backslash (\) character. The * symbol is placed next to a dotted decimal number to indicate that the
syntax element repeats. For example, syntax element *FILE with dotted decimal number 3 is given the
format 3 \* FILE. Format 3* FILE indicates that syntax element FILE repeats. Format 3* \* FILE
indicates that syntax element * FILE repeats.
Characters such as commas, which are used to separate a string of syntax elements, are shown in the
syntax just before the items they separate. These characters can appear on the same line as each item, or
on a separate line with the same dotted decimal number as the relevant items. The line can also show
another symbol to provide information about the syntax elements. For example, the lines 5.1*, 5.1
LASTRUN, and 5.1 DELETE mean that if you use more than one of the LASTRUN and DELETE syntax
elements, the elements must be separated by a comma. If no separator is given, assume that you use a
blank to separate each syntax element.
If a syntax element is preceded by the % symbol, it indicates a reference that is defined elsewhere. The
string that follows the % symbol is the name of a syntax fragment rather than a literal. For example, the
line 2.1 %OP1 means that you must refer to separate syntax fragment OP1.
The following symbols are used next to the dotted decimal numbers.
? indicates an optional syntax element
The question mark (?) symbol indicates an optional syntax element. A dotted decimal number
followed by the question mark symbol (?) indicates that all the syntax elements with a corresponding
dotted decimal number, and any subordinate syntax elements, are optional. If there is only one syntax
element with a dotted decimal number, the ? symbol is displayed on the same line as the syntax
element, (for example 5? NOTIFY). If there is more than one syntax element with a dotted decimal
number, the ? symbol is displayed on a line by itself, followed by the syntax elements that are
optional. For example, if you hear the lines 5 ?, 5 NOTIFY, and 5 UPDATE, you know that the
syntax elements NOTIFY and UPDATE are optional. That is, you can choose one or none of them.
The ? symbol is equivalent to a bypass line in a railroad diagram.
! indicates a default syntax element
The exclamation mark (!) symbol indicates a default syntax element. A dotted decimal number
followed by the ! symbol and a syntax element indicate that the syntax element is the default option
for all syntax elements that share the same dotted decimal number. Only one of the syntax elements
that share the dotted decimal number can specify the ! symbol. For example, if you hear the lines 2?
FILE, 2.1! (KEEP), and 2.1 (DELETE), you know that (KEEP) is the default option for the
FILE keyword. In the example, if you include the FILE keyword, but do not specify an option, the
default option KEEP is applied. A default option also applies to the next higher dotted decimal
number. In this example, if the FILE keyword is omitted, the default FILE(KEEP) is used. However, if
you hear the lines 2? FILE, 2.1, 2.1.1! (KEEP), and 2.1.1 (DELETE), the default option
KEEP applies only to the next higher dotted decimal number, 2.1 (which does not have an associated
keyword), and does not apply to 2? FILE. Nothing is used if the keyword FILE is omitted.
* indicates an optional syntax element that is repeatable
The asterisk or glyph (*) symbol indicates a syntax element that can be repeated zero or more times. A
dotted decimal number followed by the * symbol indicates that this syntax element can be used zero
or more times; that is, it is optional and can be repeated. For example, if you hear the line 5.1* data
area, you know that you can include one data area, more than one data area, or no data area. If you
hear the lines 3* , 3 HOST, 3 STATE, you know that you can include HOST, STATE, both
together, or nothing.
Notes:
1. If a dotted decimal number has an asterisk (*) next to it and there is only one item with that dotted
decimal number, you can repeat that same item more than once.
2. If a dotted decimal number has an asterisk next to it and several items have that dotted decimal
number, you can use more than one item from the list, but you cannot use the items more than
once each. In the previous example, you can write HOST STATE, but you cannot write HOST HOST.

526 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 3. The * symbol is equivalent to a loopback line in a railroad syntax diagram.
+ indicates a syntax element that must be included
The plus (+) symbol indicates a syntax element that must be included at least once. A dotted decimal
number followed by the + symbol indicates that the syntax element must be included one or more
times. That is, it must be included at least once and can be repeated. For example, if you hear the line
6.1+ data area, you must include at least one data area. If you hear the lines 2+, 2 HOST, and
2 STATE, you know that you must include HOST, STATE, or both. Similar to the * symbol, the +
symbol can repeat a particular item if it is the only item with that dotted decimal number. The +
symbol, like the * symbol, is equivalent to a loopback line in a railroad syntax diagram.

Accessibility 527
528 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II
Notices
This information was developed for products and services that are offered in the USA or elsewhere.
IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in other countries.
Consult your local IBM representative for information on the products and services currently available in
your area. Any reference to an IBM product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only
that IBM product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or
service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may be used instead. However, it is the
user's responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any non-IBM product, program, or service.
IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in this document.
The furnishing of this document does not grant you any license to these patents. You can send license
inquiries, in writing, to:

IBM Director of Licensing

IBM Corporation
North Castle Drive, MD-NC119
Armonk, NY 10504-1785
United States of America
For license inquiries regarding double-byte character set (DBCS) information, contact the IBM Intellectual
Property Department in your country or send inquiries, in writing, to:

Intellectual Property Licensing

Legal and Intellectual Property Law
IBM Japan Ltd.
19-21, Nihonbashi-Hakozakicho, Chuo-ku
Tokyo 103-8510, Japan

The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other country where such
provisions are inconsistent with local law: INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION
PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT,
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of
express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically
made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication.
IBM may make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this
publication at any time without notice.
This information could include missing, incorrect, or broken hyperlinks. Hyperlinks are maintained in only
the HTML plug-in output for the Knowledge Centers. Use of hyperlinks in other output formats of this
information is at your own risk.
Any references in this information to non-IBM websites are provided for convenience only and do not in
any manner serve as an endorsement of those websites. The materials at those websites are not part of
the materials for this IBM product and use of those websites is at your own risk.
IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without
incurring any obligation to you.
Licensees of this program who wish to have information about it for the purpose of enabling: (i) the
exchange of information between independently created programs and other programs (including this
one) and (ii) the mutual use of the information which has been exchanged, should contact:

IBM Corporation
Site Counsel
2455 South Road

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2019 529

 Poughkeepsie, NY 12601-5400
USA

Such information may be available, subject to appropriate terms and conditions, including in some cases,
payment of a fee.
The licensed program described in this document and all licensed material available for it are provided by
IBM under terms of the IBM Customer Agreement, IBM International Program License Agreement or any
equivalent agreement between us.
Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled environment. Therefore, the
results obtained in other operating environments may vary significantly. Some measurements may have
been made on development-level systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements will be the
same on generally available systems. Furthermore, some measurements may have been estimated
through extrapolation. Actual results may vary. Users of this document should verify the applicable data
for their specific environment.
Information concerning non-IBM products was obtained from the suppliers of those products, their
published announcements or other publicly available sources. IBM has not tested those products and
cannot confirm the accuracy of performance, compatibility or any other claims related to non-IBM
products. Questions on the capabilities of non-IBM products should be addressed to the suppliers of
those products.
All statements regarding IBM's future direction or intent are subject to change or withdrawal without
notice, and represent goals and objectives only.
This information contains examples of data and reports used in daily business operations. To illustrate
them as completely as possible, the examples include the names of individuals, companies, brands, and
products. All of these names are fictitious and any similarity to the names and addresses used by an
actual business enterprise is entirely coincidental.
COPYRIGHT LICENSE:
This information contains sample application programs in source language, which illustrate programming
techniques on various operating platforms. You may copy, modify, and distribute these sample programs
in any form without payment to IBM, for the purposes of developing, using, marketing or distributing
application programs conforming to the application programming interface for the operating platform for
which the sample programs are written. These examples have not been thoroughly tested under all
conditions. IBM, therefore, cannot guarantee or imply reliability, serviceability, or function of these
programs. The sample programs are provided "AS IS", without warranty of any kind. IBM shall not be
liable for any damages arising out of your use of the sample programs.

Terms and conditions for product documentation

Permissions for the use of these publications are granted subject to the following terms and conditions.

Applicability
These terms and conditions are in addition to any terms of use for the IBM website.

Personal use
You may reproduce these publications for your personal, noncommercial use provided that all proprietary
notices are preserved. You may not distribute, display or make derivative work of these publications, or
any portion thereof, without the express consent of IBM.

Commercial use
You may reproduce, distribute and display these publications solely within your enterprise provided that
all proprietary notices are preserved. You may not make derivative works of these publications, or

530 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

 reproduce, distribute or display these publications or any portion thereof outside your enterprise, without
the express consent of IBM.

Rights
Except as expressly granted in this permission, no other permissions, licenses or rights are granted, either
express or implied, to the publications or any information, data, software or other intellectual property
contained therein.
IBM reserves the right to withdraw the permissions granted herein whenever, in its discretion, the use of
the publications is detrimental to its interest or, as determined by IBM, the above instructions are not
being properly followed.
You may not download, export or re-export this information except in full compliance with all applicable
laws and regulations, including all United States export laws and regulations.
IBM MAKES NO GUARANTEE ABOUT THE CONTENT OF THESE PUBLICATIONS. THE PUBLICATIONS ARE
PROVIDED "AS-IS" AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, NON-INFRINGEMENT,
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

IBM Online Privacy Statement

IBM Software products, including software as a service solutions, ("Software Offerings") may use cookies
or other technologies to collect product usage information, to help improve the end user experience, to
tailor interactions with the end user, or for other purposes. In many cases no personally identifiable
information is collected by the Software Offerings. Some of our Software Offerings can help enable you to
collect personally identifiable information. If this Software Offering uses cookies to collect personally
identifiable information, specific information about this offering’s use of cookies is set forth below.
Depending upon the configurations deployed, this Software Offering may use session cookies that collect
each user’s name, email address, phone number, or other personally identifiable information for purposes
of enhanced user usability and single sign-on configuration. These cookies can be disabled, but disabling
them will also eliminate the functionality they enable.
If the configurations deployed for this Software Offering provide you as customer the ability to collect
personally identifiable information from end users via cookies and other technologies, you should seek
your own legal advice about any laws applicable to such data collection, including any requirements for
notice and consent.
For more information about the use of various technologies, including cookies, for these purposes, see
IBM’s Privacy Policy at ibm.com/privacy and IBM’s Online Privacy Statement at ibm.com/privacy/details in
the section entitled “Cookies, Web Beacons and Other Technologies,” and the “IBM Software Products
and Software-as-a-Service Privacy Statement” at ibm.com/software/info/product-privacy.

Policy for unsupported hardware

Various z/OS elements, such as DFSMS, JES2, JES3, and MVS, contain code that supports specific
hardware servers or devices. In some cases, this device-related element support remains in the product
even after the hardware devices pass their announced End of Service date. z/OS may continue to service
element code; however, it will not provide service related to unsupported hardware devices. Software
problems related to these devices will not be accepted for service, and current service activity will cease if
a problem is determined to be associated with out-of-support devices. In such cases, fixes will not be
issued.

Notices 531
Trademarks

Minimum supported hardware

The minimum supported hardware for z/OS releases identified in z/OS announcements can subsequently
change when service for particular servers or devices is withdrawn. Likewise, the levels of other software
products supported on a particular release of z/OS are subject to the service support lifecycle of those
products. Therefore, z/OS and its product publications (for example, panels, samples, messages, and
product documentation) can include references to hardware and software that is no longer supported.
• For information about software support lifecycle, see: IBM Lifecycle Support for z/OS (www.ibm.com/
software/support/systemsz/lifecycle)
• For information about currently-supported IBM hardware, contact your IBM representative.

Programming Interface Information

This publication primarily documents information that is NOT intended to be used as Programming
Interfaces of ISPF.
This publication also documents intended Programming Interfaces that allow the customer to write
programs to obtain the services of ISPF. This information is identified where it occurs, either by an
introductory statement to a chapter or section or by the following marking:

+---------------------Programming Interface information----------------------+

+------------------End of Programming Interface information------------------+

Trademarks
IBM, the IBM logo, and ibm.com® are trademarks or registered trademarks of International Business
Machines Corp., registered in many jurisdictions worldwide. Other product and service names might be
trademarks of IBM or other companies. A current list of IBM trademarks is available on the Web at
Copyright and Trademark information (www.ibm.com/legal/copytrade.shtml).

532 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume II

Index

Special Characters ALL parameter

FIND command 78
: (colon), using with function key definition 37 Function field 399
.* SuperC process statement 460 Variable field 400
.IM control word 321 allocate action prompt workplace command 433
* SuperC process statement 460 Allocate command 157
/ (data set name character), Data Set List utility (option 3.4) ALLOCATE command, TSO 107
144 allocate SMS workplace command 434
&xxxxx action, ACTION column 184 allocate workplace command 433
% field, Data Set List utility 143 allow mixed-case in action field option 183
%Used field, VTOC Summary Information panel 150 Always save table in originating data set 229, 239
%USED keyword, SORT command 164 American National Standard Institute 180
= (repeat last command) line command, Data Set List utility APF authorized status 274, 281
(option 3.4) 157 APPC address
= workplace command 434 definition 56
> (greater than) APPEND command
using with function key definition 37 Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 158
parameters 158
Application ID field, Command Table Utility panel 182
Numerics ASCII 79
3850 virtual volumes aspect ratio parameter for PRINTG 26
allocating a data set to 108 Assembler concatenation sequence 325
5550 terminal 185 Assembler H (option 4.1) allocation data sets
overview 327
Assembler H (option 5.1) 351
A Assembler Options field
Foreground Assembler H (option 4.1) 327
A (ANSI) parameter, Printer Carriage Control field 180
assistive technologies 525
A (ASA printer characters) record format 109
Attrib display view, Initial View field 134
AA (auditor auditing) line command
audit information, z/OS UNIX 274
z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility (option 3.17) 260
accessibility
contact IBM 525 B
features 525
ACCOUNT command, TSO 108 B (batch) parameter, Mode field
ACCOUNT, TSO 86 Search-For Utility panel 212
ACTBAR workplace command 433 SuperC Utility panel 192
Action column 183 B (blocked) record format, Record Format field 109
Activate/Create Profile DS Name field, SuperCE Profile B (browse) line command
Manager panel 209 Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 153
AD/Cycle C/370 compiler z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility (option 3.17) 261
batch processing 358 Batch (option 5)
batch processing (option 5.15) 358 AD/Cycle C/370 compiler (option 5.16) 358
foreground processing 345 Assembler H (option 5.1) 351
foreground processing (option 4.15) 345 C/370 compiler (option 5.13) 358
Additional IBM Program Development Products panel 409 JCL generation for Assembler and Linkage Editor 351
Additional Input Libraries field, Foreground Print Options JCL generation for compilers 350
panel 324 Linkage Editor (option 5.7) 356
address, APPC 56 Member Parts List (option 5.12) 357
address, TCP/IP 56 overview 2
AFTER parameter password protection, lack of 348
Breakpoint Primary Option Menu 407 PL/I optimizing compiler (option 5.5) 354
When field 403 processing sequence 348
AIX (*AIX*) entry in Volume field 132 VS COBOL II compiler (option 5.2) 352
Alias action, Action column 183 VS COBOL II interactive debug (option 5.10) 357
alias entries, processing 170 VS FORTRAN compiler (option 5.3) 353
Alias members, searching 484 VS Pascal compiler (option 5.6) 355
Alias members, SuperC compare 484 Batch options

533
Batch options (continued) Browse data display panel 72
ISPDTLC 358 Browse field, SCRIPT/VS Processor panel 334
OS/390 C/C++ 359 Browse Mode
BATCH parameter, Print Mode field 171 Browse data display 71
BEFORE parameter current position in data set 83
Breakpoint Primary Option Menu 407 ending Browse 72
When field 403 overview 1, 73
Binary copy option 262, 265, 266, 268 selecting Browse 71
Blank action, Action column 184 valid logical record length 70
Blank lines after headings (in export report) 241 valid record format 69
blank parameter BROWSE Output field, SuperCE Utility panel 203
Active field browse output mode 192, 205, 212, 221
breakpoints 403 Browse table command 227
function traces 399 browse table panel 228
variable traces 401 Browse workplace command 433
DSORG field 143 Byte parameter, Compare Type field 201
Operation field 401
Pool field 401
Printer Carriage Control field 180
C
Select Pack option for “To” data set field 125 C (catalog data set) line command, Data Set List Utility
Sequence Numbers field 195 (option 3.4) 155
Specify additional search strings field 212 C (continuation) keyword, Search-For utility (option 3.14)
When field 403 214
BLKS parameter, Space Units field 108, 109 C or CO (copy out) line command
BLKSZ z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility (option 3.17) 261
field 144 C/370 compiler
keyword 164 batch processing (option 5.13) 358
SORT command 164 foreground processing (option 4.13) 345
Block size field, Allocate New Data Set panel 110 C/C++ for OS/390 (option 4.19) 346
breakpoints CALL statement format 342
defined 401 CANCEL command
Breakpoints (option 7.8) Breakpoints (option 7.8) 404
Cancel (option C) 406 Command Table utility (option 3.9) 184
CANCEL primary command 404 Dialog Test (option 7) 370
control display 405 table utility 231
D (delete) line command 404 Tables (option 7.4) 388, 390
END primary command 404, 405 Traces (option 7.7) 400
finding a breakpoint 406 Variables (option 7.3) 380
Go (option G) 406 CANCEL, Traces (option 7.7) 401
I (insert) line command 404 catalog workplace command 433
input errors 405 CATALOG, Sort command field 165
LOCATE primary command 404 CC parameter, DISPLAY command 74
primary command 404 CCSID
QUAL primary command 404 Unicode support in Browse 72
qualification 405 CCSID parameter, DISPLAY command 75
qualification parameter values 404 char parameter, DISPLAY command 74
R (repeat) line command 404 character string 79
specifying breakpoints 402 character string, LOCATE 370
syntax checking 405 CHARS parameter, FIND command 77
Browse CHG operation 401
providing Unicode support 72 CHGNV SuperC process statement 459
BROWSE command CHNG parameter, Listing Type field 194, 202
BROWSE 73 CI (copy in) line command
COLUMNS 73 z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility (option 3.17) 265
DISPLAY 74 Class field, Outlist Utility panel 180
displaying after processing 73 Client/Server component download option 175
FIND 76 Client/Server download 176
HEX 81 CLIST
LOCATE 83 error exits 363
overview 73 CLIST TERMIN command procedure statements 364
parameter member 73 closing a data set 72
RESET 84 CMD field 373
SUBMIT 73, 84 CMPBOFS SuperC process statement 461
Browse Command - Entry Panel 73 CMPCOLM SuperC process statement 462

534
CMPCOLMN SuperC process statement 462 Compare types, SuperC (continued)
CMPCOLMO SuperC process statement 462 Word 201
CMPLINE SuperC process statement 463 compress request exit 93, 155
CMPSECT SuperC process statement 464 compress workplace command 434
COBOL Interactive debug (option 4.10A) Cond parameter, Browse Output field 203
overview 338 CONFIRM command
print output data sets 340 Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 159
processing sequence 339 parameters
symbolic debug data sets 340 OFF 159
COBOL parameter, Sequence Numbers field 195 ON 159
col-1 and col-2 parameters, FIND command 77 Confirm Delete field, Data Set List Utility panel 134
COLHEAD SuperC process statement 466 confirm member delete 134
COLOR contact
change defaults 46 z/OS 525
Color used to display table key values 228, 239 conversion table
COLS parameter, DISPLAY command 75 copying z/OS UNIX files 262, 265, 266, 268
column limitations 80 COPY command 156
column-identification line copy member 102
defined 73 COPY statement 321
removing with RESET command 84 Copy workplace command 433
COLUMNS command, Browse 73 Created field
Command (option 6) Data Set List utility 144
interrupting a TSO command, CLIST, or REXX exec 364 CREATED keyword, SORT command 165
overview 2 CSECT compare, SuperC 485
restrictions for entering a CLIST or REXX exec 363 CUA
Session Manager, using 364 defaults
terminal settings 364 function key settings 434
TSO commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs, entering 363 CUA attributes workplace command 433
command action prompt workplace command 433 CUA attributes… 50
Command field, display view panels 141 CUA panel element default values 50
command line placement, specifying 22 CUA panel element values (changing) 50
command prefix (&), displaying commands after processing CUAATTR option, Change Utility 50
73 CYLS parameter, Space Units field 108
command stacking
specifying delimiter 28
command table line commands
D
edit 185 D (DBCS) parameter, Field Type field 187
view 185 D (delete lines)
Command Table utility (option 3.9) Command Table utility (option 3.9) 184
line commands Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 154
D (delete) 184 Dialog Test (option 7) 370
I (insert) 185 Format Specification utility (option 3.11) 189
R (repeat) 185 SCRIPT/VS (option 4.9) 336
primary commands D (delete) line command
CANCEL 184 Breakpoints (option 7.8) 404
END 184 Tables (option 7.4) 388, 390
command time limit Variables (option 7.3) 380
z/OS UNIX directory list 291 z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility (option 3.17) 269
commands DA data set organization, DSORG field 143
Dialog Test 368 DASD volume 86
displaying after processing 73 Data class field, Allocate New Data Set panel 107
entering long commands 361 DATA parameter
ISPF command shell 429 HEX command 81
line 2 data set allocation exit 107
primary 2 data set control blocks 150
reading syntax diagrams xxviii Data Set download 178
TSO command 427 Data Set Information panel
Workplace 432 long format 95
WS command 428 long format for managed data sets 97
Compare Type field, SuperCE Utility panel 201 data set list primary commands
Compare types, SuperC CONFIRM 159
Byte 201 EXCLUDE 159
File 201 FIND and RFIND 160
Line 201 LOCATE 161

535
data set list primary commands (continued) data set list utility line commands (continued)
MEMBER 161 SuperCE 157
REFRESH 161 unexclude data set 156
RESET 161 unexclude first data set 156
SAVE 161 unexclude last data set 156
SHOWCMD 163 Data Set List Utility Primary Commands 158
SORT 164 Data Set Name field
SRCHFOR 165 Foreground Member Parts List panel 343
VA,VS,VT,VV 166 SuperC Submit Batch Jobs panel 197
Data Set List utility (option 3.4) Data set name type field, Allocate New Data Set panel 110
data set list exit 131 data set organization 143
display views and panels Data Set Password 87
Attrib 134 Data Set utility (option 3.2)
Space 134 options
Total 134 A - Allocate new data set 105
Volume 133 blank - data set information 117
line commands C - Catalog data set 113
= (repeat last command) 157 D - Delete entire data set 114
B (browse data set) 153 R - Rename entire data set 113
C (catalog data set) 155 S - Data set information (short) 116
D (delete data set) 154 U - Uncatalog data set 114
E (edit data set) 152 options that do not support managed data sets
F (free unused space) 155 C - Catalog data set 113
I (data set information) 155 U - Uncatalog data set 114
M (display member list) 153 options that support managed data sets
P (print data set) 155 blank - Data set information 117
R (rename data set) 154 R - Rename entire data set 113
S (information (short)) 155 S - Data set information (short) 116
U (uncatalog data set) 155 processing with RACF
V (view data set) 152 D - Delete 116
X (print index listing) 156 R - Rename 113
Z (compress data set) 155 R - rename entire data set (GDG) 113
line commands that do not support managed data sets DAU data set organization, DSORG field 143
C (catalog data set) 155 DBCS considerations, SuperC 191
U (uncatalog data set) 155 DBCS data, copying 262, 265, 266, 268
line commands that support managed data sets DDDD format, Expiration Date field 111
I (data set information) 155 Debug command data set field 357
R (rename data set) 154 Debug Options field, Foreground FORTRAN interactive debug
S (information (short)) 155 (option 4.11) 341
X (print index listing) 156 default keylist for Help Panels 35
list data set 162 delete action prompt workplace command 433
options DELETE command, TSO 134, 159
blank - display data set list 136 Delete workplace command 433
P - Print data set list 149 DELETE, Traces (option 7.7) 400, 401
PV - Print VTOC information 150 Delta parameter, Listing Type field 194, 202
V - Display VTOC information 149 Description column 184
primary commands Description field, SCRIPT/VS Formatting Style panel 336
CONFIRM 159 Device Data information, z/OS UNIX 274
FIND 160 Device field, Data Set List utility 143
LOCATE 161 DEVICE keyword, SORT command 164
RFIND 160 device name parameter for PRINTG 26
SAVE 161 DFSMSdfp
SHOWCMD 163 striped data set type 96, 100
SORT 164 Dialog Services (option 7.6), calling a dialog service 395
data set list utility line commands dialog test
Allocate 157 accessing and updating variables 366
copy 156 available ISPF facilities 367
exclude data set 156 breakpoint cancel (option C) 365
move 156 environment 365
RefAdd 156 ISPF log generation 367
reset 156 message displayed for severe errors 368
Search-For 157 NEWPOOL option 367
Search-ForE 157 severe error found at breakpoint 368
SuperC 156 Dialog Test

536
Dialog Test (continued) Edit (option 2) (continued)
DBCS value format 383 editing a data set 85
log entry for current value of variable 395 overview 2
reasons errors occur 368 valid logical record length 85
variable usage 367 valid record format 85
Dialog Test (option 7) edit action prompt workplace command 433
Breakpoints (option 7.8) 401 EDIT command, Browse 76
commands 368 Edit Entry Panel 85
D (delete lines) 370 EDIT primary command
Dialog Services (option 7.6) 395 z/OS UNIX directory list 286
environment 406 Edit table command 226, 227
exceptions to restoration when using Go (option G) 406 edit table panel 228
Exit (option 7.X) 408 Edit workplace command 433
Functions (option 7.1) 372 edit, command table line command 185
I (insert lines) 371 edit, distributed 60, 88
Log (option 7.5) 393 editing a member 102, 296–302, 305–307, 309, 311, 313,
overview 2 314
Panels (option 7.2) 375 END
R (repeat lines) 371 Traces (option 7.7) 400, 401
severe error handling 368 END command
Traces (option 7.7) 398 Breakpoints (option 7.8) 404, 405
Tutorial (option 7.T) 407 Command Table utility (option 3.9) 184
variable usage 367 Dialog Test (option 7) 370
Variables (option 7.3) 377 Variables (option 7.3) 380
Directory blocks field, Allocate New Data Set panel 109 Enter Session Manager Mode field 364
Directory List Options panel, z/OS UNIX 290 Environ settings 52
DISALLOW_WILDCARDS_IN_HLQ option 131 ENVIRON system command 52
Display Area field 238 environment, Dialog Test 365
DISPLAY command errors
Browse 74 message displayed during dialog test processing 368
parameters 74, 75 reasons for occurring during Dialog Test 368
Display Directory List option, z/OS UNIX 250 trigger statement 324
display member information 103 Eview output mode 192, 205
Display mode for export data set 240 EXCLUDE command 159
Display Style Options field, SCRIPT/VS Processor panel 334 Exclude Data Set command 156
distributed editing 60, 88 Execution Parms field
Document Composition Facility (DCF) 333 COBOL interactive debug 339
double-byte character set (DBCS) Exit (option 7.X) ending Dialog Test 408
column specification in dialog test 384 Exit (option X)
defining data type 187 overview 3
Dialog Test variables format 381 EXPAND primary command 229
finding a 1-byte hexadecimal string 81 Expanding Packed Data 320
Format Specification utility (option 3.11) 185 expansion trigger, defined 320
ISPF editor 89 Expiration data field, Allocate New Data Set panel 111
DPLINE SuperC process statement 467 Expires field, Data Set List utility 144
DPLINEC SuperC process statement 467 EXPIRES keyword, SORT command 165
DS1-DS4 fields explosion chain, defined 345
Extended Search-For - Concatenation Data Set Entry EXPORT command 232
panel 220 export table to data set
DSLIST exit 131 data set attributes 241
DSLIST workplace command 433 export data set 233
Dsname Level field, Data Set List Utility panel 131 Export Layout panel 232
Dsorg field, Data Set List utility 143 export report options 240, 243
DSORG keyword, SORT command 164 EXTENDED
DTEST system command 366 data set name type 96, 100
Extended Attributes field, Allocate New Data Set panel 111
Extended Attributes information, z/OS UNIX 274
E extended binary coded decimal interchange code (EBCDIC)
E (EBCDIC) parameter, Field Type field 187 defining data type 187
E (edit data set) line command, Data Set List utility (option using numbered data 188
3.4) 152 Extended Search-For Compare utility
edit applications 445
double-byte character set support 89 options
Edit (option 2) B - submit batch search-for 220

537
Extended Search-For Compare utility (continued) field (continued)
options (continued) Open option 393
Blank - search-for strings 219 Open tables 383
E - edit Search-For statements data set 222 Operation 401
P - select Search-For process options 222 Original row count 392, 393
overview 216 P (pool) 379
process options 446 PANEL 373
SuperC program description 444 Panel name 376
utility differences 443 PASSLIB 375
Extended Search-For listing PGM 374
printing in batch mode 221 Pool 400
extended utilities 443 Qual 403
extension variables 229 Qualification parameter values 404
Return code 407
row identification 383
F Row number 386
F (foreground) parameter, Mode field 192 Service 403
F (foreground) parameter, Mode field, Search-For Utility Service Name 407
panel 212 specifying a DBCS value 383
F (free unused space) line command, Data Set List utility Status for this screen 391, 393
(option 3.4) 155 Table available 391
F (function) pool, Pool field 400 table name 383
F record format, Record Format field 109 Table name 386
false match, correcting in SuperC 483 Table on disk 393
family printer type parameter for PRINTG 26 Time created 392, 393
feedback xxxv Update count 392, 393
FEXPORT command 233 using the Value field 383
field variable 383
Active 399, 401, 403 Variable 379, 387
AFTER 407 Virtual storage size 392, 393
Application 407 When 403
BEFORE 407 WSCMD 374
Breakpoint 407 Field Heading field, table utility 232
by row number 383 Field Length field, Format Definition panel 187
BY ROW NUMBER 383 Field Number field, Format Definition panel 187
current row 383 Field Type field, Format Definition panel 187
Current row count 392, 393 field1 parameter, SORT command 164
Current row pointer 391, 393 field2 parameter, SORT command 164
Current status 407 FILE command, table utility 233
Cursor field 376 File parameter, Compare Type field 201
Cursor position 376 FILEXFER service 178
Date created 392, 393 FILTER primary command
DBCS column specification 384 z/OS UNIX directory list 286
Dialog services to be traced 399 FIND command
Display in window 376 ASCII strings 79
Function 399, 401, 403, 407 Browse
ID 374 1-byte hexadecimal strings 81
KEYS 391 character strings, use of 79
LANG 373 column limitations 80
Last date modified 392, 393 conditions for character string matches 78
Last modified by 392, 393 displaying column numbers searched 78
Last service return code 393 omitting string delimiters 77
Last table service 393 picture strings, use of 79
Last time modified 392, 393 rules for using col-1 and col-2 80
Message id 376 specifying FIND strings 77
Message pop-up field 376 starting point, direction, and extent of search 78
MODE 374 string not found actions 78
Modified row count 392, 393 text strings, use of 79
NAMES 391 using RFIND 81
NEWAPPL 374 using string delimiters 78
NEWPOOL 374 search operands 77, 78
Number of keys 391 string matching operands 77
Number of names 391 table utility 234
Number of rows 391 USASCII strings 79

538
FIND command (continued) function keys (continued)
UTF8 strings 79 defining functions 36
FIND primary command specifying labels 36
z/OS UNIX directory list 287 specifying number 44
FIRST parameter, FIND command 78 Functions (option 7.1), testing a dialog function 372
Foreground (option 4)
AD/Cycle C/370 compiler (option 4.15) 345
AD/Cycle C/370 compiler (option 4.16) 345
G
Assembler H (option 4.1) 327 Generate headings (in export report) 241
C/370 compiler (option 4.13) 345 generic unit address 108
COBOL interactive debug (option 4.10A) 338 GET operation 401
defined 317 global color change utility 47
expanding packed data 320 global color change workplace command 433
FORTRAN interactive debug (option 4.11) 341 global GUI color change utility 47
input data sets 324 graphics interface mode, effect on Session Manager 318
Linkage Editor (option 4.7) 331 graphics, settings parameters for PRINTG 25
list data sets 325 Groups For Primary Members field
Members Parts List (option 4.12) 341 Foreground Member Parts List panel 343
object data sets 326 Member Parts List Display 344
overview 2 GUI Installation, ISPF C/S Install Utility 174
password protection 326 GUI parameters, specifying 53
PL/I optimizing compiler (option 4.5) 329
processing sequence 318
REXX/370 compiler (option 4.14) 345 H
SCRIPT/VS (option 4.9) 333
Hardcopy utility (option 3.6)
using the TSO/E Information Center Facility 326
additional batch printing information 173
VS COBOL II compiler (option 4.2) 328
using the TSO/E Information Center Facility 173
VS COBOL II interactive debug (option 4.10) 338
HELP command
VS FORTRAN compiler (option 4.3) 328
displaying column numbers searched 78
VS Pascal compiler (option 4.6) 330
HEX command
Foreground Environment Feature 333
Browse 81
Foreground Options
operands
C/C++ for OS/390 346
DATA 81
ISPDTLC 345
OFF 81
Format Name field
ON 81
Format Specification panel 186
VERT 81
Format Specification utility (option 3.11)
hexadecimal data, Dialog Test variables format 381
line commands
HFS
D (deleting a format) 189
data set name type 96, 100
R (renaming a format) 190
high-level qualifier
S (selecting a format) 190
wildcards in 131
U (updating a format) 190
options
A - add a new format 187 I
C - copy formats 188
D - delete a format 189 I (data set information) line command, Data Set List utility
L or Blank - display format list 189 (option 3.4) 155
U - update a format 189 I (implicit) variable, P (pool) field 379
primary commands I (information) line command
LOCATE 189 z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility (option 3.17) 272
SORT 190 I (insert lines), Dialog Test (option 7) 371
FORTRAN interactive debug (option 4.11) 341 I (insert) line command
fragments, syntax diagrams xxviii Breakpoints (option 7.8) 404
Free DSCBS field, VTOC Information Display 150 Tables (option 7.4) 388, 390
Free Extents field, VTOC Information Display 150 Variables (option 7.3) 380
From Format field, Format Specification panel 186 I (insert) line command, Command Table utility (option 3.9)
From Table field, Format Specification panel 150, 186 185
FS (file system) line command IBM Products (option 9)
z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility (option 3.17) 270 overview 2
FSCR parameter, MODE field 374 IEBCOPY utility 93, 155
full information workplace command 433 IEBGENER utility 173
function key defaults, workplace 434, 435 If Partitioned, Replace Like-Named Members field 125
function key settings, workplace 434 If Sequential, “To” Data Set Disposition field 125
function keys image path 60

539
implicit variable 379 ISRLEMX (continued)
import table from data set 242 description 321
Include Additional Qualifiers (in data set list) 134 member parts list 341
INCLUDE statement 321 return codes 323
inconsistent attributes, defined 112 ISRSCAN
information action prompt workplace command 433 description 321
Information Center Facility member parts list 350
foreground processing sequence 319 return codes 323
Hardcopy utility 170
Outlist utility 181
Initial Macro field, Edit Entry panel 70
J
Initial View field JCL generation
defined 133 Assembler and Linkage Editor 351
views compilers 350
Attrib 134 job control language, generating and submitting print jobs
sequence of views 133 172
Space 134 job statement information
Total 134 preventing JES line counting 335
Volume 133 job stream, submitting a 73, 84
input data sets 324 JobID field, Outlist Utility panel 180
INSERT command 234 Jobname field, Outlist Utility panel 180
INSERT, Traces (option 7.7) 400, 401 jump function, from leader dots 24
Installation
Download Data Set to Workstation 174
installation exits K
compress request 93, 155
K (key) variable 385, 387, 389
data set allocation 107
KB parameter, Space Units field 109
data set list (DSLIST) 131
keyboard
print utility 170, 181, 319
navigation 525
Installation program
PF keys 525
Workstation agent 178
shortcut keys 525
integration program, workstation tool 60
keylist
Intensity used to display table key values 228, 240
defaults for Help Panels 35
ISPCMDS 181
help panel name 42
ISPDTLC (option 4.18) 345
modification choices 40
ISPDTLC compile, batch 358
keylist utility 34, 35
ISPF
keylist workplace command 433
default keylist 34, 35
keys
restrictions
PA1 364
multivolume data sets 108, 131
Reset 364
tape 108, 151
keywords, syntax diagrams xxviii
ISPF C/S download 176
ISPF C/S download utility
C/S method 176 L
ISPF C/S Install option 175
ISPF C/S Install Utility L (List) line command
ISPFINST.EXE 178 z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility (option 3.17) 276
ISPF C/S Installation 174 label fields
ISPF Command field 361 defining 38
ISPF command shell 429 using PFSHOW command 37
ISPF command shell workplace command 433 label parameter, LOCATE command 83
ISPF command table workplace command 433 Language field, Foreground Member Parts List panel 342
ISPF Primary Option Menu - status area 5 LARGE
ISPF referral list data set name type 96, 100
Workplace (Option 11) 415 large files, partitioning and processing in SuperC 483
ISPF restrictions Largest field, VTOC Information Display 150
multivolume data sets 108, 131 LAST parameter, FIND command 78
tape 108, 151 LC command 160
ISPF Settings (option 0 ), overview 1 LC command, Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 160
ISPF Table Utility 223 leader dots, and jump function 24
ISPFINST.EXE 178 LEFT primary command
ISPTLIB 181 z/OS UNIX directory list 287
ISRFORM table 188 Library utility (option 3.1)
ISRLEMX options

540
Library utility (option 3.1) (continued) Listing Type field (continued)
options (continued) SuperC Utility-Old Data Set Name panel 194
B - browse member 102 SuperCE Utility panel 202
Blank - display member list 93 LNCT SuperC process statement 470
C - compress data set 93 Local parameter, Print Mode field 171
D - delete member 102 Local Printer ID field, Hardcopy Utility panel 171
E - edit member 102, 296–302, 305–307, 309, LOCATE
311, 313, 314 Dialog Test (option 7) 370
I - data set information 94 Traces (option 7.7) 400, 401
L - print entire data set 94 LOCATE character string 370
P - print member 103 LOCATE command
R - rename member 103 Breakpoints (option 7.8) 404
S - data set information (short) 98 Browse 83
V - view member 104 Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 161
X - print index listing 93 Format Specification utility (option 3.11) 189
options that support managed data sets parameters
I - data set information 96 label 83
S - data set information (short) 99 line-number 83
X - print index listing 93 lparm 161
Library Utility panel 92 name 189
LINE - Dialog Test (option 7) 370 Variables (option 7.3) 380
Line Cmd field, SCRIPT/VS Formatting Style panel 336 LOCATE primary command
line command prefix characters z/OS UNIX directory list 288
z/OS UNIX directory list 257 Locate table command 226, 228
line commands locate workplace command 433
Command Table utility (option 3.9) 184 Log (option 7.5)
Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 144, 150 displaying the ISPF log 393
defined 2 logged trace output 394
Format Specification utility (option 3.11) 190 reasons log is not available 394
SCRIPT/VS (option 4.9) 336 log data set
Line parameter, Compare Type field 201 specifying defaults 30
LINE parameter, DISPLAY command 75 Log/List (option 0)
LINE parameter, MODE field 374 changing defaults 3
line-number operand, LOCATE command 83 long message
Linkage Editor (option 4.7) line placement 23
concatenation sequence 332 specifying 23
LEL control statements 332 long message areas, displaying in a pop-up 23
overview 331 LONG parameter, Listing Type field 194, 202
Linkage Editor (option 5.7) 356 lowercase, defining parameters in 183
Linkage Editor concatenation sequence 332 lparm parameter, LOCATE command 161
Linkage Editor language 332 LPSFV SuperC process statement 471
Linkage Editor Options field, Foreground Linkage Editor Lrecl field, Data Set List utility 144
(option 4.7) 332 LRECL keyword, SORT command 164
list action prompt workplace command 433 LSTCOLM SuperC process statement 470
list data set
list-id 162
prefix 162
M
specifying characteristics 32 M (display member list) line command, Data Set List utility
specifying defaults 30 (option 3.4) 153
List ID field M (machine) parameter, Printer Carriage Control field 180
Batch Selection Panel 348 M (mixed ) parameter, Field Type field 187
Foreground Print Options panel 325 M record format, Record Format field 109
Foreground Selection panel 319 MA (modify ACL) line command
list view workplace command 433 z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility (option 3.17) 276
list-id parameter managed data set
SAVE command 162 displaying information for 96
Listing DS Name field Management class field, Allocate New Data Set panel 107
Extended Search-For Utility panel 219 matching input files, SuperC 482
SuperC Utility-Old Data Set Name panel 194 Maximum rows searched to determine column width 229,
Listing Dsn field, SuperCE Utility panel 202 239
Listing DSNAME field, Search-For Utility panel 212 MB parameter, Space Units field 109
listing file examples member
NARROW listing 497 copy from z/OS UNIX file 261
Listing Type field copy to z/OS UNIX file 265

541
MEMBER command N
description 161
member expansion return codes 323 N (new) line command
Member list workplace command 433 z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility (option 3.17) 282
member not found 344 Name field
member parameter display view panels 141
BROWSE command 73 NAME keyword
SYSTERM DD statement 351 LOCATE command 189
Member Parts List (option 4.12) SORT command 164, 190
CALL statement format 342 name, Writer 171
member not found 344 navigation
options keyboard 525
1 - browse/print member parts list 343 NCHGT SuperC process statement 459
2 - write member parts data set 344 new data set, defined for SuperC
overview 341 description 191
Procedure Division 342 New DS Name field, SuperCE Utility panel 200
record format 344 New Output Class field, Outlist Utility panel 180
Member Parts List (option 5.12) 357 New UserID field, Reset ISPF Statistics panel 168
membered PDS, defined 193 New Version Number field, Reset ISPF Statistics panel 168
Message field, display view panels 141 NEWAPPL field 374
MESSAGE keyword, SORT command 164 NEWPOOL field 374
MF (modify format) line command NEXCLUDE SuperC process statement 469
z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility (option 3.17) 278 NEXT parameter, FIND command 78
MG (modify group) line command NFOCUS SuperC process statement 469
z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility (option 3.17) 279 NO parameter
mixed case, defining parameters in 183 Active field
mixed data breakpoints 403
B (browse data set) line command 153 function traces 399
defining data type 187 variable traces 401
E (edit data set) line command 152 Browse Output field 203
using numbered data 188 Confirm Delete Request field, deselect 134
V (view data set) line command 152 Replace like-named PDS members field 125
Mixed Mode 88 Select pack option For “To” data set field 125
MM (modify mode) line command Specify additional search strings field, deselect 212
z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility (option 3.17) 280 Table available field 391
MO (modify owner) line command Table on disk field 393
z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility (option 3.17) 280 NOACTBAR workplace command 433
Mod parameter, “To” Data Set Disposition field 125 NOCC parameter, DISPLAY command 74
Mode field Nolist parameter, Listing Type field 194, 202
Search-For Utility panel 212 NOP action, ACTION column 184
SuperC Utility panel 192 NORDW parameter, DISPLAY command 75
mode fields information, z/OS UNIX 274 NOSEQ parameter, Sequence Numbers field 195
Mode, Mixed 88 NOT OPEN parameter 391, 393
MOUNT authority 108 NOWRITE parameter 393
MOVE command 156 NTITLE SuperC process statement 474
move member 103 Number of Copies field, Hardcopy Utility panel 174
Move workplace command 433 NY2AGE SuperC process statement 475
move/copy 430 NY2C SuperC process statement 476
Move/Copy utility (option 3.3) NY2D SuperC process statement 476
alias entries 128 NY2P SuperC process statement 476
options NY2Z SuperC process statement 476
C and CP - copying data sets 124
M and MP - moving data sets 126
with load modules 127
O
Multiple Search Strings panel 213 object data sets 326
multiple search strings, entering 213 Object field
multivol indicator 142 Foreground VS FORTRAN compiler (option 4.3) 329
multivolume data sets 108, 131 OBROWSE command
MVOL, Sort command field 165 browsing z/OS UNIX regular file 261
MX (modify extended attributes) line command OCHGT SuperC process statement 459
z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility (option 3.17) 281 OEDIT command
editing ASCII file 269
editing UTF8 file 269
editing z/OS UNIX regular file 269, 286

542
OEXCLUDE SuperC process statement 469 Outlist utility (option 3.8) (continued)
OFF parameter options (continued)
CONFIRM command 159 R - requeue job output to a new output class 181
HEX command 81 overview of ISPF
SHOWCMD command 163 ISPF primary options 1
OFOCUS SuperC process statement 469 OVSUM parameter, Listing Type field 194, 202
OGET command owner information, z/OS UNIX 273, 276
copying z/OS UNIX file to a data set 262 OY2AGE SuperC process statement 475
copying z/OS UNIX file to PDS member 263 OY2C SuperC process statement 476
Old DS Name field, SuperCE Utility panel 200 OY2D SuperC process statement 476
Old parameter, “To” Data Set Disposition file 125 OY2P SuperC process statement 476
ON parameter OY2Z SuperC process statement 476
CONFIRM command 159
HEX command 81
SHOWCMD command 163
P
Open option field P (print) line command
NOWRITE parameter 393 Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 155
SHR NOWRITE parameter 393 P (profile) pool, Pool field 401
SHR WRITE parameter 393 P (profile) variable, P (pool) field 379
WRITE parameter 393 PA1 key 364
OPEN parameter 391, 393 packed data
Open table in SHARE mode 239 defined 320
Open workplace command 433 packing data, Foreground (option 4) 318
OPT field 373 pad characters for panel input fields 28
option panel
Cancel (option C) 406 Breakpoint Primary Option 405
Go (option G) 406 Panels (option 7.2), testing dialog panels 375
option selection parameter
0 - ISPF Settings 1 parenthesis added to 183
1 - View 1 parameter string 405
10 - SCLM 2 parenthesis, added to command parameter 183
2 - Edit 2 PARM field 374
3 - Utilities 2 partitioned data set
4 - Foreground 2 copy from files in z/OS UNIX directory 263
5 - Batch 2 copy to files in z/OS UNIX directory 266
6 - Command 2 partitioning and processing in SuperC, large files 483
7 - Dialog Test 2 PASSLIB field 375
9 - IBM Products 2 Passthru action
X - Exit 3 Action column 184
Options pull-down menu, switching UIDs 316 Password field
options, table utility 239 Foreground Data Entry panel 326
OPUT command Foreground Selection panel 319
copying member to z/OS UNIX file 267 password protection 326
Order field, table utility 232, 236 Password, Data Set 87
OS/390 C/C++ compile, batch 359 PATH (*PATH*) entry in Volume field 132
Other field path name substitution character
Batch Assembler H (option 5.1) 352 z/OS UNIX directory list 291
Batch Linkage Editor (option 5.7) 356 patterns
Batch VS COBOL II compiler (option 5.2) 353 Dsname Level field 131
Batch VS FORTRAN compiler (option 5.3) 354 PDS Member List field
Foreground PL/I optimizing compiler (option 4.5) 330 defined 201
Foreground VS COBOL II compiler (option 4.2) 328 parameters 217
Foreground VS FORTRAN compiler (option 4.3) 329 permissions, display in octal format 291
Foreground VS Pascal compiler (option 4.6) 331 personal data set lists command 433
OTITLE SuperC process statement 474 personal library lists command 433
OUTDD DD field, SuperC Submit Batch Jobs panel 198 Pgm Control status 274, 281
Outlist utility (option 3.8) physical record length, defined 110
options picture strings, use of 79
Blank - display job output 181 PL/I optimizing compiler
D - delete job output from SYSOUT hold queue 180 batch (option 5.5) 354
L - list job names/IDs via the TSO STATUS command foreground (option 4.5) 329
180 PO data set organization, DSORG field 143
P - print job output and delete from SYSOUT hold point and shoot workplace command 434
queue 180 POU data set organization, Dsorg field 143

543
prefix parameter Q
data set list to ISPF list data set 162
FIND command 77 QUAL
SYSTERM DD statement 351 command - Breakpoints (option 7.8) 404
PREFIX parameter, FIND command 77 Dialog Test (option 7) 370
PREV parameter, FIND command 78 qualification parameter values
primary commands Qualify action bar pull-down
Browse 73 Breakpoints... choice 404
CANCEL 370 Qualifications... choice 404
Command Table utility (option 3.9) 184
Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 158
defined 2
R
END 370 R - Rename entire data set (Data set utility options) 113
Format Specification utility (option 3.11) 189 R (rename) line command
LOCATE 370 Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 154
QUAL 370 Format Specification utility (option 3.11) 190
RESUME 370 z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility (option 3.17) 283
SU 316 R (repeat lines), Dialog Test (option 7) 371
Primary Commands, Data Set List Utility 158 R (repeat) line command
primary library, defined 344 Breakpoints (option 7.8) 404
primary member, defined 344 Command Table utility 185
Primary quantity field, Allocate New Data Set panel 109 Tables (option 7.4) 388, 390
print action prompt workplace command 434 RA (add to personal data set list) line command
print data set command 433 z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility (option 3.17) 283
print data set index workplace command 434 RACF, processing with
Print data set list workplace command 433 D - delete 116
Print Directory List option, z/OS UNIX 259 R - rename 113
Print ID field, COBOL Interactive Debug panel 339, 340 RDW parameter, DISPLAY command 75
Print Mode field Recfm field, Data Set List utility 144
parameters RECFM keyword, SORT command 164
BATCH parameter 171 Record format field, Allocate New Data Set panel 109
LOCAL parameter 171 Record length field, Allocate New Data Set panel 110
SCRIPT/VS Processor panel 335 RefAdd command 156
print output data sets 340 Referred field, Data Set List utility 144
print utility exit REFERRED keyword, SORT command 165
foreground processing sequence 319 REFRESH command 161
Hardcopy utility 170 REFRESH primary command
Outlist utility 181 z/OS UNIX directory list 288
Print VTOC information workplace command 434 rename 431
Print workplace command 433 rename action prompt workplace command 434
Printer Carriage Control field, Outlist Utility panel 180 rename data set with expiration date 114
Printer Format field, Hardcopy Utility panel 174 rename processing with RACF 113
Printer Location field, Hardcopy Utility panel 174 rename workplace command 433
PRINTG Rename workplace command 434
parameters 25 renaming data sets
specifying printer output 25 with expiration date 114
printing REPEAT, Traces (option 7.7) 400, 401
output 170 repeatable items, syntax diagrams xxviii
Procedure Division 342 reset action prompt workplace command 433
Process Options field RESET command
Extended Search-For Utility panel 219 Browse 84
SuperCE Utility panel 202 Reset ISPF Statistics utility (option 3.5)
Profile DSN field, SuperC Utility panel 192 options
Profile Name field, Edit Entry Panel 71 D - delete ISPF statistics 169
profile, defined for SuperCE 192 R - reset (create/update) ISPF statistics 169
Prog ID field, COBOL Interactive Debug panel 339 results of resetting statistics 169
PROMPT, Sort command field 165 valid logical record lengths 166
PS data set organization, DSORG field 143 RESET key
PS-E 143 restriction 37
PS-L 143 reset member statistics 102
PSU data set organization, Dsorg field 143 Reset Mod Level option, Reset ISPF Statistics panel 168
Purge Data Set field, Confirm Purge panel 116 RESET parameter, DISPLAY command 75
PUT operation 401 RESET primary command
z/OS UNIX directory list 288

544
Reset Seq Numbers option, Reset ISPF Statistics panel 168 SCRIPT/VS (option 4.9) (continued)
reset statistics 427 line commands (continued)
restrictions on member expansion and member parts lists D (delete) 336
all programming languages 322 S (select) 336
assembler 322 selecting a formatting style 336
COBOL 322 using the TSO/E Information Center Facility 337
FORTRAN 322 scrollable fields, in Table Utility 231
Pascal 322 Scrollable fields, in Table Utility 229
PL/I 322 Search DS Name field, Extended Search-For Utility panel 217
SCRIPT/VS 323 search process options
RESUME - Dialog Test (option 7) 370 ALLMEMS 449
return codes ANYC 449
Batch JCL generation 323, 350 APNDLST 449
member expansion 323 ASCII 450
REVREF SuperC process statement 471 COBOL 450
REXX error exits 363 CPnnnnn 450
REXX/370 compiler DPACMT 451
batch processing 358 DPADCMT 451
foreground processing 345 DPBLKCL 451
RFIND command DPCBCMT 451
Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 160 DPCPCMT 451
table utility 235 DPFTCMT 451
using 81 DPMACMT 451
RFIND primary command DPPLCMT 451
z/OS UNIX directory list 287 DPPSCMT 451
RIGHT primary command FINDALL 452
z/OS UNIX directory list 288 IDPFX 452, 507
Rnn parameter 403 LMCSFC 452
rules LMTO 452, 503, 508
for substituting slash (/) for data set name 145 LNFMTO 453
for using the col-1 and col-2 operands 80 LONGLN 453
service call image for function trace entries 395 LPSF 453, 509
using the add row option 389 LTO 453, 509
using the Dialog Test Breakpoints option 405 MIXED 453
using the Modify Row option 387 NOPRTCC 453
Run method 286 NOSEQ 454
NOSUMS 454
SEQ 454
S XREF 456, 504, 507, 508
S (information (short)) line command, Data Set List utility Search String field, Search-For Utility panel 212
(option 3.4) 155 search strings, multiple 213
S (select) line command Search-For command 157
Format Specification utility (option 3.11) 190 Search-For utility (option 3.14)
SCRIPT/VS (option 4.9) 336 applications 445
S (shared) pool, Pool field 401 invoking directly 485
S (shared) variable, P (pool) field 379 selecting members from a member list 214
S record format, Record Format field 110 SuperC program description 444
SAVE command utility differences 443
Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 161 Search-ForE command 157
parameters SearchFor extended workplace command 434
list-id 162 SearchFor workplace command 434
name 190 Secondary quantity field, Allocate New Data Set panel 109
table utility 235 Select action, Action column 183
SAVE primary command SELECT command
z/OS UNIX directory list 289 Format Specification utility (option 3.11) 190
SCLM (option 10) SELECT service 365
overview 2, 411 SELECT SuperC process statement 473
SCLM Primary Option Menu 411 select workplace command 434
SCLM Setting 126 sending to IBM
SCLM Settings 168 reader comments xxxv
screen format, specifying 24 SEQ parameter, Sequence Numbers field 195
SCRIPT/VS (option 4.9) Sequence field, table utility 236
changing style options 337 Sequence Numbers field, SuperC Utility - Old Data Set Name
line commands panel 195

545
sequential data set SORT primary command
copy from z/OS UNIX file 261 z/OS UNIX directory list 289
copy to z/OS UNIX file 265 Source Data Online field, Batch Selection panel 348
Serial, Volume 86 Source Data Packed field
Session Manager Batch Selection panel 348
Command (option 6) 364 Foreground Print Options panel 321
Foreground (option 4) 318 Foreground Selection panel 318
Member Parts List (option 4.12) 343 Source field, COBOL Interactive Debug panel 339
SCRIPT/VS 334 Source Type field, Foreground Selection panel 319
using 364 Space display view, Initial View field 134
Set options for IMPORT format report 241 Space units field, Allocate New Data Set panel 108
SETGID bit 274, 280 Specify additional strings field, Search-For Utility panel 212
Settings option 21 Specify Pack option for “To” Data Set field 125
Settings workplace command 434 split-screen mode
SETUID bit 274, 280 command line placement 23
SETVERB action SRCHFOR command, Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 165
Action column 184 SRCHFOR SuperC process statement 471
shared library status 274, 281 SRCHFORC SuperC process statement 471
shared profile settings 53 standard Search-For utility, entering multiple search strings
shift-in characters 213
in Dialog Test variables 381 standard utilities 443
using the Value field 383 Start Column field 187
shift-out characters starting a GUI session
in Dialog Test variables 381 from Settings (option 0) 54
using the Value field 383 Statements Dsn field
short information command 434 Extended Search-For Utility panel 219
shortcut keys 525 SuperCE Utility panel 202
SHOWCMD command statistics
Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 163 creating or resetting 169
parameters STATS command 236
OFF 163 status area - ISPF Primary Option Menu 5
ON 163 status area - Primary Option Menu
SHR NOWRITE parameter 393 calendar view 10
SHR WRITE parameter 393 Defining 13
SHRPROF system command 53 function key view 9
Size field No view selected 13
VTOC Information Display 150 point-and-shoot view 12
SLIST SuperC process statement 474 session view 6
smart action 437 user view 12
Software Configuration and Library Manager (SCLM) 411 sticky bit 274, 280
SORT command Storage class field, Allocate New Data Set panel 107
Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 164 string parameter
Format Specification utility (option 3.11) 190 FIND command 77
keywords STRUCT command 237
%USED 164 Style field
BLKSZ 164 SCRIPT/VS Formatting Style panel 336
CREATED 165 SCRIPT/VS Processor panel 333
DEVICE 164 style, defined for SCRIPT/VS 333
DSORG 164 SU primary command
EXPIRES 165 z/OS UNIX directory list 290
LRECL 164 SUBMIT command, BROWSE 73, 84
MESSAGE 164 submit member 103
NAME 164 Submit workplace command 433
RECFM 164 submitting a job stream 73, 84
REFERRED 165 suffix
TRACKS 164 add to file name 267
VOLUME 164 strip from file name 264
XT 165 SUFFIX parameter, FIND command 79
parameters summary of changes xxxvii, xxxviii
field1 164 SuperC
field2 164 CSECT compare 485
NAME 190 SuperC Activate/Create Profile options
TIME 190 A - activate 209
table utility 235 C - create 209

546
SuperC Activate/Create Profile options (continued) SuperC comparison listing (continued)
D - default 210 page headings (continued)
SuperC alias members 484 program version 490
SuperC CLIST interface 210 reformat new (RN) 491
SuperC command 156 reformat old (RO) 491
SuperC compare types RFM= (reformat TYPE code) 492
Byte 201 RN (reformat new) 491
File 201 RO (reformat old) 491
Line 201 RPL= (replace TYPE code) 492
Word 201 scale 491
SuperC Compare utility section title line 490
correcting false matches 483 source line column 490
filtering priority for input lines 481 SOURCE LINE column 490
find match example 482 SOURCE LINE column (listing file) 490
invoking directly 485 TYPE column 490
partitioning and processing large files 483 TYPE column (listing file) 490
SuperC comparison listing SuperC comparison process statements
| (change bar) 492 .* 460
change bar (|) 492 * 460
column title line 490 CHNGV 459
D (deleted line) 491 CMPBOFS 461
DC (delete compose) 492 CMPCOLM 462
DEL= (delete TYPE code) 492 CMPCOLMN 462
delete compose (DC) 492 CMPCOLMO 462
delete moved (DM) 492 CMPLINE 463
delete replace (DR) 491 CMPSECT 464
deleted line (I) 491 COLHEAD 466
DM (delete moved) 492 DPLINE 467
DMR= (delete-move-reformat TYPE code) 492 DPLINEC 467
DMV= (delete-move TYPE code) 492 LNCT 470
DR (delete replace) 491 LSTCOLM 470
I (inserted line) 491 NCHGT 459
IC (insert compose) 491 NEXCLUDE 469
id column 490 NFOCUS 469
ID column 490 NTITLE 474, 490
ID column (listing file) 490 NY2AGE 475
IM (insert moved) 492 NY2C 476
IMR= (insert-move-reformat TYPE code) 492 NY2D 476
IMV= (insert-move TYPE code) 492 NY2P 476
INS= (insert TYPE code) 492 NY2Z 476
insert compose (IC) 491 OCHGT 459
insert moved (IM) 492 OEXCLUDE 469
inserted line (I) 491 OFOCUS 469
LEN column 490 OTITLE 474, 490
LEN column (listing file) 490 OY2AGE 475
MAT= (match TYPE code) 492 OY2C 476
match compose (MC) 491 OY2D 476
MC (match compose) 491 OY2P 476
member summary section 489 OY2Z 476
N-LN# 490, 491 REVREF 471
N-LN# (listing file) 490, 491 SELECT 473
NARROW listing example 497 SELECTF 500
O-LN# 490, 491 SLIST 474
O-LN# (listing file) 490, 491 WORKSIZE 475
overall summary section 489 Y2PAST 478
page headings SuperC comparison type
compare date 490 LINE 490
compare time 490 WORD 501
new file ID 490 SuperC extended workplace command 434
old file ID 490 SuperC listing type
page number 490 DELTA 490
printer control character 490 UPDCMS8 513
program date 490 UPDCNTL 514
program ID 490 UPDLDEL 517

547
SuperC listing type (continued) SuperC process statements
UPDMVS8 518 + (DPLINE operand) 468
UPDPDEL 519 + (SRCHFOR operand) 472
UPDREV 511 +start_column (DPLINE operand) 468
UPDREV2 512 +start_column (SRCHFOR operand) 472
UPDSEQ0 520 B (COLHEAD keyword) 466
UPDSUMO 520 BTM (CMPBOFS keyword) 461
SuperC listing types BTM (CMPLINE keyword) 463
CHNG 194, 202 BTM (CMPSECT keyword) 464
Delta 194, 202 C (COLHEAD keyword) 466
Long 194, 202 D (COLHEAD keyword) 466
Nolist 194, 202 end_col (CMPSECT operand) 465
OVSUM 194, 202 end_column (CMPCOLM operand) 462
SuperC listings 489 end_position (NEXCLUDE operand) 469
SuperC load module compares 484 end_position (NFOCUS operand) 470
SuperC process options end_position (OEXCLUDE operand) 469
ALLMEMS 449 end_position (OFOCUS operand) 470
ANYC 449 fixed (Y2PAST operand) 479
APNDLST 449 hex_offset (CMPBOFS operand) 461
APNDUPD 449 last_start_column (CMPLINE operand) 464
ASCII 450 last_start_column (DPLINE operand) 468
CKPACKL 450 last_start_column (LSTCOLM operand) 470
CNPML 450 last_start_column (NCHGT operand) 460
COBOL 450 last_start_column (OCHGT operand) 460
COVSUM 450 last_start_column (SRCHFOR operand) 472
CPnnnnn 450 line number (CMPLINE operand) 463
DLMDUP 450 NBTM 461
DLREFM 450 NBTM (CMPBOFS keyword) 461
DPACMT 451 NBTM (CMPLINE keyword) 463
DPADCMT 451 NBTM (CMPSECT keyword) 464
DPBLKCL 451 new_member (SELECT operand) 473
DPCBCMT 451 NTOP 461
DPCPCMT 451 NTOP (CMPBOFS keyword) 461
DPFTCMT 451 NTOP (CMPLINE keyword) 463
DPMACMT 451 NTOP (CMPSECT keyword) 464
DPPLCMT 451 number (CHNGV operand) 459
DPPSCMT 451 number (LNCT operand) 470
FINDALL 452 number (LPSFV operand) 471
FMSTOP 452 OBTM 461
FMVLNS 452, 492 OBTM (CMPBOFS keyword) 461
GWCBL 452, 492 OBTM (CMPLINE keyword) 463
LOCS 453 OBTM (CMPSECT keyword) 464
LONGLN 453 OFF (SLIST operand) 474
NARROW 453, 497 old_member (SELECT operand) 473
NOPRTCC 453, 490, 501 ON (SLIST operand) 474
NOSEQ 454 OTOP 461
NOSUMS 454 OTOP (CMPBOFS keyword) 461
REFMOVR 454 OTOP (CMPLINE keyword) 463
SDUPM 454 OTOP (CMPSECT keyword) 464
SEQ 454 output_string (NCHGT operand) 460
SYSIN 454 output_string (OCHGT operand) 460
UPDCMS8 454 P (COLHEAD keyword) 466
UPDCNTL 454 P (SRCHFOR operand) 472
UPDLDEL 454 RCVAL=number (REVREF operand) 471
UPDMVS8 455 REFID=name (REVREF operand) 471
UPDPDEL 455 S (SRCHFOR operand) 472
UPDREV 455 search_member (SELECT operand) 474
UPDREV2 455 search_string (CMPLINE operand) 463
UPDSEQ0 456 search_string (CMPSECT operand) 465
UPDSUMO 456 search_string (NCHGT operand) 460
VTITLE 456 search_string (OCHGT operand) 460
WIDE 456 section ID (CMPSECT operand) 465
XWDCMP 456 sliding (Y2PAST operand) 479
Y2DTONLY 456 start_column (CMPCOLM operand) 462

548
SuperC process statements (continued) SuperC search process statements (continued)
start_column (CMPLINE operand) 463 LSTCOLM 470
start_column (CMPSECT operand) 465 NCHGT 459
start_column (DPLINE operand) 468 NTITLE 474
start_column (LSTCOLM operand) 470 SELECT 473
start_column (NCHGT operand) 460 SLIST 474
start_column (OCHGT operand) 460 SRCHFOR 471
start_column (SRCHFOR operand) 472 SRCHFORC 471
start_position (NEXCLUDE operand) 469 SuperC side-by-side listing 453
start_position (NFOCUS operand) 470 SuperC update files
start_position (OEXCLUDE operand) 469 UPDCMS8 513
start_position (OFOCUS operand) 470 UPDCNTL 514–516
string (SRCHFOR operand) 472 UPDLDEL 517, 518
title_name (NTITLE operand) 475 UPDMVS8 518
title_name (OTITLE operand) 475 UPDPDEL 519
TOP (CMPBOFS keyword) 461 UPDREV 511, 512
TOP (CMPLINE keyword) 463 UPDREV2 Revision File (2) 512
TOP (CMPSECT keyword) 464 UPDSEQ0 520
W (SRCHFOR operand) 472 UPDSUMO 520–523
Z (COLHEAD keyword) 466 SuperC utility (option 3.12)
SuperC program, requirements for 444 applications 445
SuperC programming interface 210 new data set 191
SuperC reasons for differing comparison results 479 old data set 193
SuperC return codes printing a Search-For listing in batch mode 215
descriptions 480 printing a SuperC listing in batch mode 196
empty input file error 480 process options 446
error 480 program description 444
error return codes 480 specifying members on a member list 195
file attributes (inconsistent) 480 submit options
inconsistent file attributes 480 1 - generate output listing in DATA SET NAME 197
insufficient storage error 481 2 - generate output listing using completed //
invalid sequence numbers 480 OUTDD DD 198
listing file error (disk full) 480 blank - generate output listing to SYSOUT CLASS
listing file error (read only) 480 197
listing file I/O error 480 utility differences 443
no common members/files to compare 480 SuperC utility, requirements for 444
no data to compare error 480 SuperC workplace command 434
normal completion 480 SuperC, DBCS considerations 191
normal completion return codes 480 SuperCE - Profile Manager panel
storage (insufficient) error 481 option A - Activate 209
update file error (read only) 480 option C - Create 209
update file I/O error 480 option D - Defaults 210
warning 480 SuperCE command 157
warning return codes 480 SuperCE utility (option 3.13)
SuperC search listing applications 445
page headings options
compare date 501 A - activate profiles and defaults 208
compare time 501 E - edit SuperCE statements data set 207
page number 501 P - select process options 446
printer control character 501 P - select SuperCE process options 206
program date 501 S - Extended Search-For utility 216
program ID 501 process options
program version 501 overview 446
SuperC search process statements SuperC program description 444
.* 460 SuperCE utility 199
* 460 utility differences 443
CMPCOLM 462 symbolic debug data sets 340
CMPLINE 463 symbolic link information, z/OS UNIX 275
CMPSECT 464 syntax diagrams, how to read xxviii
COLHEAD 466 SYSLIB field
DPLINE 467 Batch Linkage Editor (option 5.7) 356
DPLINEC 467 Foreground Linkage Editor (option 4.7) 332
LNCT 470 SYSLIN field
LPSFV 471 Batch Linkage Editor (option 5.7) 356

549
SYSLIN field (continued) Table Utility (option 3.16) (continued)
Foreground Linkage Editor (option 4.7) 332 performance 229
SYSOUT Class field SAVE (table changes) command 235
Batch Selection panel 348 saving changes 229
Hardcopy Utility panel 171 scrollable fields 229, 231
SuperC - Submit Batch Jobs panel 197 scrolling 228
system command table 181 select table from DD list 227
system commands select table from library 225
DTEST 366 sorting rows 235
SYSTERM DD statement, parameters STATS command 236
member 351 table structure, displaying 237
prefix 351 tables already open 243
Table Utility Options panel 239
Tables (option 7.4)
T 1—display row 384
T (truncation) column 183 2—delete row options 385
T (variable types) field 3—modify row 386
K (key) variable 4—add row 388
add row 389 5—display structure 390
delete row 387 6—display status 391
display row 385 add row line command 390
N (name) variable CANCEL add row primary command 390
add row 389 CANCEL modify row primary command 388
delete row 387 D (delete) add row line command 390
display row 385 D (delete) modify row line command 388
S (save) variable END add row primary command 390
add row 389 END display row command 385
delete row 387 END modify row primary command 388
display row 385 I (insert) add row line command 390
T record format, Allocate New Data Set panel 110 I (insert) modify row line command 388
table LOCATE add row primary command 390
date created/modified 236 LOCATE display row command 385
editing/browsing, See ISPF Table Utility LOCATE display structure command 391
export to data set 232, 243 LOCATE modify row primary command 388
find string in 234 R (repeat) add row line command 390
import from data set 242 R (repeat) modify row line command 388
insert blank row 234 tape 108, 131
processing if already open 243 TCP/IP address
saving changes 229, 235 definition 56
size (virtual storage required) 237 TERMIN command procedure statements 364
sorting rows 235 terminal characteristics, specifying 24
status 237 terminal data set, defined 352
structure, displaying 237 terminal type, specifying 25
table input library 181 terminals
Table statistics, displaying 236 Batch Assembler H (option 5.1) 352
Table structure, displaying 237 Batch Linkage Editor (option 5.7) 356
Table Utility (option 3.16) Batch VS COBOL II compiler (option 5.2) 353
Browse command 227 Batch VS FORTRAN compiler (option 5.3) 354
CANCEL (table changes) command 231 Test field
Edit command 226, 227 Foreground VS COBOL II compiler (option 4.2) 328
EXPORT command 232 testing
export report 240, 243 dialogs 365
export to data set 243 TSO 365
extension variables 229 usual test methods for dialog 365
FEXPORT command 233 text strings, use of 79
FILE command 233 TIME parameter, SORT command 190
find string in table 234 tool integration program 60
import from data set 242 Total display view, Initial View field 134
INSERT command 234 trace output in ISPF log
Line command table support 246 function trace entries 395
options 239 trace header entries 394
output data set 238 variable trace entries 395
overview 223 Traces (option 7.7)
panel fields 224 1—function traces 399

550
Traces (option 7.7) (continued) UPD parameter, BROWSE Output field 203
2—variable traces 400 Update DS Name field, SuperC Utility - Old Data Set Name
CANCEL Function Traces primary command 400 panel 193
CANCEL Variable Traces primary command 401 Update Dsn field, SuperCE Utility panel 203
D (delete) Function Traces line command 400 USASCII 79
D (delete) Variable Traces line command 401 Use EDIT as default to process selected table option 239
END Function Traces primary command 400 Use Edit to view the imported table 240
END Variable Traces primary command 401 user interface
I (insert) Function Traces line command 400 ISPF 525
I (insert) Variable Traces line command 401 TSO/E 525
LOCATE Function Traces primary command 400 user-defined trigger 321
LOCATE Variable Traces primary command 401 UTF8 79
R (repeat) Function Traces line command 400 Utilities (option 3)
R (repeat) Variable Traces line command 401 Command Table utility (option 3.9) 181
working with trace specifications 398 Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 129
Tracks field Data Set utility (option 3.2) 104
Data Set List utility 143 Format Specification utility (option 3.11) 185
VTOC Information Display 150 Hardcopy utility (option 3.6) 170
TRACKS keyword, SORT command 164 ISPF C/S Install (option 3.7) 174
trademarks 532 Library utility (option 3.1) 91
trigger statement errors 324 Move/Copy utility (option 3.3) 122
triggers Outlist utility (option 3.8) 179
expansion trigger, definition 320 overview 2
statement errors 324 Reset ISPF Statistics utility (option 3.5) 166
user-defined 321 Search-For utility (option 3.14) 210
TRKS parameter, Space Units field 108 SuperC utility (option 3.12) 190
Trks/Cyls field, VTOC Information Display 150 SuperCE utility (option 3.13) 199
TSO Utility Selection Panel 91
CLISTs and REXX EXECs utility differences
Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 144 extended 443
entering 363 standard 443
variables 146, 148 Utility Selection Panel 91
commands
ACCOUNT 108
ALLOCATE 107
V
DELETE 159 V (VDEFINE) variable, P (pool) field 379
TEST 365 V (view data set) line command, Data Set List utility (option
TSO ACCOUNT 86 3.4) 152
TSO command 427 V (view regular file) line command
TSO command for member 103 z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility (option 3.17) 285
TSO workplace command 434 V record format, Record Format field 109
TTR data 94 VA (view ASCII file) line command
Tutorial (option 7.T), displaying 407 z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility (option 3.17) 285
VA command, Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 166
U Variables (option 7.3)
CANCEL primary command 380
U (uncatalog data set) line command, Data Set List utility creating new variables 380
(option 3.4) 155 D (delete) line command 380
U (updating a format) line command, Format Specification DBCS data 381
utility (option 3.11) 190 deleting variables 380
U record format, Record Format field 109 END primary command 380
UA (user auditing) line command hexadecimal data 381
z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility (option 3.17) 284 I (insert) line command 380
UIDs, switching 294, 315 input errors 380
uncatalog workplace command 434 LOCATE primary command 380
Underline headings (in export report) 241 manipulating variables 380
Unexclude Data Set command 156 primary commands 380
Unexclude First Data Set command 156 split-screen mode 381
Unexclude Last Data Set command 156 test mode 380
Unicode usage notes 380, 381
FIND command 77 variable life 381
viewing in Browse 72, 74 variable value 381
Unit field, VTOC Information Display 150 working with dialog variables 377
unmovable data set, defined 143 variables, syntax diagrams xxviii

551
Verb column 183 Workplace (Option 11) (continued)
VERT parameter, HEX command 81 actions that require prompt windows (continued)
View (option 1) rename 431
description 69 reset statistics 427
View Entry Panel 69 TSO command 427
view action prompt workplace command 434 WS command 428
VIEW command, Browse 84 commands 432
view output mode 192, 205, 212, 221 entry panels
View workplace command 434 data set view 414
view, command table line command 185 library view 413
viewing a member 104 example scenario 439
Volume DATA field, VTOC Information Display 150 ISPF Library field 414
Volume display view, Initial View field 133 ISPF referral lists 415
Volume field Object Name field 415
Data Set List utility 142 overview 413
Data Set List Utility panel 132 specifying actions 415
VOLUME keyword, SORT command 164 Workplace Commands
Volume Serial 86 = 434
Volume Serial field ACTBAR action prompt 433
Allocate New Data Set panel 108 allocate 433
volume, DASD 86 allocate action prompt 433
VS COBOL II compiler (option 4.2) allocate SMS 434
overview 328 Browse 433
VS COBOL II compiler (option 5.2) 352 catalog 433
VS COBOL II interactive debug (option 4.10) 338 command action prompt 433
VS COBOL II interactive debug (option 5.10) 357 compress 434
VS command, Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 166 Copy 433
VS data set organization, DSORG field 143 CUA attributes 433
VS FORTRAN compiler (option 4.3) 328 delete 433
VS FORTRAN compiler (option 5.3) 353 Delete 433
VS Pascal compiler (option 4.6) 330 delete action prompt 433
VS Pascal compiler (option 5.6) 355 DSLIST 433
VS-E 143 Edit 433
VSAM (*VSAM*) entry in Volume field 132 edit action prompt 433
VSAM workplace command 434 full information action prompt 433
VT command, Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 166 global color change 433
VTOC Data field, VTOC Information Display 150 information action prompt 433
VTOC summary workplace command 433 ISPF command shell 433
VU (view UTF8 file) line command ISPF command table 433
z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility (option 3.17) 285 keylist 433
VV command, Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 166 list action prompt 433
list view 433
locate 433
W Member list 433
Warn if export data set exists 240 Move 433
Warn if table exists in the output library 240 NOACTBAR action prompt 433
WE workplace command 434 Open 433
WEW workplace command 434 personal data set lists 433
wildcard characters 131 personal library lists 433
Word parameter point and shoot 434
Compare Type field 201 Print 433
FIND command 77 print action prompt 434
word, defined for SuperC 201 print data set 433
Workplace (Option 11) print data set index 434
action bar choices Print data set list 433
file 416 Print VTOC information 434
options 423 rename 433
space 424 Rename 434
SuperC 425 rename action prompt 434
test 426 reset action prompt 433
view 423 SearchFor 434
actions that require prompt windows SearchFor extended 434
ISPF command shell 429 select 434
move/copy 430 Settings 434

552
Workplace Commands (continued) YES parameter (continued)
short information 434 Table on disk field 393
Submit 433 YYYY.DDD format, Expiration Date field 111
SuperC 434 YYYY/MM/DD format, Expiration Date field 111
SuperC extended 434
TSO 434
uncatalog 434
Z
View 434 Z (compress data set) line command, Data Set List utility
view action prompt 434 (option 3.4) 155
VSAM 434 z/OS system programmer applications 2
VTOC summary 433 z/OS UNIX
WE 434 execute command 285
WEW 434 file permissions 262, 267, 280
WS 434 z/OS UNIX commands
WV 434 z/OS UNIX directory list 290
WVW 434 z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility (option 3.17)
Workplace example 439 + (scroll indicator) 294
workplace function keys 434, 435 AA (auditor auditing) line command 260
Workplace option description 2 action bar choices 252
workplace settings 435 audit information 274
workplace settings command 434 B (browse) line command 261
WORKSIZE SuperC process statement 475 bypass z/OS UNIX File Edit Options panel 291
Workstation agent C or CO (copy out) line command 261
installation program 178 change column order and width 291
workstation connection 54 CI (copy in) line command 265
workstation tool integration program command time limit 291
action bar choices 61 confirm file delete option 250, 291
description 60 D (delete) line command 269
editing 62 device data information 274
extension mapping 63 Display Directory List option 250
startup 60 display permissions in octal format 291
updating 62 E (edit) line command 269
WPSET command 434 EA (edit) line command 269
WRITE parameter 393 EDIT primary command 286
Writer name 171 EU (edit) line command 269
writing a list to a list data set extended attributes information 274
data set list 161 FIND primary command 287
WS command 428 FS (file system) line command 270
WS command for member 104 I (information) line command 272
WS workplace command 434 L (List) line command 276
WV workplace command 434 LEFT primary command 287
WVW workplace command 434 line command prefix characters 257
line commands 259
X LOCATE primary command 288
MA (modify ACL) line command 276
X (execute) line command MF (modify format) line command 278
z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility (option 3.17) 285 MG(modify group) line command 279
X (print index listing) line command, Data Set List utility MM (modify mode) line command 280
(option 3.4) 156 MO (modify owner) line command 280
XT field, Data Set list utility 143 mode fields information 274
XT keyword, SORT command 165 MX (modify extended attributes) line command 281
N (new) line command 282
options 291
Y overview 247
Y2PAST SuperC process statement 478 owner information 273, 276
YES parameter path name substitution character 291
Active field 399, 401, 403 path names 294
BROWSE Output field 203 primary commands 286
Confirm Delete Request field, select 134 Print Directory List option 259
Replace like-named members field, select 125 R (rename) line command 283
Select pack option for “To” data set field 125 RA (add to personal data set list) line command 283
Specify additional search strings field, select 212 REFRESH primary command 288
Table available field 391 RESET primary command 288
restore default column arrangements 291

553
z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility (option 3.17) (continued)
RFIND primary command 287
RIGHT primary command 288
run command under login shell 257
SAVE primary command 289
scrollable fields for path names 294
set and save default line commands 292
SORT primary command 289
sorting 252
SU primary command 290, 316
super-user mode 294, 315
switching UIDs 294, 315
symbolic link information 275
time zone value 248
timeout setting 291
UA (user auditing) line command 284
V (view regular file) line command 285
VA (view ASCII file) line command 285
view options 252
VU (view UTF8 file) line command 285
width of filename column 291
X (execute) line command 285
z/OS UNIX commands 290
z/OS user applications 3
ZDLBLKSZ variable 146
ZDLCAT variable 147
ZDLCATNM variable 147
ZDLCDATE variable 147
ZDLCMD variable 147
ZDLCONF variable 147
ZDLDEV variable 147
ZDLDSN variable 147
ZDLDSNTP variable 147
ZDLDSORG variable 147
ZDLDST variable 148
ZDLDSX variable 148
ZDLEDATE variable 147
ZDLEXT variable 147
ZDLEXTX variable 147
ZDLLCMD variable 147
ZDLLRECL variable 147
ZDLMIGR variable 147
ZDLMSG variable 148
ZDLMVOL variable 147
ZDLNDSN variable 148
ZDLOVF variable 148
ZDLRDATE variable 148
ZDLRECFM variable 148
ZDLREF variable 148
ZDLSIZE variable 148
ZDLSIZET variable 148
ZDLSIZEX variable 148
ZDLSIZTX variable 148
ZDLSPACU variable 148
ZDLUSED variable 148
ZDLVOL variable 148
ZPARM system variable
parenthesis added to 183

554
IBM®

SC19-3628-30